SYNTAX
OF
THE MOODS AND TENSES
OF
THE GREEK VERB.
BY
WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, PH. D.,
ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY.
SEVENTH EDITION, REVISED.
BOSTON:
GINN AND HEATH.
1877,




lntored according to Act of rf'ngress, in the year 1800, by
W. W. GOODWIN,
oin.z Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of MbassachnasW
UNIVERSITY PRESS WELCH, BIGELOW, & Co,,
CAMBRIDGE.




PREFACE
TO   THE    FIFTH    EDITION.
SINCE the publication of the second edition of this work in
1865, several changes of expression and many corrections
have been made, which it is impossible to enumerate in full.
In preparing the fourth edition in 1870, and the fifth edition
in 1873, the work has been carefully revised; several sections
and notes have been rewritten, and some notes have been
added. The only changes which can affect references made to
the earlier editions (besides those mentioned on page v.) will
be found in ~ 10, 1, Remark; ~ 11, Note 7; ~ 18, 1, Note;
~ 19, Note 6; ~ 66, 2, Note 3; ~ 78, Note; and ~ 114, 2,
Note: these have been added since the second edition was
printed. Changes of expression and additions will be found
in the Remark before ~ 12; ~ 18, 1; ~ 23, 2, Note 3; ~ 37,
1; ~ 45, Note 7 (a); ~ 69, 1; ~ 70, 1; ~ 86, Note 1 (b);
~ 88, Remark; and ~ 89, 2, Note 1 and Remark 1; not to
mention others of less importance. The most important change
made in the fifth edition will be found in the statement of the
classification of conditional sentences (~ 48). This has been
adopted to make clearer the position of the present and past
" general suppositions" which have the subjunctive and optative in Greek (~ 51), as opposed to the present and past " particular suppositions " which have the simple indicative (~ 49, 1).
This distinction of these two classes in protasis is a striking
peculiarity of Greek syntax; most languages having a single
form of expression for both particular and general conditions
here, as the Greek has in other kinds of conditions. I cannot state too distinctly, that the chief peculiarity of my classi



PREFACE.
fication of conditional sentences consists in treating present
and past general conditions as closely allied to ordinary present and past conditions (being actually united with them in
one class in most languages, and occasionally even in Greek),
and as only remotely connected, at least in sense, with the
externally similar forms of future conditions which have the
subjunctive and optative. This relation is especially obvious
when we see that E&av 7rolj as a general supposition is occasionally represented by EL Trout, whereas earv rotI in a future
condition is equivalent to eL 7roa7eL in the indicative. I have
explained this at greater length in the Philologus, Vol.
XXVIII. pp. 741-745 (Gittingen, 1869), and in a paper
read before the American Philological Association in July,
1873. The change in ~ 48 has made necessary slight changes
of expression in ~12; ~13, 1; ~20; ~21, 1; ~ 49, 1; ~51;
~ 60; ~ 61, 1; and ~ 62. An index to the examples which
have been added in the later editions is given on page 242.
HARVARD COLLEGE, September, 1873.
The last-mentioned paper, in which the change in the
classification of conditional sentences made in the edition of
1873 is explained and the whole system is defended, may be
found in the Transactions of the American Philological Association for 1873, and in the Journal of Philology, Vol. V.,
No. 10.
September, 1875.




PREFACE
TO THE SECOND EDITION.
IN the first edition of the present work, published in 1860,
I attempted to give a plain and practical statement of the principles which govern the relations of the Greek Moods and
Tenses. Although many of these principles were established
beyond dispute, there were others (and these often the most elementary) upon which scholars had long held the most opposite
opinions. Upon many of these latter points I presented new
views, which seemed to me to explain the phenomena of the
language more satisfactorily than any that had been advanced.
The favorable opinion of scholars has confirmed my belief, that
some such attempt as I have made was demanded by the rising standard of classical scholarship in this country, and has
given me reason to hope that my labor has not been entirely a
thankless one.
The progress in grammatical science in this century has
been made step by step, like that in every other science; and
so it must long continue to be. He who imagines that every
important principle of Greek and Latin syntax is as well understood and as clearly defined as the rules for addition and
multiplication in Arithmetic, has not yet begun to learn. It is
no disparagement of even the highest scholars, therefore, to say
that they have left much of the most important work to be
lone by their successors.
The vague notions so often expressed on the Greek Moods,
even by scholars of otherwise high attainments, are in strange
contrast with the accuracy demanded by scientific scholarship
in other departments. If the study of language is to retain its
present place (or indeed any prominent place) in the mental




ii                     PREFACE.
discipline of youth, it must be conducted on strictly scientific
principles, and above all with scientific accuracy. On no other
ground can we defend the course of elementary grammatical
training, which is the basis of all sound classical scholarship.
An elementary grammar should be as short as the best scholar
can make it, but it should be as accurate as a chapter in Geometry.  To those who cannot appreciate the importance of
accuracy in scholarship, or even distinguish it from pedantry,
to those who cannot see the superiority of the Greek in this
respect over Chinese or Choctaw, it is useless to speak; but
surely no scholar can fail to see that an accurate knowledge of
the uses of the Greek Verb, with its variety of forms,- each expressing its peculiar shade of meaning, must be indispensable
to one who would understand the marvellous power of the
Greek language to express the nicest distinctions of thought.
One great cause of the obscurity which has prevailed on this
subject is the tendency of so many scholars to treat Greek syntax metaphysically rather than by the light of common sense.
Since Hermann's application of Kant's Categories of Modality
to the Greek Moods, this metaphysical tendency has been conspicuous in German grammatical treatises, and has affected
many of the grammars used in England and America more
than is generally supposed. The result of this is seen not
merely in the discovery of hidden meanings which no Greek
writer ever dreamed of, but more especially in the invention of
nice distinctions between similar or even precisely equivalent
expressions. A new era was introduced by Madvig, who has
earned the lasting gratitude of scholars by his efforts to restore
Greek syntax to the dominion of common sense. Madvig is
fully justified in boasting that he was the first to give full and
correct statements on such elementary matters as the meaning
of the Aorist Optative and Infinitive, and the construction of o'r&
and 0s in oratio obliqua; although Professor Sophocles distinctly recognized the same principles in his Grammar, published
later in the same year with Madvig's (1847). I can hardly
express my great indebtedness to Madvig's Syntax der griechischen Sprache, and to his Bemerkungen iiber einige Puncte der
griechischen FVortfugungslehre (in a supplement to the Philologs, Vol. II.). The works of this eminent scholar have aided




PREFACE.                     ili
me not only by the material which they have afforded as a
basis for the present work, but also by the valuable suggestions
with which they abound.
Next to Madvig, I must acknowledge my obligations to
Kriiger's Griechische Sprachlehre, which has everywhere sup.
plied me with important details and most excellent examples.
I have been frequently indebted to the other grammarians,
who need not be specially mentioned. Baumlein's Untersuchungen iiber die griechischen Modi reached me after the printing of the first edition was begun. I have often been indebted
to his valuable collection of examples, and have derived many
hints from his special criticisms; I regret that I cannot agree
with the general principles to which he refers the uses of each
mood, especially as his criticisms of the prevailing German theories on this subject are most satisfactory and instructive. I am
indebted to the personal advice and suggestions of my learned
colleague, Professor Sophocles, in the preparation of both
editions, for information which no books could have supplied.
I must acknowledge the following special obligations. The
notes on the tenses of the Indicative in Chapter II. are based
mainly on Kruger, ~ 53. The chapters on the Infinitive and
Participle are derived chiefly from Madvig's Syntax (Chapters
V. and VI.), and partly from Kruger, ~ 55, ~ 56. The note
on the Future Optative after ownc, &c. (~ 26, Note 1) contains
the substance of Madvig's Bemerkungen, pp. 27 - 29; and the
account of the various constructions that follow verbs of hindrance and prevention (~ 95, 2 and 3) is based on the same
work, pp. 47 - 66. The statement of the principles of indirect
discourse (Chapter IV. Section IV.) was written in nearly its
present form before Madvig's Syntax reached me; and I was
strongly confirmed in the views there expressed, by finding
that they agreed almost exactly with those of Mladvi.  I was
anticipated by him in my statement of the occasional use of the
Present Optative to represent the Imperfect, and in my quotation of DEM. in Onet. I. 869, 12 to illustrate it. I am entirely
indebted to him, however, for the statement of the important
principle explained in ~ 74, 2.
It remains to state what new material the present work professes to offer to scholars.  The most important and most




iv                      PREFACE.
radical innovation upon the ordinary system will be found in
the classification of conditional sentences (~ 48), with its development in the rules that follow. I have explained the grounds
of this classification at some length in the Proceedings of the
American Academy, Vol. VI. p. 363, and will therefore merely
allude to them here. The great difficulty (or rather the impossibility) of defining the force of the Subjunctive in protasis
as distinguished from the Present Indicative, has arisen from
neglect of the distinction between particular and general suppositions. When this is recognized, the distinction between the
Subjunctive and the Present Indicative is seen to be entirely
one of time; whereas all the common distinctions based on
possibility, certainty, &c. will apply only to select examples,
which of course are easily found to illustrate them. In the
first edition, I could not persuade myself to abandon the old
doctrines so completely as to exclude the common distinction
between the Subjunctive and the Optative in protasis, -that
the former implies a "prospect of decision," while the latter
does not. Subsequent experience has convinced me that there
is no more distinction between av TOVTro 7roLfy and el TOVro IroOlr)
than between the English if he shall do this and if he should
do this; and I think every one must see that here there is no
distinction but that of greater or less vividness of expression.
The simple fact that both could be expressed by the Latin si
hoc faciat is a strong support of this view.
The principles of conditional sentences being first settled, I
have attempted to carry out the analogy between these and
conditional relative sentences more completely.  It seems to
me that it is only by adopting the classification of conditional
sentences which I have given, that the true nature of the analogous relative sentences can be made clear. (See ~ 60, ~ 61,
~ 62.)  Upon a right classification of conditional sentences
depends also the right understanding of the forms used to, express a wish (~ 82, ~ 83).
The frequent use of the Subjunctive with 7va, 7roc, &c.,
after past tenses, instead of the Optative, of which I had never
seen a satisfactory explanation, is here explained on the principle of oratio obliqua. (See ~ 44, 2; ~ 77, 2.) The construction of the Infinitive with verbs like Xpjv and Mlet, forming




PREFACE.                           V
an apodosis, is explained in the present edition on a new prin.
ciple, which (it is hoped) will remove many of the difliculties
which the old explanation did not reach.   (See ~ 49, 2, Note 3
and Remarks.)    In the first edition, the usual distinction be*tween the constructions that follow ov6 u' was adopted with
hesitation, including Elmsley's punctuation, by which the second person of the Future in prohibitions with ov IuI is made
interrogative. In this edition both constructions are explained
more satisfactorily upon the same principle. (See ~ 89, 1 and 2,
with Notes and Remarks.) It is hoped that the new statement
of the force of the Perfect Infinitive, in ~ 18, 3, (a) and (b) of
this edition, will meet the difficulties which that tense presents.
The statement in the former edition was very defective.
It may seem strange to some that no general definitions of
the Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative are attempted in the
first chapter. I have rather taken warning from the numerous
unsuccessful attempts that have been made to include all the
uses of these moods in comprehensive definitions, and have
preferred merely to illustrate their various uses by simple examples at the outset, leaving the explanations to their proper
place in the book. For one, I am not ashamed to admit that I
cannot propose a definition comprehensive enough to include
all the examples in ~ 1, ~ 2, or ~ 3, which shall still be limited
enough to be called a definition.
Besides the special changes already mentioned, the work has
been subjected to a thorough revision, so that in many parts
the new   edition might claim   to be an entirely new work.*
* Notwithstanding the changes in the second edition, very few alterations
have been made in numbering the paragraphs or notes. The following are
the only changes (except a few omissions) which can affect references already made to the first edition: - ~ 18, 8 is subdivided into (a) and (b); ~ 18,
3, Rem. takes the place of ~ 18, 4, Note; ~ 24, Notes 1 and 2 are rearranged;
~ 37, Note 2 is omitted, and N. 3 is changed to N. 2; ~ 45, N. 2 is subdivided
into (a) and (b); in ~ 49, 2, N. 3, the present divisions (c), (d), and (e) were
included in (b); ~ 64, 1 and 2 are rearranged; in ~ 92, 2, Note 1 is changed to
Remark; ~ 109, N. 9 was included in N. 8.
The following additions have been made in the second edition: - ~ 49, 2,
N. 6 (b); ~ 50, 1, Rein. 2; ~ 52, 2, Rem.; ~ 53, N. 4; ~ 64, Rem. 2; ~ 65, 3,
N. 2; ~ 65, 4; ~ 69, 5; ~ 71, Rem. 2; ~ 89, 2, Rem. 1 and 2; ~ 92, 2, N. 1;
~ 95, 3, Rem.; ~ 108, N. 4 (b); ~ 112, 1, Rem.; ~ 112, 2, Rem.; ~ 113, Rem.
after N. 10. The following have been materially changed in subject or in
substance in the second edition:- ~ 25, 1, N. 5 (b); ~ 41, N. 4; ~ 43, Rem.;
Remarks 1 and 2 after ~ 49, 2, N. 3; ~ 82, Rem. 2; ~ 89, 2, Notes 1 and 2.




t1~Vi  ~PREFACE.
Especially, the collection of examples has been revised and
greatly enlarged, with the object of illustrating every variety
of each construction from as wide a range of classic authors as
possible. An index to these examples (more than 2,300 in
number) is added to this edition. This index includes those'
which are merely cited, as well as those actually quoted, many
of the former being quite as important as the latter. In the
new edition, the matter printed in the two larger types has
been reduced, and made as concise as was consistent with
accuracy, while that printed in the smallest type has been
greatly increased. It should be understood that only the firstmentioned portion of the work is intended for use as a grammatical text-book, while the notes and remarks in the smallest
type are intended only for reference: with this view, the latter
are often extended to a greater length than would otherwise
be justifiable.
The Dramatists are cited by Dindorf's lines, except the
fragments, which follow the numbers in Nauck's edition;
Plato, by the pages of Stephanus; and Demosthenes, by
Reiske's pages and lines. In the Index to the Examples,
however, the sections of Bekker's German editions of Demosthenes have been added in each case, to facilitate reference.
Other citations will be easily understood.
CAMBRIDGE, June, 1865.




CONTENTS.
CHAPTER I.
GENERAL VIEW OF THE MOODS.
PAC3
~ 1. The five Moods...                1
~~ 2-4. Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative..  1, 2
~~ 5- 7. Imperative, Infinitive, Participle, and Verbal in -Tros 2, 3
CHAPTER II.
USE OF THE TENSES.
~ 8, 1. The seven Tenses.. 
2. Primary and Secondary Tenses            3
~ 9. Relative and absolute Time...... 3
Present and Imperfect.
A. In the Indicative.
~ 10, 1. Present Indicative.....      4
2. Historic Present.                      6
~ 11. Imperfect.....              6
B. Present in the Dependent Moods.
REM.-Distinction between Present and Aorist.   8
~ 12. Present Subjunctive.......   9
~ 13, 1. Present Optative, not in indirect discourse. 10
2. Present Optative in indirect discourse:(a.) Representing a Present Indicative..  11
(b.) Representing Pres. Subj. (in questions of doubt) 11
~ 14. Present Imperative....            12
~ 15. Present Infinitive: -
1. In its ordinary use (indefinite in time)..12
2. In indirect discourse....    13
3. As Imperfect Infinitive....         15
~ 16. Present Participle: —
1. As Present........     16
2. As Imperfect.....17




Viii                  CONTENTS.
Perfect and Pluperfect.
A. In the Indicative.
17, 1 Perfect Indicative.......   18
2. Pluperfect Indicative                        18
N. 2. Compound forms (eldt and?v with Perf. Part)  18
B. Perfect in the Dependent Moods.
~ 18. Relations of the Perfect to the Present.     19
1. Perfect Subjunctive and Optative.           20
2. Perfect Imperative.....21
3. Perfect Infinitive.          2, 23
4. Perfect Participle....... 23
Aorist.
A. In the Indicative.
~ 19. Aorist Indicative...                       24
N. 2. Distinction between Aorist and Imperfect.  * 24
B. Aorist in the Dependent Mloods.
~ 20. Aorist Subjunctive...26
N. 1. Aorist Subjunctive as Future Perfect.  26, 27
~ 21, 1. Aorist Optative not in indirect discourse.  28
2. Aorist Optative in indirect discourse: -
(a.) Representing an Aorist Indicative.  9
(b.) Representing an interrogative Aor. Subj..  9
~ 22. Aorist Imperative..                          30
~ 23. Aorist Infinitive:1. In its ordinary use...     30
2. In indirect discourse....32
N. 2. After verbs of hoping, promising, &c...  32
~ 24. Aorist Participle....                     34
N. 1. With XavOBvoa, o  o, &c...   34
N. 2. With 7rTplteov, 7rel8ov, &c...        35
Future.
~ 25, 1. Future Indicative.......         36
N. 5. Future with force of Imperative.        37
N. 6. Future denoting present intention        37
2. Periphrastic Future (with EU'XAo).      38
~ 26. Future Optative......              38
N. 1. After Orcos and....         39
~ 27. Future Infinitive.....41
N. 1. Distinction between Future and Present or Aorist 41
N. 2. Future used for Present or Aorist..   41, 42
N. 3. Future after verbs of hoping, promising, &c..  43
~ 28. Future Participle....                   43
~ 29. Future Perfect....... 43




CONTENTS.                   IX
N. 3. Expressed by Perfect Participle and ro-opat.  44
N. 6. In the dependent moods..         44
Gnomic and Iterative Tenses.
~ 30, 1. Gnomic Aoris* and Perfect.               15
N. 5. Gnomic Aorist in Infinitive and Participle.46, 47
N. 6. Gnomic Perfect in Infinitive... 47
2. Iterative Imperfect and Aorist with av...  47
NOTES. -Iterative Aorist in -oKco, -OaKd-COv.  47, 48
Dependence of Moods and Tenses.
~ 31, 1- 2. General Rules.......   48
Distinction between Primary and Secondary Tenses:
~ 32. In the Indicative....      49, 50
~ 33. In the Subjunctive and Imperative.       50
~ 34. In the Optative..                      50-53
~ 35. In the Infinitive and Participle... 53, 54
CHAPTER III.
THE PARTICLE -AN.
~ 36, 1-2. Two uses of av....54
~ 37, 1. AYv not used with the Present and Perfect Indicative. 55
2.'AV with Future Indicative in early Poets.  55
N. 1. In Attic Greek (rare)..            56
3. "Av with Secondary Tenses of the Indicative.  56
~ 38, 1. "Av with the Subjunctive in Protasis, &c...  56
2.'Av with the Subjunctive in Apodosis (Epic).  57
~ 39. "Av with the Optative......57
~ 40.'Av not used with the Imperative..57
~ 41.'Av with the Infinitive and Participle.. 57-61
1. Present..... 58
2. Perfect.....59
3. Aorist....                   59
4. Future..                                60
~ 42, 1-4. Position and repetition of av....61-64
CHAPTER IV.
USE OF THE MOODS.
SECTION I.
FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER'Iva, QS, OirTS,'O/pa, AND M'.
~ 43. Classification....65-67
N. 2. Negative Particle......61




X:                 C~ ~CONTENTS.
A. Pure Final Clauses.
~ 4, 1. Subjunctive and Optative after TLva,, a,,,,cW I  &c.  67
N. 1. Future Indicative after oTrcow, &c...    68
N. 2 and 3.'Av in Final Clauses....68-70
2. Subjunctive after secondary tenses...70
3. Secondary tenses of the Indicative after 7va, &c..  72
B. Clauses with On7rw and'0rcov a after Verbs of S t r iv i ng, &c.
~ 45. Future Indicative, &c. after 0orCo...73
N. 2. Homeric construction after 5pao'oiaL, &c.. 76, 77
N. 7. Elliptical expressions....    78, 79
N. 8 (and foot-note). Dawes's Canon on a.rwo, &c. 79, 80
C. Clauses with Mi after Verbs of Fe a r i n g, &c.
~ 46. Subjunctive and Optative after...        80
N. 1. Future Indicative after irq.                82
N. 2. Elliptical expressions..                 83
N. 5. Present and past tenses of the Indic. after.iu 83-85
SECTION II.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
~ 47, 1. Protasis and Apodosis explained..    87
2. MAv or KE in Protasis and Apodosis                87
3 (and Note). Negative particles...                88
~48. Classification of Conditional Sentences...88-92
I. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditional Sentences.
A. Present and Past Conditions.
49, 1. Simple Indicative in Protasis and Apodosis.. 92
N. 3. Future Indicative expressing present intention  93
2. Secondary tenses of the Indic. (cond. not fulfilled).  93
N. 2. Omission of lv in Apodosis...    96
N. 3. Verbs of necessity, &c. without av, in Apod. 97-100
N. 6. Homeric Optative for Indicative... 101, 102
B. Future Conditions.
~ 50, 1. Subjunctive with ilav in Protasis..     102
N. 1. Future Indicative in Protasis...   103
N. 2. Homeric peculiarities...... 104
N. 3. El for adv with Subjunctive in Attic (rare).  105
2. Optative in both Protasis and Apodosis. 105
N. 1. Omission of Av in Apodosis...   106
N. 2. Ayv with Optative in Protasis....107
II. Present and Past General Suppositions.
51. Subjunctive and Optative in Protasis.. 107, 108
N, 3. Indicative after  s.....   109




CONTENTS.                         Xi
Ellipsis and Substitution in Protasis or Apodosis.
~ 52, 1. Protasis implied in another clause, or expressed in a
Participle or other word.. 110
N. 1 and 2. Ellipsis of Verb of the Protasis. 111, 112
2. Protasis suppressed.                             112
N. Optative with a'v like Imperat. or Fut. Ind..  113
~ 53. Apodosis expressed in Infinitive or Participle. 113
NOTES.-    l lipsis of the Apodosis... 114-116
Mixed Constructions.- Irregularities.
~ 54, 1-3. Protasis and Apodosis differing in form.  116-119
~ 55, 1. Two or more Protases with the same Apodosis. 119
2. Apodosis in a dependent construction..        119
~ 56. El after verbs expressing wonder, indignation, &c.. 120
~ 57. As in Apodosis........   121
SECTION III.
RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
~ 58, 1. Relative and Temporal Words.. 121
2. Definite and Indefinite Antecedent.           121, 122
3. Negative particles..122
A. Relative with a Definite Antecedent.
~ 59. Indicative after Relative with Definite Antecedent.  122
N. 1. Other constructions.            123
B. Relative with an Indefinite Antecedent.
~ 60, 1, 2. Conditional Relative explained..    123-125
3.'Av in Conditional Relative clauses.             125
~ 61. Four forms of Conditional Relative clauses corresponding to the four forms of ordinary protasis. 125 - 1 29
1. Simple Indicative (like ~ 49, 1)...           125
2. Secondary tenses of the Indicative (like ~ 49, 2).  126
3. Subjunctive (like ~ 50, 1).             127
4. Optative (like ~ 50, 2)..                        128
~ 62. Conditional Relative clauses with general suppositions:Subjunctive and Optative (like ~ 51)... 129
N. 1. Indicative in these sentences (after orts).  131
N. 3. Subjunctive in Homeric similes... 132
~ 63, 1. Relative without av, with the Subjunctive..   133
2, 3, 4. Peculiarities in Cond. Relative clauses. 133 — 135
5. Parenthetical Relative clauses (o rt iror' El(rr).  135
Assimilation in Conditional Relative Clauses.
~ 64, 1. Assimilation after Subjunctive or Optative.   135
2. Assimilation after secondary tenses of Indicative.  136
Relative Clauses expressing a Purpose or Result.
~ 65, 1. Future Indicative after Relatives..    137




lii                     CCONTENTS
N. 2. Subjunctive and Optative in Homer..   138
N. 5. Relative clauses expressing a result...140
2. Future Indicative after Ci' c, E'0' cT...   140
3. Indicative after  re....             140
4. Causal Relative Sentences....        141
Temporal Particles signifying Until and Before
that.
A. "Eos,'Ea-TrAXpL, MexPt, Ei0o'Kce,#"Opa, Until..~ 66, 1. "Ews, &c. with past tenses of Indicative... 142
2.'Ecov aiv, &c. with Subj. "Eco, &c. with Optative 142, 143
3. "Eos, &c. with secondary tenses of Indicative. 143
4. "ECs, &c. with Subj. and Opt. after general statements 144
B. riptv, Until, Before that.
67. Finite Moods and Infinitive after irplv..         144
1. Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative after Irpv.  145
2. Infinitive after 7rplv (see ~ 106)..        145
N. 3. IIpiv I', Tporepv, 7rpo0'e V q....  146
SECTION IV.
INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
~ 68, 1. Direct and Indirect Quotations distinguished. 147
2. Manner of introducing Indirect Quotations.       147
3. Indirect Questions.......147
General Principles.
~ 69, 1. Principles of Indirect Quotations after orT and 5D,
and of Indirect Questions....     148
2. Secondary tenses of the Indicative.               148
3. Infinitive and Participle...148
4.'Av in Indirect Discourse..                 149
5. Negative particles in Indirect Discourse...149
Indirect Quotation of Simple Sentences.
~ 70. Indicative and Optative after ort or Ws, and in Indirect
Questions: -
1. Indicative after primary tenses.                 149
2. Optative or Indicative after secondary tenses.. 150
REM. 1 and 2. Both Moods in the same quotation. 151, 152
N. 1. (a.) Imperfect and Pluperfect retained..  152
(b.) Present Optative as Imperfect..      153
N. 3. Independent Optative (often with yap)..   154
~ 71. Interrogative Subjunctive in Indirect Questions. 154, 155
~ 72. Indicative or Optative with i'v in Indirect Discourse.  156
~ 73, 1. Infinitive, with or without a/v, in Indirect Discourse. 157
2. Participle, with or without lv, in Indirect Discourse  159




CONTENTS.                      XiL
Indirect Quotation of Compound Sentences.
74, 1. Quotation of dependent clauses with a Subjunctive, or
a Present, Perfect, or Future Indicative..  160
N. 1. Mixed constructions.                       162
2. Quotation of dependent clauses with Imperfect, Pluperfect, or Aorist Indicative....  164
~ 75. Dependent clauses with secondary tenses of Indicative  165
~ 76. Dependent clauses with Optative...165
Single Dependent Clauses in Indirect Quotation.
~ 77, 1. (a.) Clauses depending on an Infinitive after verbs of
commanding, &c. - (b.) Causal sentences stating a
cause assigned by others. - (c.) Clauses after el or
ecv, in case that. —(d.) Relative and temporal
clauses expressing a past intention. - (e.) Relative
sentences containing the thought of another.  166
2. Same principle applied to clauses after vay, oJrrS, &c.  169'Oircs and 0' in Indirect Quotations.
~ 78, 1. "Orcos for Ort or os. 2. Homeric o for orT..170
NOTE.- -0ovoveKa and OJVEKa for Tt...    171
~ 79. "Or before Direct Quotations..171
SECTION V.
CAUSAL SENTENCES.
~ 80. Causal particles...        71
~81, 1. Indicative in Causal sentences.                  171
2. Optative after secondary tenses, to express a cause
assigned by others.....      172
N. 1. Cause expressed by an Apodosis..   173
SECTION VI.
EXPRESSION OF A WISH.
REM. - Two classes of Wishes...   173
~ 82. Optative in Wishes.. 173, 174
~ 83, 1. Secondary tenses of Indicative in Wishes..  176
2.'Q1fXo o with the Infinitive....176, 177
REM. - Greek and Latin expressions compared.   177
SECTION VII.
IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS, EXHORTATIONS, AND PROHIBITIONS.
~ 84. Imperative.. 178
~ 85. First person of Subjunctive in exhortations..   179
~ 86. Pres. Imperat. or Aor. Subj. in prohibitions with zu. 180




Xiv                      CONTENTS.
SECTION VIII.
SUBJUNCTIVE (LIKE FUT. IND.) IN INDEPENEENT SENTENCES.
-INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.-Ov HLf WITH         SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE.
~ 87. Independent Subjunctive in Homer. 181
NOTE.- With dv, in apodosis.                     182
~ 88. Interrogative Subjunctive (with or without S3oviXe). 182
~ 89. Double Negative, o/ ju:1. With Subj. (rarely Fut. Ind.), as emphatic Future. 184
2. With Future Indicative in prohibitions..      185.
CHAPTER V.
THE INFINITIVE.
~ 90. infinitive as a Verbal Noun...        188
~ 91. Infinitive as Subject....188
~ 92. Infinitive as Object:1. Not in indirect discourse.                       189
2. In indirect discourse...              192
N. 3. Infinitive after Relatives (by assimilation)  193
~ 93, 1 and 2. Infin. after Adjectives and Adverbs.   193-195
~ 94. Infinitive (with Article) after Prepositions...  197
~ 95, 1. Infinitive as Genitive or Dative..           197
2. Two constructions after verbs of hindrance, &c..  198
N. 1. Negative particles. Double Negative, At) ov. 200
3. Infinitive with ro fIa', after expressions implying prevention, omission, or denial..      201
~ 96. Infinitive and its adjuncts preceded by...   202
~ 97. Infinitive expressing a purpose...          203
N. 4. Infin. after Comparative and 1, than..  204
~ 98, 1. Infinitive after aore (result).....205
2. Infin. after oTre (condition or purpose)...  205
N. 1.'fsl for &o-re, with Infinitive.. 206
~ 99. Infinitive after eq' Zu or e+b' Tre...          207
~ 100. Absolute Infinitive (generally with Ws or oaov). 207
N. 1.'OXiyov (86Fi), almost, little short of..  208
N. 2.'EKCij elvaL, TO vv Lv at, &C... 208
~ 101. Infinitive used imperatively...                208
~ 102. Infinitive in wishes (like the Optative)...209
~ 103. Infinitive in laws, treaties, proclamations, &c.  209
~ 104. Infinitive expressing surprise or indignation. 209
~ 105. Infinitive in narration.....   210
~ 106, Infinitive after 7rphv.. 210,211
NOTES. -Ipiv rj, 7rporepov 7, rpocO rp', 7rdpor.  211, 212
REM. —Tenses of the Infinitive.... 212




CONTENTS.                        XV
CHAPTER VI.
THE PARTICIPLE.
~ 1-07. Three uses of the Participle.. 213
~ 108, 1. Participle as Adjective.                       213
2. Participle (as Adjective) used substantively. 213
~ 109. Partic. defining the circumstances of an action: -
1-4. Time, means, manner, cause, &c...            216
5 - 7. Purpose, condition, opposition, &c.. 217
8. Attendant circumstances..                      218
NOTES 1-5. Adverbs, &c. with Part. of ~ 109. 218- 221
N. 7. (a.) Partic. in Rel. or Interrog. sentences. 221
(b.) TI F1aOw;v; TT 7raOwv; wherejbre.  221,222
~ 110, 1. Genitive Absolute...                     222
2. Accusative Absolute. 224
~ 111. Gen. or Accus. Absol. and ordinary Partic. combined  225
~ 112. Participle with verbs (like Infinitive): -
1. With verbs signifying to begin, to cease, &c... 226
2. With 8tarEXc, XavOdav, rvy Xdvo,  idvw, &c..  ~  227
~113. Partic. in indirect discourse (after verbs signifying to see,
to perceive, to know, &c.)......229
N. 1. Participle with 8\X&OS (avepo&) Ept...   230
N. 6. Participle with avvoloa and ovyytyv0T0aKO). 230
N. 10.'Ds with these Participles...   231, 232
CHAPTER VII.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -vor.
~ 114. Two constructions of the Verbal in -T'os:1. Personal construction....233
2. Impersonal construction....     233, 234
APPENDIX I....                    235
APPENDIX I.                                               240
INDEX TO EXAMPLES..... 243
ENGLISH INDEX.....                  257
GREEX INDEX......                             261








CHAPTER I.
GENERAL VIEW       OF TEE MOODS.
~ 1. THE Greek verb has five Moods, the Indicative,
Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive.     The
first four, as opposed to the Infinitive, are called finite
moods.
~ 2. The Indicative is used in simple, absolute assertions; as rypaet, he writes; eypalev, he wrote;?ypafet,
he will write; yje'paafev, he has written.
The Indicative is used also to express various other
relations, which   the   following   examples will illustrate:
El TTOVrO daXE (Crr, Xaip o, if thisis true, Irejoice. El y p a  r v,.l X o v av, if he had written, I should have come. El roTro 7r o  a- e t,
KahX&s EELt, if he shall do this, it will be well.'E7rrtLeXelra onsxoo Toroo
e v ta- Te a L, he takes care that this shall happen. El  pe f K r 6 E v as,
Wc /l7j,7oTrorro    ro ltr a a, 0 that thou hadst killed me, that I might
never have done this! E1'e TOTro a\XlI6s qv, 0 that this were true.
Aeiyet s TOVTO arX10Es e crTr L, he says that this is true. EL'7rev OrL TVTO
~r p a $ e L, he said that he would do this.'EporTa rg e y p a + a!u e v, he
asks what we wrote.
These constructions will be explained in Chapter IV. They are
sufficient to show the impossibility of including all the uses of the
Indicative in one definition. Any definition which is to include
these must be comprehensive enough to include even the Imperfect
and Pluperfect Subjunctive in Latin; for ei'ypai+ev, iX0ov av is
equivalent to si scripsisset, venissem. It would be equally impossible
to give a single definition sufficiently precise to be of any use in
practice, including all the uses of the Subjunctive or Optative.
~ 3.   The various    uses   of the   Subjunctive -in
clauses denoting a purpose or object, after Ylva, pr, &c.;
in conditional, relative, and temporal sentences; and
1                             A




2              GENERAL ViEW     OF THE MOODS.              [~ 3.
in certain independent sentences — may be seen by the
following examples: -
"EpXeratL va TOVTo'i 7, he is coming that he may see this.  o^ELrat,t Touro / yevr7 rat, he fears lest this may happen.'Ev ro7Vro WrolEl'
3ov X rat, wvvo-cTrat, if he shall wish to do this, he will be able.
O TL av 7roLeLv;Jo VX \r T a t vv^oErTat, whatever he shall wish to do he will
be able (to do).'Ecav rt 7roLeiv j3 o V X r a L, TOVrO 7rOEL, if he (ever)
wishes to do anything, he (always) does it. "O L av 7roLteiv 3fio VrXTa
7roitc, whatever he wishes (at any time) to do he (always) does.'Orav
TOVTro  oTLiE  3 o X 7 ra, avvro'oTcra  when he shall wish to do this, he
will be able. "Orav 7roEiEv TL 3 3o X r ra, 7roLL, whenever he wishes to
do anything, he (always) does it. "I co fe v, let us go. Mji 0 a v ao' - t,r 
do not wonder. O  r   TOVTO y7 rJq Tra t, this will (surely) not happen.
Ti EL T7r; what shall I say 
~ 4. The various uses of the Optative — in clauses
denoting a purpose or object after L'va, p, &c.; in conditional, relative, and temporal sentences; in indirect
quotations and questions; and in independent sentences
(in  apodosis with av, or in expressions of a wish) -
may be seen by the following examples: —'HX0e EVa TroIr' L o i, he came that he might see this.'EDo3eTro /LB
roVro yevo tro, he feared lest this might happen.  El TOUrO 7rotLiL
o v o T r o, 8 v v a r', if he should wish to do this, he would be able.'0 Tr 7roeiLv  o VXoLO o  a Lr' lv, whatever he should wish to do, he
would be able (to do).  E'i T 7-rotELY oU Xot ro,'  ro,  iTOVT, f he
(ever) wished to do anything, he (always) did it.   0O TrL rotElv
B o v X o  7 r o  roie, whatever he wished (at any time) to do he (always)
did. lOre ToVTo 7rotLEv So VXo 0T,  V V a r' o  v, whenever he should
wish to do this, he would be able. "07- 7rOLeV Trt 3soVXoLTo, e7rolEl,
whenever he wished to do anything, he (always) did it. EElFev ol TrOVro
7r o o LI?, he said that he was doing this. EbrCE ort roTro ro T   r o' e  v,
he said that he had done this. Elrrev o'r rOVTO 7ro tL -9, he said that
he would do this.'Hpi&rsv  l 7r o l O  (7r  r a, t  or r o t o- o), they
asked what he was doing (had done, or would do).
A U v aT r' TOVTO rrotel, he would be able to do this. El'e L TaOrara
r craoxo l, 0 that they may not suffer these things'A r o X o t T o,
may he perish! MI roTro TOyvorro, may this not happen!
NOTE. For a discussion of the relation of the Optative to the
Subjunctive, see Appendix.
~ 5.   The Imperative is used to express a command,
exhortation, entreaty, or prohibition.
~ 6. The Infinitive expresses the simple idea of the




~ 9.]            USE OF THE TENSES.                 3
verb without restriction of person or number, and may
be considered as a verbal noun with many attributes of
a verb.
~ 7.  To the Moods may be added the Participle,
and the Verbal in -7TEo  or -vEov. Both are verbal adjectives.
CHAPTER II.
USE OF THE TENSES.
~ 8. 1. THERE are seven Tenses, —the Present, Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect, Aorist, Future, and Future
Perfect. The Imperfect and Pluperfect occur only in
the Indicative; the Futures are wanting in the Subjunctive and Imperative.
2. These tenses are divided into primary and secondary; the primary tenses being those which refer to present or future time, and the secondary being those which
refer to past time.
The primary tenses of the Indicative are the Present,
Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect.    The secondary
tenses are the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist.
NOTE. This distinction will be more fully explained at the end
of this chapter, ~~ 31-35.
~ 9. In speaking of the time denoted by any verb, we must
distinguish between time which is present, past, or future with
reference to the time of the speaker or writer (that is, time
absolutely present, &9.), and time which is present, past, or
future with reference to the time of some other verb with which
the verb in question is connected (that is, time relatively present, &c.). Thus, when we say rootro cXr)es EO-rtv, this is true,
airli denotes time present with reference to the time of speak.




4                 USE OF THE TENSES.                  [~ 9.
ing: but when we say AXe(~ TO; Tro aX7,Oe eCvat, or eEtecv 0oT, TOVT
aXtres O-rrTv (or e'l), he said that this was true (i. e. he said
"this is true "), we use the Present tense; but this tense here
denotes time present with reference to the time of the leading
verb,'XFEE, or time absolutely past and only relatively present.
The same distinction is seen between the Future in Troro
yevroeraz, this will happen, and in EXE  7TOVTO y7ev(oefa L OPa or 0
yEvraeTra (yevio-otro), he said that this would happen; where the
Future in the first case denotes time absolutely future, in the
other cases time only relatively future, which may even be
absolutely past.  Again, in TroVro  ye'vero, this happened, the
Aorist is absolutely past; but in LX;e<e TOTro yev;ea9t, or AXe;ev
OTr TO0TO eyEVETO (or yE;voto), he said that this had happened, it
denotes time past with reference to the time of lXeXev, which
makes it doubly past.
It is to be noticed as a special distinction between the Greek
and English idioms, that the Greek oftener uses its tenses to
denote merely relative time.  Thus, in the examples given
above, we translate the Greek Presents etvat and eo-r after
CXeXe by our Imperfect was; the Futures yevoja-c-ral and yev4aoTEr by would happen; and the Aorists yeverO8at and iyevero by
had happened. This principle is especially observed in the
Indicative, Optative, and Infinitive in indirect quotations; in
final and object clauses after Iva, orowr, &c.; and usually in the
Participle.
PRESENT AND IMPERFECT.
A. In the Indicative.
~ 10. 1. The Present Indicative represents an action
as going on now; as 7padfwo, I write, or I am writing.
REMARK. A single important exception occurs when the Present
Indicative in indirect discourse denotes time present relatively ta
the leading verb. See above, ~ 9; and ~ 70, 2.
NOTE 1. As the limits of such an action on either side of
the present moment are not defined, the Present may express
a customary or repeated action, or a general'truth. E. g.




~ 10, 1.]          PRESENT INDICATIVE.                       5
IXolov els AiXov'AOqvaioL r;,u ir o v a- L v, the A thenians send a ship
to Delos (every year). PLAT. Phaed. 58 A. TiKT r e  Tr KopoL  iipLv,
Orav KaKo o'XMos efrr7ra, satiety begets insolence, whenever prosperity
follows the wicked. THEOGN. 153.'Ev XPOv a ir o  0 iv e T TO radp3oS
advpon7rortv. AESCH. Agam. 857.
NOTE 2. The Present denotes merely the continuance of
an action, without reference to its completion: sometimes, however, it is directly implied by the context that the action is not
to be completed, so that the Present denotes an attempted action.  Especially, 8I8oo/u, in the sense I offer, and,rdco, I try
to persuade, are used in this sense. E. g.
Nuv 8' Ata T' avrtKa 7roXXa 8t 8 o, he offers many things. I1. IX,
519. HeI E  ov a  vf as evavria Kal TOLs vOMiotL KaL T  f &KaiLo +qiblorarOata, they are trying to persuade you to vote contrary both to the laws
and to justice. ISAE. de Cleon. Hered. ~ 26.
This signification is much more common in the Imperfect. See
~ 11, N. 2, and the examples.
NOTE 3. The Present is often used with expressions denoting past time, especially,rdXan, in the sense of a Perfect and
Present combined. E. g.
Kervov XVv e vco T7raXat, I have been tracking him a long time (and
still continue it). SOPH. Aj. 20. Ov 7ra iXaL a-o X yo or TravTrov LbT.l
elvat; i. e. have I not long ago told you, (and do I not still repeat,)
that I call it the same thing? PLAT. Gorg. 489 C. So IloXv Xp6vov
Troro 7T o &.
So in Latin, Jam dudum loquor.
NOTE 4. The Presents oKw, I am come, and o'lot.a, I am
gone, are used in the sense of the Perfect. An approach to
the signification of the Perfect is sometimes found in such
Presents as qeyao, in the sense I am banished, ailcrKolat, lam
captured, VLKCad and Kpareo, lam victorious, Trrdoia&, I am conquered, a(ZKW,I I have been unjust (I am -a 8 K  o  S).  So Kco and
Kalv) in Homer, with o'AXvpua and similar verbs and sometimes
TiKTa in the Tragedians.  E. g.
OEtaLOTOKX\rLs jK O raph ae, I, Themistocles, am come to thee. Truc.
I, 137. OLXFratL El ciaa 8iav, he is gone to the divine sea. Ia. XV,
223.'IXlov dXao-Ko/LYo u, Ilium having been captured. THUC. VI, 2.
So HDT. I, 85. El 7rdivraraara EXvalveTO ro iS o0Xo0s, eoA dvpae'rpeE,
ri A iAoa-rOE;vqSr  d LKEi; DEM. Cor. 327, i. Ilvpycov oXXvI evwv vi
vavcriv f3av, I embarked after the towers had been destroyed. EuR. Iph.
T. 1108. So dvolyopevrjs  vpqrs, EIDT. I, 9.'H8E rTLKTrL Oe, this
woman is thy mother. EUR. Ion. 1560.




6                  USE OF THE TENSES.               [~ 10, 1
NOTE} 5. The Greek, like other languages, often allows the
use of the Present of such verbs as I hear, I learn, I say, e7en
when their action iR strictly finished before the moment at
which they are used. E. g.
Ol 2StKEXLrai arartldovo'tv, &sw rvv0avo ps 0a, the Sicilians are at
discord, as we learn. THUC. VI, 16.'ETr 7rnoXels, cos eyo aCKo
a (r  v o ia, p/aXojaev UZvat ^ceyadXa. THUC. VI, 20.
NOTE 6. The Present ctU, I am       going, through all its
moods, is used like a Future. Its compounds are sometimes
used in the same sense.  (The Poets, especially Homer, sometimes use E1it& as a Present.)  E. g.
2cE vo-repor e 1' t  rO yaCav, I shall go. I1. XVIII, 333. E txL iraXtv
r;KELmva, I shall recur to that. PLAT. Phaed. 100 B.'AXX' cl E L eL I,
croD 8' ov f)povTrw. ARIST. Nub. 125.'2Q (flXk,  y7).eLv ae7riEL, avas
KCa Kelva uvXadOv. Od. XVII, 593.
(As Present.)  O0os' ao'rap e&oL' pier' darpda't VVKTO dapoXya,
as a star moves, &c. 1f. XXII, 317.
NOTE 7. In animated language the Present often refers to
the future, to express likelihood, intention, or danger.  E. g.
MEvopecv Eovs av eKacroL Kara rnoXeLs X)r00&/iLev; shall we wait*
TIIUC. VI. 77. EL 8he Br/-lv oVroS, 8eLtadrT, Kayo Kaara3a vw, and
I will take any seat. DEM. F. L. 351, 4. 2r l 6 ePXL ^ OS,  ETrepov
Trpo a Oo Kw  ev; art thou he that should come, or do we look for
another? MATTH. Evang. XI, 3.'A7r6XXv a l, I shall perish.
(See ~ 17, N. 6.)
2. The Present is often used in narration for the
Aorist, to give a more lively statement of a past event.
This is called the Historic Present.    E. g.
BovX)v 7r r E X a ra a  Tros 1i) daXto-ciev'AOrva7o&, he contrives a
plan to prevent the Atheniansfrom collecting. HDT. I, 63. K e X Ce 
7rejLat S a'vpas *.... d7rooTiXXovo'tv ohv, Kal 7repi avrTOv 6
OrpIa'TOKX\js  KpVoa 7ref tr e. THuc. I, 91. Aapeiov Kal Hapvoar'Tros
raies  l yyv o v r a & vo. XEN. An. I, 1, 1.
NOTE. The Historic Present is not found in Homer.
~ 11.    The Imperfect represents an action as going
on in past time; as eypabov, Iwas writing.
NOTE 1. The Imperfect is thus a Present transferred to
the past, and it retains all the peculiarities of the Present




~ 11.].                   IMPERFECT.                         7
which are not inconsistent with the change to past time. Thus
the Imperfect denotes customary or repeated action, as opposed
to the Aorist, which denotes the sinmple occurrence of an action.
(See ~ 19, N. 2.) E. g.'E7rT KEKporos  tt1T7LKq Kara TroXflXELS WKEO, KaL ov tVv^6Ea-av
tovXevo'tOLFvot. aXX' atvroi eKaCroLft E 7ro X IrEV o   Kai ed ovX'ovro.'EwreS47 3e Orjevs  3 ac LaiXevev, es r^v wv 7r6oXtv ovaav
$vvKia   E 7nr~ivras. THuc. II, 15. (Here the Imperfects refer to
the state of the country or the customs, the Aorists to single actions;;3aairiXevoe, became king, $vvdKco'r, collected into one state.)
NOTE 2. The Imperfect, like the Present (~ 10, N. 2),
sometimes denotes attempted action, being in this case strictly
an Imperfect tense.  So especially e'31ovv and ireltov.  E. g.
~ITXTroS'AXo'vv^?ov io e  o v, Philip offered Halonnesus (lit. tried
to give it). AEscE. Cor. ~ 83.'EKaGro70  E'TretOev avrov v7roarTjvat
Tr71 dpX7v, each one tried to persuade him to undertake the command.
XEN. An. VI, 1, 19. KGvia Iro-ar' detpofevov, Karah' 8' pe IIX Hqeva,
and was about to overpowuer the son of Peleus. II. XXI, 327.'E zt0 -G7VO 7rap' OVK EKtLOUroV S  Tiv av\Xjv, he tried to hire the yard of one
who refused to let it. HDT. I, 68. IfIE+aavreS CS 2dpBts Xpva-o
coveovro, they wanted to buy gold. HDT. I, 69.'Eme09ior/e vTTJ
Xkavl8os, Kal avrr'v rpoo(reXOCv WOvEero, he tried to buy it. HDT. III,
139.  "A e7rpda-aero OVK Eyevero, what was attempted did not
happen. Tiuc. VI, 74. So 7rpoo-eriOeL, she wanted to add. ARIST.
Nub. 63.
NOTE 3. When the Present has the force of the Perfect
(~ 10, 1, N. 4), the Imperfect has regularly the force of a Pluperfect.  (See ~ 17, N. 3).  E. g.'0 6XXo Kara 8eav I K e v, the crowd were come to look on. TInuc.
VI, 31.'EIrd CXcO vE i nUVIXov8E, after thou wast gone by ship to
Pylos. Od. XVI,'24.
NOTE 4.    The Imperfect sometimes denotes likelihood, intention, or danger in past time.  (See ~ 10, 1, N. 7.)  E. g.'E7re8~ TL) 6+ev4 e'rOaL ar C vXX Tro, when tte was on the point of
ruin through his deceit. ANTIPIION. de Caed. Herod. ~ 37. Kal 7'iL
E'O v fl K E TEKv', d7r wo X X uy  v 8' iyCo, and my children were about to
die, and I was about to perish. EuR. Here. F. 538.
NOTE 5. The Imperfect is sometimes found in simple narration,
where the Aorist would be expected, especially in Homer. The
meaning of the verb often makes it indifferent which of the two is
used. Thus falvov and fi3 are used without any perceptible difference in 11., 437, 439; so /3adXkro and i3adero, II, 43, 45; O6KeV
and riOet, XXIII, 653, 656; 8OKE and 8thov, VII, 303, 305;'X7rev and
WerE, II, 106, 107; compare also La-TrvXXov and WiTT7r7jav, 1, 465,466.




8                    USE OF THE TENSES.                 [~ 11.
HIerodotus and Thucydides use XeAyov and EfKcEvov as Aorists.
Compare EXEyov, THUC. I, 72, with erov and'EXe$e, I, 79.
NOTE 6.    The Imperfect sometimes expresses a fact, which is
either the result of a previous discussion, or one that is just recognized as a fact by the speaker or writer, having previously been
denied, overlooked, or misunderstood.  In the latter case, the
particle a'pa is often joined to the verb. E. g.
fSt Irot7r, OVK apa 7ravra vo711oves ovue &IKaLoL' 0r a v  ataiKov /YVIropeys        -ye,;ovres, i. e. they are not, as I once imagined. Od. XIII,
209. OVK Spa,ipovov'Xr v epi6wv yevos, aXX' Ei1 yalav EluoI VIco, there
is not after all merely one race of discords, but there are two on earth.
HES. Op. 1. "08' v S'pa 6 uvXXav3wv fLE, this is then the one who
seized me. SOPH. Phil. 978.  OV rvb V Lvo  ap' q ao-t'`Tiro+; are
you not then the only epops (as I thought)? ARIST. Av. 280.'H v
Lovr0tLK dMvrloTpofos Ti7 yJvlEvarOTLKr1s, EL pipvrcLat, music then (as we
proved) corresponds to gymnastics. PLAT. Rep. VII, 522 A.  A"
a8pOepovfLev eKEcvo, 0 rTc5 ev tKato3 f3eXTLov Ey yveroT0 oNe allKGo
ac' o X ro, we shall destroy that which (as we proved) becomes better
by justice and is ruined by injustice. PLAT. Crit. 47 D.'Ap' ov rose,rv ro  iv3pov, e' o7rep?Eys ias; is not this after all the tree to
which you were bringing us? PLAT. Phaedr. 230 A.
NOTE 7. The Greek sometimes uses an idiom like the English
he was the one who did it for he is the one who did it; as?v 6 rqv
yvocflV rT(1VrJv E7rrV lHec'avapos, THuc. VIII, 68; rts?rv 6 /oOqrj-as
TOiL BvravrtioL KaUL oCTwaL ab row; DEM. Cor. 255, 2. (See Note 6.)
B. The Present in the Dependent Moods.
REMARK. The distinction of time which marks the Present
and Aorist in the Indicative is retained in the Optative and
Infinitive of indirect discourse, and usually in the Participles.
But in all other constructions, this distinction of time disappears in the dependent moods, and the Present and Aorist
differ only in this, that the Present denotes a continued or
repeated action, while the Aorist denotes the simple occurrence
of an action, the time being determined by the construction.
In these cases the Present and Aorist are the tenses chiefly
used; the Perfect is seldom required (~ 18, 1, N.), and the
Future is exceptional (~ 27, Notes). It must be remembered
that the Greek distinction between the Present and Aorist in
the Subjunctive and Optative is one which the Latin could not
express; the Present, for example, being the only form found
in the Latin Subjunctive to express a condition which the
Greek can express by the Present or Aorist Optative, and sometimes by the Present or Aorist Subjunctive, each with some




~ 12.]           PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE.                 9
peculiar meaning. Thus tel TOVOo  o I ~ t, if he should do this
(habitually), el vroto-cee, (simply) if he should do this, and
sometimes eav rorTo 7roti (or 7rota-y), if he (ever) does this,
may each be translated by si hoc faciat.
This distinction, although in general strictly observed, was
sometimes neglected even by the best authors: we occasionally
find, for example, the Present Subjunctive where the Aorist
would have expressed the idea more exactly, and vice versa.
In other examples the two seem to be used in nearly the same
sense. (See XEN. Cyr. V, a, 13.) These are to be considered
merely as exceptions; when, however, the Aorist is wanting,
as in'lui, the Present regularly takes the place of both.
~ 12. The Present Subjunctive denotes a continued
or repeated action, the time of which is determined as
follows: -
(a.) In clauses denoting a purpose after'va, o'7TW,
&c., or the object of fear after py, it refers to time future relatively to that of the leading verb.
(b.) In conditional sentences, - in ordinary protasis
(~ 50, 1), the Subjunctive refers simply to the future;
if the supposition is general (depending on a verb of
present time which expresses a repeated action or a
general truth), the Subjunctive is indefinite in its time,
but is expressed in English by the Present. This applies also to all conditional relative and temporal sentences.
(c.) In independent sentences (in exhortations, prohibitions, questions of doubt, &c.) the Subjunctive
refers to the future. E. g.
(a.) AOKDI MLoL KaraKacr-aL Tas apa asv, fva /p Tah Fe7y'? 77Lwv arpaT77y.r, aXXa iroprev orea  o 07i a, rTj 7 rparta aV L t, e p, it seems
good to me to burn the wagons, that our beasts of burden may not he
)ur generals, and that we may go on whithersoever it may be best for
the army. XEN. An. ITI, 2, 27. Kal yaip f3a-cXEuv alperTal, ovX Iva
aavTrov KaXicos eT)rL e X ra, aXX' Iva Kal ol aoeXro Vo' a riTOV, eC
r p a r C L. XEN. Mem. IlI, 2, 3.
(b.) *Av I rtL d(v iO  r Tra, retpaao'e11a XetpoVo-Oat, but if any
owe shall stand opposed to us, we will try to subdue him. XEN. An,
1*




10                  USE OF THE TENSES.                  [~ 12,
VII, 3, 11. Kv 7r6Xfp.os.,'X o'v e' a'X\ov E'x CLev rpareverOal,
o0ov TE Kal Trv a-v d a(feo6deO0a, and if there shall be war, so long as we
shall be able, &c. Id. Hell. IV, 1, 38.'AXX' A Av y yv  a- Koo JEXrLara epco, but I will speak as I shall think best. THUC. VI, 9. OUS azi
o v X  7 roL(rar-Oat qblhovs, ayao'v rt X;eye 7rpi avrcov rrpos roVS adrayyeXXovTas, whomsoever you shall wish, &c. Isoc. Demon. p. 9 C. ~ 33.
A'ras Xoyos', av ad7r  TA  pdyiara, praTalo' v TL  aL Ka KaEV V, all
speech, if (wherever) deeds are wanting, appears vain and useless. DEM.
01. II, 21, 20.  1vtLaaXetv ToVroS  e eOXovo(Wv arravree, ovi a'v opao -
7rapcG-Kevara-Levovs, all are willing to be allied to those whom they see
prepared. Id. Phil. I, 42, 1.
(c.) II e t 0 r  I  0 a 7ravres' f e vy oi e v ar'v vrvc lX?r7Av'? 7rarploa
yaiav, let us all be persuaded; let us fly, &c.. II, 139. Ti f,); Tl
bp o; what shall I say? what shall I do? IHs ovv 7repl TOVTrW
irOL w  Ev; how then shall we act about this? PLAT. Phileb. 63 A.
See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV.
~ 13. 1.    The Present Optative, when it is not in
indirect discourse, denotes a continued or repeated action, the time of which is determined as follows: —
(a.) In clauses denoting a purpose after'ia, o7roW,
&c., or the object of fear after Fg, it refers to time future relatively to that of the leading verb.
(b.) In conditional sentences, - in ordinary protasis
(~ 50, 2), the Optative refers to the future (only more
vaguely than the Subjunctive); if the supposition is
general (depending on a verb of past time which expresses a repeated action or general truth), the Optative
refers to indefinite past time. This applies also to all
conditional relative and temporal sentences.
(c.) In independent sentences (that is, in expressions
of a wish, and in Apodosis with av) the Optative refers
to the future. E. g.
(a.) Tovrov E'rI~v~iet, IVa  7rpatr ro, he desired this in order that
he might be in prosperity.'EdofEioro!,o ro7ro  o L oi  e v, he feared lest
they should do this (habitually). AiXov'v e;retvio v (ipXeLv, orC strXde 
Xa/li3avot, EirLOv Fi)Ve rqILao-r0at, Zva 7rTXELo Kephalvot <)L'Xos re
e3ov'ero elval TnS ro  Aeyt-Ta bvvaf Otevs, va ac& coKv p  o i r O8LKv.
XEN. An. II, 6, 21.  (Here the Aorist Optative would have referred to single acts of receiving, getting gain, and suffering punishment, while the present refers to a succession of cases, and to a whole
course of conduct.)




~ 13, 2.             PRESENT OPTATIVE.                       11
(b.) 0u yap av E7ratvol7rl  e, El E;eXav voIp    ovs evepye/raS,
for he would not praise me, if I should banish my beneflctors. XEN.
An. VII, 7,11. E'irEs (fopr7ro OVK av, EL rrpac o- o  KaXGJS, you would
not be endurable, if you should be in prosperity (at any time). AEscir.
Prom. 979. IHs'yap a'v rtL, a y     r l  (r r a Lro, ravTa (roobs e &ir;
for how could any one be wise in that which he did not understand?
(i. e. E'l rwa pTr 1nrorraTro.) XEN. Mem. IV, 6, 7.'AXX' E'L TLt t),E p o L f E r, crpvvEv,fdpELv, but if we neglected to bring anything, he
always exhorted us to bring it. Eun. Ale. 755. ObK dTreXeiW7ero E'T
aVrOV7, EL t4 TL avayKalov E 7i, he never left him, unless there was some
necessity for it. XEN. Mem. IV, 2, 40.'07rore Evayopav op    ev,
ibo3voSvro, whenever they saw Evagoras, they were afraid. Isoc. EEag.
193 D. ~ 24.
(c.) E'Ie rToro e771 (utinam  sit), 0 that this may be. E'We pvf
ravra rTr o      z- v, may they not suffer these things (habitually). But
ElOe 1 7TadOoLEv, may tnry not suffer (in a single case). See examples
of Apodosis with av above, under (b).
See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV.
2. In indirect quotations and questions, each tense
of the Optative denotes the same time, relatively to the
leading verb, which the tense (of any mood) which it
represents denoted in the direct discourse. (See ~ 69, 1.)
(a.) If therefore the Present Optative represents a
Present Indicative of the direct discourse, it denotes a
continued or repeated action, contemporary with that of
the leading verb (that is, relatively present).       E. g.
IIeptKcXz  rppo?7yopeve, oTr'Apxtiau!o  ol evos elr/, Pericles announced that Archidamus was his friend (i. e. he said $ePvos,ol eroTv)).
TImUC. II, 13. "Eyvo-av o'rT KEvrs  6 (,pos E(ti, they learned that their
fear was groundless (i. e. they learned KEVO'S eur-v). XEN. An. 1H, 2,
21.'E7rvvadvero el o KL 0o'LO  Xcpa, he asked whether the country was
inhabited (i. e. he asked the question, Is the country inhabited?). XN.
Cyr. IV, 4, 4.
(6.) But if it represents a Present Subjunctive of the
direct discourse, it denotes a continued          or repeated
action, which is future with reference to the leading
verb.   E. g.
KXeapXov E3ovXeveTro, cl rref 7ro0e v rtvaS l ravTres [o e, Clearchus was deliberating whether they should send a few, or should all
go. XEN. An. I. 10, 5.    (The question was, ir epTI7rrw c V  t'vas
TraVres'lEo; shall we send a few, or shall we all go?  See ~ 88.)
REMnAR. Examples of the Present Optative representing the




12                 USE OF THE TENSES.              [L 13, 2.
Present Irdicative or Subjunctive in a dependent clause of the
direct disco lrse, to which the same principles apply, may be found
under ~ 74, 1.
NOTE 1. It will be seen, by a comparison of the examples
under (a) and (b), that an ambiguity may sometimes arise fron
uncertainty whether the Optative stands for the Present Indicative or for the Present Subjunctive in a question of doubt
(~ 88). Thus Tjyvo'ovv  rt 7Trotoev might mean they knew not
what they were doing (the Optative representing ri 7rotovpev;
what are we doing?) or they knew not what to do (the Optative
representing rl 7roti~lev; what shall we do?).  The context
must decide in each case. See ~ 71.
NOTE 2. In the few instances in which the Present Optative in
indirect quotations represents the Imperfect of the direct discourse,
it of course denotes time past relatively to the leading verb. See
~ 70, 2, N. 1 (b).
~ 14. The Present Imperative refers to a continued
or repeated action in future time; as,evye, begone;
XaLpovTorw, let them rejoice;,/v  VOp/LE'TE, do not believe.
~ 15.   The Present Infinitive      has   three  distinct
uses: -
1. First, in its ordinary use (either with or without
the article), whenever it is not in indirect discourse, it
denotes a continued or repeated action without regard to
time, unless its time is specially defined by the context.
E.g.
"EccrrTL FveiV, it is possible to remain.'Eicrrat roro 7ro TOCV, it will
be possible to do this.  loftaL vciw&v z e v e i v, I beg you to remain. Ti
TO KWcXvov e'r aarov  (' rat  ~3 L Oae Lv tOL 3oVXeTral, what will there be
to prevent him from going whither he pleases? DEM. 01. I, 12, 22.'EKE:Xevo'a avrov Trovro 7 o t e v, I commanded him to do this.'EfovXero co0bs' e Iv a l, he wished to be wise. Aetvos EorrT X e y e v, he is skilled
in speaking. "apa 13 a Ie v, it is time to be goiig. nHav 7roLoVao'v,
COOTeE &IKtV FLO 3s 6 ova, they do everything, so as to avoid being
punished. PLAT. Gorg. 479 C. To fly o3v ET7r CTitav iL'w(t qqI'aL TIs
aiv pa8O   atl, to et  o' rt o 8er paT e V ar  T o a T   0 a  v a, TOUT' etlva
oavi./3oXov, some one may say that finding fault is easy, but that
showing what ought to be done is the duty of an adviser. DEM. 01. I,
13, 27. (Here E'rTrtiiav, darooalve-Oac, and 7rparretv belong under
this rule;,iva in both cases belongs under ~ 15, 2.)  0V6 rkeo




~ 15, 2.]           PRESENT INFINITIVE.                     13
pe$laS EVEKCV T-aT E'7rpalECv, aXXL iO tLKaCUrepa sror eq3alovs- q Vfas
ad iov, he did this not from love of gain, but because of the Thebans
making juster demands than you. DEM. Phil. II, 69, 6.'ErTlXCro-7
oe'AraXdvyl   vr'os', rTO p  r Xo —rars KCaKOVpyeiv r7jv E'3oLarv, in order to
prevent pirates from ravaging Euboea. Tuc. II, 32.
REMARK. The Infinitive in this its ordinary use has usually no
more reference to time than any verbal noun, and the distinction of
tense therefore disappears, the Present differing from the Aorist
only by expressing a continued or repeated action. An Infinitive
which in itself has no reference to time may, however, be referred
to some particular time, like any other verbal noun, by the verb on
which it depends, by some particle like ioo-re or 7rplv, or by some
other word in the sentence. Thus j-re denoting a purpose refers
the Infinitive to the future: the Infinitive without coa-r expressing
a purpose is likewise future. After a large class of verbs, as those
of commanding, advising, desiring, asking, &c., whose signification
points to the future, the Infinitive necessarily denotes relative future
time. (For an irregular use of the Future Infinitive after such
verbs, see ~ 27, N. 2.) The time denoted by the Infinitive in any
of these constructions must be carefully distinguished from that
which it denotes in indirect discourse (~ 15, 2), where its tense is
fully preserved.
NOTE 1. For a discussion of the Infinitive with the article and
a subject, with reference to its time, see Appendix, II.
NOTE 2. Xpco, avaLpeo, OearrCoo, and other verbs signifying to
give an oracular response, are sometimes followed by the Present (as
well as the Aorist) Infinitive, where we might expect the Future on
the principle of indirect discourse (~ 15, 2, N. 1). These verbs here
take the ordinary construction of verbs of commanding, advising, and
warning. E. g.
Aeyerat 8e'AXKuIalov& i rov'AiroXXco ravrrqpv r6v vyv XPo0as o tK e iv,
it is said that Apollo gave a response to Alcmaeon that he should mnhabit this land. THUC. II, 102. The Future is sometimes found.
For the Aorist, see ~ 23, 1, N. 2.
2. Secondly, the Present Infinitive in indirect discourse is used to represent a Present Indicative of the
direct discourse, and therefore denotes a continued or
repeated action, which is contemporary with that of the
leading verb, that is, relatively present. E. g.
(a'7l- ypadPetv, he says that he is writing; eI y paeltv, he said
that he was writing (i. e. he said " I am writing "); Parei yp i(i F v,
he will say that he is (then) writing.'A p p co  e v irpofaa'ieraL, he
pretends that he is sick.'ECOzLOafv a p p Wo o- rv -ovrov, he took his
oath that this man was sick. DEM. F. L. 379, 15 and 17. ObK eqbq
at, ros d' aX KEvov a r p a r 1 7 y L v, he said that not he himself, but Nicias,




14                  USE OF THE TENSES.                [~ 15, 2
was genera:; i. e. he said, ovK ey7o avIros. ca' KElVO. aoTpa7rTyet
TnHU. IV, 28. For the Present Infinitive with aIv (not included
here), see ~ 4f.
NOTE 1. The Infinitive is said to stand, in indirect discourse, with
its tenses thus corresponding to the same tenses of the Indicative,
only when it depends upon verbs implying thought or the expression
of thought (verba sentiendi et declarandi), and when also the thought,
as originally conceived, would have been expressed by some tense
of the Indicative, which the corresponding tense of the Infinitive
can represent.  Thus verbs of commanding, wishing, and others
enumerated in ~ 92, 1, although they may imply thought, yet never
introduce an indirect quotation in the sense here intended, as an
Infinitive after them never stands for an Indicative, but is merely
the ordinary Infinitive used as a verbal noun, without any definite
time. See ~ 73, 1, Remark; where the principle is stated in fill,
so as to include all the tenses and the Infinitive with Lav.
NOTE 2. Verbs and expressions signifying to hope, to expect, to
promise, and the like, after which the Future Infinitive stands
regularly in indirect discourse (as representing a Future Indicative
of the direct discourse), sometimes take the Present or the Aorist
Infinitive. E. g.'2tzo0Xo0'ye KaO i'Far 7r o L r e or 0 a t, you agreed to live according
to us (the laws). PLAT. Crit. 52 C.,vveOov' oX l re v e r a t. Id.
52 D. HIpooayaycyv EyyvJTrls 77 Iv r op eerOa 0 a, having giving
securities that he would go. XEN. Cyr. VI, 2, 39.'EXmrilt avvarbo
etva,iPXetv, he hopes to be able to rule. PLAT. Rep. IX, 573 C.
(But in HDT. I, 30, EXiniov elval oaXfPtcoaros eretpfcra, means, he
asked, trusting that he was, etvac being a regular Present Infinitive of
indirect discourse. So I. 22, Amrlwiov.... eivat KcaI rov Xecvy rerp6rO8at.)
In these cases the Infinitive seems to be used nearly as in ~ 15,
1, without regard to time. The Greek makes no more distinction
than the English between eXArFet To70TO rocelv, he hopes to do this,
and eXnrcrt 0roro ivtO(Lrev, he hopes that he shall do this. Compare
(apEv,oV TOVTV (tooyrKEvat ravura r o t  E t V with (pdacKovr;s C(e )JokXoy7qKva[ 7rOXrEVE(  Oat. FLAT. A. Crit. 51 E and 52 D. The Future,
however, is the regular form (~ 27, N. 3). For the Aorist, see ~ 23,
2, N. 2.
NOTE 3. Even verbs of saying and thinking, - as XEyw, when it
signifies to command, and &OKeL, it seems good, - may be followed by
the ordinary Infinitive of ~ 15, 1, referring to the future. Eiwro is
very seldom followed by the Infinitive, except when it signifies to
command. (See ~ 92, 2, N. 1.) The context must distinguish these
2ases from indirect quotations. E. g.
TOvTOLV  XEyo'v 7rcE v, I told them to sail.  DEM. F. L. 388, 4.
(To Tv o v  Aeayov rrXelv would mean I said that they were sailing.)
ELv lIrlEva i r a p t e v a t ds rv daKpo7roXtv, having given orders that na




~ 15, 3.]   PRESENT INFINITIVE AS IMPERFECT.                  15
one should pass into the citadel. XEN. Hell. V, 2, 29. AOKCi li7v TVroTo
r o Liv, it pleases us to do this. (But 8oKEiG Jio VuaS TOurO WrOLELi
moans it seems to me that you are doing this, by ~ 15, 2.) *EUoae
in the sense it was resolved, introducing a resolution or enactment, is
followed by the Present or Aorist (not Future) rifinitive.
3. Thirdly, the Present Infinitive belongs also to the
Imperfect, and is used in indirect discourse to represent an Imperfect Indicative of tho direct discourse.
It here denotes continued or repeated action which is
past with reference to the leading verb, thus supplying
the want of an Imperfect Infinitive.         E. g.
Tivas o'v evXas v7roXap8aver' eE X  a   rb       rrov i Or' Eo nrev8ev; what prayers then do you suppose Philip made when he was pouering the libations? DEM. F. L. 381, 10. (Here the temporal clause
or Ea7rrevYev shows the past time denoted by E'XFo-OaL.) IIorEp' olETrOe
7rAEov  oWKtEas Oq7alaov 0q lIXLtrrirov VJUov K par El rco ro oXLc; (do
you think that the superiority of the Phocians over the Thebans, or thtt
of Philip over you, was the greater in the war (the war being then
past)? DEM. F. L. 387, 6. (Here the direct discourse would be
EKparoVV  and eKparce.) II5s yap o'LEO0E aovXepps ciK o6 Vev'OXvv6lOVS, eI rTlS r  XEyoIL Kara  LXrwou KaT EKEI Kvovs rovs Xpovovs, oT
AvlOeiouvra avroi adflet, K T. r.; *.* *. a.pa  po8oKav aurovs,'otavra 7'relo'e'ta (sc. o'ieae); *..  p' ol'foeE, o're rovs' Tvp,,,vovs
Ef/3aXXe, (rov' OerraXobv)  p o ac  O K t a  K T.. X.; for how unwillingly
do you think the Olynthians used to hear it, if any one said anything
against Philip in those times when he was ceding Anthemus to them,
&c.?  Do you think they were expecting to suffer such things?  Do
you think that the Thessalians, when he was expelling the despots, were
expecting, &c.? DEM. Phil. II, p. 70, 25 to p. 71, 12.  (The direct
discourse here was 7rs'.... vKOVOV, EL.... XyoLi and Trpoo-EfroKV;)
Kal yap rovs E7rEL rv 7rpoyovcv x)&LtOV XEyovras aKovoo roTvrT) T' O'EL
X p  - 0 a, I hear that they used to follow this custom.. DEM. 01. III,
34, 17. TV I plv rrpo'EXXqrvoq ovbe Elvat i e7rlrKXrl-t avrri (sc.
SoKl), in the times before Hellen this name does not appear to have
even existed. TIuc. I, 3. Again, in the same sentence of Thucydides,,rapeXevcrat, to have Jfurnished.  Mert'rara  9r1 ov-(as!iev
b irv eiv, roYv  e 2coKcpdarri OVK ela evat, ra' ov'AyaOcova ro\XaKt KlEXceVe  V FpeTvalraref'acTOa rov EoKpdrCar, E  oe OVK Eav. PLAT.
Symp. 175 C.   (IIe said, e'etL7rVoLFE, 6 8e 2. OVK EIlrije& 6 ohv'A.;KEXevey.... Eyc 8e' OVK eCiWv.)  wvvrvX6v yap (YfP')'Arpeo-rl.a 7rapa
tXl[WWov 7ropfvoLEVro, KCaL f/er avrov yvvata Kal tratSdpta al (aietv,
for he said that he had met (Aor.) Atrestidas coming from  Philip,
and that there were walking with him, &c. DEM. F. L. 439, 3. Tour'
Ey  (prtLt 8  v'pe i., XaOe6v, I say that this ought not to have escaped
my notice. DEM. Cor. 291, 27. (The direct discourse here vas Tro7
8eE, EL t    Xa0ei. ~ {9, 2, N. 3.)




16                   USE OF THE TENSES.               [~ 15, 3.
For the Imperfect Participle, see ~ 16, 2.
REMARK 1. This use of the Present of the Infinitive as an Imperfect cannot be too carefully distinguished from its ordinary use
after past tenses, where we translate it by the Imperfect, as in eAXye
tr orpalrevFua /axeo'-at, he said that the army was fighting.  But here
idaXeoOaL refers to time present, relatively to XeXye; whereas, if it had
been used as an Imperfect, it would have referred to time past
relatively to kXEye, as in eXeye TO crTpadTevpa T7. 7rpoTepaula adXEoata
he said that the army had been fighting on the day before. In the
former case the direct discourse was taXeraL, in the latter it was
/xaaxero.  Such an Imperfect Infinitive differs from the Aorist in
the same construction only by expressing a continued or repeated
action (as in the Indicative): it gives, in fact, the only means of
representing in the Infinitive what is usually expressed by X;eye oLr
EfroLeL, he says that he was doing, differing from Xy7et orL EroirroQev, he
says that he did. (For the rare use of the Present Optative to
represent the Imperfect in the same way, see ~ 70, 2, N. 1, (b).) It
must be observed, that this construction is never used unless the
context makes it certain that the Infinitive represents an Imperfect and not a Present, so that no ambiguity can arise. See the
examples.
REMARK 2. This important distinction between the ordinary
Present Infinitive referring to the past (when it takes its time
fiom a past tense on which it depends), and the same tense used
as an Imperfect and referring to the past by its own signification,
seems to be overlooked by those who would call the former also a
case of Imperfect Infinitive.  But in the former case T'O7 rToTO
rotelv is translated he said that he WAS doing this merely to suit
the English idiom, whereas the Greeks used the Present because
the time was to be present (relatively to eqb), the direct discourse
being roTro 7roWL: in the other case, however, e(77 roTiro 7roteiV  17
Irporepaia, he said that he had been doing this the day before, the Greeks
used iroteiv as a regular Imperfect (relatively to cf4), the direct
discourse being roVro eirolovv. So in Latin (Cic. Phil. VIII, 0),
Q. Scaevolam   memoria teneo bello Marsico, cum    esset sunraia
senectute, quotidiefacere omnibus conveniendi potestatem sui. So
(Cic. de Off. I, 30), Q. Maximum accepimus facile celare, tace e,
dissimulare, insidiari, praeripere hostium consilia.
The frequency of such constructions and their principle hare
been often overlooked, from the fact that they occur only when t.ae
context prevents all possible ambiguity.
6. 1.    The Present Participle regularly refers to a
continued or repeated action, which is contempor rry
with that of the leading verb. E. g.
TOVTo TrovaLtot voIldovreE K. r. X., they do this because they think,
&c.'E7rolovv vot.ovreS, they were doing it in the thought, &c.'E7rolrjoav VOJlUovLreST, they did it lecause they thought, &c. IHoo



~ 16, 2.]           PRESENT PARTICIPLE.                       17
oovor-v vofs'ovres, they will do it in the thought, &o. Tavr' E7rpdxO0
Kvvoovos rrparr77 y o v  o s, these things were done when Conon was
general. Isoc. Evag. p. 200 C. ~ 56. (2rparr7youvros is present relatively to ETrpadxO7 )  Kal Toiavra nT p a r  v ri E7nolL; and in doing
such things what was he doing? DEM. Phil. III, 114, 20.
NOTE. When the Present Participle is used like an ordinary
Adjective or Substantive (as in ~ 108), it occasionally refers to
time absolutely present, even when the leading verb is not present.
This must always be denoted by an adverb like vvv, or by something else in the context. E. g.
Tiv vvv Botorlav K aX ov Lvi v  o(Kr7orav, they settled in the country
now called Boeotia. TIiuc. I, 12.'O rolvv  lthLFrIOS ro  dp Jx7s, ov2rIW
ALo7reiovu o-TparrTyovvroi,  ov8e Trwv 0' vrv ev Xeppovrov' vvv daie
araEflvcov, 2Eppeov KUL Aopl'KOv EXadtB3cave, Philip then in the beginning, when Diopeithes was not yet general, and when the soldiers who
ARE NOW in the Chersonese had not yet been sent out, seized upon
Serrium and Doriscus.   DEM. Phil. III, 114, 15.  (Here crrpaurryouvros is present to the time of fXd/iSaave, while Ovrov is present to
the time of speaking.)
2.   The Present Participle is also used as an Imperfect, like the Present Infinitive.       With the Participle
this use is not confined (as it is with the Infinitive) to
indirect discourse.    E. g.
Ol orv Lt7r p e 0o3Vr e  K e  rap v r e  KaTraaprvp7jcovorv, those
who were his colleagues on the embassy and who were present will
testify. DEM. F. L. 381, 5. (Here the embassy is referred to as a
well-known event in the past.)  Iauverat yap 1 vv'EXXas KaXovJpev7
ov 7raXat e/3failo  oiKovJoLvE), dakXXa IepeavaoaraTres 7T ovoaL Tra
7rporepa, Kal pat&cos CKaoTro rv eavTrov a7  T o Xe lr o Tre s, i. e. the
following things are evident,'EXXah ob 7racXa& jf3aloS pKElTO, daXXA%.eravaraToes (L qoav, KaL EKaaTro& TrV Eavurv a7reXL7  Tov.  uc. I, 2.
Oba TOV SWKpaTr7jV aet~KvVvra TroiL ^vvoVc'v EavrTO  KaXbv KayaOov
ovra.  OiLa 8e KaKELVO W    p o v o ( V r v,'cre 2scKparet o(vvrTar7v.
XEN. Mem. I, 2, 18. (The direct discourse here was EdE8KVu and
ii(ffpoveLTr)v.)
The principles stated in ~ 15, 3, with Remarks (cf. ~ 73, 1) in regard to the Present Infinitive used as an Imperfect apply equally to
the Participle.
REMARK. The rules for the time of the Infinitive and Participle
given in this chapter do not include the Infinitive and Participle
with ay. For these see Chapter II. ~ 41.
B




IS                  USE OF THE TENSES.              L~ 17, 1
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT.
A. In the Indicative.
~ 17. 1. The Perfect represents an action as already
finished at the present time; as y77pac0a     I have written
(that is, my writing is now finished).
2.   The Pluperfect represents an action as already
finished at some specified past time; as eyeypaqetv, I
had written (that is, my writing was finished at some
specified past time).
NOTE 1. The consideration that the Perfect, although it implies
the performance of the action in past time, yet states only that it
stands completed at the present time, will explain why the Perfect is
classed with the Present and Future among the primary tenses, that
is, the tenses of present or future time.
NOTE 2. The Perfect Indicative and the Pluperfect may be
expressed by the Perfect Participle with the Present or Imperfect
of e aL'. Here, however, each part of the compound generally retains its own signification, so that this form expresses more fully the
continuance of the result of the action down to the present time (in
the case of the Perfect), and down to the past time referred to (in
the case of the Pluperfect)..g.
tI-ErotnrKo EffTrLV (or ~v), he is (or was) in the condition of having
done,-he has done (or had done).'El/oZ ol vdoLo o poOvov a7reyvwKO     e LC pffL /) aiLKelv, aXX Ka Ka  KEX \V KOTES r a'rViv Ter V q lK7,
Xa/adY3vecv, it is the laws which have not only acquitted me of injustice,
but have commanded me to inflict this punishment. LYS. de Morte
Erat. p. 95, 4. ~ 34.  Otpavos yeyovoGs eO rl e KaL er EoTat,
heaven has been formed (and still exists), and will still continue.
PLAT. Tim. 31 B.
REMARK. The latter part of Note 2 of course does not apply to
cases where the compound form is the only one in use, as in the
third person plural of the Perfect and Pluperfect Passive and
Middle of mute and liquid verbs.
On the other hand, the simple form very often implies the continuance of the result of the action down to the present time, or
down to a specified past time; but not so distinctly as the compound form, and not necessarily.  (See the last two examples.)
E.g.'Erts/AeXcs oi Oeooi Y ol aYvOprot 8eovrat KareOKcevaKa'iLv, the
Gods have carefully provided what men need. XEN. Mem. IV, 3, 3.
Tcv 7rolTvw Tlrve V76o864raj   Ka a X e X o r   a, r v, some of the poets have
left us maxims. Isoc. Nicocl. p. 15 B. ~ 3.'AK K o a  Teov roUVoVJa,




~ 18.]          PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT.                  19
uvqj0ovewo 8' ov', I have heard the name, but I do not remember it.
PLAT. Theaet. 144 B. "A UoiL'VXq K eXpr K, CraVT daeIXkero, Fortune has taken back what she has lent you. MENAND. Frag. Incert.
No. 41.
NOTE 3. The Perfect of many verbs has the signification of
a Present, which is usually explained by the peculiar meaning
of these verbs. Thus BvGKELv, to die, TeOvr Ke va, to be dead;
KaXelv, to call, K eKCKX r  a t, to be called or named; ylyvacOaL, to
become, ye yoveva&, to be;.LLV(a'KELev, to remind, petfvo-rOal,
to remember; ola (novi), Iknow; &c.
The Pluperfect of such verbs has the signification of the
Imperfect; as o~la, I know,,&etv, I knew. (~ 29, N. 5.)
NOTE 4. In Homer and Herodotus the Pluperfect is sometimes
found in nearly the same sense as the Aorist. E. g.
B e/3 X KE e yXovTrv Kara 8eto'v. 11. V, 66. (Iere two Aorists
follow, referring to the same time as f3eXi^e~.) Taira As yirvOovro,
cp. earo T or,0~e~, when they heard this, they started to carry aid.
HDT. IX, 61. "AXXot 8e 77jye.oas eEXOres )E  p, e a r o er& TO Ipodv. HIDT
VIII, 35.
NOTE 5. In epistles, the Perfect and Aorist are sometimes used
where we might expect the Present, the writer transferring himself
to the time of the reader. E. g.'ArToraXKca o-o ros ove rTv Xdyov, I send you this speech. Isoc. Demon. ~ 2. Mer''Apraa3dobv, ov roo& E'7reA  a, 7rpad-cra. THUc. I, 129.
(Here o iE7ret+a refers to the man who was to carry the letter.)
So scripsi in Latin.
NOTE 6. The perfect sometimes refers to the future, to denote
the certainty or likelihood that an action will immediately take
place, in a sense similar to that of the Present (~ 10, N. 7), but with
more emphasis, as the change in time is greater. E. g.
ErT e'I eL rTdOv eyKpar'sJ atCra7-oeraL, t\ oXa, I shall perish at
once. SOPH. Phil. 75. Kav TOvTo ViK&LevZ, 7ravO' 7iJAV 7 re roLr7rat.
XEN. An. I, 8, 12. So perii in Latin.
The Pluperfect can express the same certainty or likelihood
transferred to the past.
B. Perfect in the Dependent Moods.
~ 18. As the Perfect Indicative represents an act as
finished at the present time, so the Perfect of any of the
dependent moods represents an act as finished at the
time (present, past, or future) at which the Present of
that mood would represent it as going on.




20                   USE OF THE TENSES.                 [~ 18, 1.
1. The Perfect Subjunctive and Optative are very
often   expressed   in the active, and almost always in
the passive and middle, by the Perfect Participle with
t) and e'7v; and can always be resolved into these.
Their time, therefore, in each         case, can be seen by
applying the principles stated in ~~ 12 and 13 to the
co or ebqv.    Where the Present would denote future
time, the Perfect denotes future-perfect time.         E. g.
To Xpo'vov yeyevffOat 7ro\v 8ErootKa /f' 7tva ).077qv VILV 7r E rO CL ) K7
I fear lest the fact that a long time has passed may (when you come to
decide the case) prove to have caused in you some forgetfulness
DEM. F. L. 342, 10. (Mr 7roto would mean lest it may cause, the
time being the same as before.) Xpq; aVTa [a TEXevT7-rfavTa EKaTepov
rEfpt/fLEvL] adKOuaa,'va T-eXEoS eKarpos aurcvV a ret E  7 ra of eX\o-;eva, we must hear what awaits each of them after death, that (when we
have finished) each may have fully received his deserts. PLAT. Rep. X,
614 A. Tobvs /Ev aXXovVs, Kbav 8 8 o K 6 7 ecs ) o t v evOvVaC, Tva V aeLXoyLav
op65 7rporetvo1ievovs, I see that other men, even if they have already given
their accounts,- i. e. even if they are (in the state of) persons who
have given their accounts, - always offer a perpetual reckoning. DEM.
F. L. 341, 14.'AV8pEi6Ov ye davv vo!11copev, OS av 7TEX7f  ) 7T y  rarEpa,
we always consider one who has beaten his father very manly. ARIST.
Av. 1350. Nolov Ou7o1EV f7lf]EVy TOvr'EXXlvCOv Vflias oO V OE S o v ay
7rpoTepos  E 3eo 107 K1 cos v/ uv, i. e. to assist no one who shall not previously have assisted you. DEMr. F. L. 345, 28. (0  ayu ttq 7rpoTepor
3o7076 would mean who shall not previously assist you. The Aorist
fo780fo-' would differ very little from the Perfect. See ~ 20, N. 2.)
EfetoawV pH,') v('ora  WiTv e,u 7r E L r T C c o t, they feared lest madness
might prove to have fallen upon us. XEN. An. V, 7, 26. (M  e/T7rLTrrot
would mean lest it might fall upon us.)    H&s OVK &aV oLKTpoTara
ardvrwov eyo) Tre7rov 0s  c q7 V, eL eE +qflo'acvro etvat ~evov; how
should I not have suffered the most pitiable of all things, if they should
vote me to be an alien? DEM. Eubul. 1312, 17. (This could have
been expressed, with a very slight difference in meaning, 7ros o0....    TreIroVOCos f'ro/iza, Fut. Perf., sav Jqn/o-covTra; how shall I
not have suffered, &c.)  El OrLOUv re WrovO  s() C Kapovs 1)JLiv eri7,
ov Kal dado'repot alv roro 7r e Tr o 40 o t,v  e v; if each of us should have
suffered anything whatsoever, would not both of us have suffered it?
PLAT. Hipp. M. 301 A. OVK aLv 8La TVTro  y7 ele OVK ev0VS oe8WK'orTe,
this, at least, cannot be the reason why they did not pay it at once; i. e.
they would not (on inquiry) prove to have not paid it on this account.
DEM. Onet. I, 867, 1. So SoPH. Oed. T. 840. ~'EXeyE o'-a dyaOa
KVpor IIeparas T   EO  KO, he told how many services Cyrus had
done the Persians. HDT. III, 75. (ien'olKol here represents TrTronKe
of the direct discourse.) OvroL gXeyov gwso revraKo'ltot avroTst et ~q a av
CK TOV IHtpais 8 e 8 E Ka ae v o. LYS. in Philocr. p. 182, ~ 12.
(Here the direct discourse was 7revraKooLoi EaLLV 8oeSeKaacrLeVot.)




~ 18, 2.]  PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE.               21
NOTE. The Perfect Subjunctive in protasis. (~ 50, 1) corresponds
exactly to the Latin Future Perfect Indicative; but the Greek seldom uses this cumbrous Perfect, preferring the less precise Aorist
(~ 20, N. 2). The Perfect Optative, in both protasis and apodosis,
corresponds to the Latin Perfect Subjunctive, but is seldom used.
The Perfect Optative can seldom be accurately expressed in
English. For when we use the English forms would have suffered
and should have suffered to translate the Perfect Optative, these are
merely vaguer expressions for will and shall have suffered. (See
the examples above.) I should have suffered is commonly past in
English, being equivalent to'iraOov av; but here it is future, and is
therefore liable to be misunderstood. There is no more reference
to past time, however, in the Perfect Optative with'v, than there
is in the Future Perfect Indicative in such expressions as /adrT-iV eLO
KEKXav(ta Tat, 1 shall have had my whipping for nothing (referring
to one received in his boyhood); ARIST. Nub. 1436.
2. The Perfect Imperative may express a command
that something just done or about to be done shall be
decisive and final.   It is thus equivalent to the Perfect
Participle with the Imperative of etLd.      E. g.
TarTa uEv ) rav'T) e i p Eip a0, let so much have been thus said, i. e
let what has been thus said be sufficient. PLAT. Crat. 401 D. But
ipaos S   e p lj a r   0'rL, K. r. X., still let as much as this (which follows)
be said (once for all), that, &c. PLAT. Rep. X, 607 C. Ilepl pi 
iloiCv Tara ot  r p o e t  pE a- 0 o, let this have been said (once for all)
by way of introduction. Isoc. Paneg. p. 43 D. ~ 14. TaGra r e r a L o 
Tre VLuv, Kal ICasO C  IKCais eet, let this be the end of the play, &c. PLAT.Euthyd. 278 D. TETrciXB 0o) fiLV Kara 871p.oKpariav 0 o6 Lrorof aCvip,
let such a man remain where we have placed him, &c. PLAT. Rep.
VIII, 561 E.'A 7r E p y a a co 0  ij8  CV avrn 7 roX-ela, let now this be
a sufficient description of this form of government. Id. 553 A. MCXP&
Trove X p lrw 0 co Vcrv r1 3pa8vr,'s, at this point let the limit of your sluggishness be fixed. THUC. I, 71.
This use seems to be confined to the third person singular of the
passive and middle. The third person plural in the same sense
could be expressed by the Perfect Participle with the Imperative of
eLiI, as in PLAT. Rep. VI, 502 A: ovrot:oLvvv rorTo Trc7rcto'iELYo
ToWov, grant then that these have been persuaded of this.
NOTE 1. On this principle the Perfect Imperative is used in
mathematical language, to imply that something is to be considered
as proved or assumed once for all, or that lines drawn or points
fixed are to remain as data for a following demonstration. E. g.
EZX    0co 67nL jw s AB rvXo av  sToiELOv   A,a Kalca (y p7a'w tor
Trs Ar T7 AA c'nr- 6 AE, let any point A be (assumed as) taken in the
lind AB, and AE equal to AA as cut offfrom Ar EUCL. I, Pr. 9.




22                  USE OF THE TENSES.                 [~ 18, 2,
NOTrE 2. The Perfect Imperative of the second person is rare;
when it is used, it seems to be a little more emphatic than the Present or Aorist. E. g.'He tb roVe 8E   e o. II. V, 228. Mr 7r cqfi o   rOe. THuc. VJ
17. Mdvov av 77liv 7Lo-ra OeLCV 7TTE IT I7  Kaio  a 8etaV  8v, only make
us (immediately and once for all) solemn pledges and give the right
hand. XEN. Cyr. IV, 2, 7. IIe'ravoo, stop! not another word I DEM.
Timoc. 721, 6.
NOTE 3.   In verbs whose Perfect has the force of a Present
(~ 17, N. 3) the Perfect Imperative is the ordinary form, as i/ELvqfro,
KEKX/\aC0a, ardrw, reOvdrC,'ocrro. The Perfect Imperative active
seems to have been used only in such verbs. Occasionally we find
the periphrastic form with the Participle and ez/zl, as eaTo ~vAfE3qIKvLa. PLAT. Leg. V, 736 B.
3. (a.) The Perfect Infinitive in indirect discourse
represents a Perfect Indicative of the direct discourse,
and therefore denotes an action which is finished at the
time of the leading verb. E. g.
Q>cr' TOVUTO 7rer pip a X  a, he says that he has done this; jbn7 roGro
7re7rpaXEvat, he said that he had done this; (jofrit roVro Trer p a X va t, he will say that he has done this (the direct discourse in
each case being 7rerrpaxa).'Eq7  p XpilaOf eavrT  rovs EO73aiovs
7 r LK  1      p v X v a t, he said that the Thebans had offered a reward for
his seizure. DEM. F. L. 347, 26.  In ARIST. Nub. 1277, 7rpocrK K X i of 0 a I  Jot OKEiS (according to Mss. Rav. & Ven.), you seem
to me to be sure to be summoned to court (to be as good as already summoned), the Infinitive represents a Perfect Indicative referring to
the future (~ 17, N. 6). So KE Ka X o- 0 a  eot dKE. THuc. II, 8.
(b.) In other constructions the Perfect Infinitive
represents an act as finished at the time at which the
Present in the same construction would represent it as
going on (~ 15, 1). E. g.
Ou j3ovXevuoOat EC'rt     pa, daXa,je 3ovXevr aat* rTjs -yap
if'toVcr)S' YVKTOS raaria ravra 8ir e r p a X 0 a t, it is no longer time to
be deliberating, but (it is time) to have finished deliberating; for all
this must be done (andfinished) within the coming night. PLAT. Crit.
46 A. Kai iv 7TrepL zv ye 7rporTaiare...... 7Tpo-Ket8L  K 7K  v a,
and it is his duty to have attended (during his absence) to the business
about which you gave him instructions. DEr. F. L. 342, 28. (This
refers to an ambassador presenting his accounts on his return.),vvETVryXaveF roXXaXov  aia T''v creEvoxwpLav Ta p1EV aXXOLS  1 e' ^
13X \K vat a     a 8a avrobv  feI13e 3X o rOat, 6vo iTE Trepi ilav...
~vvqprja0ait, it often befell them to have made an attack on one
side and (at the same time) to have been attacked themselves on the




18, 4.]            PERFECT INFINITIVE.                     23
other, &c. THUC. VII, 70.'Ava'yK  yap ra pev efyto-r avrw'8j
KaraKfXplo'Oa& fLLKpa Se    tva 7rapaXEhXe    Oalt, for it must be
that the most important subjects have been used up, and that only unimportant ones have been left. Isoc. Pan. p. 55 D. ~ 74. OVK i'jeXov.'3aLavetv tia ro  K a  7rar  7 CX 0al ra j r'a-a-, they were unwilling to
embark on account of having been terrified by the defeat. THUC. VII,
72. To yAp 7roXXa a7roXCoXe KvaL Kara sov Trroe/xov TErS rIperepas
ad.e)Xeas av rtS Oelr I  KalUoo, ro ae!re 1T arI(XaC TOVrTO 7Trerov0eva&
7r e qI r vvat r  rTva 1FuhLv oTvpaXlav roOvrTO)W avrlppo7rov, Trjs rap
CKELVcOti  evvolas evFpyE7tfiL av e'y)oye Oeflv, for our having lost many
things during the war any one might justly charge upon our neglect;
but our never having suffered this before and the fact that an alliance
has now appeared to us to make up obr these losses I should consider a
benefaction, &c. DEM. 01. I, 12, 3.  (Compare yeyev1-c0al in the
first example under ~ 18, 1.) "'E0oacrav  rapotKosoFo'aravTre,  o'Tr
UiK7Tet pI7re avrol W KXverOat VTr avrc-v, eKelvovS re KCal ravardTratLv
ane o'T p r KE v a t... o 5       xas dEroTretXitat, i. e. they carried their
own wall beyond that of the Athenians, so as no longer to be themselves
interfered with by them, and so as to have effectually prevented them,
&c. THUc.V. II, 6.'ETreTFeX?0 Kal Torv XoTrcw, CaT' TWV rapOvrov
TOiS avqOpwTroti dyaC0v q8)hEy pvEV a'vev Tr srodXEco e,vat, Tar he rXeioTra
8ta Tavuriv  y yEyEv j  r a t. Isoc. Pan. p. 48 B. ~ 38. Totavra Kal
To'avrTa KaTerKevaao'av r,1iv, OJT'E if fLqevL r-v E7rtytLVO.L/Voav v7rep3oX,\)V
V Xe i c   0 a t, they made such and so great acquisitions as to have no
possibility of surpassing them left to any one who should come after
them. DEM. 01. III, 35, 18. Atiopev aVroiLs Trpoica orv y K d 0a L,
we allow them to have cut us up for nothing (i. e. we make no account
of their having done so). ARIST. Nub. 1426.
NOTE. The Perfect Infinitive is sometimes used like the Perfect
Imperative (~ 18, 2), signifying that the action is to be decisive and
permanent, and sometimes it seems to be merely more emphatic
than the Present or Aorist Infinitive. E. g.
ETror, rTjv Ovpav KE KX e ia 0 a, they ordered that the door should be
shut and remain so. XEN. Hell. V, 4, 7.    BovXdoevos dayv&  Kai
LKao'Trqppo oIta   pL t a pcr0at crap' Ml/v OTr rdvavrta epol Kal TOVTOtS
7r7rpaKrat, i. e. wishing to have it definitely and once for all settled in
your minds. DEM. F. L. 410, 28. OeXoivaS TrpoSi 7rvXals TrETrTrcoi vat, eager to fall before the gates. AESCH. Sept. 462.'HXavvev
EMr rovU  MevwYOrS, (OrOT' EKElvovS K. eTr7r7rXXOa  KCa TPEXXELV erl rTa
onrXa, he marched against the soldiers of Menon, so that they were (once
for all) thoroughly frightened and ran to arms. XEN. An. I, 5, 13.
(Here EicreKrXixOaL is merely more emphatic than the Present would
have been.)
REMARK. The Perfect Infinitive belongs also to the Pluperfect,
and is occasionally used to represent that tense in indirect discourse.
This occurs chiefly (perhaps only) when the Infinitive is modified
by ady. See the first example under ~ 41, 2.
4. The Perfect Participle in all its uses refers to aii




24                  USE OF THE TENSES.                  [~ 19.
action as already finished at the time of the leading
verb. E.g.'E7raLvovO-t robv elpr 1Kgoras, they praise those who have spoken.'Errjrveorav TroV  e p FK (   ora  they praised those who had spoken.'E7ratva'oovolT rOV e p r7 K r a s, they will praise those who have (then)
spoken.'E7reeLta ovoev aXrBeO d  y y E X K Oryy   ra (Alcxivr7v), I showed
that Aeschines had announced nothing that was true (i. e. I showed,'v8ev dXO 0es aIryyeXKev). DEM. F. L. 396, 30.
AORIST.
A. In the Indicative.
~ 19. The Aorist Indicative expresses the simple
momentary occurrence of an action        in  past time; as
rypafa, I wrote.
This fundamental idea of simple occurrence remains the
essential characteristic of the Aorist through all the dependent
moods, however indefinite they may be in regard to time.
NOTE 1. The Aorist of verbs which denote a state or
condition generally expresses the entrance into that state or
condition. E. g.
Ba-cLXevw, I am king, f3aoclXevAra, I became king; apxo, I hold
office, )paa, I obtained office; wXovrw, erXov6rarra, I became rich. T.j
aXrlOeia (MVCKIEL Kal oveiroo ac7roXAXoLrev'..... dXXh 7rapa bavros
TioKparovs EKiELvy Or V, K 7 aKr e, she was his wife in good faith, and
has not even yet been divorced;..... but she went to live with him,
&c. DEM. Onet. I, 873, 8.
NOTE 2. The Aorist differs from the Imperfect by denoting the
momentary occurrence of an action or state, while the Imperfect
denotes a continuance or repetition of the same action or state.
This is especially obvious in the verbs mentioned in Note 1, as
faoalXevov, 7pxov, e7rXo;vovv, I was king, held office, was rich. (See
especially the last example under N. 1.) The Aorist is therefore
the tense most common in narration, the Imperfect in description.
The Aorist may sometimes refer to a series of repetitions; but it
refers to them collectively, as a single whole, while the Imperfect
refers to them separately, as individuals. So the Aorist may even
refer to a continued action, if (as a whole) it is viewed as a single
event in past time. E. g.'Eyo 8e X? 0 ov, e ov, E v iK 17a, I came, I saw, I conquer(d
(Veni, vidi, vipi) APP. Bell. Civ. II, 91. So E3aaolXevoe E Ka




~ 19.J       AORIST IN THE DEPENDENT MOODS.                 25
At q may be used to mean he had a reign of ten years (which is now
viewed as a single past event); whereas faoriXkEve &iKa E'rq would
mean he continued to reign ten years.
NoTe 3. The distinction between the Imperfect and Aorist was
sometimes neglected, especially by the older writers. See ~ 11,
Note 5.
NOTE 4.     (a.) The Aorist is sometimes found where we
should expect the Perfect or the Pluperfect; the action being
simply referred to the past, without the more exact specification afforded by the Perfect and Pluperfect.  E. g.
TZv olKTrcv oov'eva Ka Tr eXL 7r, dXX' Airavra  rerpaKev. AESCHIN. Timarch. ~ 99.'Erpadrovro es Tro Iiavoplfov, EOcVErep a v rydo0 V r o, they turned towards Panormus, whence they had set sail.
TIUvc. II, 92.  Kvpov Ne JeErTaTrF'JLrera  atro r77  dapxs?s7 avr'o
rarpairrqv er o r- c v, of which he had once made him satrap. XEN.
An. I, 1, 2.
(b.) Especially the Aorist is generally used, even where we
should expect the Pluperfect, after particles of time like wde,;
e7Ll'), WS (when), orT, G)s, srplv, &c. E. g.'Erct8' rC e X cv r X1 - e apelos Kal KaTarErr'Apra~T pjrS, after Darius
had died and Artaxerxes had become established. XEN. An. I, 1, 3.
Ov Wrpo'drrav E$eveyKELv EroXlqro'aY srpbs 1/Etas STroXk/iov, TrpLv rovr
oarpaTqrovos fWtSOv crVyeX ai o, before they had seized our generals.
XEN. An. III, 2, 29. Ol 6' orE a' XqtL'vos 7FrokXvevOEos EVTOS L K' OVo,
when they had entered. 11. I, 432. So in Latin, postquam venit, after
he had come.
NOTE 5. The Aorist is sometimes used in colloquial language
by the poets (especially the dramatists), when a momentary action,
which is just taking place, is to be expressed as if it had already
happened. E. g.'E r v a' E pyov KaC 7TpovoLav qv I0ov, I must approve your act, &c.
SOPH. Aj. 536.'H ora 0    L aretXaLs, e ay aa  frOXoKorilal, I am
amused by your threats, I cannot help laughing, &c. ARIST. Eq. 696.
NOTE 6. The Aorist sometimes refers vividly to the future, like
the Present or Perfect (~ 10, N. 7; ~ 17, N. 6); as a7r aXd\6O v en
pe XciiEctv, I perish if you leave me, EUR. Ale. 386.
So in questions with rT ov expressing surprise that something is
not already done, and implying an exhortation to do it; as rT obv
ov  Lryja-cro; why then do you not tell us the story? PLAT. Prot.
310 A. See also rt' ovK ov KKaXc'a-afz v; Prot. 317 D.
B. Aorist in the Dependent Moods..REMARK. The Aorist of the dependent moods differs from
the Present as is explained in the Remark before ~ 12.




26                  USE OF THE TENSES.                 [~ 20.
~ 20. The Aorist Subjunctive denotes a single or
momentary action, the time of which is determined by
the rules that apply to the time of the Present Subjunctive, ~ 12:That is, in clauses denoting a purpose or object, after
tva, /A?, &c., it refers to time future relatively to the
leading verb; in conditional sentences (including conditional relative and temporal sentences),-in ordinary
protasis (~ 50, 1), the Subjunctive refers to the future;
in general suppositions after verbs of present time (~ 51),
it refers to indefinite time represented as present. In
independent sentences it refers to the future. E. g.
AEoLK a  r e7r X a 0 C p e0a rjs oiLa8e 6~o0, Ifear lest we may forget
the road home..XEN. An. HII, 2, 25. Alyvociras r,-v yEf)vpav Xo'at,
c/s f 61 a j r e dXX' dr o roX 1 0  er e, he intends to destroy the bridge,
that you may not pass over but be caught. Id. II, 4, 17. Hy rv pj ivr v
7ro trl c c e 0 a,,era L   ir TXXoJ  alo-aXesla TrV 7iTroXL olKi'ooev, if we
shall make the peace, &c. Isoc. Pac. p. 163 A. ~ 20.'sv av E'L7r
7TrLOJ,~0a, let us obey as I shall direct. 11. IX, 704. "Hv Eyyvs'EX O
Oavaros, ovalts poXv\XraL OvtjaKELv, if death comes near (the moment that
death comes near), no one wants to die. EUR. Ale. 671.'Oy pEy &a
t8  ayvIoTa (sc. 6 KCOIV), XaXtravE 8-.  v.'yvwp IpLo  (sc. i f),
doa-7rrara, i. e. whomsoever the dog sees (at any time). PLAT. Rep. II,
376 A.'AvaXoyLafopeBaa'a (uooXoyriye'va ripiv, let us enumerate
the points which have been conceded by us. PLAT. Prot. 332 D.
Mro8ev b o [3 V 0 j, fear not (in this case). (But /urrlev q oo3ov, be not
timid.)  Tio to0 oo; what shall I do (in a single case)? (But 7l
iro ~; what shall I do (generally)?)  Ob /B rovro'70  7r., you will
not say this. Ov p  yq ev ra, it will not happen. So in the Homeric ov8e I's co/at, nor shall I ever see.
See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV.
NOTE 1. When the Aorist Subjunctive depends on &re&,v (iraiv, qirv), after that, it is referred by the meaning of the
particle to a moment of time that precedes the action of the
leading verb, so that E7retav roo7ro LaCO, eXAevooiatl means after
I shall have seen this, I will come; and   d7reLba TOTO'r o,
a7rrpXop.a, after I have seen this, I (always) depart. In such
cases it is to be translated by our Future Perfect, when the
leading verb is future; and by our Perfect, when the leading
verb denotes a general truth and is translated by the Present.
As the Subjunctive in this construction can never depend




20.]   AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE AS FtTURE PERFECT.               27
upon a verb expressing simply present time, it is obvious that
it can never refer to time absolutely past: we use the Perfect
Indicative in translating such Aorists after verbs expressing
general truths, merely because we use the Present in translating the leading verb, although that is properly not merely
present, but general in its time.
In like manner, after mor, irpiv, and other particles signifying until, before that, and even after the relative pronoun
or idv, the Aorist Subjunctive may be translated by our Future
Perfect or Perfect, when the context shows that it refers
to a moment of time preceding that of the leading verb.
E. g.
Xp~) be, orav flev T L 0  e0 6 TOV vdoLovs, OTrolOL TIVyES Elrtyv  KOFrfTlv
7retL8hv 86 0O cr e, q)vXdrretv Kal Xpr)c0a t, while you are enacting
laws, you must look to see of what kind they are; but after you have
enacted them, you must guard and use them. DEM. Mid. 525, 11.
(Here the Present rtOLtOe after ograv, while, refers to an action continuing through the time of the leading verb; but 060ae after
E7TrEtLv, after that, refers to time past relatively to the leading verb.)
Taura, EIreLav   pl rop TOO y7ovv e27rw, TOTE, av 3ov'a0c~E aKKoveLV,
epo, when I shall have spoken about my birth, then, if you desire to
hear, I will speak of these things. DEM. Eubul. 1303, 25. (Here the
Aorist E'ITw, though absolutely future, denotes time past with reference to ep&.)'EWeta&v o t a7rap adoa   a &  eo'olua, j7o, when I shall
have accomplished what I desire, I will come. XEN. An. II, 3, 29.'E7EtL8a'v 8E KpV'C,o l y)7, davPp )p)/pelvos7io VirT T7XS TroXc   XEyEfL &f
aTroLS ETratVOV TOll 7rpETrovra, when they have covered them with earth,
&C. THUc. 11, 34. *Ew    v ov ao(-rlra& rT o CdcOS?, TorT XPq 7rpoOvtovs
elvaL' EretaPv 6e i  BdlXaTTa Vr WlpvXr X?,  ato   7 o'  7rov7, as long as
it remains in safety (Present);- but the moment that the sea has overwhelmed it (Aorist). DEM. Phil. III, 128, 22.'Ecos av eKILdcs0,'X''X7rlia, until you have learnt fully, have hope. SOPH. O. T. 834.
Mla 8E KXivrt KEvI,pepETat TWv dapavov, ot av!  e v p e pE0 TL v ES
araipeLov, and one bier is always carried empty, in honor of the missing, whose bodies have not been Jbund. THUC. II, 34. TiLs tavoeLiraI,
a av aXXoL ra apETry KaravTpararco, TroV) T   I'OLtpeL; who ever
thinks of having an equal share in those things which others by their
valor have acquired? XEN. Cyr. II, 3, 5. IIavO' o"' av K, 7 roX6,!ov
yLyvoEp vrls eLp7V)rS rTpoeO6, ravTa Tros dLEeX(7'ao'tl aIoXXvrat, all
things which are (or have been) abandoned when peace is made are
always lost to those who abandoned them. DEM. F. L. 388, 9. *HV 8'
apa Kal rov Trelpa a(0 )aX 0wLv, avTEXrm'areav s SXXa eTX7rTpo0rav rTP
xpelav, if they have been disappointed in anything, they always supply
the deficiency, &c. Tnuc. I, 70.  (See ~ 30, 1.)  OvX1 7ravaroia,
Irpiv av ore Trv 0w(r  KV.OIOV 0Tcr TreKvtv0, I will not cease before I
have (shall have) made  y)u master of your children. SOPH. 0. O




28                  USE OF THE TENSES                   [~ 20.
1040. Mi, rEyaCe,rply al div a, do not groan until you have heard.
Sopr. Phil. 917.
NOTE 2. The use of the Aorist Subjunctive mentioned in Note 1
sometimes seems to approach very near to that of the Perfect Subjunctive (~ 18, 1); and we often translate both by the same tense
in English. But with the Perfect, the idea of an action completed
at the time referred to is expressed by the tense of the verb, without aid from any particle or from the context; with the Aorist, the
idea of relative past time can come only from the particle or the
context. (See ~ 18, 1., Note.) E. g.'Ov lev av.a alyvicra (6 Kcov), xaXeraLvetl *v' i va yvopipolo
('C0j), aawraceTat, Ka /V p rev m7ro0rore V'T avTro dayaOhv re7r6v087),
whomsoever he sees whom he knows, he fawns upon, even if he has
hitherto received no kindness from him. PLAT. Rep. II, 376 A. Compare this with Ei'v cayaoov rt rdn VO Tr Tivos, daCa'deraL, if he ever
happens to receive any kindness from any one, he always fawns upon
him; and EIreaYv *ayaOov ri r a' Or, arOa7Ta L fr, qfier he has received
any kindness, he always fawns upon him. See examples under
~ 18, 1.
~ 21. 1. The Aorist Optative, when it is not in indirect discourse, denotes a single or momentary action,
the time of which is determined by the rules that apply
to the time of the Present Optative, ~ 13,: -
That is, in clauses denoting a purpose or object, after
(It  r/       /
aI, 07rto?, /E&, &c., it refers to time future relatively to
the leading verb; in conditional sentences (including
conditional relative and temporal sentences),- in ordinary protasis (~ 50, 2), the Optative refers to the future
(only more vaguely than the Subjunctive); in general
suppositions after verbs of past time (~ 51), it refers to
indefinite past time. In independent sentences it refers
to the future. E. g.
7IT7r7ro eIv (i3q?V ]7z j   K PvoI 7VO' a 7rpayfLiTaa aroYv, Philip was
in fear lest the control of affairs might escape him. DEM. Cor. 236, 19.
EL' X 6 O t, 7rdvr' av I o t, if he should go, he would see all. El' {X 0 o L,
Mr(Wv' e&pa, if ever (whenever) he went, he (always) saw all. Ov3'
el 7raVTres EX o ev IIpcorat, 7rXjOeB Ye oVX v Trep/ aX oleO  &v rovb,roXeqlovv, not even if all the Persians should come, should we surpass the enemy in numbers. XEN. Cyr. II, 1, 8. *Ore W4cX rov 8ELvov
/yevoIvro, Kal  Elftr7 7rpQs d\Xovs apXovrac adrtvaL, TroWXol avrov
a7rrXelrrov, but when they were come out of danger and it was in their
power (Present) to go to other commanders, (in all such cases) many
lft him. XEN. An. II, 6, 12. "Avev yap apXodvrwv ovbiv av oTre cKaXo




~ 21, 2.3            AORIST OPTATIVE.                      29
ovIe ayabov y t. Io  o, nothing could be done, &c. XEN. An. ITI, 1 38.
OVK oloa o Tl Tiv 7.   Xp T'   o a C  ro avrosL, I do not know what use any
one could make of them. XEN. An. III, 1, 40. Ei'Oe (V'rotoorov v
Il)tXos nzv y E v o o a O  may you become a friiend to us. XEN. Hell. IV,
1, 38. Mr yevo Lto, may it not happen.
See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV.
NOTE. When the Aorist Optative depends upon Ew7reL or 7rf t,
after that, it is referred by the meaning of the particle to a moment
of time preceding that of the leading verb, like the Aorist Subjunctive in ~ 20, N. 1, so that E7rELb'Uo,, arfjpXeTo means after he
had seen, he (always) went away. This gives the Aorist in translation the force of a Pluperfect. So after icos, until, and in the other
cases mentioned in ~ 20, N. 1. E. g.
OUS pE'v LoOL evraKTcOs L ovra, rlves re elev 7pwra, Kal e7rel r r T rv TO,
f7r,7veL, he asked any whom he saw marching in good order, who they
were; and after he had ascertained, he praised them. XEN. Cyr. V,
3, 55.  HIepLEievo0v eVKaarore EOs a v o t X 0 e q  O crLco07Trpov
EitrEL  E i  o OX 0 e i  r1, elor7EfI v trapa TOV EOWKpCpT7, we waited each
zorning until the prison was opened (or had been opened); and after
it was opened, we went in to Socrates. PLAT. Phaed. 59 D. ObvaofldOv acleoaav, Trplv irapa 0F e  v avTrolS aipLoroY   before they had
placed breakfast before them. XEN. An. IV, 5, 30.
2. From the general rule for indirect discourse (~ 69,
1) we derive the following special rules:(a.) First, if the Aorist Optative in indirect discourse
represents an Aorist Indicative of the direct discourse,
it denotes a momentary or single action       which is past
with reference to the leading verb. E. g.
*EX\eav 6rT 7r eLu + e  abas o6 3ao-As'XE  they said that the king had
sent them (i. e. they said  E (r e I  eV lSd 6 facorXE6v). XEN. Cyr. II,
4, 7. To're EyvocBr7 Or' o0 f3dp3apola TOv 7 hvOpco7rov VTr7r E'/p  a Lv,
then it became known that the barbarians had sent the man. XEN. An.
II,.4, 22.'Er'dXLa XE yELv  o IroXXa TO)&v I{iLOV Xa o E v, he dared to
say that they had taken much of my property. DEM. Aph. I, 828, 25.'HpcrPov avrov e a v a r XE T  e, I asked him whether he had set
sail (i. e. I asked him the question, dve&rXeva(as;). DEM. Polycl. 1223,
21.'ETrepcora Tlva'I oL, he asked whom he had seen (i. e. trva
cles, whom did you see?). HDT. I, 31. So I, 116: e'pevo KdOcv
(b.) But if it represents an Aorist Subjunctive of the
direct discourse, it denotes a momentary or single action
which is future with reference to the leading verb.
E. g.




30               USE OF THE TENSES.                [~ 21, 2,
01'E7rt,,davtol TOVy 6ev e7r7'povro EL  a paso L v KoptvOLotS ri)J
%i'XLi, they asked whether they should deliver up their city to the Corinthians (i. e. they asked the question, 7r a p a s Mi e v rqv rdokv; shall
we deliver up our city?). THuc. I, 25.'ECKo7roTvv  o7ro  KaXXairr
V yK K a i  avrov, I looked to see how I could best endure him (i. e. I
asked, 7riw e, 7 cK o avrov; how can I endure him?). Eun. Hipp.
393. ALFeCOrrro7re orKorjOV  a' dTrrt OKpLvatro, he continued silent,
thinking what he should answer (i. e. thinking, ri d r o K p v  a; ).
XEN. Mem. IV, 2, 10.
REMARK. Examples of the Aorist Optative representing the
Aorist Subjunctive in a dependent hlause of the direct discourse, to
which the same principles apply, may be found under ~ 74, 1. The
Aorist Indicative is, however, generally retained in dependent
clauses of indirect quotations: see ~ 74, 2, with N. 1.
NOTE 1. It will be seen by a comparison of the examples
under (a) and (b), as in ~ 13, 2, Note 1, that an ambiguity
may sometimes arise from uncertainty whether the Aorist
Optative stands for the Aorist Indicative, or for the Aorist
Subjunctive in a question of doubt. Thus,'yvoovv o TE 7roli'
aotav might mean, they knew not what they had done (the
Optative representing Trl eIrotoiaapep; what did we do?), or they
knew not what they should do (the Optative representing rs
rroltoy(tev; what shall we do?). The context must decide in
each case; but in most cases the latter construction is intended.
(For the manner of avoiding a similar ambiguity, see ~ 74, 2,
N. 1.)
~ 22.   The Aorist Imperative refers to a momentary or single action in future time; as ewre /ob, tell
me; Bore o0.  Toro, give me this.
~ 23. The Aorist Infinitive has two distinct uses,
corresponding to the first two uses of the Present Infinitive (~ 15):1. First, in its ordinary use (either with or without
the article), whenever it is not in indirect discourse,
it denotes a momentary or single action without regard
to time, unless its time is especially defined by the context.   E.g.
Iloexs cr'orT.r4varos dvlacrarov y v e  a, it is death for a city to
be laid waste. LYCURG. in Leocr. p. 155, 35. ~ 61.  2TE7rfp Trv




~ 23, 1.]             AORIST INFINITIVE.                      31
av3p6ov roTS KaXots Kfaya0ots alperctrepov e'TC KaX\s a7ro a v  7 CY
aoLXp6s, ouroT Kal TrCI  7ro6XeOv TriS v'7repeXoua.Ls XuactreXcIv (,-yoivro)
dv Op 7rv dca f) a v t ra-  v a F aXXov j ovXats o 6 Jj v a t yevoLEaVs
as it is preferable for honorable men to die (Aor.) nobly rather than to
continue living (Pres.) in disgrace, so also they thought that it was
better (Pres.) for the pre-eminent among states to be (at once) made tI
disappear fiom the earth, than to be (once) seen to have fallen int.
slavery. Isoc. Paneg. p. 60 C. ~ 95. IIFLTroUwvrY' Ti/V KepKvpas
srpe-Ieits, boeoE!vot i7  oa~(pts reptopcav ()0Etpopfivovv, aXXa Tovs re
f evyovTas  uvvaXX Xa at ao   -ta1 Kal rov TOWv  3ap3dapcov 7r6oXecov
KaraXoa-at, asking them not to allow them to be destroyed, but to
bring about a reconciliation.... and to put an end to the war. Ttuc.
I, 24. To yap yv &va t EtaoTripyv irov Xaf3eiv EOrTv, to learn is
to acquire knowledge. PLAT. Theaet. 209 E.  alvreS TO K a r aX t r  v
avra 7rdvTrov,aXdorTa fevuyoev, we all try most of all to avoid leaving
them behind. XEN. Mem. II, 2, 3. Ov yap Tro p. Xa )aev TayaOa
ovro) ye xaierTov Xoraep r   XTaf36vra a' T p O vat XwV7rpo'v. XEN.
Cyr. VII, 5, 82. Tos 7rtelv'm7rtOvlA.a, the desire of obtaining drink.
THUC. VII, 84.   KcXhetC avTrov  X0 e v, he commands him to go'EKe\Xvo-~E  aov eX 06e v, he commanded him to go. KE(TV~L aVTOV
e'X Oev, he will command him to go. Upos T  fJtrj&p v cK rTJS 7rpea-rfELas
X a  E L v, TOvS alXWlaXTcovs eXvo-aro, besides receiving nothing from
the embassy, he ransomed the captives. DEMr. F. L. 412, 21. El srpo
TOD TOVS   OKEas  a 7r o X e 0 6 a i  nr/tla-atra-e f3oqOrelv, if before the destruction of the Phocians you should vote to go to their assistance.
DEM. Cor. 236, 20. Tas airas 7rpov'ypa4a, TOV     -rtva  7 Ta-'al
s-OTV e^ O  TOV TOaOVTOS 7ToXeto KaTEaToq, that no one may ever ask the
reason, why, &c. Tauc. I, 23. Cf. DEM. Cor. 295, 13; EUR. Orest.
1529.
REMARK. The Remark which follows ~ 15, 1 applies also to the
Aorist Infinitive.
NOTE 1. For a discussion of the time denoted by the Infinitive
when it has the article and also a subject, see Appendix, II.
NOTE 2. Xpdco, dvatpeto, Oeacrs-co, and other verbs signifying to
give an oracular response, are sometimes followed by the Aorist (as
well as by the Present) Infinitive, which expresses the command,
advice, or warning given by the oracle. These verbs here simply
take the ordinary construction of verbs of commanding and advising.
E.g.
Xpop/Aevo oe rcT6 KXcovt a v l\X v 6o o's, Ev r, rov ATtO rT, peytTrrf
IopTr  KaaraXafe~v Trv'AOqvatawv aKcpoTroXtv, that he should seize.
THuc. I, 126. But we find dveiXev o'ea-e'OaL in THUC. I, 118.
E    K X pr o Oyap TOLo't Sraprttrno-t,' AaKca[aova dva'TraTov y evif-Oat, ) rov f3aa-tXiea ac-eCov aTroXrEo-0a.   HDT. VII, 220.'EtE'CO-rtr- KoliTa-at.... KCa eia-t8eiv. EuR. Iph. Taur. 1014.
So'"Ee r   ol.....vova    v' apyaXey f 0 itcr 0at...   v. r
Tpaormt 8aap. vai, the diviner told him that he must either die by




32                  USE OF THE TENSES.               [~ 23, 1
painful disease at home, or perish at the hands ef the Trojans. I.
XIII, 667. So after XP/a-Jd, PLAT. Rep. III, 415 C.
For the Present see ~ 15, 1. N. 2.
NOTE 3. The Present of al7tos etL/u, I am the cause, is often used
with reference to the past, where logically a past tense should be
used; as alurio eari Troth- OaBvelv, he is the cause of his death, instead
of a'rLnos v rTOVTr Oaveiv, he was the cause of his death. This often
gives an ordinary Aorist Infinitive after this form the appearance
of a verb of past time, like the Aorist Infinitive in indirect discourse.
This will be explained in each case by mentally substituting a past
tense for the present. E. g.
A'tr OL ovv EIT Kial v'iv 7ro\0)Zv'orf + e v'evrjvaL Ka  i i  diK aoL
ye' rtvas daroX ea a, they are the cause why you were deceived
and some even perished (i. e. they caused you to be deceived and
some even to perish). LYS. de Arist. Bon. 156, 28. ~ 51. TeOvactv'
oi 86 {&vres altTto& avelv. SOPH. Ant. 1173. "H /ioot rTpsl pi 
Oaveiv pIodl p/eTarTLosT. SOPH. Trach. 1233.
For the construction of the Infinitive see ~ 92, 1, Note 2 (end).
2. Secondly, the Aorist Infinitive in indirect discourse is used to represent an Aorist Indicative of the
direct discourse, and therefore denotes a momentary or
single action, which is past relatively to the leading
verb. E. g.
z'r2v 7 r rOrTO or t raa, he says that he did this (i. e. he says roero
eiroln.aa).'Eqfr rToro o L 7   - a t, he said that he had done this (i. e.
he said roVTro ci rob0o-a).  cu'ec T ror 7r o jr (r a t, he will say that he
did this (i. e. he will say TOVTro ero'ia-a).'0 Kapbo XegyEra'yeea r Oa
Ka!u3vo-reo, Cyrus is said to have been the son of Cambyses. XEN. Cyr., 2, 1. IaXao'rarot XMyovTrar ev Ifepel  Tvm rjs x"as KV'KXwcoTC
o K c a a, they are said to have settled. TiHU. VI, 2.  Ha-av voroTrro&
aVroI s  7 rpoOviuws crflo'itL 7Tr p+at  & a' rep'arv, they were suspected
of not having sent them with alacrity what they did send. THuc.
VI, 75.
NOTE 1. The principle stated in ~ 15, 2, N. 1, will decide in
doubtful cases whether the Infinitive stands in indirect discourse or
in the construction of ~ 23, 1.
NOTE 2. Verbs and expressions signifying to hope, to expect, to promise, and the like, after which the Infinitive in
indirect discourse would naturally be in the Future (~ 27, N.
3), as representing a Future Indicative of the direct discourse,
sometimes take the Aorist (as well as the Present) Infinitive.
(See ~ 15, 2, N. 2.)  E. g.'EMXmrTo KZuos adp a-Oa, he was hoping to obtain glory. 11. XII




~ 23, 2.]            AORIST INFINITIVE.                     33
407. Ina\v e/ok' d 7rapos o4rore rjXrraepv nra0ev. EuR. Herc. F.
746.  EC ybp Kparqa-etav Tro VavrTKW, rO'P1ylov,jXriov pasiCo
Xe p L) -a 0a t, they hoped to subdue Rhegium. THuc. IV, 24. Ov3''av eXr's tiV avra 3EXtro y e v e ar 0 a c, there would not be even a hope oJ
their becoming better. DEM. Phil. I, 40, 18.'EK pe v rTO KaKs 7r pdrTelv ras 7rOXeLs xperaio-afso rv XELv Exrl TO eX7XTLOV ELKOS io-TL, K t8 roV
xaravTrTrarL yeveo-OatI dvCdoLaro KCa rTv KOILVoV X7riToLv o' ep li vaL.
LYCURG. in Leocr. p. 155, 30. ~ 60. (Cf. below, EX7rIs ~K roV KaKWS
7rpatc /Etcra7TrLcTE..)'Yiroo-xoyevoC ux7 7po'-Oev  a o a a  t, srplv
avTrovs Karaydyot oL'Kaae, having promised not to stop until he had restored them to their homes. XEN. An. I, 2, 2.'YTeoero XErAO 13 o  X V -
oa a -a. Id. II, 3, 20.'H7reiXo-Aav   K r VOKiv  a  iravras rTOv ey
Tj oIdKa. XEN. Hell. V, 4, 7.
NOTE 3. In all the cases which belong under Note 2, the leading verb by its own signification refers to the future, so that the
expression is seldom ambiguous: thus v7re-Xero Wrotor-a can never
mean anything but he promised to do, although the Aorist Infinitive
appears to represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse,
contrary to ~ 15, 2, N. 1. The case is different, however, when the
Aorist Infinitive follows verbs whose signification has no reference
to the future, like voyitca, o'Io/at, or even 51,Al, and still appears to
represent a Future Indicative; e. g. where in ARIST. Nub. 1141*
btKa'aaaOal aaoi pOLt is said to mean, they say they will bring an
action against me, while just below, vs. 1180, Oao-ev ra Trpvravcta aaot,AO& means, they say they will deposit the Prytaneia. Still, unless we
decide to correct a large number of passages, against the authority
of the Mss. (which is actually done by many critics, especially
Madvig), we must admit even this anomalous construction; although it is to be considered strictly exceptional, and is, moreover,
very rare in comparison with the regular one with the Future or the
Aorist with a'v. E. g.
daro yap r l ea l  -  a t a Xelras, for he said that he should punish the
offenders. Od. XX, 121. (In I1. III, 28, we have in most Mss. and
editions cPdro yap r iaa o   at aXELrrTqv, in precisely the same sense.
Cf. 11. III, 366.) KaZ avrTj ou  i p'praro-Oa'Airplijv (sc. ad7relKpvaro).
7r a pe r e 0 a yap Kal aIroS Kal aXXovs i e t v, and (he answered)
that Apries should not blame him; for he would not only be present
himself, but would bring others. HDT. II, 162. (Notice the strange
transition from the Aorist (?) to the two Futures.) ~ 7alv ov68 rtV
Atb'tEptv 7rE86) o(rKiarav eln'rogYOv -XeOeliv. AESCH. Sept. 429.
OlLtaM yap vV  K e r e Ec a ra8e, I think of imploring. Eun. Iph. Aul.
462. (Here Hermann reads lKErTEv'aev, by conjecture.)'Evofpiaav
eTrOefLevot paetos K p ar tj o a L, they thought they should gain the victory.
THUC. II, 3. Noli(o, ivT itrsevE's yevopaLt, avOpcTros srrrvos y  ye v era.
XEN. Cyr. IV, 3, 15. Toiro 86 oleratl oit ipaXLra ye/vcrOa L, EL aroL
(vyyEVOLTo, and he thinks that this would be most likely to happen to
him if he should join himself with you. PLAT. Prot. 316 C. (Here
we should expect yevcr'Oat liv, to correspond to el o-vyyevoLro.)
* I find aciKoeoa-Oa here in Cod. Par. 2712, and by correction in 2820.
(1872.)




34                  USE OF THE TENSES.                [~ 23, t.
NOTE 4. Verbs like Xeyo or eltrov, when they signify to comn
mand, can be followed by the Aorist (as well as the Present) Iniinitive in its ordinary sense, referring to the future; as has been stated
in ~ 15, 2, N. 3. E. g.'0 (iXoI, #o'q  IvY KEYv yaOv etlrotil Kal atQlpw pvqraTpOv evs otxov
a Kovr i rat, now I would command you to join me in hurling, &c.
Od. XXII, 262. IHapabovvat XeyeL he tells us to give her up.
ARIST. Av. 1679.
~ 24.    The Aorist Participle regularly refers to a
momentary or single action, which is past with reference to the time of its leading verb. E. g.
Ta3ra   o i L a avr  aIrekXe0lv 1 o3ovXovrat, having done this, they
wish to go away. Tavrae i r 0 YT e  7rrrXOov, having said this, they
went away. Ou oroXXo   avovraLt v vve X 0 vTe s, not many appear
to have joined in the expedition. THUC. I,.10. BoLCOTOI ol ei  Apvqs
a vara- r v e  r7v BoIwTlav Kr7Trav, Boeotians who had been driven
from Arne settled Boeotia. THuc. I, 12.'AcKETO 80eVpo -TO r)Xoov,
yvy VTr ) v rST KefaXX) cOVM, (aVTLr7TpTTOVTOS ToV v,.... OV  KaTaCrTTeiV
the Cephallenians having determined to sail in, althougqh this man opposed it. DEM. in Zenoth. 886, 1. (Here yvaovTrcv denotes time past
relatively to dfiKero, and airlnTrpdaTroro time present relatively to
yvovrov, which is its leading verb. See ~ 16, 1.
NOTE 1. When the Aorist Participle is used to contain the
leading idea of the expression, with Xav0dvco, to escape the
notice of, rvyxavcd to happen, and   0advco, to get the start oJ
(~ 112, 2), it does not denote time past with reference to the
verb, but coincides with it in time.   Thus EXaOov adreX0vTrfs
means they went away secretly; OVK orJOqrav da7re\OvreE, no soon
er were they gone; ErvXov elr~-XOOvreT, they came in by chance, or
they happened to come in. E. g.
Ov8' apoa KlpKfiv C0XovrTEs ~e XOoyev, nor did we come without
Circe's knowledge. Od. XII, 17. "EXaOev [aCUrv] ah c0ev ra vrava
KCa K a a X e     X  vra, everything took fire and was consumed before
she knew it. THUc. IV, 133. "'E01 o3p e a i e v o s, he aimed a blow
first. I1. XVI, 322. v0 y7p   50r Iot a'vtl3fiiSaa 1 daTvXIL Kai
7re~Xe[p1orav, for no sooner did this misfortune come upon me, than they
undertook, &c. DEM. Eubul. 1319, 8. 2rparta ov 7roXX  E'rTVXe EiXpt'I(r0iov 7rrape X o oa, an army of no great size' had by chance
marched as far as the Isthmus. THUC. VI, 61. "ErTVXEc 8 KaTr TOVTO
roV Kaipov E X 0 0 v, and he happened to come just at that nick of time.
Id. VII, 2.'OXLya 7rpos 7 r iEXXovTa ra TVXEV 7rpa avrET (SC.
t1yovvrai), they think they have chanced to accomplish only a littl' in
comparison with their expectations. Id. I, 70.




~ 24.]              AORISr PARTICIPLE.                    35
Bov)/otp1,v ay  e X aaOe v ar\vy d r VeX 0 C   I should Mike to pet away
without his knowing it. XEN. An. I, 3, 17. Tor dvaOpn7rovs X7ra-ro/LF
fw7r7r0ea're. d.. VII, 3, 43. EvXaf3eF'Oal 7rapaKeXEfVr'c'OE d\ArlXot, prL 7repa rTOU Eovros of0-orTEpoL }yeVloMEvo XjO-cE  8 a 08 a pv -
rf ~, lest, having become wiser than is proper, you shall become corrupted before yot know it. PLAT. Gorg. 487 D. (Here yevoJ.evoL is
an ordinary Aorist, past with reference to the phrase XC-rET(E Lafp0apeIvrs.)'O7rroepos Kce p0friv oY  p e i  evo s xpoa KaAoY, whichever
shall first hit, &c. I1. XXIII, 805.
The last four examples show that this use of the Participle was
allowed even when the whole expression referred to the future.
NOTE 2. A use of the Aorist Participle similar to that
noticed in Note 1 is found after 7reptopda and ifopda (7repIel8os
and e7r8iov) to allow, and occasionally after other verbs which
take the Participle in the sense of the Infinitive (~ 112, 1).
In this construction the Aorist Participle seems to express
merely a momentary action, the time being the same that the
Aorist Infinitive would denote if it were used in its place
(~ 23, 1). E. g.
IIpocarXoLecos rovs'Adqzvatovs' a KaroKvja-eLv ireptL8EiV avT)V [riTV Y-']
T p 0 e L o a v, dvelXev, expecting that they would be unwilling to allow their
land to be ravaged, &c. THUC. II, 18. But in II, 20, we find the
Aorist Infinitive,'X7rtLev rT)V yq7v OVK av TrepLSeLv T L q 0Ij va I, referring to precisely the same thing. M) 7repdLlf7re ipeas;  8 a if 0 a  p vra, do not allow ius to be destroyed. HDT. IV, 118. OV /o a-' eyo
TrLoFoiaL direT X o vT a, I will by no means let you go. ARIST.
Ran. 509. ErXtkroav ErLneY,.... Eprjlqv,lyEV T XV IrOtv y vo p [ v V 
rT7vY 8 Xdpav r o p o v A Yr.  *. airavra Te rov 7rOdXE/ov 7repl irqv
7rarpiba Trv avr&v   yiyvpvov. Isoc. Pan. p. 60 D. ~ 96. (Here
the Aorist Participle denotes the laying waste of the city (as a single
act), while the Presents denote the continuous ravaging of the country, and the gradual coming on of a state of war. This is precisely
the difference that there would be between the Present and Aorist
Infinitive in a similar construction. See note on the passage, added
to Felton's 3d ed. p. 99.) So 7rpa0evTa TrjyvaL, endured to be sold.
AESCH. Agam. 1041; and ar e I p as erXa, Sept. 754.
Instances occur of the Aorist Participle in this sense even with
other verbs, denoting that in which the action of the verb consists;
a S   oy ror)aaS dva Y vF) ras /lE, you did well in reminding me.
PLAT. Phaed. 60 C. So KaraJri70to-aLuevoi, Apol. 30 D.
REMARK. If a reference to the past is required in the Participle
with the verbs mentioned in Notes 1 and 2, the Perfect is used.
The Present can of course be used to denote a continued action or
state. E. g.'rTvyXavov LJprt r a pe t X \I Ore re T  dp pv, they happened to have




36                  USE OF THE TENSES.                  L~ 24.
iust received their authority. THUC. VI, 96.'Eav rT; iS   K j   K T s ri'vyXaVry T7V 7r\twV. DEM. Cor. 268, 23.'EXdOoIevY WS    as arobs
wraiowv ovbetv btabe povrTe. PLAT. Crit. 49 B.
NOTE 3. In such passages as     odotoyrqcrav ro7s'AOrqvatots retr1X
7e TrrpteL\X vre  KCa vavs 7rapa8oov7rS f6pov re raca!Levot,
THUC. I, 108, the Aorist Participle is used in its ordinary sense,
being past with reference to the time of the beginning of the peace
to which cpoXoy7]aav refers. The meaning is, they obtained terms
of peace, on condition that they should first (i. e. before the peace
began) tear down their walls, &c. (Such passages are THUc. I, 101,
108, 115, 117. See Kruiigef  Note on I, 108, and Madvig's Bemerkungen, p. 46.)
NOTE 4. For the use of the Aorist Infinitive and Participle with
a5, see ~ 41, 3. For the Aorist Participle with eXo, as a circumlocution for the Perfect, as Oavda'oas eXo), see ~ 112, N. 7. For the
rare use of the Aorist Participle with'o-otat as a circumlocution for
the Future Perfect, see ~ 29, N. 4.
FUTURE.
~ 25.    1. The Future     denotes that an     action  will
take place in time to come; as rypa'cw, I shall write, or
shatll be writing.
NOTE 1. The action of the Future is sometimes continued,
and sometimes momentary: thus      Ao) may mean either I shall
have, or I shall obtain;'pow, I shall rule, or I shall obtain
power.   E. g.
ripayparvevovrat w7rcos  p o v or Iv, they take trouble to gain power.
XEN. Rep. Laced. XIV, 5. Atatpereov o'trves a p o v o T 7e Kal'p ovra t, we must distinguish between those who are to rule and
those who are to be ruled. PLAT. Rep. III, 412 B.
NOTE 2. The Future is sometimes used in a gnomic sense, to
denote that something will always happen when an occasion offers.
E.g.'Aviyp 6 f4rvyov Kal 7raTXLv paX77cro'7 a. AMENAND. Monost. 45.
NOTE 3. The Future is sometimes used to express what will
hereafter be proved or recognized as a truth. This is analogous to
the use of the Imperfect, ~ 11, N. 6. E. g.
bIXo'tTro-fos pALv  or-rat o LXX\\ov KaXUs Kayayos (fCeo-Oat'vXat, he
will prove to be a philosopher. PLAT. Rep. II, 376 C. See Od. II. 270.
NOTE 4. The Future is sometimes used in Questiois of doubt,
where the Subjunctive is more common (~ 88). E. g.




25, 1.]             FUTURE INDICATIVE.                     37
TI 8bra 3pev;     rEp v  A   o v e o   a o o e v; what can we do? shall
we kill our mother? EUR. El. 967. Iloi TItS rpelerat; whither
shall one turn? A e e e- 0 e, 7 aTrlcopev; will you receive him, or shall
we go away? PLAT. Symp. 212 E. ETT iy-6 ro u  E Leo-ioxa; ARIST.
Acharn. 312.   Ti oZ' ro7T0(roIev; 7rorTpov ELs TTv 7rOXLV 7rara
roVrovS 7rap a 8 fe 6 o   0 a; what then shall we do? Are we to receive
all these into the state? PLAT. Rep. III, 397 D.
NOTE 5. (a.) The second person of the Future may express a
concession, permission, or obligation, and is often a mild form of
imperative. E. g.
IIpbs Tarara rp a EL  oo v v OeXsy, you may act as you please.
SoPH. O. C. 956. HIdvrTCOs e 7TOro  8p do-E i, but by all means do
this. AnIST. Nub. 1352. So in the common imprecations, da7oXeflo-e,
oitz&CeoE,', may you perish, &c. XELpi a' ohv #ua  o es r ore. EuR.
Med. 1320.
(b.) A few instances occur in which the Future Indicative with
u-.expresses a prohibition, like the Imperative or Subjunctive with
8u6 (~ 86). E. g.
Tatr7Tv, alv pot XP3a-ce o-vujpovXop, )VXdfE~re Vr)v 7rLLaYrL  Kai / )17
BOv)tJ(-E  O6e Elbevat, a i,..., if you follow my advice, keep this
faith, and do not wish to know, &c. DEM. Aristoc. 659, 15.'Eav 8e
EV (ppovjre, Ka' yvva rovro cf)avepobv aoarLOETE, KaL /A 7 E e i avr avO
Jaetav 8io a-ere. LYS. Phil. ~ 13. (In the preceding examples
Jv\Xadere and irotro-cre belong under a.)  Kal racFLa TeVXr)l  jr'A
dyWovdpXat 7TLVES 0 a OOV r''AXatOLr, pU110' 6 X\UVlev Eio'e. SOPI. Aj.
572. Zevov d8 iK t   f cr eL t/ Lqr 8   KaLPov Xaoa3v,a. MENAN. Mon.
397. So perhaps u r8fv rTvh' pels K arL TrrToXt. AESCI. Sept.
250.
These examples are sometimes explained by supposing an ellipsis
of 0'irs from the common construction O7roS /0ij roro epeEl  (se.
-KO7rcL). See ~ 45, N. 7.
REMARK. The use of the Future stated in Note 5 gives the
most satisfactory explanation of the Future with ov u in prohibitions, especially in such expressions as ov qFi XaX5o-eis, dXX' dioXov07'OCEls tCl, do not piate, but follow me, and ov pqI 7rpoo'olorEl' XeTpa,
173' a'eL 7re7TrXov, do not bring your hand near me, nor touch mt
garments.  See ~ 89, 2, with Notes.
NOTE 6. The Future sometimes denotes a present intention,
expectation, or necessity that something shall be done, in which
sense the periphrastic form with /zXXco is more common. E. g.
Ti 8tacfepov- ro)&v $ dvavyKs K' aKoTraOoTVIPr,  EY 7E iTye   te V71i   V 
KCalU 1u+C a~oVaCr   Kca ply7/oovors Ka ay pVrvrovasL; i. e. if
they are to endure hunger and thirst, &c. XEN. Mem. II, 1, 17.
(Here el /evXXovtL rewLveJ Ka' &*iiv, &c. would be more common, as
in the last example under ~ 25, 2.)  Atpe 7rXrKrpov, el tc a X Ei raise
your spur, if you are going to fight. ARIST. Av. 759. The impwr



38                 USE OF THE TENSES.               [~ 25, t
tance of this distinction will be seen when we come to conditional
sentences. (See ~ 49, 1, N. 3.)
A still more emphatic reference to a present intention is found
in the question tr X e e t ~; what dost thou mean to say? often found
in tragedy; asf'I.to&, TL Xke  I eS; i yalp e'yys evrl 7rov; EUR.Elec.
1124.
NOTE 7. For the Future Indicative and Infinitive with av,
see ~ 37, 2, and ~ 41, 4. For the Future Indicative in protasis,
see ~ 50, 1, N. 1; in relative clauses expressing a purpose, &c., see
~ 65, 1 and 2; with oir ti, see ~ 89.
2. A periphrastic Future is formed by     LEXX\e and the
Present or Future (seldom the Aorist) Infinitive. This
form sometimes denotes mere futurity, and sometimes
intention, expectation, or necessity. E. g.
MeXXet Trovro 7rparretv (or frpadiv), he is about to do this, or he
intends to do this. So in Latin, facturus est for faciet. M EX X o viisa
ltad aetv, OOev fLOLt &ta3oX)i ye;yove. PLAT. Apol. 21 B. AECe'-L
To5 -otov'rov TLvoS act erto-'rarov, et pei  Lj TroXtrelaa co'C ea a at,
if the constitution is to be preserved. PLAT. Rep. IlI, 412 A.
NOTE 1. The Future Infinitive after pXXXco forms the only
regular exception to the general principle of the use of that
tense.  (See ~ 27, N. 1.)  The Future and the Present seem
to be used indiscriminately.
NOTE 2.'The Imperfect (seldom     the Aorist) of peXXco is
used to express a past intention or expectation. E. g.
KV;KXonk, OVK a p   e Ekp X es dvdaXKcios dvapbs Eratpovs f8VIxevat ev
aorj yXdopvp, you surely were not intending to eat, &c. Od. IX, 475.'E,tXX v  a-' apa Kv(-creLV Eydo, I thought I should start you off.
AnIST. Nub. 1301. See I1. II. 36.
~  6.-   The Future Optative in classic Greek is used
only in indirect discourse after secondary tenses, to
represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse.
Even here the Future Indicative is very often retained
in the indirect discourse.    (See ~ 69.)   E. g.'Yirctarc&v raXXa O ro avrbo TaKe ir p a o, 4oxcro, having suggested
as to what remained, that he would himself attend to the affairs there,
he departed. TLiuc. I, 90. (Here 7rpadot represents 7rpadow of the
direct discourse, which might have been expressed by srpdaec in
the indirect quotation.  See in the same chapter of Thucydides,
arroKptivauevot ort r E i + o v ar t v, having replied that they would send,




~ 26.]               FUTURE OPTATIVE.                     39
where ore+\otev might have been used.) E' TWOva fFtyovra X1 T o T o,?rporyopEvEv OnT &S IroXepl   X pT cO Lo. XEN. Cyr. III, 1, 3.
(Here the announcement was E'    Xr'va Xj+o/a, cas roXeto XptooaML.)
*EXeyev T0L ETOLIrOS' eL 77yeLrOa avTois Eis TO AENXTa, E'Oa 7roXXa
X7 tO  vro. XEN. An. VII, 1, 33. AlpeEVTES f)' cTre 6vyyparC+a
voILOVs, KaO' ouTrr vas 7X Lo\re Va O   VTo having been chosen Jbr the
purpose of making a code of laws, by which they were to govern. XEN.
Hell. II, 3, 11. (Here we have an indirect expression of the idea
of the persons who chose them, of which the direct form is found
just before (II, 3, 2), eo)E rpIdaKovra aw3pas EXE'eara, of robS vrarpiov9
VOIs uOVr vyypadi'ovLt, Kaff ovr 7roXLrevo-ovrTL.)
REMARK. The term indirect discourse here, as elsewhere, must
be understood to include, not only all cases of ordinary indirect
quotation, introduced by o;rt or Ws or by the Accusative and the
Infinitive, after verbs of saying and thinking, but also all dependent
clauses, in any sentence, which indirectly express the thoughts of
any other person than the writer. or speaker, or even former thoughts
of the speaker himself. (See ~ 68.)
NOTE 1. The Future Optative is sometimes used in final
and object clauses after secondary tenses; but regularly only
with 0&row or Onrws IL after verbs of striving, &c., occasionally
with u, (or oroWs vt) after verbs of fearing, and very rarely (if
ever) in pure final clauses. As these clauses express the purpose or fear of some person, they are in indirect discourse
according to the Remark above. (See ~ 44, 2.)
(a.) The most common case of the Future Optative in sentences of this class is with'ors or o'TrO.U after secondary
tenses of verbs signifying to strive, to take care, and the like;
the Future Indicative in this case being the most common
form in the construction after primary tenses, which here corresponds to the direct discourse. Thus, if any one ever said
or thought, rtKOC) 07r rO TOVTO yevfarac, Iam  taking care that
this shall happen, we can now say, referring to that thought,
aKo4re, o&r    roVro y7,fqV-oroTO  he was taking care that this
should happen, changing the Future Indicative to the Future
Optative (~ 77). E. g.'EO-KO'Tr  6 MeVEKXtS Or t  Eooiro arrate, aXX' EootTo aTvr
oOTrL CrVTrd Te y )porpo(  cr o  Kal TreXevTr'aavra 6dcii o avrTov,
Kal eLt TOiV EreLra Xpovov Ta VOflio!EVa arVT  T o t a ro t. ISAE. de
Menecl. Hered. ~ 10 (11).'ErlX)avdIoj a oaW,rrco  8t....
yV0aoo, T r O, VO/itOi  e ravdres, K. T. X., we were striving that no one
should know, &c., but that all should think, &c. PLAT. Tim. 18 C
(Here the second verb, vop.toarO, is retained in the Future Indica'




40                 USE OF THE TENSES.                  [~ 26.
tive, while the other, yvcra-era, is changed to the Optative.)  See
also PLAT. Tim. 18 E. MrlSJv o'ov'AXXo Ip7Xavac-aL,  ro).C..
B;EOL^ ro. PLAT. Rep. IV, 430 A. (See ~ 15, 3.)'EeTprEXEcro
7e ortWo LTre acrLroL iUJTre (rITOrL roe  0oovro. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 1,
43. Other examples are PLAT. Apol. 36 C; XEN. Cyr.'VIII,
1, 10, Hell. VII, 5, 3; ISAE. de Philoct. Hered. p. 59, 41. ~ 35.
In this construction the Future Indicative is generally retained,
even after secondary tenses. See ~ 45.
(b.) The Future Optative is seldom found with pi or or0s
pj after secondary tenses of verbs of fearing, as here the
Future Indicative is not common after primary tenses.  E. g.
Ov /vov 7rept. rTJs f3aVravov KGa TrjS 8cKrlj e68OIEaLKEL, dXXa Kal TreJn
TOu ypaizarLTeLovU, OTrow fla) V'ro TOv  Meveevov crvXXrlO7alotro.t
Isoc. Trapez. p. 363 B. ~ 22. (Here the fear was expressed originally by roV /q cruvXXrP4i0rcceraL.)  KarEaXke r To HpaKXEcor&v TriXoS,
O TOVTO (fO)O30VLfVOiS,,U' TIVE~S.... 7T0p E V (OTO  e7rl 71Y EKEIvo
UVvapit. XEN. Hell. VI, 4, 27.'AhXXa Kal rovs OEovs,v EA'L(T-as
7rapaKLvSvvvevyEV, /r') OK  pOpEs avro tro r0 o  s. PLAT. Euthyphr.
15 D.
Here the Present or Aorist Optative, corresponding to the same
tenses of the Subjunctive after primary tenses, is generally used.
$ee ~ 46,
(c.) In pure Final clauses (~ 44, 1) it would be difficult to find
an example of 0ro7s with the Future Optative, in which the weight
of Mss. authority did not favor some other reading. Such is the
case in XIN. Cyr. V, 4, 17, and in DEM. Phaenipp. 1040, 20. Still,
there can be little doubt of the propriety of such a construction, as
the Future Indicative with 0'7rc  was i use (though rare) after
primary tenses. (~ 44, 1, N. 1.)
The single example cited for the use of the simple /7 with the
Future Optative in a pure final clause is PLAT. Rep. III, 393 E:'Ayaplcvxv Typlarvev, eVreXXofi/LEvos vvv r aTT7era Kai avlOs o rl  OEitv,
pa} arVT TO TE ffTK7rTTpV Kal Ta ro TO 0OU C'TefjLfaTa OVK e r a pK C 0-.
(Here there is another reading, ErraPKEO-LEV, of inferior authority,
which is adopted by Bekker.) If the reading e7rapKe0ao is retained
(as it is by most editors), it can be explained only by assuming that
Plato had in his mind as the direct discourse pii OK irapKlcee.
We must remember that Plato is here paraphrasing Iomer (I1. I,
25-28), and by no means literally.  The Homeric line is MI vv
sot oV x p a I r  t, r (rKr7rpov Kal arTEla/a 0eoio.
The other final particles, Iva and 0os, which seem never to take
the Future Indicative, of course do not allow the Future Optative.
(See ~ 44, 1, N 1.)
NOTE 2. Many authors, especially Thucydides, show a decided
preference for the Future Indicative, even where the Future Optative might be used. As the tense was restricted to indirect dis



* 27.]             FUTURE INFINITIVE.                 41
course, it was a less common form than the Present and Aorist, and
for that reason often avoided even when it was allowed.
~ 07. The Future Infinitive denotes an action
which is future with reference to the leading verb.
E.g.'Eoco-eOal Q57jo-, he says that he will be; Ea-orOaLc St, he said that he
would be; ocfr-eoac Qora-eL, he will say that he will be. IIo\Xovs ye
E a E c0 aL \ eyov roTvs EBrEXjoovras, they said that there would be mans
who would be willing. XEN. Cyr. III, 2, 26.
NOTE 1. The most common use of the Future Infinitive
is in indirect discourse, after verbs of saying, thinking, &c., to
represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse. (See
the examples above.) In other constructions, the Present and
Aorist Infinitive, being indefinite in their time, can always
refer to the future if the context requires it (~~ 15, 1; 23, 1);
so that it is seldom  necessary to use the Future, unless
emphasis is particularly required.
Therefore, after verbs and expressions whose signification
refers a dependent Infinitive to the future, but which yet do
not introduce indirect discourse, as verbs of commanding,
wishing, &c. (~ 15, 2, N. 1), the Present or Aorist Infinitive
(not the Future) is regularly used. Thus the Greek would
express they wish to do this not by 3ov'Xovtra& rovro 7r o1 (rf L,
but by  ovXovTa roereo rO & e v (or ro Ltcra L).  See examples
under ~~ 15, 1 and 23, 1.  So, when the Infinitive follows
&OTre and other particles which refer it to the future, or is used
to denote a purpose without any particle (~ 97),-and when
it is used as a noun with the article, even if it refers to future
time,-it is generally in the Present or Aorist, unless it is
intended to make the reference to the future especially emphatic. See examples in Chapter V.
A single regular exception to this principle is found in the
Future Infinitive after /eXXco (~ 25, 2).
NOTE 2. On the other hand, when it was desired to make
the reference to the future especially prominent, the Future
Infinitive could be used in the cases mentioned in Note 1,
contrary to the general principle.
(a.) Thus we sometimes find the Future Infinitive after




42                   USE OF THE TENSES.                  [~ 27.
verbs and expressions signifying to wish, to be unwilling, to
intend, to ask, to be able, and the like, where we should expect
the Present or Aorist.    This was particularly a favorite construction with Thucydides. E. g.'EBerFOcr-av e Kal rv Meyap coy vavo  (f)as  V L Tp O   irEL  L V.
THuc. 1, 27.'E%3ovXovro 7 p o r tco p oo- a. Id. VI, 57. To
OTOfLa avro 8LEVOOVVTr KX f oEL V. Id. VII, 56.'ELE(lbVtOL flV  TS 7
rdoras a'p 4 e  t v, f3oreOEv Ue afia e  irpeIns I3ov\Xofevot roiS eavrv
vyyeveza- Kal evhaLdXots. Id. VI, 6. (Here 3roq1Oiv follows the rule.)
Tov rula vavor fiF dOatlvplev e 7r L X Ip 7'E L v, to prevent them from being
without spirit to attack them in ships. Id. VII, 21. OSvr' d ro KW X -
0 e L v 0varoL ovres. Id. III, 28. E' rTL es Troro TO vafat eraLTa 7 ro i-,revL ra  eovra, if any one postpones doing his duty as far as this.
DEM. 01. III, 31, 1. (The ordinary construction would be dva3dakXerat IrotLEv or 7roio-atL.)  OiUTE rCv 7rpoyovgv /Lf/avJoOat [bei] oV're
T70V XeyOYvrv dv aXeErOaL, vo'/ov Tr  OtE r L  KaL ayp ade v, K...
DEM. F. L. 345, 27. (Here we have IE       Neor-~v.) IIoXoi;eco
Cavrov -ye daLKa1r0CV Kat KaT E Luavrov Ep lv avros. PLAT. Apol.
37 B. In ARIST. Nub. 1130 we find,'cras f3ovX7uXo-ra    Kb av ev
AlyvTrrcp r vX e  v  v,LkXXov P  Kpivat KaKWS, perhaps he will wish that
he might (f possible) find himself by some chance in Egypt, rather than
wish to judge unfairly.  (Here rvXelv av is used in nearly the same
sense as the Future in the second example. In this example and
some others here given there seems to be an approach to the construction of indirect discourse.)
See also THuC. IV, 115 and 121; V, 35; VII, 11; VIII, 55 and
74. In several of these passages the Mss. vary between the Future
and Aorist, although the weight of authority is for the Future. See
Kriger's Note on THUG. I, 27, where the passages of Thucydides
are collected.
(b.) In like manner, the Future Infinitive is occasionally
used for the Present or Aorist, after WOre and in the other
constructions mentioned in Note 1, to make the idea of futurity
more prominent. E. g.
HIpoKaXeoa4evos Es Xo6yov's IrlTav, oo-re ir v /irjMev dpcriKov X eyn,
rrd\Xv aCVTOr  K a r a o r r   e  i v   bS TEO XOo, on condition that he
would in that case restore him. THUC. Ill, 34. Tovrs 6woovs 7rapeaooav rc'Apyeov Afijco 8ta ravra 8 a X p re E a- at, that they might
put them to death. THUC. VI, 61. So 7rrevc-reor, III, 26.'EX7ni8
o dfPave rov K a r op 0 cB o-r e v e7rtrpefavTres, having committed to hope
what was uncertain in the prospect of success. THuc. II, 42.  (Here
KaropTOooreLv is more explicit than the Present KaropOovV would be:
To d'aves Trov KaropOovu would mean simply what was uncertain in
regard to success.)  To tLEv ov E e X ey 4 tl v aVTro  Oapp&c Kal 7rav
racrevco, I have courage and great confidence as to my convicting him.
DEM. F. L. 342, 2. (Here most of the ordinary Mss. read 4esYXEyXE.)




~ 29.]               FUTURE PERFECT.                     43
NOTE 3. The Future Infinitive is the regular form after
verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, &c., since it stands here
in indirect discourse (~ 15, 2, N. 1). E. g.
TpcorlYv' e\'rero 0vpos v as a E L p' P o'L f   KTV r e  v Y   ffp oaas
AXatosE. I. XV, 701.'YrT T E'c)Xro KaL Karevevev 8coaE)eEva&.
n. XIII, 368. IIald re c-ov vrpoor3OKa roL ar o v o voa r. H DT.
I, 42. Kal 7rpocraoKav XP' 8eo-r6o'cL v Zqvo's rva; AESCH. Prom.
930.  HXrrTvey yap iaXVY ea o'er Oat. TnUC. IV, 71.'Ev EX7TrLL
cwv O  TeiXq a lp a'V  Id. VII, 46. Tov acrparyoiv Kr poo'oK)'ravra
vrpd e L.  XEN. An. III, 1, 14.'EK TOVTOV VrcrEXTO iro )XavUV
rape    &elv. Id. Cyr. VI, 1, 21. 2u yap vrea-xov 7r7ro{reLv. PLAT.
Rep. IV, 427 E. So lt&oro -t g ~,Y a', SOPH. Phil. 594.
Yet all of these verbs can take the Aorist or Present Infinitive
without apparent change of meaning. They form an intermediate
class between verbs which take the Infinitive in indirect discourse
and those which do not. For examples of the Present and Aorist,
see ~ 15, 2, N. 2; and ~ 23, 2, N. 2.
~   8.  The Future Participle       denotes   an  action
which is future with     reference to the leading verb.
E.g.
To'ro 7ro  cao v pXeTeat,?fX6E or e\~VrCETat, he comes, went, or
will come, for the purpose of doing this. Ola avrov roVU  ro  l 07 co va,
I know that he will do this: olsa Tovoro L O L o- v, I know that I shall
do this. So olehv avrov rTOrO r o L a- Vr vTa, I knew that he would do
this.
NOTE. For the various uses of the Future Participle, and examples, see Chapter VI.
FUTURE PERFECT.
~ 29.   The Future Perfect denotes that an action
will bc already finished at some future time.     It is thus
a Perfect transferred to the future. E. g.
Kaci pe eiav fEXEyy-, ovK aX Oea0'crooPal o-ot, adXa /e'yLroT evep7yeTs trap' E  dol a aayeyp a  e EL, you will have been enrolled as the
greatest benefactor. PLAT. Gorg. 506 C. *HY 8e U yevrl)T'a, atpar1v
4Loi K KXav'reTa, arv s' EyXavov re v0 YV  e i. I shall then have
had my whipping for nothing, and you will have died. ARIST. Nub.
1435
NOTE 1. The Future Perfect often denotes the contix,




44                 USE OF THE TENSES.                 [~ 29.
uance of an action, or the permanence of its results, in futuru
time. E. g.
Tsj avvadliws Es d alov troyS E'oLYtyVOn.iVoIs LvYpqrj K araX eXe [.
e r a t, the memory of our power will be left to our posterity forever.
THUc. II, 64. (Compare ~ 18, 2.)
NOTE 2. The Future Perfect sometimes denotes the certainty or likelihood that an action will immediately take place,
which idea is still more vividly expressed by the Perfect (~ 17,
Note 6). E. g.
El 6E 7apeXOiv eFLS OCTTarrOVV OVVaLTO &d8aat, 7ras 6'raphov di30o
X e X a ea t, all the present fear will be at once dispelled. DEM.
Symmor. 178, 17. (Here the inferior Mss. have XeXvrat, which
would have the same force, like'XkcoXa quoted in ~ 17, N. 6.)
$pi^e, Ka ir r Erp  e r a, speak, and it shall be no sooner said than
done. ARIST. Plut. 1027.  Etvhrs'ApLaioS adeaorqe&, oarr XTCfos
]2llv ovU'8i XeXclETraL. XEN. An. I1, 4, 5.
NOTE 3. The Future Perfect can be expressed by the
Perfect Participle and  arolaLt.  In the active voice this compound form is the only one in use, except in a few verbs
E.g.
Av TarT' eL8J.teV, Kal Ta' 8ovra e p e r 0a e  y v OKo Td  Kra Xkoywv
paralcov a rr X X a y ev o, we shall have already resolved to do our
duty and shall have been freed from vain reports. DEM. Phil. I, 54,
22. (See~ 17,N. 2).
NOTE 4. A circumlocution with the Aorist Participle and
iro'opa is sometimes found, especially in the poets. E. g.
0v crto;rco-ar trel; SoPH. 0. T. 1146. AvwrqOels o'et. SOPH. 0.
C. 816.
NOTE 5. (a.) When the Perfect is used in the sense of a Present
(~ 17, N. 3), the Future Perfect is the regular Future of that tense.
E. g.
KEKX\XroIi a, peecrr'opa,, aTri-oa, I shall be named, I shall re.
fruember, I shall withdraw, &c.
(b.) With many other verbs, the Future Perfect differs very
slightly, if at all, from an ordinary Future. Thus, 7reTrpdcroLaL is the
regular Future Passive of rr7TrpdaKo. Still, where there is another
form, the Future Perfect is generally more emphatic, and may be
explained by Note 1 or Note 2.
NOTE 6. The Future Perfect of the dependent moods is rare,
except in the verbs referred to in Note 5. When it occurs, it
presents no peculiarity, as it bears the same relation to the Indicative
which the corresponding forms of the Future would bear. L. g.




~ 30, 1.]      GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES.                 45
Tavra (4<qj) 7re 7r p  ec r fa a L  I TpLtV.epv, he says that
these things will have been accomplished within two or three days.
DEMn. F. L. 364, 18. (Here the direct discourse was rerrpdierac.)
REMARK. It must be remembered that, in most cases in which
the Latin or the English would use a Future Perfect, the Greeks
use an Aorist or even Perfect Subjunctive. (See ~ 18, 1, and ~ 20,
N. 1, with the examples.)
GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES.
~ 30.    1. The Aorist and sometimes the Perfect Indicative are used in animated language to express
general truths.   These are called the gnomic Aorist and
the gnomic Perfect, and are usually to be translated by
our Present.
These tenses give a more vivid statement of general truths,
by employing a distinct case or several distinct cases in past
time to represent (as it were) all possible cases, and implying
that what has occurred will occur again under similar circumstances. E. g.
K dr 0 a v' 6Cl o   r asepyoS avrp o Te Ti-oXXa Iopyic, both alike must
die. 1. IX, 320. "Ocrre Kal AXKtfov dV3pa  o1 f e KCaL a  tl  r o
VlK:v, who terrifies, and snatches away. Il. XVI,177. (See Note 2.)
Bla be Kal fiyciXaVXov'crfqaXev ev Xpo'vP. PIND. Pyth. VIII, 20.
boio&  e j.eXXovra rptralov avelov E ta a0ov oV' v7r KEpct X (a ev.
PIND. Nem. VII, 25. Kaul   qbiAov TLc E KT av dyvotas vTO. AESCH.
Supp. 499.'AXXia Tra rotara els tvy v  raa  Kal tpaxyv xpdvov
advrxet, Kat o-rdo'pa ye 7'vOc-rev E7ra 1 aL;7rnvr La, A  r VXY, TO
XPovP be (xoparaL Kal T7rep avra KarappeL. DEM. 01. II, 21, 1.
(See Note 2.) *HYv apa.... raXo4at, tvdvrA~rlaUavres aXXa 1ir X i
pcra v Tr7Y Xpeav, they supply the deficiency (as often as one occurs).
TaUC. I, 70. *Hv   e rtL roUrOov rt 7rapal3aLvyr, l7lulaav avTroLs Cre0e c a v, i. e. they impose a penalty upon every one who transyresses.
XEN. Cyr. I, 2, 2. AeItvv r' arlaja irvyevaTov  K o0 L. iC- f crevovra
rodvrov. SOPr. Aj. 674. Mi' iluf'pa r'O p/ev KCaOelXEIv Vbi+Ev, rov
8' hp' aco. EUv. Ino. Fr. 424. "Orav o'Epcos eyKparEToarpos yEvrqra,
a) 0 elpe & re rroXXh Kral 1Ktlj-re v. PLAT. Symp. 188 A. *Orav
rtS WOTarep ouTS ro l(TrXlc, r) prprrl jrpoao'TrL KaCL lLKpov 7rratLcra alravra
avexalrTcre Kdal ieXvcev. DEM. 01. II, 20, 27.'ETrebcdv rTc,rap' 4iov pULd0,'av piEv f3ov\Xrra, aL ro o8 8  ev o yw ITprTolpaa
dpyvpov, fav be 1i, eXOcov elt iepov olocras, ocrov av a  (,t{a ecval ra
/laOtAara, T0ov-rovT  Kare0?7 Key. PLAT. Prot. 328 B. (Here the
Perfect and Aorist are used together, in nearly the same sense, he
pays.) IIoXXoi ba b6{av Kai irTOXrITILKV avvapIv eyda Xa KaKa re o; v 0a



46                USE OF THE TENSES.                 ~ 30. 1
rl v, i. e. many always have suffered, and many do suffer. XEN.
Mem. IV, 2, 35. T 6     1e   I tO7ro&)v avavTaycviLrrT  evoia T ErL",/Arat. Tauc. II, 45.
REMARK. The gnomic Perfect is not found in Homer.
NOTE 1. The sense, as well as the origin of the construction, is often made clearer by the addition of such words as
iro\XXa'K, ir, or oveco. Such examples as these form a simple
transition from the common to the gnomic use of these
tenses:loXXk crrparTOrea'1r1 erretcev vn' iXacao'ovov, i. e. many cases
have already arisen, implying, it often happens. THUC. II, 89. MeXo'v y larpos, 7 vroa  &8bovs Xp6oovvj lacar' 1qr pLa\XXov 1 T~e, W
xpoda EUR. Frag. 1057. IHoXdKits iX[ov'rT ov;e rCivayKaLa Yvv a'pwov'oTr XoVrTr', c're Xa'repovs TpE(pELV, i. e. cases have often occurred
in which such a man has become rich the next day, &c. PHILEM. Fr.
Inc. 29.'Atvsoivryes avapes o6bTO) Tpo7ratov crT71raav. PLAT. Crit.
108 C. Ov8'Fsi E7Xr o Tr -E v TaXEcWs aiKaLOS Wyv. MENAND. Col. Fr.
6. (Kriger, ~ 53, 10, A. 2.)
NOTE 2. General truths are more commonly expressed in
Greek, as in English, by the Present. (See ~ 10, N. 1.)
Examples of the Present and Aorist, used in nearly the same
sense in the same sentence, are given under ~ 30, 1.    The
gnomic Aorist is, however, commonly distinguished from the
Present, either by being more vivid, or by referring to an
action which is (by its own nature) momentary or sudden,
while the Present (as usual) implies duration. See the second
and sixth examples under ~ 30, 1.
NOTE 3. An Aorist resembling the gnomic Aorist is very
common in Homer, in similes depending on past tenses, where
it seems to stand by assimilation to the leading verb. It is
usually to be translated by the Present. E. g.
"Hpl7rCe 8' as OTC TLS 8pOVs i'pL rev, and he fell, as when an oak falls
(literally, as when an oak once fell). I1. XVI, 389.
NOTE 4. It is very doubtful whether the Imperfect was ever
used in a gnomic sense, so as to be translated by the Present.
NOTE 5. An instance of the gnomic Aorist in the Infinitive is
found in SOPH. Aj. 1082:"Onov O8' V3plcilV apav f', Sa a3ovXraL, Trapfj,
Tavrqv vo/dt.Le r)v 7ro6Xtv Xpdv? 7rorT'Ed ovpiwv papoio'av 4s pivOov r e o' 6 v.




~ 30, 2.]     GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES.                   47
Here 7rs-elv represents ET7rOev in the direct discourse; the sense
being, believe that that city must at some time fall. (See Schneidewin's note.) So probably in PLAT. Phaedr. 232 B: iyovplev....
Laxopas' yevoFp-evr1s KOLVYV a/f07IoTepois KaracTTrvaL, Tr/V cv/f1opav.
Even the Aorist Participle seems to be occasionally used in the
same sense; as in THuc. VI, 16: ol3a rovs r TOOTOVS eEV ElVr T7 Kar'
avTrous f3li  Xv7rlpovS ovras., rTO  86 E TrCra avOpc)TrcoV TrpoaT7rolqOl
%vyyevetas rTal Kai 7) ovaav KaraXt r ov a s, I know that such men,
althouqh in their own lifetimes they are offensive, yet often leave to some
who come after them a desire to claim connexion with them, even where
there is no ground for it.
NOTE 6. The gnomic Perfect is found in the Infinitive in DEM.
01. II, 23, 14: el se rt or-apov r BaKCalS.... 7rapeaff ral Ka
Ev ovevos elvat fpepet roTv rooLrov (pq rfov), such a man is always thrust
aside, and is of no account.
2. The    Imperfect and     Aorist are     sometimes used
with   the  particle   av  to   denote   a  customary    action,
being equivalent to our phrase in narration, " he would
often do this," or " he used to do it."    E. g.
LA r    p   i r t  v  av roivs rt Xeyotev, I used to ask them (I would ask
them) what they said. PLAT. Apol. 22 B. EI rTves I3O0Ev'rV rovs
aOCTrpovs E7rLKparovvras, a v e 0 a p cr ca v av, whenever any saw their
friends in any way victorious, they would be encouraged (i. e. they were
encouraged in all such cases).  THUC VII, 71. InoXX\aKLs   KOUf a p, v a v T KaKcS' vp.as'!ov\XevTadvovs /xCya urpaypa, we used very
often to hear you, &c. ARIST. Lysist. 511. E'i rTC avbr T7repL TO
arVAeyoc /iEV EX(OV anes XEyElcV, E7e T7V V'ro0etCLv ETravJyev av
I7avra TOV XOyov, he always brouqht the whole discussion back to the
main point. XEN. Mem. IV, 6, 13.'OnorTe 7rpoo-I3XfE1e TWiva rTv ev
Tras rTaECTt, rore peV fv lr Vy  C V, c' vpes, K.T. X.. ore 8' av eV
aXXoLs ayv  Xef Ev. XEN. Cyr. VII, 1,10.
This construction must be carefully distinguished from that with
av in ordinary apodosis (~ 49, 2).   For the iterative Imperfect
transferred to the Infinitive, see ~ 41, N. 3.
NOTE 1.     (a.) The Ionic iterative Aorist in     -0Kov  and
-aKO'/IV expresses the repetition of a momentary action; the
Imperfect with the same endings expresses the repetition of a
continued action. E. g.
AXXkousV fiev /yap Tracias E/povs Troaas WKvS''AXCXXsva  rep v a X, vo
rCV' EXECtK. I1. XXIV, 751. 0OKo       6X8ot 6 NeiXos ert oKrca
7r1XEas, ap  C oKe ALYVwrrovT Trv EvepOE Me4.ALqos. HDT. II, 13.
(b.) In Homer, however, the iterative forms are sometimes
used in nearly or quite the same sense as the ordinary forms;
thus IFC~ in Homer does not differ from 77.   E. g




48                 USE OF THE TENSES.             [~ 30 2.
Aaijp avr' <fos OKE KVVW7rtLaOS E ('TOT  ye. 1n. HI, 180. EOS Ol
rXJlov?#, Xtcrra  e.fLv &   L c EcK e V. Od. VII, 171.
NOTE 2. Herodotus sometimes uses the iterative forms in — (KOV
and -o-Ko5/qv vwith av, in the construction of ~ 30, 2. (He uses the
ierative Aaoist in only two passages, in both with Jlv.) E. g.,Iotleovaoa KXaliaeKE av Kal osvpCaKreTo. HDT. III, 119.'Es
Tovrovs OKOs EXhto& 6 2KVrjs, T'JV pev orTpaT71^ K a r a X e L r 6  e Ev rT.rpoaorreti, i *VTOS 8e  KOcS   E Too& evs  T  XOSeos..   X.  da' K a'EXX.7vT/8e'cTira..  DT. IV, 78.
DEPENDENCE OF MOODS AND TENSES.
~ 3.    1. In dependent sentences, where the con~truction allows either a Subjunctive or an Optative,
the Subjunctive is used if the leading verb is primary,
and the Optative if it is secondary. (See ~ 8, 2.) E. g.
TIp&r7ovo'V a av,3o X ova T, they do whatever they please: but
ET7parvrov J3 o X o v r o, they did whatever they pleased.
2. In like manner, whore the construction        allows
either an Indicative or an     Optative, the    Indicative
follows primary, and the Optative follows secondary
tenses. E.g.
AeyovOa-v orT roTro  ov ovra, they say that they wish for this,
Xeoav orT rTOVTO f3o 0  o V, r o, they said that they wishedfor this.
NOTE 1. To these fundamental rules we find one special
exception:In indirect discourse of all kinds (including  sentences
denoting a purpose or object after 1va, 4,i, &c.), either an Indicative or a Subjunctive may depend upon a secondary
tense, in order that the mood and tense actually used by the
speaker may be retained in the indirect discourse. (See ~ 69.)
E.g.
Elrev ori f3ovXtrat, for EiET Tv or 3 ovXo ro, he said that he
wished (i. e. he said 3otXolat).'o3eoT3Ero i0 rTOvro ye V?7 a L, for
Efpo3eLro ti 7oro y E v o r o, he feared lest it should happen (i. e. he
thought, poofiovuaL / y V,; )Tac). (See ~ 44, 2.)
NOTE. 2. An only apparent exception to these rules occurs
when either an apodosis with I'v, or a verb expressing a wish, stands
mn a dependent sentence. In both these cases the form which would




~ 32.J     DE1'LNDENCE OF MOODS AND TENSES.             49
have been required in the apodosis or in the wish, if it had been
independent, is retained without regard to the leading verb. It
will be obvious from the principles of such sentences (Chapter IV),
that a change of mood would in most cases change the whole
nature of the apodosis or wish. E. g.'Eyro oVK ol8' o7Tros a'v rti (o'a(feo'pov e7rr tL  t e v, I do not
know how any one could show this more clearly. DEM. Aph. I, 828,
23. AeL yap eIKEUlv roVro ev br yv&CL 7rapaoarj'rat, co VLELs EK Tr7P
dayeXlas ravr77s...'l. Ow'  v o p/t  ( a T r.t DEM. Phil. I, 44, 25.
El 8' V/ets aXXo rL ysvd'ertOe, 8 /Aj) yevo roL, Triva oelrate avtrlv lvX7v
iEtv; DEM. Aph. II, 842, 14.
The learner needs only to be warned not to attempt to apply the
rules ~ 31, 1, 2 to such cases as these. See ~ 44, 1, N. 3 (b).
NOTE 3. A few other unimportant exceptions will be noticed
as they occur. See, for example, ~ 44, 2, Note 2.
REMARK. It is therefore of the highest importance to ascertain
which tenses (in all the moods) are to be considered primary, and
which secondary; that is, which are to be followed, in dependent
sentences, by the Indicative or Subjunctive, and which by the
Optative, where the rules of ~ 31 are applied. The general principle, stated in ~ 8, 2, applies chiefly to the Indicative, and even
there not without some important modifications.
~ 32.   1. In the Indicative the general rule holds, that the
Present, Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect are primary
tenses, and the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist are secondary
tenses.
2. But the historical Present is a secondary tense, as it
refers to the past; and the gnomic Aorist is a primary tense,
as it refers to the present.
See the first example under ~ 10, 2, where an historical
Present is followed by the Optative; and the sixth, seventh,
and eighth examples under ~ 30, 1, where gnomic Aorists are
followed by the Subjunctive.
3. (a.) The Imperfect Indicative in protasis or apodosis
denoting the non-fulfilment of a condition (~ 49, 2), when it
refers to present time, is a primary tense. E. g.
E ypa o v av nXiKa Vi6aS ev Wro tf )ro, el ev,jScfv, I would tell you
in my letter how great services I would render you, if I knew, &e
DEM. F. L. 353, 24. nacvv av c(o3ovoL, /) adjrop to(rat X6yYOv.
PLAT. Symp. 193 E.'E(of3ov;vr av aovqo6pa aXEyetv, PO d5)9
K. T. X., I should be very much afraid to speak, lest 1 should seem, &c.
PLAT. Theaet. 143 E. Tavr' av ij'8t Xeeyev E7reXELpoVW, V' eiL7Tr.
DEM. Aristocr. 623, 11.
3                            D




50                  USE OF THE TENSES.                   [~ 32
(b.)  On the other hand, the Aorist Indicative in the same
sense in protasis and apodosis, and also the Imperfect when it
refers to the past, are secondary tenses. E. g.'AXXa Kat rovs Oeovr &v  elcEavs 7rapaKltvaVVeVeL, Frif OUK Opn s au'ro
Trol ro   s *. PLAT. Euthyph. 15 D.'AXX' ove /Lera 7roXXiv tlaprvpO V aro&LBovs ELKf, TIL aSi TrloTTevEv, v' El Tir  y L  o r o biafopa,
Kotloaooaata paios Trap' VpL1v U~virTat. DEM. Onet. I, 869, 18.
(Here the Subjunctive ovvqraL will be explained by ~ 44, 2, but the
Optative shows that the leading verb is secondary.)*
~ 33. All the tenses of the Subjunctive and Imperative
are primary, as they refer to present or future time. E. g.
E rea-d' gTr7r av TiS r y ra c, follow whithersoever any one leads
the way. THuc. 1, 11.
~ 34.    As the Optative refers sometimes to the future and
sometimes to the past, it exerts upon a dependent verb sometimes the force of a primary, and sometimes that of a secondary
tense.
When it refers to the past, as in general suppositions after
el and relatives, depending on past tenses (~~ 51 and 62), it is
of course secondary, like any other form which refers to past
time.
When it refers to the future, it is properly to be considered
primary. In many cases, however, a double construction is
allowed: on the principle of assimilation the Greeks preferred
the Optative to the Subjunctive in certain clauses depending
x It is difficult to determine the question whether the secondary tenses
of the Indicative in this construction (~ 32, 3) are primary or secondary in
their effect on the dependent verb, as sentences of nearly every class depending upon them take by assimilation a secondary tense of the Indicative. (So in most final clauses, ~ 44, 3; in protasis after a, ~ 49, 2; and
after relatives, ~ 64.) There remain only indirect quotations, and the few
cases of final clauses that do not take the Indicative by assimilation; but
both of these have the peculiarity of allowing the Indicative and Subjunctive, when the writer pleases, to stand as they were in the direct discourse,
instead of being changed to the Optative. Madvig (Bemerku.ngen, p. 20)
classes them all as primary forms, considering the two examples of the
Optative after the Aorist, quoted above, ~ 32, 3 (b), as exceptions. Bu.t
these cannot be accounted for on the supposition that both Aorist and
Imperfect are primary: they are, however, perfectly regular, if we consider the present forms primary and the past forms secondary (as in other
cases); while the other examples in which the Indicative or Subjunctive
follows the past forms may all be explained on the principle of ~ 31,
Note 1I




~34.]       DEPENDENCE OF MOODS AND 1ENSES.                51
on an Optative, the dependent verb referring to the future like
the leading verb, and differing little from  a Subjunctive in
such a position.   This assimilation takes place regularly in
protasis and conditional relative clauses depending on an
Optative; but seldom in final and object clauses after &va, o0r09
/ur, &c., and very rarely in indirect quotations or questions.
The three classes of sentences which may depend on an
Optative referring to the future are treated separately: -
1. (a.) In protasis and in conditional relative sentences
depending upon an Optative which refers to the future, the
Optative is regularly used to express a future condition, rather
than the Subjunctive. E. g.
Ei'nt.s (qopjrTos OVKK av, El 7r pda'oSt Ka)Zs, you would be unendurable, if you should ever prosper. AESCH. Prom. 979.'Av8pi Nf K'
OVK E'tLE /eyaS TeXaFvtoo A'as,'E vrq'os r' ErI Ka' eoi Ar]L'qrpos
cKTqV. I1. XHII, 321. Ilos yap a'v'Ts, a I yE tz e7rlrraLTo, ravra
o-oq)os f'q; for how should any one be wise in those things which he did
not understand? XEN. Mem. IV, 6, 7. AEOLro hv avroD IE.fJev, e'ore
0V a7EXr6Ois. XEN. Cyr. V, 3, 13. EL awroiv',oKo /ev iraa, o-a
rov  v u e) fraXadoi, Etref 8Be a diroOdvo, e0 a 0  VOL E V TOVT/a..o.
Gp' oVb roXXq) dvdyKr/ TEXevTovra 7ravra TeOvd'val; PLAT. Phaed. 72 C.
D'Q  aTroXoTro Kal aXos, o T' rotaS oavrd ye  C peo, may any other man
likewise perish, who shall do such things. Od. I, 47. TeOvalirv, ore po&
fJl7K TL TavTa  X o I, may I die, when I (shall) no longer care for
these! MIMN. Fr. I, 2. (Here orav r/LqKTl /fX\7 might be used without change of meaning. But ore A X e t, found in the passage as
quoted by Plutarch, would refer to the present in classic Greek.)
(b.) On the other hand, the dependent verb is sometimes in
the Subjunctive (or Future Indicative with el), on the ground
that it follows a tense of future time.  This happens especially
after the Optative with a'v used in its sense approaching that of
the Future Indicative (~ 52, 2, N; ~ 54, 1, b.) E. g.
Hi oVv I, da 0  f i o TOVTOV, OVK hv diro8otlv, if then you should
(shall) learn this for me, I would not pay, &c. ARIST. Nub. 116. "HV,
ore ae Xo, a L, KaKiorT adroXotltqiv. Id. Ran. 586.'Eyc  E ravTrri>
plev T'V elpnVqiv, E(o av els AOqvalav  e L 7r r a, ov ETror av orvf,3ovX\ev1aTOL frooacrOaa T'j -r'XFL, I would never advise the city to make
this peace, as long as a single Athenian shall be left. DEM. F. L. 345,
14. (Here es'o XEriroTro would be the common form.)'aQ-7rep hv
UCOv EKOaroTros aloXvvPr6erT rTlv Tratv XIlTr f'  hv aO X0,y ev Tp 7- roXe,
as each one of you would be ashamed to leave the post at which he might
be placed in war. AESCIIN. Cor. ~ 7. (Here ia rax0Oei' would be
the more common expression.) TVOv aro7roTarTwV A'v e'r, el rauara
vvr6eIs!  7rpde a' iE DFM. 01. 1, 16, 25. Many such examples may
be explained equally well by ~ 54, 1 (a).




52                  USE OF THE TENSES.              [~ 34, 1.
NOTE. It will be understood that no assimilation to the Optative
can take place when the protasis (after el or a relative) consists of a
present or past tense of the indicative, as in this case a change to
the Optative would involve a change of time. See ~ 64, Rem 2.
2, In final and object clauses after Lva, OFrco, tx, &c., the
Subjunctive (or Future Indicative) is generally used when the
leading verb is an Optative referring to the future; the
Optative, however, sometimes occurs.  The preference for the
Subjunctive here can be explained on the general principle
(~ 31, Note 1, and ~ 44, 2). E. g.
(Subj.)'OKvol7rv aV ELs rh 7rXoia'Ef aLlv,  fL1) KaraTvo1Tn* boi3oi'
aIrMv   T av 7T iryEovL eIreOOLat, 1u) taLdas a ya'yn o00V ovX Olov TE Eo1-atL
ehX\0eiv. XEN. An. 1, 3, 17. Oi'oyaL iv Lvfs pe'ya ovo-rat TO  rpa'
rev/ia, efl O7rttLEX&\oelr7Te OSCo aCvrl roWv a7roXoXorXcov Cs TaXiTcra orpartyoI KCa XoXayoi avrtLKaTaarTaaOLtv XEN. An. III, 1, 38
(Opt.) lietpOirlJ v aLp  rpoc'o vpiov etvat, tva,c el 7ro Katpos eLrl,
E7r l b ave r7v. XEN. Cyr. II, 4, 17.'H (vXafiaK yeXola TLs ar (aiVOLTO, EL F7q TV7E E7rtfliOO OoTTTcES'EV$ v rT el o~-epo io. XEN.
Oecon. VII, 39.  Other examples of the Optative are AESCII
Eumen. 298 (e'X0ot, 07rico yevoTro); SOPH. Aj. 1221 (orns 7rpoOellrolev); SOPH. Phil. 325; EUR. Hec. 839; XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 22.
NOTE. In relative sentences expressing a purpose the Future
Indicative is regularly retained, even after past tenses of the Indicative. For exceptional cases of the Optative in this construction,
depending on the Optative with a/, see ~ 65, 1, Notes 1 and 3.
3. In indirect quotations and questions, depending upon an
Optative which refers to the future, the Indicative is the only
form regularly used to represent an Indicative of the direct
discourse. But in indirect questions the Optative is sometimes
found representing a dubitative Subjunctive of the direct
question (~ 88). E. g.
OM' aYv el cvreTlrot Os ov 0 vp (v. )pe r7 7TrXFL. DEM. Megal. 202,
24. El ovv vV aT7rosetXOEL rlva X P  7fyElcrat.... OVK av orrTre ol
7roX/Leon'eX0OLEY f3OVXeVe~0OaL 0/as;oL. XErN. An. III, 2, 36.
OVK aV EXoltS fEEXOV O rtp Xpo oavTr, if you should withdraw,
you would not know what to do with yourself. PLAT. Crit. 45 B. OVK
av eXolt o rt Xp qroa t0 aravrw, anXXn LXyytcorls a Kal xaoafio OVK eXoN
0 t E'Ir o L. Id. Gorg. 486 B. The direct questions here were,T
XPcowat; - rT Xpa'cowpa; - ri ETtO; The Subjunctive can always
be retained in this construction, even after past tenses. See ~ 71.
NOTE. In DEM. Megal. 203, 12, we find a case of the Optative in
an indirect quotation: OV yip EKid YE E iv e ( OtlnYev, Co dvradaXXacraO
ov oi                           o e 6' avrTlrdaovs AaK<eatztoov ovs dal q Q3aiw  There are




~ 35, 2.]  DEFENDENCE OF MOODS AND TENSES.                 53
no other readings, and it is doubtful whether we must consider it as
an exceptional case of assimilation (we could not say this, that we
wished, &c.), or emend it, either by reading [aovXo6fOa (as proposed
by Madvig, Bemerk. p. 21), or by inserting agv, which may easily have
been omitted in the Mss. before either cvraXXdaao-rOa or dvrTracXovs.
In PLAT. Rep. VII, 515 D, we find in the best Mss. T' t'lv o' avrov
enIrlv, eL TWL avrTp eyotL rt rdoe yfiv ipa Arvupias, vvv oe opo'repa
1 X7r oc, what do you think he would say, if any one should tell him
that all that time he had been seeing foolish phantoms, but that now he
sees more correctly?  Some Mss. read /XE`ire.
In II. V, 85, Tvaelav oVK Av yvolr7s'or7epoiorL.F ere I 17, the Opta.
tive in the indirect question represents ptereorTv, but oiK ay yvoolrs
here refers to the past, meaning you would not have known. (See
~ 49, 2, N. 6.)
~ 35.    1. The Present, Perfect, and the Futures in the
Infinitive and Participle regularly denote time which is merely
relative to that of the leading verb of the sentence.  They are
therefore primary when that is primary, and secondary when
that is secondary. E. g.
BOVXera& Xeyetl rl TOVTO  oIrTv, he wishes to tell what this is.
EB3OVXero XEyEYV Ti TOVTO E i 7, he wished to tell what this was., rjtv
adkKooevaL L  r LT v, he says he has heard what it is. "'Eq f  aKcKoEva&
Tr e'L1, he said he had heard what it was.  >17jcr 7trotrcElV 0 TL aI
S o Xr r 0 e, he says. he will do whatever you shall wish.'Ebq rroo7e tv  rt o T / o  L X o  0i  e, he said he would do whatever you should wish.
MevOVO-v 3ovXEJLvo el deva rl T ETr t.'E/Ecvov 83ovXodievot ELZevaC
Ti EfL I. MEVovcL  KK1rOTE T E TL.    Eevo   aK 7KtKOOTES rTi e  1.
Mevovartv aKovaUOeevo rL k(rTLv. "EEJLeov axovcoro0LEvo   TI e17.
NOTE.    When tlhe Present Infinitive and Participle represent
the Imperfect (without alv) they are secondary without regard to
the leading verb. E. g.
lFws yap oo'ide avUrXPFpo  aK o vv, e t V is s X y o; how unwillingly do you think they heard it, when any one said anything? See
this and the other examples under ~ 15, 3, and ~ 73, 2.
2. When the Aorist Infinitive in itself does not refer to any
definite time, it takes its time from  the leading verb (like the
Present), and may be either primary or secondary.   But when
it refers to time absolutely past, it is always a secondary tense.
E. g.
BovXErac -yvwvaL rL rovro' orLv, he wishes to learn what this is.'E/3oiXero yv&vat r'. reoiro e'i, he wished to learn what this was.
(~ 23, 1.)
But (qPL y7yvva rl 7TOVTO e, he says that he learned what this




54                 THE PARTICLE "AN.             [~ 35, 2.
was (~ 23, 2).'"Eq yv/CJvat rl ro'ro eat, he sard that he had learned
what this was. (rvcvat has the force of a primary tense in the first
example, that of a secondary tense in the others.)
3. The Aorist Participle refers to time past relatively to the
leading verb.  It is therefore secondary when the leading
verb is past or present and the Participle refers to time
absolutely past; but it may be primary when the leading verb
is future, if the Participle refers to time absolutely future.
E. g.'Ior'e iUav e O ovr a s a ToVro l i o L p e v, you know that we came
that we might see this.'Yir e n  lrv 7rahXa or avrbs raKEL p  o L,
WXero. THUC. I, 90. T i pdaTLY& T TcroETa) 7rXlJyas rV7TO K'PVKOS V
ayopa, K pv avTos ov  Va     X o  Ea  \  X t  7rrreaoat. PLAT. Leg. XI,
917 E.'rjowv deiaa /x eas Ob... Tpae6.  pee. ARIST. Vesp. 109.
4. The tenses of the Infinitive and Participle with av are
followed, in dependent clauses, by those constructions that
would have followed the finite moods which they represent, in
the same position. See ~ 41, ~ 32, 3, and ~ 34.
CHAPTER III.
THE PARTICLE *AN.
~ 36.   The adverb av (Epic Ice, Doric Kea) has two
uses, which must be carefully distinguished.
1. In one use, it denotes that the action of the verb
to which it is joined is dependent upon some condition,
expressed  or implied.     This is its force with the
secondary   tenses  of the   Indicative, and   with the
Optative, Infinitive, and Participle: with these it
forms an apodosis, and belongs strictly to the verb.
2. In its other use, it is joined regularly to ei, if, and
to all relatives and temporal particles, (and occasionally
to the final particles;?, o7rwo, and oofpa,) when these




~ 37, 2.]           THE PARTICLE'AN.                     55
words are followed by the Subjunctive. Here it seems
to belong entirely to the relative or particle, with which
it often coalesces, as in cav,  rav, o rare^Eav.
REMARK 1. The rules, ~ 36, 1, 2, include only the constructions
which are in good use in Attic Greek. For the Epic use of av with
the Subjunctive in apodosis, see ~ 38, 2; for av with the Future Indicative, see ~ 37, 2.
REMARK 2. There is no word or expression in English which can
be used to translate av. In its first use (~ 36, 1) we express it by
the mood of the verb which we use; as fovXoLro alv, he would wish.
In its second use, with the Subjunctive, it has no force that can be
made perceptible in English. Its peculiar use can be understood
only by a study of the various constructions in which it occurs.
These are enumerated below, with references (when it is necessary)
to the more full explanation of each in Chapter IV.
~ 37. 1. The Present and Perfect Indicative are
never used with av.
When this seems to occur, there is always a mixture of constructions. Thus in PLAT. Leg. IV, 712 E, ey bi ovrc vVv ~ialfl'r av
EfPOT718fL ovrS70, o0p E lrov, OVK eXo ELrELv, av was used with a view
to OVK av E'l/ot/L or some such construction, for which oVK f'Xo flreil
was substituted: the meanin- is, if I should suddenly be asked, I
could not say, &c. So in PL AT. Men. 72 C, Kiev El TroXXal... Elav,
EV yEe rT edIo ravrov a-ra-at e'Xouv-, i.e. eeen if they are many, still
(it would seem to follow that) they all have, &c. Examples like the
last are very common in Aristotle, who seems to use aiv el almost
like Kal E', without regard to the mood of the leading verb.
REMARK. Constructions like those mentioned in ~ 42, 2, Note,
must not be referred to this head. For ovK av POL hoKe ElvaL is
never it would not seem to me to be; but always, it does not seem to
me that it would be; av belonging to dvat.
2.  The Future Indicative is often used with av or
KE by the early poets, especially Homer.      The addition
of av makes the Future more contingent than             that
tense naturally is, giving it a force approaching that of
the Optative with aiv in apodosis (~ 39). E. g.'AXX''I, Ey 6e KE foi XT aproYv pFlav 7orXoTepaCv 86OcO, o7rvLUEevaL
Kal arv KeKXSrolOaL alKoirv.  I1. XIV, 267. Kal K e TLS  a' p epe E
Tpxoov 7rrepqvopEovTrcv, perhaps some one will thus speak. II. IV, 176.
0 6 K V K   oX   oer a I oy KEV tKolIaL, and he will perhaps be angry
to whom I come.  I. I, 139. EL 8' alye, rov.v a  e'yYv eT7rLOo/al* o
6e,ri-00ov. I1. IX, 167. nap' Jio&ye ai a\XXoL, or <~ Ae T Tl.-.




56                 THE PARTICLE'AN.               [~ 37, 2.
-ov rt, i.. who will honor me when occasion offers. II. 1, 174. E,
8''0OvOUeVs' f0ot Kai'tKOT Es' 7rarpisa yanav, ails K E av wv Brail 3lag
a ro r to ra devpW T. Od. XVII, 539. (In this passage the Future
with KE is used nearly in the sense of the Optative, corresponding to
the Optatives in the Protasis.'ATrorT[c1rat may also be Aorist Subjunctive, by ~ 38, 2.) MaOCwv BE TS tv Y p. PIND. Nem. VII, 68.
Kcv a'r' rT q)dvtov 4' o  a  aL a.  EUR. Elect. 484. (So the
Mss.)
NOTE 1. The use of av with the Future Indicative in Attic Greek
is absolutely denied by many critics, and the number of the examples cited in support of it have been greatly diminished by the
more careful revision of the texts of the Attic writers. Still several
passages remain, even in the best prose, where we must either
emend the text against the authority of the Mss., or admit the construction as a rare exception to the general rule. E. g.
AtyuVrrLovsu 86.... OVX  pC 7riroa UaVVdyeiL t(rvfiXdX o xprtC-d1tevo&
JfIaXXov &v KoXa'CrEcr f TIFlS vOv Ov CW eol ob'cs. XEN. An. II, 5, 13.'AIrL-XvpLoraaueol oe carEs a v [K a a (rar  s' r e ] aTrols aorO roL'l(rou
Viuav dia\hov 7rpoatepeo'OaL. THUC. I, 140. (Here most editors read
Karao-TrioaLre, on the authority of inferior Mss.)  E(77 ov'v TO
EpoTCOPEvov flrEeLV, OVx JKE, (cj avat, ol v  e &po, nor will he be
likely to come hither. PLAT. Rep. X, 615 D. (Here the only other
reading is Aot, which is of course corrupt.) "Erl.....yaov
Yrpos V/A(as  s E' 8E ol(ev$oltLIv, 7jBr a' v vflCOV OL Veil.... * rVTes
ravradrarL& 3ia(aOapqr'ovTaL. Id. Apol. 29 C.
The construction is perhaps less suspicious in the dramatic chorus,
which belongs to lyric poetry. See the last example under ~ 37, 2.
See ~ 41, 4, on the Future Infinitive and Participle with av.
NOTE 2. The form KE is much more common with the Future in
Homer than the form a'v.
3. The most common use of 9a with the Indicative
is with the secondary tenses, generally the Imperfect
and Aorist, in apodosis. It here denotes that the condition upon which the action of the verb depends is not or
was not fulfilled. See ~ 49, 2.
NOTE. The Imperfect and Aorist are sometimes used with
av in an iterative sense; which construction must not be confounded with that just mentioned. See ~ 30, 2.
~ 38. 1. In Attic Greek the Subjunctive is used
with av only in the cases mentioned in ~ 36, 2; never
in independent sentences.     See ~ 47, 2, ~ 50 1, ~ 51,




~ 41 ]            THE PARTICLE AN.                 57
and ~ 60, 3.    For the occasional use of av in final
clauses, see ~ 44, 1, Note 2.
2. In Epic poetry, when the Subjunctive is used
nearly in the sense of the Future Indicative (~ 87),
it sometimes takes Kc or av. The combination forms an
apodosis, with a protasis expressed or understood, and
is nearly or quite equivalent to the Future Indicative
with av. E. g.
E' n6 KE FLe &COLV, Eyo 3 K ev aivrb E'Xo pa, and if they do not
give her up, I will take her myself. I. I, 137. (Cf. i. I, 324.)
See ~ 50, 1, Note 2 (a).
NOTE. This Epic use of KE or av, with the Subjunctive must
not be confounded with the ordinary construction of ~ 38, 1.
In the latter the Spi is closely connected with the particle or
relative, while in the former it is joined with the verb, as it is
with the Indicative or Optative. It in fact bears more resemblance to the ordinary Optative with alv in apodosis in Attic
Greek, than to any other Attic construction.
~ 39. The Optative with av always forms an apodosis, to which a protasis must be either expressed or
implied.  It denotes what would happen, if the condition (expressed or implied) upon which the action
of the verb depends should ever be fulfilled.  See ~ 50,
2, and ~ 52, 2.
REMARK. Such constructions as are explained in ~ 44, 1, N. 3,
a, and ~ 74, 1, N. 2, are no exception to this rule, as there /iv does
not belong to the verb.
NOTE. The Future Optative is not used with iv. See ~ 26.
~ 40. The Imperative is never used with av.
NOTE. All passages formerly cited for av with the Imperative
are now emended on Mss. authority, or otherwise satisfactorily explained. See Passow, or Liddell and Scott, s. v.*Av.
~41.    The Infinitive and Participle can be usedt
with Av in all cases in which a finite verb, if it stood in
their place, would be accompanied with'av. This corn
3*




58                  THE PARTICLE'AN.                   [~ 41, 1,
bination always forms an apodosis (except il its iterative sense, Note 3): it can never form       a protasis, as the
finite verb never has av joined to itself in protasis.      (See
~ 36, 2.)
Each tense of the Infinitive and Participle with alv
forms the same kind of apodosis which the corresponding tense of the Indicative or Optative would form         in its
place.   The context must decide whether the Indicative
or the Optative is represented in each case.
1. The Present Infinitive and Participle (which represent
also the Imperfect, by ~ 15, 3, and ~ 16, 2), when they are
used with dv, may be equivalent either to the Imperfect Indicative with av or to the Present Optative with av.       They can
represent no other form, as no other form of the Present is
used with av in apodosis in the finite moods.   E. g.
rTlv ar       AEvOpov a  ovS X epovs av e L  a l el TrTO  rpaaav, he says that
they would (now) be free, if they had done this (elvat adv representing
i(rav av, ~ 37, 3).  trlqaiv aVTOv'S e'XvOepovs av eLvaL, el 70To7
7rpdCietav, he says that they would (hereafter) be free, if they should do
this (elvat av representing etijaav Av, ~ 39). O'luo0e yap TOv 7rarepa
OVK aV (PvXaTTrftv Kal TqV Tt^vL/V X ap,3a ViVY TOyV vwv; dO you
think he would not have taken care and have received the pay?
DEM. Timoth. 1194, 20.     (Here the direct discourse would be
E(PvXaTTrrv av Kal iXca3avev.)  Olfat 7yap a v OVK axapLUTCao  FOL
X e v, fbr I think it would not be a thankless labor; i. e. OVK av eXot.
XEN. An. II, 3, 18. Maprvp[o C'Xpwvro, y) tav varr par eve, e
[f T7L joLLKOUv  oLS E7re-av, that they would not join in expeditions, unless
those against whom they were marching had wronged them. THUC.
III, 11. (Here evrorparevelv av represents evve(rrparevov av.)
Ol3a avroVS eXevOepovs aY oVra S, eL roVro errpatav, I know they
would (now) be free, if they had done this. Olsa avrobv eXevOE'povV
av ovras, Et roVTo 7rpadetav, I know they would (hereafter) be free,
if they should do this.  (In the former ovras av represents la-av av,
in the latter erLo-av av.)  TC. v Xa1f3avovrTwv 8LKrlv oVTeS av  t1Kac1ts
(i. e.'prLev av), whereas we should justly be among those who inflict
punishment. DEM. Eubul. 1300, 8. "On7rp E'oXe?l.... 7iTV IEXorrdvvqraov propOeiv, AUvvarToav avy OTW  (vItc5v) e7rL3oQelV, when you
would have been unable to bring aid (sc. if he had done it). THGc. I,
73. hIIo'   vv   XoV erep' eLTrELv  IrepL avrrs 7TrapaXTrro, although 1
might be able (if I should wish) to say many other things about it, 1
omit them. DEM. Cor. 313, 4.'Airo 7ravros'av bEpwv X6yov aLKalov
IXaxdvria TTOLKLXOv (i. e os wv qEpotl), thou who wouldst derive, &c
SOPH. 0. C. 761.




~ 41, 3.]             THE PARTICLE'A7;.                       59
2. The Perfect Infinitive and Participle (which represent
also the Pluperfect, by ~ 18, 3, Rem.), when they are used
with ai,, may be equivalent either to the Pluperfect Indicative
with [v or to the Perfect Optative with auv.   E. g.
El I) Th'S perTas vrep avrI v EKeLvas ol MapanOvt KaL SaXaatuvt 7raQEtrXovro,.     7rdvra Tav8'  Vt7roT Trv  ap3adpoov av  a ) KE va 
(sc. )j-cLEv av Tis), if those at Marathon and Salamis had not exhibited those deeds of valor in their behalf; any one would say that all
these would have been captured by the barbarians.  DEM. F. L. 441,
21. HIere eaXcoKevat av represents eaXobKeorav av, Plup. Ind.)'AXX'
OVK a y?yo0vaL av arovs 8iK rva daiav 8 e 8o K va, El aKpoaao'afevo
aVTrOv Karartl7lcrlaatUe, but I do not believe they would (then) have
suffered sufficient punishment, if you after hearing them should condemn them. Lys. XXVII, ~ 9. (Here the protasis in the Optative
shows that 8eKeoKVCaL al represents 8fcOKores vw Elev (~ 18, 1); but
if the protasis had been el Kare+rlTjo'ao-Oe, f you had condemned them,
8eboKCva awv would have represented 8es&wKeO-av av, they would have
suffered.)  See also, in ~ 8 of the same oration, OVK av adroXCwXEvat...  XXa  8EGoKeYvat.'Avopa7ro8ws 8EL v a Y tKalws KeCKX o  at
Jy7Ero. XEN. Mem. I, 1, 16. (Here KeKXAoOatL a   represents KEKXqrfe voi alv Etv.)
These constructions are of course rare, as the forms of the finite
moods here represented themselves seldom occur.
3. The Aorist Infinitive and Participle with aL may be
equivalent either to the Aorist Indicative with av or to the
Aorist Optative with alv. E. g.
OVIK av 7^yeir O avT o' KaV r t 8 p a Le v; do you not believe that (if
this had been so) he would even have run thither? i. e. OvK av er-e
Bpapev; DEM. Aph. I, 831, 10. "Avev 8i OeL(raio   oib a v O oOL bOKEL rT
rolovro   v fui  v al yeveoOat (oVK a v vlfp3jval representing OVK a.
_vvaig?), but unless there had been an earthquake, it does not seem to
me that such a thing could have by any chance happened. TIHU. III,
89. Tobs'AOrvalovs rljxntVY'caw  a v e Ef E \TXOE1V KaL rT7V yrjv OVK
av re pPL8 eiv rTjLf7rlvat (i. e. LOOEs av eTeiEXOoLoev KCa oVK av 7repdoltev). Id. II, 20. Ov'8' av KpaTrjaal avrovs V Ts yEs Vyoviat (i. e.
KparT(reav aiv). Id. VI, 37.'AXXa pqaolcs a v d q e 0 e l, el Kal pETrpls TL ToVTUr efTOL7o'e, 7rpoEfXTro arroOavEiv, whereas he might easily have been acquitted, &c. XEN.
Mem. IV, 4, 4.     Ka el dELa7Tdr -e o'rIrep JeFLE, eV L'TIev k auv
acrcrov vUjas Xuvrt)povs yevo.evov vo Tols;vr.LauxoS, KaL daayKaa   vras aav i apXEtv, K. r. X. (i. e. oVK aYv yevecaOe, Kal 7vYayKdra'O7re
av), if you had become odious as we have, we are sure that you would
have been no less oppressive to your allies, and that you would have
been forced, &c. THUC. I, 76.'Opav TO 7rapareLXLIaT a ct7rXov V,. Kua
e7rL KpaTrq'ELe rte.... palwos eA aVr X  ) 0 v (i. e. pabi)w aS
1roTb Xqj(JOil), seeing that it would easily be taken, &c. Id. VII, 42.




60                  THE PATICLE "AN.                [~ 41, 3
Ov"re ovra ovre a  y e v  v a Xoyo7roLovL'tv, they relate things which
are not real, and which never could happen (i. e. OVK av yEvotrT). Id.
VI, 38.
4. The Future Infinitive and Participle with av would be
equivalent to the Homeric construction of aiv with the Future
Indicative (~ 37, 2). As, however, av is not found in Homer
with either the Future Infinitive or the Future Participle
(see below, Note 2), this construction rests chiefly on the
authority of passages in Attic writers, and is subject to the
same doubt and suspicion as that of the Future Indicative
with av in those writers. (See ~ 37, 2, Note 1.) In the
following passages it is still retained in the best editions, with
strong support from Mss.
Noul'ovTre, EL rauvrrv'rpcorrlv Xa3OLtV, paalo a v a r io lt r'X\a
7 p o aX  p r  L. TH:c. II, 80.   (Here the direct discourse
would regularly have beer either in the Fut. Ind. without aJv, or in
the Aor. Opt. with av.)  The same may be said of TIuc. V, 82,
voiWv   eyIyTrov    v aV L ( s   X V oe le v. (Here one Ms. reads by
correction'&OeXrcrat.)  See also THUc. VI, 66; VIII, 25 and 71.
EXoX  7Tro0' r e tLv evp' a v e$vXvOVV eyc, I declared that I should be
very slow to come hither again. SOPH. Ant. 390.'A1CeTE  } /77 C altre,
&o qfov OVK a v TrolT'Tov ros XXa, ova' el /dXXo 7roXXadKLs TrevvaL.
Plat. Apol. 30 C. Tos 05rtoi v av EKE'VV 7Vro &  rova s avyprlKores (K
rTS 7roXero)s EE(TCE. DEM. F. L. 450, 27.  (Here Cod. A. reads
7rTOtL4'aTras.)
NOTE 1. As the Future Optative is never used with av (~ 39,
Note), this can never be represented by the Future Infinitive or
Participle with Lv.
NOTE 2. The Participle with A> or K' is not found in Homer or
Pindar. The Infinitive with a; occurs in these poets very seldom,
and only in indirect discourse. E. g.
Kai 3' a v TOl akXXOLv eI   a p a Ti  v r  a pav  ac t l.   11. IX, 684.
(The direct discourse is given in the words of Achilles in vs. 417,
Kal  av'.... 7rapaLLV0rqa-caqrlv.)
NOTE 3. The Infinitive with aIv sometimes represents an iterative
Imperfect or Aorist Indicative with I' (~ 30, 2). This must be
carefully distinguished from an apodosis. E. g.'AKOco Aafc8atfLLoviovS Tore E/fL3aXovra av  l Kal KaKOoaavra  ras TrV  paa
a va X cpev E  Or'KOUv 7raixtv, I hear that the Lacedaemonians at that
time, after invading and ravaging the country, used to return home
again.  DEM.A Phil. III, 123, 16.  (Here avauXwpeiv av represents
aveXopovv al in its iterative sense, they used to return.)




42, 2.]            THE PARTICLE "AN.                     61
NOTE 4.   lhe Infinitive with av commonly stands in indirect
discourse after a verb of saying or thinking, as in most of the examples given above.  Occasionally, however, it is found in other
constructions, where the simple Present or Aorist Infinitive is regularly used. E. g.
Th 8e evSro OUT''S EKaLero, Oare,o'ra a'v Es v8op dvrxpov or4as
aTOVs p 7r T e v, so that they would most gladly have thrown themselves
into cold water. Tllnc. II, 49. ("'Z-re pahrreLt would be the ordinary expression here: with'v it represents an Imperfect Indicative,
EpprTTov av.)'EKELvOVS aT7rEo('TrpTKEva, EZ Kal Kparotev, /li av c ErtL cPa
da r o re X o a t, to have deprived them of the power of ever again walling
them in, even if they should be victorious. Id. VII, 6. See ~ 27, N. 2
(a), for an example of 3ov'AoiaL and the Infinitive with av. We
have given examples of verbs of hoping, &c. with the Present,
Aorist, and Future Infinitive; they sometimes take the Infinitive
with a/v, as a slight change from the Future; as in THuc. VII, 61:
Tob 7rs TrvXS KaV elEO' )Iv;XV AEXrnavres arYTvaL. (See ~ 27, N. 3.)
EXirtiCo is found also with os and the Future Optative in THUc.
VI, 30; and with ws and the Aorist Optative with av in V, 9.
NOTE 5. The Participle with dv can never represent a protasis,
because there is no form of protasis in the finite moods in which a;l
is joined with the verb itself. For examples of apparent violations
of this principle, incorrectly explained by Matthiae and others as
cases of the Participle with av in protasis, see ~ 42, 3, Note 1.
~ 42. 1. When av is used with the Subjunctive, if it does'
not coalesce with the relative or particle into one word (as in
iav, lrav), it is separated from  it only by such words as /e;y, e,
re, yap, &c. See examples under ~ 62.
2. When av stands in apodosis with any verbal form, it may
be either placed near the verb, or attached to some more emphatic word in the sentence.
Particularly, it is very often placed directly after interrogatives, negatives, adverbs of time, place, ^&c., and other
words which especially affect the sense of the sentence. E. g.'AXXh -I r  8  Oe8  v Oeparfea 4'Lr av X o-o'r'?; PLAT. Euthyph. 13
D.'AXX' 6pis To KrfdaiXatov a'uov ps   av LroiL. Id. 14 A. Ov
av 8of rov' avbpaja I)Xqs epvu-ao peTflrEXAOv, TvSbeir8v, Os Wvv ye av Kal Ai
7rarpti /LaXOro.. V, 456. IlE At rov a/uTvX&zTarov, e'XOpov arqlua,
trov T~ barcrapXas o3XOecr-av (3acLXi, TreAXo Odvoclpi KCaLrTOs. SOPH. Aj.
389. Tdaxltr' v re 7ro'XLv ol TOlOTO& ETepOVS 7rELoavTes daroXeo'etav.
THUC. 1I, 63.
NOTE.    For the sake of emphasis, av is often separated
from its verb by such words as olcolatc, aOKE'), uqfS, oiaz, &c.  In




62                 THE' PARTICLE "AN.              [~ 42, 2.
such cases care must be taken to connect the av with the verb
to which it really belongs. E. g.
Ka( vvv 8esos a'v /oL t    OKi KOLVWV o-aL, and now I think I
should gladly take part (av belonging to KoLvwvi-aC). XEN. Cyr.
VIII, 7, 25. 03' a v V/els oi' TrL E7r a v o a or 0 e roXLovTer, nor
would you (I am sure) have ceased Jighting.  DEM. Phil. II, 72,
25. Ti ov a,,  r7pq, etq 6 "EpcoW; PLAT. Symp. 202 D. This is
especially irregular in the expression OVK olba av el, or OVK av ola
ei, followed by an Optative to which the av belongs; as OVK ol' a v
L 7r l o a.L L, I do not know whether I could persuade him (sc. if I
should try). EUR. Med. 941. The more regular form would be
nVK otla e 7r e L I  a t LL a v. See Elmsley ad loc. (vs. 911).
3. *Av is sometimes used twice, or even three times, with
the same verb. This may be done in a long sentence, to make
the conditional force felt through the whole, especially when
the connection is broken by intermediate clauses. It may also
be done in order to emphasize particular words with which it
is joined, and to make them prominent as being affected by the
contingency. E. g.
"aT' A v, el os';vov Xa/otLL, l  eros Xao   r a' t   av o' avro7s <pov,.
SOPH. El. 333. OVK tav?I^yeTO' avrov KaV e7rt paie pv. DEM.
Aph. I, 831, 10. Ovr-' Atv EXdvTre avs50  dvoaXoiev av. AESCII.
Ag. 340. "AXXovs y av oVv ohlde0a ra y/xTerepa Xa3odvras 8 ea L  a v
IaXltora E( rt ie'rptaCopiEV. Tnuc. I, 76. (See ~ 42, 2, N.) Ovr'
av KEXEVtcratiL, ov'r' aY, el OeXots ErT, rpda-Letv, eFov y' v  ewicos 3pSr'spera. SP. S. Ant. 69.  Aeyco KaO''KaaoTov oKeV a v L o Trov UaVTV
avopa rap''a)iLv IrAT IrXelora  a v ei8r1 Kal pera xapwcov /LdtXLcr' a v
Evrpanreos r67 0r)ta avrapKes TrapEX ( Oa L. THuc. II, 41. (Here
av is used three times, belonging to 7rapeXeo(-lt.)'Y~&,v 8e (prfpos.v OVK av lKavos olpat elvat OuT aLv tjiXov wEhjr1(raL ov'T av euXOpOvV
aXEa'Oats. XEN. An. I, 3, 6. (Here av is used three times, belonging to ELvat.)
NOTE 1. This principle, taken in connection with that
stated in ~ 42, 2, by showing that av can be joined to any
word in the sentence which it is important to emphasize, as
well as to its own verb, and even to both, explains many
cases in which a'v and a Participle appear to form a protasis.
(See ~ 41, Note 5.) If a Participle takes the place of a
protasis, it is of course one of the most important words in
the sentence, and one to which the particle av is especially
ik~ely to be attached.  The alv, however, does not qualify
such a Participle, any more than it does a negative or in



4 2, 4.]            11 HE PARTICLE'AN.                    63
terrogative with which it is connected for the same purpose;
but it always belongs to the principal verb of the apodosis.
E.g.
NoYtcare r TE r aAovX Kal r7 p/eorov Kal  7rdv av dKptles av a  vKp i0 v   aiXto-r' av la X ve v, believe that these, if they should be
unued, would be especially strong. Tiuc. VI, 18. (Here vyKcpaOe;
alone (not with,av) is equivalent to el $vyKpa6eliq (~ 52, 1), and the
al is placed before it merely to emphasize it, as containing the protasis to the verb lo-Xveiv, to which this av, as well as the other,
belongs.)'Ayc3vas a  rtis' poL 8OKEL, ('?q, )7 7rarefp, r poe C 7r
eKia0roCs K(a fitOXa 7rpOLporteLs IdaXLto   av rTOLv v EaU KeiLOCat, it
seems to me, said he, father, that if any one should proclaim contests,
&c., he would cause, &c. XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 18. (Here the protasis
implied in the Participles is merely emphasized by av, which belongs to roerlv.)  AIyovros a v Trvos 7r  rv a' a otcr0e; (i. e. el
rTS E'XEyev, erio-Lrevocav av;) do you think they would have believed
it, if any one had told them? DEM. Phil. II, 71, 4. (Here too the
av stands near X;yovros only to point it out as the protasis, to which
its own verb rxrrevoat is the apodosis.)
In these cases, the protasis expressed by the Participle is affected
by the av, only as the ordinary protasis with el is affected in the
example from SOPH. El. 333, quoted above, under ~ 42, 3.
NOTE 2.'Av is sometimes used elliptically without a verb,
when one can be supplied from the context. E. g.
O0 OlIKETaL peyKovcv' a'XX' OK a v TrpO TOv (sc. eppeyKov), the slaves
are snoring; but they wouldn't have done so once. ARIST. Nub. 5.'.s our av darowv TrOwv' av e$eTFroLtL T  OUT ao  TKV revoLo Tos E/lOLE,
rTEpy ov Efi)wo. SOPe. O. C. 1528. So frco?yap av (SC. et'); how
could it? 7r-os OVK ay; and similar phrases; especially'wrTrep av el
(also written as one word, asorepaved), in which the av belongs to
the verb that is understood after EL; as Soo3ovevoEs or7rep av EL
Iras, fearing like a child (i. e. fo3ovILSevos cdoTep ay cp)ov &8tl)JOf l rais
1V). PLAT. Gorg. 479 A. (See ~ 53, N. 3.)
In like manner av may be used with el in protasis, or with a conditional relative, the verb being understood; as in XEN. An. I, 3,
6: CS eovV O   vro OVTOS O 7 av Kal viels, oro UTC T1V yvWoptv EXETE.
(That is, 07 r7 av Kalt /EiS 7Tqre.)
NOTE 3. Repetition of KC is rare; yet it sometimes occurs, E. g.
Tcj K e fdaX' K e v efLELVE Kal Ercf'vOLEvds   rep 68oio,
KH K E Pe TEOvrav'evm teyapoLtoIv XetrLev. Od. IV, 733.
On the other hand, Homer sometimes joins av and Ke in th- same
sentence for emphasis. E. g.
Kaprepal, as oTr' ai v K e v Aprs ovoarairo iJerLX\OWv
Oire K''AOrq1air Xao(roaoos. II. XII, 127.
4. When an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses




C4                   THE PARTICLE IAN.               [~ 42, 4.
with the same mood, av is generally used only in the first, and
understood in the others; unless it is repeated for emphasis, or
for some other special reason. E. g.
Ov8' a v edE, ]7vt'Ka &evpo ciroI7rElV e3oUXO'ALy, KCaT KCOrX\vEV, ov8e
roLavra X\yetv TOVT'ro  rpoo-rerarev, e  $7 v r JKoYK' VtFELE E/ehXerT
EleYVac. DEM. F. L. 357, 3. (Here a'v is understood with 7rpoeTaTrev.)  OVTrco 6 3pv o( OE6V a lV &Ldpov TOV EEpOV 7rTL oI, aXX'
ETrl aVTOr dJtafoTrepoL LOtev. PLAT. Rep. II, 360 C. OVKOvv Ka v, el
7rp s avTr  o T' s ]OC  vayKao&L avrov 3Xe7rEv, d h y e lv re a v ra o64Lara
Kal  EV7fLV aiv dToTpEdiO)6evov (o'f); Id. VII, 515 E. (This example illustrates also the principle of ~ 42, 3, Kav belonging to the
Infinitives.)  See also XEN. An. II, 5, 14. Hadvra jpeL 6 (4iLt7r7ros,
7roXXa Xeyovros epov Kat OpvXOvvros del, rT pIev 7rpcTrov OS ia v el KOLVOv
IYC)/L?)Y arrocJ LaO/I~vOV, jIE7a  vavra  (0 5' ayY VTa5 Ba'o-KOYT09, TEX'EV
yv op)rv d7ro(avopevtov, perTa rara 8'os'dyvoo0vras 33dcrKovros, TeXevTovro'S e cos av rapos 7re7rpaKoras alvroVS Kal dvoao'irTaovs c('0pw7rovs
OVe,;v v7roa-TXXo/E;voV. DEM. F. L. 390, 5. (The first'iv belongs to
drrefaLYv6p0'qv implied, as I should have declared it, if I had been speaking
to inform my colleagues; in the following clause the same tense (ei'BaLrKov) is implied, and'v is not repeated; in the third clause, on
the contrary, an Optative is implied, cs ay Xeyot/u, and therefore
the a'v again appears.) In PLAT. Rep. III, 898 A, we find av used
with two co-ordinate Optatives, understood with a third,, and
repeated again with a fourth to avoid oonfusion with a dependent
Optative. "Av may be understood with an Optative even in a
separate sentence, if the construction is continued from a sentence
in which aSv is used with the Optative; as in PLAT. Rep. I, 352
E:-"EEa-' orto iv aXXcow  0otv    dq00apyots; Ov  frTa. Ti &e;
aKov cr a t? aXTo  w tv; So with vrpdrroc, Id. IV, 439 B.
NOTE.    The Adverb rdaa, in the sense of perhaps, is often
joined with av, in which case the phrase rdX' av is nearly
equivalent to'iwos. This, however, cannot be used unless the
Jv would form an apodosis with the verb of the sentence, if the
raxa were not joined with it.   Thus rda' &v yyevoro means it
might perhaps happen.   So -ra' Bv EyVyero means it would perhaps have happened; but it can never (like   coC EyeyVero) mean
perhaps it happened.




~ 48.]       FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.        65
CHAPTER       IV.
USE OF THE MOODS.
THIS chapter includes all those constructions which
require any other form of the finite verb than the
simple Indicative expressing an absolute assertion (~ 2).
The Infinitive and Participle are included here only so
far as they are used in indirect discourse, or in Protasis
and Apodosis.
These constructions are divided into the following
classes -
I. Final and Object Clauses after tva, as, 0o7rs,
oppa, and /..
II. Conditional Sentences.
III. Relative and Temporal sentences.
IV. Indirect Discourse, including Indirect Quotations and Questions.
V. Causal Sentences.
VI. Expressions of a Wish.
[II. Imperative and Subjunctive in Commands,
Exhortations, and Prohibitions.
v II. Subjunctive (like the Future Indicative) in
Independent Sentences. - Interrogative Subjunctive.- Ou m U with the Subjunctive or
Future Indicative.
SECTION      I.
FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTEIR Iva,'QOw7rcoS, *Opa.,
AND Mi.
~ 43. The clauses which depend upon the so
called final particles, Eva, Jo, orcoo, o6oa, that, in
B




66.F'NAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.          [~ 43.
order that, and, lest, that not, may be divided into
three classes:A. Pure final clauses, in which the end, purpose,
or motive of the action of any verb may be expressed,
after any one of the final particles; as "pxera   21'va
TOVo "yq, he is coming that he may see this; a'repwxTaI p7 TOVTO 6o, he is departing that he may not see
this.
B. Object clauses with oTrow or o7row,u  after verbs
of striving, &c.; as OIC7oreW owroce? evoe-Tat, see that it
happens; o'core& 07r)rO? J / 7evra7eOTac, see that it does
not happen.  These clauses express the direct object of
the verb of striving, &c., so that they may stand in
apposition to an object accusative like TOVTO; as OWc7OrEb
TOUTO 07rOTrV l ae o OCeTa, see to this, viz., that he does
not see you. They also imply the end or purpose of the
action of the leading verb, and to this extent they partake of the nature of final clauses.
0.   Object clauses with u   after verbs of fearing,
&c.; as oi3opVat Ad YvrrTat, I fear lest it may happen;
fo/3ov/La  a pT VO TO  ~yeJPrTO, I fear lest this happened.
These express simply the object of fear, without even
implying any purpose to prevent that object from being
realized.  Thus if we say qofiovpat TOVro, pLt icacwOv
r      paIw, Ifear this, lest Imay fall into misfortune, the
clause with /u- merely explains Troro, the direct object
of fo/3ovat.
REMARK. Although the object clauses of the class B partake slightly of the nature of final clauses, so that they sometimes allow the same construction (the Subjunctive for the
Future Indicative, ~ 45), still the distinction between these
two classes is very strongly marked. An object clause, as we
have seen, can stand in apposition to a preceding roTro;
whereas a final clause could stand in apposition to T70oro




~ 44, 1.]          PURE FINAL CLAUSES.                     67
VeKaS as'PXErUL -rorou CvKaC, va rl'V /oorrfa, he comes for this
purpose, viz., that he may assist us.  The two can be combined
in one sentence; as orovSdieL 0rcSw 7r ov r 7 e, tva Tros q)\ovs
V 7r o t,  he is eager to be rich, that he may benefit his fiends.
Care must be taken not to mistake the nature of an object
clause, when its subject is attracted by the leading verb; as
rKOeriV TY    7r TrXIv o'X W S rv wO'qa-~TLa for cKOrTEWV oTwrcS 1 7rtOXls ay-oooerat, to see that the city is saved.
NOTE 1.    "Obpa is found only in Epic and Lyric poetry.
NOTE 2. The regular negative adverb after uva, cs, orcos,
and ofpa is ur; but after, lest, ov is used.  E. g.
*A7repXrat, LVa Fi) rovro t 1, he is departing that he may not see
this.  Ioj3srat IfzL ov ro3ro yrvqrat, he is afraid lest this may not
happen. This use of ov as the negative after tp seems to have no
other object than to avoid repetition of pa. Where, however, the
sentence is so long that this repetition would not be noticed, we find
1l7 repeated; as in XEN. Mem. I, 2, 7: EOav.zaCe 8' EL T....oTO LI' ) 6 yevoYLevO  KaXos Kaya0os T() Tra!eyLtora evepyeTrqoavr&
IL ) ryTv.EcEyLaTr v  XCpiv eoL.
A.   Pure Final Clauses.
~ 44.    1. In pure final clauses the Subjunctive is
regularly used, if the leading verb is primary; and the
Optative, if the leading verb is secondary.     E. g.
Ni v a ePXefo' e7rt 8eIrvrov, Iva vvdayo/pelv  "Apra. II. II, 381. sol
8 &Oe JLvra-Trpes vIroKPvovraL, lv edL rlS avros a-6 ovyI, cla oa o8e
rravres'AXoaio. Od. II, 111. Ei'rro TrL 8ara KaX\, v' opyy tj 7 rXeov;
SoPn. O. R. 364. Kal yap 3ao(rtXevs alpeira, ovX Zva Eavrov KaXo)
Er t teX)rai, daXX' Iva Kal ol U6Oievot V' avroYv c  par r p  a t.
XEN. Mem. III, 2, 3. AOKEl ot KtaraOKava&aL ras ad/AaCa, Iva ur) ra
eV~;y7?fl(Ov a- paTr?~y7. XEN. An. III, 2, 27. "Q&pvvu', I'V  avarotoLt
Wpo's ( fpoat M8e fporolaL. Od. V, 2.   Io'Xos'i3ovXero elvtU TolS
feytLcrra avvafJVots, L va a&KtOV /1?) 8L011 8lKrv. XEN. An. II, 6,
21.
BovX^v 8''Apyetols vTFro01o0TIfO, ri ovra'e, o,L ) ravreTs  o o wvTrat& o8vcaalevoLo TEoLo. I1. VIII, 36. AlavoeTra& Trv ye(fvpav Xcrat,
Ws I) 8ta j37j7, aXX' ev Lea'r daro a7 )0r16e. XEN. An. II, 4, 17.
Ilet)ve' EU'pvTOV, Ws Av'yeav Xdarptov pLtfOrOV  p rP  r o r o. PIND.
01. XI (X), 34. Tovrov rveCa L&Xtw (erTO &ea-oOal, ws avvepyol
iex o. XEN. An. I, 9, 21.




68               FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.              [~ 44, 1
Tiv 8e tzvoa-r'peS' XOXootv,'Ir-oS brrTO cpXov O'Xfr77 at'IacKrs.
Od. XIV, 181. M/0c Tro'8' ayyoso vuv, oTCo rs 7ra'v fdJcO r. SorPi.
El. 1205.  Eis KalpOv 0jKELE, 7rcoW  T rs 3LKJS dC o'o.E. XEN. Cyr
III, 1, 8. I1apaKuXfiS larpovS, Orcot t' ax 07o0 a dv   XEN. Mem. II.
10, 2. Oltyat 8e Tavra ylyvea-Oat, ovX O7rcos rovs avrovs Xopovs Kptvwoatv otl rom rat, ov6' TcoUS roVS avTrov avXr rqvs rEratviS otv, ov6
orwco TovS aVro'VS rotT ras ai p  vratr ot,3 Ltva TOls avTros 1 o V r 
dXX' Iva rols vd/oLS 7Tre LOo) vra. XEN. MIem. IV, 4, 16.'Ev XeiPEr
a(lv' r1Kev, o7rcs'TL Tt7rfi.a  v yotf7. Od. XIV, 312.'ETrpeorfSeovro
EyKXr7/Lara trotovEvot, 07rco (rT(ItLv Oln peylrTT  7rrrppo(aotes e ri rov
7roXefELtv.. UC. I, 126.
KeCfa\j: KaravevioyLoat, fipa  re7roiO'E. II. I, 524. "Opcreo 8
oVV, Eive, TrrXLw' )'I, V 5L f pa ae 7rJe t. Od. VI, 255. AOdov
IepfrefpEovaSs eIX, 04p' 18olr  viv e'iTr, g. PIND. 01. XIV, 30.
Avrap fioLt,efpas atvrtX'  rotaioara, oppa LTu oloE'ApyeiOv cyepaofros
co. f1. I, 118.  SsD  6 lepv EvOa KareaXer' eretyo/eLvos Trep 6o80o, o'p'
erapov  a r r o t KaL E7rl KTEpea K p r  L r e E.   Od. III, 284.'AAXa ov) fEv vvv avrts a7rdoTrre, LrX Tt v o1 Cr, *Hp' * eol - E K~E rT&vra
teXjacerrat, ofpa T~r \reCtTo. II. 1, 522. Oi tjr' av'rv a$eLS aFvpoa [T4
rSC dvapird('r; SOPH. Aj. 996. AvorreXE    eaaL ev rc irapovrt, fi
KCi TOVTOV 7roXEltov'  rpo O8  e 8 a. XEN. Cyr. II, 4, 12. Ae'yerat
tilrev onrt artevatL {3ovoLTro, pl' 6 0TTrarp Tt aXSotTo Kal qj 7TrXty usV(o ro. XEN. Cyr. I, 4, 25.
NOTE 1. The Future Indicative sometimes (though rarely)
takes the place of the Subjunctive in pure final clauses, after
07rcov and o0'pa (07rcos A, O')pa tj); -never after Iva or cs, and
very seldom   after the simple pyt.   (Mrj with the Future is
commonly found only after verbs of the next two classes;
~~ 45, 46.)   Here, as well as after verbs of striving and of
fearing, the Future differs from the Subjunctive only by being
a more vivid form of statement. E. g.
Atel 8 /taXaKoLcr& Kal alivXlota  dyoolrt OXryet, o7FODS'IOCuKrqs TrrX I -
e rat. Od. I, 56.    08ve 8t' Ev SXXo Tpcfovrrat 7 L 07rOo FLaXovU 7at
V7rEp rcv rpe(f)6vO v. XEN. Cyr. II, 1, 21. Xp! daval(3f3dcitv Emr rov
rpoXb~v rovs dvayparPEvra, 6ioors L p) 7drpoT v vvV  e o 7 a c 7TrpL 7rvOEaIOas
rovS Wvapas a7ravras. ANDOC. de Myster. I, p. 6, 38. ~ 43.'Err'
avrovS ToVs 7rpoX6yovs arov Tpei/opat, 6l7rcoS To rpwrov T77s Tpayotlas
p;poe 7rp)artaTov /3acravt&. ARIST. Ran. 1120. In Nub. 1466, O&'oW
aroXaels iereEXdov (not per' EloV tX0') is to be explained by ~ 45, N.
7. EOpcarvvov ye ol 7rop E)  L fpE(rla, oqfpa Kait EKTcop  re rat. II.
XVI, 242. So Od. IV, 163. lQarT ELKOS?)elags i7 f3paSvetv (cri, (i0
Kal TLS Ot-crat XtO JL tra0(  KarTElrn7. ARIST. Eccles. 495. So Ifi
KeXOXC'oTera&, I. XX, 301. This construction is very rare in Attic
prose.
NOTE 2.    The Particle iv (Ke) is sometimes joined with




~ 44, 1.]           PURE FINAL CLAUSES.                      69
Wr, &7raB, and of)pa, before the Subjunctive in final clauses;
especially with Cs and o'qpa in Homer.   The av here is always
joined to the particle, and (as in protasis) it adds nothing to
the sense which can be made perceptible in English.    E. g.
HIIEo,o s av /Iot TipqV [EYlaXY KLr1  K0U vOS ap al t, obey, that thou
mayest gain for me great honor and glory. I1. XVI, 84. (Here as
Av aprqat seems to be merely a weaker form of expression than Ws
/iprat would have been.)'AXX''t, tli I' pe OLe, raco'repoV s K KE
ver at, that thou mayest go the more safely. II. I, 32.'AXX' ovros pev
VVv crol iL' eGeraL T, 8of pa KV ev8 E  O i L atOiv ei VLeyapoIcLv. Od. III,
359.  Ilpocrlsoefea.... o'vfITrEf+aLt'L pv,   s i av   Vy  tEXco A v
EK rEs XCpqJr. HDT. I, 36.'AXX' EcaZco/ev, /'Xot, EK?1Xov aLVTO, Ws
av els VVOV T relo. SOPH. Phil. 825. Tovri Xaf3v Iov TO crKLa8eov
V.rEpEXe avIOEV, Zs t v ti pV'  p  a Lt ol FEoL. ARIST. Av. 1508.
Ka (Oare CLauV roovrov elvaL, o0 7rTs av () a vr Tat wo Ka\XXa'rTo Kal
apt(rTo. PLAT. Symp. 199 A. AAv ye rtvas VTroro7Te7V, eXkevpa
fpovi LaTa efovTa piwx) EvLTpe-+ELv avirTo aIPXeC, (7roXe\ovs KLveL) o0'W 
av orOVT OVC uEr TrpofaioCeCo a7ro XX, that he may destroy them.
PLAT. Rep. VIII, 567 A.'Qs &v     tid0o s, avraKov-ov. XEN. An.
1I, 5, 16. See also An. VII, 4, 2; AESCH. Prom. 10 (os av), 824
(o'rcos iv), Eumen. 573 ('rcos av).
NOTE 3. (a.) Homer and Herodotus sometimes use aiv or KE in
final clauses with the same particles before the Optative, with no
apparent effect upon the verb. E. g.
Kaui tLv iaKcpo'Tpov KaL Tdcrioaova O!KEv Le a'-aL, CO  KEV IatlKnKeo(T-i
)iXos ravTreo - 7  o y  voTO. Od. VIII, 20.'Evvwpap 6' ECs TeiXOS'e
poov iE 8*''apa ZevS oavexe, o f) p a K E Oacoov hXoirXoa relXEa 0 Lin.
I1. XII, 25. 2v & pe E  rpolEts ies tarTEpa, Olp' av.X ol   v Ufps.
Od. XXIV, 334.     AlcopvXa (cpvaacv), Oi;Kcw  a v TO orpaTrdre8ov
lSpvetvov Kara vc'rov X a3 o t. HDT. I, 75.  Tavra 8E 7wfpL EOVTOv
(EOfLVVE TraVE ElVeKeM  O K s'a av ptq opovres oL otXtLKES  X 7rE o a o
Kalt E7rtfLOUvXEVOt(V  aXX' frepoloidS aot OK ot ELvat /tL) o6port, in
order that his campanions might not be offended by seeing him and plot
against him, but that he might appear to them to be of another nature by
their not seeing him. Id. I, 99.
(b.) Apart from this use, however, the Optative can be regularly
joined with f'v in any final clause, if it forms an apodosis with the
verb, to which there is a protasis expressed or distinctly understood.
Such Optative with a'v can follow primary as well as secondary
tenses. (~ 31, N. 2.)  E. g.'HyeL'   3poo opx7Opolo, os KE V TlS  a lr yadov'ftevat EKTOVS aKOVCv,
let him lead off the dance, so that any one who should hear without
would say there was a marriage. Od. XXIII, 134.'Qs 8' av
j8toira cavT  a L v  o t  T o O, aTo TtS avrTo) Tavra rapaoCKevda'et, lit. bui
e'ach one must acquire these things for himself, to cause that they would
appear most agreeable (if any one should experience them). XEN Cyr.




70              FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.. ~ 44, 1
VII, 5, 81.'EUaKe XPLptara'Avra\XKia, o7ros ahv, 7rX7rpi)OSeroG
vavrTKov v7TO AaKEoaqlLovlvov, ol'AOqvaiot tLaXov rcs ELpqJVqS irpoo-'
EIOLvT O. XEN. Hell. IV, 8, 16. (Here wrX~rpoevOros VavTLKOU, iJ
the navy should be manned, stands as a protasis to the Optative
Prpoo;EoLvro a'.)
Such sentences as DEM. Phil. II, 66, 15, W  8e KCo X  a Lr' av
EIKloV 7rpT'preLv 7Taura, 7ravTeXSs apyws EXErT, but as to any measures
by which you could prevent him from doing these things, you are wholly
inactive, are not final clauses, but relative sentences with an antecedent implied. See ~ 65, 1, N. 4.
REMARK. M', lest, can be followed by a verb with avl only in a
regular apodosis after verbs offearing, &c. (See ~ 46, N. 3.) "Iva
is never used with alv, except when it means where. A single case
of iva with Ke in a final clause occurs, Od. XII, 156:-'AXX' ipf4e
fpe v Ey;oV, vIa EL8ore 7F  Ke OavCfoev;'  K e V adXVa/evoL Oavarov KGa
KrIpa   ody LJpev.  But here the Ke belongs not to Iva, but to the
Subjunctives: see ~ 87, Note.
NOTE 4. A purpose can be expressed by a relative and the
Future Indicative (~ 65, 1), or by the Future Participle (~ 109, 5).
For the use of co're to express a purpose, see ~ 98, 2.
2. As all final clauses express the purpose or motive
of some person, they admit of the double construction of
indirect discourse (~ 77, 2); so that, instead of the Optative after secondary tenses, we can have the mood and
tense which the person himself might have used when he
conceived the purpose in his own mind. That is, we
can say either \XOev'va Sot, he came that he might see
(by ~ 44, 1); or YXOev va i'8, because the person himself
would have said epXo/at'va       o, I come that I may see.
Hence the Subjunctive in final clauses after secondary tenses is nearly as common as the more regular
Optative. E. g.'Etn KX    avro 8' o\eOpov avpopwUrolS, va cr' Kal T'ro'oevoo'iv
dao8l. Od. VIII, 579. Kal E7rlT7r)ES re OVK'7ye pov, Iva ws 7ro'cra
t3iy r. PLAT. Crit. 43 B.    IIXoiac KareKavorev Zva pT) Kvpos
8tai,. XEN. An. I, 4, 18.'AXXibv' av rot ar' oBOaXpFv EXOv,
rTpLV e7nrqy, 4Pp EP yIVt0vKlC(TEKq,Ev 0e'v qf~j Kat avopa. I1. V,
127.'Aptlorrc's vve/ovXevev eK7rXeo~aaL, O7TcoS e7l 7rX\ov d6 Tros,4ir ioV X   T. T. I, 65.'HXOov 7rpeo('fevo'-6evoL, onsrcS,,zr) ticr, T-'ArrTLKO (YavrltKo) Trpoo(yevopEvo ef/;roldOov yVq  T-ra. T. T. I, 3i.'EXcpovv EK Tr&  oiKit&v, OTirw  I) Kara M p   7r po or(epa' vTa  Ka)
aTcla0-LlV IK TOV L0-OV yLyv'ovTat, adXX.... Jfroovs 3 co-. THUC.




44, 2.] SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER SECONDARY TENSES.               71
II, 3. Tav'rav Zva KV pta' o01 V  L   Yaov, oX     Kvpias
roigs aiLKOiVo-t TrOLTre. DEM. F. L. 341, 12. Kai 7Tfpl TOVTWV /LVTY0qv, iva /4 ravra r d0 qr e. DEM. 01. III, 30, 10. (Here the pur
pose was conceived in the form, Iva al) ra   r a 0 co 0  v.)
REMARK. This principle applies equally well to the clauses
which follow T07rco and o7roO p'i after verbs of striving (~ 45), and
ju5 after verbs offearing, &c. (~ 46).
This is a favorite construction with certain authors, as Thucydides; who also, on the same principle, prefer the Indicative to the
Optative in ordinary indirect quotations after secondary tenses.
See ~ 70, 2, Remark 2.*
NOTE 1. This use of the Subjunctive instead of the Optative makes the language more vivid, by introducing as nearly
as possible the exact words or thoughts of the person whose
purpose is thus stated.
As the two forms are equally correct (the only difference
being that just stated), we find them both in the same sen.
tence, as we find the Indicative and Optative interchanged in
indirect quotations. (See ~ 70, 2, Remark 1.) E. g.'ESaKOa-lovS Xoyaas f EfEKpLvav,'rCoS TWV TE'E-roXov e I q a a oi
fVXaKCe, Kai Eqv e. ammo -t &,n, TaXv vureorTrTes rapaylyvwvrat,
they selected them, that they might be guards of Epipolae, and that they
might be on hand if they should be needed for anything else. THUG.
VI, 96. liapavLarXov 8e qppVKTovS, o7rcwdo a'aqfr Ta r7,ieia TrolS roXEfLiots
a A fia  o q  o   oi v, they raised fire-signals at the same time, in order
that the enemy's signals might be unintelligible to them, and that they
(the enemy) might not bring aid. THUC. Ill, 22.
The ordinary interpretation of the latter and similar passages,
proposed by Arnold, viz. " that the Subjunctive mood indicates the
immediate, and the Optative the remote consequence of the action
contained in the principal verbs, the second being a consequence of
the first," manifestly cannot apply to the first example.
NOTE 2. (a.) The use of the Optative for the Subjunctive in
final clauses after primary tenses is, on the other hand, very rare,
and is to be viewed as a mere irregularity of construction. It occurs chiefly in Homer. E. g.
"A o ) Ti,''IOdKr],, va pot 3orov oroXv ov a'X  o. Od. XVII, 250.
So II. I, 344, 7rrnroS LaXEoa'To.
* Madvig remarks (Bemerkungen, p. 12) that he finds in the first two
books of Thucydides no example of the Optstive after oir'os or yp depending on a secondary tense of a verb of striving or fearing; although he
cites fifteen examples of the Subjunctive from the same books. In pure
final clauses after secondary tenses, the usage in Thucydides is nearly
equally divided between the Subjunctive and the Optative. Xenophon,
on the other hand, generally follows the rule, ~ 44, 1.




72              FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.             [~ 44, 2.
(b.) Sometimes the Optative is used because the leading verb
implies a reference to the past as well as the present. E. g.
Torov CXEt rOv'po'irov 6 voiJos', Iva,tuti e tretol vat pfir' Eawrarl.
rval yevoT r' eir Trj 6rfio. DEM. Androt. 596, 17.  (Here EXeL
implies also the past existence of the law; the idea being, the law
was made as it is, so that it might not be possible, &c.)
3. The secondary tenses of the Indicative are used in
final clauses after L'va, sometimes after o? or'rrww, to
denote that the end or object is dependent upon some
unfulfilled condition, and therefore is not or was not
attained. This construction is peculiar to Attic Greek.
These tenses of the Indicative have here the same difference
in meaning as in conditional sentences (~ 49, 2), the Imperfect
referring to present time or to continued or repeated action in
past time, the Aorist and Pluperfect to past time. Thus Iva
Torro e rpaTTev means in order that he might be doing this (but
he is not doing it), or that he might have been doing this (but he
was not); iva TOVTO gErpaFev means that he might have done this
(but he did not); Iva TroVro EirerpaXEL means that he might have
done this (but he has not). E. g.
OVK av o(r'XOf1Lv, K. r.X., V Iv   TVcX\OS Tr Ka KX\VIY lpV rv, in that
case I should not have forborne (to destroy my hearing), so that I
should be both blind and devoid of hearing (implying that really he is
not so). SOPH. O. T. 1387. (Ei, (   Ev, TO   ra 7rpdypaar dvOpobrots
EXetv cowv/v,' L  r'aav 1LrEv o' beLvol Xoyot, Alas! alas! that the
facts have no voicefor men, so that words of eloquence might be as
nothing. Eun. Hippol. Frag. 442.'EXp^V et'-KaXE'a'avaas a dprvpas
Vro\Xobv 7rapao'r7fiuao-Oat KEXEvo'at TaS L taOKas, LV', eL TI Ey7yvero
adytL0ir3r)Tr1zJov,? V ElE ra ypdcLiaara TraV  e7raveXO\6v. DEM. Aph.
II, 837, 11. (This implies that they did not have the will thus
sealed, so that it is not now possible to refer to it in case of dispute.)'EXpeV aVTOVS CrTEv, L va d rr JX Xdy e 0 a roVrov TOV Tr 8iaycyov,
they ought to have made an investigation, in order that we might have
been already freed from this demagogue (but we have not been freed
from him). DINARCH. in Demosth. p. 91, 24.'Errlo't ev abv iLe rOv
rat3a, v' el q 7rrape8loVv L7IEV B[KCaLOv X;yeFv eLV 6 g o K v v. DEM. Aph.
III, 849, 24.  Ti /x' ov Xat(3iv EKTreIVa  evOObv,  s E'ELta /yLrrore'cavrbv d vOparroLo-Lv E'Oev j yeycs; that I might never have shown as
I have done. SOPH. O. T. 1391. El yap Vi WMO yrjv /KEV, as p/jTe
eOS frT Tire L   OS tXhoX rorb'  E 7E  8 y f Ft, would that he had sent me
under the earth, so that neither any God nor any one else should have
rejoiced at these things (as they have done). AESPH. Prom. 152. (If
we read   e rey 0 e,  we must translate, miqht be rejoicing, as they




~ 45.]    SECONDARY TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.              73
are.)  Ti ryr.... ovK  pplPP' Efavrrqv Tj' aZro 7rerTpas, 0SrW
Tr6 7Travrov 7rvovv a 7rr XX dy 7 v; why did I not throw myself fiom this
rock, that I might have been freed from all my toils? Id. 747.
REMIARK. This construction is especially common when a final
clause depends either upon an apodosis which contains a secondary
tense of the Indicative (~ 49, 2) implying the non-fulfilment of the
condition, as is the case in examples 1, 3, 4, and 5, above, or upon
a verb expressing an unfulfilled wish, as in examples 2 and 7. In
these cases the Indicative seems to be used by a sort of assimilation.
NOTE 1. The particle any is very rarely joined with the secondary tenses of the Indicative in final clauses. When it is used, it
denotes that the sentence is an apodosis (as well as a final clause),
with a protasis expressed or understood. E. g.
ZiAvrL f3EL /0orjOEv, OrCoS 0otL &Katoraros! w Kal o'cTWraTos  E'C  re
cOv KaL TeXeUrTTcras aL/ttcprqTos a V KaLK:WV aiiaprqtfiarrv  y iy ve o,
i. e. that he might be exempt from punishment after death (as he would
be, if he had so lived). PLAT. Leg. XII, 959 B.
NOTE 2. The Indicative can never be used in this construction,
unless it is distinctly implied that the result is not (or was not)
attained, that is, unless the final clause refers either to the present
or to the past (as in the examples given above): if it refers to the
future, it must be expressed in the ordinary way by the Subjunctive
or Optative, even although it depends on one of the class of verbs
mentioned above (Remark). Both constructions may occur in the
same sentence. E. g.
OON (Tra  vEcov TOVS dyadovs) qj1LESiv v. ( fkvXadrroFLev ev aKpo0roXelf
Lva pBeisr avrovvs 8E 6e~ipEv, e aXX* e Ere8o adrIKoLVTO 6Els TV'XtKLav, XprlJtpLo yLyvotLVo Tais T76rXEow, we should have kept them
(in that case) in the Acropolis, that no one might corrupt them (a.s
they are now corrupted), and that when (in the future) they should
become of age they might become useful to their states. PLAT. Men. 89
B. Tair' Av rj'8r XEyEV ITpos vpaLs erEXEipov, iL vE  7 tc,. K.T.X., I
should (if that were so) be now undertaking to say this to you, that you
might (hereafter) know, &c. DEM. Aristocr. 623, 11. See also the
examples under ~ 32, 3 (b.).
B.   Object Clauses with'o7rn s and'07rcs ur after Verbs of
Striving, qc.
~ 45.   After verbs signifying to strive, to take care, to
effect, and the like, the Future Indicative is regularly
used with o7rwo    and OfrWo   PL, if the leading verb is
primary.    The Subjunctive also occurs, but much less
frequently than the Future.
4




74              FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.               [~ 45
If the leading verb is secondary, the Future Optative
may be used, to correspond to the Future Indicative
after primary tenses; but generally the Future Indica.
tive is employed here also, on the principle of ~ 44, 2.
The other tenses of the Optative are sometimes used, to
correspond to the same tenses of the Subjunctive after
primary tenses; or the Subjunctive itself may be employed (~ 44, 2). E. g.'E7rtqALEXraE 057 o (or orcors p') yevo-eraL or yevrTal, he takes care
that it may (or may not) happen.'ETEr/IcXETro ao7co yevoreraT, yevroo7ro0, or yevoTro, he took care that it should happen.
(Fut.)'Qairep ToV wTOtIeLva gel erifLEeloOa e   orrcs ca'uL rf eaovTal aL oLEs Kai Ta e7Trr7Beta e oV C LV, OVUr  KaL TOV crparrqyV E7rLfuXEtOaCaL 8El OT"r   crool re oL crpartlcrat E ro vraL Kai rha ErtTi8Ela
o0 V 0I, Kal, ov eveKica erparEFvovrai, rovro e(GTrai. XEN. Mem. Ill,
2, 1. KaXo 7 To TCrapaE-KEVdifEv oiros us (EXTLiTTLraL E(rovTaL TOWV TroXtTCV ai JvXat. PLAT. Gorg. 503 A. Mt'Kpav 7rpovotav EXELV 8OKEI 07rws
6 vOiuos KvploS eUraT Kal xi ILTE  (TV )yXV0io-eJrat E r  av  TLeraTro LlO o'erat; DEM. Aristoer. 640, 10. KaXcs 8E rulayay(o'Y(rOeL,
jv OKOrTosT o   ros olt 3XTLOrrot   TLev ras TLas e o v a- t V, ol 8' AIXot?Lqi8ev daitLK'ovrat. Isoc. Nicocl. p. 18 A. ~ 16.'Opa cKWos t
daroTrr7rovrTat. HDT. III, 36. 2ol /.LAeO) OgKWS,  r 0e O' /ErTL.
IHDT. I, 9. IpovrLt' o7roT COS,8rlhv davaov Tr7E rtpLs rlavUrqs Tr padet.
Isoc. Nicocl. p. 22 B. ~ 37. Ti /pLdXTor' v 1Trao-t tLEoTroV8ao-TaL Tole
VO/IAoLt; o7rCOs 17 y V1 j(ova vr a L trEpL a\XX\Xovvs FovoL. DEM. Lept.
505, 9. EAci EvXae3L(TOa, 1udXLtrra t flv J07rwS pO  f yevE a- aro  ov, av
f eyyEvrcJo0-ov, Ors Tl  OTr TaXiCra  K re TF rf o-rOov. PLAT. Rep.
VIII, 564 C. (For the force of the Future Perfect, see ~ 29, N. 1.)
(Subj.) ^AXXou TOV t eriLeXAoet,  OrOsot ort SEXrftrot TroXiTOtr
W  e v; PLAT. Gorg. 515 B. Ilapao-KevdcCeoOat 0L7ro n rV Or 8e ay ov -
C(o p ea. XEN. Cyr. I, 5, 14. OU yap orcoS 7rXELovoS ah'toS yev lrat
eLrt/eXE rat, akXX' OrTC  avros OTt TrXeaorra  opala KapTrCo'Trat.
(Subj. and Fut. combined.) XEN. Symp. VIII, 25.
(Fut. Opt.) WEiq VT7rO ToXXi  C7rILf~eXlas Orrwo IS;X EXto'(ra 1fpe
O+OLTO, dXaxtlrra 8 aKo'o-oroL, eXdXIcrTa 8' Epo ro.   XEN.
Oecon. VII, 5. (Here the construction after a primary tense would
be, oT7ro o'TC+raL.... KoVo'ral.... Ep7raL.)'E7rEEXfETro oTrCO
pi acrtTrol TorTE E'OLYro. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 1, 43. See the other examples of the Future Optative under ~ 26, Note 1 (a).
(Fut. Ind. after Secondary Tenses.)'Ernpacaov o0r7o rTs /ojOeita
4eLt. THUC. III, 4. IIpoOuvr10evros evos iKS KaCrov O7rTos 1 vavs 7rpoLELt. THuc. VI, 31. EvXaE/lioOalt'r apeKFiXEIveFO-' aXXjXots, oroTs /
X  fe Tre 8ta(apElVTr. PLAT. Gorg. 487 D. OhV' Oo U  opO Ir Xf -
o'eract'rpoeiTro,  aXXta Ka' avrv  7re  ro   r eXOpoiv tfra
rapfrEG-KvaaEv. DE:M. F. L. 419, 28.
(Pres. or Aor. Opt.)'E7rCf/eXro avrTW OrTsE d(lf daVpaLTrosa o La.




~ 45.]'O7rwS AFTER VERBS OF STRIVING.                   75
7rEXotEV. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 1, 44.'A7refKpvaro, rOT    avrq) p.lot
o7Tros KcaX\gs E'Xo. XEN. An. I, 8, 13.'Ei/tLIEXKEL 86 av rols oT5wY 
ir7raypeTr)s el   el t OV? BEOt wTrEfLcty. XEN. Hell. III, 3, 9.
(Subj. after Secondary Tenses.) "Esrpaa-rev o' rovX re/ios yev ra t. THUc. I, 5 7. "ETrpacro-oov o7rcos a ro cr T'o' co  v'AOrlvalwv rqv
7TO\;M. Id. III, 70.'Q2vEi7a srap avr  a       mrvv 07rc /s) atrlcoF  E v  MaeSoctisl, he bribed them to effect that we should not leave Macedonia
IDEM. Cor. 236, 12. (Subj. after Historic Present.)
It will thus be seen that the Future Indicative is the mos,
common construction in these sentences, after both primary and
secondary tenses; the Future Optative, which is theoretically
the regular form  after secondary tenses, being rarely used, for
the reason stated in ~ 26, Note 2.
For the distinction between these object clauses and final
clauses, see ~ 43, Remark.
REMARK. "OvrwS (like g;) is originally a relative adverb, meaning as. See THUC. VII, 67, orv-co, osrcos Gvavrat, as they can,
Then it is used in indirect questions, in the sense of oTr rpo7rn, how,
in what way, and is followed by the Future Indicative; as arK07orTE
Oi   s ij AoLXs  o' o  r a L, to see how the city shall be saved.  So
Troi 7TrorpOLs, 073 O  /x' ) 8o crOr 0 V  8iKfiV, o8hOv BfLKvvoL, he shows them
how they can avoid suffering punishment (or9 rporA' t     ha-~ovo-').
l)EM. Timoc. 733, 20.    (See below, Note 2.) Tlen, by a slight
modification in sense, it may denote also the object to which the
striving, &c., is directed; so that aKowreuv (or a-KOreiv ToUro) rrco0 i
7rodXis a-cgOrjerat may mean to see (to this, viz.) that the city shall be
saved. Here, however, the Subjunctive is sometimes allowed, as
the interrogative force of 0iiroS is lost sight of, and its force as a
final particle, meaning in order that, begins to appear. E. g.
KO7TrrLt S0rrS to  1)  apvos Eoe& a vvv Xeyets, see that you do not
deny what you now say. PLAT. Euthyd. 283 C.        2Ke7rreov aoTrlv
o r w  fXa axltfra fv rTpavtzara X d (3w  ev, os eXaXLtO-ra 8e ro ara
adv8ps v d7ro /3 aX wo  e v, we must see that we receive as few wounds as
possible, and that we lose as few men's lives as possible. XEN. An. IV,
6, 10.*
From this it becomes established as a final particle, and denotes
the purpose in ordinary final clauses. From the original force of
O7&rc as a relative, used in indirect questions in the sense of how, we
* Compare DEM. Megal. 207, 5, arKo7rrev iE 0'rov rpo7rov /U  yev -
arov ra (()IXot), to see in what way they can be prevented from becoming
fiiends; and THuc. I, 65,'E7rpac'raev oirrr bf~eXla TrE yevre7Tat, he
was effecting tAat, &c.; quoted by Madvig, Syntax, p. 125, whose views in
the main are given in the text, above. See also TnHc. IV, 128, itrpaorreV onr rpo'-? raxtara rols sL'Vu Vlj3ri-e ra&t r&  8e aT7raXXa eTas.




76              FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.                [~ 45
must explain its occasional use in indirect quotations in the sense
of bW or ort (~ 78). See also ~ 65, 1, Rem.
NOTE 1. "OTnar in this construction sometimes (though rarely)
takes the particle av when it is followed by the Subjunctive; never,
when it is followed by the Future Indicative.  Its use is the same
as in ordinary final clauses (~ 44, 1, N. 2).
When a'v is used with the Optative after a verb of striving, it
denotes an ordinary apodosis, as in ~ 44, 1, N. 3 (b), and o0'7rw is
simply interrogative. E. g.'H'XAov e(f'JLeEvoC 8LKa&rovOCt  A roTovTo, TrcoWS a v EKacro 70   T'
EX(o o TardXorpta urLre T7WV avov o rTpowvraL; PLAT. Rep. IV, 433
E.'Eav 8 E'XAt, iLrqXavnrTeov, o7rwoo av  L a (vyf Kat /q)  w 8o' Kv 6
XOpo's. Id. Gorg. 481 A. MaiiXov r 7rrpo'rOev eLcrOiE aVCTOvS o7rw av
iKat'XOJrVT Tr oLKa3e aiLKOvral. XEN. An. VT, 1, 17. (Here
iithqXeta or some such word is understood as the subject of iedola.)
2Kco7ri, o0TCOr  a v co pacrra a liayote f V, V LLS' a hv iaXLtrra a v e vp pa -
v 0i /L f 0 a Oecoplevo avrov, I try to see how they might (if they should
choose) live the easiest lives, &c. XEN. Symp. VII, 2. So  etp~\L,-.
o=vaL Sarwo cv AyEvoLzO, Id. Cyr. I, 6, 7.
NOTE 2. (a.) The Homeric construction which most resembles that of ~ 45 is found after such verbs as fpda'opai,
g3ovXevo, Xevo'rooa, or pjeprlplio, to consider, and Iretpdo, to try.
Here 07rco or W6 is used with the Subjunctive (sometimes with
Ke) after primary tenses, and with the Optative after secondary
tenses. E. g.
Avrol 8e c(paCFieO' ro7rs    f Xi aptara ye v? Tat, let us ourselves
consider how the very best things may be done. Od. XIII, 365.  Ipa/iEOS' (imperf.)'Apyelolrov o7rs O'X' a'plorra yeYvotrTO. Od. III,
129.  bpdacrOata o8 7or (S Ke p/rStvrTpas KTElr E I   Od. I. 295. Ilep-.)paopLetOa Travres vo'rov,' 7r o  e'X 0 r ot v, i. e. how he may come.
Od. I, 76. bipair-aerait  S K  verra t, e7rTL 7roXvfIxav;s EortL. Od.
[, 205.'"Aa rpo'o'oro Kal oTrla'caO XeVFo'ae, OrS Xpo aipT(ral yevqrlTa
i. e. he looks to see how, &c. I. III, 110. MeplzjpLtev iTr o  a roola o ircraaat vS. Od. IX, 554. MfpfIlptLe Kara q)peva c S'AXLra
rLPtr.o'7 (or TltfT-El'), i. e. how he might honor Achilles. Ii. II, 3.
Bov'Xevov oro)i o'X' aptcrra yevOLrT. Od. IX. 420.  Ilelpa oTros) KEv; ar)'j irarTpla yatav t.,alt, i. e. try to find means by which you
may go, &c. Od. IV. 545. IlecnPa C    K  Tpes VirepqpiaXo& di7r 6
Xozvra. Ii. XXI, 459.
In some of these examples 07rao or sv seems to be used as an interrogative, meaning how, the Subjunctive of the direct question
being the common Homeric form explained in ~ 87. (For the Sub.
junctive with KE, see ~ 87, Note.) But in other examples, especially
those with ireLpdo, there is a nearer approach to the construction of
~ 45.   The two following examples will further illustrate the
Homeric usage: - jisq yAp pot Ovc fbLrs ro'('rtv,. 0 ( pp'  q a x t v 




~ 45.]     "Ovcus AFTER VERBS OF STRIVING.               77
Tp(~oaFOtv, n. VI, 361; q(paCgo0o Aq 7is ot apelvov o'eto azaX7^rTat,
11. V, 411. See also Od. VI. 113.
(b.) In Homer orws takes the Future Indicative chiefly when it
is used merely as an indirect interrogative, vith no reference to a
purpose, as in I. II, 252, ov8e vl ro ordia a L8,pev 0'7rc0' Ea-rat Tar8
epya, we do not yet even know certainly how these things are to be; or
in Od. XIII, 376, fpadev oTrcots fi.Vlrro-Tlpajp y dvatec XFlpaCs e  o'eLs,
consider how you will lay hands on the shameless suitors. It may take
the Future (as well as other tenses) when it is used as a simple relative; as in I1. I, 136,  cor advraltov  o-r ac, as shall be an equivalent.
(See Remark, above.)  Occasionally also we find the Future after
Orcos in final clauses (~ 44, 1, N. 1).
NOTE 3. AS many verbs of this class imply caution, they
may be followed by the simple vp (without 07rws), like verbs
of caution andfearing (~ 46).. See especially op& and OaK0oio.
Here, as elsewhere, p takes the Subjunctive more frequently
than the Future Indicative. E. g.
2KO7rE 8~ /fAl1 TOVTOtC avrvv E c7  o raLr r' 17T ai  Karay X aao7.
DEMI. Mid. 563, 26.'Opa ovv pt rT KCal VVy  E py ao1ra. PLAT.
Symp. 213 D.'Opa /Li r rokXXYv EKa(tTt) fiyv XEtpOY  8 (je r t.
XEN. Cyr. IV, 1, 18. 2Ko7re, o'A (rot irpovot  TOV fo ovX waKrea.
SOPH. O. C. 1180. "Opa av, FuL VVV /Ev tLE euVXepq' rap.s. SOPH.
Phil. 519.
(See the corresponding use of 7rcos'?;, instead of pIj, after verbs
of fearing, &c., ~ 46, Note 2. It is often difficult to draw the line
between the two constructions of ~ 45 and ~ 46.)
NOTE 4.'SQs is sometimes, though rarely, used instead of 0r5os
after verbs of striving. Here the Subjunctive is more common than
the Future Indicative. E. g.'E1rtLfeXovTaat s L X T  oUvTo. XEN. Oecon. XX, 8.'Q 8s a KaX\s
E et ra viLreTpa, cpol fEXjt~~L. XEN. Cyr. III, 2, 13.'EW7re/XAOq0 zo.r v o t V 7TraivrTv rv KaX Ov. Id. VII, 3, 17.'n2EV8ovrves  S ZEVS.TFrOT'
hpEiev e,vW. AEscI. Prom. 203. Occasionally we find the Subjunctive with avu: To so-a av yyv6 dya.a elva.t ertfLEXLO-Cat a   s a v
r     p a X 8....  ~ Ov  epe KapTrov, 7,v pru- TLS e7rtpeXrTat  S a uv
ravra  e pa iv r a. XEN. Hipparch. IX, 2. (See above, N. 1.)
NOTE 5. Some verbs which are regularly followed by an
Infinitive of the object occasionally take an object clause with
(rco (rarely with other particles), in nearly or quite the same
sense: -
(a.) Verbs of exhorting, entreating, and commanding are
sometimes followed by &rwos, and those of forbidding by lrot
-si7, after the analogy of verbs of striving. E. g.




78              FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.               [~ 45
Ato'recoOat e pt' avrs OrWcS Yv qeprea eLr77, and implore him
thyself to speak the truth. Od. III, 19. (Compare the regular construction, ov8    X ae  M tc-roPoai ve ELv, II. 1, 174.)  Alcr-ero 8' alei
VHatoarTov KXVroepyOv 0 7co  XV ac lev #Apla, he implored him to
liberate Ares. Od. VIII, 344.  Kelvo r' e4v ayye'Xar' IvroX^tv,
07r co. Tov 7ratla 8etLet. SOPH. Aj. 567.   AtaKceXvovrat  7r iro 
L pop?}rera& 7tdvraraS OVS TOLOUTOVS. PLAT. Rep. VIII, 549 E. So
7rapayyeXXket'Trco LAq'oTovTaL, Id. Ill, 415 B.  EpotL c a7rn7ydpeveC OrcoWS P  rov  r'o d7aoKpLvoit1Y v. (FUt. Opt.) Id. I, 339 A.'A7rctprpevov avr&o  r or OEs,up v epe L Y 7yeLTraL, when he is forbidd'en
to say a word of what he believes. Id. I, 337 E. See. SOPH. Trach. 604.
In Od. XVII, 362, we find Wrpvvev &cs av 7rvpva KaTa pvrorTT7pas
a y Ie p o t, where the av is used with the particle as in the examples
under ~ 44, 1, N. 3 (a).
(b.)'Iva is used in the same sense in a single passage of the
Odyssey, III, 327:-Alro'reat 8e litv avbro t va vrq.epres evia7rt,7
and implore him yourself to speak the truth.
This use of Iva is not found in Attic Greek, but it reappears in
the later language. E. g.'EvroXav Kaiv7v &Ioout VpLv, Iva dya7rare dXX5tXovy, a new commandment I give unto you, that ye love one another. JOH. Evang.
XIII, 34. So Edei'0qv eva eKX3dcXXocrv, Luc. IX, 40. So in Latin,
rogat ut liceat.
(c.) A case of /s and the Subjunctive (instead of an object Infinitive) after a verb implying a promise is found in 11. I, 558:T.j  c OLCO Karavevoa-at  r O,  S AXLa eTiv7rLocr,  o e, cr'rs E
IroXeao Eir vr)vaLv'Axat&v, that you promised by your nod to honor
Achilles, &c.
NOTE 6. (a.) On the other hand, some verbs which regularly
take Sworw are occasionally found with an Infinitive of the object,
sometimes with the article. (See ~ 46, N. 8.) E. g.'Ael rtva 71reJeX\ovTro crcv avrWv v ralZ appXal  e tlval, they always
took care that one of their own number should be in the offices (where
we should expect   rcosTw S tL eTara or E'(-oro). THUC. VI, 54. ObV'
7etX.tjeO7V rqov o &LatrKaX6v ro' Tva y e vr a  rTWv er7iaTa-fLvwv.
XEN. Mem. IV, 2, 4. So the Infinitive with TO, Mein. IV, 3, 1.
(b.) Verbs of this class can be followed by an indirect question
introduced by ci, whether. E. g.
El uV/AOrovrffet Kmal ~vvepycaret o-KO7ret, see whether thou wilt assist
me, &c. SoPH. Ant. 41. (See ~ 46, Note 6, c.)
NOTE 7.    (a.) Both o8rco and 0wrco9 /L are sometimes used
elliptically with the Future Indicative in exhortations and prohibitions, depending on some Imperative like Ca-irre~, take care,
understood.   "Orco, pfj allows also the Subjunctive.  E. g.
"Oirws cidvp e'a-eT (sc. (uK7retl) prove thyself a man. "OorS Io0,




~ 45.]'Oirso AFTER VERBS OF STRIVING.                  79
o (ZVOppoTrE,, E pe ls orT EO'rTL ra 8o8seKa b&s e, see that you do not
tell me that twice six are twelve. PLAT. Rep. I, 337 A.  O7rAos oYZ' e C IT e alitpes lOLL rjs e;Xev0epLas (SC. aKo7Trere), prove yourselves men
worthy offreedom. XEN. An. I, 7, 3.'"0 cOT O  ye, wiv rt rTOvrTW  yiy7qTat, TOVTovS eTratveEa-EYaO  Kal TIt1-TCee Kal aT creqava oeT'e,
EfLe 3E 8i' KCal /evro KTIV rc Tr&V vavrTic, o6r co s ToVrot L  p 7 e it O e.
DEM. F. L. 355, 17. "OwroS roLvvv 7 rept TOV 7ro)XEl/ov p1qaev Epeis,
see therefore that you say nothing about the war. Id. 370, 22.'07rcos
ye tU)  a a7raTrr,77 f ji. PLAT. Prot. 313 C. (See ~ 46, N. 4.)
(b.) We occasionally find the Future Indicative with /i in an
independent sentence, expressing a prohibition. This may be explained by supposing an ellipsis of rTco from the construction just
mentioned (orwcos p/u roro peds becoming /   TO7TO pEro  l); but it
seems more natural to consider it as an independent construction.
See ~ 25, 1, N. 5 (b), and the examples.
REMARK. The construction of Note 7 (a) is confined almost
exclusively to the second person of the verb; yet the first and third
persons are sometimes found. E. g.
Kat Orso', o(i7Trep epcroca)t 7rpo0UvJoS, OVTO Kal rotelv  0 eX. -
Tovoty. DEM. Chers. 99, 14. "Orwcos 8e rTO     tp3oXov Xa,3ovres
iTrETa TrXrolova K a 6 e 8 o v o   a. ARnST. Eccles. 297.
NOTE 8. When an Aorist Subjunctive active or middle was to
be used with Ocorw or 0'7rcov ti after a verb of striving, the second
Aorist was preferred to the first, if both forms were in use. This
arose from the great similarity in form between these first Aorists
and the Future Indicative (as 3ovXeva-r and f3ovXEvUoe, SovXevoqrqTa&
and,3ovX\ev-crat): this made it natural for a writer, if he intended
to use the Subjunctive at all, to avoid those forms of it which were
nearly identical with the more regular Future Indicative. This of
course did not apply to the first Aorist Subjunctive passive, which
has no resemblance to the Future Indicative.  The same remark
applies to the Subjunctive after ov /4I, in the construction described
in ~ 89. In both constructions the Subjunctive differs from the
Future only by being a less vivid form of expression.*
* The general rule, first laid down by Dawes (Misc. Crit. pp. 222 and
228), which declared the first Aorist Suhjunctive active and middle a solecism after 0rovws /i and ov,4q, was extended by others so as to include
Oros (without p/), and the Greek authors were emended to conform to it.
As this rule has no other foundation than the accidental circumstance
mentioned in Note 8, it naturally fails in many cases, in some of which
even emendation is impossible. Thus in the example, Kehe(ovoL 7rpoo(raTreVtoa Ot7rcS K7rrXe\vc, a7 rparTad, XEN. An. V, 6, 22, EKrXt eva-y
cannot he a mistake for E'K7rXeV-cEc, as the Attic Future is E'KrXeSfv-o/a
or WK7t\evao'oUfLa.  So in SOPH. Phil. 381, o  / T 7ror' s r iv 2Kupov
Kir Xe vor, no emendation is possible. See also PLAT. Rep. X, 609
B, obv /it a&ro ano-, where the Future would be atrosii. The rule of




80               FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.                [~ 46.
C.   Object'Clauses with'ir after Verbs of Fearing, T.c.
~ 46.       After verbs and phrases which        express   or
imply fear, caution, or danger, a,       lest or that, is used
with the Subjunctive if the leading'verb is primary, and
with the Optative if the leading verb is secondary.          By
the principle of ~ 44, 2, the Subjunctive can also follow
secondary tenses, in order that the mood in which the
object of the fear originally occurred to the mind may
be retained.
M4 (like the Latin ne) denotes fear that something
may happen which is not desired; pU          oV (ut =   ne non)
denotes fear that something may not happen which is
desired. E. g.
4o3ovfiat /li yeVr7rat (vereor ne accidat), I fear that it may happen: pof3ovfLa Lu p  o0 yev7rTac (vereor ut accidat), Ifear that it may
not happen. Niv 8' allvs ela8oiKa Kara q/pea pev   ace 7rape l TrI.. I,
555. Aela /u O)1pe(acrtv  XaX p Kal Kvpfia yeveoiua. Od. V, 473.
Ob 00ofi f         o' 1  Apyos  rT'rep Kap arroKrtevat 6EgX. EUR. Or. 770.
IIoiov IeV ov  Bo 80KEL f)OSoJViOVLevov A  T& waiOr; XEN. Cyr. 1, 6, 10.
4povrlCco pwa) KpaTArTov 7 pot rOLyav. XEN. Mem. IV, 2, 39. bvXarrdovops     /x   u 7  LavdvLv Tti. Id. IV, 2, 3. AE8oLKa /q oa8' 0o&nov j
d7rayopevetv. PLAT. Rep. II, 368 B. Ta 7rEpl Tr7'S vXjs 7roXX)i
Dawes is now generally abandoned; but most editors still hold to it (at
least in practice) so far as to exclude the prohibited forms with orwco
when it follows verbs of striving, &c., and with ov pbu. Even here, however, the rule is maintained only by changing many passages against
Mss. authority. Thus in DEM. 01. I, p. 9, 17, all Mss. except one read
7rapacrKvavdrao(0a& Oa7tS eVoEvbe a  O 1  07 T7Tr, Kal pq) tt 0r  T r e Tavrov,
while nearly all editions have I3o017r6rfe. In the Third Philippic of
Dem6sthencs two similar examples occur: p. 128, 25, 07rsco /1r1els
avarp Et+ E, TOVTO oTKo7rel(rat, where all Mss. have dvarpi;r4q, which
Schaefer emended to avaTrpe/et; and p. 125, 10, &07rcs  XE oovX   0 ova'iv 7rparTTomVTt, where the weight of Mss. authority decidedly favors
8ovXevo'wcrav. For ob f/4, see ~ 89, 2, Rem. 2.
Whatever view is taken of these last examples, there certainly seems to
be no reason for extending the rule of Dawes to o-r~ot in pure final clauses,
as in these the Future is used only by exception (~ 44, 1, N. 1). There
is no objection, therefore, to such sentences as these:- &v ErvEKa ECrTTaOtrvat, T0'7r  a 7roXav Co af  Kal 07roM  y v C. e a, XEN. Cyr. VII,
5,82; and EKKXr7aolav  vv7qyayov, or  1ros  o r coa) eaa /fI+coiz at,
THUC. II. 60. So with o'irw  aptroroTroi7oacovTat, THUc. VII, 39.
In elliptical prohibitions with orcotS p,7 (~ 45, N. 7) the Subjunctive seems
to be allowed from the analogy or ordinary prohibitions (~ 86).




~ 46.]        M1 AFTER VERBS OF FEARING.                    81
arrlTTar'v 7rapxec Tols dv0po7lrots, ur  reLoav d7raaXayi ro Tov' craTros
ovhaaioi riL, aXX La tLa8 Lp qr a TE KaL d roXX  ra aL. PLAT.
Phaed. 70 A. OVlKOv vvv Kal Troo70 KLdvvvos, pFtL Xd a 3 C o  7rpoTdras
avrcov TLvas ToTrcoTv, there is danger of this, that they may take, &c.
XEN. An. VII, 7, 31. KLV8vvo' eOTr, 1t7 1Trai3dXvTaa L KaL ydVwVTraL pera rTv 7ro\eLlwov. ISOC. Plataic. p. 303 E. ~ 38.'OKrv /v
/Ao& 6 Avor-as ra7Tev6os  avy. PLAT. Phaedr. 257 C. EvXaf3oi 8e i
4avjS KaKOs yeycos   SOPH. Trach. 1129. O08ev 8efVOLi crovTaL pL)
f3 o    fo a-o ravTar. HDT. VII, 235.'Yro7rT6evo.Lev KaL VxJsO p/? o0v
KOLVOL dar o  r e. THUc. III, 53. Ar,-Xvvo'devos IL (oprlKCs o'  K otr iopev. PLAT. Theaet. 183 E.
AEc'ras i') vrW  oL Epvo-alaTo VEKpov'AxaLoL II. V, 298. -A~ero
yap ug NVrKTi 0o7R darovnLa  p o80o. n. XIV, 261.'Ey7  yap ilr0v
EK7TrE7nr7,JyiEV qdo,3c,!U?) LOt rTO KaXXos aXyos ef E vp oo 7rorT. SOPH.
Trach. 25. ESero'av oi EXXqves IL?/?rporayotev 7rpos Tro Kepas KCa
avrovs KaraKdoELav. XEN. An. I, 10, 9. OVKcTV eYT1rlOevro,
&8OLKcoes F7j d o r A ror l   e I e  ( a v. Id. IlI, 4, 29. WE8ecrav /u XV'rra
TLSS WCe(p KUVOLV 7tILV e p r 7r O KO. Id. V, 7, 26.'YTro7rrevcras /
rTV OvyaTepa X y o L,'pero, having suspected that he might mention his
daughter. XEN. Cyr. V, 2, 9.'HOvlrqao-v rIves, ev VOoLevot! /
7riLTr8Eta OVK EX o eV 6OrO6ev Xapf3avotev. XEN. An. III, 5, 3. OiW;EiS
yap Klvbvvos E8OKFtL fvaL, Lf) TLs a'rO 7opevoHvyo v EK TOv 07'LrtoOev Ert
r7rotro. Id. IV, 1, 6.
Ol (CoKaLese raYs vovS OVK e)3ovXoV7O  rooAefl, 8etiatvovrev /tq
e/irplopv yevcoVTaL. HDT. I, 165. To yap 8eSELvaFL /A Xoyos rjo'covs o a, roXJp)rs lTpos 7 ra e'pya eIXpovv. T. ITH U. II, 8 epi~ers
yevdoIevos pt f r eT7r L  I  X   o c ( v ac vr)sE. THUC. III, 80.  EcE8tora f/;
Tpolav dOpotr), Kal 4vvotKlarq radXtv. EUR. Hec. 1138. O e oFpefvoL
Ap)o(3ovvro ti) T 7rt adO. XEN. Symp. II, 11.  AXlkos'v Trartv
(Kipos) or v7rfpfp)op0B Ero r0  o 6 7rdaIroTCO a d ro0dv. XEN. Cyr. I,
4, 2.
It will be seen by the examples that the construction with FpL is
very often used when the leading verb only implies the fear, caution, or danger, as after vTro7rrevo and oKv. On this principle we
must explain passages like I1. X, 100; OV8E  t' 3,LEv, FL') TTOC Kal 8ia
wKra Fpevoivo'qcxrt pdaXErOat, where the idea is we know of no security
against their deciding to fight during the night,- implying we fear lest
they may.
REMARK. These clauses with,p, when they follow verbs of
caution like vwrXaTTofLa, eivXaI3olulal, &c., partake of the nature oi
final clauses to the same extent with the construction of ~ 45, since
they imply the end or purpose of the caution. (See ~ 43, Remark.)
On the other hand, when they follow (o3ovuPat and other verbs
expressing fear or danger, no purpose is expressed or implied, but
there is merely an apprehension that something will happen, or, in
some cases, that something is now taking place or has already
happened. We E hould hence expect that these verbs would follow
the analogy of ve, bs of thinking, &c., and take either the Indicative
with's or the Infinitive, to denote the object of the fear. (This
F




82             FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.               [~ 46,
actually happens in a few cases; as oi3 cJooovLEOa XatoiuwoatCOata
THUc. V, 105; ujA Ooj3oo  os a-Top'aetr, XEN. Cyr. V, 2, 12. See
below, Note 6.) Still, verbs of fearing, when the object of the
fear is future, as it commonly is, are closely connected in sense
with those like   vdi'TTroMaL; as they imply at least a desire
(though not a purpose) to prevent the result.    The Greeks
generally apply to both the same construction, and as they say
fvXadrofiajLt l r yevratl, they say also (oovfiaiaL  ye;vr7rat. When
the object of the fear is already past or actually present, so that no
desire of preventing a result can be implied, verbs of fearing are still
followed by pi as before; but now all analogy to final clauses disappears, and the dependent verb is put in the proper tense of the
Indicative, as in ordinary object clauses after onrL and us. (See below, Note 5.)
NOTE 1. Sometimes, though seldom, ur takes the Future
Indicative after verbs offearing, &c. E. g.
4o/3ovpe, I 8E, u,) rTLvavs j8ov,'ovas ev prj'o oF  evavrlaS. PLAT.
Phil. 13 A. 4ofepOv Ka, a(obaXepov, ujl a(faX\els K c  opatL. PLAT.
Rep. V, 451 A.
The Future seems to differ from the Subjunctive in these cases,
as in final clauses, only by expressing the result more vividly and
marking its Jfturity more strongly.  Thus qof3Soviatl Il evpW0ixE
would not differ from (oPoViata    p 1C  o fjo e v quoted above, except in the manner of expression; just as E'av pq epcowLiv would
differ from El'  e pjo'opoev. (See ~ 44, 1, N. 1.) For the rare use
of the Future Optative after verbs of fearing, &c., see ~ 26, Note
1 (b).
NOTE 2. Verbs denoting fear and caution are sometimes
followed by 0rCs p4, with the Future Indicative or the Subjunctive after primary tenses and the Optative after secondary
tenses, like verbs of striving, &c. Many verbs (like 06p& and
iKO7rof) belong equally well to both classes (~~ 45, 46).  It
will be noticed, that o7rws tPj here is exactly equivalent to Ix,
so that 4qo3oijal 07rs i co  j  ycevrcTa, (or yVqrTaL)) means Ifear
that it will happen (not, Ifear that it will not happen).  (See
Note 6, a.) E. g.
To l 8altfiovos 8E0otX' 0 17r o C I p) TVo/ia KaKosaLLovos-. ARIST. Eq.
112. EVXa/oviSevot OrcoS pXl olXtrofiatL. PLAT. Phaed. 91 C. AsaotKa  7r oS co i  avayKr) yE7vrai, 1 fear that there may be a necessity.
DEM. Phil. lli, 130, 14. O0b qo/3Ei, OTTrcoS lj advdoaov rpayipa
rvyXdva s 7rpdarTov; PLAT. Euthyphr. 4 E. 4>vXaTTrov, O Trs rCO   Els
rovavrlov'X0,qs. XEN. Mem. III, 6, 16.'HU&'os av (Ope'+ramp rSi
v8Ypa), El pcu 0oSolp/30lrov orCos p) ETs avrov 7C Tpa7roLTo. XEN. Mem.
1I, 9, 2.
NOrE 3. The particle mav is never used with /A' and the Subl




~ 4 J        Mi AFrERY VERBS OF FE      RING.             83
junctive. It is sometimes joined with an Optative depending upon
P1A after verbs offearing, in which case it always forms an apodosis
with the Optative. Such an Optative with a'V can of course fbllowv
primary as well as secondary tenses, by ~ 31, Note 2. (See ~ 44, 1,
N. 3, Rem.)  E.g.
AeoLKa /yap juL irp  X E y o tL Sa v  rTOv 7rdov TOv E 4lo, I fear that
you might tell (U'you should have an opportunity). SOPH. Trach. 631.
(Cf. Philoct. 493.)  OSTre 7poaooKIa OBeFLUa itv pf  a v Trore oL 7O\XELLOL
7LTI7rXe\v oELav. THUC. II, 93.'EKEivOo evvoC /1l Xi'av ayv TaXv
ao fp oov Yffel v, lest (in that case) I should be very soon brought to
my senses. XEN. An. VI, 1, 28.
NOTE 4. M? with the Subjunctive, and 07rcow u with the
Future Indicative (seldom the Subjunctive), are sometimes
used elliptically, depending upon some verb of fear or caution
understood.  (See ~ 45, N. 7, a.)   This expresses an apprehension or anxiety, sometimes a mere suspicion. It is especially common in Plato. E. g.'AXXa i? ov rov;r-  xaCXEro, Odvairov 5vyeIW, but (I fear) lest this
may not be the difficult thing, to avoid death. PLAT. Apol. 39 A. M/
aypoCKorepov i7 Tr dXr0;Es eWeZiv, (I fear) lest it may be too rude to
speak the truth. PLAT. Gorg. 462 E.'AXXha p o5X oUrOX'T X, daXX
avayKatov l/ elooTa TlOeoaLra TOV TLOe/pevov  P' o6v6oaTra. PLAT. Crat. 436
B. O'iloL TaXaUS, 6 ZevS OWroS /5 /' O' era L. ARIST. Av. 1494.
(This example belongs equally well under ~ 45, N. 7, a.) "OirCs
oUv P/) dTa7roXE JlarityovLevos. XEN. Cyr. I, 3, 18.'AXX' o7rwo fi
EV Tro7t ^ypaCr'JLac L v? Tovro, TO,UJ7 pO:os 8tavEufJlv, ii i 8 Tols OvdacrLV
ov, dXX' avaycalov,i aEi OptOo. PLAT. Crat. 430 E.
In XEN. Mem. IV, 2, 12, Uq) o0y, e4q,, ov  v a, v a at ya T r,7s
8tKato(Tnvvs r yro-Crac at, (Ifear) that I am not able to explain, &c.,
the Present Indicative belongs under Note 5 (a.)
NOTE 5. Verbs of fearing may refer to objects of fear
which are past or immediately present; so that no desire or
even possibility of preventing the result can be implied.  (See
Rem. before Note 1.)    Here, therefore, all analogy to final
clauses disappears, and pi is followed by the present and past
tenses of the Indicative, as orT or c would be in indirect
quotations. The following cases occur:(a.) Mtj with the Present Indicative expresses a fear that
sometiling is now going on. E. g.'Opftpev p  NLKias o'Ie Ta  t Xeyevw, let us be cautious lest Nicias
is thinking that he says something. PLAT. Lach. 196 C. (Here tho
Subjunctive o'itra would have meant lest Nicias may think, referring to the future.)  AIEoLKa t'/ 7vriycwv 8  L. ARIS?. Nub. 493




94               FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.                 [~ 46
4'oI3eiol, f,  8vcrKoXreTpdov T  vt V tV taKE fLat  C  TOO 7rpoTrOeF
3io, you are afraid lest I am now in a more peevish state of mnind, &c,
(where the Subjunctive would have referred to the future, lest 1
may be). PLAT. Phaed. 84 E.'E7rPo'Xe, os av 7rpotVepevvi'i ar[Tfov
4L rTL TroXtrcjv ev Tplfq) ()avTaCeTat, KalpOl pIv tXO  4a Xov a osws
oVX\y  O'ryos. EUR. Phoen. 92. (Here P0) pavrdTaras means lest any
one is now to be seen; and pu eAX07, lest any report may come hereafter.) "Ava,, pLotl Tot,,41 TL Klat eFXarov ToVpyov fro', T   ~vvvota
ltovXEvet 7raXaL. SOPH. Ant. 278. (The idea is, my mind has long
been anxious, lest this is the work of the Gods,'oriv being understood
after'*j.) "Opa )r E'KEIVOV KCOXVeL. PLAT. Charm. 163 A.'AXX'
ela-rdfJLeea, p41 TL Kai KaTrdarerov Kpvn)a K a X VF r  Kap8ia vevovJeivl,
odpovs 7rapao'TriLovrEs. SO Ant. 1253. (The idea is, we shall
learn the result oJ our anxiety lest she is concealing, &c.f)
(b.)  M,7  with the Perfect Indicative expresses a fear lest
something has already happened.        The difference between
this and the Perfect Subjunctive is often very slight, the
latter expressing rather a fear that something may hereafter
prove to have happened.     (See examples, ~ 18, 1.)    E. g.
Nv EI 0~ <o3oVfJeS~a, r;) adjorepwv ALa )fJLapprfq'fpJv, but now we
fear lest we have missed both at once. THiuc. III, 53.  (The Perfect
Subjunctive here would strictly have meant lest it may hereafter
prove that we have missed.)  AEOoLKa ptr  X eX 7 10 ae, v [r7v flpJqv]
El 7,roXX)w ayovres, I fear that we have been unconsciously enjoying a
peace borrowed at high interest. DiM. F. L. 372, 1.   bloftovfjla& li
Xoyots rtil +FevEaLrv evTerv X Kap ev   PLAT. Lys. 218 D.
* That this is the correct explanation of the passage, Sorn. Ant. 278,
and that we need not emend it with Nauck, so as to read rovpyov Tro' j,`vvvota /3ovXevet 7rdXaa, is evident from the Scholion on the passage:'H I-vvota foOL 3ovXevErata K Oal oeTralt P) Kal OefXaarov er Tr rt 7 rpayta.
So perhaps we should read uq EXavvei in DEM. Phil. III, 124, 25.
t In this passage, if anywhere, it would seem necessary to admit the
interrogative force usually ascribed to,u which would make it equivalent to
ti ov, whether not. But here, as in the other passages quoted, it is plain
that the dependent clause after,97 expresses the object of an apprehension.
To establish'a purely interrogative force in,uI, it would seem necessary to
find examples in which,' not only follows a verb like oiba, but also is
followed by a clause in which no object of apprehension is contained
(Such a sentence would be elaofeaOOa fi7 o0 )lXot co'ltv, we shall learn
whether our friends are not living; but no such example can be found, at
least in any classic writer. The Greeks would have said eladtloea0a el oi,,trwtv orel'cio-tv.)  The use of el, whether, after verbs offearing (Note 6,
c), usually adduced as an argument to prove the interrogative force of pi
rather seems to show that, when the Greeks wished to introduce an indi.
rect question after verbs or fearing, they had recourse to cl, as in other
cases.




~46.J           Mi WI'T   THE INDICATIVE.               8a
(c.)  Mr can be used with the Imperfect or the Aorist Indicative, to express fear lest something happened in past time.
This can be expressed only in this way, as the Subjunctive
and Optative would refer to (relatively) future time. E. g.
A4ti8o Pi) p   7-vravra Oea vqrltprea eFlrv, I fear that all that the
Goddess said was true. Od. V, 300.'AXX' opa 7t, rraiowv X eye v,
but be very careful lest he was speaking in jest. PLAT. Theaet. 145 B.
(This implies a fear that he was speaking in jest.)
NOTE 6. (a.) As verbs of fearing, &c., imply thought,
they sometimes take the construction of ordinary indirect discourse. Here /oS (and even w7rwc), that, may be used to introluce the object of the fear, thus taking the place of ptU in the
common construction. (COT seems to be used only in the case
mentioned in Note 7.) E. g.'AvSposr fi o3ov GOs CT op r a o'f e L d tov, do not fear that you will
_e at a loss. XEN. Cyr. V, 2, 12. (Here the direct discourse would
be aTropcr)oo, I shall be at a loss.) Mq ehlar7Te os oVX jVsos KaOEvBf.rE~e, do not fear that you will not sleep sweetly. Id. VI, 2, 30.
(Here,Al oiX would be the ordinary expression.) M  rTpe'ors, STrcow
0E TLS a Troo rCidC  L 3a, lest any one shall tear you away by force.
EUR. Heracl. 248. M' (/o( ev7re T   (', Os aeo 7retpweLvos X yCo
Xoyov TovES, i)Tre yvvallKa rriYv efLqV, pl rl TOtL e aLrjsi yE Ei7 ra
Pap.iov, do not fear either that I am saying this to try you (cs Xiey),
or lest any harm shall come (tz yevvqrat). HDT. 1, 9. (Here the two
constructions after Eofe5 make the principle especially clear.)
In all these cases /t4 or owrcor tp would have been more regular,
and exactly equivalent to Ws and 0rnso here. (See Note 2.)
(b.) We also find the Future Infinitive after verbs of
fearing, standing in indirect discourse to represent a Future
Indicative of the direct discourse.  (See ~ 73, 1, Rem.)
E. g.
Ov fofo3oleOa iX a o r t crr a t, we are not afraid that we shall
be defeated. THUc. V, 105. (Here pL with the Subjunctive or the
Future Indicative would have been more regular.)
(c.) Verbs of fearing may also be followed by an indirect
question introduced by el, whether, or by some other interrogative particle. "Onuro used interrogatively in such sentences
is not to be confounded with orwco in its use explained above
(a). E. g.
O1 88oKra EL 4tIXLTaFOS Cto, a' ra  r  7I roa e o\eo  TE(o0  Ke 7T TOVn
a81KOJvTras ULtletV Kar Ttpulopel-Orc4, I have no fear (on the question)




q)              FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES.               [~ 46.
whether Ph 7'ip is alive; but I have fear (about this), whether the custom of the city to hate and punish evil-doers is extinct. DEM. F. L.
434, 6.  ofos'o L pot  a-OtV oVs tey  0E'o. E. UR. Heracl. 791.  e'povauCa Ot veovs?JKC XOyovs, o,/3qa /ev el rLs tleaTorTv a l Co' 0 eTa
through fear whether any one will perceive it (where /u alo-OafferaL or
ai'orl7rat might have been used, meaning lest any one shall perceive
it). EUR. Androm. 61.,of3ovvral O 7ro V rOTE 7r p o13 17 Er a L  rov
dv8pobs NvvatLs. XEN. Hell. VI, 1, 14. (The direct question would
be 7roi rrpol-reTraL;) Tv77Y eov 8' rono s X d0w  &ou o Ka, I am in fear
(about the question) how I shall escape the Goddess. EUR. Iph. T,
995. (The direct question was rsw Xadco; ~ 88.)
NOTE 7. Verbs of fearing may be followed by orL, because, and
an ordinary. causal sentence with the Indicative (~ 81). E. g.
OvtK aSov l8a TOrTO O 3Epoeir(at TOVo roXeFLtovs, OT 7roXXol TvyXavov o  v oa t e, to fear them, because they happen to be many.
Isoc. Archid. p. 128 C. ~ 60. o, 3ovPfevI S TqqS Tr.Tpos, OTrL TO
XOpiov e7rvvdv e ro voorGoe elv at. Isoc. Aegin. p. 388 D. ~ 22.'0 r & e 7roXXov d p X o v o t, iL) (q)o37f 7To, aXX a ro X /LaXXov  & a TOVTo
OappeiTe, do not be afraid because they rule many, &c. XEN. Hell.
III, 5, 10.  (Mi a'PXovcTLv fpofi3L-Oa would mean to fear lest they
rule.)  o',So30vvos TO KabEdeOat Kal rT rT;Lve(Oat, 0 T t adXYELv, fearing
them, on the ground that they are painful. PLAT. Gorg. 479 A. (But
for the analogy of the preceding examples, we might be inclined to
translate this fearing that they are painfil, like /if) dXyevo'v.)'EqofSeLTO, OTt 6r o7f) Taeo0at fte XXe Ta ftaa'lXeta OiKOOLeiv dcpXo6levos, he
was afraid, because he was about to be seen beginning to build the
palace. XEN. Cyr. III, 1, 1.
NOTE 8. (a.) Verbs offearing may be followed by an Infinitive
(without /Tj), which is sometimes preceded by the article. Such anInfinitive denotes the direct object of the fear, as in English, I fear
to go. E. g.
$ofSoviLaD ov  e X YX e Iv -re, f07 vwroaXad3s, K.r.X., I am afraid to
refute you, lest you may suspect, &c. PLAT. Gorg. 457 E. (Here
both constructions occur.)  boao-efTara d  K Fe v, he will be afraid to
do wrong. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 7, 15. (But Io[a-'reraL uL') diKiC,l he
will fear that he may do wrong.) nIptaKa'Eptvvv T eX o- a a  ris
KaTapas, I shudder at the idea of the Fury fulfilling the curses. AEscn.
Sept. 720. (But in 790, pe;o /7 reXEr, means I tremble lest shE
may ffil them.)  See also XEN. An. I, 3, 17. Tb dzar o 0 v  c K
obve'F )o/3eTrat, r  6he 8ICK EIv qbo3EiTrat. PLAT. Gorg. 522 E.
See ~ 92, 1, Remark 2, and Note 3.
(b.) Verbs of caution may be followed by an Infinitive (with or
without pfI), which is sometimes preceded by the article; the Infinitive having the same meaning as a clause with /iz and the Subjunctive or Optative. E. g.
Ilco oVCK cLtto  aTrdv yEe (vvXdaaOc&t rotoTroV  7e yve;o E  a t; why'




47, 2.]        CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.                  87
ought he not to guard against becoming such' a man himself? XEN.
Meni I, 5, 3. (Here yev;ea'Oa is equivalent to n yYE'7rraL )  AluvarTO/ELos TO kv rr j a- a rtva, taking care to offend no one. DEM. Cor.
R13, 6. v)dvXar'o-oEv ptr]eva 7repaLovoOaL. THUC. VII, 17. IvXaTro-,fEVOV Kai 7rpOOpWL:VO, V oJA K a r a t C X v a L ravTrlv. [DmEM.] Aristog. I,
773, 1. (For ui see ~ 95, 2, N. 1.) In Tauc. VII, 77, 5, we find
the Infinitive with OarTE after fbvXa-ow.
(c.) Kvavvoys e'rt, the principal expression denoting danger which
takes JI', and a finite verb, is quite as regularly followed by the
Infinitive (without ar). E. g.
OV ZOL KpOS KLV8VVOS E trly Ta 7ra'rl -  Yat, there is no little danger
of their being deceived. PLAT. Crat. 436 B.
KLtv8vveU6 is regularly followed by the Infinitive, by ~ 92, 1.
REMARK. All the Infinitives referred to in Note 8 belong regularly under the rule, ~ 92, 1. For the article before such Infinitives
see ~ 92,,Note 3.
SECTION II.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
~ 47. 1. In conditional sentences the clause containing the condition is called the protasis, and that
containing the conclusion is called the apodosis.      The
protasis is regularly introduced by the particle es, if,
negatively e66, u.
NOTE.   Al is the Doric form for el. It is sometimes used
also in Epic poetry, but only when KE immediately follows.
2. The adverb av (Epic Kc or Ke, Doric ca) is regularly joined with el in the protasis, when the verb is in
the Subjunctive (~ 50, 1); el with     V (a) forming the
compound ca, av (a), or /v. See ~ 38, 1.) The simple
el is used in the protasis with the Indicative and the
Optative.
The same adverb av is regularly nsed in the apodosis
with the Optative (~ 50, 2), and also with the secondartt




88               CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.             [~ 47, 2
tenses of the Indicative in the construction explained in
~ 49, 2. (See ~ 37, 3, and ~ 39.)
3. The negative particle of the protasis is regularly
prI, that of the apodosis is ov.
NOTE. When the last rule is violated, and ov is found in a
protasis, it is always closely connected with a particular word
(generally the verb), with which it forms a single negative,
expression; so that its negative force does not (like that of /,:
affect the protasis as a whole, E. g.
TIavrovs 8r-ov (ovcos EXe~), dLv re TV Kal'AVVwTO oV ()T re av re,Tre, ifyou deny it, as well as if you admit it. PLAT. Apol. 25 B.
(Here eav /0) Tre would mean unless you admit it.)  El EIv o 
7roX X oi Jcav, KaO' fKaOcroyV aly wFpi TOVrTOOV  KOvETe, if there were only
a few, &c. LYS. Agorat. p. 135; ~ 62. Cf. p. 137; ~ 76. (Here
ob -roXkol are used together in the sense of X7yoM.) Twv&e pev OvEVU
off0v ETLV, eye d(t fi)v ye  v e v po e cW ov e I s ov 8 OO7 r e  p ff -
rat, there is no fairness in this, if (it is the plan, that) no one is ever
to begin with us. XEN. Cyr. II, 2, 3.
The following example makes the difference between ov and pi
particularly clear, ov affecting merely the verb, and /1 affecting
the whole (including the oh): el p  Ilpo6evov O VX V;e 8 f a ro,
oe6r]aav av, iJ it had not been that they did not receive Proxenus, they
would have been saved. DEM. F. L. 364, 11.
When several clauses, introduced by /e'v and 8e, depend
upon a single e which precedes them  all, ov is used even more
frequently than pa5; as such clauses have their own construction independently of the el, which merely introduces each of
them as a whole, not affecting the construction of particular
words.   E. g.
AcEL'oOV'a ~E, EL ol /Iev EKELCOv uvL/aXotG e'7rL 8ov\ela,77 aUTWy C)fE~
POVTES O V K a7TEpOVtTvL, fjEieS 8' h Er70r  avrTOl aO'OaeLO( oV K a'pa a8ravqr
0ao-ev, it would be a hard thing, if (it is afact that) their allies will not
refuse, &c., while we will not contribute. Tiiuc. I, 121.  Elr' OVI
aluXpov,  ro T'  v'ApyCeio wVXA0oE o lK iofo,3rO T-vi AcaKEL8atovlWco
dpXrv, Vf1eL 8' 8dptapov (0oa30Ec0e; is it not then disgraceful, if (ig
is true, that) the Argive people did not fear, &c. DEM. Rhod. 197, 9.
Classification of Conditional Sentences.
~ 48.    The supposition contained in a protasis may
be either particular or gene-al.     A particular supposi.




~ 48.1       CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONS.                89
tion refers to a definite act or a definite series of acts.
A general supposition refers to any one of a class of
acts, which may occur (or may have occurred) on any
one of a series of possible occasions, —if having tile
force of if ever or whenever.
The following examples contain particular suppositions:Jfhe is (now) able to do this, he is doing it, El TOTro 7rotLv
avvaTaL, 7roLl. If he was able to do this, he did it, el TOVTo 7roLe   Ev S6varo, irolet.  If he (shall) be able to do this, he will do it,
ahv TOVT ro 7rOlefv vTra,, IroL70o-f. If he should be able to do this,
he would do it, el  TO7o 7roteTiLV  UivLLTO, IrOLOti a/v.
The following contain general suppositions:If he is (ever) able to do this, he (always) does it, eav roiro
Trotelv vrJ7rat, 7rotel. If any one (ever) wishes to go, it is (always)
permitted, edv Tri Oo3vXTr(Lt Uval, e'&eaor. If he was (ever) able to
do this, he (always) did it, el rTOVTO roelElP UVVALro, ETOLtL. If any
one (ever) wished to go, it was (always) permitted,'l ty j3ouXotro eivaL,  rij. If any one shall (ever) wish to go, it will (always) be permitted, eadv rTLs  vact 3ovAarar, del e$orat. fj any
one should (ever) wish to go, it would (always) be permitted, e'C
TS RlevaL /3ovXOLTo, aEl yv eer?.
Although this distinction can logically apply to all suppositions
(present, past, arid future), yet the Greek distinguishes the two
classes in construction only in present and past conditions, even
here excepting those which imply non-fulfilment of the condition.
Therefore all the classes under I., except A. 1, include both particular and general suppositions.
1. Excluding fiom A. 1 the past and present general suppositions, which have a peculiar construction, we have four
forms of ordinary conditional sentences: —
A.. If the protasis refers to the present or the past, the
question as to the fulfilment of the condition which it expresses has been already decided (in point of fact) either
affirmatively or negatively; the speaker, however, either may
or may not wish to imply by his form of statement how that
question has been decided. He will, therefore, state such a
condition in one of two ways: —




90               CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.                [s 48.
1. If he refers to a present or past condition, expressing no
opinion as to its fulfilment, he may say if he is doing this. et
T-ovro rpdaorel, -  f he was doing it, El ETrpacraoev,  f he did it,
el E7rpatev,- if he has done it, ei 7re rpaXv, - if he had already
done it, ei ire7rpdxce.  The apodosis, expressing the result of
the fulfilment of such a condition, may refer to the present, the
past, or the future. Thus we may say,
El 7rpaTr-ce T-oTro, KaX\s EXet, if he is doing this, it is well.
El 7rpdar-El ToroVT, TjdpTLrKev, if he is doing this, he has erred.
El ITpao —crt TOTroO, Kaacos EeL, if he is doing this, it will be well.
El ferpae TOVTO, KaXk&\ eXXEL (dXev, eaf-xv, or fEe,), if he did this, it
is (was or will be) well; and so with the other tenses in the protasis.
(See ~ 49, 1.)
So in Latin, Si hoc facit, bene est; Si hoc fecit, bene erit.
2. If, on the other hand, he refers to a present or past condition, wishing to imply that it is not or was not fufilled, he
may say if he were now doing this, el T70ro'irpao-a-ev; or if he
had done this (although he did not do it), el 6irpa$ev.   The
apodosis here denotes what would be or would have been the
result, if the false supposition in the protasis were a valid one.
The apodosis here contains the adverb apV, which distinguishes
it from those forms of apodosis belonging under 1 in which past
tenses are used. Thus we may say,
El eirpaoore roTro, KaX\s av etX', if he were (now) doing this, it
would be well. El;rpaaore roUro, KaXO&S av exev may also mean if he
had been doing this, it would have been well.
El Eirpae TOVTro, KaXcDS3 av e'a-xE (or av elxev), if he had done this,
it would have been well (or it would now be well). On the other
band, ei'irpae TOVTO, KaX s e sXev (without'v) would mean if he
did this, it was well. (See ~ 49, 2.)
In Latin: Si hocfaceret, bene esset; Si hocfecisset, benefuisset.
REMARK 1. The Greek has thus a special form (A, 2) implying
that a condition is not or was not fulfilled, and another (A, 1) implying nothing whatever as to its fulfilment. There is no special
form implying that the condition is or was fulfilled, - a force often
erroneously assigned to the form A, 1. If this is to be expressed at
all, it must be done by the context, not by the form of the verb.
B. If the protasis refers to the future, the question as to
the fulfilment of the condition is, of course, at present unde.
cided, and a speaker may state such a condition in either of
two ways (B, 1 and 2), which differ more in the form of statement than in their meaning:



~ 48.]        CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONS.                  91
1. He may say'f he shall do this, eav 7rpacr-n roro (or,
still more vividly, ed IrpaieL TroCo), making a distinct supposition of a future case.  The natural apodosis to such a protasis
expresses what will be the result, if the condition shall be fulfilled. We may therefore say,'Eav rTpdao'o- Toi r o, KaXEs efeL, if he do this, it will be well; or el
irpa`ret rTOro, KaX6s e$EL, if he shall do this, it will be well.  (See ~ 50,
1.)  In Latin: Si hoc faciet (more frequently si hoc fecerit), bene
erit; rarely si hoc faciat, bene erit.
2. He may also say, if he should do this, es srpdao-oL roro,
still supposing a case in the future, but less distinctly and vividly
than befbre. The natural apodosis to such a protasis is a similar indefinite expression, it would be.  We can therefore say,
Ei Vrpda'oa-o TOVTO, KaX&s av eoX, if he should do this, it would be
well. (See ~ 50, 2.)  In Latin: Si hocfacial, bene sit.
REMARK 2. The two forms of protasis which the Greek expresses by the Subjunctive (eav 7rpao-or rToro) and the Optative (el
rrplao-oo rToro) have only one equivalent form in Latin; si hoc
faciat meaning if he shall do this (eav rovro Trpac-7J), as well as if he
should do this (el rTOVTO rpdua-oL).  (See ~ 50, 2, Rem. b.)  But in
the former sense the Latin commonly employs the Future Indicative, si hoc faciet (corresponding to el rTOVTO rpdaeL, if he shall do
this), or the Future Perfect, si hoc fecerit, leaving the form si hoc
faciat to represent the Greek el rTOVT 7rpacid-o, if he should do this.
II. In general suppositions the two following classes are
distinguished in construction from the correspondingparticular
suppositions (I. A, 1).
A. First, when the apodosis contains a verb of present
time, expressing a customary or repeated action or a general
truth, and the protasis refers to indefinite time represented in
English as present.   We may then say,'Eav rtys roro 7rpa(Ura, KaXWos eet, if any one (ever) does this, it is
(i;r all such cases) well.'Eayv TOVTO oroteLv &vTral, rTOcLE, if he is
(ever) able to this, he (in all such cases) does it.'Edv a-s Trorov  r.i,
caro08viffKeL, if any one (ever) drinks of this, he dies.
B. Secondly, when the apodosis expresses a customary or
repealed action or a general truth in past time, and the protasis refers to indefinite past time.  We may then say,
E'i rL TOoTO 7rprao-ot, Ka6Xs ELxev, if any one (ever) did this, it was
(in all such cases) well.  El TOrTeo rotelv  vvaLTo, enolet, if he was
(ever) able to do this, he (always) did it. E' rIS TOTroV iTol, adreiOslKErv, if any one (ever) drank of this, he died.




92               CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.                 [~ 48.
REMARK 1. General suppositions referrinc to the future (see
p. 89), as well as those referring to the present or past with nonfulfilment of the condition implied, not being distinguished by their
form from particular suppositions, are included under the rules of
~ 49, 2 and ~ 50, 1 and 2.
REMARK 2. Although the Latin occasionally agrees with 1he
Greek in the construction of general conditional sentences, -usinr
si faciat and si faceret like;ev 7rpdacor and el rpdcracol above, - it
commonly agrees with the English in not distinguishing this class
from I, A, 1.
I. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditional Sentences.
A. Present and Past Conditions.
~ 49.     1.  (Particular Suppositions.)        When the
protasis in   a   particular supposition     simnply  states a
present or a past condition, implying nothing as to the
truth of the supposition, the verb is in one of the present
or past tenses of the Indicative, after el. Any tense of
the Indicative may be used in the apodosis, to express
the result of the fulfilment of the condition.      E. g.
El ef3pOVT7rc-,F Kal ia-rpa+ev, if it thundered, it also lightened. (This
does not imply that the speaker has any knowledge or opinion on
the question whether it actually thundered.)  El 8' ov'rcw oroo
eTriv, e/LO fiLe`XXEL (IXov, eIvat. Ii. I, 564. See I, 178. Ei Tore
KOVpOS' ea, vvv avr te yijpas d Trrade. I1. IV, 321. El 6eol rT
8ip O cL  alo'Xpov, OVK el'lv 0eoI. EUR. Beller. Fr. 294. El eivy'aiSpov ayvow 0 Kat efavrov f7rtXh\eXrj(t7ua adXX  yiap ov'erepd irrT&
TOurToW if I do not know Phaedrus, I have forgotten myself; but
neither of these is the case. PLAT. Phaedr. 228 A. (See ~ 48, 1, A,
Rem. 1.)  EL peev (' Ao-KX7rLbos) Oeov  v, OVK  Q v al'rXpoKepa8S, el 
aloXpoKEPqS', OVK 7 v 0EOV. PLAT. Rep. III, 408 C. El JuLev 70Tror
WrErWOlrcKas, TL <0^"l 
NOTE 1. The Imperative, the Subjunctive in exhortations
or prohibitions, or the Optative in wishes, may stand in the
apodosis. E. g.'AXX' L  oK L got, rrTrelXe, if thou art resolved, go. SOPH. Ant.
98. (Here iav 3OKJj would refer to the future, while Er 8orKC is
strictly present in its time. Cf. Antig. 76.)'AXX' i 8 orK E, rX co -
feEv, ppdtac'co raXtvs. SOPH. Phil. 526.'AXX' e 7rov ITTrTXWV ye
OfOL Kal eptvzes e l (  v,'Avrivoov 7rpo yadolo TEXko Oavaroto Ki& X  e'
Od. XVII, 475.'AXX' El 3OKel aUa 7aO','  ralr Ta s adp3vXas Xvoa
rdxo~, but if this pleases you, let some one quickly loose the shoes, &c.




~ 49, 2.]     PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS.                 93
AESCu. Agam. 944.    KaKotr' d7roXol/pz)v, XavLOav E,l he   bLXS.
ARIST. Ran. 579. In the last three examples the Optative expresses a wish (~ 82), and must not be confounded with the Optative with av in apodosis (~ 50, 2).
REMARK. A protasis of this class may - also be followed by an
apodosis in the Optative with av, as ed TOV7' dai6s0 fortv, jSows & V
7r X 0o p t, if this is true, I should be glad to depart. But such an
apodosis always implies a protasis with an Optative, which is independent of the one expressed; so that these examples belong under
the mixed constructions of ~ 54. See ~ 54, 1 (a).
NOTE 2. Under this head belong all cases of particular suppositions referring to the present or the past in which the non-fulfilment
of the condition is not implied. We must be careful not to include
in this class the general suppositions explained in ~ 51; which require
a Subjunctive or Optative in the protasis, although we commonly
translate them in English by the simple Indicative.
NOTE 3.     The condition may still be present, even when
the Future Indicative stands in the protasis, if that tense expresses merely a present intention or necessity that something
shall happen hereafter; as when El TO7O ro Iro-e means if he is
(now) about to do this, and not (as it does in an ordinary
future condition) if he shall do this. E. g.
Atpe'7rXKrpov, l p a X t, raise your spur, if you are going tofight.
ARIST. Av. 761. (El fiaXEl in protasis commonly means if you shall
fight, being equivalent to Mea paxll.) O1 s er7LiY LTvlao-XLKv r7VeXY7V
rratbevofievoL.... ri &8aolpovo(T   TWV  av dayKdq? KaKOrraOoi'V7vT, e
yE T reLvroovarL Kal &ir7'ov Oua L Kal pLyo)oovot Kai a]ypvIrvlj
a ovao KaL TaXXTa rErKra  o X  crorv  y  OVTSd e; how do they differ,
&c., if they are to suffer hunger, thirst, &c. (i. e. if it is necessary that
they should suffer)? XEN. Mem. II, 1, 17.'H vvv ey  pyev OtVK avqp,
avTr 6' avjp, el Tavr' alOvaTE Tf.Se Klcrera&L KpaTr7, if this is to pass
unpunished. SOPH. Ant. 484. So el?r6deLos 8ap.a, II, I, 61; and
el 8tia,3Xrljo'oat, EUR. Hec. 863.
This ase of the Future must be carefully distinguished from that
found in future conditions, where it is equivalent to the Subjunctive.
(~ 50, 1, Note 1). The periphrastic form of the Future with e;kXX
and the Infinitive (~ 25, 2) is more common in this construction.
Here the tense of AAXXco (as in el fIkXovrtL roiro 7TOLFtV  for el TOTro
rroLiaotarv) shows that the condition is really present and not future.
So with the Latin periphrastic Future, si hoc facturus est.
~~ 2. In sentences containing present or past conditions,
when it is implied that the condition of the protasis is
not or was not fulfilled, and when the apodosis expresses




94                CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.                L~ 49, 2.
what would be (or would have been) the result if that
condition were (or had been) fulfilled, the secondary
tenses of the Indicative are used in both protasis and
apodosis.    The apodosis regularly contains the adverb
av.
The Imperfect here refers to present time or to a con.
tinued or repeated action in past time, the Aorist to an
action simply occurring in past time, and the (rare)
Pluperfect to an action completed in past or present
time.    E. g.
El TOVTO E'7pao(-Fe, KaX\S &v e LX e v, if he were (now) doing this,
it would be well (implying that he is not doing it). This may also
mean if he had been doing this, it would have been well (implying that
he was not doing it). The context must decide, in each case, to
which time the Imperfect refers. El Torro     W rpa e, KaX&co a i'cr X v, if he had done this, it would have been well (implying that he
did not do it.)  El TOTO E7 re7rpaXeL, KaXOs aV elxev, if he had.finished doing this (now, or at any past time), it would be well (implying either he has not, or he had not finished it).
Tavra OVK Wav e 8v vavr o   7TroeLv, eL  Kal TaL  jierpLa Ix p v o
they would not be able to do this, if they did not lead an abstemious
life. XEN. Cyr. I, 2, 16. IIoX v av avaor'Trepov 7 v, el ET  cO TO.
it would be much more wonderful, if they were honored. PLAT. Rep. VI,
489 B. OVX oVTr)' &av 7rpoOvLw Erls  r TO7r6Xepov vpas 7r a p Ka X ov v,
El pJ4 TpV Eipivv E & p cov aLrXpav ieaop.evrv, I should not exhort you, did
I not see (as I do), &c. Isoc. Archid. p. 134 A. ~ 87.   Aeyova-&
7radvTa f  L e KL Kal TOt el.i  e TvyXavev avrots e7rtT1J/.L7r evovoa, OVK
av OLOL T 7 a v rTOVTO ro a-ELPv, they tell everything as it is: and yet if
knowledge did not chance to be in them, they could not do this. PLAT.
Phaed. 73 A. EV o'ff' Or e'L T rE,Lo  eKI  orva, vOevOsL aLv oTro) /ue
a7rooarepeLv E L( v X ar o v wo ad&LsoarTos KaL rtl~s, if you: cared for me
at all, you would take care, &c. XEN. Cyr. V, 5, 34. El q a7rXarof
Te e'as XprqiTarv  Kat alcXpoKep817s, OVK av veKpOt, 07Kas atvewyes.
IIDT. I, 187.  (This implies aiiXrcrroT e,4 thou art insatiable, and
advwyes, thou didst open.)
OVK &v vK'o-Wv e K p ha IF e, el iA TP Kal vavrtKov e K  X e v, he would not
have been master of the islands, if he had not had also some naval force
(implying vavrLKOV eXiev and viaoCv EKpaTret, he had a navy, and he
was master of the islands). THuc. I, 9. (Tavra) OVK av 7rpoeX yev,
el  E7L  t eTcr evev a\TqOevcretv, he would not have declared these things
(referring to several), had he not been confident that he should speak
the truth. XEN. Mein. I, 1, 5. Etl  r av ai'vpes ayaOol, Zs (ap-bs,
OVK ay rore ravra  Tra ax o v, if they had been good men, as you say,
they would never have sukftred these things (referring to several cases).
PLAT. Gorg. 516 E.




~ 49, 2.]  SECONDARY TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.           95
Ka vv'     7 K' E'TL 7rXEova AVKLYv K  r aV e 8o'Ov aevrs, el, (pj ou
vo 7('e IeiyaS KopvOaLoXos'EKrcop, i. e. Ulysses would have killed still
more, had not Hector perceived him. I1. V. 679. Ka( vV KeV'ta lraVTa
K      are40 LT  KCoL LeVe av8piv, El fiL rts te & eov oXo f paro KaL p'
a'o(r-ev. Od. IV, 363. Kai'lusi' av' La ravr dartoavov, el pf)
adpxi( oa - raxEcov Kar~eXv0. PLAT. Apol. 32 D. Ti 7roT al'
ETraOov V7rs avrwy, el 7rXElci Xpdvov E7rETpoTrEO7qv;..  l
Ka reX\ e l  v liyE evLCLVaoSTO  err 8e r p o  r e rT p o 7r v  VTr'
aVrT&, oM' OV' ar a LKpa Trava rap avroYv a  reXa ov. DEM. Aph. I,
833, 12-19. Ei TroLvvv 56 IXL7ros rore rTvrE L)V EoX rX v yviupr,
ove'v h'v  vVYv 7E~7rTol7KEV  7 C'paev', ov8e roouvTr)v  KTJ)EaTo
8vLvap.v. DEM. Phil. 1, 41, 18. (See below, Remark b; and ~ 42,
4.)
E fi vLls jE')X8 e r e, E7ropEvO L E a hay'l ao-tXe'a, if you had
not come, we should (now) be on our way to the King. (Aor. and Imperf.) XEN. An. II, 1, 4. El yap ~K roV 7rapeXr)X\v0ros Xpdvov ra
&'ovTa ouroL c vve o Xe v a, ovoE aiv vlas vvv oEL 8  ovX\FVe6aL,
if they had given the necessary advice in time past, there would now be
no need of your deliberating. DEM. Phil. I, 40, 9. Toro el a dreKp1v CO, iKavcs,av 8l7 7rapa orov Tra oriorrqra T   e p a 0 r K i q, if you had
answered this, I should have already learned, &c. (implying dXX' ob
Ie~ld6)Kaa, but now I have not learned). PLAT. Euthyph. 14 C.
AOLrOy 8* ayv v           T71v ETL irrpi r ES 0o XecoS &LaXeXOvaL TrS?JLETrepaS, El
pfL 7rporepa TWV aXA\vX To V ElpjvrlV OTreTrotrlro. (This implies daXa Tr)V
ElprV7)v 7TpoT;epa Ir o r a Q t.) Isoc. Phil. p. 93 C. ~ 5. T~56   aYdKJfuaIrcoTv Z   i I?T TO r  aVOUv eL TL repL EJ.Lov y' fy p a e. DEM.
Cor. 251, 28.
Different tenses can of course be used in the protasis and apodosis,
if the sense requires it. See especially the example quoted above
from Dem. Phil. I, p. 40, 9, and the preceding one.
This construction is the exact equivalent of the Latin Imperfect
and Pluperfect Subjunctive in protasis and apodosis. With regard
to the tenses, the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive represents the Greek
Imperfect Indicative referring to present time; while the Latin
Pluperfect Subjunctive represents the Greek Aorist and Pluperfect
Indicative, and also the Imperfect referring to past time.
REMARK. (a.) It will be seen by the examples, that this
construction usually implies, not merely that the condition of
the protasis is not (or was not) fulfilled, but also that the
action of the apodosis does not (or did not) take place: thus,
EL roVro trpaev,, oeawrl av, if he had done this, he would have
been saved, implies not merely that he did not do this, but also
that he was not saved. The denial of the apodosis is not, however, inferred as a necessary consequence from the denial of the
protasis, which would often be an illogical inference; for (in
the example above) the person might have been saved in some




96               CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.            [~ 49, 2.
other way, even if he did not do the thing referred to. Indeed,
where it is not implied that the action of the apodosis depends
as a result upon that of the protasis as its condition, the action
of the apodosis is not denied: this happens when the protasis
expresses a concession, introduced by Kai el, even if, although,
or ovi' el, not even if; as Kal El rovro ErTpa~ev, eC&Oq) aiv, even if he
had done this, he would have been saved, where it may be
implied that he was saved.
(b.) In this form of conditional sentence, therefore, the verb
of the protasis always (and the verb of the apodosis generally)
implies its opposite; the Imperfect always implying a Present
or Imperfect, the Aorist an Aorist, and the Pluperfect usually
a Perfect or Pluperfect.  Thus ei Erpaocae, when it means if he
were doing, implies aXX' ov irpdaaet, but really he is not doing;
when it means if he had been doing, it implies adX' OVK`rparae,
but really he was not doing: el' iT) i7rpaev, if he had not done,
implies daX''irparev, but really he did do: el e;T7rErojK& r  ovro, if
he had already done this, implies either aXX' ov 7reTrolqtKev, but
really he has not done it, or aXk' OVlK e7rerotLKKEL, but really he had
not done it, according to the context.  This principle will
show which tense of the Indicative is to be used in any given
case, in writing Greek.
The Aorist, however, is very often used here, as elsewhere,
where the Pluperfect would express the time intended more
exactly (~ 19, N. 4); as in the sentence above quoted, ovi'u
av byv vvv\L 7reIrol0tKeV erpaev, where the Perfect WreTroirKev shows
that the Pluperfect might have been used for Z7rpa~ev.
NOTE 1. In Homer, the Imperfect in this construction
refers to past time, and is to be translated by our Pluperfect.
E.g.
"EvOa KE Xo yos  I Eva Kal dpLxava epya yevovro, eL /0 ap' bov voY?7e
7rarqip dv8p&v re ev -re, then there would have been, &c. II. VIII,
130. Et yhp Eyco TarSe 8Fe' (V,  Operon 7revKaXl/lTrLv, OVK Iyv V7TEre(fvy
rTVyUo V8aTOS aLlra pcOpa, if I had known, &c. Id. 366.
NOTE 2. Sometimes alv is omitted in the apodosis, although
the non-fulfilment of the condition is still implied. This merely
gives a more emphatic expression, as when we say it had been
for it would have been. The av can be omitted only when the




49, 2.]         APODOSIS WITHOUT *AN.                   97
context shows conclusively that the construction is not that of
~ 49, 1. E.g.
Nati ci  Ala 7 axvXvo' / v fLevrol, el VrTT 7ro ~flo' ov ye orov eT7rra-TTr6)v, yes, by Zeus, I were indeed ashamed, if I had been deceived,
&c. XEN. An. VII, 6, 21. KaXb v   v avr, EL ovK siyevvi Oq  avOpcoros EKelvos, it had been good for that man, if he had not been? born.
MATTH. Evang. XXVI, 24.
Compare VERG. Aen. XI, 115: Aequius huic Turnum fuerat se
opponere morti, it had been more just, &c., where fuisset would have
been the regular form.
NOTE 3. (a.)    An apodosis without av, but implying the
non-fulfilment of a condition, is often formed by an Infinitive
depending on the Imperfect of a verb denoting necessity, obligation, propriety, possibility, or the like.  This combination
merely expresses in other words what might have been expressed by the verb of the Infinitive in a past tense of the
Indicative with av. Thus   et'L e Trovrov (LXeuv means you ought
to love him (or ought to have loved him), —implying, but you do
not love him  (or did not love him),-and is equivalent to
7oVrov &v LclXAec, el ri aeovra eioteLs, you would love him  (or
would have loved him), if you did (or had done) what you
ought.  So eiLKU?q (re Tro7ro rooi'al means you would properly
have done this (but you did not), being equivalent to eiKOTrO
ToU70r  v iroltoras.
This construction occurs chiefly after the impersonal Imperfects Xp~iv or CXPl', EL,'av,, V,  v, rpoo7 iJev, IEKO& V, 77jporrTTe
(decebat),?v or v7rfipXev (it was possible), and. rv with nouns and
adjectives expressing necessity, propriety, &c.  So when 6v is
used with the verbal in -riov (equivalent to aeci with the Infinitive). When the Present Infinitive is used, the construction
refers to present time or to continued or repeated action in past
time; when the Aorist Infinitive is used, it refers to a single or
iromentary action in past time. E. g.
El ETT' 1TEcas fovuovgs ErTpaTr)XareE 6 IIpo-rq, Xp{V a(rov Wravrcav
Tr4v a\'icv a'rTEXo~ELvov ovi-r eL vat eriL Tr  fjL~ereptqv* Kal aiv i8\Xov
f aO-rt  i C7rl VKOas eXa\vveL, if the Persian were making his expedition
against us alone, he ought, letting alone all others, to be marching
directly into our country; and then he would show that he t.?as marching against Scythians. HDT. IV, 118.  Here Xpjiv lIvat means he
would be marching into our country (like fltev av), if he were doing what
would be expected under such circumstances,- implying that this
5                               G




98                CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.               [~ 49, 2.
condition is not fultilled. (See below, Rem. 1.)'E   p i v jev ovJs
Kat fK a o v? v rovS TOrv're avov olopiEvovs 8ev XaOeEv aLrovs d[Lovg
7r L I E K Y v a TT, L1) ft/lC KaKos X ey e  l v  7rEL8rE 8 TOTO  t apEvTEr eKeiLo 7ro ILOnv, K.T7.X., i. e. those who think they ought to receive the
crown would (if they did what is right and just) be showing that they
deserve it themselves, and not be abusing me; but since now they have
neglected the former and do the latter, &c. DEM. Cor. Trier. 1228,
28. EL yap vn' O8OVTOS TOL EiTe TEXEVT71CTEV /-E XPlv &j (e roteetv
7'h IrotC;ELs  vvv i bVs' al)x'p, if he had said that I was to be killed by
a tooth, then you would have to do as you now do. HDT. I, 39. (See
below, Rem. 1.) "E 8 e yv^J rovS Xe'yovras nTararas zrJre 7rpos EXOpa
Iro L e a- 0 a Xo'yv fivYa f/Tre rpoS XdpLV, i. e. the speakers ought not
to say a word out of regard either to enmity or to favor (and yet they
do so). DEM. Chers. 90, 1. nIorepov avr^v eX P v Ev'. OeTraX&Y
KaU AOXOTcOV TaEL 0d vy t rY KaTUaKra   0 a  iX TLrTT) TV TOv'EXXqj'i)vc
dpXilv; i. e. ought she to have helped Philip acquire his dominion over
the Greeks (sc. as she would have clone by your policy)  DEM. Cor.
246, 1.'EJi el pF  e iv i'X\XaLs TL(a-V fpLpaLs jaIKjr0?e TC TOToovd zicTwrv
ovTa, lhLa KaU 8LKrqV r p Oa (r K e avrJT  8 t 8 d Va, i. e. he would properly
have given satisfaction by a private suit (as if he had said 7rpocrlKOvrTco
8lia LK)V av e818ov). DEM. Mid. 525, 3. Kal TroXXoLE o'co, s ol os' o v T~e cr  e &lv el BOeXo vaaev vaXL'KEL Xpq/ara, daFEXjaC'ai, i. e. whereas I might have saved you, if I had been willing to spend money, &c
PLAT. Crit. 44 C. Ou yBp ev vj v /7 rapaKpovaTe0vrTo wv v Lv i e v a, XTt7rrp, for Philip could not have remained, unless you had been
deceived (implying he did remain). DEM. F. L. 379, 2. (See ~ 52,
1.)  Kal iXda KTa e   L  K o  v bVfia Sr p o o pa ar  a ra KaC /U LiaXaK&s,
fojrep vUv, VpLpaXe lv. THUC. VI, 78. (The orator adds, aXX
oU0' ipels vVV yE 7Tro ovW' ol (XXot ETTl rara WppILraE.)  EL /pEv TolvfU
alaTXpov TL eEAAXXOV epyaor'eaOat, Odvarov v aT ou 7r p o a t p e r o v r/v
(i e. repoatpeio-OaL E'8e). XEN. Mem. II, 7, 10. So in Latin: Quem
patris loco, si ulla in te pietas esset, colere debebas. Cic. Phil. II, 38.
(b.)  The Aorist and Imperfect of oq),tXwo (obXXco) are
sometimes used with the Infinitive like Xpjv, ZoeS, &c.; as in IL
1, 353, rt1i'v 7TEp poL  E\\XXEV'OXijV7To S f yyvaX ila  ZeVS V+tL3pEpETrs71   8' O,8' E  e TV-rOov'TLacv, i. e. Zeus ought to have secured
me honor; but now he has not honored me even a little.    From
this comes the common use of this form in expressions of a
wish; as (0e,~\e Kvpos ijv, would that Cyrus were living (lit.
Cyrus ought to be living).  This is an apodosis, implying as a
protasis if it were possible, or something similar.  See ~ 83, 2.
(c.) Similar to this is the occasional use of E;3ovXd'uqr (with.
out alv) to express what some one wishes were now true (but
which is not true). E. g.'E3ovXou'X^),uev o/ v KaO I T1V [ ovX\qv KIa TraS KKcX.70raV o4p1a0s




~ 49, 2.]          APODORSI WITHOUT iAN.                    99
8t oKe r  0 a  Kal TroV v6diov  X V cL v, would that both the Senate
and the assemblies were rightly managed, and that the laws were in
force (implying the opposite of 3opO     L &OLKeLo-OaL and lcrXveLv),
This is analogous to COqEXev eLvat, would that it were, and ectL EvaL,
it ought to be (but is not). AESCHIN. Cor. ~ 2.'E lovXdo p v /tev
OVK Ep L'C Lv c vdo3e, would that I were not contending here (as I am).
ARIST. Ran. 866. See below, Rem. 2.
(d.)  KLvYvvevo is used with the Infinitive, as a periphrasis
for the verb of the Infinitive with nv. E. g.'H 7ro'Xt\  v  VVVf e    7v raroa  ta <ap vat, el,  t lvoefos  reyeveTo, the city was in danger of being utterly destroyed, if a wind had
arisen. THuc. IIl, 74. El F'? E~EvOVyOliev elt AEXqovS, EKL VVVeC(raiev adroXo' alt, if we had not escaped to Delphi, we were in
danger of perishinq (or there was danger that we should perish)
AESCHIN. Cor. ~ 123. (If the meaning had been that there would
have been danger, we should have had E'KLvvvEvr'a.eV ay.)
(e.) The Imperfect of 1dXXc is sometimes used to express
a past intention or likelihood which was not realized.  E. g.
M  X Xe  V L  OEv 7rTor  olKOS 0' dbViLOSE Kait adlov E iy  e v a tI * Jv 8' T'pwsO e[O36ovro 0oi, this house was destined to be rich andfaultless; but now
the Gods have willed it otherwise. Od. I, 232.'AXXa rTa pev rov L eiX -
Aev dayac a- e a 0 a & 0o aVTOd, but even a God might have grudged us
this (lit. was likely to grudge us this), if we had obtained it. Od. IV,
181. So r95qv in Od. IV, 171: Kal ilv e'E )v EXOOvra (f )t  C (fev'oxov CiXcov'Apyetcov, El Vot VTrelp q aXa varo(  V E'CooKe (ZVcS), i. e.
I intended to love him (had Zeus allowed us to return). See DEM.'. L. 391, 11: oV rvu'TpaTEfVO-Ev E/EX XO, they would not have joined
h im. So in Latin: Hoe facturi erant, nisi venisset, they were intendigy to do this (and would have done it), had he not come.
REMARK 1. It will be seen that in the construction of Note 3 a
protasis is implied with the apodosis; e'8  -c TO Torov /tXjo-at being
strictly equivalent to roUrov'v  Xlo'a L et  a 8foVras ra  Eotra  O7la-a you
would have loved him, if you had done what you ought, or simply you
should have loved him.  (See ~ 52, 1.)  This form therefore commonly stands as an apodosis with no other protasis exp-essed; and
even if another is added (as in the first example under a), the implied protasis always remains the prominent one. Especially, this
implied protasis expresses the condition, the non-fulfilment of which
prevents the action of the apodosis from taking place. The whole
expression XprIv rovro 7roiev, &c. thus becomes the apodosis to the
expressed protasis, if one is added. In the third example under a
(HDT. I, 39), the real apodosis may be you would then do f'rom
necessity what you now do (implying that now you do not do itfrom
necessity); or we may perhaps explain Xplv better by Note 2.
In this construction the Infinitive (of course modified by the leading verb, as shown above) contains the main idea of the apodosis.




100              CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.             L~ 49, 2
When the main idea is contained in the verb of necessity, &c., so
that the non-fulfilment of the condition of the protasis affects this
rather than the infinitive, we have XpVv aiv, P'et aiv, Trp04-KeVV iv, &c.,
forming an ordinary apodosis (~ 49, 2). Thus el ra &eovra oVTro
trvvef3ovXevo-av, ovv aev a v!.is Cvv E e t 3AoveE(orOat, if these men haa
given the necessary advice, there would now be no need of your deliber.
ating, implies but now there is need of your deliberating. Occasionally both constructions can be used to express essentially the same
apodosis: thus in LYS. in Erat. ~ 32, we find, XP j v f (re, ELTrep?r)Oa
XPrers, roTS!  L XXOVcLV adIKCOs aiCroOaveiTo-at Jr7VVTrf^ ye v e r 0 a t if
you had been an honest man, you ought to have become an informer' in
behalf of those who were about to suffer death unjustly (implying but
you did not do so, OVK Ey;yov pywrlvvr); but in ~ 48, referring to the
same thing, the orator says, cLrep rYv advlp adya0os, edXP1v Av TrpTroV.LEV zir TrapavoLos aPXeLV, EITeLTa Trj f3ovX /rLrVv  7 E vv e V   0 a L a  K. r. T.,
if he had been a good man, it would have been his duty, &c. (implying
OVK eXpiv). The latter construction, however, is very rare where
the former would be admissible.
The distinction between EfEL a-e rTOVroV (O iv and elc Aiv re roTrov
LXEiZv would be expressed in Latin by te oportebat hunc amare andt
te oporteret hunc amare.
REMARK 2. The greatest difficulty in understanding the forms
explained in Note 3 is caused by the defect in the English verb
ought, which makes it impossible to translate them accurately.
Thus we translate OVK EcBL re Troro 7rotoloat (or TroLEl), non oportuit
te hoc facere, you ought not to have done this, expressing the past
time by the tense of the Infinitive, which we should express by the
past tense of ought if there were one. (You oughted not to do this
would represent the Greek and Latin idiom. The vulgar expression you had n't ought comes very near it.)
A further trouble appears when such phrases as OVK'&et cre TroEr
Irotelv refer to present time, meaning you ought not to be doing this
(as you are). The Imperfect here refers to present time, as it does
in the ordinary construction of ~ 49, 2. The Latin has the same
idiom, non oportebat te hoc facere. But in English, owing to the
defect in the verb ought, we are obliged to use the simple present;
so that we cannot distinguish in translation between  EtL oEe 4)tXEv,
oportebat te amare, and EL ore q(PC ev, oportet te amare, - both being expressed by you ought to love, although the former implies but
you do not love, while the latter implies no condition.
It needs perhaps to be added, that the tenses of the infinitive here
express no time of themselves, but are used in the ordinary con.
structions of ~ 15, 1, and ~ 23, 1. The equivalent Latin forms
(facere representing both IroLElv and 7roteo-at) will make this clear.
REMARK 3. It must not be understood that the Imperfects;Xp?,
eaeL, &c. with the Infinitive are always used in the construction of
Note 3. Thus aeet 8i ILf;ELV, in DEM. F. L. 379, 14, means simply
but he was obliged to remain (and did remain).




~ 49, 2.]  SECOND.RY TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.            101
NOTE 4. (a.) In 11. XXIII, 526 Ke is usei with a secondary
tense of the Indicative in protasis, apparently adding nothing to the
sense. (See ~ 50, 2. N. 2, b.)
El 8e K' ETr 7rpcTrepo ye YVTr bpO/los af Lorepo(tov,
Tji KIey  v 7rapeXaoar" o0v' aldopto-rov E'0rEKf..
(b.) When a/v stands in the protasis with a secondary tense of the
Indicative in Attic Greek, the expression is so obviously an apodosis
at the same time, as to present no difficulty. "Av can never coalesce with el to form'dv in these sentences, as it always belongs to
the verb. E. g.
Et rolvUv TroUTo Lroxvpov h   v a V  TOvrT) TrKPeFpLov, KafJoLt evea(Q) TeK/AqpLOI, K. T. X., if then this would have been a strong prooffor him (sc. had
he had it to bring forward), so let it be also a proof for me, &c. DEM.
Timoth. 1201, 19. (This sentence properly belongs to the class of
~ 49, 1; for the protasis really is if it is true that this would have been
a proof, to which the apodosis in the Imperative corresponds.) In
DEM. Cor. 260, 2, KaC riS OVK a!v d7re'KreLvE e 8E Kalos, eL 7T rO'v v7rapXOrovwv Tro 7roXe KaXa\v Xoyo) LyoVO KavraTacXvelv ETr fel plr' av;if we retain the final av (wlhich is strongly supported by Mss. authority), we must translate El ErceXlpr1 a'v if' it is true that I would
(under any circumstances) have undertaken, &c., and not simply ifI
had undertaken (el E7reXElpra-a).  See ~ 50, 2, Note 2, a; and ~
63, 2.
NOTE 5. In some cases the Aorist is found in the apodosis referring to present time, after a protasis in the Imperfect; it always
denotes, however, a momentary or sudden occurrence, or some other
idea which the Imperfect would not express so well. E. g.
El fLEV OVV r tV   pra   t r!v vv 8I, e Iprov VS, K. r X., if then
you were asking me any one of the questions before us, I should (at
once) say, &c. PLAT. Euthyph. 12 D.     El erre6v/LelS ravTrqs (TirP
ro(ptag), Keat eye (re ervyXavov avepoerIwv, Kc.r.., ri ay  otl a dreKpi v a; if you desired this kind of wisdom, and I happened to be asking
you, sc., what should you reply? [PLAT.] Theag. 123 B. See also
PLAT. Prot. 313 A; Gorg. 447 D; Symp. 199 D.
NOTE 6. (a.) In a very few passages in I-Iomer we find the Optative with KE in the apodosis referring to the past, where we should
expect a secondary tense of the Indicative. E. g.
Kal vV K E V Ev0' a' dX o t o Irvao dvpAwv Alvelas, el jL aSp' bv vodr'e
At6L OvydTlrp.'A(poSlTrr, Aeneas would have perished, had not Aphrodite
quickly perceived him. I1. V, 311. KaI v' Kv e  ev a'r oX o I oro Apqs
CToL 7roXk/OLto, el /u'Heplolaa'Ep eTa TyyEtXEV. I1. V, 388. (In
both these cases a7robXEro would be the regular form, in Homeric as
well as in Attic Greek.)  So II. XVII, 70,'vOa K~E epot is used
for Ev'a K  (4')epEv, he would have carried.  So I1. V, 85, TvlES6^v 56'
OVK av yvolr fs rorepotort IereIq, you would not have known to which.army he belonged: for the dependent Optative, see ~ 31, 3, Note.




102               CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.              [~ 49, 2.
(b.) The Imperfect Indicative is not used in Homer in the construction of ~ 49, 2 referring to present time. (See Note 1.) In a
few cases where the Attic Greek would use that form, we find the
present Optative in Homer. E. g.
E Mlsv rcs Tov ivOetpOV'AXatiz iaXXos v o t w, +revos' K~ fV a1 e v,
Kat vo aiftol iC a fiaXXov, i. e. if any other one had told it, we
should call it a falsehood, and should rather turn away from it. II. II,
80. In I1. XXIII, 274, we find the Optative in both protasis and
apodosis, where the Attic Greek would use the Imperfect Indicative: l vvv erwi 5a'XXc a \Xe otVV,  7' a v ey& rTh OrprTa EXawvy,
KXLr-qv8e q e p pol 7 v, i. e. if we were now contending in honor of
another (than Patroclus), I should take the first prize and bear it to my
tent. The present Optative in Homer is used also in its regular
sense, referring to the Future (See ~ 50, 2.)  The constructions
included in this note seem to be a relic of an ancient use of the
Optative in conditional sentences like that of the secondary tenses
of the Latin Subjunctive. (See Appendix I.)    For the similar
Homeric use of the Present Optative in expressions of a wish, see
8 82, Rem. 2.
B. Future Conditions.
~ 50.    1. When a supposed future case is stated distinctly and vividly (as in English, if I shall go), the
protasis takes the Subjunctive with eadv av (a), or 
(Epic e~ cfe or a   ice).
The apodosis denotes what will be the result, if the
condition of the Protasis shall be fulfilled.     It therefore
takes the Future Indicative, or some other future form,
like the Imperative.     E. g.'Eadv r' Xdij3o,  o rco aoL, if I (shall) receive anything, I will give it to
you.'Eav TL XCdn, s os, /oI, if you receive anything, give it to me. EL 8e
KEYV (sf p, S Kal rot 7re lOov ra&'AXato, yvovwOr EE' lrs O'S e) yfjY0ov
KaKoD OS re vv Xacv, but if you shall do thus and the Achaeans obey
you, you will then learn both which of the leaders and which of the
soldiers is bad. IL. II, 364. (For e4 Ke see ~ 47, 2.)  A' K' avrov
yv (o vry) eprTa radvr' eve7rovra, E'Troo flv Xalvav re Xr"vda Te, Eclara
Xd. Od. XVII, 549. So ai Kre wcL, II. I, 128. (See ~ 47, 1,
Note.)  El AEvey KEV MeveXaov'AXaeavspoE KaTairEa f V,  avro' EEtO''EXevjlv TX TCr  KaL KTrt ara 7rdvTa, LSxelS 6' v ve'r' VL voEj e8 a 7rov
orordpo'nv' El 8e K''AXetav3pov Kr e i vry av0tbs MeveXaoS, Tpo3as E'retF'EXE'vrqv Ka KTJrr!ara ravr' ao7roo val. Il. III, 281. Here e'XTc,
vecoteOa (Subj. in exhortation), and adrooovvas (Infin. for Imperative) are in the apodosis. A' Ka r7voS X: 7 Kepav rpayov, ctya TV
Xa+,. THEOC. I, 4.     Av 8e T7S av  o{rT rraL, OTYv V/L-v wsepa



50, l.J  SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE.               103
od pFe 0 a XELtp(,vOat, if any one shall stand opposed to us, we will try
to overcome him. XEN. An. VII, 3, 11.'AvP /i vvv  O e X W  e v EKEZ
7roXefLeLv avTr, eYvd0a8' (i o dvay K a C0Orlo fLe0 a rouro 7roLeiL, if we
shall not now be willing to fight him there, we shall perhaps be forced to
do so here. DEM. Phil. I, 54, 20. Here vuv refers to time immediately following the present: if Dem. had meant if we are not nowo
willing, he would have said el  vuv e' e OE;Xotev (~ 49, 1).'Hy
yap ravra cKaXiso 6 p cro Ef, 8 j LFltov 3 ov X vcrd Le Oa Kal 7repL T7W
aiXov. Isoc. Pac. p. 162 D. ~18. *Hv i Tnrv elpFjvrv 7r Troi? a  p. 0 a,
KaL rotovrovEs Fla avroVs 7rap a crXE),   pITC, 7ro\XXs adrf)a'Xias Tr
7r6X\v OtK (YO  oLeV. Ib. p. 163 A. ~ 20.'Eav oW'ITs v    Ov, Trore TEre
IKOto; XEN. Cyr. V, 3, 27. Ka' XpO avrols, eav,    e rT, and use
them, if there shall be any need. Ib. V, 4, 30. "Hv peiv rO\XEpOo
alp jaOe, IfTKETrL?JKETre 8epo avev 5orXcovW, el 0OpoveeL*' zv he
Clprvy  s o KT r e 8eolOat,'vev  rXwov  Ke r e'  s 3  KaXus e'eF,ra
vtjrepa,?'v plXol y;nv ca8, eLOL /e X o- e. Ib. III, 2, 13.'Eai
yap rT (re (fav;caKov rrr roewlK'S, 6JioXoy5& dcaFKJT'v eAv XEVTroL tunIV
( a l v o L a  KaKgov 7reTFrTOlrK  /LOr]hf (ovX\r]0eS, oV Kal o-a av 6 p o oy "
Fr eFs FLi8E'v Viri' iLo daCoKeIoOa; Ib. V, 5, 13. (IHere 6poXoyco must
be understood as referring to the future, like BjoXoyiYo7reL. ~ 10, 1,
N. 7.)'Eav -L77 0? ol LX\a'oool ()  a  l X T'i av oC - t v  0 ol f3aALX\js  Xo -
O 0 1) r co-t V, OVK e' t r KOaKOV 7'ravXa rals TdO Lv, unless either the
philosophers shall become kings or the kings philosophers, there is no
escape from troubles for states. PLAT. Rep. V, 473 D. Aio&0o' eKcW
KrTeLVFL eVavrOOV, z)v Tae  ev,e  0  X ywov. SOPH. Phil. 1342. TEaz
q. pv a f       OR K0t 6  e   r  oLVf, ov  el jEi,las avroTLs  orO6lv, if they
shall not have assisted us, there is no need of our assisting them. "Hy
o(r TOV Xot7roV 7ror' d  e X co at Xpovov, KaKLtr'T a r  o L rq v, i. e.
may I perish, if I ever take them away. ARIST. Ran. 586. (See ~34,1.)
REMARK 1. It will be seen that the apodosis in this construction
may take any form    of the verb that refers to the future,- the
Future Indicative, the Imperative, the Subjunctive in exhortations
and prohibitions, the Infinitive in any future sense, or the Optative
in wishes. It may also contain a Present Indicative including a
reference to the future (like Xpi or f6L) or a Present merely used
emphatically for the Future, like 6AooXoy6 above quoted from XEN.
Cyr. V, 5. 13, or 7ravXd eart from PLAT. Rep. 473 D.
REMARK 2. The English (especially the colloquial language)
seldom expresses the important distinction between this form of
protasis and that of ~ 49, 1. Thus modern usage allows us to use
the inexact expression if he wishes, not merely for el 3ov5Xera& (if he
now wishes), but alse for eav f3oXv\rraL (if he shall wish). The sense,
however, generally makes the distinction clear.
N. NOTE 1.     The Future Indicative with el is very often used
in the protasis in the same sense as the Subjunctive with 1dv,
sometimes alternating with it in the same sentence.     This is




104              CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.            [~ 50, 1,
merely a more vivid form of expression than the Subjunctive,
both corresponding to the English if I shall do this, &c. E. g.
El yap'AXtXXrtV oloS CrlE TpeoatL Ma X  r a L, ovh8 pilvvv' Covo-t
7roSKea IIX\elcova, if Achilles shall fight, &c. I. XX, 26. El 8e o-' y'
S 7rOXet/LOv r    aoX t trCCE,?7 TE c 0oo0 ptyn)afiv 7rOX\e v/ yE, KacL iX IrepwoOl rvOfaL. 1. V, 350. El Ne 7rpOs TOVTOLTL TLt Tre Xe  r'  TOy
3Lov ev, OVTOSr EKEoIV  ro aTOv  rels  3toS KEK\UaOaL atodis E'rt. HDT.
I, 32. (See Rem. 1.) El LU7 KaOeteL y&6oroav,'TraL, o0 Kada.
E]uR. Aeg. Frag. 5. El ae pL) roTvT eIrL8eielet, 7rs XPy' ravrr} rj
7rpoKXrjo'L rpocLXELEv -uads rov vov;; DEM. Aph. I. 829, 28. El' vyels
iaXXo -T 7yy&'Co0rEoe, O pJL yevoLTO, Tiva OLE(OOe avrT7v tvXr)v $tv;
DEM. Aph. II, 842, 15. (Referring to the same thing, p. 834, 24,
Demosthenes had said av yap a7r oJvyy  e o roT os, /) yEVOLTO, rroT
e7ro)(eXt3av o3)tXo-co.) 1Hv  e'X C\  E V a7rolorV'TKetv v7rep rTr b&KaLwvO
EvorKclpX)a'o0v   E 8e   o3 o   o<r dij, 0 e   a TO  KLVoUVOVS, El TroXXLaS rapaxas Kcarar7i-'oTiev vas airrovs. Isoc. Archid. p. 138 A. ~ 107.
This use of the Future must not be confounded with its less common use in present conditions, ~ 49, 1, N. 3, where it is not equivalent to the Subjunctive.
NOTE 2. In the Homeric language the following peculiarities appear in this construction:(a.) The Subjunctive with KC is sometimes used in the
apodosis instead of the Future Indicative, thus making the
apodosis correspond in form to the protasis. E. g.
EN 8e K i) 8oflltv, ayc  e KIev avros e'Xo pat, and if he do not
give her up, I will take her myself I. I, 324. (Compare I, 137.)
This gives a form of sentence analogous to that in which the
Optative is used in both protasis and apodosis. See ~ 87, Note.
(For the use of 8e in apodosis, see below, ~ 57.)
(b.)'HY is the only contraction of el av found in Homer.
The most common Homeric form is, however, EL Ke (sometimes
d 8' Ke). El a'v is rarely found, as II. III, 288.
(c.) El Xe or aX KE is sometimes found even with the Future
Indicative in Homer.  E. g.
Al K~E aVev ee/LOeV....'IXTov 7re L S 8 e'at, ov8' a OeX crf
fKTrfpraL, To-TWc TOVT. 1. XV, 213.
For K~ (and even av) with the Future in apodosis, see ~ 37, 2.
(d.) The simple el (without av or Ke) is often used with the
Subjunctive in Homer, apparently in the same sense as el KX or
the Attic ayv. E. g.
E t 8 av rLS pa i r at OEoev evI oWo7r& 7rroVr', T 7fooiat e) ar'Tleaoctv
exO!v TaXacrevOea Ovpov. Od. V, 221. OvSe 7roXLV8e epXoiUa, e t I
7rov T TEPI(pov  IV EX'neLoea eXeA 0c oVTp V y C(Y. Od. XIV, 372.




50, 2.]  OPTATIVE IN PROTASIS AND APODOSIS.            105
NOTE 3.    (a.) The Homeric use of the simple el with the
Subjunctive continues in lyric poetry, and is found in the
chorus of the Attic drama, and even in some passages of the
ordinary dialogue. E. g.
El yap Odavrs KaL TrXevr'ojas afJjs. Sopi, Aj. 496. Avacra'Xava
r p' Ey), e'O V ( To rr reprlOcS. OP.. C. 1442. Eil J- Eao (eKpady
fK rTaoeE TrJS y7^, OVOeTrore t4Slo0otiaL. ARIST. Eq. 698. El rts eV
X daCov X6yov e'oXo' aKOV err. PIND. Isth. IV, 16.
(b.) In Attic prose, this construction is extremely rare, and its
existence is denied by many high authorities; if we follow the Mss.,
however, we must admit it in a few passages, as THuc. VI, 21: Ov
vavTLKjS orTparTaS,LOVov 8EL, daXXa Kal 7reOVY roXN \VV  t7rXelY, aXXw re
Kal E iv r a Ta  v at 7r6Xes l, pof7Oe'la-at. (Here only a few of the
worst Mss. read ijv for el.)
NOTE 4. For the change from the Subjunctive to the Optative
after secondary tenses in indirect discourse, see ~ 74, 1.
2. When a supposed future case is stated less distinctly and vividly than it would be stated by the Subjunctive (as in English, if I should go), the protasis
takes the Optative with ei.
The apodosis here denotes what would be the result if
the condition of the protasis should be fulfilled, and
takes the Optative with av.    E. g.
El EXmOL, irdvTr &v Mot, if he should go, he would see all. E't Cr
IUvTSs e0e oA o  LXEELYV K j O l  re OV/p, Cr3 KE V TL KElWvY yE KaL
EKX EXac  o r o ycdto, if she should be willing thus to love you, &c
Od. III, 223.'H K     0 T o a t Iplal.os Tptlifxoo re trathes, lXXot
re Tpc&esv leya KEV K XI a p o I ar o OVJp, EL aCPlv radte T ra Ura Trv o laro
papvajtevouv.. I, 255. (See ~ 47, 2.)'AXX' el oi tr 7rL r oto, To
KEV 7rTOX KfpBaOV E'17. 11. VII, 28. E'ts r  opfIros ovK aV, eld rpad((ao l KaXcoS. AESCH. Prom. 979. El be rTL TOVS Kparovvras TOu
7rXTOovS El CapElTV 7rp orp E+e ev, aLbforEpovs av O V j a-. Isoc.
ad Nicocl. p. 16 C. ~ 8. E'L'Tl rwv ~o-t cvvvr^v TY rapE 0' roLesv
a a(r Tvy(Xadve evXoyYv, irWS OVK aY dOXt6iraros e;tr; Isoc. Busir. p.
230 C. ~ 47. OUBi yap av. MG0OKOS [LE 6  aa-cltXvs 7rraLvolr, el
eSe Xa Vott 70TOVS evepyeras. XEN. An. VII, 7, 11. El poi tvvayrov
v7W' avrTv t'le crcoOWrat, arOKTLYvatpi av tzavroV. DEM. Eubul.
1820, 25. OW6' el Trdares EX\o ov ti pa at, rXWOet ye ovX V  p3r  a -?oIteO' A v rovS T7oX.fieovS. XEN. Cyr. II, 1, 8. Ov6 7roXXiq az
uXoyla eZr, El Pofi3oLo Tro   Odavarov 6 roLtoroS; PLAT. Phaed. 68
B. Oitos 8' a'ros, el qf0oyyvY ad.ot, a(I  roTaT  Iv Xee
AESC-. Ag. 37. HII  OVY OK avY oKTrpoTara 7rdTaYrv eyo r eTro 0 vO.s




106              CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.             [~ 50, 2.
c r v, E2 le  r f L o'aL v r To EVa (vov; how then should I not have
sufjered (lit. be in the condition of having suffered) the most pitiable of
all things, if they should vote me a foreigner? DEM. Eubul. 1312, 17.
(See ~ 18, 1, and examples of the Perfect Optative there quoted.)
REMARK. (a.) This form of the conditional sentence must be
especially distinguished from that of ~ 49, 2; the more so, as we often
translate both e'r) aiv and'v aiv by the same English expression, it
would be; although the latter implies that the supposition of the
protasis is a hflse one, while the former implies no opinion of the
speaker as to the truth of the supposition.
(b.) On the other hand, the distinction beween this form and that
of ~ 50, 1 is less marked, and it is often of slight importance which
of the two is used in a particular case. Thus it is often nearly indifferent in English whether we say if we shall go (or if we go), it
will be well, or if'we should go, it would be well; in Greek, the former
is Eav A'W,&\EV, KaXkos Eg~, and the latter is el'XAoLFemv, KaoX& av
xoiL. (See ~ 48, I, B, Rem. 2.) In writing Greek, this distinction
can generally be made, by first observing the form of the apodosis
in English; if that is expressed by would, it should be translated by
the Greek Optative with av; if it is expressed by will, it should be
translated by the Future Indicative. (Other forms of the apodosis,
as the Imperative, will present no difficulty.) The form to be used
in the protasis will then appear from the rules for dependence of
Moods (~ 32 and ~ 34); the Optative will require another Optative
with el in the dependent protasis (i. e. the form of ~ 50, 2, el'X 0 o -
fLev, KaXos av'XoL); while the future Indicative or any other
primary form will require a Subjunctive with Eiv, or a Future Indicative with el (i. e. the form of ~ 50, 1, awv e'XOo8oev, KaXds  E~Lt,
or El eevcoIe O0a, KaXOkS EEL).
In indirect discourse we often find an Optative in protasis, which
merely represents the same tense of the Subjunctive or Indicative
in the direct discourse. See ~ 69, 1; ~ 74, 1; and ~ 77.
NOTE 1. Cases of the omission of av in an apodosis of this class
are rare; they occur chiefly in Homer, less frequently in the Attic
poets (even then chiefly in questions, and after such expressions as
oVK "'a0' o'7FTrs), and seldom or never in Attic prose where the text
is beyond suspicion on other grounds. E. g.'0 6e XepliasLov Xadie Xelpi TvpEith?, fifya epyov, 8 o~v &o0  y avape
dEpoLev, which two men could not lift (if they should try). II. V,
303. (See ~ 52, 2.) Teav, Zev, 8vlvaoLv TLs advpclv vrepp3ao-ia KaraXrot; SOPH. Ant. 605.'AXX' bverproXpov dv8pos f)po6vqLa ris
X yo; AESCH. Choeph. 594. "Er' o'v OrTWS'"AXKoyTLs es4 ylpas
1p4Xol; EUR. Ale. 52. OVK gEU Oro' rO  XE a t itL ra Jfevl KXad.
AESCH. Ag. 620.   OVK Efrriv oriTo texiova iFopav v e I a lX  oo vl.
AESCH. Prom. 292. IIws oVv dTa, (s e L7rOl rTs, Erl7/apTrave; i. c.
as one might say. EUR. Andr. 929. "Q7rrep E'lo  rLs ro'Ttos, as one
would say r 6 os. (?) ARIST. Av. 180.




~ 51.]               SAN IN PROTASIS.                    107
NOTE 2. (a.) The adverb iv is sometimes used with the Optative in the prolasi,, but only when the protasis is itself at the same
time an apodosis, with another protasis expressed or implied. This
is, of course, no exception to the general rule (~ 39); and it is to be
noticed that the I'v in this case always belongs strictly to the verb,
and never joins the El to form cdv. E. g.
OvroiL ravrTXes, ovS8' EL uq T0ro il Oa T' av rovr o, evKara')pov1rT/w
earw, it is not wholly to be despised, even if you would not do this (if
an opportunity should occur). DEM. Phil. I, 44, 30. Kal iya, E'Trep,AXM Te d vOpsB7p v lre I 0 o i t rl v a v, KaL -ol 7rIT0oalt, if 1 would trust
any other man (if he should give me his word), I trust you. PLAT.
Prot. 329 B. El ye /AL7Q8e 8ouov adKparrT 8e al eO' Av, t7re oVic
aLov avrov ye )vwtXadao0at rTOLrovT yevorfalt; if we would not take
even a slave who was intemperate (sc. if one should be offered), &c.
XEN. Mem. I, 5, 3. (Such conditional sentences as the three preceding belong properly under ~ 49, 1. Compare the last example
under ~ 54, Rem.) See ~ 49, 2, N. 4, b.
So occasionally in Homer; as II. V, 273, el TroVTr K X df o  e v,
apoieOda KE KX\OS eAOX6v, if we could (in any case) obtain these, we
should gain great glory; and 11. I, 60, El KE OV aaro'v yEe 0fVyoIEEv, if'
we would escape death (where el Oavarov V7'yoLIev would mean if we
should ever escape death).
(b.) Commonly, however, when el K occurs in Homer, KB belongs
to the el, and no force of an apodosis is perceptible. Here, as in
final clauses (~ 44, 1, N. 3, a), the Ke adds nothing to the sense that
can be expressed in English. E. g.
HIrs av eyc oqLLoLt per' a0avadroLL O0eolCLvt  e V   Ke V Apfs OX oL T
XP;eo  KaLi EofiovO dX6as-. Od. VIII, 352. Tiv KeV tro Xtapi'atro
7waraTp adrespei' aoLrowa, EL KEY 4ie v  wbsOv T ro eTi vrvalv'AXamv. II. VI, 49.
But if the KE is separated from the el (except by LstV, 8e, yr, yap,
&c.), or if the sense shows clearly that it belongs to the verb, it is
the sign of an apodosis, as in the Homeric examples under (a).
See ~ 49, 2, N. 4, a.
NOTE 3. It follows from ~ 26, that the Future Optative cannot
be used in protasis or apodosis, except in indirect discourse to represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse.
NOTE 4. For a rare Homeric use of the Optative for the Imperfeet or Aorist Indicative, see ~ 49, 2, N. 6.
II. Present and Past General Suppositions.
~ 51.   A  present or past supposition is said to be
general, when the protasis refers indefinitely to any one
of a series or class of acts, and not to a definite act or




103               CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.                  [~ 51.
a definite series of acts.    The apodosis must express a
customary or repeated action or a general truth.
Here the protasis takes the         Subjunctive    with   eav
after primary tenses, and the Optative with el after
secondary tenses.      The apodosis may take the Present
or Imperfect Indicative, or any other form          which implies repetition. E. g.
Hv 7JOT~E aafios IKr) raL (0aL  T y'epar 7ro1Xv /eCLov (sc. CtO-V), if
ever a division comes, your prize is always much greater. 11. 1, 166.
"'Hv f yyVs E X O8  OdararoS, OV38el [OVXErTa OVT)aKeiV, if (or when) death
comes near, no one is (ever) willing to die. EUR. Ale. 671. "Aras
Xdyos, av av 7r Tr 7rpady/Aara, yIaTdrav rLt TalveraT Kal K~eVOV, all speech,
if deeds are wanting, appears mere emptiness and vanity. DEMI. 01.
II, 21, 20. AtareXet ILLOaS)v, OUVK vY r  L atvrv aditK, aXX' cdv rLva
v TorrrTe6v r feXrliova eavrov elvcu, he continues to hate, not if any
one wrongs him, but if he ever suspects that any one is better than himself: XEN. Cyr. V, 4, 35. EuXaf3oO ravs 8af3oXa, KaV 4evoeis os r 
beware of slanders, even when they are false. Isoc. Demon. p. 5
C.~ 17.
El Lo Tivas Oopv3overvovs a tco' 00 ro, T  T  alov  o'oTOOV oKOrTWV
Kara3arevvvvaL rqv rapaX)v 7rElpaTo, whenever he saw any making a
disturbance, he always tried, &c. XEN. Cyr. V, 3, 55. OvK aTreXELFreTO Er avrou, el p r/ davayKaLov C lq, he never left him, unless there
was some necessity for it. XEN. Mem. IV, 2, 40. E~ TIr a vre lro,
ev0bs TEOVIKEt, if' any one refused, he was immediately put to death.
TH-U. VIII, 66. "Hv ro7s pv pfd OaXfpols e7rLKOVppra Trs Xlovo, eL rtS
_  av'v T V TpO rCov o/p0aXl&iv r o p e  r o, TrV e 7rObc6v E' TIS
KlvolTO. XEN. An. IV..       5 AXX' el T{ r   C (!) popLevP, Wrpvvev:fpeLv. EUR. Ale. 755.''ErTEL8 oe E Lov acrOv rXTaloTa, orvuXafdovrT
alyovu'v avTLKpvS do aT7OKT7VOVVTES, OLTrep Kal -TOV aXXovs ArecqaTrov,
et rtva X)lTrrv  KacKovpyov   v X X   1 o  v, i. e. where they had been
in the habit of killing any others whom they took. LYs. Agor. p.
137, ~ 78.
The Optative in these examples, referring to past time, must
be especially distinguished from the Optative in ordinary protasis
(~ 50, 2), referring to the future. El and dar in this construction are
almost equivalent to o're or orav (which are the more common expressions), and the protasis has precisely the same construction as
the relative sentences of ~ 62.
The Present and Aorist Subjunctive and Optative here do not
differ except as explained in Remark before ~ 12.
REMARK.     The gnomic Aorist, and the other gnomic and
iterative tenses of ~ 30, can be used in the apodosis of these
general propositions.    The gnomic Aorist, as usual, is cone
sidered a primary tense (~ 32, 2). E. g.




~ 51.]           GENERAL SUPPOSITIONS                     109'Hv cr p a Ao v, avreX7rr[oavTres a\a eir X  p co a V TqV Xpelav,
if they fail, they aiways supply the deficiency, &c. THUC. I, 70.'Hv
fE TS roovr rT rapafp a l, a     qltdav avrois rr    a a eeav, they
(always) impose a penalty upon every one who transgresses. XEN.
Cyr. I, 2, 2. El' 7tves  o   t E V 7r TOVS roep~Tpov' f7rtKparovvras,
aveOpao'-7oav   v, whenever any saw their friends in any way
victorious, they would be encouraged (i. e. they were encouraged in all
such cases). THUc. VII, 71. (See ~ 30, 2, and XEN. Mem. IV, 6,
13, there quoted.)
NOTE 1. The Optative in this construction is not found in
Homer, although it is very common in the equivalent relative sentences (~ 62).
NOTE 2. Here, as in ordinary protasis, the poets sometimes use
the simple er with the Subjunctive instead of eai. (See ~ 50, 1, N.
3.) E.g.
Elt'rep ycp 7e XXov yE Ka aTrT!ap  KaTa 7r5 +,'AXXa ye Kal tierTOSrOev eeXf KOTOV, oc'pa reXeaclr. fl. I, 81.
E   e  v y 77 lev KLpa ravr qXyeyos OavaTroto,
NLKiocaS 8' aiXLS dyXaoYv evXos A 7,
aIdvTes tzLv rTfCIwLv op'zS veol?8eB 7raXaLol,
fIoXXha e reprva' 7raBov epXcra& cls'Aitrv. TYRT. XII, 35.'AXX' a'vapa, K e' Tl  ( rOO)s, TO pavOaver
IIoX' aloxpov ovaev Kal rob fq TEeiL ayav  So. SOPH.Ant. 710.
NOTE 3.     The Indicative is sometimes found in the place
of the Subjunctive or Optative in a general protasis of this
kind.   Here the speaker merely refers to one of the many
cases in which the event may occur, as if it were the only
case, - that is, he states the supposition as if it were particular,
and not general. E. g.
El' Tri &vo q KaZ 7r\Xovs TLs f)icepas Xoyl~eraat piratLos ecTLV, if
any one counts upon two or even more days, he is a fool. SOPH. Trach.
914.'EXevepos 7roXlTevo'ofv, oiv t opyO7S T'OV rEAa7, el KaO' Aovqv Tl
ap a, EXovres, i. e. not (having a habit of) being angry with our neighbor, if he acts in any case as he pleases. THUC. II, 37. (Here the
Indicative pae is used as if some particular act of some one neighbor,
and not any act of any neighbor, were in the speaker's mind.)  E&
rE TL rE7rPWTra, a7refKpLovTO, if any one asked anything, they replied (to
all such). THUC. VII, 10.'E/dul OVK EI L'S KaKs ratXo)v r/i vv -
T o, XX EA  I T' evepyerovfJLevos aXadpLaTos  a ivo r o. XEN. Ages.
XI, 3. (Here, without any apparent reason, the writer changes
from the Indicative to the Optative.) See ~ 62, N. 1.
This use of the Indicative is exceptional in Greek, but it is the
regular construction in Latin and English. See ~ 48, II, Rem. 2.




110                CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.              [~ 52, 1.
Ellipsis and Substitution in Protasis or Apodosis.
~ 52. V. ery often the protasis is not expressed
in its regular form   with et or eav, but is either implied
in something that precedes or follows, or expressed in
a participle, a preposition with its case, an adverb like
ovjw~T, or some other part of the sentence.
When a participle takes the place of a protasis, it is
always in the same tense in which the finite verb which
it represents would itself have stood after el or Eav, in
the Indicative, Subjunctive, or Optative.          (See ~ 109,
6.)   The Present participle stands for both Present and
Imperfect, and the Perfect for both Perfect and Pluperfect.   (See ~ 16, 2; ~ 18, 3, Rem.)        E. g.
OvrE EaoOLOVoL TrXeco 7) Svvavt; petv,  a ppay   yap av oVTW
dapietvvvvaL TrXEIc 7)  w vvavrat' EpeLV, a rro 7r v ye L e  yap av, they do
not eat more than they can bear, for (if they should) they would burst,
&c. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 2, 21. Avrol av eTropevOl a-av i ol II\\ot' o a
8' bViovyta OvK,v aXX1 \\ l 7 rV-ar? EK17VaL, they would have gone themselves where the others went; but the animals could not go otherwise
than as they did. XEN. An. IV, 2, 10. So J yhp av Xw01a-aa    o,
11. I, 232.
ToOro 7rotoUvrFe ev 7rpdTovoatv (i. e. eav r o ia-r v), if they shall do
this (habitually), they will prosper.  Toro 7rotro-avres etU 7rpadovo-Lv
(i.. eav 7rol a cro v), if they shall (once) do this, they will prosper.
To7ro TOtroLvrT ei av 7rpadrotev (i. e. el r o to  v), f they should do
this (habitually), they would prosper. Torto vrotqo-avres eS av Trparroev
(i. e. el r O t i  a e v), if they should (once) do this, they would prosper.
Touro TroIvvrev e4 av e'7parTov (i. e. e  r o tovv), if they were doing
this (or if they had been doing this), they would be in prosperity. Tovro
7rotocavres ev av cirparrov (i. e. el  7roir  a v), if they had done this,
they would be in prosperity.
HIMs &8ra 8LKTS' o Vr a-s 6 ZE'i OV/K at7roXAevf To v7rarep' avrov  jo-aS;
i. e. how is it that Zeus has not been destroyed, if Justice exists? ARIST.
Nub. 904. (Here 3iKrjs ov'a-rs represents el 8KI) E-rrlv.)'AXX' eia-odeo60a 8odovs 7rapac-Tr e X o r    (i. e. eav 7rapaarreTLXo >e), but we
shall know, if we shall enter the house. SoPm. Ant. 1255. 2v e K X V co 
~'aEt raxa (i. e. eav KXt;J), but you will soon know, if you listen.
ARIST. Av. 1375.    So uiA aLaOdrv, unless I learn, for Eav jg Iado,
Nub. 792. Kat KEev ror' eEXotL/L At LO'S  e 8L6VTOS dpEOat aea, nd
this I should like to obtain, if Zeus would only give it. Od. I, 390.
(Here AtLO 8L8ovroS = el ZevEs'Loi).) TotaUrd rav yvvatL a-crvvva Ito
xosLE (i. e. d a-vvvauots), such things would you suffer, if you should




~ 52, 1.]  ELLIPSIS OR SUBSTITUTION IN PROTASIS.             l i
live with women. AESCH. Sept. 195. OM' 4v or-itL   o-ai7 r TrV',irr
op  v arreXovtrav dacroTi (i. e. el 6pt S). SOPI. Ant. 185.'AO?7vai(v
8e TO avIo TOVTO 7ra0 v To v, 8t7rXaoVlav aiv 7rv bvvaupv fLKadEa-Oa
(oLmac), but if the Athenians should ever suffer this (nraOVrTov =E
rdO0Loev), I think it would be inferred that their power was twice as
great. Tnuc. I, 10. (Here nothing but the context shows that
7raOorVTov does not represent el'iraOov, if they had ever suffered.)
Mapl.av 8' &v a lr' (T r aa v   KoV Cto, O   epcoW v aV ctprov, and if you ever
asked for something to eat, 1 used to come bringing you bread. ARIsT.
Nub. 1383. (Here alTracavros represents el alTro-etLa in a general
supposition, ~ 51. For Kov av see ~ 30, 2, and ~ 42, 3.) IIpiv
yevecrat n7r)cro-eTEv v Trt  d K oV (Ia  (i. e. El rKovo-c), before it happened, any one would have disbelieved such a thing, if he had heard it.
TITuc. VII, 28.   Ob y7p av IeraneelOetv VWfas e     ir~.L!J ToLavTrs
ov cr s T    rs 7rapXovao-ws vTroXr'+,es, for he would not be seeking to
change your minds, if such were not the prevailing opinion (i. e. el 1u
ToLavT rI  v). DEM. Cor. 304, 1. Mri KaTryopr    zavro s Ala'EXivov
Y.t)b8V EEto rCs ypa(pj  ov8' tiv ey7 X6yov ove;va W7roLouvLv Erepov (i. e.
el,/? Karr7)yprT7er). Ib. 236, 28. Ta a    ara av'7rpa4e KaL TrpWrrj
X a o Oa (i e. e.  7rpbrrT EXaXEv), it (the soul) would have done the
same, even if it had been the first to draw the lot. PLAT. Rep. X, 620 D
So THUC. VII, 13, 1.
To beLv E 7r' E K eK  o v  ro\XXaKitS  v  E8tv0X;Oqav, if it had depended on
him, they often would have been disbanded. Isoc. Pan. p. 70 B. ~ 142.
Atd yE z vas avsrovs 7rdXaLt v aTroX tcoXtre, if it had depended on yourselves, you would long ago have been ruined. DEM. Cor. 242, 10.  (So
KaO' v/Laz.)  idaXat yap bv EvEKa y E +7qrj   a'LcdTwv e68KFL IKat)K1V,
for, if decrees were of any avail, he would long ago have suffered
punishment. DEM. 01. III, 32, 16.  (Here the protasis is implied in
EVEKa +7?)qto/LraTc)V.)   0  to r  yap OVKeTL TO  Xotrov TrdacrXoLyev av
KaK&s,Jbr in that case we should no longer suffer. DEM. Phil. I, 44,
12. So os o ovTo 7repLyeVdoJevos av, XEN. An. I, 1, 10. O0d' av
S Ka t w  ES KaKoV TaTroL(l Tt. SOPH. Ant. 240.
In these cases the form of the apodosis will generally show what
form of protasis is implied. When the apodosis is itself expressed
by an Infinitive or Participle (~ 53), as in THuc. I, 10, the form of
the protasis is shown only by the general sense of the passage.
REMARK. The Future participle is not used in protasis to represent the Future Indicative, as it would denote time future relatively to the time of the apodosis (~ 28), which the Future Indicative in protasis does not do. The Present and Aorist participles,
representing the Present and Aorist Subjunctive, express future
conditions, thus making the Future participle unnecessary.  The
Aorist participle in protasis can always represent an Aorist Subjunctive in the sense explained ~ 20, N. 1.
NOTE 1. An ellipsis of the verb of the protasis takes place
in the Homeric    l 8' aye, for el 86E foXCL, lyE, and in such expressiins as El t1 8ta roTro, had it not been for this.  E. g.




112               CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.             [~ 52, 1.
El'' dye, TOL KeKEaX,\ Karavevco'Jat... I, 524.  El 8' i'ye Myv,
7rreprlaL, Lva y7voooL Kat o6oe, but if you wish, come now, try it. 11. 1,
302. Kal el EI  alt rov 7p rapvtviV, evEro-Ecv aIv, and, had it not been for
the Prytanis, he would have been thrown in. PLAT. Gorg. 516 E.
(Compare 8ad ye vuia, DEM. Cor. 242, 10, quoted ~ 52, 1.)  Ov yap
sb el 1iF 8La AaKe8ati oviovs, ob8' S el Lj HIlpevov ovX Vnre&avro,
0ou' os el /Lj 8b'HyrjOL7rrov, ovo' S el rL7 LA ro TO Kal TO, eo'Orlcrav av
o0 4<K.ElS, ovX OvTO TOTE aT 7yyliXv, for he did not then report that, if
it had not been for the Lacedaemonians,- or if they had not refused
to receive Proxenus,- or if it had not been for Hegesippus, - or if it
had not been for this and that, - the Phocians would have been saved.
DEM. F. L. 364, 12. So el fLIr Kpeda'as, had I not done it by hanging
up, &c. ARIST. Nub. 229. So in alternatives: see Note 2. (Cf.
~ 53, Note 1.)
NOTE 2. In alternatives, el 8be piL, otherwise, regularly introduces the latter clause, even when the former clause is negative.
EZ le A?} is much more common than Eav 8 tpq, even when eav
iEv with the Subjunctive precedes.  E. g.
IIpos ravTa FL) rvTT Vrr'  I 8i, -cavTrv 7Tor' alrtaOet, therefore do
not beat me; but if you do, you will have yourself to blame for it.
ARIST. Nub. 1433. IliX\e1ov OK e'LOV T0rotLVE'  el be j T, Kal avTro
avayKaaO^jrrErOat fi'ao'av LpXovs 7roielc'Oat oovg ov 0ovXovraT, they said
that otherwise (el 8e!u) they should be obliged, &c. Tnuc. I, 28.
ELrov (Hlavfaavia) TOU K'JpVKOS t e XELrEOaOaL * E ie FL rj,, roXEfLov avT(
E7raprTaras Irpoayopevetv, they ordered him not to be left behind by the
herald: and if he should be (el oe /t), (they told him) that the Spartans
declared war against him. Id. I, 131.'Eazv Ieiv rT V/AlL bOK& X\yEyE
X110Se, VVoyoXOyJ<rare' el be L,'T, 7ravrT Xoyp avrtrelveTe. PLAT.
Phaed. 91 C. So in DEM. Phil. III, p. 129, 14, eav JeI relo r],..
l e pL fL), K. r.X.
2. The protasis is often altogether suppressed, leaving
only an Optative with av or an Indicative with av as an
apodosis. Here some indefinite or general protasis is
always implied; as if he pleased, if he could, if an
opportunity should offer, if it were necessary, if it were
true, if we should consider, if what is natural should
happen, &c.    E.g.
"I(rWS  v ov rTI errLT r f L7 qC  TOl S ELPT EpOlSI, perhaps some one
might (if he pleased) find fault with what has been said. Isoc. Areop.
p. 146 E. ~ 36. TC' oVK av /3aaoiXcas ada oTroA' eXwcv dyopevost,
therefore you shouldc not take kings upon your tongue and talk (i. e.
you would not, if you should do as you ought). I1. II, 250. TOUTo O'r
v oUrTOS Ex o  Xeyeitv ov'o' vo jS 7T E  0 er iTr E, neither would he be




~ 53.]        SUPPRESSION OF THE PROTASIS.                113
able to say this (if he should try), nor would you believe it. DICM.
Andr. 598, 20.'H eoEs 8' cv'ycoy''polftq1v AEnTrivrJv, but I would
gladly ask Leptines (if an opportunity should offer). Id. Lept. 496, 8.
Aetatr- hs ol OerraXol vvV OtVK av EXevOepoL yevov 0 o a V t0 evot, let
him show that they would not now gladly become free (if they could).
Id. 01. 1I, 20, 18. BaoAtXa~a oiKOoIoueiV r'pXE7T, cs av iaK ava anroaXenrOat ey7, so that it might be strong enough to fightfrom (if it should be
necessary). XEN. Cyr. III, 1, 1.
Ov yap T7v o rL a v e7r OL rie, for there was nothing that you could
have done (if you had tried). DEM. Cor. 240, 15. HolGoV 8' a v Epyov
7rvv rIiOV    o KLV''V VAV a 7 (r T  a v; and fromn what acts, s'c., would they
have shrunk (i. e. if they had been required)? Isoc. Pan. p. 57 C.
~ 83. IlokXov yap av Y  v nilta, for they would be worth much (if that
were true). PLAT. Rep. II, 374 D. So ftovXot7ujv avy (velim), I
could wish (in a certain future case); i/3ovX6?^v a'v (vellem), I should
now wish (on a certain condition, not fulfilled).
NOTE. The Optative with av, used in this way, often has
the force of a mild command or exhortation, and sometimes
a sense approaching that of the Future Indicative. E. g.
Aeyols av, you may speak (lit. you could speak, if you should desire
it), implying eli 30oXoLo. 2v lev K o i t o  oi   av e o ravrov, Oe'XeL,.yo 
may take yourself off whither you please. SOPH. Antig. 444. (This
is merely a milder expression than KotfF.)  K \Xv o  a' v 7/'37, 1 o/3e,
7rpocrrar7pLe, i. e. hear now. Id. El. 637. X opo s av e'co. Id.
Phil. 674. So Antig. 1339. IIo ovS, ('r)qv eyco, pa7roliff1 e   av
ir; in what other direction then, said I, shall we turn (lit. should we
turn, if we should wish)? PLAT. Euthyd. 290 A. OVK a v 1  6 e  e  / 71 v
TO) po'pov, I will not give up the throne. ARIST. Ran. 830.
REMARK. In such examples as HDT. I, 2,'EXXvcov 7rwas fa(r
ap7rdo-a& Ebpcwr/v' e' 7r7 a v  b' a v obrot Kpre-TS, there is no exceptional use of the Optative with av referring to the past; but the
meaning is these would prove to be Cretans (if we should examine the
case). So aTrat 8E OVK a V 7roXXCaI Er?'av, these would not prove (on
investigation) to have been many. THuc. I, 9.
~ 53.    The apodosis may be expressed by an Infinitive or Participle, where the construction of the sentence
requires it; each tense of the Infinitive or Participle
representing its own tenses of the Indicative or Optative.
(The Present includes also the Imperfect, and the Perfect also the Pluperfect.)
If a finite verb in the apodosis would have taken av,
that particle is joined with the Infinitive or Participle.
The Present Infinitive or Participle with av represents
EI




111               CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.                 [~ 53.
either an   Imperfect Indicative with      av, or a Present
Optative with av; the Perfect, either a Pluperfect Indicative or a Perfect Optative; and the Aorist, either an
Aorist Indicative or an Aorist Optative.         (See ~ 41.)
The context must decide in each case, whether an Infinitive or Participle with av represents the Indicative
or the Optative. E. g.'Hyo/zjaL, et Tokro 7roLeTre, 7rdvra KaXo\  X e L y, I believe that, if you
are doing this, all is well.'Hyovpat, eav 0roVro roti1re, 7ravra Ka\Xs
et ^ I believe that, if you (shall) do this, all will be well.'Hyoipat,
e Troro 7roto0re, irdrra KaksW av E'X e L, I believe that, if you should
do this, all would be well.'HyovLat, el TOVTo Trorioware, 7ravra KaX6s
a v eX ev, I believe that, if you had done this, all would (now) be well.
O01a ivfLas, eav ToTro 7rottr-e, ev rpd ai o vra, I know that, if you do
this, you will prosper. 2Ke;fjlara rc-v paiLos aTTrKrTvvvVTWv Kal d v ac to - Ko  vv y' av, el OLOT re o(av, considerations for those who
readily put men to death, and who would bring them to life again too, if
they could. PLAT. Crit. 48 C. ('Ava3ztlorKopevyov av = dave,/i3arKovro
av.) See the examples of each tense of the Infinitive and Participle
with av, under ~ 41 and ~ 73.
~IwS ryap otlfEaOe 8vX'epcs  K ov sv'OXvv0lovs, eL T'S TL Xeyo Kara
iXbl7r7rov Kart EKELVov TOVS Xp6ovV; how unwillingly do you think
they heard it, if any one said anything against Philip in those times!
DEM. Phil. II, 70, 25.   (Here dKOUELV represents the Imperfect?jKovov, ~ 15, 3.) For an example of the Perfect Infinitive with ay,
representing the Pluperfect, see ~ 41, 2.
NOTE 1.    The apodosis is sometimes omitted for effect,
when some such expression as it is well can be supplied, or
some other apodosis at once occurs to the reader. E. g.'AXX' el peY &corova'i yEpas $eydavJLO6'AXaloi, purav'7res Kara 0vpjov,
07rov avrdaov E(raL, -E    KE.l COCo'IL,'y) oei Key avrTOs XO/.LaL.
II. I. 135. (Here we must understand ev e`e, it will be well, or
something similar, after EcratL.)  EL' 7'p yap K MOeXycTrv'OXvj7rrsoS
au repo7TrTTs;e Eo;ov a'vrTVeXiaL' O-  y ap 7roXV feppraro's efrt. II.
I, 580. (Here we must understand he can do it after the protasis.
The following yap refers to this suppressed apodosis.)  Ei pliv dyT
vtas ItKav&o. L&a'toKWo oover i 7rpob dXX\lXovUs evat' —e 6E l. Kal prapa
T7V TrpoyeyevfLetzvcov pavOdvere. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 7, 23. Compare
AESCH. Prom. 835.
NOTE 2. Very often the apodosis is not directly expressed
by the verb on which the protasis depends, but is merely implied in the context. Here the form of the protasis is determined by the implied apodosis.     In such sentences el or iav




~ 53.]     ELLIPSIS OR SUBSTITUTION IN APODOSIS.           115
may generally be translated by supposing that, or in case that.
E. g.
ToivefKa vvv ra'a yovvaO' lKavopAa, a t K' fE6O X  a6 Oa Kelvov Xvypov
OXe0pov EVLtTrelv, therefore I am now come to your knees, in case you
shall be willing to tell me of his sad death (i. e. that you may tell me, in
case you shall be willing). Od. III, 92. See Od. I, 94. (Here ldavopat does not contain the apodosis to a' K' Xf0~o'aa, which is rather
implied in what follows.)  Tcv vvv Lwv JYvq.raaoa 7rapEeo Kal Xa3E'yoavwov, a'i Ke V srO  e'O XX OL v erT Tp'acao —v ldpjaL, grasp his knees,
in case he shall be willing to assist the Trojans (i. e. that you may cause
him to assist them, if he shall be willing). I. I, 408. So at KeV 7rTos
fIovXerat (often explained as an indirect question), 11. I, 66. OvKOVI
ET'L EXXEiTEL Tao  V T7rEL(OcrpevII vias os XP? q P/as dacivat; is not
this then still left to us, - in case we shall persuade you that you m ust
let us go (sc. to have you do this)? i. e. to have you let us go, if we
shall persuade you that you must? PLAT. Rep. I, 327 C. "AKovroOV Kai
E/LOU, edav crot aravt  8o K fj, hear me also, in case the same shall please
you, i. e. that then you may assent to it. Ib. II. 358 B.'ErT Kal vvv
dpas TOLOtVrat, e rls'  rIS tr K r p v K ev r a  Iepo-als, even to this day
they invoke curses, if there is any one who sends heralds to the Persians.
Isoc. Pan. p. 73 D. ~ 157.'IICrat prpos oEc 8ep' d(j)ly/pta, E't rva
frodXv c p da r e a e  tezv eltepov, we are come hither as suppliants to you,
in case you should tell us of somefleecy city (implying thinking that we
might go and live in such a city, if you should tell us of one). ARIsT.
Av. 120. Oi 8'')KTrepo, el a    atcLoLvro, and others pitied them,
in case they should be captured (i. e. thinking what they would suffer
if they should be captured). XEN. An. I. 4, 7.  lpos rTLv gr6Xtv, el
r i  o t  8 o o, Iexcpovv, they marched towards the city, in case they
(the citizens) should rush out (i. e. that they might meet them, if they
should rush out). THUC. VI, 100. OuW' rv roD roXEufov 7repas ov'
airaXXay~7 <tiXItrzr, e A Qu  0 ) 3alovs Kal ferraXovsr f'Xpovs'  o t 7) ( e t e
T7rj roXeL, i. e. Philip saw that he could neither end nor escape the war,
unless he should make the Thebans and Thessalians hostile to the city.
PsM. Cor. 276, 1. See SOPH. O. C. 1770; PLAT. Rep. IV, 434 A.
In the examples from Homer and Plato the protasis belongs under
~ 50, 1, the implied apodosis referring to the future; in the example
from Isocrates the protasis belongs under ~ 49, 1; in that from
Aristophanes, under ~ 50, 2, the implied apodosis being in the
Optative with iv or some equivalent form; while in the next three
the protasis has been changed (on the principle of indirect discourse)
from eL iXdarovral, earv m7rf3ioqO)arv, and eiV Pu 7rotlo-co of the direct
discourse, on account of the past tense of the leading verb. For a
further explanation of this construction, and other examples, see
~ 77, 1. c. See also ~ 71, N. 1, and the examples, which are to be
explained on the principle of this note.
NOTE 3. Sometimes the adverb av stands alone to represent the
apodosis, when the verb to which it belongs can be easily supplied
from the context. In like manner el alone may represent the pro



116              CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.               [~ 53.
tasis.  hfie expression &o~rep bav E (sometimes written as one word,
Wa7rTrpavel, quasi) includes both cases. See ~ 42, 3, N. 2, with the
examples.'Qo-rrep with the participle (~ 109, N. 9) generally belongs to an
apodosis understood. So in such expressions as co7Trp Ed XiyoLs, as
(it would be) if you should say.
NOTE 4. When rX;iv el is used for El ja, unless, there is an
ellipsis of an apodosis after TrXiv. E. g.
OE Tha   vo'ylara olo'v T avrv Etievat, 7rX? v E'L TVs KWa"ITonrots
rvyXadvet Wv, it is not possible to know even their names, except (it is
possible) in case one happens to be a comedian. PLAT. Apol. 18 C.
REMARK. Expressions of a wish like et yap yevocro, 0 that it
might be, and el yap Eyevero, 0 that it had been, are protases with the
apodosis suppressed. See Rem. at the end of Sect. VI.
Mixed Constructions.- Irregularities in Protasis or
Apodosis.
~ 54.   The regular forms of protasis and apodosis explained above (~~ 49, 50, 51) include by far the greater number of the examples found in the classic authors. Many cases
remain, however, in which the protasis and apodosis do not
belong to the same form. These admit of various explanations: -
1. (a.) When an Indicative in the protasis (in either of the
constructions of ~ 49, 1 or 2) is followed by an Optative with
av in the apodosis, the latter properly belongs to an implied
protasis in the Optative (on the principle of ~ 52, 2). Thus, in
the sentence EL Trava ovUTAS ExFL, OVK av 8tLKaLUO KoXadoiro, if this
is so, he would not justly be punished, KoXadoLTro av belongs to a
protasis in the Optative, if justice should be done, implied in
8tKaico; while the protasis El.... eX  belongs as a condition
to the expressed apodosis with its implied protasis. The sense
therefore is, if this is so, (the result is that) he would not be
punished if justice should be done. The same principle applies
to a primary tense of the Indicative in protasis, followed by a
secondary tense with al, in apodosis.
This is sometimes the meaning, when a Subjunctive or
Future Indicative (~ 50, 1) is in the protasis, with an Optative
with av in the apodosis. (See the last two examples.) E. g.




~ 54, 1.]         MIXED CONSTRUCTIONS.                    117
El;e rtL aCWaar'cv ye Kcar ovpavov e X  o v a s, OK'a v eyqoye
Vfolo1V e7rovpavCoIL(tL aX o i p i v, but if thou art one of the immortals
come from heaven, I would not fight against the Gods of heaven. II.
VI, 128. (Here the principal protasis to Maxolr1v av is implied, if 1
should have my choice.)  HoXX) 7yap av ev3aqtovia E'7 7repi TOVS veovs'
EC e      f pev pdvos aVTros 8 i a (b 6 IpE t, ol 6' c/XXoL  f e X Oo V   f, for
there would (naturally) he great happiness, &c. PLAT. Apol. 25 B.
ELor' e /LOL Kal leocas?jyovIevot U iaXXov ErEpCOv Irpoa'elval avra 7roXeikelv
E 7re ol r 7T r OK o v EKI.or T  vv TOU ye dLiKeLv alrTav f e p o L7) v, if
you were persuaded to make war by thinking, sc., I should not now
justly be charged with injustice. THuc. II, 60. (Here a protasis
to qfepool`7v alv is implied in eKorcov'.)  El yap ourot opoasr a7re'rt?7ra v, viei' a v ob Xpeov apo X o  e, for if these had a right to secede,
it would fallow that your dominion is unjust. Id. III, 40. El vVv ye
6vo-TVXoVpiev, 7rV   Tc lavavrT' av Frpairrovre ov acoo ifpe9 av; if
now we are unfortunate, how should we not be safe if we should do the
opposite? ARIST. Ran. 1449. (Here Irpar'rovreS == el 7rpaTTlroie is
the principal protasis to which the optative refers.)  El TroT' EreXEipovv XEYEVi, OVK EO' OcTLS' OVK'a v iLKOTrO'v EirLTLr'oeel JOL, if
I were undertaking to say this (~ 49, 2), every one would censure me
with reason (i. e.l Ta Ea IKOra OL71(reLev). DEM. Cor. 296, 24. (Here
many Mss., and Dion. Hal. p. 1054, read    ertLi'/tIe, the ordinary
apodosis.)  El' pyujeva rTw axCov ITfTreveLV  e t a a v, oK a v 8KaLso
opy I fotoaOe a'roit. LYS. Alcib. II, ~ 8.
KairoL TOTre rOv'YrrepFtlV, eLTEp dr0j o' 1ov vuV KarTqyopeC, p/a\\ov
a v EKOTWS 7y ovY'   8 i (O K e v, and yet, if he is now making true charges
against me, he would then have prosecuted Hypereides with much more
reason than this man. DEM. Cor. 302, 24. (Here E'blcKev a5v refers
chiefly to the implied protasis, if he had done what was more reasonable.) Such examples seldom occur.
OvWe yhp &v 7ro\Xal ye()vpa& cr lv, EXOL t V  iv oarot (PvyovreT
fteli croWOtLzev. XEN. An. H, 4, 19. (Here the implied protasis is
if we should wish to escape.)  See An. V, 1, 9.
~povptov ei 7rotrojarovrat, Trr I/XV yj/s  Xda7rrotev av 71, Pepos,
ov PeVTOl LKavov ye eo'TaL KcOXvEI.V fIas, K.T.X., if they shall build a
fort, they might (under favorable circumstances) injure some part of
our land; but it will not be sufficient to prevent us, &c. THuc. I, 142.
(b.) A  Subjunctive or Future Indicative in the protasis
sometimes depends on an Optative with av in the apodosis,
when no other protasis can readily be supplied. This expresses
the protasis more vividly than the regular Optative. (See
~ 50, 2, Rem. b, and ~ 34, 1, b.) It must be remembered also
that the Optative with av is sometimes merely a softened expression for the Future Indicative (~ 52, Note). E. g.'Eav roTr0 o 7o t r iW, KaXW os av'X o t if I do this, it would be well.
(Here the irregularity is the same in English as in Greek: the regu




118              CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.             [~ 54, 1
lar form in both would be either eav TOVTO 7rot1LCO, KaXOeS`ct, if I dL
this, it will be well; or el roro 7roiloaatfl, KaXoS av EAXOL, if I should do
this, it would be well.)  Kal orrwc av 8etvoaraa arvrcv I a 0 o t e v, el
oiroTL 6dd\47)o0t KaCT EKEflZ(Ai T7V avapcvO TOLS TrpaKovra y e Vcro ra
LYS. Agor. p. 139, 6. ~ 94. (Here we should expect l yevoTvro.)
Tcv aTororaordrov  evr av e'L 7, et, a vvv aVOLav  O\atKavo v  otcos EK\aXel, ravra UVYrOe'/lS wq) 7rpd~el.  DEM. 01. I, 16, 25.  Hv oUv /j aOyrs
fLO rTV T(LKOV 7Torov XTo, 6yov, OVK aV a 7r o o L 1v ov' av o3oXov OvevI,
if you shall learn this bfr mne, I will not (or I would not) pay even an
obol to any one. ARIST. Nub. 116. (This and many other examples
might be explained equally well on either principle, a or b.)
2. (a.) An Optative in the protasis sometimes depends
upon a primary tense of the Indicative or an Imperative in the
apodosis. This arises from the slight distinction between the
Subjunctive and Optative in protasis, as eav',n and ed Eot, for
which the Latin has but one form, si habeat.  (See ~ 48, I, B,
Rein. 2.)  In fact, the irregularity in de rovro yevoLro, dravra
Kawes Let, is precisely the same as in the English if this should
happen, all will be well, where the more regular apodosis would
be all would be well, as in Greek, 7ravra caX)s av eXot. E. g.'AXX' el Trt /Mol dvap a/A e' eo'ro. Kal aiXos, ia\XXov OaXircop Kal
BapoTauXc)-epov f " rat. II. X, 222. El 0 X o t  Yr KOTe'v raEs fvreLts
ras rowv avOpwOTrwv, eV P  r OI/A, K. r.. Isoc. ad Nicocl. p. 23 D.
~ 45. Ert TsrdLae r a p a ai vo, e vayS e acr Tw. AESCHIN. Cor. ~ 110.
In such cases the Optative is a less animated form of expression than
the regular Subjunctive.
(b.) The Optative sometimes stands in the protasis, when
the apodosis contains a primary tense of a verb denoting
necessity, obligation, propriety, possibility, &c., with an Infinitive,
the two forming an expression that is nearly equivalent in
sense to an Optative with av. E. g.
Et' yap e irc aav Uvo rtLVe evavrlo& I doAot, oK alfcorL'potr  Y'et Irot
+  4 oL a oa  0 a t, for if there should be two laws opposed to each other,
you could not surely vote for both. DEM. Timocr. 711, 8. (See ~ 63,
4, b.) This is analogous to the use of the Imperfect of the same
verbs, explained in ~ 49, 2, Note 3. There, for example, evi' avrc
eXOrv, he could have gone, is nearly equivalent to WX0ev av, and here'evEo-Lv avr6 \XOeiv, he could go, is nearly equivalent to EA0ot ae.
3. A few irregular constructions remain, which can be explained only as cases of anacoluthon, in which the speaker
adapts his apodosis to a form of protasis different from that
which he has actually used.  E. g.




~ 55. 2.]          MIXED CONSTRUCTIONS.                   119'EI/o Lev av, E fEXOL L, A D? TaXt oTa IrXa e ToLovio LTv IrLaal  I pO'aLs. XEN. Cyr. II, 1, 9. (Here erroLovf;l v  v is used as if el LXO
if I were able, had preceded. We should expect IrOLOli v  lv, which
is found in one Ms.)  El lev yap ls'yvvatiKa o'a6rpoveowrepav $[(os
/ieOE/iev, d6VKXe1' ahv'v (f6os. EUR. Orest. 1132. (Here we
should expect Ei'7.)
REMARK. The same apodosis, in either the Indicative or Optative, may take one protasis in the Indicative referring to present or
past time, and another in the Optative referring to a supposed future
case. E. g.'EyB otv o8eLva Av e it' v elpyaCpeVovos,, oe!uev fe ol apXOvreT ETarroy, ToTre /ev Ef  vOV, TOV 86Se ov TaTTrOVrOS X I ro I L T /V tradv, I
should therefore (prove to) have behaved outrageously, if when the state
authorities stationed me I stood my ground, but if now when God stations me I should desert my post. PLAT. Apol. 28 E. (Here the
combination of the two acts is the future condition on which the
apodosis depends.)'ETreuXoaL   acL r TOVTOLS, el aX?0) Trpo' vfIaS
I,        P IT,     %') 11 ZovS v  7X 8itw,'V'rvla a'"o
ELo t L O L Kat fE Or Ka TOTr eV0B v, Evvv Ea o)i'ogvat,
i. e. if I should speak the truth and did speak it then, &c. DEM. Cor.
274, 28. Et 8e pxVr' fo-rt /J1ATe 7Tv LT av EiTreIv EXOL /Il pqflS /1)E/86n)
Kai 7TiJtepOV, rTL TOV (ou3ovuXov eXPlv IroLtel; but if there neither is nor
was (any such thing), and if no man yet even at this day could possibly
tell of any, what ought the statesman to have done (which was not
done)  Ib. 291, 28. (See ~ 50, 2, N. 2, and ~ 49, 2, N. 3.)
~ 55. 1. Two or more protases, not co-ordinate, may belong to one apodosis. E. g.
Kal yap av orTo' T rT a 0, r, raxeoL VFElSZ e'Tepov QIXtTrrov 7rolTrjere,
(Ivrep o'ro) IrpoeXrTEe Trols rpayLtao' rov vowv. DEM. Phil. 1, 43,
12. El 8' jev vEOL 819 Kai yepovre', eL TtSe  r) Ld p r a,  I 8rTXO
3lov XaxdvTres ECOpOoVpLeO av. EUR. Suppl. 1084. E' rT' ae r v -
pogro   oorovo, rt  rrt roXifLa; el aurou et Tr e or crrpoyyvXoT)r?, eL (rot
e re v adrep E'yc, ebres 86r1rov av OTL a~rX/(jLa L. PLAT. Men. 74 B.
2. It sometimes happens, that the apodosis is itself in a
dependent sentence (as in a final clause), which determines its
mood without reference to the preceding rules. In this case,
if the leading verb is in a secondary tense, so that the apodosis
takes the Optative, the protasis also takes the Optative by the
general rule (~ 31, 1), even if it would otherwise have the
Subjunctive. E. g.
Taura 8' EITevr LV' el eV Kai vvv r po'0 oK o   aL  a vrov epev,
7TroXoyoVfLevoS repl avrT v  8La rpl fo L, l 82 nrapaXLIr t  o L,  ut 
avrTS E'TrO, and he said this, in order that, if on the one hand I
should still expect him to tell it, I should waste time about it in my defence; but if on the other hand I should omit it. he might now teU it




120               CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.               [~ 55, 2
himself DEM. Aph. I, 830, 8. (If a primary tense stood for Elrev, we
should have, e. g. ravra X;yeL, tv' earv v   r p o so 0 K a c a'-rov epelv,
8 arplpfo, avY 6e r apa Xtr o, vYv e'r7.)
IREMARK. For the forms assumed by such sentences when constructed on the principle of indirect discourse, see ~ 77, 1.
~ 56.    After many verbs expressing wonder, delight,
contentment,   indignation,    disappointment, and      similar
ideas, a protasis with el may be used where a causal
sentence would seem       more natural.       Such verbs are
especially Oavauwco, aLbvvoLat) arya7ro,             d    yavaKcT6o.   E. g.
eavufado) 8' eyoye el f air elS VLWV!fiT' evOqv/eLvFral LTr opy[leralt
Opwv, K. T.X., I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry,
when he sees, &c. (lit. if no one is either concerned or angry, I wonder).
DEM. Phil. I, 52, 17. (See Rem. below.)'AXX' EKelvo Oavp'oa, El
AaKfeatpovvlos' pfLv rore avr1ppare, vvvi 8' voKVeire  te'vaL Ka pieXXere
fof'jEpetv, but I wonder at this, that you once opposed the Lacedaemonians, but now are unwilling, &c. Id. 01. II, 25, 2.  (The literal
meaning is, if (it is true that) you once opposed,'c., then I wonder.)
OVK aya7ral fE 1L  &KqjV E8&OKEV, a'XX'F1 /l Kal Xpv-a- urTeI/avc vrenavwOOr'eErat adyavaKT~l, he is not content if he was not punished; but
if he is not also to be crowned with a golden crown, he is indignant.
AESCHaIN. Cor. ~ 147.   (Here the former protasis belongs under
~ 49, 1, and the latter under ~ 49, 1, N. 3.)
Kal os aXdr70i  ayavarscr, e ovrowo  & rvow 17 OLOs 7 ell irVELvj
I am indignant that (or if) I am not able, &c. PLAT. Lach. 194 A.
Ou   1 OQavyLaCordv eort-v, e  (oTparevoUeLVOs Kal 7rovWv EKCevo  aivro
pv w p/EXX6vrov Kal *qrtlo;evCo  Kai 7rvvOavopeivov 7repLyiyverat, it is
no wonder that he gets the advantage of you, &c. DEM. 01. II, 24, 23.
M   e,PVrOL TOuro pELOV 8OtTre EXEt, E L Ol Kvpelot irpo-Oev a-wv AYiv
TraTTOrLEvo vvv adcfe'TKacrtv, i. e. do not be discontented, if (or that) the
Cyraeans have now withdrawn. XEN. An. III, 2, 17.
These verbs may also be followed by OrT and a causal sentence,
as in PLAT. Theaet. 142 A,.Oav.a.ov bor. ovx olOES T r? cpELv. The
construction with el gives a milder or more polite form of expression,
putting the object of the wonder, &c. into the form of a supposition.
instead of stating it as a fact, as we should do in English. The forms
of protasis quoted above belong under ~ 49, 1. For the form sometimes assumed by these sentences on the principle of indirect dis
course, see ~ 77, 1, c.
REMARK. This construction must not be mistaken for that in
which el is used in the sense of whether, to introduce an indirect
question; as, ervIero el o'v 7rapdesq, he asked whether you were present
For this see ~ 68, 3, and ~ 70.




~ 58, 2.J            Ae IN APODOSIS.                   121
~ 57. The apodosis is sometimes introduced by the con.
junction Be, as if the apodosis formed a sentence co-ordinate
with the protasis, instead of being (as it is) the leading sentence. This is especially common in Homer and Herodotus,
and rare in Attic prose. It occurs when the apodosis is to be
emphatically opposed to the protasis. Instead of 8e we sometimes find dXXd or arTap. E. g.
En E Ke p4 SDoav, eyd) ae Key avros tXwLuat, but if they do not give
it up, then I will take it myself II. I, 137.'AXad is found in II. I,
82, quoted ~ 51, N. 2. EL' rep yap T aS\XXoL ye 7repLKTreLtvcoLea racvTes
yvor'v r'Apyeiov, Col' OU eos Ear' adroXe(o'Oa. 11. XII, 245. El
e OavovrCov 7rnp KaraTXov' elv'A/iao, a r p iyc KaL KeiOL /IXov
FLeivqrioo' eralpov. II. XXII, 389. El vtoiv EcrL 7roro l 8j avaTrv
R-oo7(TaL, vLesv 8 E' TL Kal vVv )K roV P60rov flpiv' eo'-e. HDT. VIII,
22.'AXX' el' t1vre rovro  aov~eL dLroKpLvaa'OaL, oav ae ro7vrev0ev Xe'y.
XEN. Cyr. V, 5, 21.
This 8e in apodosis cannot be expressed in English; as our adverbs then, yet, still, &c., necessarily fail to give the fbrce of the Greek
8e, which is always a conjunction.
REMARK. AE may be used in the same way tr introduce the
sentence upon which a relative clause depends. LUee Remark before ~ 65.
SECTION III.
RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
~  85.  1. Relative sentences may be introduced not
only by relative pronouns and pronominal adjectives,
but also by relative adverbs of time, place, or manner.
They include therefore all temporal clauses, except
those introduced by 7rplv and other particles meaning
until, which are treated separately (~ 66 and ~ 67).
2. Relative   sentences   may   be  divided   into  two
classes:
First, those in which the antecedent of the relative is
definite; that is, in which the relative pronouns refer to
definite persons or things, and the relative adverbs to
definite points of time, place, &c.
6




122        RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.          [~ 58, 2.
Secondly, those in which the antecedent is indefinite,
that is, in which no such definite persons, tlings, times,
or places are referred to.
Both the definite and the indefinite antecedent may
be either expressed or understood. E. g.
(Definite Antecedents). Tavra a E'Xo o6ps, you see these things
which I have; or a {EXo 6pi~s. "Ore f3ovXETo IXeV, (once) wten he
wishzd, he came.
(Indefinite Antecedents.)  Ilav6a & &v j3nvXwvrat eovtv, they
will have everything which they may want; or a iv 3ovaovXrat,ova-,,v
they will have whatever they may want. "Ore j3IuXoLro'TPXero, whenever he wished, he came.
3. When the antecedent is indefinite, the negative
particle of the relative clause is pqc; when the antecedent is definite, ov is regularly used, unless the general
construction requires t/, as in prohibitions, wishes, &c.
(See ~ 59, Note 1.)
A.   Relative with a Definite Antecedent.
~ 59.    When the relative refers to a definite antecedent, expressed or uinderstood, it has no effect upon
the mood of the following verb; and it therefore takes
the Indicative, unless the general sense of the passage
requires some other construction. E. g.
Ae'yo a o.lo'aAe'yco a ifKovaa. AE$os a' a'Kjoa.'EXeav a iKOVcav. iHavra XEzye, a yevao7eTaL. fnpaIcrovlftv a   ovovora, (or ws
f3ovXovraL), they are doing what they please. (On the other hand,
rpdacr~aovcv a av (3 ov  X  vra  (or's av 3ov'Xovrat,) they always do
whatever they please; the antecedent being indefinite.)  Aeyco a o5K
ayvo&, 1 am saying that of which 1 am not ignorant.'AXX' 0Tre n' " eoK o 700T O 8Olv7OeKaT? yV e  v  KS  a rore 87 rrpo
O\Xvprov l'av fOol alev EoTevr. I1. I, 493. Tis Er0' ~ X6&pos 8jr', ev
f3E~rKa.aev. SOPH. O. C. 52. "'Eos E;oTr Katpos, avrTLXafse-O
row erpayzarcoV, i. e. now, while there is an opportunity, &c. DEAr. 01.
I, 15, 6. (If the exhortation had been general, he might have said
foEB av  KalpoD, (on all occasions) so long as there is an opportunity,
~ 62.)'O U dvaaf3a, sf'r teLv da'a'ia a) v, ETriov TO L7trrov 7yV f  reT} 
J/ara Y v, KaraX(l7rWv rYv I7r7rov eaOTreve 7re. XEN. An. III, 4, 49.
So II. I, 193, -oog optiawve. OUrep 3e Kal rtv adro3atvovrwv rT 7rXiov
ris airias E o icv, o0Tro& Ka" KaO'' crvxiav rT aCTr6OV rpoiQLwaUV, wa




~ GO, 1.           DEFINITE ANTECEDENT.                    123
who are to bear t7e greater part of the blame, &c. THic. I, 83.'O0Ev
8' ovv paJTra tL a  Tr er r0 repl avrTv, evrTvev v/ias KCaL ey) rrpCurov
7retpdaooaLat L&ia-KeEv. DEM. Aph. I, 814, 4. (Here evrevTOB  refers to
a particular point, at which he intends to begin.)  Compare the
first example under Note 1.'H 8') XoiyLa ejpy, ore  EX0o8oTrr TLat
qe    LE s'Hpy, or' av / Epe05,tLi OYveLtEotLs &eotEEOY, surely there will
be sad work, when you shall impel me, &c. II. I, 518. (Here Tre refers
to some time conceived as definite by the speaker; whereas or' A&
Epe;Oy-v, whenever she shall provoke me, is indefinite, and belongs
under ~ 61, 3.)  Nbi 8' e'rTat o0e 8o orTvyepos yaito avwrTLfoXkJtr
AoUho  qgJvr]1 e;igeev, rTrj TE ZevS oS'Xov adrrq vpa. Od. XVII, 272.
NOTE 1.    When the sense requires it, these clauses admit
all the constructions allowed in independent sentences.  E. g.
"Ap~ofiat 8' E'revOtEV OLev Katl vyetsE parr' av Iaoy  0 o t  Kcayo7 TiXLor'
alv 8iSadaiFlt. DEM. Aph. III, 846, 15.     (Here the relative
clause contains an apodosis with aiv, with a protasis el dpaitqv'v implied. This must not be confounded with the use of the Optative
without av, in the other class of relative sentences. See ~ 61, 4.)
NOv 8e TroTro  oVK e'roLro'Ev, ev  rTvy 877Lov e rl TiT EV a' v, but he did.not do this, in which he would have honored the people (if he had done
it). Id. Mid. 536, 25. Eis KaXo VV hvv tAvvTos o8e 7rapeKaedero,'
L eTa8&Oev r)s Tqri/recO'. PLAT. Men. 89 E.    (Subjunctive in
an exhortation.) Ov'Kovv ltov rTOiS T&  KarryT?7pV XOdyots T7rtorvc(aL,aXXov. ro7s, p7OLE Kai T) Xpdov, ov VfLELS Caape(rTraTov rEYXov o
aciXr8ovs vo it l ar. LYS. de Bon. Arist. p. 157, ~ 61. (Here the
Imperative votdo-are is used in a sort of exclamation after ov, where
ordinarily 8Ei volao-ra would be used.) *Av yap ainoqyn ej / ouros, o
(L7) yEvot ro, Trv erac3eXLav l oXoarco. DEM. Aph. I, 834, 25.
(Optative in a wish.)  Eoroyeat rc  ap or a v AY r TOT, olX c  IXtLo ipq,
a day will come when sacred Ilium  will fall. Il. VI, 448.  (Here
olXdA'av is used like a Future Indicative, ~ 87, Note; and the antecedent of oTre is definite. If a'v belonged to ore, the clause would be
a protasis, meaning when Ilium shallfall, a day will come.) 
NOTE 2. The relative may be used to express a purpose (~ 65, 1),
or in a causal sense (~ 65, 4). The antecedent may then be either
definite or indefinite.
B. Relative with an Indefinite Antecedent.
~ 60.    1. When the relative refers to an indefinite
antecedent, expressed or understood, the action of its
verb is not stated absolutely as a definite fact, but conditionally as a supposed case; and such a relative sentence has many of the essential qualities of a conditional
sentence.




124       RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [~ 60, 1.
Thus, when we say a votI'CL ravr. XE'yL, he is saying what he
(actually) thinks, or a EvoiLLe Tarara (Xey/v, he was saying what he
thought, the actions of voIfEL and evodLte are stated as actual
facts, occurring at definite times; but when we say a av volutzi
(raira) X'yeL, he (always) says whatever he thinks, or a vdopiot
(raTra) Xe7yev, he (always) said whatever he happened to be think.
ing, voprd1. and vo1lotl do not state any such definite facts, but
rather what some one may think (or may have thought) on any
occasion on which he is (or was) in the habit of speaking. So,
when we say a votfiL raura XiELt, he will say what he (now)
thinks, vopeiL denotes a fact; but when we say a &v vopul, XeCEL
he will say whatever he happens to be (then) thinking, vor.Lj
denotes merely a case supposed in the future.   Again,-to
take the case in which the distinction is most liable to be
overlooked,-when we say a oVK oZaa OVK lo"oat EL8oaL, what
I do not know, Ido not think that I know, oVK oloa, as before,
denotes a simple fact, and its object, a, has a definite antecedent; but when Socrates says a& y oioa ohue olotac edai^as, the
meaning is if there are any things which Ido not know, Ido
not even think that Iknow them. In sentences like this, unless
a negative is used (jc4 being the sign of an indefinite, ov of a
definite antecedent), it is often difficult to decide whether the
antecedent is definite or indefinite: thus A oloa oi'of/aL eldva&
may mean either what I (actually) know, I think that I know,
or if there is anything which I know, I think that I know it.
The analogy of these indefinite relative clauses to conditional
sentences will be seen at once. The following examples will
make this clearer:t"0   3 o v er a & ocroco, I will give him whatever he (now) wishes.
Elt T& f3io\XeTa, 8&loa, if he wishes anything, I will give it. (~ 49, 1.)
0 TtrL eoovrTo e'owKa uiv, I should have given him whatever he haa
wished. "'0 oL L) e y Eveo TOVK aiv eTr0ov, I should not have told what
had not happened. Ei rL e i3ovX er o,'wKa aiv, if he had wished any.'hing, I should have given it. El' TL Ap eye;vero, OVK Av eTrov, if any'
thing had not happened, 1 should not have told it. (~ 49, 2.)'"0  A v 3 o X? r Ta, &'oro, I will give him whatever he shall wish.'Eav rL  o vir a, $d'acoo, if he shall wish anything, I will give it.
(~ 50, 1.)
O rt 3oo VX o t r o 8o0rqv Av, I should give him whatever he might
wish. El'n TfovXoLro, Botlv lIv, if he should wish anything, I should
give it. (~ 50, 2.)




~ 61 1.]   CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES.           125
"0 r    o Av ov -rTra' &aAol,, I (always) give him whatever he wishes.'0  1 P3o v o T ro ed8ovv, I always gave him whatever he wished.'Eda
r 1 o v X i a, t8ico/At,.f he ever wishes anything, I (always) give it.
ET L r 3oXoLro, ~3aowvy, if he ever wished anything, I (always) gave it.
(~ 51.)
2. The relative with an indefinite antecedent may
therefore be called the    conditional relative, and the
clause in which it stands may be called the protasis
(like clauses with el or av), and the antecedent clause
may be called the apodosis.
3. The particle av (Epic lce) is regularly joined with
all relative words, when they are followed by the Subjunctive. The particle here (as always in protasis) is
joined to the relative, never to the verb. (See ~ 38, 1,
and ~ 47, 2.)
NOTE. With ore, oToroe, T7rEL and ~re3t~, av coalesces, forming
orav, 7rdorav, n7rdv or &eriv (Ionic iredav), and nredaiv. In Homer,
where K; is generally used for av, we have ore Ke, &c. (like E'l Ke),
where in Attic we have orav, &c.'E7rnv, however, occurs often in
Homer.
REMARK. The classification of common conditional sentences,
given in ~ 48, applies equally to conditional relative sentences.
The distinction between those containing general suppositions
(~ 62) and the corresponding forms containing particular suppositions (~ 61, 1) is especially important.
~ 6!. We have four forms of the conditional relative sentence which correspond to the four forms of
ordinary protasis (~ 49, 1, 2, and ~ 50, 1, 2):1. When the relative clause refers to a definite act
in the present or the past, and no opinion of the speaker
is implied as to the truth of the supposition, the verb
is put in one of the present or past tenses of the Indicative. (~ 49, 1.)
The antecedent clause can have any form allowed in
an apodosis (~ 49, 1, Note 1).   E. g.
*A plu o ta, ovbe otoiLa elseval (like elt rTa HiA ola). PLAT. Apol.




126        RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.           [~ 61, 1
21 D.   (See above, ~ 60, 1.)  Xpao-cov o r /3o Vovr a, let them
deal with me as they please (i. e. E; TL fjovXovrat). ARIST. Nub. 439.'E7rTrTapat paYv' a 8 el ie, KOX opav a /1 7 p E 7r e t, I know how to
see anything which I ought to see, and not to see anything which I ought
not. EUR. Ino. Fr. 417. ('A 8ei is nearly equivalent to E rLva 6el,
and a fL 7rpeETrE to c Irtva fi?) 7rpe7ret.)  Tovs 7rXi)teoovS'vOa7rep E'e(Tov
KuoTrovs cOawaav's O 6E 8 / t4 CV p t KO V   KVOTa(iTdOV  aVTOLS E7Tro1oCav,
i. e. they raised a cenotaph for any of them whom they did not find
(like el rTacts 57 CEVptiKOv). XEN. An. VI, 4, 9. Ti yap; 0o-nTS 8aravqrpos cov p, atvradoKris' crr, dkXX' aet TrW7r nr)Xa7ov' e 1 vr a, Kal Xaprdvcov tr $ v v a r a'atro d,   ayavv d ro6vatv'vt,  Xaq3ovtvov  p r  f  ~ &L,
O(U 8KEL cOOt Kal OVTOS xaX~ewo's fpXos elvat; (i. e. supposing a case, e'
7rs.....  aurTapKvrs eoTv ii,  K. T..).  Id. Mem. II, 6, 2. So jnTr
Lqr7iataov  vfftLpaXel, THUC. I, 35.'A tRs f7) T7poe(O8OKqffrv,
oUe   )vXdiao'OaL ey^Xopde, there is no opportunity to guard against
what we did not expect (like ei rtva pnI 7rpoaoe8oKr7-e Lrt). ANTIPHON.
p. 131, 36. ~ 19. Els Th rXoia Tola   eTs dacrOevovras eve/3tlac'av Kal
Tw)V cKEVVV ocra i4) avaiyKJ7 7 V EXELv (like el TLV(a TwV Kv OKV FvL) vayK?)
7v EXet), i. e. any of it which they did not need. XEN. An. V, 3, 1.'Avpci7rmves WLOelpey (4j OacXaara) oro& q e vvavro SYT 6valt rpos
rT ferEpc7pa advapaldovres, i. e. if any were unable to escape soon enough
to the high land, so many the sea destroyed. TnUC. III, 89. O0T tlV
alpeols yeyevJralt TSr a EvTvXov0o'L, 7roXX  avaota 7roXke/.torat el 8'
dvayKatov vy, K. T.X.,for any who have had the choice given them, while
they are prosperous in other respects, it is great Jblly to go to war (i. e.
EL Tr'TLv alpecrts yey7iTr]ra). Tnuc. II, 61.  Ildvres'lto(e Xafoplav
oUre rvrrTovra oaiO' dp7rtdovra TO v oTre;avov ov{t' oXow XTpocr-tvO''otl
L?7 7r rp o'- K( v a'ur, nor going anywhere at all where it was not lawful for him (i. e. EI?ro7Lt I7 rpoor-Kev). DEM. Mid. 535, 15. IIs oUy ol
dyaOoi roi S yaOois 4piot eo&raYaL, ot prTe ad7rooves 7roOELOl adXXoSt
pr76 T rapoYvre Xpefav avrTv X OV I; (i. e. ~e,tr... E Xovo-). PLAT.
Lys. 215 B. NtLK7 8 o rTt 7ra-ortv vuv /AXXkt crvvolaertv (i. e. eL rT
9iXXct), may any plan prevail which will benefit you all. DEM. Phil., 55. 7. So SOPH. Ant. 375, s rTd' epse.
NOTi. Care must be taken here (as in conditional sentences,
~ 49, 1, Note 2), not to include under this class the general suppositions of ~ 62, which require the Subjunctive or Optative. On the
other hand, the examples falling under ~ 62, Note 1, in which the
Indicative is allowed, might properly be placed here, as they state a
general supposition for emphasis as if it were a particular one (~ 5'
Note 3). See also ~ 61, 3, Note.
2. When a relative clause, referring to the present or
the past, implies that the condition which it expresses
is not or was not fulfilled (like a protasis of the form
~ 49, 2), its verb is put in a secondary tense of the In
dicative.




~ 61, 3.]    CONDirIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES.                 127
The antecedent clause also contains a secondary tense
of the Indicative, implying the non-fulfilment of a condition, which may be in an apodosis with a'           or a protasis (~ 49, 2), or in an expression of a wish (~ 83).
E.g.'A t9 e'3ovXE~ro &o0vat, o vK aL  COWKEV, he would not have given
what he had not wished to give (i. e. El rlva j17 ZE3oVXkro 8owvaL, oV K av
EOKEY,).  Ogre yap   iv avrol erFeXFpoeLP v 7rpa4rELv pa /  i r'lr raC 0 a, ov're rTOi a'XXoLs eiErpe7roFev, (v''p X o F/ev, aXXo rt 7TTpdrreLv i
rTL 7RparTTOv7TEs OpOS E',LEXXOV 7rpad'ELV  Ouro 8' )7v aV, ou e7rlOTi)EUlv  oX ov, for (if that were so) we should not be undertaking (as we
are) to do things which we did not understand, nor should we permit
any others whom we were ruling to do anything else than what they
were likely to do properly; and this would be whatever they had knowledge of. PLAT. Charm. 171 E.     (Here a   b ITL77rtaraifdeOa- =   TIva
t 77rto-LTa/IaEa, if there were any things which we did not know, --.v,      I.v      I/,!
4pxO..EV =E TLWoYV PXO0fLV. --  Tl E'eov == e o 1 El EMkXXo/, - and ov
f7rTOTa-fjV eLXOV = -  TLVOs ecXov. It is implied that none of the cases
here supposed ever actually arose, as the whole passage refers to an
unfulfilled condition expressed in the preceding sentence.)  Ei 8B
OIKO eLXov eKao-rot ras chtlKas, TroVrov av ad7r\Xvoa-av olrtrves (LXot /xaXro-a c aav'Aqvlwv a w  8rj ap, if each had their trials at home, they
VJould ruin any who were especially friendly, &c. XEN. Rep. Athen.
1, 16.  (Here o'ctes aE-av, = EL Trivs oa-av, forms a second protasis to
the apodosis c7rcXXvo-av a/. See ~ 55, 1.)
EL 4evosv ervyXavov v, Yvveylyv'OKeTE bo7rlov  Iv MO1, El ev EKEUlv TE j r
4ovlJ rE Ka TL  r pO  eAyo o  oEXEoV Ei OLOWp er e p n p   Q, if I happened
to be a foreigner, you would surely pardon me, if I were (now) addressing you in both the language and the manner in which 1 had been
brought up. PLAT. Apol. 17 D.'s 817'ywy' oqLeXov laKaapos vv rev
Ep.ptIvaL vLOS (avpos, O/ KTreaECTLE V EOLs e'rt ypas E'TETeE rY, 0 that I
were the son of some fortunate man, whom old age had found upon his
own estate (i. e. if old age had found any such man, would that I had
&een his son). Od. I, 217.
So when thi relative sentence depends on an indicative in a final
clause (~ 44, 3); as in DEM. Arist. 635, 15: ravrad ye 8T&7rov rpOOr7KE
ypdaqat, Iva orT 7Trore rovpyov E 7r p a X 0 7, Tovrp ra EK ToWV Ov,,v vUrqpXE
SiKata, he ought to have written it in this way, in order that any one by
whom the deed had been done might have his rights according to the
laws.  (This implies that the law was not so written, so that the
case supposed in ory e7rapdxOr never arose.)
REMARK. All examples of this form fall equally well under the
general rule for assimilation, ~ 64, 2.
3. When the relative clause refers distinctly and vividly to the future (like a protasis of the form ~ 50, 1),




128        RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.            [~ 61, 3.
and the verb      of the antecedent clause also refers to
the future, the relative is joined with Jv (or Ice) and
followed by the Subjunctive.       E. g.
TdWav 7jV K' E' EX oC  L ()Xi\V 7rotco'o KOLrIV (like E' KET rtva e0EXcoAt), whomsoever of these I may wish I shall make my wife. 11. IX,
397.'Ee yap'OpE'rrao rio-Ls E'o-aerat'Arpedao, O7rTr'T a'v 7 1or,7) re
Kal   ItE p e T a t a', i. e. vengeance will come from  Orestes, when
he shall grow up, &c. (like eIv troTe i Oacro). Od. I, 40. T7re 8' aVrT
paXorOeTai, 07riTrdo  KEV /itv 0vzios evl ar7TjeO(rcov  avCoyy   Kal 0eop o poc'r
11. IX, 702.'AXX' a'ye0',  by Eyiw v e'Y r C, T7rEO )wf.fa ardvre, let us
obey as I may direct, i. e. if 1 give any direction (dav 7irwo ewrc), let us
obey it. Il. II, 139.'Hpei( avr' daXo'ovs Te (flAas Kal vYjrra  eKyva
a(oPE v   V ve0atvw, E7rfv TITroXleOpov E'X co / e v, when we shall have taken
the city. 11. IV. 238.  So eTr' av 7TrLTrrotv, 11. I, 242. OVKOUV, orav
1 i)   o-eL7 (  vr, 7reraucol/at, therefore, when I shall have no more
strength, 1 will cease. SOPi. Ant. 91. Taira, EfreL8av 7repi TO0 yevovs
i'ro, epf, I will speak of ths, when I shall have spoken about my
birth. DEM. Eubul. 1303, 25.   (See ~ 20, Note 1.)'Exrel8v 8ta7rp ad oaf  a  E8oFLaL, eco. XEN. An. II, 3, 29. Tiva olECaO auTrqv
#vxiv   eiLtv, oTraV peJL'ib8  TWy rrarpOcSv arearreprJezvov; whatfeelings
do you think she will have, when (or if at any time) she shall see me,
&c.? DEM. Aph. II, 842, 16. Tovroav 8'AOrlvalovs qfl/l elv elvatL
mTrTaKoovsLO,;e  S a'v TWYOS v, Yv XItaKLa X KaXo  V  oEX Y 8 O K rj,ffrom whatever
age it shall seem good to you to take them (i. e. if from any particular
age, &c.) Id. Phil. 1, 45, 27.'Tuv vrpaydzarovr TOVs /3ovXEvofLEVovs
(^yeFa-Oal 8El), Tva a aiv eKEvoLts  o K O  ravra 7rparrTrat, in order that
whatever shall seem good to them shall be done. Ib. 51, 19. Ovi /Iot
fo63ov uSEXa0pov X7r\s, E/ATrOELY, Zwv a'v av 6 tjvp T1J+ eaTras TWEUs ALYvr0osv, so long as he shall kindle fire, &c. AESCH. Agam. 1435.
NOTE. The Future Indicative is rarely, if ever, used in conditional relative clauses, as in common protasis (~ 50, 1, Note 1), in
the place of the Subjunctive; as it would generally be ambiguous,
appearing as if the antecedent were definite. "Oo-o 3ovouXio-orrat,
THUC. I, 22, is perhaps to be explained in this way. See XEN.
Cyr. I, 5, 13. In such examples as z /   ss avros Trape'orai, unT
less he was to be present himself, the Future is used as it is in the
form of protasis explained ~ 49, 1, N. 3.
4. When the relative clause refers to the future less
distinctly and vividly (like a protasis of the form ~ 50,
2), and the antecedent clause contains an Optative referring to the future, the relative is followed by the
Optative (without av).
The Optative in the antecedent clause may bo in an




~ 62.]             GENERAL SUPPOSITIONS.                    129
apodosis with av or a protasis (~ 50, 2), in an expres.
sion of a wish (~ 82), or in a final clause. E. g.
MdXa Key Opa0avKapb8tOS eL, 0s Tore yfT  0 G e'e L E v t8Z  ovo ovI
dK aX oTro (i. e. e' rI 7y?1 -ceLE, /iaXa KEV OpaavKadp&OS EL'q), any one
who should then rejoice would be very stout-hearted. II. XIII, 343
So I1. VI, 329 and 521; XIV, 247: ARIST. Nub. 1250. OVK av ow',
Opeav' vapa, o rts      X 0i   TE Ka al 8Ova v T   a 7repVKetV TOV
E7rLXEtpovvras d atLKeiV; would you not support any man who shoula
be both willing and able, &c.? XEN. Mem. II, 9, 2. IIHFvjWv fdyot'v
o0roTe 3 o v X o r o, when he is hungry, he would eat whenever he might
wish (like el OT7roe f3ovXoro). lb. II, 1, 18. So Mem. I, 5, 4; I, 7,
3; IV, 2, 20. IIH) o'v a'v elerjs TepI ro70VT  rov TrpadyLaros, ov 7ravra7ra(av a7retpos c'Eg; how then could you know about that thing of'which you had no experience at all? PLAT. Men. 92 C.'Ap' ah
Iyoo 7uo rava  ali~at, a  ot6 e el r KaL a7ro6adoat KaL Sovvat KaC OVaUl
OTW 0ioVXOlO OEwV; Id. Euthyd. 302 A. Ti By raeTiv (bvvatro), 8
t1Ai Kat v)' avrov 7r a 0 o; what could he suffer, unless he should sufier
it also fiom himself? (i. e. el vp) wd0ot). PLAT. Lys. 214 E.  0O hi
i   7 d T a R  o rli7, ot' ai'V \XOl (i. e. el Trt i) dyaCoir), ov8' abv  L\oi To roUo).
lb. 215 B. "Oo(r 86e rpeoj3vTrepos ylyvoLro,,iaXXov diFi aCrurd'otro
av (Xp'para), the older he should grow, the more he would always cling
to it (i. e. El rTt 7rpeo(rTepoLs ylyvotro, Toro 1uiaXXov dairrraCoro aiv).
PLAT. Rep. VIII, 549 B.   So III, 412 D; VIII, 557 B.,Ibro-op.v
p.7rO8wTe Mr)bEv av  eloiov,.rlS EXarTov yeviEa-Oa, EWOs'lOV eL't auvro
EavT&s, so long as it should remain equal to itself  PLAT. Theaet.
155 A. So odovXoJLv KE,...     CT' E, Od. XI, 489.
Ei 8E f oi 3   o  T o  & Xv Ofcy  iva r T rporpe4aoaT'Oa oorTe adTro3qrjolS
e7rt!Le~Xero9aL TOW ocrv, Tr a'v TroIOLrs; XEN. Mem. II, 3, 12. ElKor'T
hiv Kal 7rapa Oewv irpaKT~K:Torepos eIr), OCTLS!Lr OrOTre Ev d7rrpoLS e l 7rTre
KO a KEVO, I XX' OTe rTa  pltora r p ad r o  TO'Te paXl-Ta 7rv T e&v
e     v, 0 ro. Id. Cyr. I, 6, 3.'2s adrrXoLro Kal a'XXo, o rtI rota(Lr
ye pe' o, 0 that any other man might likewise perish who should do
the like (i. e. El TISr TOLavra pECo). Od. I, 47.'EyIyvwoaKe 8~'v TOv
Vrr7jpeTra rovro dcrKelvi, S  irdvra voilto~ev TrpE7reL avrois TO rpTrretv oca
6 afPXov 7Tpoa'TarrTT. XEN. Cyr. II, I, 31.
REMARK. All these examples fall also under the general rule for
assimilation, ~ 64, 1.
~ g6.    A  conditional relative sentence (like a protasis, ~ 51) may express a general supposition.. This
happens when the verb of the antecedent clause denotes
a customary or repeated action or a general truth, while
the relative clause refers indefinitely to any one of a
series or class of acts, and not to a definite act or a
definite series of acts.




130        RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.                [~ 62.
Here the Subjunctive with 0           av,'orav, &c. is used
after primary tenses, and the Optative (without av)
after secondary tenses.      E. g.'EXOPpo yap JLO KELVO O5.S v'Atao Vor,'XLYOtv, o X' Erepov Fev KEV r
viL fpE(oiv, EXo    L eTr.,jfobr that man (i. e. any man) is hated by me
like the very gates of Uades, who conceals one thing in his mind and
speaks another. II. IX, 312. Ne/eaoro pal a ye yElv ou8ev KXaLeLfv  o Ke
Oa v off' (   poTP   KaL Tror!/ov evl'i7r, I am never at all indignant at
weeping for any mortal who may die, &c. Od. IV, 195. Kai yap ovjiLaxelV TOVTOLS eOeXovTLV 67raaVTEf ovb iv y p c o L trapeoKevao-L;evov,.for
all men are (always) willing to be allies to those whom they see prepared.
L)EM. Phil. I, 42, 1. Kalfrep rv dJvOpcrol7rv, ev o'  a v v  o X e cO fL, 
TOSy rapovTa (7r6oXE ov) del xLE'YLTrov KpLVOVTrOV, although men always
consider the present war the greatest, so long as they are engaged in it.
THuc. I, 21. Hopevovral TE yap al tyEXaL    V ayel v avras eOvwoociv o
yo>el/E, vefovral re ^Xwpia e') 6roia ay avras 6l) icl ai, cre'XovTrai  E
wv av avaras cinre pyo'o l' Kati TOL KapTOiS  eCo'o rovs voLIeas Xpo'0LaU
ovrTos o7ros av avrol 3 ov  wovraLt' a'vOponot Fe  r' ovEvas PIa XXov
(rvviouavrat erTl rotVTOVs ov s  av a't (0  vT r a L PXe  aUrTv ESTrtxepo7vTra. XEN. Cyr. I, 1, 2. Not/do 7rpooardov epyov elvat oloV 8fl, Os
av opCv rol')YS p ovS feaTra7rTfi.leovLs txq 7ritrpE7rrn i. e. such as one ought
always to be, who, &c. Id. Hell. II, 3, 51. Karap6v'rv)a7s he (eyyiYyeral), 8 ayv Kal yvCLr/ Tlr r eYVT rV  evavrlwv 7rpoexeLtv6 O yiv VTrdpXet. THUc. II, 62.   (Here the o refers to all that precedes, as a
definite antecedent.)
Ov pEv yap e/lLCov KXEOS avepoF, oqppa K en o' l, q o0 T 7Tro'rclv T
Pe;. Kal Xeporiv. Od. VIII, 147. ("Oqpa K' i'Enrv, so long as he
lives.)  (0eovs) T7-aparporCo  a VOpwrotoL Xt\OaaO'dfrO, OTr KEV TtL VIrCEp]  KaL a f ip r7. Il. IX, 500.'HpteTv yap r aperTls aLroalvvra
evpvoTra Zevs avepos, eVT av  Lvy Karma  ovh\ov a fpap 6'X oLy. Od.
XVII, 322. ILXeL 8hE KOS 7rpoor77tLalvetV, evr av eL XXI7 LEydXa KaKO
7 rot O l'7 cveit L o'e0at. HDT. VI, 27.  Iev'yovrt yap rot Xio OpacLEis,
orav reXas l'r TOV ro AtOqVy elaopi~rt rTOV 3iov. SOPH. Ant. 580.'HVIK av h OI KOL yevW Tat, a   poaov OVOK dvarXerTa. ARIST. Pac.
1179.'E7rEtaiV'    7K fKopa 77., Xdpva Kas ayove'v a/tamaa. THUC.
II, 34.'EIreldav 86 K p V  O COL y7, avqp PpLVeOLS VrO T77iS TOXErdXE,
Os av yvwp TE~ rE  OKr7,UJ davveros elvaL, Xeyet enr' avTolS E'TraLvov -TO
7rperovra. Ibid. "Ecso a.v a-W' raC rTb Toa()oe, TOTr Xp 7XrpO;vjlovr
ELval' eneTEhCv L e h  1 OdaXarra v7rEp(rX77, Liaralos rj cTrov&r. DEN.
Phil. III, 128, 22. So EoT' av  e i cO a-. v, XEN. Mein. III, 5, 6.
Ov Tiva yap TrleGKoV E7'tXOO.VCOV dvOpor7Wov, ov KaKo1v ovhe /ev E;aOXv,
I r  Ta    E i ( Tasla Iai LKo  i. e. they were never in the habit of honoring any one who came to them. Od. XXII, 414. Kai ovs fIEV 1'8o
evTTaCKrS Kai arw7rL lodvras, 7rpo-eXavvwv aurois rTves TrE eev Ypa7ra, Kal
Enet 7rv0orTo &er,7vet. XEN. Cyr. V, 3. 55.  (Here'pcora and E'7rveL
denote the habit of Cyrus.)  Kai TOLS fIev'A0rvaiois rv'TOero To vavrtoLu
anro rTs 8a7ravr77v 7YEKEOL vp qL);poLEV, avToL 8E,'oTrore (ToaTa'  LEV,
a7rapacraKEVO KaL altretpOl ES rTv o7rdefJov KaOffi'TavTr and the Athenian




62.]      CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES.                 131
navy continued to increase from the money which these contributed, and
they, whenever they revolted, always found themselves unprepared and
inexperienced for war. THUG. I, 99.'Ertl Moi'pos' 3aoLAX;os, OKO) e''X  ot  d 7lroraL'os err OKrT qrfXeaS,
apoeaoKe A'yv7rrv -, rlv evepOe Me;ztos, i. e. whenever the river rose.
HDT. II, 13. Tcv 3e Xovv rov pK(ope6dYevov, OKcoS yLvoLro Vv, GE
rov TiypLv e$Fopeov, i. e. they carried it away every night. Id. II.
150. Ol 8 (Kapes), O'KwO Mivco IEOLrO, e7rXTpovv oi ras veIas. Id.
1, 171.'EnC7reL  E d vo LX Oc, leoL eifLev 7rapa rov 2xKparrT, i. e.
each morning, when the prison was opened, &c. PLAT. Phaed. 59 D.
Ore e'o) rov evov y7 e v o v r o, nroXXoi avrov adrEXenrov, many (always)
left him, when they were out of danger. XEN. An. II, 6, 12.  (It'
eyevovro had been used, the whole sentence would refer to a particular case in which many left him.)
REMARK. The gnomic Aorist, and the other gnomic and
iterative tenses of ~ 30, can be used in the antecedent clause of
these general propositions.  The gnomic Aorist, as usual, is a
primary tense.    (See ~ 32, 2.)  E. g.
0 KIE Ocois E r t 7r e 7re   q a L, pd'Xa r' Kic X v o V avroV, whoever obeys
the Gods, to him they are ready to listen. 11. I, 218. "Orav rt9s'0wTep
ouro~s Io' r XvX r o rrpCnq 7rpdqop(s  7rravra aveXatricre tKai  t~v -
a(CV. DEM. 01. II, 20, 27.'Onrore rrpoor3XE'i tcL rtvaL r Ev V raTL
rTact, eC L T  a,   cO a LV8pE, Kc.r.X., i. e. he used to say, &c. XEN.
Cyr. VII, 1, 10. (See ~ 30, 2.) Ov'r' XXOTre 7r-WorTe 7rpos Xaptv
ciX6{or1v XEyeLv, o Sr av Arla Kai ovvola'rv 7rCerea'CFL vo0s, I have never on
other occasions preftrred to say anything in order to please, unless I
have been convinced that it would also be for your advantage. DEM.
Phil. I, 54, 27. (Here eiX6oyv is used in a sense approaching that
of the gnomic Aorist, so as to be followed by a Subjunctive.  Sea
~ 30, 1, N. 1.)
NOTE 1;    The Indicative is sometimes used instead of the
Subjunctive and Optative in relative sentences of this class.
(See ~ 51, N. 3.)   Here the speaker refers to one of the cases
in which the event in question is liable to occur, as if it were
the only case, instead of referring indefinitely to all possible
cases alike (as when the Subjunctive or Optative is used).
This use of the Indicative occurs especially after the indefinite
relative 0aTrS; as the idea of indefiniteness, which is usually
expressed by the Subjunctive or Optative, is here sufficiently
expressed by the relative itself. E. g.'ExOpE' yap iOLt KeLvos t2iS'AI3ao TrVXrLv
riyveral, os 7regvl7 E'KLOv adrariaXia C3c S. Od. XIV, 15&6;ompare this with the first example (11. IX, 312) under ~ 62




132        RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.              [~ 62'Eiolt yap o'art 7rao-av Evvvo)V TO'LV
Mi) Trv adpLO(o a 7r e r a fiouXeuVtLcrV,'AXX' e'K f63ov roy yX)&o-rav EyKXELcras C'X e
KaKLo-TOS EivaUL VV Tr KaL rrakXal BOK~E'
Kal /eltov' oTrrs avrT TrJs avrov 7raTpas
4iL'Xov vo iIeLs, roTroV ov a/,oU X;yco. SOPr. Ant. 178.
(Here we might have had o8 av.... u a7rrrlTa, aXX'.... ex, and
os av vo/AiL, without any essential difference in meaning.)
O'TItvES 7rpOS. ras T vfJI4opas yvcfo74 pe/v?rKtoara X v7Troy rat, e'pyTo de
pa\Xt(T aadvTe; ovrV'v,  o  aTOL Kal roXecoCv Kau lSTorCv KpartoTrol Etlv.
TnHuc. II, 64. So in the same chapter, orr-Ls Xapa/3dve. "EOarvrov
TOV avrov 7Tpoov O'ooVS rV    e X r dX   a v e  r arparta, they continued to bury in the same way as many as the army took up. XEN.
An. VI, 5, 6. (Here e'tXad3avo might have been used.)'"Ocrts
a' ad tKV  ro TW rr rapa /i3aotXEcoS rTpo avTov, 7Tavras dTarreTrreTo.
Ib. 1, 1, 5. "Orov 8ie XoX0E'rav dos,7ravv e'l r, avros 8' E 8   a TO TapaOKEevaCdaol atI, ia7re/Tcow fKFeevE rTOvsE  LovUs ThrotS 4{dXAXetv  TOVTOV.
lb. I, 9, 27. (In the last two examples there is some Ms. authority
for the mnore reguIar ddLKvoiTo and Uvvatro.) See also An. I, 9, 13.
All these examples fall under the first class of conditional relative
sentences, ~ 61, 1. So in common protasis, ~ 51, N. 3.
NOTE 2. The Greek generally uses the Indicative in relative
clauses depending on general negative sentences, where in Latin a
Subjunctive is more common. E. g.
Hap' 4fol 8E ohVSel/ PiTOOqopEL, o'(TLS   L'KO(IV OdE Eo'tv Io'a 7rovELV e/tIoL,
i e. no one who is not able (no one unless he is able), nemo qui non
possit. XEN. HIell. VI, 1. 5. These sentences are regular protases,
and belong under the rule of ~ 61, 1. (See Note 1.)
NOTE 3. (a.) In Homer, similes and comparisons are often
expressed by the Subjunctive after;o', s        re, Oe, T s os
(seldom, so ay, &c.), where we should expect the Present Indicative, which sometimes occurs. Besides the singular use of
the Subjunctive in these expressions, the omission of av or KE is
especially to be noticed. (See ~ 63, 1.) E. g.'Q 86e yvv) K a i o' t ()lXov ro'lv dafftLre'ro ov-ta,
Or Te E7E lrpOcOeV TrOXLOS Xaov  T e  rS e n't v, 
aQs'O8voEVS XecEv v, 7r iqpV(i0 8aKpVOV efsev,
Ulysses wept as a wife weeps, &c. Od. VIH, 523-531.'Qs 6' oT'r O7rwtvos BopYqErs  op d er t v aKavOas
AL 7re&SOV, 7rvKLval 8Ie rpas alXX)XcrLV gXv ovrat,
~s2 rTv aiE reXhayoS aw/epot q()pov &vOa Kai ev8a. Od. V, 328.
QSI' 6w UV a(T rpa7iT 7 nTOCrLs Hps'vKooo,.LO.
QSI rVKtiv' fv crrOjeuoECT  cLV crrevdaXtC AyacLEivcov. Il. X, 5 —9.
Oi's Tos T' aiTTpEE evavTLol a XXJXotCLv 0yp/ov eXavyaovC&V, (Co




~ 63, 2.]  CONDIrIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES.              133
TpC&es Kal'AxaLoi eT' aXXXotor & Oopo Tves 4ovv. I1. XI, 67-71. See
also II. XII, 167-172.
(b.) In many cases the Subjunctive or the Present Indicative is followed by the gnomic Aorist in the same simile, the
Aorist being merely a more vivid form of expression than the
others. (See ~ 30, 1, Notes 2 and 3.) E. g.'2s 8' reoF KaCrvOs ilV i   ospaviv epbVV i Kj ra &
"AareosE alOoLu'voto, 9ecov 8E e' /lvts a vd 7 K e v
IIaO-L 8' Ec017KE,O vov, -oXhXoilcrt  K,8E' q, jJK,,'Qs'AXLe;\E  Tpeo-o-t Troov Ka K63L E'B0 KEV. II. XXI, 522.'o'ev E KOVY[(TL XaaZ'recrIv, altyepoS os, 
*H pd r ev elafIVev EXcoS f?.Eydhoto 7reT e) K
aSe^, drdp Tr oL 0'ot e7r aKporadr ) 7r E  a o- vL'
Tv v IE'V O' apT0arorryos dvqp aawvt orTLp8('ET Efra/', (  Vfpa'r/vv KafptrA p 7reptL.aXXEL Gi(pcp''H /Uev T' caoItvrIc KF e i a. TroraptLoo 7rap' o'Xas 
Toiov ip'AvOypISr2v 2L/toeLiTOV iSevadpLev
A'ias 8Loyev7j.. I IV, 482.
~ 63.   1. (a.) In Homer, the relatives (like el) often take
the Subjunctive without av or Ke, the sense being apparently the
same as when aiv is used.  (~ 50, 1, N. 2.)  E. g.'OrrtL udX' ov arivats', 8s doavaroLCt padXrrat.. nV, 407.'AvOdpurovs ef0opai, Kal TrvvyraL Os rS ixapdpry. Od. XIII, 214.
ZevS 8' avroS ve;eL OXf3ov'OX\VATLOS davOpC7rroOl(v,'EoOXo0ls,e KaKoilWV, Orocs iE 6   otv, E&KTr:. Od. VI, 188.
Ov fJt)V ao' 0  OTrE loov'X( y;pas, o6r7ror'Axatol
Tp&owv E Ki7rE pcc ( C  vatxLevoIv rroh ieOpov. UI. I, 1f3.
Ou /LE 7yap FrorT; qo-l KaCKOY Tea((Erdat 0o7L'o-oa,
"Opp apeTjy IT ap e  X co l  0eol Kal youyatr o p c) p 77
so long as the Gods shall supply valor, &c. Od. XVIII. 132.
(b.) The same omission of lv is not uncommon in the Attie
poets; and even in prose a few exceptional cases occur, if we
follow the Mss.  (~ 50, 1, N. 3). E. g.
rTpovra 8' 0opOoiv jXaapov, os vovs 7re ra. SOPH. O. C. 395. T&i
8e 7rrinovv ciaXto'ra )vzrovr' ai 4) a v o r' aviaiperot. Id. 0. T. 1231.
TOKtot yap.LqjTe aciOrea /L)Te TelXa r EKTcrTpva... K.0S oVK av Ctrioap
OvrOL a'paXOL; HDT. IV, 46. (See ~ 63, 4, a.)'E7rwXc.plov O. 7/1L
oV {pv f3paxeFl dpKa Co T ) ITroXXoisp XpO(ral, it being our national habit
not to use many words where few suffice. TIIuc. IV, 1 7. (Yet the
sentence continues, 7rXEloo- e U  c ah Kaipos h, l.r. X.) See ~66,4,N.
2. The adverb au is sometimes used with the Optative or
Indicative in conditional relative clauses, when the relative




134        RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.          [~ 63, 2.
clause is itself an apodosis, with a protasis expressed or im.
plied. In Homer Ke with the Optative sometimes occurs where
there is no apodosis, as in common protasis. (See ~ 50, 2,
N. 2, a, b.)  E. g.'E$v a.v  v 7rt evf Xiywv 8t a O   adXXo, K 1  roK TrcoV avrovs 7rel'efOa
(E'q), he said that they would form their opinion upon any slanders
which any good speaker might (if he pleased) chance to utter. THUC.
VII, 48. But in Od. II, 54, as KE... 0 ol  K' eeX ot, that he
might give her to any one he pleased, C K' IO~Xot does not differ fiom
the ordinary  E9eXOiL  EL aLr' t e'OXot. In DEM. Phil. I, 41, 3, ocov
Atv f o X o LO a   is merely a conjectural emendation for olov vy i o V;-'X-o-e, which is a regular example illustrating ~ 62. "OOvrL' av
VfLEls elg Tavrvrv TrVv raLtL Kareo-'r17are, oUros TwV  Vco'v atros 1'v atl
KaKWV ocrovtrep Kai o'ros, any one soever whom you might have appointed (if you had chosen) to this post would have been the cause of
as great calamities as this man has been. DEM. F. L. 350, 3. (Without the aiv after OvrtLa, this would havs been a regular example
under ~ 61, 2, ovrtva KareTrrao-are being equivalent to el riva,a'XXov
KaTrea-r7joae, if you had appointed any one else (which you did not do).
With the /v, it is itself an apodosis with a suppressed protasis; unless we can suppose that the liv was used, like Ki in the Homeric example, without affecting the sense. See ~ 49, 2, N. 4.)
3. A conditional relative clause, like a common protasis,
may depend upon an Infinitive or Participle (with or without
av), or upon a final clause.  See the last three examples under
~ 61,. 3. (Compare ~ 53; ~ 55, 2.)
4. The conditional relative clause may have a form different
from that of its apodosis. This happens under the same circumstances as in common protasis.   (See ~ 54.)
(a.) An Indicative or Subjunctive in the relative clause may depend upon an Optative with av in the apodosis, either when the
expressed apodosis belongs to an implied protasis (~ 54, 1, a), or
when the Optative with aiv is considered a primary tense, from its
resemblance in sense to the Future Indicative (54, 1, b). See also
~34, 1,b. E. g.
OVKOZV Kaa TO vytatveLv KaL To voo-etv, orav ayaOov Tvoa aiarta y -
yvr'rac, dya0a av elr), i. e. when they prove to be the causes of any good,
they would be good things (if we should accept your doctrine). XE:N.
Mem. IV, 2. 32. So Mern. II, 2, 3; and PLAT. Rep. II, 379 B.'Eyc&,) e ravrrqv pev Trv elpr'vlv, wOs atv els'A0rlvalov Xet7rqlrat, oveaFror atv o-rvtovXEvcratt_,t roTioaaoaBat rq rTOdXte, I would never advise the
city to make this peace, so long as a single Athenian shall be left. DEIr.
F. L. 345, 14. (Here Ews XeItrotTO, so long as one should be left,
would be more regulav.)  So ARIST. Nub. 1151; SOPH. El. 697.




~ 64, 1.1   CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES.                135
(b.) The Optative (without niv) in the relative clause occasionally
depends upon a primary tense in the apodosis. Thi. may arise from
the slight distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in such
sentences (~ 54, 2, a); as in I1. XIII, 317, al7rv ol ecr-e-rat viqas EvL-'rpro-at, ore /a. avros ye Kpovicov tfi3dX6 aWod0evov aXiov vjeo'o't, it will
be a hard task for him, unless the son of Kronos should hurl, &c.
(More regularly, Tor KE b) etxa Ci X D, unless he shall hurl, &c.)
The Optative in the Relative clause sometimes depends on a
verb of necessity, obligation, propriety, possibility, &c. with an Infinitive, the two forming an expression that is nearly equivalent in sense
to an Optative with av, which would be expected in their place
(~54, 2, b). E.g.'AXX' 6v o7rdXtt o-roe e, TroVe Xp: KX\ELv, we should obey any one
whom the state appoints (if the state should appoint any one, we ought
to obey him). SOPH. Ant. 666. (Xpq KuELV~r is followed by the
Optative from its resemblance in sense to b&Kaicos av KXVOt rt-.)'AXtAa ro- v fIV aTuroivXEyeLV a.L7 c-a)Os e O e? i EeiEoaOat oeT, i. e. we
ought to abstain, &c.; like EiBooLTo av rtL. XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 19. Ovs
8o orotao'al o rLS  o v X o o r o (rvvepyovs 7rpoOvuovs, Trorov, ravra7raraov
EfiotLye oKEi dyaOos Orlpareov elvat. 1b. II, 4. 10.  (Here Oripar;f,
elval t Orpav Oiv.)'YTrepopdav ov oarov7v v  6iv dvopi os e o ei KiupiovS
Tvras o0 rL  Xe3o0E   e avrcw XpraOat. Id. Hell. VII, 3, 7.
5. The Indicative is generally used in Greek (as in Latin)
in parenthetical relative clauses, like o rt 7ror''o-rl7, whatever it
is (quidquid est), ocrrL, 7ror' ecrtv (or E'o-ra), &c.  E. g.
Zevs,  rt 7ror' e crT l, el TO3' avro cpiXov KfeKXilteEv, TOVTO vYv
7rpoaevverco, Zeus, whoever he may be, &c. AESCII. Agam. 160.
AovXEvofiev Oeols, o0 rT 7OT eor  clv OeoL. EUR. Orest. 418.
The Subjunctive, however, sometimes occurs; in which case the
expression belongs under ~ 62 or ~ 61, 3: as in AESCHIN. Tim. ~ 127,
adiX 6 7rpooa-a'afievov auTro Kal TrapaTVxcOv, orTES av, 7 Xyov IrapEXE&.
So DEM. Phil. I, 47, 24.
Assimilation in Dependent Relative Clauses.
~ 64.    1. When a conditional relative clause referring to
the future depends on a Subjunctive or Optative referring to
the future, it regularly takes by assimilation the same mood
with its leading verb.  Such a leading verb may be in protasis or apodosis, in another conditional relative clause, in
the expression of a wish (~ 82), or in a final clause. E. g.'Eadv Trve o av 86v  T vr a T TOVro rOtct,  E, &, if any who shall
be able do this, it will be well. E' rtves oLt  vIvaLtvro rTOTro rotolevf
KaX\s av'Xot, if any who should be able should do this, it would 5s




136        RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENIENCES. [~ G4,-1.
well. E'e 7ravYres ol 8 v a V   v r o roUro 7rOLv, 0 that all who may be
able would do this.  (Here the principle of assimilation makes o2
bhvaTvro after an Optative preferable to oi a&v vovoraL, which would
express the same idea.) So in Latin: Si absurde canat is qui se
haberi velit musicum, turpior sit. - Sic injurias fortunae quas ferre
nequeas defugiendo relinquas.
For examples see ~ 61, 3 and 4.
2. When a conditional relative clause depends on a secondary
tense of the Indicative implying the non-fulfilment of a condition, it regularly takes a secondary tense of the Indicative by
assimilation. The leading Indicative may be in protasis or
apodosis (~ 49, 2), in another conditional relative clause
(~ 61, 2), in an expression of a wish (~ 83), or in a final clause
(    44, 3).  E. g.
E rTves ont  v a vTo roro T7rpa~av, KaXos alv,'oXEv, if any who had
been able had done this, it would have been well. EiEe 7raTvre o'l E3vv a Tr o roVro'rpaeav, 0 that all who had been able had done this. So
in Latin: Nam si solos os diceres miseros quibus moriendum esset,
neminem tu quidem eorum qui viverent exciperes.
REMARK 1. It will be seen that this principle of assimilation
accounts for the Indicative and Optative in a conditional relative
sentence, which have been already explained by the analogy of the
ordinary forms of protasis. (See ~ 61, 2 and 4.) In fact, wherever
this assimilation occurs, the relative clause stands as a protasis to its
antecedent clause, although the latter may be itself a protasis to
another apodosis. (See ~ 34.) Occasionally this principle is dis
regarded, so that a Subjunctive depends on an Optative. (See the
examples under ~ 34, 1, b, and ~ 63, 4, a.)
REMARK 2. The Indicative in the construction of ~ 61, 1, referring simply to the present or past, cannot be affected by assimilation, as that would change its time. E. g.
M     /r' ibLoL 7rape(TTLO  yEVOLTO, /rxrq ICOV pOv povv, os Tra''Ep E8 (i. e
I' rLE Trab epBEL). SOPH. Ant. 372.
NOTE 1. The principle of ~ 64 applies only to conditional relative clauses. If the relative refers to a definite antecedent, so that
its verb denotes a fact and not a supposition, the principle of assimilation does not apply, and the Indicative (or any other construction
required by the sense, ~ 59, N. 1) is used. E. g.
El rSv rToXL tTC   Ol VWV 7TtEO VOf 0 V, TOVTOws aTrrJ&oI-asieV, OrS
06 o X P ce 0 a, Trovro0tL XprqoaltlFeaOa, o'welr7oEqev a. ARIST. Ran.
1446. EI'' Rhoaa vvars  pipaiv [o-ov TrpO0vtLOS e, 0 that thou couldst
do as much as thou art eager to do. Eun. Ileracl. 731. (If the Imperfect had been used by assimilation, the meaning would be as
much as thou wert (or mightest be) eager to do.)




~ 6b, 1.]     ASSIMILATION. -AC IN APODOSIS.               137
NOTE 2.    Conditional relative clauses depending on a Sub.
junctive or Optative in a general supposition    (~ 51, ~ 62)
are generally assimilated to the Subjunctive or Optative; but
sometimes they take the Indicative on the principle of ~ 62,
Note 1. E. g.
Ov'b, ercELtv (1' aV Ir p l p  ra KVpLOS yevrTraL, T) 7rposor, (-rV/L3ovXo
7repl Trov Xotry E'TI XpprTat. DEM. Cor. 241, 15. See PLAT. Rep.
VI, 508 C and D; Charm. 164 B.'O E TrorTd /La iXtra eXaLpEY, O&rOTe
TaXLora TrvxovTas Cy 8 Y  t0 V Tr a7oTr1Trot. XEN. Ages. IX, 2.
Airia pye yap ecriLV, orav TL IL5/to Xpqracitevos Xoyo3 pt) rqapoa'XyrxaL
rLtcrLv vop XEyeL, fA~yXo osE7 8 rav cov   Cyv t'lr 71s Kal TCri79E\S O/OV
8ei'$,. DEM. Androt. 600, 5. (Here &v XeyeL and &iv vY e'& n are
nearly equivalent.)'EK&a\eLt  Kal erila 6Td7re TvaS''iot 7roovroV
7rolo'lavTas o 7ravras 0(ovA;Eo TrOiTLEl. XEN. Cyr. II, 1, 30. (Here
fovCXo~To for E/C3Ovro would have corresponded to OLVTOro in the
second example quoted.)
REMARK.     The conjunction L' is occasionally used to introduce the clause on which a relative depends. Its force here is
the same as in apodosis. (See ~ 57.) E. g.
OLr7 Irp fv\Xov y7evE, rTOlq 8  Ka av dSpCv. II. VI, 146.'ErrT re 
7rodXePos KarTEr'Tr, 8E (alveraTa Kai e TOVTW orpoyvovS TrV l  vaZaItv, and
when the war broke out, (then) he appears, &c. THUc. I, 65. MeXpt
ftHV OVU Ol TOOTatL eXOV re ra i3r7 avTols Kal oLto Te'7rav Xp'qdaLt, ol
6e C vTreXov, so long as their archers both had their arrows and were
able to use them, they held out. Id. III, 98. "QZtorep ol 67rXrat, OU'T(,6 Kal ol 7reXTaarTa. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 5, 12. So )alivovmTa 86, THUC.
I, 11; and yiTyvovro iE, AESCHIN. Cor. ~ 69.
Relative Clauses expressing a Purpose, Result, &c.
~ 65.    1. The relative is used with the Future Indicative to denote a purpose or object. E. g.
UIpeo-I/elav 8Ie 7rpreLv, q7'ts ravr' Epel KCal 7rape.o ra  TOLS 7rptiyl/ao-tv, and to send an embassy to say these things, and to be present at
the transaction. DEM. 01. I, 10, 1. 4,q1  87q 8eiv /ELas irps OerrTa
Xovs rTper,3elav 7r;texrEt,  TOVS ei, v L8tideL Taara, robS he rap o
evve. lb. II, 21, 10. "Eaofe rc- rh1p) TptaKovra avpas iXE-LOat, 0o
TroVS rarplovs vosfov's 4vyypda'ovo'I, KaO' ovs 7rTO  rev'ovo'T.
XEN. Hell. II, 3, 2. Ov yap EfriTt P.o XPa7',ara, orodev exr'  T o' o,for i
have no money to pay the fine with. PLAT. Apol. 37 C.




138        RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.          [~ 65, 1.
The antecedent of the relative, in this case, may be either definite
or indefinite; but the negative particle is regularly pj4, as in final
clauses (~ 43, N. 2).
REMARK. 0Oro astS  a relative is sometimes used in this construction in a way which illustrates its use as a final particle. (See ~ 45,
Item.)  E. g.
IloleE 86 oouro - KCS rcpv a-rv evZE)o'EL,irev, and act so that there
~4all be nothing wanting on your part; lit. act in that way by which,
AC. HDT. VII, 18. T oTrwEco eTrTraorOaL avOpoTrwv aXXcov WrpoTrarFvEl  ITr Co)'  ova- trda 7ra m rz 6T'Leta,...'oiVo OavpIao-Trv EQ)alviro,
i. e. in such a way that they shall have, &c. XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 7. So
Cyr. II, 4, 31.
NOTE. 1. (a.)  The Future Indicative is the only form regularly
used in prose after the relative in this sense. It is retained even
after secondary tenses, seldom being changed to the Future Optative, which would here be expected by ~ 31, 2, and by the analogy
of clauses with gi7rov (~ 45). The Future Optative, however, is
found in Sopu. 0. T. 796, (Ievyov e'vOa i?7rorT o' o ILp ) V oveiar, -
and probably in PLAT. Rep. III, 416 C, (pai[) av rLs elv Kal ras oLKIaELS Kao Tr-v a'XXqv ovarLav 7Toav'rqv av'rosL 7raparCKevaa-ao-Oat, ji'ts Tre
TOViS fv'XaKa s'S atpla'Tovs Elvat  av f o  avroVS, KaKOVpyELV TE tLQ
Eurapo i repi TOVS aXhovs 7rokras'.
(b.) When, however, this Future is quoted indirectly after a past
tense, or depends upon a clause expressing a past purpose (which
is equivalent to standing in indirect discourse, ~ 26, N. 1), it is
sometimes changed to the Future Optative, like any other Future
Indicative. E. g.'EKo7retL oln7-   eToroTo arTO orTLSs C(VTra TE yrporpof070-roi Kal
Te)evTriaavra 0 fa  avTro. ISAE. de. Menecl. Her. ~ 10. AlpE0Tevre
rf'  X  e vvyypd'aac VdFioVS, Ka  o'rLVa oX         t  TrrS ro X   o  v   ro, having
been chosen with the condition that they should compile the laws by which
they were to govern. XEN. Hell. II, 3, 11. (This is a sort of indirect
quotation of the sentence which appears in its direct form in Hell.
11, 3, 2, the example under ~ 65, 1.)
NOTE 2. In Homer, the Future Indicative is sometimes used
in this sense; as in Od. XIV, 333, E'rapreas, ob 8 ptv vr/ iz+ova-v.   Sometimes the Optative with Ke, as an apodosis, takes
the place of the Future; as in Od. IV, 167, aIXot ol KEV ddXhKOIey. The more common Epic construction is, however, the
Subjunctive (generally with ice joined to the relative) after
primary tenses, and the Optative (Present or Aorist, never
Future), without Ki, after secondary tenses.  E. g.'EXKOS h tiTi7P E7rta'Lera-T, i  T7erocfffE(L
4apaX', ad KEV Tra - 1 Na-l Ut  Xatva ov dUvacOv. 11. IV, 191.




~ 65, l.j RELATIVE CLAUSES EXPRESSING A PURI OSE. 139'AXX' a-yeTr, KXr)rovs orpVzo'Lev, o KC raXio-ra
"EX 0o o' ~S KXaIT7V IIrIX7idahco'AXXrov-. 11. IX, 165.'EKaore, Kat rTq7)v a7rorTLvEfiv 7jv Trv EOiKEV,
"H Te Kal E'Oao/eVoto(rt /er' adavarorTt 7reX r7 r a.. 1.1, 459.
"AyyeXov 7)Kav, os a yy eLIXEe yvvatLK. Od. XV, 458.
IIaH7rYvev 8' dvta 7rv pyov'AXaLIov, E' tv'L3olro'Hyeudvwov, o' rtys oi dpj1v eTapoLrLv dfatv'vat. n. XII, 332.
REMARK. It will be noticed that the earlier Greek here agrees
with the Latin (in using the Subjunctive and Optative), while the
Attic Greek differs from the Latin by using the more vivid Future
Indicative.
NOTE 3. (a.) The Attic Greek allows the Subjunctive in such
phrases as EXetL' rT cetr', he has something to say; where the irregularity seems to be caused by the analogy of the common expression
OVK'XEL O RL (or Tr) cI7r, equivalent to OVK  orev  TI e'ltr, he knows
not what he shall say, which contains an indirect question (~ 71).
E. g.
ToLorTov'eos 7rapEoraav, aOre... fKarepovs'EXClv f' oEls  X o T -
7 o    L fo' tv, that both may have things in which they may glory. Isoc.
Pan. p. 49 C. ~ 44. (Here there is no indirect question, for the
meaning is not that they may know in what they are to glory. See
note added to Felton's Isocrates, p. 135.)  Ovev E'  alOTe(L avrt,
Eav 1Uoov EX1 E71 otr L8X ta E  r Ta, if only he shall have some one to talk
with. PLAT. Symp. 194 D. Tos E\XXOVLrv f$ELV O I  EL i el  pCO pwov.
XEN. Oecon. VII, 20. (Compare daropeis e  TI X;ey 7  and evropels
o rl k iys in the same sentence, PLAT. Ion. 535 B.)
(b.) The Present or Aorist Optative very rarely occurs in Attic
Greek after a past tense, but more frequently after another Optative. E. g.'Avopa oviE' Zvrovrov (O6p)v)! oX oTrls  p K' e c t v  oVs' OaTcrr
vo(rov Ka1fvovt  X X av\ 3oLro, i. e. when I saw no one there to assist
me, &C. SOPH. Phil. 281. rovipov 86 Tro0lrTV av ovX eVpOLS e'rt qrTOv
av, oorTIS pqJta yevvaiov X dKo, i. e. a poet to speak a noble word.
ARIST. Ran. 96.   (Yet in vs. 98 we have the regular Go-rTI q0E~y$eTat, depending on the same OVK aYv EUpoIS.)  So in PLAT. Rep. Ill,
398 B, os  tIU/OLTro Kai Xeyot, depending on XpWAEeVa av. TF lpMeTepa  oXEl OvEv av EvleiELaiTo TOOVTOV OUbf TrOt(ELEV, v  oU TrEIO6evripa vrdket ov'Pv a'v lvae[~atro ro ov o;8~ lro~'ee, xq' o- 7reto'OdvTre rTVWS'EXXivWov EKElv  p oeo Oe, i. e. nothing so great, that you
would be persuaded by it to sacrifice any of the Greeks to him. DEM.
Phil. II, 67, 20.
NOTE 4.'fl as a relative, in the sense of by which (with an
antecedent like anything understood), is sometimes followed by an
Optative with av in apodosis, expressing a purpose or object. E. g.'AQs Iv v ei roi e &8Kalovs oXyovs KCal EyovTroS lAXov O'vvel r7re
asewvov C&LXTrTOV rapeCLPE(TKEVaC(TOe WS 8 KOXva ralt  av eK'eivov trpar




140        RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.           [~ 65, 1.
Trtv TavTa C' ( Pv ErTL vyv, ravTrcX&   apyO s elere, i. e. as to means by
which you could make just speeches, &c., you are better prepared than
Philip; but as to anything by which you could prevent him from doing
what he is now about, you are wholly inactive. DEM. Phil. II, 66, 15.
So at the end of the same oration, os b' a v ieraca0e  Ia tdXLrr'
dKpfls) i, Ir yevoLro, i. e. may nothing come upon us by which the truth
of what I say would be thoroughly tested.
NOTE 5. The relative with any tense of the Indicative, o0
even with the Optative and av, can be used to denote a result,
where 6a-re might have been expected.       (~ 65, 3).   This
occurs chiefly after negatives, or interrogatives implying a
negative. E. g.
Tis o0rcor Evq6?rqs e'Trlv vtY.ov, OTLt a y yvoE TOrv KKeiP v 7rX\eov
&8epo rlovra, av dfeXaropev; i. e. who of you is so simple as not to
know, &c.? DEM. 01. I, 13, 16. (Here care adyvofev might have
been used.)  TIs oTrco 7roppO Trcv 7rOXLrLKKv iYv rpay/arcov, oaro l OLK
eyyvv  vaylc a cr  yve'OoaL TcWV avfLqf)opcov; Isoc. Pan. p. 64 B.
~ 113. Tis oVrTO  paOvlos ErTtV, o0(ris ov 0IeraoCXEv  o v X r cr e r a
TavrqT? T7rS crrparelas; Ib. p. 79 D. ~ 185. OvIis av yevoTro ovrwc
adapaidvrvos, os i v  Le ive v e v  7rj LKaLorvYl, no one would ever become so adamantine that he would remain firm in justice. PLAT. Rep.
II, 360 B.
2.'E)', or EP' T)e, on condition that, which is commonly
followed by the Infinitive (~ 99), sometimes takes the Future
Indicative. E. g.'Erl TOVTOr   e vLrela'TaIFaL rT7s apx7S, X   ) E wre vW' ovevs vi'cov
i p o/ a, 1 withdraw upon this condition, that I shall be ruled, &c.
HDT. III, 83. Toivroto-'t' 03v rla'vvos Etov Karrjyaye, EIr' orT Ol daroyovot avroV lpoqpdvvrat rov OEcvo e' ( ovr at. HDT. VII, 153. Kai rI)V
BoLwriav etXtrov'AOvaioit araava, orovsas oirotqcalevot Ep (o Trovs
iHvopas KO to vr a t. THUC. I, 113.  wvvI3qjaav e  (OTr e E' t a CLa;K IleXorTOvvo'-ov Vi7rdO-7rovao8 Kal p/r?6rOTe ~ 7r E TL fia o v T a L avrTs. Id.
I, 103.
It will be noticed here (as in Note 1) that the Future Indicative
generally remains unchanged even after a secondary tense.
3. "'2ffTe (sometimes c,), so that, so as, is usually
followed by the Infinitive.     (See ~ 98.)    But when the
action of the verb expressing the result after         aTre is
viewed chiefly as an independent fact, and not merely
as a result, the Indicative can be used.
The Infinitive is sometimes used even here, when the Indic



~ 65, 4.]      CAUSAL RELATIVE SENTENCES.                 141
ative would seem   more natural; and it often makes quite as
little difference which of the two is used, as it does in English
whether we say some are so strange as not to be ashamed (ovrcot
aTroTO co-re OVK aioXVV-vvffoal DEM. F. L. 439, 29), or some are so
strange that they are not ashamed (Saore OVK a(iX'vovuraL).  Here,
although both expressions have the same general meaning, the
former expresses the result merely as a result, while the latter
expresses it also (and more distinctly) as an independent fact.
E.g.
Ov7rws dayvwfiods eXere, waore X\rlETE avra Xpr)orra yevrja'ea'at,
K.T.X. are you so senseless that you expect, &c. DEM. 01. II, 25, 19.
(Here c(aore EX7)TrYv, so senseless as to expect, would merely make
the fact of their expecting less prominent.)  Ovgrcos IVv AoKKl 7ravrbr
adsa elvat, ca-re rravres Tr KarTaXLrelv avra LdXtLoTa ( evyo uI, SO
that we all especially avoid, &c. XEN. Mem. II, 2, 3. O0X?KE'V * aof
ol "EXXqv  e pp6vT Co v. Id. An. II, 3, 25. Eis roar' aTrXqrTriasa
j10ov, OOT' OVIK fEpKea(ev aV7oLs'XELP ThV KaLT yrpv apXqv, dXAu
KaL TqV KaTa OaXarurav bvaptv OVTw's eFevIrAo-av Xa[eLv, ogre Tovs
(rv4LaJXtovs rTOVS 7Terepovs aC l'Toa(raav. Isoc. Panath. p. 254 A.
~ 103. So after cs, ~ 98, 2, N. 1: OVT6o 8 Tr KXElvq Eye'vero, US Ka&
rdvareg ofl EXXveE'POSOrTOS TrovWfJvoa ei4 EaOov, i. e. so that all the
Greeks came to know well the name of Rhodopis. HDT. II, 135.
NOTE. As o'Tre in this construction has no effect whatever upon
the mood of the verb, it may be followed by any construction that
would be allowed in an independent sentence. (See ~ 59, N. 1.)
It may thus take an Optative or Indicative in apodosis with alv, or
even an Imperative. E. g.
"faoT' OVK b aavrv yvo pic'aOpr' tv eo'cl&ov. EUR. Or. 379.
IIac'ov /Lev avreapouV, oT Cr', l 4povwv erpaoa-ov, oi-v' v $2)0' C   y L -
y7VOJpr? KaKos. SOPH. O. C. 271. evrbo-s 3''OpEro-Ts' er ET lij Xtlap
(rryeV. Id. El. 1172. So with ov ju and the Subjunctive (89, 1);
orVTCOs 6rTLre0vir1Ka caioucra, r-CTe...  o U  a-ov d 7r oX e & ) 5. PLAT
Phaedr. 227 D.
4. The relative has sometimes a causal signification, being
equivalent to OTr, because, and a personal pronoun or demonstrative word.   The verb is in the Indicative, as in ordinary
causal sentences (~ 81, 1). E. g.
Oavlpaorhov rotcei, o? fiv ovaev 8 o8 I g, you do a strange thing in
giving us nothing (like ort (T- ovBev aloVE). XEN. Mem. II, 7, 13.
Aotag daiaOs ELVaL, S... K X e ve, having seemed to be unlearned,
because he commanded, &c. HDT. I, 33. Tqrv tirepa EtaaKadpLov, olov
TEKVW Y EKvpra'e (like orL roiwO). Id. I, 31. EavatloLv 6dalvero, cos
da6oe KCal yevvalos e rX er a, i. e. because he died so fearlessly and
nobly (cov being equivalent to ort ov"rw). PLAT. Phaed. 58 E.




142        RELATIVE AND TEMPORA_ SENTENCES.           [~ 65, L
TaXanrrcpo et, r /xLnTe Ocot 7rarp4cot Eai ypin' Iepd, i. e. since you
have no ancestral Gods, &c. PLAT. Euthyd. 302 B. (See Remark.)
IIOE hav op0ws 4EoV Karayiyvcbo'Koire, o To taparapav t7rpos rovrovl frtEo
orvLSdXaLtov oTrL; i. e. since I have no contract at all, &c. DEM.
Apat. 903, 22. So ARIST. Ran. 1459.
REMARK. The ordinary negative particle of a causal relative
sentence is ov, as in the first example above. (See ~ 81.) But if a
conditional force is combined with the causal, /L can be used. Thus
in the last examples above, in which U7 is used, w tu) Oeol elrlv
(besides its causal force) implies if, as it appears, you are without
ancestral Gods; and o p.rtlev eFrTv, if, as it appears, I have no contract. The same combination of a causal and a conditional force is
seen in the Latin siquidem.
Temporal Particles signifying Until and Before
that.
A. "'Ec, vEore,, AXPL, MEXPL, EloO'KE,'"Opa, Until.
~ 66.    1. CWheIn'      u i-e,'Xp, peIpt, and 6opa,' 6G.  1. When       eoa, fro're ,   peXpL,
until, refer to a definite point of past time, at which the
action  of the verb actually took place, they take the
Indicative. E. g.
NrXov 7raXLv,'co E7rf X)0ov els frorapTa v, I swam on again, until I
came to a river. Od. VII, 280. IllveL, E"Co s' ep i r1 v' avrov daupia3ra
dpX\o oivov. EUR. Ale. 758. Zvvelpov da7rOVreE, (o-re E7rL rals rKr1vai
eyyvovro. XEN. Cyr. VII, 5, 6. (So An. III, 4, 49.)   Kal ravra
ETroloVv aEXpL oTKdros EE;  r o. Id. An. IV, 2, 4. (So III, 4, 8.)
*Qs fev Opt~:Kas aivSpas eTrwrxero TvAeos vsos, o'Spa &vdleK' E7r E ve v.
II. X, 488.'Hpx' t'ev, O'p' ai L)KOV7o KaTa Orparov, y tLv, advwyet.
1. XIII, 329. "Htcv, Odppa /ieya a7reos ZIKero. Od. V, 57.
NOTE 1.'AXpt oV and uEXpt ov are used in the same sense as
axpt and pXpt. E. g.
Tyv et ravra 7rpa4dvmrov aXp  ov oie 6 Xoyor Eypa)eTro Ttaloovos
Trpeo3vraTro TO  v rw  dSaXX\<v TrJV adpxv EtXE. XEN. Hell. VI, 4, 37.
Toov "E'XXr1a a t7reXVraro 8ovXElas, &oCr' eXev0Opovs ELva  t e X p o0
7rdAtv avrT4 avro V KareovXcraOavTo. PLAT. Menex. 245 A.
NOTE 2. Herodotus uses s o' or es ov, until, like E'ov, with the
Indicative. E. g.'A7re8ftKvvo-av 7raiha Traarpos EKaCrTov EOTra, es o adre'e&av y  rdaags
avTrs. HDT. II, 143.,'EE ov AIX1 dvevpe. I, 67.
2. When these particles refer to the future, they are




~ 66, 3.] EEos, ETC. WITH INDIC., SUBJ., AND OPTATIVE. 143
joined with av or Ice and take the Subjunctive, if the
leading verb is primary. (See ~ 61, 3.) But if such
clauses depend upon an Optative in protasis or apodosis,
or in a wish, they usually take the Optative (without
av) by assimilation. (See ~ 61, 4.) E. g.
MaX'aoplal avO& pe;vov, elow KI TA'OS ro 7OXEoMo KL X eI, until I shall
come to an end of the war. ll. III, 291. "Eos 8' av orv 7rpov rov 7rapoT70  K da.OrS,'X' AXrnla. SoPH. 0. T. 834.'E7dorXE, Ear' ay Kal
r Xocrh lr p o rz a 0 nsO, wait until you shall learn, &c. AESCH. Prom.
697. Me;Xp 68 a y eyOW) )Ko aOl or ov8al peLvovYTV. XEN. An. II, 3,
24.'AXXa ILEY ofpa KE TOL pLEXiLr8a OLVO e v 1 K Co, but wait, until 1
shall bring, &c. 11. VI, 258. So o'p' av -rlvoawlv, 11. I, 509.
Kai ro.LEtv v'EaXelfotLev, TO 8e 7adXLv'YypdaotLe, seol o Ti & LadX\ra
pdvOparsla riOq OEor Bto   r oro L  a v, until they should make, &c.
PLAT. Rep. VI, 501 C. El 6E ravv ao7rov8adlo& ayeLV, eCrotL' avy or
rapa TaiS yvvatLlv eCortv, Es 7TraparelvatzL& TOVTov, i. e. I would
tell him this, until I put him to torture. XEN. Cyr. I, 3, 11.
NOTE 1. It will be seen by the examples, that the clause after
Eco and other particles signifying until sometimes implies a future
purpose or object, the attainment of which is desired. When such a
sentence, implying a purpose or object which would have been
originally expressed by a Subjunctive, depends upon a past tense,
it generally takes the Optative (~ 31, 1); but the Subjunctive also
may be used, in order to retain the mood in which the purpose
would have been originally conceived (as in final clauses, ~ 44, 2).
For the general principle, see ~ 77. E. g.
n7rovhsa e7TroLjoravro, E a o  a y y e 0E  e  7I? Ta XeX0evra etl AaKeau-,-ova, they made a truce, (to continue) until what had been said should
be announced at Sparta. XEN. Hell. III, 2, 20. (Here rcs av a7rayyeX0j might have been used; as in THUc. I, 90, E'KEevEV (rovs
pioC-'f3ets) E-rtoXelv,'o an To TeLXOS LKari'O a'pcoa-i.)  See ~ 77, 1, d.
NOTE 2. Homer uses els o' ce (or eroo'Ke), until, with the Subjunctive, as Herodotus uses es o' with the Indicative (~ 66, 1, N. 2);
as pJltvere, els o0 KEV a'crv /ieya aIpi/ilo e'XCLev, II. II. 332. Eis o
Ke may take the Optative, retaining Ke; as in II. XV, 70.
NOTE 3. "Av is sometimes omitted after Cos', &c. (including 7rpiv,
~ 67, 1) when they take the Subjunctive, as in common protasis
and in relative sentences (~ 50, 1, N. 8; ~ 63, 1); after expiL and
rrptv this occurs even in Attic prose. Thus ga'oC eyW MoXuo, SOPHT.
Aj. 1183; xept rpL7ovs yEVllrat, THUC I, 137: see THUc. IV, 16;
AEscHIN. Cor. ~ 60.
3. When the clause introduced by'e?, &c., until,
refers to a result which was not attained ii past time in
consequence of the non-fulfilment of a condition, it takes
a secondary tense of the Indicative. (See ~ 63, 2.) E. g.




144       RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.          [~ 66, 3.'He;or Aiv TroVrcp ert AtEX\ydofI)v, EwS avwr3 rTq o'AV fALovoS a7re8coK a piacrv dvrT rTs ro5 ZOovu, I should gladly have continued to talk
with him, until I had given him, &c. PLAT. Gorg. 506 B. OVK av
EfravoS)v, o r D e a 7r ertLp dO v or TJ  ocflas TavrrTfIo. Id. Crat. 396 C'E7TorXov av, EoCs OL 7TrXeiorot TojV elOordoTWV yvCJV ar e 7  v a v r a o,....,ravxlav av ryov, i. e. I should have waited until most of the regular speakers had declared their opinion, &c. DEM. Phil. I, ~ 1. (For
a'v here, see ~ 42, 3.)
The leading verb must be an Indicative implying the non-fulfilment of a condition.
4. When the clause introduced by eo, &c., until, depends upon a verb denoting a customary action or a
general truth, and refers indefinitely to any one of a
series of occasions, it takes av and the Subjunctive after
primary tenses, and the simple Optative after secondary
tenses. (See ~ 62.) E. g.
A       a' yv o'vvrnaKra 7, advdyKr f Taura ael irpayFLaTa irapExetv, Ewos a
xcipav Xad/iy, they must always make trouble, until they are put in
order. XEN. Cyr. IV, 5, 37.'07rTOre pa eqr apo-rov, advteev avTrovs cfre Ef  dyo   T t, jL)!L 3OVX\ILptEv. lb. VIII, 1, 44. lieptEIeVOlEy oVV eKa6oTOTE, ec'a advoLXOELi TO 8eo'A)ooTrptov, we waited
every day, until the prison was opened. PLAT. Phaed. 59 D. (This
may mean until the prison should be opened; ~ 66, 2, N 1.)
NOTE. "Av is sometimes omitted after cos, &c. and'rplv, when
they take the Subjunctive in this sense, as well as in the other construction (~ 66, 2, N. 3); as ev To (povelv yap piv'riTOS fio0,
esO TO xaLpelv Kcal Tr XvreFiorat uadOys, SoPn. Aj. 555. So &o(pa TeXero-o, 11. I, 82; and E' ou adrrolvooat, HDT. III, 31.
REMARK. When e'or and ofqpa mean so long as, they are relatives, and are included under ~~ 58-64. "Oqpa in all its senses is
confined to Epic and Lyric poetry. (See ~ 43, N. 1.)
B. nplv, Until, Before that.
~ 67.   Iplv, before, before that, until, besides taking the
Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative, on the same principles
with 6os, &c. (~ 66), may also take the Infinitive (~ 106).
The question of choice between the Infinitive and the finite
moods generally depends on the nature of the leading clause.
Ipiv regularly takes the Subjunctive and Optative (when
they are allowed) only if the leading clause is negative or




~ 67, 2.]       CONSTRUCTIONS AFTER Ilplv.                145
interrogative with a negative implied; very seldom if that is
affirmative.  It takes the Indicative after both negative and
affirmative clauses, but chiefly after negatives.
In Homer the Infinitive is the mood regularly used with
7rpiv, after both affirmative and negative clauses; in Attic
Greek it is regularly used after affirmatives, and seldom after
negatives.
1. The Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative after
rplv follow   the rules already given for eos, &c. (~ 66).
E.g.
(Indic. ~ 66, 1.)  OVK?v JaX;eprll  ovev, CaXXa c(apciaKuv Xpel.
KarcTrEnXXOvrTO, trpLv y fyWE c(fcrTL E ELea KpaicELts 71TrLOV aKEOACLaTwl),
until I showed them, &c. AESCH. Prom. 481. IIaXLv rTOUT re-lvw1
ovK E7ravrKE, 7rpLY....  X o L O p1e LdX) ev &LK8. PLAT. Phaedr.
266 A. ObK:c i'tocrav vecrEpodv TL TroEitv Es abrVT, 7rplv ye 8q avrols
adv)p'ApyiX~os ylvrvjs yly v E  a, until he becomes, &c. (Histor.
Pres.) THuc. I, 132. IoXXa e7raOFv, 7rplv yE ol Xpvoa'7rvKa Koupa
xaX~wv IIaXXas jv YyK  v. PIND. 01. XIII, 92.'AvwX6Xvo e Trpiv
6    pa. EUR. Med. 1173.
(Subj. and Opt. ~ 66, 2.) o0 Kd o-e Ey X)yo) (eVbatiova), 7rp'
(iv TrXEVTrrjaavra Ka\X& rTOV alova 7rVrcopa. HoT. I, 32.  O.8e
Xretl, rpLv Iv o7 KOpe C r KEap,.... E X q TLS apXyi. AESCII. Prom.
165. OV XP71,u- EvOEvSe ainTE6elX, 7rpiv Av b8i 8iKrv. XEN. AN. V,
7, 5.'AX  oviO r''-yCoy av, wrpiv'La  o L L Op0ov'rOS, P.eFpoFLevov av
KaTrapalrv SH. SOPH..T. 505. So THEOGN. 126, irpiv 7rmlpql)sE.
So 7rpiv ieEXKcoeltV, depending on a protasis (Ed c  dvqLr)), PLAT.
Rep. VII, 515 E.'OXoto LIrwo, 7rpLv tLaOoLt' fl Kal rci rdav yvXH1v
/LETOLaELt. SOPH. Phil. 961. (lpifv after Opt. in wish.)'A7rrydopev
q?&Eva  a'dXXELv, 7rp'v Kipos EIr X r 0- e LI Oqp)pv, until Cyrus should
be satisfied. XEN. Cyr. I, 4, 14. (~ 66, 2, N. 1.)
(Indic. ~ 66, 3.)'EXpiv o0V rovS a'XXovs /L7 7rpodrpov 7repl rWV
PoLXoyov/LEVWV Urvtj3ovXefvEL, 7rep' 7Tl T'V dLJ(rfirL3T0ovfiEVWv PfLaI
e a8 a   av, they ought not to have given advice, ec., until they had
instructed us, &c. Isoc. Paneg. p. 44 C. ~ 19.
(Subj. and Opt. ~ 66, 4.)'Opo-t, TrovS 7rpejo-3vrCpoov oV 7rp0ocOe
arlovras yaarpbos hvKa, 7rplv av da t ()r v ol apXovTes. XEN. Cyr. 1,
2, 8. Ou yap 7rporepov Kar7yopos trapa rois aKOovovav ITxuEL, 7rpLv av
6 OPeEycov a dvvaTrja'r ras rpoetprl7evas alrLas AvroXoraoVrat. AESCHILN. F. L. ~ 2. OvSaou6ev aiteaav, rpLv r a p aOE avTroL apLrrov, before they had placed before them. XEN. An. IV, 5, 30.
(Subj. without alv. ~ 66, 2, N. 3.) Mi) -re'lac, 7rplv ad)fS. Sorn.
Phil. 917. So Od. X, 175; 11DT. I, 136; PLAT. Phaed. 62 C.
2. For 7rplv with the Infinitive, see ~ 106.
7                                  J




146        RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.            L~ 67.
NOTE 1. In Homer, irplv is not found with the Indicative, irplv
y' or taking its place; a few cases occur of the Subjunctive (with
out av) and the Optative; but the most common Homeric construce
tion, in sentences of all kinds, is that with the Infinitive (~ 106).
E.g.'H/Fe' arTvCo/eval, cavOl8es b8 EXOV ZE apapvlat, 7rpLV y orT 8L Me cros
vios la7o J Leydpoo1 KaXelraev, i. e. before the time when, &c. Od. XXIII,
43. So I1. IX, 588; Xl, 437. *'Q i\XoL, ov yap. e) KaTavoaJfLE' aXvvUEvoI 7rFp ELs'A/iao bO1ovs, 7rpLv pLpopL.ov l qap eite'X0. Od. X, 175.
OtK E0Ef~V pEVyELV TlrpLi W rt p 7a Ca r AXAIXLos. II. XXI, 580. Ipiv
y oar' /v with the Subjunctive is found in Od. II, 374, and IV, 477.
NOTE 2. Hptv with the Infinitive after negative sentences is most
common in Homer (Note 1), rare in the Attic poets, and again more
frequent in Attic prose. (See Kriiger, Vol. II, p. 258.)  For examples see ~ 106.
Examples of the Subjunctive or Optative with rrp/v after affirmative sentences are very rare. One occurs in Isoc. Paneg. p. 44 A,
~ 16; orLs ouv oferal 7TovS  \ XXovs KoWLVf r 7r pdaeLv yaObv, piv av
TOVS irpoeor0TraE avrTw  tLaX X a, Xiav librX&S EXEL.
NOTE 3. IIpv L', 7porepov' (priusquam), and irpo'a8v, may be
used in the same constructions as 7rplv. HIplv I is especially common
in Herodotus. E. g.
Ov yap   q TpoeTporv da7aveoarr, 7rplv' crE~ae VI7roeLplovE Eolro1UaTo. HDT. VI, 45. So THUC. VI, 61.'A&KEeLt avaC7rtELoevos
TrpV 71 ar'peKEOS E K/id 0. HDT. VII, 10. E'xero iq1efulav o ovvrvXLTrv TOLavTr)V yevefrOal i,  f Jiv ravC'(T   Karacarpe'Taa'OaL Ti'v EvpUbryqv,
7rp Tepov i      TEini T'p 7 a''oiol' E0 KElVq7S yevrfITat. Id. VUI, 54.
Ilporepov 7' with Indic., PLAT. Phaedr. 232 E. IIpdo-Ov 7 o-v
fO)alvov, TOVTr' KrTpv0x/. SOPH. O. T. 736.'A7rEKpLvaro grT rpoE6Oe v   aL droOdvoltv  a      a p o   a  7rapa8o1r)cav., that they would die
before they would give up their arms. XEN. An. II, 1, 10. (See
~ 66, 2.)
For examples of the Infinitive after all these expressions, see
~ 106. Even vo repov i' is found with the Infinitive.
NOTE 4. Hplv or rpiv 77' is very often preceded by TrporEpov,
7rpoaOcv, napos, or-another 7rplv (used as an adverb), in the leading
clause. E.g.
Ov 7rporcepov rpos tI as ro TOV 7r6\epov E eE)ETvav, 7Tp aLv evo/llTav,
K..X. XEN. An. III, 1, 16.  Ob Trovvv da7roKpLvovlaL r p o Tpo v,
7rpiv av IrvuOcpai. PLAT. Euthyd. 295 C. Kal oV Trp6crOev Qofftrav,
rp Iv 0V  r po0s Tos 7reo0ls TrWv Ao'rovplov Eyevovro. XEN. Cyr. I, 4, 23.
For examples with the Infinitive, see ~ 106.
NOTE 5. When 7rplv appears to be followed by a primary tense
of the Indicative, it is an adverb qualifying the verb. E. g.
Tiv 8' y o ov Xvo'is' i rpi v,v Kal i ypas E'tr eL V, i. e. sooner
shall old aye come upon her. I. 1, 29.




~ 68, 3.]        INDIRECT DISCOURSE.              147
SECTION IV.
INDIRECT DISCOURSE, INCLUDING INDIRECT QUOTATIONS
AND QUESTIONS.
~ 68.   1. The words or thoughts of any person may
be quoted either directly or indirectly.
A direct quotation is one which gives the exact words
of the original speaker or writer.
An indirect quotation is one in which the words of
the original speaker conform to the construction of
the sentence in which they are quoted. Thus the expression Taira /3ovXoltat may be quoted either directly,
as XEkyeb z' "T Ta'a 3ovXouaL, or indirectly, as XEyeL rt
OT Tavra I3ovXeTrat or Xeyeb TV T aVTa f3ovXeaOat, some
one says that he wishesfor these.
2. Indirect quotations may be introduced by OTs or
iO <negatively'rt or, wM o? ) or by the Infinitive, as in
the example given above; sometimes also by the Participle (~ 73, 2).
3. Indirect questions follow the same rules as indirect
quotations, in regard to their moods and tenses.  (For
examples see ~ 70.)
NOTE. The term indirect discourse must be understood to
apply to all clauses which express indirectly the words or
thoughts of any person (those of the speaker himself as well
as those of another), after verbs, which imply thought or the
expression of thought (verba sentiendi et declarandi), and even
after such expressions as 8jXdv eaov, craaes Ea-rtv, &c.
The term may be further applied to any single dependent
clause in any sentence, which indirectly expresses the thought
of any other person than the speaker (or past thoughts of the
speaker himself), even when the preceding clauses are not in
indirect discourse. (See ~ 77.)




148            INDIRECT DISCOURSE.         [~ 69, 1.
General Principles of Indirect Discourse.
REMARK. The following are the general principles of indirect discourse, the application of which to particular cases is
shown in ~~ 70 - 77.
~ 69. 1. In indirect quotations after o'rt or C)? and
in indirect questions, after primary tenses, each verb
retains both the mood and the tense of the direct discourse, no change being made except (when necessary)
in the person of the verb.
After secondary tenses, each primary tense of the
Indicative and each Subjunctive of the direct discourse
may be either changed to the same tense of the Optative or retained in its original mood and tense. The
Imperfect and Pluperfect, having no terises in the Optative, are regularly retained in the Indicative. (See,
however, ~ 70, Note 1, 6.)  The Aorist Indicative remains unchanged when it belongs to a dependent clause
of the direct discourse (~ 74, 2); but it may be changed
to the Optative, like the primary tenses, when it be-.longs to the leading clause (~ 70, 2). The Indicative
with av belongs under ~ 69, 2.
2. All secondary tenses of the Indicative implying
non-fulfilment of a condition (~ 49, 2), and all Optatives (with or without ai), are retained without change
in either mood or tense, after both primary and secondary tenses.
3. When, however, the verb on which the quotation
depends is followed by the Infinitive or Participle, the
leading verb of the quotation is changed to the corresponding tense of the Infinitive or Participle, after both
primary and secondary tenses (av being retained when
there is one), and the dependent verbs follow the pre.
ceding rules. (See ~ 73.)




~ 70, 1.]         SIMPLE SENTENCES.              149
4. The adverb av is never joined with a verb in indirect discourse, unless it stood also in the direct form:
on the other hand, av is never omitted with a verb in
indirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form.
When Av is joined to a relative word or particle before
a Subjunctive in the direct discourse, it is regularly
dropped when the Subjunctive is changed       to the
Optative in indirect discourse. (See, however, ~ 74, 1,
N. 2.)
5. The indirect discourse regularly retains the same
negative particle which would be used in the direct
form.   But the Infinitive and Participle occasionally
take p  in indirect quotation, where ov would be used
in direct discourse. See examples under ~ 73.
Simple Sentences in Indirect Quotations after oTL or Ot
and in Indirect Questions.
~ 70. When the direct discourse is a simple sentence,
the verb of which stands in any tense of the Indicative
(without av), the principle of ~ 69, 1, gives the following rules for indirect quotations after oST or cot and
for indirect questions:1. After primary tenses the verb stands in the Indicative, in the tense used in the direct discourse.
E. g.
Aeye o ry p a, hie says that he is writing; XeZye oTrn'ypaqeJv,
he says that he was writing; AyeLt' yo yeypa a e v, he says that he has
written; Ayel OTL iyeyp dqet, he says that he had written; Xcye&
oT t y p a l fe v, he says that he wrote; XeyeL ogr y p a j e t, he says that
he shall write.
Adyet yap 6c ouev E ar v adCKorepov )njLtS. AESCHIN. Timarch.
125. Ovyhp av TOVTO' e'Wrol7, SO E'XaOe. Id. F. L. ~ 151 (160).
Tu 8 OTC7E, oTL r TkrcroV a1aepEt /rj/Lr) Kai orvKo/avTla. Ilb. ~ 145
(153).'AXX' Evvoe'LV XPq r TOVTO pE, yvvaLX OT f qVIl V. SOPH.
Ant. 61. Kal ra0' VO  awi dh7  XIeo, Kal or ove TsoE rj 0  q 0os (s




150                 INDIRECT DISCOURSE.               [~ 70, 1
&raot 7rXAelovs  o    vrO VT ToWlLv (tcrafLEvcov, 1idprvpas vfuv 7ra^we
pal, I will bring witnesses to show that, &c. DEM. Eubul. 1303, 2.'Epowra rl /oXOovru, he asks what they want; pcora rl T7ro t ou 
a v, he asks what they will do.'Eprvres   Xyoarai I cr t v, asking
whether they are pirates. THUc. I, 5. Ev/3oLis by)' e  a aorev,
OViK EXo XEfyev. SOPH. Trach. 401. El tv p/ r o v t  e t sjL Kal Q v i o a
y aci cr OKOTrCL. Id. Ant. 41. So EUR. Ale. 784.
REMARK. It is to be noticed that indirect questions after primary
tenses take the Indicative in Greek, and not the Subjunctive as in
Latin. Thus, nescio quis sit, I know not who he is, in Greek is simply
dyvo rTs L erT L v. This does not apply to indirect questions which
would require the Subjunctive in the direct form (~ 71).
2. After secondary tenses the verb         may be either
changed to the Optative or retained in the Indicative.
The Optative is the more common form. In both
Indicative and Optative, the tense used in the direct
discourse must be retained. E. g..EXeSev oTL ypa o   (or or iypa4 Et), he said that he was writing;
i. e. he said ypdcop. "EXeEVP ort yeypaS a  cL )L (or 6rT y   pa9) vr), he said that he had written; i. e. he said yEypa/a.'EXterv gor
yp di L (or OT{L yp ac e), he said that he should write; i. e. he said
yppa4. "EXeev orTL yp a+ EL Iev (or ort'eypa+ev), he said that he had
written; i. e. he said e`ypa4a.
(Optative.)'Evi-rXore qfpovpjiarosr rTO'ApKa'as, Xlycov os fiovoIEs tue avTos 7raTrps Ii EXko0rovvrJloos 6', IrXELorrov 8e Tr V'EXXi]VIKW
OpXoov TO'ApKa8tLKV E L), r   KU a;CLTara eyKpare-rara E'X o L. XEN. Hell.
Yil, 1, 23. (He said pdvoLt peVV Vi V..... CTo,  TXErairov e...
e0or, Kai LaCo'ara.... XEL: these Indicatives might have been used
in the place of {'7/, Elq, and e'XoL.)  "EXeye 8d 6 IIeXo7rias orgT'ApyeZoL Kal'ApKades padry/  rrT q  vo  eiev viro AaKE atLtovmCv.
lb. VII, 1, 35.   (He said qjrrvrayTa, which might have been
retained.)  So HDT. I, 83.'Y7rETrWO  raTXXa OTr& avrTo   TIaKf
Rp dio, XTEro, having hinted that he would himself attend to the
affairs there. THuc. I, 90. (IHe said TaKEc  r p a Wo, and nrpdcie
might have been used for TrpdotL. Cf. aTroKpLVad1eoVi  OTI T T,L o V -
t v, from the same chapter, quoted below.) For the Future Optative in general, see ~ 26.'O 8 elrrev ort Eo0olvro. XEN. Cyr.
VII, 2, 19.   (He said i'ovTra.)  "EXehav s r T r 7TE C  e e aU/s)r 6'IvSv aaoltXeVr, KcXevCOV  Epoaorv el oTOV 6 O7rXE/1os'E?, tley said
that the king of the Indians had sent them, commanding them to ask
on what account there was war. Ib. II, 4, 7. (They said'ir e/, -, e   a-fis, and the question to be asked was,K rivoS oEr O v O6 IrXepos;) "EXFyov OTL oVTrToVroO o Tro E 6 7oraTao.s LafaToar   Ye VoLTo 7rfefT
el /,?) rOFe, they said that this river had never been (e'yevero) fordable
except then. Id. An. I, 4, 18. IepIKXj] IrpodFyOpeve rois'AOqvaioLs, ors




~ 70, 2.j        INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE.                  \151'ApXdiaf..oF p5 Ol EOS' El  07)os   OV Fro TL f ro L KECKO  ye TrS rOXew  ye -
v  TO7,,. wnounced that A. was his friend, but that he had not been
made his r'iend to the injury of the state. THuc. II, 13. (He said $;vos
jiOL t o'T, o.1 OFJeTOI..  ey eTro.) So HDT. I, 25.'Eyvoorav or&
KEVOS O (po(%E  E?r. XEN. An. II, 2, 21.  lpoiaovres Or E OOrO 0
7roCXephoS, ej3 ovXTro Trv IIXdaratav 7rpoKaraXa0fev. THUC. II. 2.'E7rwtpcol~i)Y avrc^ BELKYL'Yat, o9t o & o t ro /.ZEV ELYat o-o 0  LI I T
pcwfJsrv aurz oetKVvai8 ol oIOiV f              ELvc co+6y, Slr 8' oV. PLAT.
Apol. 21 C.
(Indicative.)'EXeyov,t'Xor   rI ovrlv ra KaL T v  ord'Xv  etv,
pot Xiapv, they said that they hoped, &c. Isoc. Phil. p. 87 A. ~ 23.
(They said EX\7rtlolpv, which might have been changed to eX~rLIotev.)
HHKe b' dyyeXX\ov Ttr (c TOrTE rpVTr(veLs [s'EXdreta Kar  X 7 rrTTa L
some one had come with the report that Elatea had been taken. DEM.
Cor. 284, 21. (Here the Perf. Opt. might have been used.)   AcLvovs Xoyovs EroXlua rTepL E/iov XEyELV, co0 Ey) To rpITay^' EL/It TOVTO
ae p a aKC S. Id. Mid. 548, 17. AiTrLadradfevos yap use a K a Xeyelt av
OKVfjcretE rTL, rTv raTepa os a7re Krova ey  rov eyJLavTov, K.r.X. Id.
Andr. 593, 14. 4avFepcs ELITr  Ort j Lev TrodXt aTfrOv rFT ELXITcraL
s.'8, he said that their city had already been fortified. THUC. I, 91.
A7roKptvwdaJev OT t Tre/I'OVouL- 7TrpeOJ3EL', evUvs aTrvXXa4av.. I I,
90. (Cf.   TL 7rpd o t, quoted above from    the same chapter.)
WHLe(TEav Ort Tovs a7revfyKOvorta olKEcrat 4 a t r;  o ~o  e v. DEM. Onet.
I, 870, 11. ('EgatrIcr'oIpev might have been used.)'Erro'X a X;yEtv
&S irep vv eX0povs %f' Cavrbv ~FIKv~e gal vuv ev Toas Po'arotS
Wt W1Ep V/L0)P EXOPOV Eo/) EavToy Et V    K  P       TOS   XaTt0~
ETa- t KLtv8UvoL'. Id. Andr. 611, 10.
(Indirect Questions.)'Hpwrrto-ev avrov rTi 7r o L0 LI (or rTI r o  Lt ),
he asked him what he was doing; i. e. he asked rr no i L s;'HpCjrlJ'Cr
aVTOV Trl 7reoirroL)KWs' e~r (or rL 7TeTFroLKevP), he asked him what he
had done; i. e. he asked ri Tr f T o i t K a K;'HpOrTr(r- aPvrov T   7r o 7 t o' o I
(or r7 7rot oeCL), he asked him what he should do; i. e. he asked rI
wno L  E1fft;'Hp&)To-EPr aVTOv  7 rTr o t-Lr fev (or rl ETro iLf  e v), he
asked him what he had done; i. e. he asked rI E-rol7r-as;'Hpero, el rTL epoov e'] (j rocorepov, he asked whether any one was
wiser than I. PLAT. Apol. 21 A. (The direct question was c'aOr
TLS ao'ofcTEpoS;) "0 T t 8w o Lt  ot ou O  BLEC(o'7VE, but he did not
indicate what he would do. XEN. An. II, 1, 23. (The direct question
was rT 7rotifo);)'Elretpwra, riva 8e1repov!ier' EKELVOP  o t, he
asked whom he had seen who came next to him. HDT. I, 31. (The
direct question was riva ei3es;)  Eltpero KdOev X ad S o T rTv raiSa, he
asked whence he had received the boy. Id. I, 116.'Hpcorov avrov el
va v7r XTe Vr E  e ev, I asked him whether he had set sail. DEM. Polycl.
1223, 20. (The direct question was ave'rXevo-as;)'Hropovv Ti 7rore X y et, I was uncertain what he meant. PLAT.
Apol. 21 B.   (Here Xeyot might have been used.)'E,3ovXevovO'
oVroT& r1 aLVrTOV K a ra X E I C  o v o- v, they were considering the question,
whom they should leave here. DEM. F. L. 378, 23.'EpwrTrvrov rtvwV
hta T a' r e ave v, 7rapayyeXXetLv KEXeuevY, K. r.X. XEN. Hell. II, 1, 4.
REMARK 1.      After secondary tenses the Indicative ar.i




152                INDIRECT DISCOURSE.              [~ 70, 2,
Optative are equally classic; the Optative being used when
the writer wishes to incorporate the quotation enti7ely into his
own sentence, and the Indicative, when he wishes to quote it
in the original words as far as the construction of his own
sentence allows. The Indicative here, like the Subjunctive in
final and object clauses after secondary tenses (~ 44, 2), is
merely a more vivid form of expression than the Optative.
We even find both moods in the same sentence, sometimes
when one verb is to be especially emphasized, and sometimes
when there is no apparent reason for the change. E. g.
Ovroo AXeyov or& Kipos pe re' v 77 KE'Aptalos 8E 7e revyJ Ws E
T& aeranOp) e t ll, Kal X y o, K. r.. XFEN. An. II, 1, 3. (Here
T70erVKEv contains the most important part of the message.)'EcK e
7TVTOV E7rvvO0vETO rI77 avrCv KaC oIrOcrrv o6oIv 8 t  a oG  a  av, K a l e
oicoiro 0  xcXpa. Id. Cyr. IV, 4, 4.'EroXza XEyelv, cs xpea 7e
7rap7rohXa e KT r r t K E V7rTp ftOV Kal wS 7roXa rw ev r v XdaOtFV. DIEM.
Aph. I, 828, 26. (See Rem. 2.) "Otoltot oa-av Oav^dQeiv Ot7roL 7rOT
rpefovra ol "EXXT7re Kal IL El v X EXOIEV. XEN. An. III, 5, 13.
REMARK 2. The Perfect and Future were less familiar forms
than the other tenses of the Optative; so that they were frequently
retained in the Indicative after secondary tenses, even when the
Present or the Aorist was changed to the Optative. (See the last
two examples under Rem. 1.) In indirect questions the Aorist In.
dicative was generally retained, for a reason explained in ~ 21, 2,
N. 1. Some writers, like Thucydides, preferred the moods and
tenses of the direct form, in all indirect discourse. (See ~ 44, 2,
Rem.)
NOTE 1. (a.) An Imperfect or Pluperfect of the direct
discourse is regularly retained in the Indicative, after both
primary and secondary tenses, for want of an Imperfect or
Pluperfect Optative. E. g.
tHKev dyyeXos XEyyco v orT ptpets #'KOVE 7rept7rXeov(oas, he came
saying that he had heard, &c.; i. e. he said K'covov. XEN. An. I, 2.
21.'AKOV-rTa 86 4evopv'sXeyev ort opOWs, 7 rlT t VTO Kai avro ro'pyov avTrolS.ap vpo r, he said that they had accused him rightly,
and that the fact itself bore witness to them; i. e. he said o3pds f rtia
ver Kal TO gpyov VLv  ap rvp el. Ib. III, 3, 12. E1Xe yap xeyetv.
Kal onrt pvot T&V'EXXkvcov S3aatX4el cr vve a X oVO v  IIXaraVaiL, Kam
Ot vZraTepov oloE7rorT orparev-ravrTo EIL f3acttXa (he said!fpot
crvvef ax6pXBt Oa,.. Kal.  o or.. o. O OT parevcrdptafe Ea). XEN.
Hell. VII, 1, 34. ToVrTv fKaorrov rpoldqv,'Ov*ropa ptev Kal TLLUOKpafTqvy
et TLves elev pdpTVpe wv evavrTov TTfv 7TpOLK aredtooav, avrov 8' "Aqogov,'     r1ves TrapcraL(v or a7reXa/f3LUVEV, I askced each of these men, -




~ 70, 2.]       INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE.                  153
Onetor and Timocrates, whether there were any witnesses before whom
they had paid the dowry; and Aphobus, whether there had been any
present when he received it. DEM. Onet. 1, 860, 10.  (The two
questions were ErL,taprvpes Tves; and 7rapac'rv rves;)
(b.) In a few cases the Present Optative is used after
secondary tenses to represent the Imperfect Indicative. The
Present may thus supply the want of an Inzperfect Optative,
as the Present Infinitive and Participle supply the want of
Imperfects (~ 15, 3 and ~ 16, 2). This can be done only
when the context makes it perfectly clear that the Optative
represents an Imperfect, and not a Present. E. g.
Tov Ttfayopav a7drKrTEvav, Karqlyopovvros Tov AeovTos cO ov're ovUKooLV E 0 e kX o e avr, terda re IHeXoIrLov rdrraa 0 ov X Vo tTO. XEN.
Hell. VII, 1, 38. (The words of Leon were ov're (ro-v-Kvovv'OeX e
1po, p.era 7r IHeX. 7ravTca e (3ov XEerTO.) Ta 7rewrpay(leva &a7yovro0,
OrL avrOL ptEV ET r7 TOL xe 7roXEloLs X e o t e v, 7T7V e davalpe'clv r&ov vavaywv
7r oo ord a   e  dvvpdGa-v IKavois. Ib. I, 7, 5. (The direct discourse
was avrTol fev ECrXeoQeV, TrV 3 adatpeTrLv 7poo'erTadaiev.)  Ka[i pot
7ravTes alreKpLvavTo KaO' e'caCrov, Ort on Elr o aO prvs Tr a p e, KO 1  ICO LOo E Xarif3adv)v KaO' roTrooovoev EOLTO'AroosE trap avr6v, they
replied, that no witness had been present, and that Aphobus had received
the money from them, taking it in such sums as he happened to want.
DEM. Onet. I, 869, 12. (The direct discourse was ov8es iLaprTv
7ra p v, Koi K  go fO 8 Xaf3dvcav Kao  OO' TroeVOV baOLTO. lnaperl contains the answer to the question e'Y rLes r aprlaav in the preceding
sentence, which is quoted as the last example under a. The Imperfect in the question prevents the Optatives used in the reply
fiom being ambiguous.)  So PLAT. Rep. IV, 439 E.
NOTE 2. In indirect discourse after secondary tenses, each
tense of the Indicative or Optative is to be translated by its
own past tense, to suit the English    idiom.  Thus drle7v o0r
ypd()o   (or ypd   es) is he said that he was writing; el ev or
y eypa    S e Y')t (or yeypa q v) is he said that he had written.
In a few cases the Greek uses the same idiom as the English, and allows the Imperfect or Pluperfect to stand irregularly with or& or Wo after a secondary tense, where regularly
the Present or Perfect (Optative or Indicative) would be required. In such cases the context must make it clear that
the tense represented is not an Imperfect or Pluperfect (Note
l,a). E. g.
Ev 7roXXj C'Tropla 77(cav ol "EXXr7veL, evvoovtevoL pFv ort f71r rats
[3aatX\)co OUpaL 71 a v, KVKX? KO  aVrToiS.  d..  Xr  7oJOXEi(ts  (  aav
7*




154                INDIRECT DISCOURSE.                [~ 70, 2
dyopav a  8 OV8El ELt 7rapeetlv E/L XXcv, a 7reXoV 86 T7sr'EXXdios
ov FIeov ) lFupLta rTaat, p....  rPpovE8a,  Kecav  e IVTroVS Kal'
dppOapoL, iovol 8e Kar a X e Xf  v o   oav ov8e r- Trea ov8eva
orviiaxov'Xovrres. XEN. An. III, 1, 2. (In all these cases the direct
discourse would be in the Present or Perfect Indicative.) A;ye7 a' avrTO  yvwvaL fE'  i X e p eC, it is said that he knew for what he wa(.
coming. THuc. I, 134. (Here Xopolq or Xwpel would be the regular
form.)  AL roXB     O bvXO v  Oprov, 4O i7tia L atlever, EaTaTru v Kal
kXEycv r 4f)tXa)vatovos' V KTal rad 2aiLa 7rpwros KaTarerot, i. e. saying
tfiXaOtrvatLo ef I  Kal ra'V  difiT 7rpWoTos Ka7 riTrov. ARIST. Vesp.
283. (Here El/uL is changed to yv, and not to el4': KaTELrov could
have been changed only to KareTroi.)
In these examples the principle usually observed in indirect discourse, -that the tenses employed in the quotation denote relative
not absolute time (~ 9),-is given up, and the Imperfect and Pluperfect denote absolute time, as in causal sentences (~ 81, 1). See
~ 81, 2, Rem.
NOTE 3. (a.) An indirect quotation, with its verb in the Optative after OrT or 0s, is sometimes followed by an independent sentence with an Optative, which continues the quotation as if it were
itself dependent on the ort or cs. Such sentences are generally
introduced by yap. E. g.
"HKOVO' yy Tytvoy  v    o ws ov&e rovs E Xtpkvas Ka ras v ayopas erT
G'oLev avrq KapnroVaOat' Ta yap KOLva ra OETrraX\v a7r 7 royvrwv aeo L
LotLKeLv, for (as they said) they must administer, &c. DEM. 01. 1, 15,
22.'AreKpivavro avrp ort dtvuvara ot(crLtV e lr t  OLELV a 7 rpoKaXeLra&
avev'AOlrvailov' 7Trcaes yhp fTcfrv Kal yvvalKes 7rap' iKELVOLS e 7I - a v.
THUc. II, 72. "EXeyov orL 7ravros a'La XeyoL sevOrls' XeLIcowv yap
W')q, K.T.X. XEN. An. VII, 3, 13.
(b.) Such independent sentences with the Optative are sometimes
found even when no Optative precedes, in which case the context
always contains some allusion to another's thought or expression.
E.g.'YrEaoXero rov a'vap''Axatots Tove BqX)toeiv ayov' olo rT  fE
XLa0a' EKOvaUlov Xa-3&vy, el I  OeXoL 8', aKOvra, i. e. he thought (as he
said), &c. SOPH. Phil. 617.'AXXa yap ov8ev rL /laXXov Jv daOvarov,
aXXa KaL avrT ro elS advOpa7rov) (rTOa eXOe6v apx?7 av avr, oX\epov,
c)a(-rep vo6os  KaL TciXaltrwpovfLEvr7 TE 8' TOVTOV TOV /lov  c T7  KaL
TEXEVTr(Td ye ev rT KaXovpe0v? Oavdr a  o X XXv o ro, and (according
to the theory) it lives in misery,.c., and finally perishes in what is
called death. PLAT. Phaed. 95 D. (Plato is here merely stating
the views of others. For the Imperfects in the first sentence, see
~ 11, Note 6.)
~ 71.    When a question in the direct form would be
expressed by an interrogative Subjunctive (~ 88), indirect




~ 71.]         INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.                   155
questions after primary tenses retain the Subjunctive;
after secondary tenses the Subjunctive may be either
changed to the same tense of the Optative or retained
in its original form. E. g.
IIpos adfJoTrepa aT7opp, ravr7v 8' 057rcoS EK  KCal rTAX'  7ro'ev
o K C, I am at a loss on both questions, how I shall give her a dowry
(7rs ravT?1v e K 8 &;), and whence I shall pay other expenses (Iroev
rAXXa 8 otLK5;). DEM. Aph. I, 834, 18. BovXeopCac o7ros e     or
a'r o p c5, I am trying to think how Ishall escape you (ir&s ee daropw;).
XEN. Cyr. I, 4, 13. OVK EXOI ri X y, I know not what I shall say.
D)EM. Phil. III, 124, 24. So in Latin, non habeo quid dicam. In
AESCI. Prom. 470, OVK elX o o-j' IoT... drakXayc may be
explained on this principle as interrogative; or by ~ 65, 1, N. 3, as
a relative clause. Ov yhp or 8b' adertpav. ye ov (ca'etsLE EXE(  rT'ivry s, for it is not surely through inexperience that you will declare
that you know not what to say (i. e. Trl i7wo;). DEM. F. L. 378, 4.
So $   rt 8b  and oS 8 6. XEN. An. 1 7, 7. Th be EcK7rtiara OVKt o1
el Xpvcadvra TOVro 8c5, I do not know whether I shall give them, &c.
Id. Cyr. VIII, 4, 16.'Ev e o l'TOp... p.     yL ep.pt~ev,,. o y... roE   a aa oar re L e v,
D'''Arpelqrpv Eva p  L o, je X  6hov ravcr tev, ep 77 7rv crT L  e tfvLodv.
[1. I, 191. (The direct questions were robV ev av a o' r 71 a o,'Arpdiqv 8' evapltCw; —'j vra o'ow, eprlrTVco re;)    KXrjpovs trdXXov,
vmrorrepoS 8r) 7rpo'Oev d 0 e i r  Xa\KEoV e'7os, i. e. they shook the lots, to
decide which should first throw his spear, the question being 7rorepos
7rpoocrev dqa; Ii. IlI, 317.'E7rnpovro, el ria pa oiev KopLtvot s rTV
doXtv, they asked whether they should give up their city, the question
being 7rapa o5tev T7rv roXLv; THUC. I, 25.'Ef3ovXevovro el Ta
oKEvofd6pa evraTvtOa  y o t v r o  l arir L o t e v Tirl rT orpaUrTOT7rov. XEN.
An. I, 10,17. (So An. I, 10, 5.)'H7ro pet o r X P o a to Tw irpayjart, he was at a loss how to act in the matter, i. e. ri Xp71afWoat;
Id. Hell. VII, 4, 39. Ov yap eotXOv....o    TWr s 3p)VTres Ka oH
7rp dL a  e v, for we could not see how we should fare well, if we did
it. SOPH. Ant. 272.'Aropeovros E 3a(o&LXos 0 rTs Xp j C'rTra  rT irapeovrr& rpjyLarlt,
E7rrtaiXrTs.X0B ol es Xd'yovE. HDT. VII, 213.'HropqoCe teEv ororepcre OiLaKLtvSvvevo'7 XWpIo-aS. THUC. I, 63. Ol Inaratir   ei3ovXevovro Eire Kara a K aV  cr o   v cto7rep E'XOvorI, eI' TE L r /XX  X P  - W v -
rat, whether they should burn them as they were, or deal with them in
some other way. Id. II, 4.'Arropco'avres 07r  K a 0aopl, cco v raT, I 
UIpwTrv r;TV v/lrov eTrXevorav. Id. IV, 13.
REMARK 1. The context must decide whether the Optative in
indirect questions represents a Subjunctive (~ 7i) or an Indicative
(~ 70, 2). The distinction is especially important when the Aorist
Optative is used (~ 21, 2, N. 1). See also ~ 74, 2, N. 1.
REMARK 2. qWhen the leading verb is in the Optative with lv,




156                 INDIRECT DISCOURSE.                 L~ 71
the Optative may be used in indirect questions of this class. See
examples in ~ 34, 3.
NOTE 1. The particle commonly used in the sense of whether in
indirect questions is el, which can introduce a Subjunctive, as well
as an Indicative or Optative. (See XEN. Cyr. VIII, 4, 16, quoted
above.)'Eav cannot mean whether; and when this introduces a
clause resembling an indirect question, the expression is really a
protasis, with an apodosis suppressed or implied (~ 53, N. 2). E. g,
EL'e -oti fij 8OKEL, Ke4a& ei a v rote ot fia\XXov a, p ao Kn * p1  y'ap
Ey& TO voUCLov 8L Katov elva. XEN. Mean. IV, 4, 12. (The meaning
here is, but if that does not please you, examine, in case this shall suit
you better (that then you may adopt it); and not, look to see whether this
suits you better. Ift' av apea-Kr is an indirect question, it can represent
no form of direct question which includes the a'v.  Even dpeo-aK
alone could not be explained as an interrogative Subjunctive, by
~ 88.)'Eahv apE'arK in the passage just quoted is similar to aE'
ev8iet$Lfpe0a in PLAT. Rep. V, 455 B: Bov'th ovn 8e6oEBlea roO ra
Toiavra dvari\yovros aKoXovXjor7aat dedv,;dav reos fr ie KEs EKO  V fL -
oj~ 0 a, OTS ov aeiEv Eo'rlv ETrt7Qev/La'liov; shall we then ask the one
who makes such objections to follow us, in case we can in any way show
him that, &c.?  See XEN. An. II, 1, 8; and ArtIST. Nub. 535.
(Such sentences belong under ~ 53, N. 2. See also ~ 77, 1, c.)
NOTE 2. E'i Kc with the Subjunctive in Homer sometimes forms
an indirect question, representing the Epic Subjunctive with KE in
the direct question. (See ~ 87, Note.) E. g.
Mvere T  /bpa ItrlT' a'l K' V'lJuv V 7r ep; p   X rpa Kpovtov; are you
waiting that you may see whether the son of Kronos will hold his hand
to protect you? I1. IV, 249. (The direct question would be V7rprXn KE Xelpa;)  Here the Ke always belongs to the verb, so that this
Epic construction is no authority for the supposed Attic use of aiv
and the Subjunctive in the same sense. See Note 1.
~ 72.    When the verb of the direct discourse stands
with av in the Indicative or Optative (forming an apodosis), the same mood and tense are retained in indirect quotations with'rT and ws and in indirect questions,
after both primary and secondary tenses. (See ~ 69, 2.)
E. g.
AE7yOTI roUro av ey Iv eVT o, he says that this would have happened:
\XEyEv 6TS TOVs o av ey v e tr o, he said that this would have happened.
Aeyet (or EAeyev) okra oUros BKaCos a&v 0 d  o a, he says (or said) that
this man would justly be put to death.
(Oec/Atro-oKXs) dareKp[varo, r on ou' a v avrT 1 2eplOto oV wvo/yaa1rTo
iyevero ouT' EKEIVOS'A7OVLaiov, he replied that he should not have




s 73, 1.]                 INFINITIVE.                        157
become famous himself if he had been a Seriphian, nor would the other
f he had been an Athenian. PLAT. Rep. I, 330 A.'Evvoelre, OT*.1TroV  v Oav rrdat  e lrI vos apovros  7 roXX\v. XEN. An. VI, 1, 29.
A7TrKpivaro, Or 7rp6orOv a v a 7r o 0 a v o t e  v  ra o7rXa 7rpa 8 o  o a v.
lb. 1I, 1, 10. (The direct discourse was 7rpOTOE av adTro0avoL
IAev.)  IapeXO\d TtLS 8eLtdro), Ws Ol OerraXol vvv OVrK av eXEVOEpo,
yEVOLVTO aTrPero& DIEM. 01. II, 20, 18. OUB' dELvat. qo'i rT &a
votLwv vluvy X a p  a  r. Id. F. L. 356, 13. OVK EXco rTl a v y e vo 
yav. AESCH. Prom. 905.     So 907.'Hpw'rTv el 8OLev    ay TOVTWI
ra ft-ra. XEN. An. IV, 8, 7.
NOTE. The same rule applies when a secondary tense of the
indicative in apodosis with av omitted (~ 49, 2, N. 2) is quoted.
E. g.
("EXEYIev) ot.... KperTov,  v avr To're a7roOavelv, he said that it
were better for him to die at once. LYS. X, p. 117, ~ 25. (The direct
discourse was KpeLrTov  V pot.)
~     73. 1. When the Infinitive is used in the indirect
quotation of a simple sentence, which had its verb in
the Indicative    (with   or without av) or the Optative
(with av), the verb is changed in the quotation to the
same tense of the Infinitive, after both primary            and
secondary tenses.      If av was used in       the direct discourse, it must be retained with the Infinitive.
The Present and Perfect Infinitive here represent the
Imperfect and Pluperfect (as well as the Present and
Perfect) Indicative. (~ 15, 3; ~ 18, 3, Rem.) E. g.
~7.ci ypdpetV, he says that he is writing; epr71 ypaclvw, he said that
ke was writing; qTPo-et ypdaetv, he will say that he is (then) writing.
(The direct discourse is here ypa  o.)  <,,o-i (fe') ypdcpeLv av, el
CEvvaro, he says (or said) that he should now be writing, if he were
able. (He says eypa    ov Pvy.)  Cqo  (/erl) ypd(petv Av, el UvatiTo,
7e says (or said) that he should write, if he should (ever) be able.  (Hie
says ypadoLitL  av.),trjot ypa7faL, he says that he wrote; &'fr7 ypcaat, he said that he had
written;  r'o-et ypdxaat, he will say that he wrote. (He says'yp a  a.
See ~ 23, 2.) 1)qo- (el)) ypaati av, el ESvvjqO,, he says (or said)
that he should have written, if he had been able. (He says eypa i a
a.)       rt  (e') ypciuJaL av, iel 8vv7wOl7q, he says (or said) that he
should write, if he should (ever) be able.  (He says ypda' ait aiv.)
i    (ri (jb(ret) yEypafivat, he says (or will say) that he has written;
b'kr yeypaepVat, he said that he had written.  (He says yEypaqPa.)
For the Perfect with lcv, see below.
q o'l (r'o-et) ypdfeLv, he says (or will say) that he will write;'ep
yprketv, he said that he would write. (He says y p ai ow.)




158                 INDIRECT DISCOURSE.                 [~ 73, 1.
(Present.)'A pp   - ar 7 v r poao-l'erat, he pretends that he is sick.'E&.,L/o(Ev ap p pT a v e Ev  7vTovL, he took his oath that this man was
sick. DEM. F. L. 379, 15 and 17.      OUK k'Oqr avrTo  uAX' EKEWVOV
a -rparT ye v, he said that not he himself, but Nicias, was general;
i. e. he said, OVK fyo'o arbr d' XX' EKELvos (TTpar/QyeL. THUa. IV, 28.
Tlvas 7ror' evXra vrroXaif3gdver' e uV X eCt0 a L'v hiXt7rnrov or' e-(rrevo8e;
what prayers do you suppose Philip made, &c.? DEM. F. L. 381, 10.
(E'xeo-OaL here represents 7VXer o: for other examples of the Imperfect, see ~ 15, 3.)  OL/at yap hr oK aXaplr arov OKL e'X e v, for I
think it would not be a thankless labor; i. e. OVK av e'X o L. XEN. An.
II, 3, 18. Ol'eao-e yap rTy 7rarEpa.. oUK av (p vXarTeLv KaLL T)V
Trqfiv     a p fd v L v TV 7rcXovp4LvWv $uXov, do you thin ththat he would
not have taken care and have received the pay, &c.? i. e. OViK la
efbv'XarTreTv Kial adLavrev; DEM. Timoth. 1194, 20. (See
~ 41, 1.)
(Aorist.)  K a r a cr X L v qo-t rorovV, he says that he detained them.
Tobs 8' alxaX'Trovs ov8' ev 0 v tLr7 r  a L qaL& Xvo'a'0atL, but he says
that he did not even think of ransoming the prisoners. DEM. F. L. 353,
14 and 18. (He says Kareao-ov, and ov8' EVeOv/q077vV.)'0 Kvpos
Xeyerat y e v e 00 a  Ka/u36rco, Cyrus is said to have been the son of
Cambyses. XEN. Cyr. I, 2, 1.    Tovs'A0lvalovs r'XrtELv lao'co  a v
7f r e  X O  i  Kai T r' y7v OVK av r e p t e v LT/L?0vat, he hoped that
the Athenians would perhaps march out, and not allow their land to
be laid waste; i. e.'o-wco  v  7reei\X0ol e  Kal oVK av 7rCep i o e v.
THUC. II, 20.'ATrreoav    otu' avTes P iL v 4    r lKOavo1 yEev E'Oa
KooXvarat rov TreLXtL-.ov. Id. VI, 102. (Here OVK av yvoltfiOa would
be the direct form.  (See ~ 69, 5.)  SoI, 139. OVK av 7yEtaf' avrov
KCa v E 7rStap EL, do you not believe that (in that case) he would
have run thither? i. e. OViK av ereopatev; DEM. Aph. I, 831, 12.
(See ~ 41, 3.)
(Perfect.)   ]o-raLv a'vr  a~a'lToS yeycv r1Oal, he says, a'lrio y yEr77 / a t. DEM. F. L. 352, 26. ElKaCov   8Lo0KovrTa OtX(ecOatL KaraXqrJdt6Levv Tr 7rpoEXXr)aKEvat. XEN. An. I, 10, 16.       (Their
thought was l LUK&V o'LXE ra, r... r poeX XaKc. See ~ 10,
N. 4.)'Ec xpfjLatO' eavT(w rovs Or)3alOvs E7 tLKEK 7 pv  vaEa, he said
that the Thebans had offered a reward bfr him. DEM. F. L. 347, 26.
For examples of the Perfect Infinitive with av, representing the
Pluperfect Indicative and the Perfect Optative, see ~ 41, 2.
(Future.)'ETayyekXeraTa hi   8Kata ro ir a-c Ir he promises to
do what is right. DEM. F. L. 356, 10.   So I. I, 161. "Erq Erv70s
7lFpEpv " e KO0.LV i a' e, v AaKehaQ.LoviovUs CSvraS  avrov a r o K T e v E 7 
he said that within twenty days he would either bring them alive or kill
them where they were. THuc. IV, 28. (Cleon said q a'co... 
daTOKTrev.)    Tavra (qaul) 7r E7r p a  co 0  a I  volv l   TpiCv'6EpoV,
he says that this will have been accomplished within two or three (lays.
DEM. F. L. 364, 18. (See ~ 29, Note 6.) For the rare Future Infinitive with dv, see ~ 41, 4.
REMARK. For the meaning of each tense of the Infinitive in
indirect discourse, see ~ 15, 2; ~ 18, 3; ~ 23, 2; and ~ 27. It will




~ 73, 2.]                PARTICIPLE.                        59
be seen that these tenses (especially the Aorist) in this use differ
essentially from the same tenses in other constructions; it is therefore important to ascertain in each case to which class the Infinitive
oelongs. This must be decided by the context; but in general it
may be stated that an Infinitive stands in indirect discourse, when
it depends upon a verb implying thought or the expression of thought,
and when also the thought, as originally conceived, would have been
expressed by some tense of the Indicative (with or without aiv) or of
the Optative (with Av), which can be transferred without change of
tense to the Infinitive. (See ~ 15, 2, N. 1, which applies only to
fhe Infinitive without Av.)  Thus Xeyo avro-v AX0eiv means I say that
ke came; but 3ovXeraL eX6EvV means hie wishes to come, where AXM0Ye
s merely an ordinary Infinitive, belonging under ~ 23, 1. In the
former case EXOeiv represents \X8ev, but in the latter case it reprebents no form of the Aorist Indicative or Optative, and is therefore
not in indirect discourse. So with the Infinitive after all verbs of
commanding, advising, wishing, and others enumerated in ~ 92, 1.
2. When the Participle with the sense of the Infinitive (~ 113) is used in the indirect quotation of a
simple sentence, it follows the rules already given for
the Infinitive (~ 73, 1), in regard to its tense and the
use of av. E.g.'Ayy/Xet roVTrovg  p EX M pv v O, he announces that they are coming;  yyyeLXe roTTOOV  e p o I v o v s, he announced that they were
coming.  (The announcement is ovrot fpXovra.)'AyyAXei'TOUrovS  X o ras, he announces that they came; j^yyeXe TroVrovo
X 06 v Tr a s, he announced that they had come. (The announcement
is X 0 o v.)'AyyeXXEi TroVrOVS X X  \   Ov r a, he announces that they
are come; yjyyeLXe T;OVTVS E X X v 0 o r a s, he announced that they were.
come. (The announcement is X X 7 \ X  a a- t v.)'AyyeXXAe (j'yyeXe)
tovro ye v rf5  V v, he announces (or announced) that this is (or
ias) about to happen.  (He announces roVro y v o er a.)
Tois re yap e'7rLXEtPliaoP'v elpwov o K a r o p 0 ov VT r  KL TO roV o-rpartirTas X Oof e v ovs Tr  ovf, they saw that they were not succeeding,
and that the soldiers were' distressed; i. e. they saw, ovb  a o p o vK P   e 
uraL ot o'rpartli'at a'XOovTra. THUC. VII, 47.'E/LAevolFe ots wLokoyo-aLfev 8LKaltoi o ar v; do ue abide by what we acknowledged to
he just (i. e. aiKauLi oa-rL)? PLAT. Grit. 50 A. IrivO' eveKa eavrov
vO L v E\EX\7XeyKTra, he has been proved to be doing everything jbr his
vwn interest. DEM. 01; II, 20, 12.  AvrT  Kvpov rrrparevovra
vrpTros'jyye/Xa, I first announced to him that Cyrus was marching
against him. XEN. An. II, 3, 19. See SOH.O. T. 395.'EJ7-rdt6,IEvoI Kai rToy fdpapov arVTv rrepi avbr o ra 7Tr\r a (faevraT Ka t 7rpob avrovs roVs''Arva8ovs 7roXV XX  fisas'jr7 roLs aipapr!Lfaotav arVTwV iaFXXov 7 J 7  d' vICy)V Tl.Wpla 7r p L y e v f7 P v o v 
THUC. I, 69.   (The direct discourse would be 6' f3dpfapos.
ro-daXr, Kal tLels... 7repLyeyErVLeOa.)  So in the same chapter,




160                INDIRECT DISCOURSE.              L~ 73, 2.
roiV MrSov avrol L'rO'v EK 7retparCv yrjs eT r]v IIf \Xo7rdvvr)(ov eX 06 vra 
i. e. 6 M18os X\0ev. Ov yap 5hecaav avrov 7OvF  K o r a, bor they did
not know that he was dead (i. e. TrOveKev/). XEN. An. I, 10, 16.'EsreGetla ov8iv aXr10es- ad7rTyyEXKOTra dXXa b eva KiC a vo' f aiE, I have
shown that he has reported nothing that is true, and that he deceived
you. (Perf. and Aor.)  DEM. F. L. 396, 30.
El eT fUIIlV KaL rrTv Trv/aLXav io0 y e vrl oi e vr v, if I were sure that
I should obtain an alliance also (i. e. cruvuaxa toI yevojEfat)). Ib. 353,
25. So XEN. Hell. IV, 7, 3.'0' avTropeLwXco adAP3Xvrpos, EL3os OVK
es Xapw' aC XX'S Of bita LXa r'v apErTv a 7r o 68 0a co v, knowing that he shall
return the benefit, &c. THUC. II, 40. rUvovre ovr' adroKwoXv-rev ovvaTOL' v r e s, e T' da7roMovwooJo'ovratL Tr7s vl/filo3(re), K v v v v ro v T e 
TrotovTraLt`LoXoyiav. Id. III, 28. (The direct discourse would be
oUTrF 8vvaTol E'rOILE, El'T adrojiovcorloo'eOa, KLV8vvvcroleV.)
Ev 3''0l-Ot pef7iv ayv iE TOVTrOv EI'irLXEtpTaava (Tr TeLBELV, EL
vvaarrelav yo'vov r 7rXovrov eppoCv e avrov y evrI7 oI6 e v o v. ISOc.
Phil. p. 109 B. ~ 133. (Here pr7)3v ahv csriXEtplco-avra represents oV8Ev
tiv E7reXelpr7a,' ~ 69, 5; and yevrj17oievov represents yevrj'Tral.);ZKOrTOV/LvoS OVv evptlTKOV OVa&i/.J aS V hXoE roero  t a r av  a Td  e v o,
Ifound that I could accomplish this (8&a7rpadaiurjv dv) in no other way.
Id. Antid. p. 311 C. ~ 7.
"OVr o 6 ye y TOVS 7roXetovU NUvato'Oe K0aK&S TroIEV, ohK o0o0a  a v -
a0vovras v  a s / o  asXVc KaKovpyias, do you not know that you learned,
&c. XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 28. (Here the Optative UYvatcr-e, as well as
the whole context, shows that VavOdavovras represents ef a v 0 a v e C,
~ 16, 2.) MFv/Aa&L  8 EyCe   Kal y ra4 6v KpLa ia Th3eE vvo v Ta  ae, 1
remember that you were with this Critias. PLAT. Charm. 156 A.
(Zvvovra represents $vv1o-Oa.)  See ~ 16, 2, and the examples.
Indirect Quotation of Compound Sentences.
~ 74.    When a compound sentence is to be indirectly quoted, its leading verb is expressed according to
the rules given for simple sentences (~~ 70-73).
1. If the quotation depends on a primary tense, all
the dependent verbs of the original sentence retain the
moods and tenses of the direct discourse.
If the quotation depends on a secondary tense, all
dependent verbs of the original sentence which in the
direct discourse stood in the Present, Perfect, or PFuture
Indicative, or in any tense of the Subjunctive, may (at
the pleasure of the writer) either be changed to the




~ 74, 1]           COMPOUND SENTENCES.                     161
same tenses of the Optative, or retain both the moods
and   tenses of the direct discourse.       The Optative is
the more common form.         E. g.
(After pr;umary tenses.)'Av 8' V fLELS XE ye, q ro f  e t 0  V (Qjc-I)
)U7T aL(oXivvv,U, T' d3oplav avrT 5  p pe. DEM. F. L. 354, 8. (IIere
no change is made, except froim 7roLao-e to 7roCI-ELv.)  No[^'cv yap,
acv TrTr aIKpl ptos  a 0q re, XdLaov vLas TrovroLs'Y E r UaTo'Trao7 Lv
Epol 8e fo S 8r/  a- TLv. Id. Onet. I, 870, 27.'Ev eKelVo EL8a{tPv
otn awTazTia oa-a Tr'arOT  XrTic a  e V rLva arpdLELV VIrep'CwV Kat' IMuwv
efprra,.. Kai YL VVV e 0 oX LL E V EKEL FToXELfEl acO), evOa3'rot
avayKia- q    o.'eta rovro 7ITOLElv K. T... Id. Phil. I, 54, 18. HpoXfyo ort, orrT ep' V  r TO  K p vi 7 av ata, EeXeyX0to-Erat. PLAT. Euthyd.
275 E.  See D.EM. Mid. 536, 1, where two such conditional sentences depend on eL rp('CqXov y evo Lo.  (See ~ 34, 3.)'Opc rol roirO OV  e croe v, oTraL eEi7r 0 v t Ij a-rn  qXlav 7rpos TrLvas
7roteriocat. XEN. Mem. II, 6, 29. IHapadetycLa -cra0e Karao-rio-are, ci
av adpLoarrrac, Oavarp 1pl     aroa-o'ievoV. Tnuc. III, 40.  Se~
~ 73, 2.
(Opt. after secondary tenses.) ETre rOTl alvpa a y o & ov eLpa 8 e o t
he said that he was bringing a man whom it was necessary to cornfine
i. e. he said aivapa a'yco ov eLp$aL 8ei. XEN. Hell. V, 4, 8.'Ave
KpTvaro onr ft a v a o  L evol LavOdvovTrs a OVK ET r  ra v r o, i. e. ht
replied,!Mavdivova-c oaK irlaravrat. PLAT. Euthyd. 276 E. (Here
a has a definite antecedent, ~ 59, and is not conditional; it takes the
Optative only because it is in indirect discourse.  So with oIv in the
preceding example.)'Ay(r-1Xao eAet\yev 0t L, l j3Xa3epa 7r e p ax o 
E r?, &bKatos e'l  Fuoia-Oat, i. e. he said e' 13XaJ3epa  r rErpaXe,
3LKatLos Eka-rt L  lovrOat. XEN. Hell. V, 2, 32. So An. VI, 6, 25.
EZ &e L7Va  evEyovra X   t1o0 r TO, rTPO)JyOPeve OTtL OsE TroXE/i(0) XP
O r TO. Id. Cyr. 111. 1, 3. (This is a quotation of a conditiona%
sentence belonging under ~ 50, 1, N. 1; E'l TLva X+omo~ct,..  p. I-o
puat.) TVOVTE  E.. *.OTL, EL SCL OLEV E v Y v vaY, KlVtV1UIcao-LE 8
a7roXE'crBai, TreLT7rovrvL Kai taioao'KOv Lv TroVS O3?3alovs c&', eL u, or-parevcaroteV KLV v      a OL o E' ApKabes 7rdaXv XaKioviarat. Id. Hell
VII, 4, 34. (See ~ 32, 2.)'HStet yap ortl, ei iaXIrs trorTE 8&0o-0t, E'
rovroTv aVTr IrapaaTraras X17rTTeov e'Lr. Id. Cyr. VIII, 1, 10.
(The direct discourse was e' rL SE'eE,... ~X~Trreov earlv.)'EXoyt(ovio s, L.CLXOL,  d To a( - v T o,   T OVT aO ITEpIoKLG?,
ITO'XEt. ld. Hell. VI, 4, 6.  ('EaLv JLu /LaXtF.eOa, aTrocrlro-vrTa.)
XpijyaO' vrt-XveLTo 8 o ao e L v, L Trov TrpaytCaros a r  v r o ELE. DEM.
Mid. 548, 20. (Aco'aco, eav alrlia-e.)'Hyero yap arav 70  o-E t
arVTO, eL rtL adpyvptov Staol ). LYS. in Erat. p. 121, ~ 14. Evi'aro
coIpTa 0    e, La  -E rpV wrov eTs f lXlav yiv d  iKo vr o. XEN. An.
V, 1, 1. (The dependent clause is found in the direct discourse in II1
2, 9: o0KEL uoL ev'Gao-'OL T-) BOe roTVTC O vo'eLv a-rwrtpta O7rOV alv rpWcor)'
elE tfclXtav yrv di a  KD Sie 0 a.)  Touro ErcpayLTarTeero votlitcwv, o;a 7'
7rOrdXos 7rpoXad/ o, riavra raora [e(3alto Es ee.  EM. DE  Cor. 234, 5
('Oa" av 7rpoXdi/3t, Pefaios'E co.) "HAXTI7LO VUTO r7v 7ral&co),'7retLb
K




162                 INDIRECT DISCOURSE.               [~ 74, 1.
reXUVroT' eaV rOV /Lov, Tra 0 )-  Oa l. LYS. Agor. p. 133, ~ 45.
('ETcLB8av EXTvrifVT/Lfev, Ta( rcao-',EOa.)  Kv(yov  elbaaCTKEV 4S orco 
7roloUVTL rraai Iraa avr  ai roXcrds ItXiat Efolrovro, EL e aovXovorOat
(3ovXioMvos f)Lavpo3sE E'otOTO, ~aeyev c(s iLa KidcaTrq roXXa rrppdyaraT
lKaVi c'T 7rTapEXELv Kal KL KlvSvvog'l  14 Kat ol "EXXi/VES, EL Taira
(ILacr-oO ro, a-vrvTal v. XEN. Hell. IV, 8, 2.
"ErT 8e Yi7yvCo'KeiV epaa-av (P 0 o v o 0 v a  ev LEavUroVS, el Tl oC(it
ayatov LyVyToLro,  ifq o8LEvoVC 8' eL TL9 o'vVopa V rpoo'TrliTTrot
they said they knew that tlhey were envious if any good came to
them, but pleased if any calamity beJell them. T.  V, 2, 2. (4 0 o v e i r e
fLev, eav T L ipLv dyaiov ylyvt r a, (p  q 8E 0- 6E', erav TLS Vfopa,rpoa-trLrrn.  See ~ 51.)  Tr)v alrlav, 7 7rpo8rJXos 71v eTr' KEivovs
rtouva-a, e  rt irdOot Xap lri7os. DEat. Aristoc. 624, 20.
(CH  E t, aiy rTL rd0t 8 Xaplorjos-.)  See ~ 73, 2.
(Subj. and Indic. after secondary tenses.)'EXeyov r5TL aKpa rE
EcrTLV Voov Kal o     el roXe/.toL TroXXoi, oi 7ralov(rv roTvs Evov av9dc)wrovs, then said that there was a height, &c. XEN. An. V, 2, 17,
(Here efev and iaoLEv might have been used.)'Eo'KieC p/ot ravTrJ7 retpaaOaL aooOvat, Ev(rOvov'vac& ort, vo ev  Exf
XdOw, a-corOlaoa, K.r.X. LYS. Erat. p. 121, ~ 15. (Here El
XAdotlXt, oa-(o0q)a-olir might have been used.)  IadacKCv Te, v (r w t0
oi'caS, Kara ye Tr avrT 8vvarov  t aX X a ev'A^0valovg Kal AaKE8altLovlovS, d7ir7rXvcrav. XEN. Hell. I, 6, 7.  (He said'jv aooS,
which might have been changed to el aooOe1.)'Y7reraoovro aurolr,
iv erTl fIoroatav S  r t v'AOqvaiot, es Tir'ArTTWKv ear-3aaXev. THUC.
I, 58. (*Hv'Iooa-lV, Eor-/aXoVILv.)  So THUC. I, 137. Kai oVK 4'qaarav
levat, ev iuf rTi aTrois XP{ltLara t&co..'O 8' VTre;cr-Xo advopi eKado'rc
8(Ce CTv r IvTe /wva, eraiv els BavJvX5va       Kacoo-i, Ka& rTv MtofO'
vrTEX~, 1)XP ep  av Kaao-'Trqa  TOrvS EXXAqva  els'IRovav 7radXt. XEN.
An. I, 4, 12 and 13. "Eer/ xprvat,.. ol av e eyXca oL taf3aXXOVre rTw'E)XXivcov, Wos rpoSdoras ovras T'l.OprlO7vat. Ib. II, 5, 27.
Et he' 4, Kal abrol 4Ebaoaav auTrT&v TOvs 4ivhpa da o K r e v ev oBs
Xo v r'CyTras. THuc. II, 5. ("ExoLev might have been used.) KaT a aX i or    v e ~ v  ras zrrXas eQ4arav, Ei LjT eKodres d vo a  L   o  v  a L  v. XEN. An.
VII, 1, 16. (El uqi dvoleotev might have been used.) ATro7s otav-rr
&86a irapetarTKel, os, el.Etv TTporEpov r1' Uiv 7rXtiv t a t', EKeLvoLS
Kal'ArOqvaiots Lro e FL  o v atr  ev e' Ede irprov ad (1 o v r a t,
ove;vas a'\Xovs ToX hicr(eV v, K.T.X. LYS. Or. Fun. p. 192, ~ 22.
(To0ro) 7rp6odrXov v ea o pEvo, EL ti t V/;LeLS K o XV  rc, it was.
actready manifest that this would be so, unless you should prevent it (i. e.
efraat, el 1i KWXVoaere). AESCHIN. Cor. ~ 90. (KwoXvcorotT might be
used; and KoX5o-aLre, representing Eav 1U' KcOXao-qTe, is found in one
Ms. and many editions.)  See ~ 73, 2.
NOTE 1. The dependent verbs in indirect discourse may
be changed to the Optative, even when the leading verb retains the Indicative; and sometimes (though rarely) a dependent verb retains the Subjunctive or Indicative, when the




~ 74, 1.]          COMPOUND SENTENCES.                     163
leading verb is changed to the Optative.      This often gives
rise to a great variety of constructions in the same sentence.
E.g.
Art7tx'cas OtL ff ETOt ol el cot pXaeOaL, eL TrS cePX L t o.  XEN.
Cyr. IV, 1, 1. ('Erotol clo-iV, Edv TvS e;epX7TaU.)  Av'avapos febe
OTL 7rapa(rTdovs vts LaS eXot, Kal ort 0ov 7epi 7roXltrelaS Viv (o'rrat
dXXa rrepi (wCOTpLag, el P   7TroLt'affa' a ErlpapLvrlS K X E V o t. LYS. in
Erat. p. 127, ~ 74. ("EXo, Kat o... -..rat, ahv /  7r7 roL)0' a e.
KEXeVet. There is no need of the emendations Wrot7-rer and KfXEVEL.)
*E80K~IE 8XOV elvacL ort alpiptrovTaL a~vrov E' L  fl 7r  7l/Oti.
XEN. An. VI, 1, 25. OVK ^yvoel EV ouXV6iS or, eZ Xoyoo a7ro a o7rro7To, Kal lrCapayevoLVTo' /1o' 7Travre OL o( 7 -1oraTl, Kal 7)j~)os
&KaloS 8 0e r1,  o8al. ov y e v o70 ov a  ot Ilera TOvTOV CVVE(TrTKOrTf.
DEM. Eubul. 1303, 22. (El a7ro8o60o~erat, K eal av 7rapayevwovrat, Kal
+'Jr]os o0,o, ovalayov yev7crovra&.)'AyqR(iXaos yvovr's rt, El /AEV pq6rEpo Crv XX7q  o t r o, uto-0ov ovIerepoS X VA o eL rotL'EXXro7lv, ayopav
se ovSerepos 7rape, et, oTroTrepos r aY K paTr lc7, ovTro  eXOpos
E'aora' EL 8e Tp erepco orvXXirotro, ov'rods ye   LXos E('OL7ro
K.r.X. XEN. Ages. II, 31.'EXeyov OrTI EKOTda 8 oKo  XeyELW /aaCLtXel, Kal r KO l e FV q7yqlvas
exOVTre, oL avro0vs eav o'Trovt8a   y  e V   r a, i o v r' v vOev E'  vr L
Ta( 67CT7rtiEa. XEN. An. II, 3, 6.'E7rqp ora, Trola el7! rTv OpEow
o7roOev ol XaXkaiot KaraOeoovres Xntr ovrat. Id. Cyr. II, 2. 1.
ToTrotS 7rpopeXcyov, ort El p CO e V (o L KaL 7ravra Fa^Xov 7r o  rr o tL 
a rop 0 KpI, eL rTI rL e ee ep ra. PLAT. Rep. I, 337 A. ('EpoorT
in the direct discourse would belong under ~ 51, N. 3, the Futures
denoting a habit.) *EXFcas OTrt 1LeyLcorov e'lrt t paaOv 0'7ros 68f El  pSyad~oaL'eKa&ora el * e l/xl, OV6e Tr7 erLtIeXElas e'qaO0a o(OeXov ov6;v
ytyveroOat, el in rTLs ErLrTatro a 8 e Kai sa  8 e i  7roliv. XEN. Oecon.
XV, 2.
In DEM. Cor. 276, 23, we have both the constructions of ~ 74, 1
in the same sentence: El /EV Trov TO TW  v eKELVO v Ov I laXcO  E  y o ir o
TLS,'v7r o' e 00 at TO 7rpay. a   evofttle rravra, av 8''AOrvalos y o TOVTO
7rot)V, evrr0poAS X  rtEL V.  (Here el eLorryoiro represents E'iv EOat)y7Trat, corresponding to eav,.)
NOTE 2. According to the general rule (~ 69, 4), all relatives
and particles which take a'v and the Subjunctive lose the a'v when
such Subjunctives are changed to the Optative in indirect discourse
after secondary tenses. In a few cases, however, the'av is irregularly retained, even after the verb has been changed to the Optative.  This must not be confounded with'v belonging to the
Optative itself, making an apodosis. E. g.
OVK Ef'0' 5TLS o0VX q7yfTO TOV el8OTrooV 8LK7)V yE Xpe fE eaat 7rap' av-'lv, E TTiretav Tdxa-Ta avrp elvat 3ot0KLaafOeLlqv.. DEM. Onet. I,
865, 24.  (The direct discourse was ereLt8aV 6oKtpaa-O0, and the
regular indirect form would be either ere08q 8OKtpao-OeIrv or f'reL&8a
iOKIlaoOo. Here the verb is changed, while the original particle
irTetadv is retained.) See also ~ 77, 1, Note 3.




164                 INDIRECT DISCOURSE.              [~ 74, 2
2. The Imperfect and Pluperfect remain in the In.
dicative unchanged, even after secondary tenses, in ihe
dependent (as well as in the leading) clauses of indirect
discourse, from the want of those tenses in the Optative.
(~ 70, 2, Note 1, a.)
The   Aorist Indicative    also regularly    remains unchanged after secondary tenses, when it stood in a
dependent clause    of the direct discourse; not being
changed to the Aorist Optative (as it may be when it
stood in the leading clause, ~ 70, 2). E. g.'ErtorrtiXat E o-Latcrt  a'rolvS roaVS Efopovs (e'Oacrav) EitreV tvos yV
fEev rpdcr'e0v ET 7 oOVV fI/pVotvro avTros, that they sent them to say that
they blamed them for what they had done before; i. e. c& 7rpSoOer
E 7r o te l r  f  fodJeO0a vhlv. XEN. Hell. III, 2, 6.
(Aorist Ind.) "HXhrtnov TOVs'L KeXovs ravr7, ov E erf;r C + a v,
aravrao'oaOat, they hoped that the Sikels whom they had sent for
would meet them here. THUC. VII, 80.'Avre'Xeyov.  X.yovres iy
a7rryye'Xal rco ras or(rovsh, 0r''eOrE'r er   a  robv 6wo 7 rXra. Id. V,
49. (~ 69, 5.) "EXeyov Cos ZevocWOv OLXoLTO  s Ev Erv7V OiK1j'0WV KaL a
vi 7r eX   r o avTr adroXouevos. XEN. An. VII, 7, 55.  "EKarrov'   I   I,     L,      ^           %     ^   I  
7pofJlYv, eL rtves etev idprTVpes cv vavTrloV Tv 7rpoLK a 7Tr  o aav.
DEM. Onet. I, 869, 9.
NOTE 1. The Aorist Indicative is not changed to the Aorist
Optative in the case just mentioned, as the latter tense in such dependent clauses generally represents the Aorist Subjunctive of the
direct discourse, so that confusion might arise. Thus'prql a evp ol
&m-t.v means he said that he would give whatever he might find (a
Itpol representing & av e vp co); but if a evpo. could also represent
d Vpov, it might also mean he said that he would give what he
actually had found. In the leading clause the ambiguity is confined
to indirect questions; and in these the Aorist Indicative is generally
retained for the same reason. (See ~ 70, 2, Rem. 2.)
When no ambiguity can arise from the change of an Aorist Indicative to the Optative, this tense may follow the general principle
(~ 69, 1), even in dependent clauses of a quotation. This occurs
chiefly in causal sentences after o'rt, &c., because (~ 81, 2), in which
the Subjunctive can never be used. E. g.
EiXE yap XAEyeLv cos aKEaaltovLot &i rovro 7roX-i'L7retav avraos, T rs
OVK     e \ X Cr a e v ter7'AyqcrL\dov eXeitv r' avrvY ov8e Oorat i dae tav aVTOrv e AvXiSi. XEN. Hell. VII, 1, 34. (The direct discourse
was 7s o7roEfarav r7aL, oTr OVK e  cXj  a pE e Y...ov 8eSvL Ovat e  aIC r
fI e.-)'A73r1y4'-ao0aa (a)ot) cos Javortotlramrov piy E't? eLpyaa-.evYOS  Ore
roav aiEX4Eao aio r o r a f o t T)' Kef)daX7v, a-ro)OraTove  T t rTOVS VaKovs
XKcrapeOvtra K a aX v a-Ee roDv adCEXo)~o KpeLa1LfAevov TOV VEKVV HD r




f 76.]             COMPOUND SENTENCES.                   165
II, 121.  (Iteie SrT Karaivo-eLe represents Ort KaTEAvo-a, because I
took down; ore anroTr-lioL (so the Mss.) may also be understood in a
causal sense, since he had cut off. Madvig, however, reads or& in
both clauses.)  See also ~ 77, 1, e, and examples.
NOTE 2. The Imperfect or Pluperfect sometimes stands irregularly in a dependent (as well as in the leading) clause, after a
secondary tense, to represent a Present or Perfect Indicative, which
would regularly be retained or changed to the Present or Perfect
Optative. Such clauses really abandon the construction of indirect
discourse. (See ~ 70, 2, N. 2; ~ 77, 1, N. 2.) E. g.
"EhXyov ov Kiaos'rv'EXXdaiaa eevGepoov aUroY, el a'vapas 8 L e 0 ~ L -
p e  OVT rE Xipav alvrapop/eovs OV're 7rOXELlovS. THUC. III, 32. (O0
KaX\w  EXFev~po1S, el  a La/ E Lp E p.) OvrT yap rTOiS eoiLs eof7 r aaXs
EXLtv, eL raLtS!Eya \aL t voCtaILE ai\ov ] Talt LLtKpatlE e aLp o. XEN.
Mem. I, 3, 3. (El xalpovr-.)  Kal ferL elvat 7rap EavTco oSov /' )1 v
avjXoapE6vov. DEM. Olymp. 1172, 1. ( Oaov ti E T frc V avqfXoLPvov.)
aA fLEV ElZX \) e TrS TOrXEOs acnro8o0-ElV (;7yoviruv.), I thought that he
would give back what he had taken from the city; i. e. a e'X11r ev
darooaLdeL. Id. F. L. 388, 17.
~ 75. When a dependent clause of the original sentence contains a secondary tense of the Indicative implying the non-fulfilment of a condition, the same mood
and tense are retained in the indirect discourse, after
both primary and secondary tenses. E. g.'E&oKEL, el i  4') acr a v v\XXaJ3vres TOV'S [tvbpas, 7rpoSoi vat aiv rTjv
7rOXLy. Tnuc. VI, 61. (If'(piao-av had been changed to the Optative, the construction would have become that of ~ 76.)  O'ieE- E  dov
-rarepa, el ELv TLtLOg;OUv  h v r Xa tKal e  s  6rl o'0ro avrov... rrapaaXElv,T vaXov,' ecraaL t  7WOTE, K.TX., dXX2 OVK a'v vXaTrrTELV Kal T'v
TtIv Xa\p3aiveiv, o G E  o EKp O  raT r o T' eavroU. DEM. Timoth.o 1194,
13. ToTrwv e'L T'?) v dX\q0e, o'eFoT' o icv av ar'v Xka3eiv; Id. Aph. I,
831, 5.'H'o'se hv  i&wV 7rVBOlI)tIV, ripV av 7rTOT yvwJLrv 7repti E/ov
etX'eT, el pt EirET pt PaPX?7 a'  a  a rX' ov 6X o iq v. Id. Polycl.
1227, 2.
~ 76. An Optative in a dependent clause of the
original sentence (as in the leading clause) is retained
without change of mood or tense in all indirect discourse. E. g.
ELTfrE OTL EX\OLt a v LEs XO'yovs, El o6pipov Xk d 3o t. XEN. Hell. Ill,
1, 20.'Hrrao aY tiv oia To rvyXiavetv (8oKe /UOLt), el TI 8 o la-e 7rap
avrTCO. XEN. An. VI, 1, 26. "EXeyev OTL OVK alv rore 7rpooiro, 7rel
iara4 <i/Xos alr'  eyeYro, ovE  o  eL e  iEY pteiovs y Evo to T0 8E E Ka'L




166               INDIRECT DISCOURSE.              [~ 76.
KLoV I7r p)u  Lav. b. I, 9, 10. Aevo'v aiv rTL raOetv (oavrvo fiX7 SE, el
7rv'OLvO OVTOLL Ta 7reTrpay/va aot. DE. DEM. F. L. 416, 11.
REMARK. Sentences which belong under ~ 76 are often translated like those which in the direct discourse were expressed by a
Future and a dependent Subjunctive, and which belong under ~ 74,
1. Thus EXEy7e OTt eXO0oi av, El TOUro YevoLTO (or EXEyEV EX6ELv avi, el
TO7TO yevoLro), as well as'XEyev OnLt eXevfotLTO, EL TOVTO yevoLro (or
EXeyov Aevra(crOaL, EL TOVT7o -yEvoO), may be translated he said that he
would come if this should happen; although in the first two sentences
the direct discourse was EAOLqI av, EL TOVTO Y-/rOLTO, I would come if
this should happen; and in the last two, EXEvroiuat, eav TOVrTo'yIv7raL,
I will come if this shall happen.
Single Dependent Clauses in Indirect Discourse.
~ 77. The principles which apply to dependent
clauses of indirect discourse (~ 74, 1 and 2) apply also
to any dependent clause in a sentence of any kind (even
when what precedes is not in indirect discourse), if such
a clause expresses indirectly the thought of any other
person than the speaker, or even a former thought of
the speaker himself.
After primary tenses this never affects the construction; but after secondary tenses such a clause may
either take the Optative, in the tense in which the
thought would have been originally conceived, or retain
both the mood and the tense of the direct discourse.
Here, as in ~ 74, 2, the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and
Aorist Indicative are retained unchanged.
1. This applies especially (a) to clauses depending on the
Infinitive which follows verbs of commanding, advising, wishing, &rc; these verbs implying thought or the expression of
though4 although the Infinitive after them is not in indirect
discourse. (See ~ 73, 1, Rem.) It applies also (b) to the
Optative (though not to the Indicative) in causal sentences in
which the speaker states the cause as one assigned by others
(81, 2);- (c) to clauses containing a protasis with the apodosis implied in the context (~ 53, Note 2), or with the apodo



~ 77, 1.]       SINGLE DEPENDENT CLAUSES.                   167
sis expressed in a verb like Oavqau, &c. (~ 56);-        (d) to
temporal sentences expressing a past intention or expectation,
especially those introduced by   Wos and 7rpiv, until, after past
tenses (~ 66, 2, Note 1); -and sometimes (e) even to ordinary relative sentences, which would otherwise take the Indicative. E. g.
(a.)'Ej3ovXovro XOev, E TroTro y v o t r o, they wished to go, if this
should happen.  (Here eav rovro yev r7rat might be used, as the
form in which the wish would originally be conceived.)  raSa'av 8e
KaC ro)f3pvav  KEX~VceVy 0o T  8 vatv tTO Xa3ovrTas ELra8TCAKEIV L   KaL
O(Trtrs elXE ras 7rofieva ayXdas, ELre TrorV KaC aa Tpo(ara TroXX
eXavvevL, o1rr7  v aIrv r TV t T  v?0 i r a to vra, &s ecrEIoayir?. XEN. Cyr.
VII, 3, 7. (Here o rTL vvaUvro represents o rt alv 8vvrsOe in the
direct command, while o67r,7 a 7rvv0advrraL represents o'ny av vrvvOadvr.)'E/ovXovro yap C'cI)Lo'tV, eL rtva X a (3 o L e s, v'rapXetv avri rTcv voov, Iv
apar V X co o L TLVES e;oypC7lEpvot. THUC. II, 5. ( Hv Xci3copev, and iv
rvXcoo'l.)  O' a'XXOL OTq(aiLO, ovs eMetL TapayeveC'Oat, eL TI pLi TpoXCOpoit   ToLSE ECEX;1XV0dro(L, Tre,3o0jovv. Ibid. ('Eaiv rL p)'TpoXop$.r)
IlpoetlrOV avrols tz1) vavpaXciv KopltvLOlS, IIV i f;irl KEpKvpaY  rX ECoo rl KCa  /XXCaoctLv a'TvojaetvY. Id. 1, 45.  ('Hy /I  TErXv)ere Kal
/iXX?1re.)  Kai 7rapryyctXav e'ret8 8 Cfervj Cr e av cTavvtrKevao'E;vov'advTras dvravaTarCOat, Ka' Trec-atc )VLK' aiv rTL  rapayy X X. XEN.
An. III, 5, 18. ('EtrfL8aV rcvrTrr5OTf, and 7vlK' a'v rLS rapayyE\XX.)
Iepl avTrov Kpv(fa Tre/jTreL, KEXeOV... f) d(eivaeaL TptV iv avaroL rdTXL
KOLtcr O O L-v. THUC. I, 91.   (Ilplv Ko/LtCOLEV might have been
used.)  Kal 7roXXK\\aE  roIs'Arsvalos 7rapJ7vet, yv apa T7OTE KaTa yrjv.i a c 0  Cr, Karaadvras eS avrov raE s vavaTi rpos ap7rravTas avOicrraaOat.
Id. I, 91. (El- tSao-crev might have been used.)'Htlouv avrovs
rIyezdovas oc(qv oyevsrsOal Kal Hlavo-avi /T) E'7rTpETeLE, iTv TOU  a itq r a L.
Id. I, 95. (El' rov j3LiaoLro might have been used.)'A(LKvoUVrat [o itTadXKrV,, f3ovXd\OEVOL'Tel(oL aurTOs, EL 8vvatvro, CrparvcrIo
f rl rv Ilorliatav. Id. II, 67.'EroLjLtos Ev airorTL elY,  K Taayvo e V
aCTrov. Isoc. Trapez. 361 E. ~ 16. (This example might be placed
also under c.)  E' 7ov Fit pva TWV'rtc'OEV KtweloOal, Trpv aV 6 rrpdorOcf
Ty71 Ta t I commanded that no one, &c. XEN. Cyr. II, 2, 8.
IlapqryykXXero yaip avrols. eKa tiEV ov6 OqpapevrYs ad re 8 EL  XELPO
7rovro-a, eKa 8;E ov0 o0l OELopOL KeXEVOoLE. LYS. in Erat. p. 127,
~ 76. (Ovsar aEr8e e, and ovs av KEXEVWo6-I. See ~ 74, 2.)'EKXevroa
fLe',V e7rLtcrroXrTV o V  ^ypata oL'Ka8e ESovaL, the letter which I had
written. XEN. Cyr. II, 2, 9. ('Hv ypadaltu would mean whatever
letter I might write, representing iAv Av ypdcirs.)  So oev rX 0o v,
THuc. VII, 27.
(b.)'EKadKtOV O Tr CrTpaTr)yos Vcr oVK  rneTeayoL, they abused him
because he did not lead them out (as they said). THUc. II, 21.
See other examples under ~ 81, 2. See also ~ 81, 2, Rem.
(c.)'aQKTrepov, El daX&a oCvro, they pitied them, in case they




168                  INDIRECT DISCOURSE.               [~ 77, 1.
should be captured: the idea in full is, they pitied them, thinking of
what wou!d befall them if they should be captured. XEN. An. I, 4, 7.
(EL a6XcaovTra might have been used.)  Ato6vros 6' avrco 7rdfroXXa
&wpa TLOpav'aTov, el a7r eX 0 o t, da7reKplvaro, offering him many gifts, if
he would go away. Id. Ages. IV, 6.  ('Eav cdriX0y might have been
used.)  4v'XaKuas avLW7refITret, o7rcos qvXadroLev avrov, KaL El rv dypkOv
TL    CfEave ir Oqplov, and (to be ready) in case any wild beasts shoula
appear; his thought being dav rt ~  a vj. Id. Cyr. I, 4, 7. See
other examples of the Optative under ~ 53, N. 2.
*Hv,e TLS e'    Tr  rr f xr'l iac  KLveiv Ta Xpararaara,s'IXXo rT,
Oivarov C7rnliav E7reOevTo, they set death as the penalty, if any one should
move, or put to vote a motion, to divert this money to any other purpose.
THUC. II, 24.   (El 6e7iro' er7trlqSietlev might have been used.)
T\XXa\, )v erT vavlLaxEtv ol'AOirva"o rToXiorrcoo(-, 7rapE(o'KEvdUaoo, i. e.
they made their other preparations, (to be ready) in case the Athenians
should dare, &c. Id. VII, 59;  (Their thought was, we will be ready,
in case they shall dare, rv roIXp 7aocoo-.)  So Av'ow-t, IV, 42. Ov ro
Xotr07v yfL\EXXov EeL, l   v a v K p ar r   o v o L v, they were not likely
to have them (provisions) for the jfture (as they thought), unless they
should hold the sea. Id. VII, 60. See LYS. Agor. p. 131, ~ 15.'Edavl.ae a' e' rtsL aper7,v 7rayyeXXoLEEvos apyvplov rparroTro,
he wondered that any demanded money, &c. XEN. Mem. I, 2, 7.
(But in I, 1, 13, we find EOavae 8' eL jN (pavepov aTrols ETrrLv, he
wondered that it was not plain.) "EXalpov aya7rwv E'L risE aco, I rejoiced, being content if any one would let it pass. PLAT. Rep. V, 450
A. OVK jO-XvUO1 El TOLOVTO KCaKv ErTy EL r7c, he was not ashamed
that he was bringing such a calamity on any one. DEM. Mid. 548, 24.
T3 oe pL1oev Eavrp oUvvELBOL E8VIOV ElarjEL, el TiOVr Pa eLpyCWv o  E C KOLVcwveiv TrLac on(ram, it seemed hard, if he was to appear to be implicated, &e.; he thought, 8ElvOv eFTri, El a&oa (~ 49, 1, N. 3). Id.
F. L. 351, 18. (Here to'ot might have been used, like;Oaco above.)
So AESCHIN. Cor. ~ 10. Kal e7yo rTv Evn'vov EpLaKadpLca, el &s dXr)lt6s'XeL ravrqv Trqv reXvqyv Kalovrw et fXeXT   8 8as' giLKE l, I congratulated
him, if he really had this art (as he thought). PLAT. Apol. 20 B
(Here E'xo and &ioa-KoL might have been used.)
(d.) 27rovbas 17roloJ'avro, Esco  a7yy X 0 e i lr)   XEXO \ E6 a els
AaKEGaluova, they made a truce, (to continue) until what had been said
should be announced at Sparta; i. e. eos av dr7rayyeX 0fj, which
might have been retained. XEN. Hell. III, 2, 20.'Qpa-E 8' e7r
KpatLrvPv BopeIv,, 7rpEb e  KvparT''Eaev, Eaos o yE IatlKeGOiL OflXiperoL
p lYE l,  until Ulysses should be among the Phaeacians; i. e.. ws ia
/tyj7. Od. V, 385. So elows O~epalvovro, Od. IX, 376.'A7rrl^yopv
rqea'va d3adXXev, 7rplv Kvpos e'p 7r X r 0 e e  0i pWv, until Cyrus should
be satisfied. XEN. Cyr. I, 4, 14.  (His words were 7rplv av /t7rXr)l(o-0.)  Ol oe evovres E'aTrac-av, orr, rdre rvpyos'AxatWv a/XXos creX06v Tp1wav. 6p/ OEr) ei a Ka ap$eLav IroX;foto, i. e. they stood waiting for the time when, &c. II IV, 335.  (Here 6ro'av 56p14orq, &c.
might be used.)  So I1. II, 794. HIpoVKivrlcrav T0 o-T4loS, S Travo-o.
pdvovs rou  BLwyLov, eirel a-5  d O Io v 7pooproj'arrTas, when they
should see them, &c. XEN. Cyr. I, 4, 21.




~ 77, 2.]       SINGLE DEPENDENT CLAUSES.                   169
0\' yap 8o crfea a irle o Neos TqS a7roLKclts, 7TpLv oq a7rtKacoTat Ef
avTrv Aivrlv. HDT. IV, 156. ('ATrlKOLO might be used.) O0
8e KoplvtALoL ov 7rpoeOv1Aiao-rav tvfzeTXEliv v'^a, 7, t'   Ta T i   V,
3LEopT'TaCroLv. THUc. VIII, 9.
(e.) Kal l'TeE o-r7Ia Loe'oal, o 7rL pa o yaFppoto ardpa IlpoLroto
dp epO o TO, he asked to see the token, which (he said) he was bringing
from Proetus, i. e. he said 4epo/aL. I1. VI, 177. Karriydpeov TV,
ALyvLriT)Tv T7a  e r o L q K 0 L e v ITpoo6rvTs T7V EXXda8a, i. e. they accused
them for what (as they said) they had done. HDT. VI, 49.   So -a
reVTovOo4 e1ir, 1, 44. KaXEi TOV ALtOV, ivYtFiiv 7aXaLtv a'Trepar'Tov
XCovo", LvO' lv  a v vot Lev a0ros, Trv 8e TlKTrovarav Xitro, by which
(as she said) he had perished himself; and had left her the mother, &c.
SoPH. O. T. 1245. (If the relative clause contained merely the
idea of the speaker, MOave and \XLTr would be used. Here no ambiguity can arise from the use of the Aorist Optative. See ~ 74, 2,
N. 1.)
NOTE 1. Causal sentences are usually constructed without reference to this principle. See ~ 81, with Rem.
NOTE 2. The Imperfect and Pluperfect occasionally represent
the Present and Perfect Indicative in this construction, as in ~ 74, 2,
N. 2. Such clauses are simply not included in the indirect discourse.
E. g.'EroZ/oA Ov, eS /ev TOVTCoV TL e'pyao'rO, IKiV hOVvaL, El 8' adroXvel)7, i pXELv, he was ready, if he had done any of these things, to be
punished; but if he should be acquitted, to hold his command. THUc.
VI, 29. (Ei'pyaaro represents etpyaoaaL, while Ei aroXvOelir represents Eav daroXv6ui.)
NOTE 3.'Ay is occasionally retained with relatives and temporal
particles in sentences of this kind, even when the Subjunctive to
which they belonged has been changed to the Optative. See ~ 74,
1, Note 2. E. g.
Torv 8oe Xa/F3LaovTas rTs 6g FLX\Las LLtov avapaTroLoraTas avrTwv a7reKaXEL, 8tO TO ciaayKalov aurols etLvat 8taLXeyeOatL rap' vy a  X v i o t e v
T-ry pLt'Oov, because they were obliged (as he said) to converse with those
from whom they received the pay. XEN. Mem. I, 2, 6.  (Here &iv av,Wac3oLev represents SV Av av Xa3worV.)  Kai P.OL rdo' 9jV Trpoppqra,.. TO
fappaKov TOVTro orCaeLv Eue', FOSj a' v dpT'Xpitorov a  p o  a t p  TrOV.
SoPH. Trach. 687.   (See Schneidewin's note.)'HWiovv avrovs paaTLyovv TOV EK8oOevra, eEO & v ra'lXO)  o e e v avTolS XIyelv. Isoc.
Trap. 361 D. ~ 15. Xa[lpELV w)S av Kal ovK adroKplvato, eos av ra' acr'
fielvlrS Opi)OvraE  0 oE a   a o, you would not answer, until you should
have examined, &c. PLAT. Phaed. 101 D. (The direct thought of
the person addressed would be, e'osw  v cr KceouLac.)  See ~ 34, 1.
It is doubtful whether edi was ever used with the Optative in this
way
2. Upon this principle (~ 77) final and object clauses with
8




170                 INDIRECT DISCOURSE.             [~ 77, 2X
tva, oTrors, Hi, &c., after secondary tenses, admit the double construction of indirect discourse. This appears in the frequent
use of the Subjunctive or the Future Indicative instead of
the Optative in these sentences, after secondary tenses, when
either of these is the form in which the purpose would have
been originally conceived. Thus we may say either \XOev Iva
t8ot or?)\Oev va'8, he came that he might see; the latter
being allowed because the person referred to would himself
have said EpXopa, 1va toco. See ~ 44, 2, ~ 45, and ~ 46, with
the examples.
NOTE. The principles of ~ 74 and ~ 77 apply to clauses which
depend upon final and object clauses, as these too are considered as
standing in indirect discourse. E. g.'EX0ovrS es AaKeaMlFova (eTrpacrarov) o rc  7 o I t a Ca VTo rtcaOplav, iv;,jt. THUc. I, 58. (Here Ld Eeo  might have been used.
See ~ 55, 2.)'Edo0e3ro -yap P/ ol AaKe3atnJstovo UOa, o7rore crapS)
aKovetaLav, OVKTrL d ()Ocrv. Id.I, 91. (Here o7rorav aKcovoa'v,
is changed to O66TT adKov'aelav, although ad/altv is retained by ~ 77,
2.) Meya Tr6 eos e'yevero fp 7FrapaTXa7rXeovres oel H\rovVjO'wo, EL Kal Aw
e V voo v    vr o L fIvevv, ropO&otrV Ta' 7roXet', the fear was great lest
the Peloponnesians as they sailed by, even if under the circumstances
they had not been thinking of remaining, might destroy the cities. Id.
III, 33. (Here LevoovVro is retained by ~ 74, 2.)
"Or og and "O in Indirect Quotations.
~ 78.    1. In a few cases o0roS is used in indirect quo~     e;
tations where we should expect co? or OTI. This occurs
chiefly in poetry. E. g.
Tour' auro /1 mon' pa', ofrso OVK el KaKos. SOPr. O. T. 548.'Ava~, epco pev ovX O7r s TCraovU v7r0 8va'7rvovs LKaVoo. Id. Ant. 223.
So Ant. 685: 07rwo (TV tA AhiyetF.'Avadretoov OK)S pot adLelvcI E(rr
Tavra ovTr) 7roLeoFeva. HDT. 1, 37.  So III, 115.  So onrws c7rrTa
E-la7ra,/aL, PLAT. Euthyd. 296 E.
2. In a few passages in Homer we find o' (the neuter
of o) used for ort.    E. g.
rlyVwcarKWV O ol avTros v'retpeXe XeLpas'AS7roXXav, knowing that Apollo
himself held over him his hands. I. V, 433. E7 vv Kal qels'18/iev o
TOt aOevos OVK E7MteKTov. I1. VILi, 32. Aevaoere yap TO ye 7ravT(s,
o pot yEpaS epxerat a'IXX, that my prize goes elsewhere.  I, 120.
So Od. XII, 295.




~ 81, 1.]   "Or BEFORE DIRECT QUOTATIONS.              171
NOTE.'OSovrvKa and OV"VEK in the tragedians, and ovweKa in Homer, are sometimes used like o'r or ws, that; as ^yyE\XXe 60ov'veKa.
Te0vr7K'Ope'rmS, SOPH. El. 47; I'o't rovro, ovveKca'"EXXtvrs e'L,ev,
Id. Phil. 232. See SoPH. El. 1478, Trach. 934 (owVeEKa with Opt.);
and 11. XI, 21; Odyss. V, 216; XIII, 309.
r/0 T ~ before Direct Quotations.
~ 79. Even direct quotations are sometimes introduced by
oTr, without further change in the construction. "Ort thus
used cannot be expressed in English.  E. g.
O0 8e a7reKpltvaro ort " Ov8' e yevolftiv, 3 KVpe, ot y a.v rore Er.
0SIatGLt." XEN. An. I, 6, 8.'AreKplvaro ort L "*'  e'7rora, oi G,
K..X." Id. Cyr. VII, 3, 3. ELrTE  3 o rt " EL Katpov lKEtS,," 4rl,'rzs,-rjs 8LKrjs aKIKovrrm." Ib. III, 1, 8. "H epolfiev rpos avCrouVS, O r
"'9HISKL Ryap IfJias 1 7roXLt, KaL ovK opSos TrJv 8LiKrl e`Kpvtr," - ravra 
rl EpOv/Iev; PLAT. Crit. 50 B. So Phaed. 60 A. See also HDT
II, 115.
SECTION V.
CAUSAL SENTENCES.
~ 80. Causal sentences express the cause or reason
of something stated    in the leading sentence.      They
may be introduced by orS, 8tort or &SoTrep, ovviKa or
oOovveKfa, and eo, because; or by e7red, e7reLBr, OTe,
O7rOre, evre, and sometimes o0rov, since, seeing that.
REMARK. *Or& and ks in this causal sense must not be confounded with OrT and 6&, that, in indirect quotations; and 6rei,
f;7TreL, (re, and 6OrOTE must not be confounded with the same particles in temporal sentences.
~ ~1.   1. Causal sentences regularly take the Indicative, after both primary and secondary tenses; past
causes being expressed by the past tenses of the Indicative.  The negative particle is ov.   E. g.
Kero 7yap Aavacrv, or, pa Ov'cKovrTa 6oparo. II. I, 56. Xoo'pe



172                   CAUSAL SENTENCES.                 [~ 81, 1.
voS, Tr' ipLtaov'AxatoaY ovOiv  T oerasr.. I., 244. A'rno3cpo 3fl(acr
XEVE, 7rel oVTlravoia-Lv ava Cv evr. l. I, 231. Mj 8' oTrws KXErTre
yJoC,  Tre o0u 7apeXev(eal ovae fLe 7rELtfre. ]. I, 132. Novrov
ava orpaTov (xpOE KaKIOV, OXeKovro 86 Xaol, oVVEKa Tro Xpvl ~l r7 L/ y Cr'
dp7TT-pa'ArpElqr. II. I, 11. Kal rptipr)S  TOL i o aeaypLevr} dvOpraopv
ila L a'XXo co3Epopv crn F7 rt TraXv v 7rX E; ata Trl  atXXo aXvrot a\XX^XoLE aFlT-l Oi eJPrXeovrTes q'IOTt E V TaetL KaI 9r Vrat; XEN. Oec. VIII,
8. 01 EfJLL (lAOL o oVrcOs E'Xovres Ipepl Lov lL8aTEXovcFLv, ov lia rTO tXeiv
e/i", aXXa 8tOTdrp Kat avToi aiv o o vra  eXrlc'TroL ylyveO-OaL. Id. Merm.
IV, 8, 7. (See ~ 42, 2, Note.) rIpos ravra   KpV7TTE /i7qy8e, o  6 3 ravo'
Op&v Kal ardvr' daKoCv 7radvr' avai'rTv o'o'e  povos, i. e. since time
develops all things. SOPH. Hippon. Fr. 280. Me;ya lE ro 6/0o Tpa(/ival, EEIE Kal Tol O)pLo ioS roos rTLs E'Tylyvyrat TWV UvvrpoYWV.
XEN. Mem. II, 3, 4.   OT' ouv vrapaLvouva ov'ev es rXeov ro t, I KETS
E5lyIatl. SOPH. O. T. 918.'O07rUr olr v ToXTL tXLE v Tras IKas v vwfopas
oa re PEOOELV, ElS 86e EKaroos TrLs EKELVrsE aIvvaro  (sc. f o( ), 7rsO ov
XP' 7Tavravs J alvve  avrr; THUC. II, 60.'OrTe rol0VV rTO   OUTrS
E X E tf TI pOG)KEL 7TpOvfWuES fdFXEIV aKOV'ELV TW) /3OVXO.LEVV GVoJLa3oVXVEfLV.
DEM. 01. I, 9, 3. For eSre, since, see SOPH. Aj. 715, 0. C. 84; for
giov, see HDT. I, 68.
2. When, however, it is implied that the cause is assigned by some other person than the speaker, the principle of indirect discourse (~ 77, 1) applies to causal
sentences.
This has no effect upon the form after primary tenses;
but after secondary tenses it allows the verb to stand in
the Optative, in the tense originally used by the person
who assigned the cause.        E. g.
TOyv IepLKXEa EK(iKLOV, GL crrpaTr)yTOs Wv OVK Fr E  dy O   l, they abused
Pericles, because being general he did not lead them out. TTuc. II,
21. (This states the reason assigned by the Athenians for reproaching Pericles: if Thucydides had wished to assign the cause merely
on his own authority, he would have used orL oVK enTeyIev.)  Toi'r
U'vvoVSras EOOKEL IrOLLV adrEXEfoOaL Ta V vo olcv, ETreLTrep 7yr ac vi  o
fr)v aiv rore &v irpaTTroev OeovE 8LaXaOElv. XEN. Mem. I, 4, 19.
(See ~ 74, 2, N. 1.)  Oicaa ETraiveoavra avrov ("'Oiripov) rov'Ayalpvova,'s aOLahXs ev E i  dyaaos, because (as he said) he was a good
king. Id. Symp. IV, 6.   So ws e vp  Kol, because (as he said) he
hadfound, HDT. I, 44.
REMARK. We should suppose that in causal sentences of the
second class (~ 81, 2) the mood and tense by which the cause would
have been originally stated might also be retained, as in ordinary
indirect discourse; so that in the first example above (THUC. II. 21)
or& OVKC ir e i   y e might also be used, in the same sense as orT oi




~ 82 ]            EXPRESSION OF A WISH.                  173
T re 4Cyot. This, however, seems to have been avoided, to prevent the ambiguity which would arise from the three forms,'re-jyev,
7ret6yot, and EiTeayel. It will be remembered that the first form,
which is the regular one in causal sentences of the first class (~ 81, 1),
is allowed only by exception in indirect quotations (~ 70, 2, N. 2);
for in indirect discourse the tenses of the Indicative regularly denote time present, past, or future relatively to the leading verb; while
in causal sentences (as in most other constructions) they regularly
denote time absolutely present, past, or future. (See ~ 9.)
NOTE 1. The Optative in causal sentences appears to have been
used only after orT, c&, and EireL  It is not found in Homer.
NOTE 2. If a cause is to be expressed by an apodosis in which
the Indicative or Optative with av is required, those forms can of
course follow the causal particles. E. g.
Aeopza ovv cov lrapaptelvat fplv -c s eyw ova a v evors r87ov aK ov -
o at p.  o-o o, I beg you then to remain with us; as there is not one whom
I should hear more gladly than you. PLAT. Prot. 335 D. NWv a
E7reLTrj OVK eOEX'ES Kal EfpOL TlS aTrXoXta Trrl Kal OVK a V otos r E rtl v oQ
7rapatiELvat c7roreLvovTr palKpovs Xo'yovs -  Oe'i V  yap iroti /E 8EL-e/&L
MEre KaL Tavr az'lo o Ws OVK dajC8iS Oov IKOvov. Ib. 335 C.
NOTE 3. For relative causal sentences, see ~ 65, 4. For the
causal use of the Participle, see ~ 109, 4.
SECTION VI.
EXPRESSION OF A WISH.
REARIK. The Greek has one form to express a wish referring to a future object, and another to express one referring
to a present or past object which (it is implied) is not or was
not attained.  To the former class belong such wishes as 0
that he may come! - 0 that this may happen! - Utinam veniat;
to the latter, such as 0 that this had happened! -0 that this
were true! - Utinam hoc factum esset, - Utinam hoc verum
esset.
~ 82. If the wish refers to the future, the Optative is
usol after the particles of wishing dee or el yap (nega



174               EXPRESSION OF A WISH.                [~ 82.
tively, etle /",'e lap   y, or simply ia), 0 that, 0 if,
would that (0 that not, &c.).   E60e and el yap may, however, be omitted; and thus the Optative often stands
alone to express a wish.
The Present Optative refers to a continued or repeated action or state in the future; the Aorist (which
is the most common) refers to a momentary or single
act in the future. E. g.
At yap LfoL Trooro-jve Oeoi;lvaptv 7rapa e ev, 0 that the Gods
would clothe me with so much strength! Od. III, 205. A^'' oV'ToS,
Ev'Maale, f)tov Adl irarp& y, ol o, mayest thou become in like manner
a friend to father Zeus. Od. XIV, 440.'Y1/zLr fev Orol 8o l'OOXVL7rta &bloar' E'XoVTres CKwtpcat IIptiao/zo roXtL, es o8' o'Ka8' iKecoOat, may
the Gods grant you, &c..I 18. Mi) pfav dCTrov&i ye KCt adKXeiWs
a7r o X o lL7. II. XXII, 304. To,pev vvv ravra 7r p oC o o  TC raTp ei
fepo-l Xe~rs, may you for the present continue to do what you now have
in hand. HDt. VII, 5. er7-co rTpvraveL, J fr7KETL  ~ V Iy, or may
I no longer live. ARIST. Nub. 1255. N LKOc 7' g rL 7raao-v V/il;IeXXeL (rVvoLeIV, and may that opinion prevail, &c. DEM. Phil. I,
55, 6. TeOvairiv, ore /Iot 1rKeTL 71  ravra peXoL. MIMINERM. I, 2.
IlUovo'tov 8 voltiLot ifi TryOV ooo. PLAT. Phaedr. 279 C.'aQ rar,
y eyoLo irarpov evrvtxcrrepos- SOPH. Aj. 550. Ovo p vKir1caLpL r
ey  Kal vo    o I tL7v a-oo6s, on this condition may I gain the prize
(in this case) and be (always) considered wise. ARIST. Nub. 520.
(See Note 4.) E'0', Co XTTre, l\Xovs?IV ye voLo. XEN. Hell. IV,
1, 38. El yap yyevoLr/ eLKO, TE av, cr ov veKpos. EuR. Hippol.
1410..vvEV yKoL ipeV ravra [S [3ovXofLeOa. THuc. VI, 20.
Avros adeLt 7rloTT'oEC KaL aitavra, Av EyBO fovXAtopa.-'AXa /3o VX -
te L,, may you only be willing! PLAT. Euthyd. 296 D. So e'ev,
be it so,-well.
MqKr''7IreT''OVo't Kadprq  otloo'rV lEr, l 7T7r' Erf TrTXeaXoior
r-ar/p K~KX~.evos e'trjov, then may the head of Ulysses no longer
remain on his shoulders, and no longer may I be called the father of
Telemachus. I1. II, 259. (See Rem. 1.)
From its use in wishes the Optative Mood (Efy cX o Ls ev K LKT  )
received its name.
REMARK 1. The Future Optative was not used in wishes in
classic Greek. The Perfect was probably not used except in the
signification of the Present (~ 17, N. 3), as in the last example. If
such a phrase as e'l e  vEvi 7&  K o L were used, it would mean 0 that it
may prove (hereafter) that he has been victorious! See ~ 18, 1.
REMARK 2. In Homer we occasionally find the Present Optative
in a wish referring to present time, where later writers would have
used the Imperfect Indicative. E. g.




~ 82.]                    OPTATIVEr                        175
El yap yowv OV7Tc ye Ato6 7ralS aiyIOX.31o
E'i v        7FvaTra'dvra, r K o  " ~  e e7rorTva "Hpi,
T o L F1 v 8' 4s) T'er' vai K'Arva  Ka ATrXXov,'Qs rv?jjLeprq rpje KaKO'V q)epeL'ApyeLOw'v,
0 that I were the son of Zeus, and that Hera were my mother, and that
I were honored as Athene and Apollo are honored, &c. n. XIII, 825.
(Here T-KO is nearly equivalent to /Trp e cq: cf. c reKogovca, 0 mother.
quoted under ~ 83, 1.)
s yepov, e'LO, os Ovpos evt crTqOeofacnL (fXoariv
ZQs rot yovvaO' E'IroTo  3 tr] 3 e rot efL treos' eEl,''AXXai Or yavpas TErpeL o6iolov'  s oQ'eXev TLs'Avs3p& a\XXos EXELY, or 8~ KovpoTrpoLrt IeLetvat.
rThe idea is, O that thy knees equalled thy heart in strength, &c. 11.
IV, 313. At the end we have the more regular form, s0;feX v rts
a\Xos'Xetv, would that some other man had it (y7pas). ~ 83, 2, N. 1.
E'   s CO'  f 6 0o l,u, 3lr) 8t E MOL a E'pTE80s'0")7
T&C KE rdaX' davr)o'ee FdaXqr KopvOaWOXos "EKTcop,
0 that I were again so young, &c. Il. VII, 157. See VII, 133.
For a similar exceptional use in Homer of the Present Optative
in protasis, see ~ 49, 2, N. 6 (b). The optatives in the examples
quoted above may perhaps be explained as referring to the future,
and translated, 0 that I might be, &c.
NOTE 1. In the poets, especially Homer, the Optative without
e'We or el ya'p sometimes expresses a concession or permission; and
sometimes an exhortation, in a sense approaching that of the Imperative. E.g.
Av9rtu'Apyeljv'EXE'Vrv Mev4Xaos a' y o Tro, Menelaus may take back
Argive Helen. II. IV, 19. T e 0 va lr s, d IIpolr',  KaKTave BEXXEpofbriqv, either die, or kill Bellerophontes. 1. VI, 164.'AXXa TLE
AoXhov KaX E;oLe, let some one call Dolios. Od. IV, 735. So
AEscH. Prom. 1049 and 1051.
NOTE 2. The poets sometimes use the simple el (without -Oe or
iyap) with the Optative in wishes. E. g.'AXX' e'l TLS Kail rov'o'Ee perTOLXoeIVOS   Ka e (T EV~.. X, 111.
E'.ot y vo T r o bOyyos s'v fpaXloov. EUR. Hec. 836.
NOTE 3. The poets, especially Homer, sometimes use C s before
the Optative in wishes. This ds cannot be expressed in English;
and it is not to be translated so (as if it were written cos), or confounded with ovTwTs used as in Note 4. E. g.'s2 a ordXotvo Kali a'os', OtIs roTavra yep e~oi, 0 that any other also
may perish, &c. Od. I, 47. See Od. XXI, 201.'Qs o rdae 7ropwv
oXotr', EL LOLt Ots' rai8' av&iv. SOPH. El. 126.
NOTE 4. Oircos, thus, on this condition, may be prefixed to the
Optative in protestations, where a wish is expressed upon some condition; which conditicu is usually added m another clause. E. g.




176              EXPRESSION OF A WISH.               [~ 82.
0 v Or s vatcr8e rorcovy, pt) 7repdl8qrTe pe, may you enjoy these on this
condition, - do not neylect me. DEM. Aph. II, 842, 9.
Note 5. The Optative in wishes belonging under this head never
takes the particle ai. If a wish is expressed in the form of an ordinary apodosis, as trios &v 3Xooli)v, how gladly I would perish (i. e. if
I could), it does not belong here, but under ~ 52, 2.
~ 83. 1. If the wish refers to the present or the
past, and it is implied that its object is not or was not
attained, the secondary tenses of the Indicative are
used. The particles of wishing here cannot be omitted.
The distinction between the Imperfect and Aorist Indicative is the same as in protasis (~ 49, 2); the Imperfect referring to present time or to a continued or
repeated action in past time, and the Aorist to a momentary or single action in past time. E. g.
EOe Trovro eirol l, would that he were now doing this, or would
that he had been doing this; eo8e TOUTO Eiro  I  v O  a,, would that he had
done this; elO? v dXleY, would that it were true; e{We L E y eyvr o,
would that it had not happened.
EtO' e Xes, 3 reKocra, eX7rlTovs Opevras, would that thou, 0
mother, hadst a better understanding. EUR. El. 1061. El y(p ro-aVT-Y va LIav eLtXOv, would that I had so great power. Id. Ale. 1072.
E1Oe oot, c 3 lKplKX\e, Trore o'VveyeYl v O. XEN. Mem. I, 2, 46.
1'o, big yas ird $evas Oavelv e Xp cE s, 0 that thou hadst not chosen to
die in a foreign land. SorP. O. C. 1713.
REMARK. The Indicative cannot be used in wishes without e"Oe
or l yaip, as it would occasion ambiguity; this cannot arise in the
case of the Optative, which is not regularly used in independent
sentences without alv, except in wishes. The last example quoted
above shows that the Indicative with,U7 alone can be used in negative wishes. (This passage is often emended; see, however, Hermann's note on the passage, and on Eun. Iph. Aul. 575.)
2. The Aorist cw0'eXov and sometimes the Imperfect
4/eXXov of Oei\bo, debeo, may be used with the Infinitive in wishes of this class, with the same meaning
as the secondary tenses of the Indicative. The Present
Infinitive is used when the wish refers to the present or
to continued or repeated past action, and the Aorist
(rarely the Perfect) when it refers to the past.




~ 83, 2.]      4aeXov WITH THE INFINITIVE.                 177
"!2eXov or cwfeX\ov may be preceded by the particles
of wishing, eWe, es ryap, or /u   (not ov).    E. g.
Qj2Xcoe troo 7r o L re v, would that he were (now) doing this (lit. he
ought to be doing it), or would that he had (habitually) done this
(lit. he ought to have done this). "Q2ceXe roro -rotj o at, would that
he had done this.
f2 Slv   e fXov rptrarrv'rep EXoWv &o oFLaort,popav valety, ot l  avape S Cdot f/'o p erva  ot rTO''Xovro, 0 that I were living with even a
third part, sc., and that those men were safe who then perished. Od.
IV, 97. M7 o     X o v VLKV TrotLC' 8  de OX, 0 that I had not been
victorious in such a contest. Od. XI, 548. See II. XVIII, 86, a'
eXeS (E  ai bV a iO val ev, IIrXe7Xv  Ovlr^'jv dyayacr8Oat. TTrv
O 0 e' X V Vej-c-oL K araK ra.e v "Apreis tw, 0 that Artemis had slain
her, &c. I1. XIX, 59.'0 O   e o 6 a L  eO X o v T8', jEpa, 0 that I had
perished on that day. SOPH. O. T. 1157. El'0' c bc X''Apyovs /A?
ta r r da' 0 a t crKa()os KoXXov Js arav Kvaveas vufirX\rydSaas. EUR.
Med. 1. El yap ~(e~ov oLO re eelat oi 7roXXoL ra L eylcTra KaKa
e'pydcEo-ar, 0 that the multitude were able, &c. PLAT. Grit. 44 D
M} 7rior'  EXov XL7rr  V t)v rv  KVpov, 0 that I never had left Scyros
SOPH. Phil. 969. AWO' aLa Tarvres "EKTroposy a q Xe  a1VT'L Odv n 0, 
vr)i w  7re a da 0at, would that ye all had been slain instead of Hector.
11. XXIV, 253.'AvSpos'erra   p)~\eXX ov dFJ,4elvovoS ef va at ACKt,
os'1r v'el frwt reC KaL altXcea IroXX advOpC7rov, 0 that 1 were the wife of
a better man, who knew, &c. II. VI, 350. (For ~78, see ~ 64, 2.)
For the origin of this construction, see ~ 49, 2, N. 3 (b) and (c).
NOTE 1. The secondary tenses of the Indicative are not used in
Homer to express wishes; 6&qeXov with the Infinitive being generally used when it is implied that the wish is not or was not fulfilled.
(See ~ 82, Rem. 2.) The latter construction is used chiefly by the
poets.
NOTE 2. Neither the secondary tenses of the Indicative nor the
form with WbeXov in wishes can (like the Optative) be preceded by
the simple el (without -6e or yap).'Qs, used as in ~ 82, N. 3, often precedes cSeCXov, &c. in Homer,
and rarely in the Attic poets. E. g.
HXv0es ECK 7roX)\pov; cos-, iCXe avro0' oacraat... III, 428.'Qs.v tecXX''EXevtv adrh fvAov oXeao0at. Od. XIV, 68.'LQ 7rpiv &ad;at y' ic)eXes JCsroas &aappaylvac. ARIST. Ran. 955.
REMARK.     Expressions of a wish with the Optative or Indicative after CeLc, el yap, &c. were originally protases with the
apodosis suppressed. Thus, el yap -yVOLTO, 0 that it may happen
(lit. if it would only happen), implies an apodosis like eCbvX4:s &
8*                                  L




178   IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS. [~ 83, 2.
fqvy, Ishould be fortunate, or Ishould rejoice; e yap eyveTro, 0
that it had happened, implies one like eurvTX  a&v'v (if it had
only happened, [ should have been fortunate).  It will be seen
that the use of the moods and tenses is precisely the same as
in the corresponding classes of protasis (~ 50, 2;~ 49, 2). The
analogy with the Latin is the same as in protasis:- E yhp
7ro0ro T7OLoit (or roLa-e&Ev), 0 si hoc faciat, 0 that he may do this;
fl yap TovTo efrolet, 0 si hoc faceret, 0 that he were doing this;
el yap TOVTO e7rolrfaev, 0 si hoc fecisset, O that he had done this;
el yap /l ey7EVETo, utinam ne factum esset, 0 that it had not happened.
The form with c(Zeov and the Infinitive, on the other hand,
is an apodosis with a protasis implied. See ~ 49, 2, N. 3, b.
SECTION VII.
IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS, EXHORTa
TIONS, AND PROHIBITIONS.
~ 84. The Imperative is used to express a com.
mand, an exhortation, or an entreaty. E. g.
Aeye, speak thou. qcIye, begone!'EXierco, let him come. XatOovToV, let them rejoice. "EpXEa 0ov K\X(TirV IIr/Xr?7aid'AXXov.
11. I, 322. Zev, ZeU, Oewpoi)s TWve 7rpayaTdro o  yevo. AESCI.
Choeph. 246.
NOTE 1. The Imperative is often emphasized by aye (or
ayETr), 0f6pe, or 101, come. These words may be in the singular when the Imperative is in the plural, and in the second
person when the Imperative is in the third. E. g.
Eit7 ayE Lo Kal TOV~, 0  V TK'o, fov reco,  ts'. 11. III, 192.'AXX' aye,Ailflvee TCrvreS, EvKvfjlaeS'AXnaol. II. II, 331. Bdac' L0t,
OVXe OVeLtp, Ooas e7r vYra'AXao)v. I1. II, 8.'Aye rI) aKOvarTe.
XEN. Apol. ~ 14. "AyeTe 8eTrvT-are. XEN. Hell. V, 1, 18. 4ip'
eirTE ho) /io. SOPH. Ant. 534. aepe 8  uioi Troie elire. PLAT. Crat.
385 B. "I 0   ) X6Mov Xi)fv Trp&nov TOrTO. XuN. Mem. III, 3, 3.
"IO. vvv 7rapIorTao-ov. ARIST. Ran. 1378. "IO1 vvv Xt3avaroYv 8eipo
TLS Kal rvo 8drw. Ib. 871.




~ 85.]                  SUBJUNCTIVE.                      179
REMARK.    NEpe is not used in this way in Homer.
NOTE 2. The poets sometimes use the second person of the Imperative with 7r a s in hasty commands. E. g.
"AKove rra s, hear, every one! ARIST. Thesm. 372. Xopet cvpo
Irras vnrjlpErTs' TOe&ve, 7rale' qrevo6vrlv Trls pOL O6r. Id. Av. 1187.'Aye al ocltcora -ras dvrip. Id. Ran. 1125.
NOTE 3.    The Imperative is sometimes used in relative
clauses depending on an interrogative (usually olara), where
we should expect the relative clause to be completed by aci
with an Infinitive, and the Imperative to stand by itself. E. g.'AXX' ol0' o  p a c o v; TW OKEXEXt Eve rI'v 7rerptv, but do you know
what to do? strike the rock with your leg! ARIST. Av. 54. (We
should expect here ol'0O' O EL hpaao'; bpaorov K.. X., do you know
what to do? if so, do it: viz. strike the rock, &c.)  Olar-'' /ot CrVL7rp a ov, do you know what you must do for me? if so, do it. EUR.
Heracl. 451. Oo-Od vvv a /oi e v e- 0; 8ecLa roils evotcL& rpo'TOes,
do you know what must be done for me (a Bel /UOL yeveIoOat)? let it be
done then (yeveroOw), viz. put chains on the strangers. Id. Iph. Taur.
1203.  Ola0' Cs  ro1 ro-ov;  SOPH. O. T. 543. (Compare EUR.
Cycl. 131, olcaO' ov op apcia tr; dost thou know what thou art to do?)
NOTE 4. The Imperative sometimes denotes a mere concession,
and sometimes a supposition (where something is supposed to be
true for argument's sake). E. g.
n     XoVreL Tr yap Kar OtKOV * ev 8  7r, TOVT ovrov To Xatpetv, r'XX'
cyco Karrvov (TKtaS OVK a&v irptair?7. SOPHi. Ant. 1168. npooet7rdrar
rtva' )XLKCsOE  Tre apXowv Kai 6 i8tTrrls, suppose that both the ruler and
the private man address, &c. XEN. Hier. VIII, 3.
~ 85.    The first person of the Subjunctive (usually
in the plural) is used in exhortations, supplying the
want    of a   first person    to  the   Imperative.     A ye
(aye're) or     ep e, come, often precedes.     E. g.
IICOjLf, let us go. #IoMeyv, let us see. OIZKasi 7rp bvP vqV(r ve Fe a, TO7roe 8' e & i e v, let us sail homeward with our ships, and leave
him. I. II, 236.'AXX' el'OKEIE, 7rX\eCO/,E, 6pLdCITOc raxtU. SOPIr.
Phil. 526.'ETrlaxerov,,u af0oLFev. Ib. 539.'ErcrXes, f  L/3aXo0eLV    eS aXX\\o  Xdyov. EUR. El. 962. IIapotidv Tr ovv' crrep
Kvpos KEXEVet, adKcroi& v re V' &)V /aXd-Tra BvvUqcod-aLEa KCarLTXfv 
aei, 7r a p eC X O   re 17aJS  avTroV, K.r.X. XEN. Cyr. VIII, I, 5.'AXX' aye', cwE s   Ev eyov c'Erco, 7retGofJLe0a T7racrs. II. II, 139.'AXX' dyEe arj Kai vCL,t E 0p  E Oa OVpL8OE aXKe. I.. IV, 418. 4 pe
6    a r e p a v o e XoyovE. EUR. Androm. 333. AE6OTE: blXot, rov
feiProV;poPcOa. Od. V11i, 133.




180    IMPERATIVE AND SUBJLU.AIVE IN COMMIANDS. [~ 85.
NOTE 1. The first person singular of the Subjunctive, when it is
used in this way, almost always takes ai' y  (ay E 7e) or ( p e, unless
some other Imperative precedes. E. g.'AXXa' Aye 8f rTa X'p/atar' a p Lt  r p   K aL'Lo p  a. Od. XIII,
215.'AXX' ayeO' V/plv Trexe eVelKcO 8Owp]pqXOvat. Od. XXII, 139.
d ar      e OrrE OTTL iXLra, 7rv'Xa'AAi'ao  rE pi o o, bury me as
quickly as possible; let me pass the gates of Hades. I1. XXIII, 71.
(Np' adKotoco, come, let me hear. HDT. I, 11. 2iya, 7rvoas pdaic'
fEpe rrpbs ovs j3dXco. EuR. Here. F. 1059.'E7r  X Er avbgv 7rT
ewAev c KO Ic/adco. Id. Hippol. 567. Aeyc r8q, 7w. PLAT. Rep. V,
457 C.
NOTE 2. The second and third persons of the Subjunctive are
not regularly used in affirmative exhortations, the Imperative being
the regular form in these persons. (For the Aorist Subjunctive
with,' in prohibitions, see ~ 86.)
In some cases the Optative in wishes, in the second and third
persons, has almost the force of an exhortation. (~ 82, N. 1.)
In a few exceptional cases, we find even the second person of the
Subjunctive in exhortations, like the first person, but always accompanied by q e p e. E.g.
ep', s rEcKV, oV, Kal TO rTsj varov Fa dl s. SOPr. Phil. 300.
For the Future Indicative used elliptically in exhortations after
&rco, see ~ 45, Note 7.
REMARK. The preceding rules apply only to afirmative exhortations: these should be carefully distinguished from prohibitions with
pi (~ 86). The use of the Imperative in prohibitions is generally
confined to the Present tense.
~ 86. In prohibitions, in the second and third persons, the Present Imperative or the Aorist Subjunctive is
used after,   and its compounds. The former expresses
a continued or repeated, the latter a single or momentary prohibition.
In the first person (where the Imperative is wanting)
the Present Subjunctive is allowed. E. g.
Mt) 7r o'e t rouro, do not do this (habitually); It' 70ro L 7 ar T  roTro,
do not do this (single act).'EeauSa, lM Ke  v 0V  oy', iYa e'8opeYv A~pto.
II. I, 363.'Arpei)q, i t      e v'   aev' erorafleros ad(fa eiTreL. I1. IV,
404.'ApyECot, JpL rc rL  EO lETE T O Vpe lovp   aXK. 1. IIV, 234. ELre
LLO& Eo/tfOEvp vqrFepre'a, / ra' ErrTKE;V:'qtS. Od. XV, 263. "H&7 vDr
ac 7rai&l &'ros pdco, pri1' e7rLKevOE. Od. XVI, 168. MtlqKET vv NO0
av8L Xe~ycoieOa, pM]' eri r3qpov EaAf3aXX iboea Fpyov. 1. II, 435
Ypte ie Ts 711y Tr78E () j3apvv KOTOV a K7 7 (T-O e )  6VuLO V r 6~




~ 87.]                PROHIBITIONS.                     181
rJ8' aEKIIpTfrav 7 t $q r e. AESCH. Eumen. 800. Ov ir' OKV fE,
IT)r' dari e'oS KaKOY. SOPl. 0. C. 731. Mi 0affOe vo4ov jAilv a,
adXa roVs {3XarTrovTas vfais X;ucare. DEM. 01. III, 31, 11. (Here
0Oee would not be allowed by ~ 86; although X;aare, in a mere
exhortation, is regular, by ~ 84.) Mq Kara rovs Vo'FOVS 8 L K a f )  r 
ui 3or6 i (r7- re Tc 7re7rov0ore &eivd o p  I EvOpKELre. Id. Mid. 582,
15. M) xrpiyr, vral, ioa. ARIST. Nub. 613. Kai Liqef.S  7ro X adf
ife /oVXFaOL Xa&i~v. Isoc. Phil. p. 101 A. ~ 93. Kai /r/Uls olevOi 
/' ayYvoeI. Id. Paneg. p. 55 C. ~ 73.
NOTE 1. (a.) With the exception of the first person (~ 86), the
Present Subjunctive is not used in prohibitions.
An elliptical use of the Subjunctive (sometimes the Present) after
pf) or orcov /, with a verb of fearing understood, must not be confounded with this. (See ~ 46, N. 4.)
(b.) The second person of the Aorist Imperative is very seldom
found in prohibitions; the third person is less rare. E. g.
M    iq3' i ia o"e!J3aapLs vltKcraroo. SoPH. Aj. 1334. Mq8f 0o'o,Af X -dr-o). AESCH. Prom. 332.  So Prom. 1004. Kal r)18flc
Vpzuv Trpo' oK TCK rdra7 ) arXo. PLAT. Apol. 17 C.
Mi) it E 0o0 V, cA ZeI, T-i ET7rLOVS fXxri8os. ARIST. Thes. 870.
NOTE 2. The first person singular even of the Aorist Subjunctive in prohibitions is rare, and is found only in the poets. E. g.
Mrj (7, yEpoY, KolXDL(yv Eyo) r'apa vr1V( r K sXE. I1. 1, 26.'AXXd
E K -oyEe T/86e y/T 7rdp0 pev(oov 4s raXtora, 8p' aTrov 0 d v o. SOPH.
Tr. 801.  2 itOC,, 8T' daaKT 0w. I. O C. 174. (This may
be explained also by ~ 46, N. 4.)
SECTION VIII.
SUBJUNCTIVE (LIKE FUTURE INDICATIVE) IN INDEPENDENT
SENTENCES. -   INTERROGATIVE     SUBJUNCTIVE. -Ov f/h7
WITH SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE.
~ 87. In the Homeric language the Subjunctive is
sometimes used in independent sentences, with the
force of a weak Future Indicative. E. g.
Ov yap ire roiovs'U3ov cdvpas, ove oa o f at, for I never yet saw,
nor shall I (or can I) ever see such men. 11. I, 262.'YFthLv v TCvreov& irepiKXUvra 5p' ov o  v o, I will enumerate the gifts, &c. Il. IX,




182            INDEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE.               [~ 87.
121. Avcrotat es'A/3ao, Kal Vy veKveO(r' ( ac vco, I will descend to
Hades, and.hine among the dead (said by the Sun). Od. XII, 383.
(Iere the Future varoofpa and the Subjunctive cfaevco hardly differ
in their force.) Kal irore rtS E'rr oa v, and some one will perhaps
say. 1I. VI, 459. (In vs. 462, referring to the same thing, we have
Ws TOTrE tvS EpeeL.)  OvcK eO' OSTro dvqp, 0' E'OETa, o&u8  7  e  y -
rat, OS KeV TrX.efUXi aX vW UE Xepas EnroFreL. Od. XVI, 437. Mv,EroLaL oue X 9 a at'An7rXXovovs'KcTolo, I will remember and will
not forget the far-shooting Apollo. Hymn. in Apoll. 1.
REMARK. The Aorist is the tense usually found in this construction. The first person singular is the most common, and instances
of the second person are very rare.
NOTE. This Homeric Subjunctive, like the Future Indicative, is sometimes joined with a'v or Ki to form  an apodosis.
This enabled the earlier language to express an apodosis with
a sense between that of the Optative with aSv and that of the
simple Future Indicative, which the Attic was unable to do.
(See ~ 38, 2.) E. g.
EL 8e KcE pf7) Corjv, Eyc') Ne Kicv' avros  (fXAat, but if he does not
give her up, I will take her myself. Ii. I, 324. (Here SXoa/at KEv has
a shade of meaning between eXolipTv KEv, I would take, and alp'a-ouaL, 1 will take, which neither the Attic Greek nor the English can
express.)  Compare'7v X' vutv crd(fa e'(' I, oTre rpodrpos ye TrvoOlrlv,
Od. II, 43, with rv X' filtv oua a ETr o t, OT Trporepos ye nrvOoio, II,
31,-both referring to the same thing. See also II. II, 54; and
VI, 448, the last example under ~ 59, N. 1.
~ 8S.    The first person of the Subjunctive is used in
questions of doubt, where the speaker asks himself or
another what he is to do.    The negative particle is IA-t.
In Attic Greek this Subjunctive is often introduced by
9oV\Xe or 3ovtxeo0e (poetic O0XeC~   or 0eXere).   E. g.
E L7rCO roro; shall I say this? or /ov\XeL e'tLo roro o; do you wish
that I should say this? Mi TOrTO r o t Co IL, v, shall we not do this? TI
T M  rm; or rL fovXEor-e Etro; what shall I say? or what do you waist
me to say? For the Future in such questions, see ~ 25, 1, N. 4.
Inj yap eyw, cLAE TEKVO( l'; Tre~v 8aeO' liK Of at dvap6v ot Kpavaiv
IOaKrIv Kdra KOCpaveovutv; H LOVS'cr ivprTpOS La Ka OcOO 61Omo;
whither shall Igo? to whose house shall I come? &c. Od. XV, 509.?H
avros Kel0Oa; fdcrat 8' tue Ov/i us davoyet. Od. XXI, 194.'Q Zeu,
ri XAoB; 7roit pevCv F X OBO, irarep; SOPH. O. C. 310.  Q/nol 6ycb,
ira     ra; i ra Cr; 7ra KEX (O; EuR. Ilec. 1056. IoiL T par, a l;
rrol To pvO; lb. 1099. E L' rc TL TOt ElwoorwY, o   oEarrorTa;
ARIST. Ran. 1. Tiva yap jIapTvpa /AELC(o rapdacXW)uAat; DEM.




88.]         INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.                 183
F. L. 416. 7. M    q8', eav ri wcoYcati,.. EpolA at oro(oov ro Xel; may
Inot ask, &c.?  Mr81' ar oKpl v op a otv,, (iv ary TIE EpcorTa vCoS, Ed
edB; and may I not answer, &c. XEN. Mem. I. 2, 36. M t o0 o- ( -
ueOa ouv KipvKa, ~ a7r6s aCvero); PLAT. Rep. IX, 580 B. Metvovra avapa 7rarV aforapa e4eav0e ovULTroTurJv, q ad r i  ete v1; will you
receive him, or shall we go away? Id. Symp. 212 E.'Apa i77 a i a X v v -
0 tz ev r-V TIeprCav (fao-tXa fIlra-aarOaL; shall we then be ashamed
to imitate the kiing of the Persians? XEN. Oecon. IV, 4.
I1ov 8o) 3o0Vez KaOiodlj.tvot dvayv&fLev; where wilt thou that we
sit down and read? PLAT. Phaedr. 228 E. (So 263 E.)   Bo VX E
OVV E 7r iKOrt fo E  Op 0OV o'8r 7 TrO wa-rov iort; XEN. Mem. 1I, 5, 1.
BouAXec Xdaftcoat 8,ra Kail Otyco r'i oov; SOPH. Phil. 761. BovXtecrO' E7Creo7rEoroo/v; EUR. Hec. 1042. eEXEEt I IeWL(ev avrov
KavLaKovc-olfet yoov; SoPH.El.81. Ti o-ot OEX e XL 8r' eZKaOC;
Id. O. T. 651. O   ~Xere Onpaor!1e6Oa 1levOfEws'Ayavriv rlrTEp EKt
(faK:Xev1aTorwv, XadpLv T aVaKTr cotpfev; Eun. Bacch. 719. So with
KEXeVereT:'AXXia Tros; eL'rCO KEXVE re Kal OVKc OpyLiLcr0; do you
command me to speak, &c.? DEM. Phil. III, 123, 1.
In PLAT. Rep. II, 372 E, we find foAXeear   and a Subjunctive with
Il in protasis: l o8' av t  o \ Xe 6  KaL )XeyrIalvovo'raOv 7rXv   p -
oT co ev, ovieyv droKoXELUt, i. e. if you will have us examine, &c.
(~49, 1.)
REMARK. In this construction there is an implied appeal to some
person (sometimes to the speaker himself), so that I3ovXet or some
similar word can always be understood, even if it is not expressed.
Homeric examples in which this is not the case fall naturally under
~87.
In the later Greek the classic form OEXere e'ro; was developed
into OAeerE i'va (or OaxUc) E'rI-o;- from which comes the modern
Greek OeXere va er'Co; or va ECrt7; will you have me speak?
NOTE 1. The third person of the Subjunctive is sometimes
used in questions, but less frequently than the first. This
happens chiefly when a speaker refers to himself by rli. Examples of the second person are very rare. E. g.
loT(TpOv IE T-s, AiLrX",v TS TroJXECo  EX6pv rLov fE Lva ); i. e.
shall we call you the city's enemy, or mine? DEM. Cor. 268, 28. Elra
ravO Ol'TO  e L TEcr 0  t r VffrEp avTrov rTe rmOLFL, Kal ra T)vs orTs rr ovqplas epya e4)' eavrovs d va8  o vTa; i. e. are these men to believe,
&c.; and are they to assume, &c. Id. Androt. 613, 3. Ti rTI elva
roZro q0; Id. F. L. 369, 12. e;yarep, 7roLi rs )povri'os?X 60; SOPH.
O. C. 170. IToi rT oav   vy,; Id  _j. 403. IoeoOev o0 rTi TavrT77
aIp rat la Xh; PLAT. Phil. 15 D. IIls TI Tr el0Trat; I1. I,
150. (II&s ovv'r' E'7;7r7 o (rTvve'ToraXMla KaKtOS; EUR. Here. F.
1417.)  See riiger, Vol. I, ~ 54, 2; Notes 4 and 5.
NOTE 2. The Subjunctive is often used in ths question




184              DOUBLE NEGATIVE Oh u         q.        [~ 88.
ri sra c; what will become of me? or what harm will it do me?
literally, what shall I undergo? E. g.
Q. LOt Eyco, rl 7ra 6co; r v 7iv [lot O  iKLra yeV7Trat; Od. V, 465. So
II. XI, 404. Ti 7r adO; rl 83 b8p; TLe l  aOco/ aL; AESCH. Sept.
1057.  TI rd0ao rrX itoa; Id. Pers. 912; ARIST. Plut. 603. Ti
IrdOw; rl 8e pyLroLaL; oio'. SOPH. Trach. 973. To /eXov, eL Xp'f
irt l       o p  a   y  * r p  7r0 aO; I shall suffer what is to come, if it ust
be; for what harm can it do me  EUR. Phoen. 895. (The difference between this and the ordinary meaning of rda-Xo is here seen.)'QtLoXoyr7Ka~ rl yap 7r d co; PLAT. Euthyd. 302 D. So in the
plural, HDT. IV, 118; TI yap 7r a0 8 e v E  u /3ovXko/zpfcov V/ LP rTLCOpeelV;
~ 89.    The double negative ov Pw1 is sometimes used
with the Subjunctive and the Future Indicative in independent sentences, being equivalent to a strong single
negative.    The compounds of both ov and 14 can be
used here as well as the simple forms.
1. The Subjunctive (sometimes the Future Indicative) with ov l4z   may have the force of an emphatic
Future with ov.     Thus ov l,    TOVTO revr7Tra  (sometimes
ov Jur 7 TOro 7yevrl7eTa) means this surely will not happen, being a little more emphatic than ov 70oV            7yevraerat.   E. g.
(Aor. Subj.)  Ov    7riO t rac, he will not obey. SOPH. Phil. 103.
Ore tyap yLyveraL ovre yeyovev ov8s oV v fb yev 7ra  aXXoiov )0oS,
for there is not, nor has there been, nor will there ever be, &c. PLAT.
Rep. VI, 492 E. (Here ov8e pi) y;vvqrat is merely more emphatic
than the ordinary ov yevaferat.)  Kal rovA' tcaKo'o-as ov' 7TL t7 X r )0 
SXoa. AESCH. Sept. 38.'AXX' ov' ror' sE plov ye p- 7r ad Os rode.
SoPH. El. 1029.   Ovrot T'AXaLvo, olba, /L T  Vl f3plco. Id. Aj.
560.'AXX' ov rt 0) ( vyr7Te  atrqpf 7proAl. EUR. El. 1039. TVv
7iv KpaCT7aOp.ev, OV p.fl LV iiva\dXXos (TTpaTrs a vr L rr T  KOTE  pCd7pwrwv.
HDT. VII, 53. So I, 199. OV p o'e Kpv+ C   srpos ovvrtva Sov'houa&
adpLKEr'Oat. XEN. Cyr. VII, 3, 13. OF ye'ApC;/vtot ov tP 8;4w ovrai
roVv roXeplove. Ib. III, 2, 8. *Ayv pevrot KQaOftdeOa o'tKOt, OV70ror'
ov8ezbv 71vV ohv Jp  yev Trat. rTV  eO'VTwV. DEM. Phil. I, 53, 4. So
Phil. III, 130, 11.
(Pres. Subj.)    Hy yahp a7ra  Nvo?l rptcv?7iepv ov B   a'rocrXW.ev,
oVKeTrL  j vvrJ)T 7rat iaoXevs r-ast KaraXaf3eiv. XEN. An. II, 2, 12.
So ov af ovvcovra, Id. Hier. XI, 15. 1poes avra KaIKovpyeI Kal
CrVKodvTreL, ei TL vaaoat * ovey a-ov TrapLeatL' d\XX' ov p' oLo r. S
but you will not be able. PLAT. Rep. I: 341 B.




~ 89, 2.]        DOUBLE NEGATIVE OU ji7.                  185
(Fut. Ind.) 0O aoL,i     FeOE; opal'itore. SOPR. El. 1052.
Tov' yap 7rovov vs ov 0 fL) iroTE Tro  0 l   re /SEXroVE. AESCITIN. Cor.
~ 177. OV Tro fpT7roT a  K 7r     p TCov   o  pavo Eov, O KOVTa TLt aoet.
SOPH. O. C. 176. So OS oov Fi/ 6O3olt7opf-ets, 0. C. 848; and HDT.
III, 62. Ma Tov'A7rOXXC) ov fL) 0 C' e;yo) WrEpLotareLEXovT1 (i. e.
7r epLo op L  a 7r EXOJTa). ARIST. Ran. 508. Elrev OTt?n 27raprq
cvOe p. KQaCov olKtEi rat avrov a'roQavovroS. XEN. Hell. I, 6, 32.
(See ~ 70, 2; and below, Note 1.)
The Aorist Subjunctive is the most common form in this construction.
NOTE 1. OV pi with the Future Optative, representing a Future
Indicative of the direct discourse, occurs in an indirect quotation
after c': Tad T AXa nravr' eOci'tcrfEV, Ki11 rarn Tpolas re'pyaf wcs ov
fA irore r e pcro Iev v, L   ri O6L SE  yoLVro.  SOPH. Phil. 611. (The
direct discourse was ou pj 7rorTe rep o'  r, Eav la TOVSE a'yq0ae.) In
the last example under ~ 89, 1, the Future Indicative is retained in
the same construction. The Future Infinitive can be used in the
same way; as, ELwT TELPEo-L'a o0 V pT Wt, t0 oV TVSe 7yjv oliKOvZros,
ae rpateLv irOkwE. EUR. Phoen. 1590.
Ou pi with the Subjunctive occurs in a causal sentence after Cs, in
ARIST. Av. 461: Ae'ye OappioraS' sr Tas TrTroV&La o0v JL V rporTpov
srapa/3 OpLev.
NOTE 2. This construction is often explained by supposing an
ellipsis of 8ELtV  1e rTT  or o/3oL aorlv between the ov and the A:
this is based on such passages as XEN. Mem. II, 1, 25, ovu ofj3os a7
sr dyay)o, there is no fear lest I may lead you, which with the d'f3oL
omitted would be ovu Ai cre ayayw. This theory, however, leaves the
following construction (~ 89, 2) entirely unexplained; and the supposed ellipsis fails to account for the meaning in many cases, as in
the first example under ~ 89, 1.
2. The second person of the Future Indicative (sometimes the Subjunctive) with ov      ti' may express a strong
prohibition.   Thus ov'i] XaXrjsoae means you shall not
prate (or do not prate), being more emphatic than Ikj
XaXeb. E.g.
Hloloe Zevs; ot Ov L q rp E P   etc (X1po7Trs)- ovo' o&rt Zevs, i. e. stop
your nonsense! ARIST. Nub. 367. AQ'ra, ri Opoels; ov Ala rap'
oXhXp rdSe y? pv CE t, do not (I beg you) speak out in this way before
the people. EuR. Hippol. 213.'Q2 Ovyarep, ov la) flvOov E7rl 7roXXovsi
epe ~,. EUR. Supp. 1066.    Ov' pqI yvvaLK(v 8etX(Ov eiF roiLr E
Xoyov, do not adopt the cowardly language of women. EUR. Andr.
757. Ov JL        ps OV VE     KaroErErL. S   KairoXo KKLvolYEts KavaCr'Y(re  forotiraLa 8Etvqv voov, (  rEKVOY, do not wake him. SoPH. Trach.
978. Ti tvroeil; oV Ji K araj3 rE, don't come down. ARIST. Vesp
897.




186              DOUBLUE NEGATIVE Ou                 ~.  [~ 89, 2.
For the use of the future, see ~ 25, 1. N. 5. For the Subjunctive
in this construction, see below, Rem. 2.
NOTE 1.    A prohibition thus begun by o0 t,7 may be continued by prte with another Future (or Subjunctive).    An
affirmative command may be added by another Future or an
Imperative, after dAXd or N'. E. g.
Ov AI KaXels', vOpoW), I KETEcO, f.r )E Ka T p e  rovvoLa, do
not call to me, I implore you, nor speak my name. ARIST. Ran. 298.
O v Ai   rpoo'oOIrELc XELpa 18a' arCEL 7r7rXcov, do not bring your
hand near me nor touch my garments. EUR. Hippol. 606. Ov p7)
7rpooL'roa'es  XElpa, 3aKXeVoE' E' i.S v, 8 1O' LV   eOIoppeL I LtwpLaV
7fi, o'rv Efol, do not bring your hand near me; but go and rage, and
do not wipe off your folly on me. Id. Bacch. 343.
0u /1j) XaX t reLs (XaX)o-T7ys), acXX' a1KoXovO81Oct'ffE sLOL, do not
prate, but follow me. ARiST. Nub. 505. O0 / 3  t arp il   t l, dXXa
TE Va E T7S O6ipas, do not delay, but knock at the door. Id. Ran.
462. Ov 0 16 01Xvap7f'eLs' xcwv, c3 aavla, daXX' dpdpevos OL( T'EL
7raXtv raT (pco/taTar. lb. 524. Ov /0 V(Lvao-LcvEYs EratL ( lXols, r av ce 
Be O6viov KCa 7frdav aTr p E tl  K cpa,.....  (e L 3 Opa Kal 7 apa -
Tro'reC 7rarpos, be not inimical to friends, but cease your rage, &c.
Eun. Med. 1151. O0   / f oIr CK  n' r/ / r 7Er o roL a r  a7rep ol rpvyobat-;0oves o'rot, daX' E 4  e c, do not scoff, nor do what these wretches
do; but keep silence AAIST. Nub. 296. (Here the Imperative is
used precisely like the Future with dXXd or 8e in the preceding examples.)
The Future in the clauses with aXXd or 8e will be explained by
~ 25, 1, N. 5 (a); in the clauses with,/Be it may be explained by
~ 25, 1, N. 5 (b), or we may consider the construction a continuation of that with ov /1q, the piA being repeated without the ov.
NOTE 2. In a few cases ob with the Future is used interrogatively expressing an exhortation, followed by another Future with
pq38e or Kai /rj expressing a prohibition. E. g.
O oVri ai v L E E, 4q78/ 8e iXlav d p i (S), keep silence (lit. will you not
keep silence?) and do not become a coward. SoPH. Aj. 75. (Here
perhaps we should punctuate ou 0aly' cv e E t; pjl8e B\Xlav a pe l.
See Rem. 1. But the first clause, although strictly interrogative, is
really an exhortation, and was so considered in the construction of
the following clause, where the Future is to be explained on the
principle of ~ 25, 1, N. 5 (b). Compare the examples under Note
1.) OU Odacroov o'lO tr, /r' a r c rI7r r EL S ELo, i. e. extend your
hand, and do not distrust me. Id. Trach. 1183. OCK E a0v' OLKOVS,
fTE re Kpe'ov Karia orrayav, Kal p) TO pr18ev aXyos eLs /ey ol rETE. Id.
O. T. 637.
REMARK 1. The examples under ~ 89, 2 and the notes are usually printed as interrogative, in accordance with the doctrine of
Elmsley, stated in his note to Eurip. Med. 1120 (1151) and in the




89, 2.]        DOUBLE NEGATIVE Ov /?.                 187
Quarterly Review for June, 1812. He explains ov,4 XaX'o-cLr;
as meaning will you not stop prating? lit. will you not not prate? and
when a second clause in the Future with p181 or adXX  follows, he
considers the interrogative force of ov to extend also to this. But
this explanation requires an entirely different theory to account for
the construction of ~ 89, 1; whereas the rules given above consider
the Subjunctive there a relic of the common Homeric Subjunctive
(~ 87), and explain the Future in ~ 89, 2 by the principle stated in
~ 25, 1, N. 5, - oh u having the same force of a strong single negative
in both constructions. As to the examples in N. 1, the last one (where
the Imperative instead of the Future follows XXad) seems to be decisive against the interrogative force commonly ascribed to the
Future in the others. The examples in N. 2 are the strongest support of Elmsley's theory, where the first clause is clearly interrogative, at least originally; but the force of the question as an exhortation seems to have guided the construction of the sentence, which
is finished after the analogy of the examples in N. 1. The explanation given above (N. 2) is supported by AESCH. Sept. 250, o aoiya;
18,EV Ti&V' E pls Ka a 7rroXtv, will you not keep silence? (ol aty' av'te;) say nothing of this kind through the city.
We may explain the examples in N. 2 as interrogative, by considering the first clause a question with ov (implying an affirmative answer) equivalent to an exhortation, and the second a
question with,/u (implying a negative answer) equivalent to
a prohibition. Oh aly' dvatEL, n713e 8ettXilav dpei; will thus mean,
will you not keep silence? and you will not become a coward, will
you?
REMARK 2. In modern editions of the classics the Subjunctive is
not found in the construction of ~ 89, 2. But in many of the examples quoted there and in the notes the first Aorist Subjunctive in
-aors has been emended to the Future, against the authority of the
Mss., in conformity to Dawes's rule. (See ~ 45, N. 8, with foot.
note.) Thus, in the three examples from the Clouds, the Mss. have
the Subjunctive; and in the last (vs. 296) ov 7K oaK trn could
not be changed to ov pY 0- K 0  L s, as the Future of OKCTrrTW is
JoKwfopuat. Elmsley's emendation O-Kc i e is therefore adopted by
most editors. But this seems too violent a change to allow in the
text, merely to sustain an arbitrary rule, which at best has nothing
but accident to rest on. If both constructions (~ 89, 1 and 2) are
explained on the same principle, there is no longer any reason for
objecting to the Subjunctive with ov gtU in prohibitions; and it
seems most probable that both the Future and the Subjunctive were
allowed in both constructions, but that the Subjunctive was more
common in that of ~ 89, 1, and the Future in that of ~ 89, 2.




188                   THE INFINITIVE.                [~ 90,
CHAPTER V.
THE INFINITIVE.
~ 90.   The Infinitive mood expresses the simple idea
of the verb, without limitation of number or person.
It has the force of a neuter verbal noun, and as such it
may take the neuter of the article in all its cases.
It has at the same time the attributes of a verb, so
that (even when it takes the article) it may have a
subject, object, and other adjuncts; and, further, it is
qualified not by adjectives, but by adverbs.
~ 91. The Infinitive may as nominative be the sub..
ject of a finite verb, or as accusative be the subject of
another Infinitive.  The Infinitive is especially common
as the subject of an impersonal verb, or of ecr.   It may
also be a predicate nominative, or it may stand in apposition with a substantive.
Such Infinitives stand regularly without the article;
but if they are to be especially prominent as containing
the leading idea of the sentence, the article may be
used. E. g.
Yvv/3,; avrc fE\ Oe v, it happened to him to go. OK evert TOVTO
*irotifj a.'A"vvaTo'v eOT TOVTO trot~ra-at. NEY y  vEFVL. A et
avrov fiEvetv. Ov iev -yap 7rt KaK&cv 3aateat vEtEpev,for it is no bad
thing to be a king. Od. I, 392. Els owcovos aiptoaos, apuvvef-rOai,repl 7arrp7;q. II. XII, 243.'Aei yap 7j.a rols yepovaOV etv paOEi v,
AESCH. Ag. 584. IloXv yap paov eX ovras  u VXarretv F) KtJT a-aaOat 7radvra 7r1evKev. DEM. 01. II, 25, 24. (Compare 01. I, 16, 3:
LOKFCL r  pvXa\dat radyaah rov Krja'Qaa-Oat XaXicrwrep7ov eJvat.)'Hiv roXXoVs e0pov'X XE L v; DEM. F. L. 409, 25. AoKEl OKovO/tov ayagov Etvat Ev o LK E L ZV TOV Eavrov OLKOV. XEN. Oecon. I,
2. bq7TL 8eZ rovTro r t ro   aa, he says that it is necessary to Jo this.
(Here roticrat as accus. is the subject of &lv': for 8idv, see ~ 92, 2.)
To yva&,'rva rsrf  rfJRv  X au Ea 3~ v Eo'rIv, to learn is to acquire knowledgqe. PLAT. Theaet. 209 E. To 8iKKqV  a8odva& irorepov 7rdoa'Xe~




s 92, 1.]         INFINITIVE AS OBJECT.                 189
rL Eartv i7 roiet; PLAT. Gorg. 476 D. (In the last two examples
the subject Infinitive has the article to emphasize it, while the predicate Infinitives stand alone.) O06roL RJv eOrL To fX ev XpLitpara
oVTro;s avitapbv TO a 7rof3 XXe Lv. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 3, 42. (Compare the two examples above from Demosthenes.) Toiro A Trr TO
datiKeLv, Tr 7rX6ov TWv AXXcwv r?7Trev  AXELY. PLAT. Gorg. 483 C.'AkX' Opat, VUV PEv E7rOrKOTre TrovTOs To Ka ro pov. DEM. 01. II,
23, 27. To yap Oavarov 8 be  vat ovEv aoXXv  o o EoT'Lv  f )  KE V croO)bv
eLvas pr ovTa o K el yVap elE vaL Eaorv a OVK ol8ev. PLAT. Apol.
29 A.
~ 92.   The Infinitive without the article may be the
object of a verb.  It stands generally as an object accusative, sometimes as an object genitive, and sometimes
as an accusative of kindred signification.     The classes
of verbs after which the Infinitive is thus used must be
learned by practice; but the Infinitive without a subject follows in general the same classes of verbs in
Greek as in English.     The following, however, may be
specially mentioned: —
1. In general, any verb whose action directly implies
another action or state as its object, if such action or
state is to be expressed by a verb and not by a noun,
takes the Infinitive.  Such are verbs signifying to teach,
to learn, to accustom, to desire, to ask, to advise, to entreat,
to exhort, to command, to persuade, to urge, to propose, to
compel, to need, to cause, to intend, to begin, to attempt, to
permit, to decide, to dare, to prefer, to choose, to pretend;
those   expressing fear, unwillingness, ea       ess,  caution, neglect, danger, postponement, forbidding, hindrance,
escape, &c.; and all implying ability, fitness, desert,
qualification, sufficiency, or their opposites. E. g.
AL&acrovO-v avrobv adXXELV, they teach him to shoot. "EiaOov TOTro
7roLtoraL, they learned to do this. BouXcraL EXOelv. HapatvoviLev ootc
7reLOicrOac.  Iolfovflat xfEvelv. ALpoivraL 7ro\XEziEv.'H 7r6OXLi KIVVVevEL i&aoOapvva-. Avvara da7reXOE lv.'EKXevoevEV avCLrV repLIeival
tIe. AeopaC viwv crvyyvjLrqLvY LOL EXEiV. Et7re aoparrqyovs eoe'Oat, he
proposed to choose generals.'Arrayopevovariv avrois pr! ToVrTo 7,oL7rat.
(See below, ~ 95, 2.) Ti KcoXv'o-e avTrv 3ai'eL~v 07rot fPouVXrat, what
will prevent him from marching, ac.?'Atcco XaI3Civeiv.'A5toira*




190                    THE INFINITIVE.                L[ 92, 1.
Oavelv. ON rifUvKe 3ovXvetev, he is not born to be a slave.'Avaa/ciX
XeraL ro0V TTroLeEv, he postpones doing this.
This use of the Infinitive is too common to need illustration by
more particular examples.
REMARK 1. The Infinitive in this construction is generally equiv
alent to the English Infinitive after the same class of verbs; and it
refers to indefinite or to future time. (See ~ 15, 1.) The Present
and Aorist are the tenses usually found, with the distinction stated
in the Remark before ~ 12: for the Perfect, see ~ 18, 3 (b); and for
the occasional use of the Future Infinitive (or even the Infinitive
with av) after some of these verbs, see ~ 27, N. 2.
REMARK 2. Verbs of fearing and caution are included in the list
given above, although they are generally followed by tzj, lest, and
the Subjunctive or Optative. (See ~ 46.) The Infinitive, however,
sometimes occurs; and, when it is used, it belongs regularly under
the rule, ~ 92, 1. (See ~ 46, N. 8, a and b.)
Verbs expressing danger take the Infinitive more frequently than:ti with the Subjunctive or Optative. (See ~ 46, N. 8, c.)
NOTE 1. Some verbs which do not regularly take an Infinitive may be used in unusual significations, so as to allow an
Infinitive by ~ 92, 1.  E. g.
XvvElrJ)crav Trots lXaralevrt cr   a p a 8 o v v a & ca aCrobs Kal ra irXa,
they made an agreement with the Plataeans to surrender, &c. THUc.
II, 4. Tivm' aiv TLS a\iXXov 7rtlrTev'TLe r apa KaT ae-a  r j 0 a t xpiara;
to whom would any one sooner dare to commit money? XEN. Mem.
IV, 4, 17.'OBvpovra OLKOve v*  e C 0 a t, they mourn to go home. I.
II, 290.'E7rev95.io(r'av'Axatol a Lei  O a t epija. l. I, 22.
NOTE 2. When a noun and a verb (especially          o-rl) together form an expression equivalent to any of the verbs of
~ 92, 1, they may take the Infinitive without the article.
Some other expressions with a similar force take the same
construction. E. g.'AvayK,71 Eoa 7rvraas ta reXF  0 eiv. Kiv3vvo9 ZJV avr&w ira 0elv rt.'OxvoS ieo-rl MO TOVTrO 7roLat  at. t,]3o ECor'tv aVTrc iXOelv. "ALa5a
iv avrals yv, KCXvtLa ovTra (rah 7rvXaS) r p o a'0 e v a t, a wagon, which
prevented them.fiom shutting the gates. THUC. IV, 67. So E'iyVE7TO
be aXXoLt Te aXXo0L KoX\/tarTa!xL av 4r  0 va, obstacles to their increase. Id. I, 16. (See ~ 95, 2, N. 1.) ToTs a-parTCoat pts Sp) E'VEre0ae EKTLXIL a-at ro Xcowpov. Id. IV, 4. Ov adivrtl elpd. rdpavr
yv ivat, I am not enough of a prophet to decide, &c. EUR. Hippol.
346. (Here the idea of ability is implied in pidvrs elfin.) To doa-aXes
Kal AVVEtLV Kai t d7reXOev al vES rcape[ovrtv. THUC. VI, 18. (See
~93, 1.)   "EXovTa rtOaaEVevaOat     vartv, capable by nature of




~ 92, 1.]          INFINITIVE AS OBJECT.                   191
being tamed (  revK.OTu a rTOao-eve'Oat). PLAT. Politic. 264 A. TlS
lrqxav' I. OvXL Trdvra Karava\7XcoOvat els To reOvdvat; (i. e. rT
KiWXVScrt ftj o0;l IravTCa KaravaXwOrvaL;) PLAT. Phaed. 72 D. A'BolKa /, T7roXXa Kal aXEtra i1s davyKarYv XooLEY  r o L E v, lest we may
come to the necessity of doing. I)EM. 01. I, 13, 25. "Q'pa cai n  v aL,'t is time to go away (like XP  dwrleva, we must go away). PLAT.
Apol. 42 A.'EX7ri8asE'XEL rovro Ir o  aaL (== eX7ItE roLro TTO 71o-a), he hopes to do this. But eXTrt roT o  EXEiv, Tauc. II, 56.
Ol 8e C'ovres aTTot 0 aqve v, and the living are those who caused them
to die. SOPH. Ant. 1173. We might also have alrm tot r  TorovTO
Oaveiv or a'rLoL rT TOVTovrS Oavelv. (See ~ 23, 1, N. 3.) So in phrases
like rroXXio (or.uKpov) 86Co rolelv rt, I want much (or little) of doing
anything; trapa,tLKpoiv?X\Oo  rotelv n, they came within a little of doing anything; where the idea of ability, inability, or sufficiency
appears: so in THUC. VII, 70, fpaXv yap d7rEX7rov ltaKdo'itat yeveaOat.  So E/fJlro&O TrouTr) ra-TV EX0lvJ (== KCWVX VtTOVTOV E\Ov), it
prevents him from going; cwhere roi eXOeiv may be used.  (See ~ 94,
and ~ 95, 1 and 2.)
The Infinitive depending on a noun is generally an adnominal
genitive with the article Tro. See ~ 94 and ~ 95, 1.
NOTE 3. Although the Infinitive depending on the verbs ineluded in ~ 92, 1 regularly stands without the article, yet TO is sometimes prefixed to give the Infinitive still more the character of a
noun in the accusative. The Infinitive is sometimes placed for emphasis apart from the main construction, like a synecdochical accusative. E.g.
Kal ir&s ro) rO dPXtKov  e v a dtvOpT7rov rat8evee; XEN. Oecon.
XIII, 4. (So 7rat8Evo LTvd Ti.)  T oB' a  v o tKLK V Tf7i8 6o/lO rTi
Av yuvvj SvvaTro; i. e. as to living with her, what woman could do it?
SOPH. Tr. 545. Tob pav OVK 0;Xqoa-av. Id. O. C. 442.
OVis t' &v TFEtreILa-e TE O fi)r oK e X 0 e v, no one could persuade me
not to go. ARIST. Ran. 68. (For /P ov, see ~ 95, 2, N. 1, b.) So
XEN. Hell. V, 2, 36. So OX$et rTb /i) Kr evaL a Vevvov (like
IrEa-ei TO I  Kreiva), AESCH. Prom. 865. Compare SOPH. Phil.
1253, oval rot O-.7 Xetpi rTelo/.tat TO ap a, i. e. I do not trust your
hand fbr action (like ob nrelOoa i  -ot Tairaa, I do not trust you in
this.)
NOTE 4. Other active verbs than those included in ~ 92, 1 may
take the Infinitive like an ordinary noun, as an object accusative.
Here, however, the Infinitive takes the article r6. E. g.
Tob reXe vr?- )-at 7ravTCriov  7rT7erp)oeEY q KaTErKptlev, fate awarded
death to all. Isoc. Demon. p. 11 C. ~ 43.
NOTE 5. A few of the verbs included in ~ 92, 1, which govern
the genitive of a noun, allow also the genitive of the Infinitive with
roV, as well as the simple Infinitive.  (See ~ 95, 1.)  This applies
chiefly to diLXeo'C, iertLueXeo/al, and to the verbs of hindrance, &c- in
eluded in ~ 95, 2. E. g.




192                  THE INFINITIVE.                [~ 92, 1.'AAMEXra- troO opyltcr0aL. XEN. Mem. II, 3, 9. (But apEXo~a
XYyEtv, PLAT. Phaed. 98 D.) Most verbs of desirinq and neglecling
take only the simple Infinitive.'ErtItAeXeoat, which usually takes
T07r with the Future Indicative (~ 45), allows also the simple Infinitive (THuc. VI, 54), and the Infinitive with roU (XEN. Mem.
III, 3,11). See ~45, N. 6, a.
REMARK. For the use of the Infinitive without TO after verbs as
an accusative by synecdoche (usually found only after adjectives),
see ~ 93, 2, Note 3.
2. Another case in which the Infinitive appears as
the object of a verb occurs in indirect discourse, after
verbs implying thought or the expression of thought (verba
sentiendi et declarandi) or equivalent expressions. Here
each tense of the Infinitive, instead of referring indefinitely to the future (as in the former construction, ~ 92,
1), represents the corresponding tense of the Indicative
or Optative
REMARK. For this construction see ~ 73, 1; where also examples of the Infinitive with av in indirect discourse are given. For
the distinction between the Infinitive in this construction and the
ordinary Infinitive (92, 1), see ~ 73, 1, Remark. For the Infinitive, not in indirect discourse, after some verbs which usually belong to this class, see ~ 15, 2, Notes 2 and 3; see also ~ 23, 2, Notes
2 and 3.
NOTE 1. Of the three common verbs signifying to say, frfL is
regularly followed only by the Infinitive in indirect discourse, Jtrov
only by S07 or 0s and the Indicative or Optative, while X;ey  allows
either construction. A singular exception in regard to elrov is
found in Eur. Phoen. 1590, quoted ~ 89, 1, N. 1. (See ~ 15, 2,
N. 3.)
NOTE 2. After many verbs of this class in the passive both a
personal and an impersonal construction are allowed: thus, we can
say XeyeraI 6 KpoS yeve;rOat, Cyrus is said to have been, or XeyEra&
-ro Kvpov yevE;-al, it is said that Cyrus was. AOKE'cO in the meaning
I seem (videor) usually has the personal construction, as in English;
as oTro? 8oKE1 ELvaL, he seems to be. When an Infinitive with alv follows (~ 73, 1), it must be translated by an impersonal construction,
to suit the English idiom: thus, 8oKEL T71S av E'Xl must be translated
it seems that some one would have, although Tts is the subject of UoKC;
as we cannot use would with our Infinitive, to translate XLeZtv i
(See ~ 42, 2, Note.)




~ 93, 1.]     INFINITIVE AFTER RELATIVES, ETC.              193
NOTE 3.     (a.) When an indirect quotation has been introduced by an Infinitive, a dependent relative or temporal clause
in the quotation sometimes takes the Infinitive by assimilation,
where we should expect an Indicative or Optative.     The temporal particles 6r, ore, E'7r, *7re&i,5, as well as the relative pronouns, are used in this construction. Herodotus also uses l,
if, and even &tor, because, in the same way.  E. g.
Mera 8E~, EL ov 2r a v (c a  Ka L, SKELa &8C7o0at (Xeyovo-t), and afterwards,
when it did not cease, they say that they sought for remedies. HIDT. I,
94. (Here we should expect Ws oVK 1fravtero.)'Qs 8' aKovaaL
rovS 7rapovTras, Odpu3ov yFveao-at (acalv), they say that, when those
present heard it, there was a tumult. DEM. F. L. 402, 8.'EnreL3i 81e
yeve rf ar t ini Tir otdla rj''Ayda0vos, (fbfr) dvecoyFevqrv KaraXapJidyeLt Ti7V Odpav. PLAT. Symp. 174 D. See Rep. X, 614 B. Aeyerat'AX\KIAacov, oTre 6 aXao- at avrov, TO''A7rodXco TavrrTv Tipv yrqv
XpoaaL OLKELV. THUC. II, 102. (See ~ 15, 1, N. 2.)  Kat oraa av iCer
EKelvcv  ov Xe ve   at, ovEYvos VTrepov yvcrtf 4l avlivat (ie'aara).
Id. I, 91. (Here,ovXevovro would be the common form.)'Hyovvql rY 8b adX0eitas oVK aSv rore lailev. avTfr XopOv KaKoWV adKoXoveOrat,
dXX' VytiL TE Ka\L alKatLOv  0OSV, ) KaL ro)opooouvrqv' eocrEOat. PLAT.
Rep. VI, 490 C.
Et yap 6 8 e7iv ITavTCws srepitelvat aXXa r p) TrjV [3aoLri\X[rv, (Q't)
&KtaLTrepov Tevat MrScov rea repLtaXelv TOUTO. HDT. I, 129. (Here el
8;eo or ed fei would be the ordinary expression.)  So HDT. III, 105
and 108; doubtful, II, 64 and 172. See Kriiger's note on I, 129.
Ttiu&v 8E Xatlovsr ril, Sl8OT  r aTa vai Ol STO'v rdanrrov 8topvn' trOM
XauL, ov. HDT. II, 55.
(b.) In some cases, particularly when the provisions of a law are
quoted, a relative is used with the Infinitive, even when no Infinitive precedes. E. g.
"EO0KCIv E(P Os E e E v a t a'7oKrtvvv'vat, he enacted on what conditions
it is allowed to kill. DEM. Lept. 505, 19. Kal th  Taura, av' Tt droKTreLvp rIYa, TrYV 30ovX\7V &LKaeIv ypaife, KaL ovX aTrep, av aX6, e L vat,
and he did not enact what should be done if he should be convicted.
DEM. Aristocr. 629, 2. (Here etvat is the reading of the Cod. 2,
amply defended by the preceding example, in which all editors
allow e$Elvat.)  AeKa yap AvApas 7rpoeiXovro avrp $vpyovXovv, svev
wy fLP Kraptoy e vaL aCrdayetv arpartav EK Trs rTdXEs'. THUC. V, 63.
~ 93. * The Infinitive without the article may limit
the meaning of certain adjectives and adverbs.
1. Such are particularly adjectives denoting ability,
fitness, desert, qualification, sufficiency, readiness, and
9                                   M




194                    THE INFINITIVE.                 [~ 93, 1.
their opposites; and, in      general, those     denoting    the
same relations as the verbs which govern the Infinitive
(~ 92,1). E. g.
Avvarbs 7 o e v, able to do. AElVOS   Y e yLv, skilled in speaking.
*ALdos e'OT- rarTa Xaf3eiv, he deserves to receive this.'Avadtoos Oavda-e
oQam, unworthy to be admired. "AeLos rtqlaoaL,, worthy to be honored.
O'X olos re?rv TroTO iElv, he was not able to see this.  HpdtOvIos
Aeyev, eager to speak.'EroL/AoL KLvIvvov V ro VtCEVeLV, ready to endure
danger.
EepL('TroKX\Ea, LKavCarov'   el7rE V KaC yvcova  K at p a a. LYS.
Or. Fun. p. 194, ~ 42.   Toy 8' e7rir8ELov ratvra  a 7rOeiv Erl, the
people said that he was a suitable person to suffer this. DEM. Phil. III,
126, 19. Al yap ev7rpaLiatL 8LVaL'cvyKpV' a t ra rotavra ovei&a.
Id. 01. II, 23, 29. Kvplav erolroaav E ir' t e X L  0 a T  e~ vraelas, they
gave it (the Areopagus) power to superintend good order. Isoc. Areop.
p. 147 D. ~ 39. Bir'v b8 dauvarot'a-av Tpoa;epetv. HDT. III,
138. MaXaKoi Kaprepeiv, too effeminate to endure. PLAT. Rep.
VIII, 556 B. TanreLvt   vftzv L  Ldavoa E yKaPP L a p  t v  yvwre, your
minds are too dejected to persevere, &c. TTUC. II, 61. (In the last
two examples iaXaKol and ra7reuv' govern the Infinitive by the idea
of inability implied in them.)  XpqMiara rro p I e v eLv7ropcorarov yvvv).
ARIST. Eccles. 236. 2Eo)corTpoL 68i avpC.ophs ras rTv Tr;Xas Trdvaes
t a t p e lv? rvxas ras o'LK0ov. EUR. Alcmen. Fr. 103.'E7rto'rT!AcoV
X yetv re Kat a-lyav. PLAT. Phaedr. 276 A. T'XXa evprfa'etL
virovpyelv o'ravs j1ias ov KaKOV'. ARIST. Pac. 430.
For examples of nouns followed by the Infinitive, see ~ 92, 1, N. 2.
NOTE 1. The use of the Infinitive after o os in the sense of
appropriate, likely, capable, and;oaos in that of sufficient, with or
without their antecedents, is to be referred to this head. (O o s re,
able, like Uvwaro, regularly takes the Infinitive.)  E. g.
Ov yap ^lv c&pa oaa TO 7reo8ov a p e Lt v for it was not theproper season
for irrigating the land. XEN. An. II, 3, 13. ToLavras olas Xetijwvdo
e a'7reyeLV Kcal 0epovs IKavaC EIvai. PLAT. Rep. III, 415 E. TolovTOS oLos 7r el e 0 a L. Id. Crit. 46 B. NEze/l.evo& rTa avr)v eKaaarof
o'rov da ro r v, cultivating their own land to an extent sufficient to live
upon it. THUC. I, 2.'EXel7Trero rrjs VVKTOS r O0oV aTKoraLovs  L X 0e 6
Tr Tre8lov, there was left enough of the night for crossing the plain
in the dark. XEN. An. IV, 1, 5. "E(bOaoe roovTorov o'-ov HIIaxlrf
adveyVcOKvaL Tro +0/crlLa, it came so much in advance (of the other
ship), that Paches had already read the decree. THUc. III, 49. (See
~ 18, 3, b.) Examples like the last strongly resemble those under
~ 98, 1 in which corre has roo-Ovros for its antecedent.
Other pronominal adjectives (as ro7OE, roLo'dae, rr7qloroE, Trj7Xlos,
vroioe) sometimes take an Infinitive in the same way.
NOTE 2. (a.) Certain impersonal verbs (like EVeor i, Trp  re r,
0poOr   f t), which regularly take an Infinitive as their subject




~ 93, 2.]   IN'INITIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES, ETC.              195
(~ 91), are sometimes used in the Participle in a personal sense, in
which case they may be followed by the Infinitive, the Participle
having the force of one of the adjectives of ~ 93, 1. Thus -ra vovra
Mirelv is equivalent to A EvveortL EilrYv, what it is permitted to say; Ta
0-po rKovra p70qOval is equivalent to a 7rpoo-'KEL pqjOvat, what is proper
to be said, as if 7rpoo-KEL were a personal verb, and as if we could say
7raTa 7rpoo'jKeL, these things are becoming. E. g.
KnalrtLv rTO 7rXfof  rv V dOV r 00V e 17r e 1 V. Isoc. Phil. p. 104 D.
~ 110. Tov OEOv KaXEc oV3ev irpo0'c KovTr ev ydool TrapaoTa'rrev,
she is calling on the God who ought not to be present at lamentations.
AESCH. Agam. 1079. (TIpoo'rKovra is used like adjectives meaning
fit, proper, as if we could say bs oUb rpoocKEL 7rapar-Tarel.) i pv c
frEL 7rpE7rclOV E(;vs 7rpo TWV3  () oaveiv. SOPH. O. T. 9. So rliv r a p a y y X; v r a LeMEXELZv (= a& rapq7yyeX\q lilv 8LE&EXe0il).
PLAT. Tim. 90 E.
(b.) In the same way certain adjectives, like o Kato, 7r LKalpLOS, 7rrtrLT'8etos, elr io0o, may be used personally with the
Infinitive; as BLKCatLo' Ecrr rovro TrOLeTy, it is right for him to do this
(equivalent to &LKaI6v eoTLV avrov TOTO 7rroLEv). E. g.
I)rlFL Kal 7roXXS pLELtY6vV ETL TOVTrOo  apeOYv 8 K a K   o  e Ival rv yav e v, i. e. that it is right for me to receive, &c. DEM. Cor. 243, 6.
E86OKOVV 67r t r?8eo L elva v7rr  a t p 0v a, they seemed to be convenient persons to be disposed of. THUc. VIII, 70. OepaweTEo-Oa
ertLKaiptot, important persons to be taken care of. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 2,
25. Tade TOt ed avreowov E rl8oa yeverOat, it is to be expected that
this will result from it. HDT. I, 89. (lHoXXoi eTrlaoot T(VrTO TOVTO
IreLoeo-OaL, it is to be expected that mrany will suffer this same thing,
Id. VI, 12, is an example of the Future Infinitive, ~ 27, N. 2. So
in English, many are likely to suffer.)
These examples resemble those under ~ 93, 2.
NOTE 3. Rarely the Infinitive with ro is used after adjectives of
this class. (Compare ~ 92, 1, N. 3.) E. g.
To 7rpor-aXatraope7v ovsil 7r wpdOvfVOS jv. THUC. II, 53.
2. Any adjective may take the Infinitive without the
article as an accusative by synecdoche, showing in what
respect the adjective is applicable to its noun; as Oeapa
ato'pov opav, a sight disgraceful to look upon.
The Infinitive is here regularly active or middle, seldom   passive, even when the latter would         seem   more
natural; as %a\e7rov    vroletv, hard to do, seldom     XaXe7rTv 7ro e a 0 a, hard to be done.    E. g.
Alar~ov yap TO'E y''O-Ti,ai TOLaOro LO vo xvri 7rv0e0a a, i. e. disgrace.




196                    THE INFINITIVE.                L~ 93, 2,
fulfor them to hear. I1. II, 119.  So I. I, 107 and 589. Tovs yap
v7rEp rovrwv o XyovU /toL /a dvacayKatoTaTovs 7r p o i f L v yovIala, juy l
b XprrLtopoTdrov ad Kc o ovr a, i. e. most necessary for me to say, and
most useful for you to hear. DEM. Mid. 522, 18. 4o3epors 7rpoar roX f! a- ca t, a terrible man to fight against. Id. 01. II, 24, 12. OiKia'jqa-r  E  ta i  r La 0 a L, a house most pleasant to live in. XEN. Mem.
III, 8, 8. Ta XaXe7rdoraTa ep e v, the things hardest to find: ra
pa'r-Ta E  vy X dvi  v L, the things easiest to obtain. Ib. I, 6, 9. IIoXtrcta
xaXe~7rn aov  v, a form of government hard to live under: aivopos b 
(puovapXa) xaXne7r KCal 3apvrdaT7?  vvoL KJa-I. PLAT. Politic. 302 B
and E. Aoyos avvaTro K ar a  v o 7 or a L, a speech which it is possible to
understand. Id. Phaed. 90 D.'O Xpovos,  3paXvs datGos o iLy'q
ar a r 0 a t, the time is too short for narrating it properly. Id. Menex.
239 B.'H o806s En-trtreLa nTopEvoMevoIL KaL X yELV y   Kal a ove v,
convenient both for speaking and.for hearing. Id. Symp. 173 B.
IIorepov be X o v oaaar a L  XpOTepov (r7  UoBp); is the water there
colder for bathing? XEN. Mem. 11, 13, 3.
(Passive.)  Kvves aloa-pal  p a p  a a  (instead of ~pav). XEN.
Cyneg. III, 3. "Eurr-' 6 Xoyos 0tXa7rEXOiLOUCt)v,,AV plO7 val' ov'K
darvtpopos. Isoc. Antid. p. 70, ~ 115.
NOTE 1. The Infinitive may be used after adverbs which correspond to the adjectives just mentioned (~ 93, 2). E. g.
L ico aT rol tEiV EVOLtOt KaXXato-a l Cv roY OtOTO T)V E$EXao'lv, ro7
NE 8vaLevpcrfL cotepcOraraa, in a manner most delightful for the friendly
to behold, and most terrible for the ill-disposed. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 3, 5.
NOTE 2. Certain nouns, which are equivalent in meaning to the
neuter of any of the adjectives which take the Infinitive, may themselves have the same construction. E. g.
Oavfla i 8 or a Lt, a wonderful thing to behold (like OavulaaTo' IOeOata).
NOTE 3. (a.) In Homer verbs expressing excellence or fitness
sometimes take the Infinitive (as an accusative by synecdoche),
like the adjectives of ~ 93, 2. E. g.'EKropo 7rj  vv^, oS apiarre6ve-Ke Faxe- 0 a I, this is the wife of
Ilector, who was the first infighting. Il. VI, 460.'O/077XtK/TvY  KEKa'ro
OpvYtOae y vWoat Kai dvaiaf'La I v  a - 0 a L. Od. II, 158. O 7repi
lAev /3ovUX)v Aayacw, nrepl' eor e  d X e o- 0 a t, ye who excel the Danai
in counsel and excel them in battle. II. I, 258. (Here /ovX7v and
aXcdrOeac are alike in the accusative by synecdoche after repi...
Euore.)
(b.) Even in Attic Greek the Infinitive is sometimes used after
verbs as a synecdochical accusative. The Infinitives aiKOveLe, dKoVCoaL,
in sound, and 6pauv, ldely, in appearance, especially, are used in this
way. E.g.
AOKeS OV T rt &ladppe;; avTrovS Iev i Xa\KES; do you think that




~ 95, 1.]   INFINITIVE AS GENITIVE OR DATIVE.             197
ihey dffer at all in appearance from a brazier? PLAT. Rep. VI, 495
E.   Compare evpvTrepo l  Oat,a Il. III, 194.'A K o ra  rrayKa'Xco
eXet, it is very fine in its sound. DEM. F. L. 355, 29.  lpdylacra
Tapeovatv (oi IlTrrot) E7r t l EX e O aL, the horses will make trouble
about tending. XEN. Cyr. IV, 5, 46.
NOTE 4. The Homeric use of 6p/oLor, equal, like, with the Infinitive is to be referred to the same principle. E. g.
AevJKO'Tpo XLJ^os,  0 I ~ t v  ( daVeLotoLiv 6otoot, (horses) whiter than
snow, and like the winds in swiftness. II. X, 437.  OVb yap ol T&f
6fIoLos 7r L o 7r  a 0 a tnov o ^v. II. XIV, 521.
~ 94. The Infinitive as genitive, dative, or accusative is very often governed by prepositions, or by adverbs
used as prepositions. In this case it always takes the
article TOV, r, or T.     E. g.
Tovr yap Xdyovs Irepi TOV T Lo p   a 0 a caTa t, 7rirov opa ytyvouevovs, for I see that the speeches are made about punishing Philip.
DE1M. 01. III, 28, 5. IIpo To ro TOs  OpKovS a7r ob ova, before takilzg the oaths. Id. Cor. 234, 6.'EK rov rpbs Xaptv  7 ftrI]yopelv
eviovE. Id. 01. III, 29, 18.  lpbs T7- triv&GV EK TrfS TrpeEaL  X a 3~ I v,
besides receiving nothing for the embassy. Id. F. L. 412, 21.'Eyr T)
7roX\rL7v 7ro'0 a   (Xapi8rlyov), in making Charidemus a citizen.
Id. Aristocr. 683, 22. "EvEKa Tro   7rXkelo Troi at o at  v vrcapXovaoav
ovalav. Isoc. Demon. p. 6 A. ~ 19.'EOavftduero E7rl rco evvpCoW
{    Xv. XEN. Mem. IV, 8, 2. "Olcows &  7a T-o $vos e vat OVK av o'let
ad&LKOfi. vat, on account of being a stranger. Ib. II, 1, 15. IIdvrowv
&aa<Epov e(alverTO, Kal Els rT rTaxv)!   a v 0 v E t v a EOL Kal els TO KaXSs
eKaora 7r o e l. Id. Cyr. I, 3, 1.
~ 95.    1. The genitive and dative of the Infinitive,
with the article, may stand in most of the constructions
belonging to those cases; as in that of the adnominal
genitive, the genitive after comparatives, the genitive
after verbs and adjectives, the dative of manner, means,
&c., the dative after such verbs as 7rtaTeuvo and after
adjectives denoting resemblance, &c., and sometimes in
that of the genitive of cause or motive.    E. g.
To v Tr LE  v LnrtOvtla, the desire to drink. THUt. VII, 84.  lovovvS
e r70To    v fij ews FyeoIvas voYliere. XEN. Cyr. I, 5, 12. Eis
7Xrlaa?)0ov TOV EXE v (r7Yv  OXLtv), i, e. hope of taking the city.
Tiuc. II, 56. (See ~ 92, 1, N. 2.)  NeoiV T6O (rLa0y  KpELrTTv o-(T7
TOV XaXEiy. MENAND. Monos. 387. IIapeKadXEL efIrteXe'iFCOa rov
W& (ppOVWtLWTaTOV ETva. XEN. Mem. I, 2, 55. So III, 3, 11, Seo




198                   THE INFINITIVE.               [~ 95, 1.
~ 92, 1, N. 5. ('1E L7rtluAopLa usually takes o0ros with the Future In,
dicative, by ~ 45.)'ETrexXoLv  o  8 a Kp v F v, we ceased to weep.
PLAT. Phaed. 117 E. (See below, ~ 95, 2.)  Kal yap diOes TroI
K a  v a K o E v rTVo ELa-, for they are unused to obeying any one.
DEM. O1. I, 15, 28.
OvoEVL rTiW 7rTaVrV  7TrXov KeKpaTJ7Ke'X,7r1rGT  1 To) T  TrporepoTs rpOs
rots 7payfyuaC   yiyveo'act. Id. Chers. 92, 21.'AXXa rTq qbavepOS
eLva1 3roVros vW, by making it plain that he was such a man. XEN.
Mem. I, 2, 3. Ov yap a) rTC'ye Koror/ov l v A^ $ Lov 7rLOrevlv, to trust
in an orderly life. Isoc. Antid. p. 315 A. ~ 24.'I(rov e rTo Ir poaTEveiV. AESCH. Agam. 253. To gijv Ecrt TL evavrTov, O'7frep T7'
eypr7yopevat ro KaBev'Sewv. PLAT. Phaed. 71 C.
Mlvco TO XJO'VTLK  KaO8plE, TOv ras sTpoodoovis Ia\\Xov I va a ra,
tn order that greater revenues might come in. THUC. I, 4.
NOTE. It will be seen that the nominative and accusative of the
Infinitive (except the accusative after prepositions) regularly stand
without the article; the genitive and dative regularly with the article.
The Infinitive after the verbs included in ~ 92, 1, however, generally stands without the, article, whatever case it represents; and
further, whenever any word which might govern a genitive or dative of the Infinitive forms a part of an expression which is equivalent to any of the verbs of ~ 92, 1, the simple Infinitive may be
used. (See ~ 92, 1, Note 2.)
2. After verbs and     expressions which     denote hindrance or freedom     from   anything, two    constructions
are allowed,-that of the         simple Infinitive   (~  92,
1), and that of the genitive of the Infinitive with rov
(~ 95, 1).
Thus we can say (a) elpye ore 7r0VTO rotolv, and (b) e'Lpya
are rov TOVTO rotelv (both with the same meaning), he prevents you from doing this. As the Infinitive after such verbs
can take the negative pu without affecting the sense, we have
a third and a fourth form, still with the same meaning:(C) depyet oe p 7ToUro rTOLEL, and (d) eLpyte ae T 0o V }A p TOVTO
iroelv, he prevents you from  doing this.  For a fifth form with
the same meaning, see ~ 95, 3.    (For the negative p/,, see
Note 1, a.)
If the leading verb is itself negative (or interrogative with a
negative implied), the double negative Aj' ov is generally used
instead of ut in the form (c) with the simple Infinitive, but
seldom (or never) in the form (d) with the genitive of the
Infinitive; as OV;K'ipyc, e. fn o T roVTro 7rotEWv he does not pre



~ 95. 2.] INFINITIVE AFTER VERBS OF HINDRANCE.              199
ven' you from   doing this; seldom (or never) rT o  px ou roTro
irotrv.  See also ~ 95, 3.    (For the double negative, see
Noto 1, b.)  E. g.
(a.)'ErL'OXvv6ov acnroreT7rovVorv, ros c'ELpyaOOl TOV9S EKE0Lev 7Trtf8orlOeiv. THUC. I, 62. EL TrorVTo   s e'lpyeL 8pav OKVOS if any
hesitation prevents you from doing this. PLAT. Soph. 242 A. "AXXwo
be 7rcs 7rE opI E a 0 a Tr E7TrLTcia OpKOVU 17(b) KarEXovras'1FLas (jaBeiv).
XEN. An. III, 1, 20. KaKOV Be 7rolov elpye rTOr eELB e v a L; SOPH.
0. T. 129.   EvB oK l E V e/Lro&Ov a(Ti])TLY etvaL. PLAT. Euthyd.
305 D. TIaLos'ep)TroS, ov, OavE lv Eppvoardp)v. EUR. Ale. 11. Toy
IXL7rr7rov 7rapeX O6v OV'K EovVavro KroXU'at. DEMI. Pac. 62, 10.
T77v isav TtSE y 7  oV8Ev JAL KX\VEL XEyEILV. PLAT. Phaed. 108 E.
(b.) T o  8e  paTrerE ELv  e v afoiL dlre(pyovcL; XEN. Mem. II,
1, 16.  To yap +t'voljevov J)alvecrOaL KaiL  o 0 orvyyvcolirs TLVOS
TVyX dvei v eiLxTro8y C(iXLTrra dv0pT07rot ylyveral. Id. Cyr. III, 1, 9.
EUrreY oTr KCo\vo'EL  (ay) TOv KateLv eto'vraS. Id. An. I, 6, 2.'A7reo'-Xdorv Tro X a 3et   TO) oLKaLov vecKa. DEM. F. L. 410, 18.
(c.) E'py~e FPt 3XaoraTavetv. PLAT. Phaedr. 251 B. "07ep
e~aXe f   rTrv IleXo7rvrov ro  o opO e i v, which prevented him from
ravaging the Peloponnesus. THUC. I, 73. AtKcoXVo-e /i  a    0 aBe -
paL. Id. III, 49.'E7reyevro Eo KC\vfara ia) a;t7 8jva. Id. I, 16.
(~ 92, 1, N. 2.)  OvTrTovs y' E'Tfav(ra f.Lj? npO0bEpKeOGaL f 0al OOV.
AESCH. Prom. 248. Tovflov (4)vXaetL c' vola p)'rda' XE   KaKCO.
SOPH..   C. 667.
Ov yap esrrt EXX)t ovBeita EKBvcSLE pj  ov advras Xoyov e vat
oovS boV'Xovs. HDT. VIII, 100.    IIe/novcr  KnpvKa, VTro8eFadLjevo
(TXoreiv TO v 27raprTTrl7Tv PI  1E,vat.. 0 U OUvaTro avTqv orTXEtv
l('I'ApyelOL fi/) OVK ELIEVaL. Id. IX, 12.  QCTrE evOV y'  I V oviEV
ov6', Catwp (V VVV, VTreKTpa7rolfLVv pq) OV (TcVEKCCE LV.  SOPH. S  O.
C. 565. Ti Eft'JLroBv p ) OvU X V[pPioEvMOVs aro8 av Oa; XEN. An.
III, 1, 13. (Ti fixTro8&v here implies OV8ev ETro86V.)  Tlvos avy 8olO.L.     a o  v X  V Erdfirav evatlwlcov C V a L; what would hinder you from being
perfectly happy? Id. Hell. IV, 1, 36; So ARIST. Ran. 695.
(d.) Hias yap CT-KoS vo 0wv pas eEiL TO V p j  Kara8uvaL, i. e.
will keep two men from sinking. XEN. An. III, 5, 11.'Ov oVeiV rFa?rpoOE1S TO  /1iU n7Xrov XELV aCrerpdna'ETo. THUC. I, 76. El 6i alp
EfL7ro8dv rt arCVTr  yeveTO Tr o  p  eVOVs rTe 8I K o  0 a aOa. DEM.
Apatur. 900, 22.'HTritrraro Trv TrnXtv itKpOV d7roXLTo7ra v aV TOv Pr
TaisE EoXaraLt ovtrpopais nre pLTreor Ev. Isoc. Antid. p. 73, ~ 122.'A7roao'oovres av ydL-'roov ylyVOLVTO T r  o  p l o pv avrovS rT oX0o
oTrpaTrvFia. XEN. Cyr. II, 4, 23. EIo'res orT ev ao qbaXeL elor roLi
JLO1 Iev traelv  l. Ib. III, 3, 31.  (See THuc. VI, 18, quoted ~ 92,
1, N. 2.)  T o  e i 17 (KaKC)S) 7rdarXeLv aiTrol 7raacav aelEtav z'Vyere,
you were entirely free from fear of suffering harm. DEM. F. L. 387,
17.'EvovcrqsE ovuBELLas Er d7roaTrpof)rJs T 0i p? 7 ra Xpq)JaT'X EL e
vuias, there being no longer any escape from the conclusion that you
have taken bribes. Id. Timoc. 702, 26.




200                   THE INFINITIVE.                [~ 95, 2.
REMARK. Th3 last two examples show that /A can be joined
with the genitive of the Infinitive, even after nouns implying hindrance or freedom. In the two following the addition of / is more
peculiar: -'H a7ropla 0ov ul 77rrvXa'etv, the inability to rest. Tiruc. II, 49.'H rov p,  vl7rrXEiv arto-Tra, the distrust of sailing with them; i. e. the
unwillingness to sail, caused by distrust. Id. III, 75.
NOTE 1.    (a.) The use of t4 with the Infinitive in the
forms c and d is to be referred to the general principle, by
which the Infinitive after all verbs expressing a negative idea
(as those of denying, distrusting, concealing, forbidding, &c.)
can always take the negative pu, to strengthen the negation
implied in the leading verb.   Thus we say apvElral t adrXes
Val Totroo, he denies that this is true; di7ryopeve  r 8eva TOuTO
irotElv, he forbade any one to do this. This negative may, however, be omitted without affecting the sense.
(b.) An Infinitive which for any reason would regularly
take pi' (either affecting the Infinitive itself, as an ordinary
negative, or strengthening a preceding negation, as in the case
just mentioned) generally takes the double negative Ait ob, if
the verb on which it depends is itself negative. Thus the
example given above, apveLTaL M7) aX?6s ELvaL TOVTO, becomes, if
we negative the leading verb, o VK apveirat t q OK acr0eds Erlva
roVro, he does not deny that this is true. So, when the original;7j really negatives the Infinitive, as in 8IKatov EartL L Torofo
af5deva, it is just not to acquit him, - if we negative the leading
verb, we shall have o    8Kaltov aOT& prr   7 ov rovro, adLtevaz, it is
not just not to acquit him.  See PLAT. Rep. IV, 427 E, cs
OvX OaloL  (o, tlV  pf O n Oelv 8tKaLOaff(V. This applies also to
the Infinitive with To (~ 95, 3).
M/ ov is occasionally used before participles, and even before
nouns, on the same principle, to express an exception to a statement
containing a negative; as in PLAT. Lys. 210 D, OViK Aipa io-rl itXov
rJ 0b/LovrvT ovaev /i OVK a dvrrTiXov, unless it loves in return. Here,
if the negatives (OVK and oviev) were removed from the leading
verb, we should have simply,j) dvrTLptXovv (with the same meaning),
which would be the ordinary form with the participle, even after a
negative. So j) OV'K deoreS, unless they were. HDT. VI, 9. So in
DEM. F. L. 379, 7, we find al re TroXEtrs roXXat Kal xaX\eral XafeLv,
ua 0) XpovQo KCa 7TromopKcla, the cities were many and difficult (= not
easy) to capture, except by long siege.




~ 95, 3.1      To    Vr WITH THE INFINITIVE.             201
REMARK. Mi ov is very rarely found where the leading verb
does not at least imply a negative. In XEN. An. II, 3, 11, &OTe
Traarv alcrtvvrv ELvaL 7  ov  vo-7rovadiaetV, so that all were ashamed
not to join heartily in the work, the double negative may be explained
by the negative idea of unwillingness implied in aiahvvrJv. See also
the last example under N. 1.
NOTE 2. When the leading verb expressing hindrance, &c. is
itself negative, the form c, sp ov with the Infinitive, is the most common. The form a, the Infinitive alone, is allowed after negative
(as well as affirmative) verbs, as in DEM. Pac. 62, 10, quoted above
under a. The form b, roa with the Infinitive (without pz), is not
used after negative verbs, according to Madvig.
Even in the form c, we sometimes find the single negative,p (for
2u ov), even when the leading verb is negative. E. g.
Ov 7roX\v Xpvov pi r;ErefXV Ip e vavo'roXeiv Taxu. SOPH. Phil.
349. OvE /A' o'fiLLarTos cpovpv 7rap/XOe, TOVe pi XevrafYl o'roXov.
Id. Trach. 226. (My ov here is a conjecture.)
3. The Infinitive   preceded by TO tp      is sometimes
used after verbs and expressions denoting hindrance,
and also after all expressions which even imply preven
tion, omission, or denial.
This Infinitive with To is less closely connected than the
simple Infinitive with the leading verb, and often denotes
merely the result of the prevention or omission of anything: it
may generally be explained as an accusative by synecdoche, or
sometimes as an object accusative (as after verbs of denial).
Here, as before (~ 95, 2), if the leading verb is itself negative,
or interrogative with a negative implied, p3 ov is generally
used instead of ~p. E. g.
Tovy 7r\r     OVLT Oiov etpyov To f Trpoeto'vra's rWv o7rIXw ro eyyvs
Trs 7r6Xeaws  K aKo p y elv, they prevented them friom injuring, &c.
THUC. III, 1. (This adds a fifth expression, e'lpyet (o- TO ~ p 7 roro
roLEiv, to the four already given (~ 95, 2) as equivalents of the
English, he prevents you from doing this.) T o e / A7 X e X a r r   a t
TrV 7rdXtLY'Xe ro3e. HDr. V, 101.  Io'I3o re Uvyyevis r  p 7 a  - tKCiV o-X1rCt. AESCH. Eum. 691. OUvrol E(oLtV FoLVOL efr iL EJ/Tro08COv
TO i/') j81r eI vat'ivOa 7raXalt Ed'O7r8Voev. XEN. An. IV, 8, 14. OVK
a7dreorXOLvv TO j17 OVK uEm roiro eiXeiv. PLAT. Rep. I, 354 B.
O0K adTrirXovYo oVh8 aro r fv firXwv Tr  /  o V  XU 7rX eoveKTrE  avTwv
retaio'aOaI. XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 32.   KlCxwva 7rapa Trpeis aeol-ay
9f~jrjovs To pL'  BavorLT (r/px&, at, i. e. they allowed Cimon by three
votes to escape the punishment of death. DEM. Aristocr. 688, 27
9*




202                    THE INFINITIVE.                [~ 95, 3.
TpelsN be'aOL /at fIot a1iVFyKav rb /L) O avar'ov T I/ a77 rat, and onl7
three votes prevented you from condemning him to death (lit. made the
difference as to condemnrnag, &c.). Ib. 676, 12. 46f3os yap dvO' VT7VO1
arapao-TareL rTO /L1 feialwos fSi\efapa arv L 3a\ev vTrv w, i. e. stands
by to prevent my closing my eves, &c. AESCH. Agam. 15.'Evrei 7rpoOvFLco-', OVK evavrT(royaoLat T o /? o v y e y o V e v 7ra ooov
7rpoo-rxp,'ee. Id. Prom. 781t. Ovaev yap avra ravr' lrapKEcet rTO /A)
o v Wr r e a   v c dTr's 7rroar' OVK:vaa0XEra-, thlis will not suffice to prevent him from falling, &c. Ib. 918. Aelrret lev ovS' a 7rpo'cOev.reLYev
TO f1 7 o v 3apvrTov' e LV a, they lack nothing of being heavily grievous. SOPH. O. T. 1232. MiroL, Kaoty-v7T7), /1 aCTtihadS TO )A 17 o0
av ev Te v  ve Vo ooiTV O Oavovra O' d y v L a l, do not think me too mean
to die with thee, &c. Id. Ant. 544. (Cf. Ant. 22, and Oed. Col. 49.)
AhuTIV  1qV ov t.Uovvr' EKEIVY7V TI))V'roXtv To I)g7 ov EYfayXdV elvai
fvrEL KevUalgfova, i. e. not grudging the city its right to be great, &c.
ARIST. Av. 36. (Compare t ldo'r7rev ILvL Kvo-C K:vpa yevcr'Oa, I1.
XVII, 272.) Ov8edL avTrieye& TO /L)r ov X eE~v o' TL E~KaraTos ^yeTrac
7rXeoTrov aiw Eiv -7rTra-OaL, no one objects to saying, &c. XEN. Conv.
III, 3. 03v' apvqrctS EfrtLr aVrolS To0 /tL) Tav'.rep )XlntTrov 7rpaTr
e I v, it is not even possible for them to deny that they did these things
in the interest of Philip. DEM. F. L. 392, 13. M7 7rapjs TO M) ov0
(cpao-aL, do not omit to speak of it. SOPi. O. T. 283. Ovi8va
Uvvaa0Oat Kpv7rTELv T o I) o0 X i'3ecoVs ai Kal oLpw ) EcrO e aLv avTrW, that
no one is able to prevent people from knowing that he would gladly
even eat some of them raw. XEN. Hell. III, 3, 6.
For /At ov, see ~ 95, 2, Note 1, (b.).
NOTE. The simple negative form TO tIA) is sometimes found even
when the leading verb is negative, where regularly TOb t, ov would
be used. This is more common here than in the corresponding
case, ~ 95, 2, Note 2. E. g.
OvK ayv eo'XofXlt  r To y dairoKXfcja-a TovpoMov a6i0ov e;pas.  SOPH.
O. T. 1387. Tis oov) ad7eXel0r o7 TO ti orot adKoXovOEiv; XEN,
Cyr. V, 1, 25.'AKOE 8' ovebv E7n)pKeorav TO I7 7rTOXv MeX v Woc7rep ovP
xetXL ra Oe v. AESCH. Agam. 1170. OVK OYv EOTt xLqXOavI oV6etuia TO
pI  Kelvov E7rtL3ovX\e VLv e fol. HDT. I, 209. Kali qln  3pao-at,
KOVK atrapyvov/at TOr'1. SOPH. Ant. 443.  See also IDEM. F. L.
392, 13, quoted above.
REMARK. To pi) and Trov pi can of course be used with the Infinitive as ordinary negatives.  See examples, ~ 92, 1, N. 3. So
efrLttLEXeTa TOu fi7)1 8lKrv 8ovvaL.
~ 96. The Infinitive with its subject, object, or other
adjuncts (sometimes including dependent verbs) may
be preceded by the article Td, the whole sentence stand.
ing as a single noun, either as the subject or object of a




~ 97.]      INFINITIVE EXPRESSING A PrRPOSE.                203
verb, as the object of a preposition, or in apposition
with a pronoun like TOVTo.       E. g.
To fiev yap 7roXXha a r oXoX  K v a Kara'rv 7ro6X\epov r's i)/erepas
a/fLXelaS -v 7tr O  ei itKalwsO* rTO b t7e 7rdcXal TOVTO T re r ov 0 v al,
7r e frv v vaL Te 7nva nFLv (rvtL/LaxLav TOVTWV avrppOTrov, avy 3ovX)p1E~0a
Yp        rr)at, TS 7tpip' eKEYOv  EvvoLas evEpyET7rLI alv eyoyE Eliv. DEM. OL, 12, 3.
~ 97.    The Infinitive without the article often expresses a purpose.     E. g.
Tpcscov ivbpa EKacrrov (el) eXo[lEOa o vo X o  ev if we should
choose every man of the Trojans to be our cup-bearer. II. II, 127. So
I. 1, 338, b('s ayetv, and 11, 107, 108. Trv e6'Ape1ov 7rdyov lovX7sv
En'crr7qacr l   e X e LXo- 0 aL T7S EVKKOa'itaI, i. e. for the purpose of
guarding 9'od order. Isoc. Areop. p. 147 B. ~ 37. 01[ PX(IpXYT, OVs
VtLLis EXeoOOX e iPX E v pov, the rulers, whom you chose to rule me.
PLAT. A             Aa e       v Epovel. 28 E. Aa  av es TO2V fyeyav lXqiJva
7r Xe vo' a i re KaKaT araKtca-Oat,, Kal Kt r p V a t, K.T. X., i. e. they sent
them to sail and examine, and to proclaim, &c. THUC. VI, 50. Tovs
ir7reas nrapelXovro IIEXorovvcrloLs  V rp a ar e v ev.  Id. II, 12.'vve3qY(rav rOlS IlIkaratecrt 7rapa8ovvat o'as avrovs Kai ra' 6'ra,
Xp   aa      o r aoOa  t O v f3ovOXwrTal, i. e. to do with them whatever they
pleased. Id. II, 4. (For rrapabovvat see ~ 92, 1, N. 1.)  EL' ovXoitse'd 7r) e7rtrpE'tra rj ral8as r at e u-a, a  XpLara  i L a ocr aat,
K. r. X., if we should wish to intrust to any one either children to instruct
or money to keep, &c. XEN. Mem. I, 5, 2. AL yvvaiLKEs r t iLv (fepOvoat, the women bringing them (something) to drink. XEN. Hell. VII,
2, 9. Tiv 7roXIv Kal 7Tv a'Kpav (VX\a TT r v avTrols 7apetlKav, they
delivered the city and the citadel to them to guard. Ib. IV, 4, 15. 6O0
yap av v/tsd XdOn, ToOUov aiere E  roLs 0EOLS KoXd eY v. DEM. F. L.
363, 25.'H oupa s epi davepoiro e l aivat ri a1eof0ev rT t Etov. XEN. Hell.
V, 1, 14. OVK'Xlov apyvpLov e tra- r T'oat, they had no money to
buy provisions. Id. An. VII, 1, 7.'ApborapxX eaorTe yiepatv C ir o X -
yr o'a a, i. e. a day to defend himself in. Id. Hell. I, 7, 28.'El/aurTv ao-t EptLeXErav 7rapcxetv ov 7rdvv 8doK'rat. PLAT. Phaedr. 228 E.
01s evsvhaiLt!ova1'Late o f ios 0 otoios'a Kal eivreXevr7 jraa& vveFverpiOrq. Tauc. II, 44.
Here, as in ~ 93, 2, the Infinitive is generally active or middle,
even where the passive would seem more natural; as K av e   e Uo
vIv'ooaav, they gave her to me to be killed. EUR. Troad. 874.
NOTE 1. The Infinitive is thus used in prose chiefly after verbs
signifying to choose or appoint, to give or take (the Infinitive denotv
ing the purpose for which anything is given or taken), and also
after those signifying to send or bring. (See the examples.)  With
the last class the Future Participle is more common. A final clause
after Iva, &c. may also be used in the same sense.




204                    THE INFINITIVE.                  [~ 97.
In poetry the same construction sometimes occurs after verbs of
motion, like e iL tL, t Kw, and 3 a i yo; and also after el f Li, E'7r iL It,
and 7r dp e  (to be, to be at hand), expressed or understood. E. g'AXXd 7rt e?  e i7r elrv'Arpei1.'Ayayeirvovy, srotlevi Xacov, but let
some one go to tell Agamemnon. Od. XIV, 496. (See Passow, s. v.
etlf.)  Bqj Oie eetv, and he started to run. 11. II, 182. Ov8e TIS
E(r-tv dpiv Kal Xoiyv a Lt v Y at, nor is there any one to keep off curse
and ruin. II. XXIV, 489. IIoXXol 8' aJ crol'AXaLoi iv a tp e'  ov
eKF vvr7at, i. e. for you to slay whomsoever you can. 11. VI, 229. Ov
/yap (Er aV7jp oOS'Ov.Oevs'cKeY, pY 7O O'KOV a "dvvat. Od. II,
59. M aav   vEv yap j7KOFev, for we are come to learn. SOPH. 0.
C. 12. IhXoKaios  oe Ka ra arT;  e Lv, here is my hair jbr you to
wreathe. EuR. Iph. Aul. 1478.
Even in prose, the Infinitive occasionally occurs after elil in this
sense, as in PLAT. Phaedr. 229 A, EKEL Ota KaOfEcreaa (sc. e'o-rY),
there is grass to sit upon. See also XEN. An. II, 1, 6, 7roXXai 86 Kca
iEXTrat Kal iafiat'oTav J epe - at'prlFiot, i. e. they were left to be
carried away (forfuel).  See the last examples under ~ 97.
NOTE 2. As (arTE is seldom used in Homer in its sense of
so as (~ 98, N. 3), the simple Infinitive may there express a
result as well as a purpose.  It thus follows many expressions
which would not allow it in Attic Greek. E. g.
Tti' p   4o-Pe Oearv Eptat Vvvre i  a XE o O aL; i. e. who brought
them into conflict, so as to contend? I. I, 8. So I, 151; and eptI(Evat, II, 214.'AXX' 0r7e  ) KOLtr Vr]VS' XOEroroa To   veECaOat, wohen
now their ship was loaded, so as (to be ready) to start. Od. XV,
457. XfpvtYa 8' afil7TroXo  7rpoox' reve Ppovra.... vacr a t, i. e.for washing. Od. I, 138.
NOTE 3. In Homer and Herodotus we often find e*vaL introduced to denote a purpose, where in Attic Greek a simple noun, as
a predicate accusative or nominative, connected directly with the
leading verb, would be sufficient. E. g.
eOprTKa, rTO 7ror 01o Ktvvlprqs OWKe Cetvltov e vat, i. e. which they
gave him as a present (lit. to be a present). B. XI, 20. AIlov et'lXro
XeLpi 1T(raxel, rTO p ( avpes  arpOrTpot OEoav ZfE tievat ovpov dpovpr.s,
which they had placed (to be) as a boundary. Il. XXI, 405. Aaptos
KaTaac'Tr'1a'ApraEpepva v7rapXov e vat Sapo:P v. HDT. V, 25.
So in the passive construction: —rXcov 0d7reXO 7TrdorqJs TrSE TLTOV
efvat trTrapXos. HDT. VII, 154.
Even in Attic prose this use of Elva sometimes occurs; as in DEM.
Aph. III, 852, 12, Mvqt7oveovoavrv adqe0Ovra rovrov XeVe0epOV elvat
ToreF they remember his having been then manumitted so as to be a fieeman. So adtba-tli auhTa 8rxocrta elvat, THuc. II, 13.
NOTE 4. The use of the Infinitive after the comparative and',
than, is to be referred to this principle. E. g.




~ 98, 2.]          INFINITIVE AFTER    QarTe.              205'H dvOpirtvr1 (4Pazs aarieEveCarepa r X aetv EL rseXvqv &w Al 71 A7relpovS
human nature is too weak to acquire the art of those things of which it
has no experience. PLAT. Theaet. 149 C.  To yap rvo'rfia piEiOV 
fepesEv, i. e. too great to bear. SOPH. O. T. 1293.
"a-re is sometimes expressed before this Infinitive; as in XEN.
Hell. IV, 8, 23,"HlcGOovro avrov eXarrTo e'ovra bvvaJLv i WY're rove
fLXovs O q5 PXEL.
So, rarely, kso in the sense of Sare (~ 98, Note 1); as in Cyr. VI,
4, 17, Tas adovrlas Ieiovs eXovo'  i  s 7r o L rotEiv  KaL p pa v.
~ 98. 1. The Infinitive is used after &o-re, so that,
so as, to express a result. E. g.'Hv 7re7ratlevLtevo oVrcos o' re wrdvv r I Kcp KEKerrfqIVOS' TIrvv palcos
eX e I V adpKOvLra, he had been educated so as very easily to have enough,
although he possessed very little. XEN. Mem. I, 2, 1.,vac  i 6 o
Kipos XEyevraL qXtXorTLJ osa,     Tr T a, (0e'E  ra'rV vo a v arXTjvat,
7radva aE KLVSvvOV Vt r   i v a L. Id. Cyr. I, 2, 1.'A7rExpnq yap av ro7s
yvwofrOeifftv eFjLPevLV, & r r e 778e/Llay'\tLV eL  L va a  Tp roVTov ta(lpopad,
so that wte should have no difference with him. DEM. Aph. I, 813, 4.
HIoXXahf X1rtiaE eXO) dapKov0-rs epeEv, c f r Ee V/aS /T a o Xe S L 0 i0 -
va  TW )V TrpayaTroWv //T ayvoroai, K-..X. Ib. 813, 20. TOLtorov
0so    v 7rMi rapEaoo-av, c oa-r... Crvve X ev  es ravrdo. ISOC. Pan. p.
49 B. ~ 43.  See Pan. ~ 45, rofovTrodv  rTLY, i(Ore Kal TOVTO r E p  -
X r(  at.   IeifooLcaL yap ov TO'OVTOV OV' v iaSre fE  q ov KaXws
OaveLv. SOPH. Ant. 97. 2     8e o-xoXO'CEL, oCT'T OavLaECeiv efI.
EUR. Hee. 730. Mn8'' f3ia C-e ma/ialr s vpK7rardTW rooidvoe ltieiLV
ia-re r'e ^V 8LKqv Trareivi. SOPiH. Aj. 1335. Adyov Kal /3ovXevMcidrco
KOLvovOv dv (re TotoLvro, coo' re q  Y   e C e   ff e X  0 E e v a t $v [3ovkXodeOa
elievaL, so that not a single one of the things we wish to know should
have escaped you. XEN. Cyr. VI, 1, 40. (See ~ 18, 3, b.)   AvcrKoXia Kai favila 7roXXdiat Els rTriV  livotav Elirtrouva'tlv ovroos CO ( re Kca
ras errLarf/ias E /3a XXELv. Id. Mem. III, 12, 6.'A7roXrPie'i;roS,
&iCrE 7 i aP  v'vaca lt 6iraveXOEiv o'lKa8e. DEM. Chers. 98, 25.
(For 6ivaa-Oat a' see N. 4.)
See ~ 93, 1, Note 1, last example.
REMARK.     When the result is to be stated.as an independent fact, rather than merely as a result, the Indicative
is used after io-,re.  See ~ 65, 3.
2. The Infinitive after &Oare sometimes denotes a condition, being equivalent to the Infinitive after c' o        or
e<',    re; and sometimes it denotes a purpose, like a
final cause.   E. g.
IIorovraL dluoXoyiav r1po IHiXr7ra, w a- r e'AOrvaiois eE' ei v a & #ou.




206                    THE INFINITIVE.                 [~ 98, 2.
Xevoal 7repJ rt7   MvrtLXvaloV, they make a treaty with Paches, to the
effect that the Athenians shall be permitted, &c. Tiuc. III, 28. (See
THUC. III, 114, %vFLfax Lav e7rotroaavTo ErL TOlo6e, CTr.... re
- r p a r  e L v.)'E6ov avro;L rTwv XotTrMv apXCLv'EXXi5v,  c r'
avTros v 7ra K o v e l f3v cLao L, it being in their power to rule the rest of
the Greeks, on condition that they should themselves serve the King.
DEM. Phil. II, 68, 12. Hav lrotoio-wv, o- Tr  8IKrv.  t Lov ai, they
do everything, so that they may not suffer punishment. PLAT. Gorg.
479 C. (Here Zva p/i witL the Subjunctive might have been used.)'Ef3ovX'7Oqoav'EXevoiva eL&CLoaaoraOat, co)f re C v at Crlc'L Karaqfryjv,
el ae1toete. XEN. Hell. I1, 4, 8. Mr1Xaval roXXai eclTLV,  a Ce  L a -
e v y e v Odvarov, there are many devices for escaping death. PLAT.
Apol. 39 A. (See ~ 92, 1, N. 2.)
NOTE 1.'QS is sometimes used with the Infinitive instead
of aore; generally, however, to express a result, seldom     to
express a puipose. E. g.'Y+rJv Ne owrco ar' i  Xeyerat, o s rar Kopvfasr avrov ovX ota re
etvaL ieaCOat, and it (the mountain) is said to be so high, that it is not
possible to see its summits. HDT. IV, 184. NavuaX-cravres avrl7raXa
/1EV Kal C  s a roVs eareKpovs a t ov  VKatV, and so that each thought
themselves the victors. THUC. VII, 34. BLao'(6eOa, cb  s T7rXoveKTOvrTEV
8tKr)V p7. 3t6ovaL. PLAT. Rep. II, 365 D.'O 7rora/1os roT roTO ro
3adOos, S' Fr1ae Tra 86para V7r p e~X e v ) Trv 3adov'. XEN. An. III, 5,
7. So II, 3, 10. cePpovraL KWOovLa, cb adiro TOV roraflov apvCra oOa.
Id. Cyr. I, 2, 8.'Ev Tro acadaXEi rj'3b Erovrat., CO v ufLr8v av e'rt KaK)O
iraOeiv. Ib. VIII, 7, 27. (For 7aOeLv av see N. 4.)
NOTE 2. The Infinitive with i0o-re or s is sometimes used where
we should expect a simple Infinitive, either after the adjectives and
adverbs included in ~ 93, or after the verbs and expressions which
take the Infinitive of the object (~ 92, 1, and N. 2); and rarely
after those which regularly take an Infinitive as the subject (~ 91).
E. g.
Ildrepa Trae sE etloct cpovpowrepoL oore  a 0 e v ra fpaco1peva rI
avopev; i. e. are they wiser than men in learning, &c.?  XEN. Cyr.
IV 3, 11.'OXk'yot eC'1EV Los eyKpareiL eivai aurov. Ib. IV, 5, 15.
(Cf. oXtya dapvve Lv, too few to make a defence. THUc. I, 50.)'PvXp6v (eor TT  -8cop) &OT re X ov'raoOat, the water is cold for
bathing.  XEN. Mem. III, 13, 3.    (Cf. XoVcrarOal 1vaXporepov,
and   Eep/LorPpov 7rie i v, in the same section.)  TPLoCadpevot a1vrol
7rprotL co C' re Trdao' 7rpoOvFula d'L v ve v, having voted to defend them,
&c. TIIUC. VI, 88. Elt advayK7v KaOECrTaL.ev c CTT  KL v  vve elv.
Isoc. Archid. p. 126 C. ~ 51. (See ~ 92, 1, N. 2.) So bvwauLtv
OTare Eyyeve-TOaL, PLAT. Rep. IV, 433 B.'EX0ovres wrpos avrovs
treiovcLVw  ore Jifra ro'wv'ApyetL E'LXe p oa t. THUC. III, 102.
(In the same chapter, 7reiOEL'AKapvavas o30176 o r aL NauTraKTcr.)
IIaivv /tot eEXo-ev W  T r e   L 3E v a V,a it concerned me very much to




~ 100.]   INFINITIVE AFTER'Eo' 4 AND'E4' Tre.          207
know.  XENr. Cyr. VI, 3, 19.'A3vvarov vlxpv      1 or r e  pcorayopot
TOVe (ro(oreTpo'v 7 ta  X  O a t. PLAT. Prot. 338 C. So XEN.
Mem. I, 3, 6.
NOTE 3. In Homer & a r e is generally used like c - Tr, in the
sense of as. It occurs with the Infinitive, in the sense of so as, only
twice: Il. IX, 42; Od. XVII, 21.'as, so as, so that, is not found
in Homer, who generally uses the simple Infinitive where later
writers would insert CoorT or as. (See ~ 97, N. 2.)
NOTE 4. The Infinitive after oa(T-  may take the adverb av to
form an apodosis, whenever an Indicative or Optative, if used in
the place of the Infinitive, would have required an'lv. (See ~ 65,
3, Note.)  The Infinitive with'iv here, as in indirect quotations, fol
lows the general rule stated in ~ 41. (See example in ~ 41, N. 4;
and the last examples under ~ 98, 1 and ~ 98, 2, N. 1.)
NOTE 5. It will be seen that the Present and Aorist are the
tenses of the Infinitive regularly used after C0TI-. For the perfect
see ~ 18, 3, and Note; and for the Future, ~ 27, N. 2 (b).
~ 99.    The Infinitive is used after   b' C and c'',Te,
on condition that, for the purpose of. E. g.
ECiTEV OTL arCEloaaCOai 3souXaoLro, EfY co pti'Te avroS TOVS EXX7vat
ad t K L v FtrT EKELvovs Ka tE v ras oLcKa, X a, a a v v  E t  ~ rartT'7ELa
0COV;&OLVrTO. XEN. An. IV, 4, 6. IIHs aI oTro  0 EOfXOt Ta aXXTrpLa
a7roa-TcpefLV E('  Kacao'oS el vat; Id. Ages. IV, 1.'A(tefYv -e,
7 r TOVTr) LidyrTO, e( (are r]KETrt  tXf \oa'of0evE.   PLAT. Apol. 29
C. AlpeOg'evr E s   e f  v yypd't a  vaofovs, KaO' ov'Trrvas 7roXLrTvCOWvTO  XEN. Hell. II, 3, 11. (For wroX1revo-owlro, see ~ 65, 1, N.
1.)'E4' oTre,3or0oa-Few. AESCHIN. Cor. ~ 114. See ~ 27, N. 2 (b).
For the Future Indicative after E'4' ( and ef' (TE, especially in
Herodotus and Thucydides, see ~ 65, 2.
~ 100. The Infinitive may stand absolutely in parenthetical phrases, sometimes alone, but generally preceded by (e   or o'ov.   E. g.
To AeXra Eo'rr KarappVrov Tr Ka VEcoa-tL, 0 XOC Aoy) Et7re tv, avarsfvofs, i. e. recently, so to speak. HDT. II, 15. (This expression
c& Xoyo edtreiv is peculiar to Herodotus.)  Kal COS E/L EU f" IL vr -
a0-ai, rT 60 EpM77vevS xot eLrtL 7LXeyo/voS Ta ypdSatara e'7r, as I well remember, &c. Id. II, 125.'Q2s pLev vvy v eXaxiorcp 8 qX  o-a, 7rav
e'lprqraL ~.... ~c  ~ e V 7rX;'ovt X6yo 8 rX o o a t, CBoe'XEL. Id. I, 25.
Mera 8e, ov 7roXXt Xy   ei7TreiLv, Xpovos &e~qv. Id. I, 61.  Kal
EpyOV, ) r?e7tro e It e tL, 7 ovIevos'rpooreovTrat f3paxEos Wactr. PLAT.
Gorg. 450 D.' 2se 8 cvvros El irel v, to speak concisely. XENu
Oec. XII, 19.'t 86 aVV/EXoUVrT EIrTEY. Id. Mem. III, 8, 




208                    THE INFINITIVE.                  ~ 10.
Xapor 8' d8' Ipb, oos da7re K  a  a. SOPI. O. C. 16. Kal ro tuvrnav
elireTi. Tiuc. I, 138. (So VI, 82, eS ro dKcpt/3es fIrefv.)'Os
LAIKpov peyakX  eLKaaL. Id. IV, 36. "1Qs' y 4/OI XpraOaL KpLTj.
EUR. Ale. 801.'Qs'pos vfas Ep Lpff aoat, i. e. between us. PLAT.
Rep. X, 595 B. O68' iy) +eyco TOUTOVs,    s y)e 8LaKodVOVs el a
r-'Xeco. PLAT. Gorg. 517 B. Or-ov y7e /e e; IJv at, at least asfar as.1 know. Id. Theaet. 145 A.
So &S 4f'oi 8 OK e V or i  aol  K eF V, like &s J,/o4 8OKel, as it seems
to me; 6Oiyov 86iv, to want little, i. e. almost. (See N. 1.)
REMARK. The force of sr in this construction can hardly be expressed in English, although it resembles that of 0s used for OaTre
in ~ 98, 2, Note 1. That it is not a demonstrative, as might be supposed from the translation of s EcTL7rL, so to speak, is plain from such
expressions as Z)s TvvrpTuCo dlreZv, to speak concisely.
NOTE 1. In the phrase o'lyov 8elv (lit. to want little), little
short of, almost, 8eiv is often omitted, so that the genitive
DXlyov stands alone in the sense of almost.  E. g.'oX i ov UpoD8os Y yeyeviqLa, I am almost gone. ARIST. Nub. 722.
The full ibrm is found at the beginning of I)DE. Phil. III, —IoXX\v Xd6yCv yLyvoivcov  X l yov O8E KvaO' Ka&o'TrqV KKXr)aCav, i. e. in
almost every meeting.
NOTE 2.    In the phrase;KcV elvat (sometimes rT &KWV
evrat), willing or willingly, elvat appears to be superfluous: the
phrase is used chiefly in negative sentences.    Elvat appears
superfluous also in such expressions as Tr'Vv elvaI, at present, r6
r.lpepo, etvat, to-day, and r  6r' KelOLvs elvat,l as far as depends
on them. E. g.'EKYV yap e vaL obvev + evofJtaLr, willingly I will tell no falsehood.
PLAT. Symp. 215 A. OVK op71lV YE Kar apXas v7ro c-ov EKOros e L v a
fea7raTr7to1-crEo-at. Id. Gorg. 499 C. ('AvyayKr eXetV) riJv a(EV8etav
Kal O EKoTUra e Iv a L yt8a rri? vrpoSTEXer-Oat rTO +eios. Id. Rep. VI,
485 C.'Aro6xpr7,io TO vy v EivL  a ravr fprKEvat.L Isoc. Antid. p.
119, ~ 270. To Er' EKELvoit e tva  a7rrXetore. XEN. Hell. III, 5, 9.
To /pEv tfpepOv elC va Xp ( ao-OaL avr.7, to use it to-day. PLAT. Crat
396 E. Kara Troro TO  Ya, in this respect. Id. Prot. 317 A.
Similar is the expression rTv 7rpcrjv7 elvaYa  (for rjv 7rprqTv), at
first, in HDT. I, 153. So cs 7rrdXaLa elva&, considering their antiquity. TvHU. I, 21.
~ 1O1.     The   Infinitive is sometimes used       in  the
sense of the Imperative, especially in Homer.        E. g.
TZ vv tLx 77TOTr Kal oTU  V valCK 7rep T7rtOS C 1 v a t  o p l pivoV AVYov  rra
1t, avTK /AicE, 5v K e ee8jsr, adXXa rTO tev (da'oOat, ro 8E Kal KE



~ 104.]    INFINITIVE USED IMPERATIVELY, ETC.            209
Kpvf,.J;Evo e va t, now therefore be thou never indulgent to thy wife, &c.
Od. XI, 441. So I1. I, 20, 582; II, 10: HDT. I, 32 (; c LrX;eLv,U
KUXEELV): AESCH. ProIn. 712. 2U 8E ras 7rsvXas avolaS v i7r EK  v
Ka  7r y e cr a l, and do you, having opened the gates, rush out and
press on. THUC. V, 9.
REMARK. It will be noticed that, when the Infinitive stands
for the Imperative, its subject is in the nominative, but in the
four constructions that follow (~~ 102-105) its subject is in the
accusative.
~ 102.    The Infinitive is sometimes used        for the
Optative in the expression of a wish referring to the
future. This occurs chiefly in poetry. E. g.
ZeV 7TrarTEp,  A'lavra  X a Xe Yv  TvBosE vlov, Father Zeus, may the
lot fall on Ajax or on the son of Tydeus. I1. VII, 179.'Ep/ia'iTnroXale, rav yvvaiKa ra'v e',LLa ovrco iL' dar o 6( ocr 0  ra r' EtavTov iaT opa,
0 that I could sell my wife and my mother at this rate! ARIsT.
Acharn. 816. Oeo'?roXiTaL, upf pIe 8ovXELas vxeivy. AESCH. Sept.
253.
~ 103.    In laws, treaties, proclamations, and formal
commands, the Infinitive is often used in the leading
sentences, depending on some word like Aote or SeoXKalt, be it enacted, or IceXeveCra, it is commanded;
which may be either understood, or expressed in a preceding sentence. E. g.
Tapav E r'iv lepY v XPladrco'y alpe~a0Oat pyEv EK ra7v peyl'rrcov
TLM7L7p-rTWv * T^y E atUpeLYv rouvToY Kal r^Y OKLLaC'lav yiyL v YE 0 a l
KaOa7rep 7 rTWv arparrTywv E7LYEVeTo, and (be it enacted) that treasurers
of the sacred funds be chosen, &c. PLAT. Leg. 759 E. So in most
of the laws (genuine or spurious) standing as quotations in the text
of the Orators, as in DEM. Aristocr. 627, 21: A z K ac  e Ii rE v IV'ApeFw 7Tray (p voV KaL Tpavuaros eK rpovolas, K. r. X.  Errq  E lv a L
ras aT7rovhas 7reYrKovra, and that the treaty shall continue fifty years.
THUC. V, 18.'AKoVErTe \ECo' roTVS O7rXiraS vytV WeL aeco d eoYovs o 7rXa
ad rn e y a I rd  oiKahe. ARIST. Av. 448.
~ 104.    The Infinitive, with or without rO, is used
in expressions of surprise or indignation. E. g.
To Be P/lqE KVVYUV OLKOOev X 0 E I V  /L TOVY KaKohaalolov e`xoV7a, but to
think that I, wretched fellow, should have come from home without even
my cap! ARIST. Nub. 268. ToTovY 8 ivf3 p LC,; dva Yvrev E;Y
X




210                    THE INFINITIVE.                   [~ 104.
Wv el rtLr ea. i, iya7rav  eLt. DEM.'Mid. 582, 2. Trv ifcoplas' 7r
ALa v o p ( t V, oVTa TrXtFKovTovY, what folly! to believe in Zeus, now
you are so big! ARIST. Nub. 819.
Compare'VERG. Aen. I, 37: Mene incepto desistere victam.
~ 105.     In narration the Infinitive often appears to
stand for the Indicative.     It depends, however, on some
word like X7eyera, it is said, expressed (or at least implied) in something that precedes. E. g.'ArTTKOMIvoovs &e rovs IbolvtKaas es 82 3 rd'Apyos TOUro, 8 c aTr L'e   a 
TrV cOpTov, and (they say) that the Phoenicians, when now they were
came to this Argos, were setting out their cargo for sale. HDT. I, 1.
(Here tarlOerOaat is an Imperfect Infinitive, ~ 15, 3.)  "'AXX', c
7rat," O )v at rovT'Acrrvady7v, "oi OK CaX.oevoL ravr'a 7reptTrXavtEeO6a.".... "'AXXa KaL cr," fa dvai rTO  oVv,    p Kpov, "pc.r.X.... Kal TOv
DAaTvayrTv e crep e rOa, "Kal Trivt a3 aV r'EKCatpofievos Xeyei;"
("Ort GEe,'  )iVat, " 6pc, K.T.X.... IIpo7 ravra he rTov'Aorvdyrqv
elrreLv, K.r.k.... Kal TOv Kvpov e irelV, K.r.X. XEN. Cyr. I, 3, 5
and 6. (Here all these Infinitives, and twelve others which follow,
depend on XcyEyrac in ~ 4.)  Kai rbv Ke X e V  OaL oaovat, and he commanded him to give it. Id. I, 3, 9. So in HDT. I, 24 the story of
Arion and the dolphin is told in this construction, the Infinitives
all depending on a single Xeyovoa- at the beginning.  See ~ 101,
Remark.
~ 106.     Hpiv, before, before that, until, besides taking the Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative, like ecoS
(~ 66), is also followed by the Infinitive.
For the use of the finite moods after 7rpiv, see ~ 67.
1. In Homer the Infinitive follows wrpiv after both
affirmative and negative sentences. E. g.
Na7e  hf IHIatov 7rpiv eX O e v vlas'AXatuv. I1. XII, 172. #E0v9
opedatfivor 7rpLv or   a ordra,' Cfoild)aprev. I1. XVI, 322.  2iL)tvu
e,rptv Trep rpo'os tX\\ Xae f) altLMa yvLa, 7rplv 7ro6Xe.tv r' i 8 LOe F
7roXeitoto Te IppL.Epa Epya, before they saw the war, &c. II. VIII, 452.
(See Note 4.)     evyeyt 7Tpiv 7rEp O'AtXoV doXXLc-Or, u eva  ap dvapv.
II. XV, 588.'H K' rt,roXXol yaiav  hoha elXOV 7rpiv "IXov elaca tK efr a. I. XXII, 17.'AXXt o0 avrc ZetV oXecELte f3LVr i rplv 1LV mrrJpta
r E    a at. Od. IV, 668. A'i' c4EchX'....ahXXo' 6oXErOat rpiV e\6dOE.
Od. XVIII, 402. OV XArco 7rpiv Tpias a8riyv EXdacat roXkExoto. I1.
XIX, 423. U06 Tl OVIp T'Ep7rrTO 7 rplv 7roXE/LOV aroFa avpevat
atCaroevroS. I1. XIX, 313.   Ov' dc7roXhiye  rpti XpooS daSpcG,.EOL
&^  X   i v. IL. XX, 100. Ou /' darorpe+Ets 7rplv xaXK  a X et a



5 106, 2.]         INFINITIVE AFTER UpPv.                   211
o0 a t. I1. XX, 257. Ml&' dvrtos taTaa-' feZo Vrpl'V T KaKOV 7raE~Flv
11. XX, 198.
See ~ 67, Note 1.
2. Writers later than Homer use the Infinitive after
7rpiv chiefly when the leading sentence is affirmative.
E.g.
IlpJv wv rrapelva a & EKEvov es T)V'ArTLKfic1, VpEEsC KaLpos Ecr 7rrpoBcOorat ev rTv Botowrav, bejbre he comes into Attica, &c. HDT. VIII,
143. Otov epev P  TeoaapapKovra Kal OKrTO) 7apOevotat, 7rpLv f o-ov afiap'EXELi, OKVTrarov ydafov. PIND. Pyth. IX, 196. npL vv rva 7rtEoV
o-aropEiv, vK T7a08' e'apas eeXOE, beforeseeking further, &c. SOPH. O.
C. 36.'A7ro7reFJ7rovotv ovv avrov 7rpiv a o v -a t. THUC. II, 12. So
II, 13, 7rpiv'cr3aX elv els rTqv'ArTLKi.'A(jIErav Tl EX? qroXv urpiv
E IKveira-Oa&. XEN. Cyr. III, 3, 60. -Ilpi/v  v ov IWX eXc ( a  ra
aKpa ov;ev &eio0Oe elpvr)S. lb. III, 2, 12.'H/Ei  T'oivvv Meoo'v jvq)v
EA\XoILEv rpv HIepa-a  Xa3 e v Trv l aaCTXdeav Kal  KparaicraL T7a j
T17EipOV, Kal 7Tpiv 0 K I 0(J'0vai rtvas wv roXCv co rTv EXAX?vIwv.
Isoc. Archid. p. 121 A. ~ 26. Kal 7rplv i yr-ivaS yeyoveva&, adre&WKE. PLAT. Prot. 320 A.'A7rcuXojLEo-' ip', el KaKOV 7rpooola:oLo/ev
veov 7raXciaL, 7rpLv To3'  7 ) v7 rX ) K v a K, we are ruined then, if we shall
add a new calamity to the former one, before we shall have exhausted
that. EUR. Med. 79. (See ~ 18, 3.)
NOTE 1. The Infinitive after 7rpiv was probably not accompanied by a'v. (See Kriger's note on HDT. I, 140.)
NOTE 2. IIpLv with the Infinitive after negative sentences is rare
in the Attic poets, but more frequent in the Attic prose.   (See
~ 67,Note 2.)  E. g.
OVK av jpOETro, TrpLv KaO''j8ov'v KX\IELV  SOPH. Tr. 197. Upiv
Ls3ev', ovels uaavrT L TWv peEXXOTvrov, o r T rpaEL. Id. Aj. 1418. So
AESCr. Sept. 1048, Agam. 1067; ARIST. Av. 964. Kal 6t avro ov
7rpLv rac aXel, a XX* E67rei~ ev rT) EpEYCp 6e/EVY, rovs $vIi/iaXovs rov((e
7rapeKaX~erae. TH. THU., 68.  So I, 39; V, 10; VII, 50. OvWe yhp
TOVurov 7rplv paOelv ovlELs 7TrjlrTaro. XEN. Cyr. IV, 3, 10. ATr 17i
yvvql, 7rpiv p Av Ae, as  6Abo3oy  EXOELv, Jiitav yfiepav OVK EXqpEVC-Ev. DEM.
Onet. I, 873, 10.
NOTE 3. IIpLv f, rpoTrepov q (priusquam), 7rpoa-Ocv I, and
even v -Trepov i', like urpiv, may be followed by the Infinitive.  (See
~ 67, Note 3.) E. g.
01 86 ALyVrrrto, 0 rplV lEV I *tafLp[ItTro  crocoYv f3aCL\LXEra,
eVOptdiov EUCOvroVU 7rpCov  yVervEOat 7TavTWYv advOp&rwv. HDT. II, 2.'Er rovs 7roLreas a r p rpo  pov i aL o' E Oa a Toavrovs eVOvs EX p7E-V,
bejbre they perceived them. TIIUC. VI, 58. So I, 69. Ilpiv  ai va-Tr7jval, Er'iTL V a T e p o v eKCarToY  avrovs o I KL K  r a -, I IajL[LitXoY TrEnfavreTS es EXewovra, i. e. a hundred years after their own settlement Id.
VI, 4.




212                  THE INFINITIVE.             [ 106, 2.
In HDT. VI, 108 we find the Infinitive depending on (f0dvo i7, the
verb implying 7rporepov or 7rpiv: - (0 a L r T'v E faavapaaro8Lo'evTes 7
rtva 7rvOeao-at,deowv, you would be reduced to slavery before any of us
would hear of it.
NOTE 4. Ilptv or 7rplv 7' is very often preceded by 7rp rcpov,
F pO 0  v, r apo,  or another r p Lv (used as an adverb), qualifying the leading verb. (See ~ 67, Note 4.) E. g.'ArrovqrKovut r p e p ov p r p I v 8hXot ytyveOraL oLot lo-av. XEN.
Cyr. V, 2, 9. Kal cfoioaav 1') 7rptv es IKoLcatav qELV vrptv A  rov T &Ov8pov roVrov dva'rerjqvivat. HDT. I, 165. IlH p o  OV6K e'Urerat aXXWos,
7r p v'Y.. vI) 7reLtpqOvat. Ii. V, 220. M' 7rpLv rTapcdpyv, 7rp' ro'8'
ev OeovOaL, TEKvov. EUR. Here. F. 605.
NOTE 5. I a p o s, in the sense of vrptv, is used in Homer with
the Infinitive, but never with the other moods. E. g.
TEKva dyporat EE~\ovTro'r ap o 7Ererqva y eve o a. Od. XVI,
218. Ove ol V7rvOs L7rTely crl j3Xe(poip osto r ap o  KaraX  a & raara. Od. XXIII, 309.
REMARK. The rules for the tenses of the Infinitive are
given in Chapter Second. It will be seen from a comparison
of these, that the Present and Aorist are the only tenses ordinarily used in constructions in which the Infinitive in itself
has no reference to time, that is, in all except indirect discourse. In indirect discourse each tense has its own force, as
in the Indicative; but in other constructions the Perfect is
used only in the cases mentioned in ~ 18, 3, b, and Note; and
the Future only in the few cases mentioned in ~ 27, Note 2, a
and b. (See ~ 27, Note 1.)




~ 108, 2.]          THE PARTICIPLE.                   213
CHAPTER VI.
THE PARTICIPLE.
~ 107. The Participle has three distinct uses:first, it may express a simple attribute, like an ordinary
adjective (~ 108); secondly, it may define the circumstances under which the action of the sentence takes
place (~~ 109-111); thirdly, it may form     part of the
predicate with certain verbs, often having a force resembling that of the Infinitive (~~ 112, 113).
REMARK. As the Infinitive may be considered as a verbal noun,
so the Participle is always a verbal adjective; both alike retaining
all the attributes of a verb which are consistent with their nature.
See ~ 90.
~ 10S.    1. The Participle, like any other adjective,
may qualify a noun.
In such expressions it must often be translated by a
finite verb and a relative, especially when the Participle
is preceded by the article. E. g.
nIoXs Ka'XXEc& &ca  povcra, a city excelling in beauty.'Avip Kas 7r e7r a e a v p e v o,   a man who has been well educated. Ol 7rpEcrO3eL ol irapa I)LXAWrov re p 0 e e r e, the ambassadors who had been
sent fiom Philip.'Avspes ol -rovro r-oLa'ovrev, men who will do this.'Ev i7j Meo-orqfvia roreT o iar yj, in the land which was once Messenia. See ~ 16, 2.'rpaTrEVovcr'v erIL 7T AioX vov r V ovaS KaXo  v a s,
they sail against the so-called Aeolian islands, lit. the islands called
those of Aeolus. THUc. III, 88. Al ap'pTa oratKoao OCa eLvaL (ov'(Tis,
the natures which seem to be best. XEN. Mem. IV, 1, 3. Al rrpo TOo
(rTo/SaTro vS vav a X oo'a l. THUC. VII, 23. Toy' KaTir e X)Q   a
KLvGvvov Tv  7rOtv. DEM. Cor. 301, 28.
2. The Participle preceded by the article may be
used substantively, like any other adjective. It is then
equivalent to ecelo^9 O   (he who) and a finite verb in
the tense of the Participle. E. g.




214                    THE PARTICIPLE.                   [~ 108.
Ol KparoUVreS, the conquerors. Ol 7reTre'LoEevoL, those who have been
convinced. OvTro's Eor r 6  ro vr o t  o- a, this is the one who did it.
Ovroi El-Lv ol vias wcraV da 8 K 1ov'res, these are the men who will
wrong you all.
Iapa 7roS aplaros 8 o K o V' t V elval, amonq those who seem to be best,
XEN. Mem. IV, 2, 6.. Hv iE 6 feL EV v 7vycoJ7vr TaVUT7V e L7r c v Iliaavapov, and Peisander was the one who gave this opinion. THUc. VIII,
68.  Tois'ApKa8owv oTreTpolv Ov rL Vt vjLaXOLd s 7IpoelTrov, they proclaimed to those of the Arcadians who were their allies. Id. V, 64.'AQeKrTov Eyw  Qt qic etlaL (roarvW) r6 ao-(poVELv hvv q  ot ev,for
one who is to be able to be discreet. XEN. Symp. IV, 26.
NOTE 1.    When the Participle, in either of these constructions, refers to a purpose or intention, it is generally Future,
rarely Present. E. g.
Nopov 8qor ooLa 7Tv 7avra K   oV o vT a Te0elVTaL TroVrol, they have
publicly enacted this law, which is to prevent these things. DEM. Mid.
530, 10. Tfv py a a- o le v  eo vr eOVwv there being men in the country
to cultivate it.  XEN. An. II, 4, 22. (See ~ 110, 1.)'O IywrJof E V  oV8 lS e' rat there will be nobody who will lead us. lb. II, 4, 5.
IloXXoVS E;o$pev roVS erolto c v v a y VoV  o L  VOVS fULv. Isoc. Pac.
p. 186 D. ~ 139.
See the more common use of the Future Participle to express a
purpose, ~ 109, 5.
NOTE 2. Participles, like adjectives, are occasionally used
substantively even without the article, in an indefinite sense;
but generally only in the plural. E. g.'E7rXEL 8o0EKa TpLpetl EXOw V  7r 7roXX\he vasV K KTI r  V O V  S he
sailed with twelve triremes against men who had many ships. XEN.
Hell. V, 1, 19. "Orav 7roXke FLOVVTv 7rdhtLs aX6, whenever a city of
belliqerents is taken. Id. Cyr. VII, 5, 73. META raTaa a'cpKvovvral
uo d ri ayye XX ov ors Or   6  rarrip dqeirat, there come messengers
announcing, &c. Isoc. Trapez. p. 360 C. ~ 11. Eties vovv eXovLTa
X7Ov'oveEVOv Kal Xalpova; did you ever see a man of sense (se. LvaL)
grieved and rejoicing? PLAT. Gorg. 498 A.
NOTE 3. In the poets, the Participle with the article sometimes
becomes so completely a substantive, that it is followed by an adnominal genitive rather than by the case which its verbal force
would require.  A few expressions like o0 7rpoo-'Kovres, relatives, and
Tr 0-rvIuppov or ra OavLLpepovra, gain, advantage, are used in the ssme
way even in prose. E. g.'O EKEIVOv TEK v, his father. EUR. El. 335. (We should expect
6 eKelvov reKco&.)  Ta IAtKpa ot fIL )e povra TSI 7rdoXEcos, the small advantages of the state. DEM. Cor. 234, 26. Bao-teXwo 7rpo -  dovV r j
Tris.  THiu. I, 128.




~ 108.]          PARTICIPLE AS ADJECTIVE.                  215
NOTE 4. (a.) In the poets and in Thucydides, the neuter singular of the Present Participle with the article is sometimes used in
the sense of an abstract verbal noun, where we should expect the
Infinitive with the article. E. g.'Ev Tc yI) LEXkeTovr atT dVVEroTpoiL (rovrat, in the want of practzce,
&c. TIHUG. I, 142.   (Here we should expect ev r7j /r pEXEXrav.)
rvcrco 7TO tLEv  e 8 t os5 avTro  rovs evavrTovs paXXov  ofT0AoroV, To  e
Qapa-ov.... d aoreETpov EacoeEvov. Id. I, 36.  (Here To  EILOsE,
fear, is used like T7 E&E'vyat, and r7 Oapaovv, courage, like Tob Oapaelv
or TO Odpo-os.)  Mera Toi Apwce'vov, with action. Id. V, 102. Kai
oE y} el'dco' TO yap vo o0ov    Ooel oe Gf VLTraparardTrtv X\aeiv.
SOPH. Phil. 674. (ro vocrovv =, vYo-oS.)  To yap 7roOovv eKaaror
EfKlaOelv 6EXCv OVK LEv AeiroT, nrpv KaO rj8ovIv KXVELV. SoPH. Trach.
196.
Compare the use of the neuter singular of an adjective for the
corresponding abstract noun; as rO KaXOV, beauty, for rT KdXX\o.
(b.) A similar construction sometimes occurs when a Participle
and a noun are used instead of an Infinitive and a noun, where in
English we generally use a finite verb. E. g.
Merh A   o'Xova oie ota evov OeXaIe vefyEcnsLE ydXar Kpoiov, i. e.
after Solon was gone. HDT. I, 34. Tj nroXe OUT e  r    oX  ov Ka&cfS
(aVf/3LdvTo  ovre O'redoews'TrnroTe aLTLos eyE eTO, i. e. the cause of a
disastrous result of any war (like To7 nro'Xe/wov  rva KaK vS avpt3rvac).
XEN. Mem. I, 2, 63. So es )\;wov Ka'ra3v;ra, II. I, 601.
REMARK. Such expressions as rT KpaToYv S T  71roXee, the ruling
part of the state, To T oai;ov r- +4vXs, &c. must not be confounded
with the examples belonging under Notes 3 and 4. They are
merely cases of the partitive genitive after a participle used as a
noun.
NOTE 5. Some Present Participles are occasionally used like
predicate adjectives after dlt/ or ytyvouaL.. Such are especially 8ia)b;pov,'X0ov (with an adverb), 7npoOaKoV, n-rpr(aV, e'ov, Ceo'd, and
acrvf)pOov. E. g.
Ti 7ror' O Trv oTroS EKeLvov 8 i a  e p o v; in what is this man different
from that one? PLAT. Gorg. 500 C.  V oepov, VI Tfj roX r L, it was
advantageous to the state. DEM. F. L. 364, 25. So after vrdpXco in
Demosthenes; as ro7ro tuEvy yap V7rapXeLv viaS eC soras,yovpa,j for I
think you are aware of this, Cor. 257, 25.
NOTE 6. The poets sometimes use a Present or Aorist Participle with ELdL as a periphrasis for the simple form of the verb  In
prose each part of such expressions has its ordinary meaning. E. g.
Av 71 0 eXov -a, 7rdvv' ELOv KOZiL'erat, whatever she wants, she
always obtains from me. SoPH. O. T. 580. (Here   OI 8ovcaa is used
for 0AX.)  OVK iELs o   VXpov; DVm cLO7ro-aS ECrTE; Ib. 1146. "'1
roTro OVK Eo- T  y tyV 7  / e V o V rap' 1ikv; or is not this something that




216                   THE PARTICIPLE.                  r~ 10.
happens among us? PLAT. Phileb. 39 C.'Hy yap o OeutoaroKX;s
f3e3aztrara 87 /Vo-e Lo icrXVv 87X o  cras, Ka'... ios Oav/acralt,
Themistocles was one who manifested, &c. THUC. I, 138.
For the use of the Perfect Participle in the same way, see ~ 17,
Note 2. For the Aorist Participle with-'xco as a periphrasis for the
Perfect Indicative, see below, ~ 112, Note 7.
~ 109.    The Participle is used to define the circumstances under which an action takes place. It may in
this sense be connected with       any substantive in the
sentence, and agree with it in case.
The relations expressed by the participle in this use
are the following: -
1. Time, the various tenses of the Participle denoting
various points of time, which are of course all referred
to that of the leading verb. E. g.
Tavra el 7ro Iv a'rret, when he had said this, he departed.'ATrvriora
-tiXit7rrc a r t v L, I met Philip as he was departing. Toiro Tre2 ror) -
KOTes areXevaroOvral. Tavra E7rparre arpa r yv', he did these things
while he was general. Taura prpadei a-rpa rTfywov, he will do these
things when he is general. Tv p a vv e v r a  8 E'Erq pla'iTnras EXpet(
VTroorroavoS ES MLyreov. THUC. VI. 59.
2. Means.     E. g.
Ar t i pO  e o l  otrv, they live by plunder. XEN. Cyr. HI, 2, 25.
Tovs'EXXrvas ei'sLaav, tv rpo7rov 8i t K o V v r e s ras avrcv rrarp[ias
KaL wrps oUs ir o E XL O V Vr E rS Eyda\rV &Ai TfjV'EXXida 7rotoaetav. Isoc.
Panath. p. 241 D. ~ 44. Ov yap dXXOTploLi vfIt)L  X p O pvo S  7rapaEIlyLaoLv adXX' OLKEOLs', ev8aIFLoo-tLV  eofr yeveTCral, by using not foreign
but domestic examples, &c. DEM. 01. III, 85, 1. (So often XpCOsLeos
with the dative.)
3. Manner, and similar relations, including'manner
of employment, &c.     E. g.
lppoetXETo l5p&XXov rTOt VO/OLtS E,r I E V 6) V aITroQavEV  r a p a v o /p cL 
fiv, he preferred to die abiding by the laws, rather than to live disobeying them. XEN. Mem. IV, 4, 4.'ApTrdraavas Tah orXa IropeveacrOa, to march having snatched up their arms (i. e. eagerly). DEM. 01.
III, 34, 8. Tot ro ETroa1 -ev X a 0 co v, he did this secretly. (See below,
N. 8.)'A7re6~~et r p i l pap p Xi v, he was absent on duty as trierarch.
4. Cause or ground of action.      E. g.




~ 109, 7.J   PARTICIPLE EXPRESSING       CAUSE, ETC.         217
ACyco 8e 7ov' EV EKa, L ov \ JLEvoS 8oat 0 0oL 07rfp o o"','and I
speak.br this reason, because I wish, &c. PLAT. Phaed. 102 D.'kirly(ovro KEpWOy, acrXpa vo pL ovr es Elat, because they believed
them to be base. XEN. Mem. I, 2, 22. TI yap aPv f3ovXoevo0
av8pe O' roqol So daXq\0s 8eawolrrras daLrvovs av'rov qbevyoLev, with what
object in view, &c. (i. e. wishing what)? PLAT. Phaed. 63 A. (See
below, Note 7.)
For the Participle with &s, used to express a cause assigned by
another, see below, Note 4.
5. Purpose, object, or intention, expressed by the Future Participle, rarely by the Present. E. g.'HXO Xc V a-  e O   o s OSvyarpa, he came to ransom his daughter.  I.
I. 13. napEX~XavOa crvIL/3 ov XEv- c, I have risen to give my advice.
Isoc. Archid. ~ 1.'Ef3ovXevr-a7ro 7reftTreLv s AaKeSaioova TrpE'fie3&t
avraira Te po vra S Kal AvaavSpov al    rova o v ra n'i rh T   vavs, in
order to say this, and to ask for Lysander as admiral. XEN. Hell. II,
1, 6.'Eai ELs TroXEleov (7 rarppi) a'yp T-pO0qaodpeVov  j a'croOavoV    VOV, VroltrTLov rmara, even if it lead any one into war to be
wounded or to perish. PLAT. Crit. 51 B.
ETrvXOV yap al Juev (vef-S)  rKa Kaplas oLxollEvat,... rptayyeXX    o vr al IoroelV, for some of the ships happened to be gone towards
Caria, in order to give them notice to send aid. THUc. I, 116. So
apv/.evol, I1. I, 159. (The Present here seems to express an attendant circumstance, rather than a mere purpose.)
6. Condition, the Participle standing for the protasis
of a conditional sentence, and its tenses representing
the various forms of protasis expressed by the Indicative, Subjunctive, or Optative (~ 52, 1). E. g.
O'EL aTV *AXktc^aTv vrTp'Apafrlov a7roOavev av, 17'AXXctEa IIarpO'KXo
eTraTnoaviovE, /  o ojL e  v o v  aOavaTrov /Lzv/IrV apeTrrs;rept iavrTov
f-'era'O, do you think that Alcestis would have died for Admetus, ic.,
if they had not believed, &c. PLAT. Symp. 208 D.  (Here f;i olobpvovs is equivalent to el ILI wovro.)  Ov yap av avrols fEeXev i' rovro
v7roXap 3 avov o-v, fbr it would not have concerned them, unless
they had had this idea. DEM. Phil. I1I, 122, 21. (Here,U 7roXaLuavovo-tv is equivalent to el p.q rovro u7reXu\ijavov.) "Ao-rpcov a
\kolou' alOepos 7ppob avroXht Kai yqs eEvep0e, 8vvarbos v  8pirapa  radre,
if I should be able to do this (El 8vvaros el'v). EUR. Phoen. 504.
See other examples under ~ 52, 1.
7. Opposition, or limitation, where the Participle is
often to be translated by although. E. g.
Ovros- e Kal pera7reFjL7)ova  () a' K C) v'Tob rov Trarpbos, KGc EX\6OV
10




218                    THE PARTICIPLE.                 [~ 109, 7
evs rv y oiKiav, ieleXOFlv fIeV os f(J7rt, AwqlO iV70o 8h' dKovoaL ypa/A/LaTelOY aVayCyvctV KOvYOS, Kat 7r p a e t a e  0X X v  Kal rarava   i t c  o X oy? 1 I.v o  rpos Tbv 7rarEpa, and this man, although he admits that he
was summoned, and although he did go to the house, yet denies that he
went in, &c., although he had previously gone in and arranged everything with my father. DEM. Aph. II, 839, 29.'OXiya 8vvaievos
irpoopal 7repL T rov fLEXXov   7rokXXa E7rtXEpov.LEV 7rparretv, although we
are able tojbresee few things, &c. XEN. Cyr. III, 2, 15.
The Participle in this sense is very often accompanied by Kal7rep
and other particles. See below, Note 5.
8. Any    attendant circumstance, the Participle being
merely descriptive. E. g.
Kal 7rapa X a3 OvTE roV BoTwOr7ovgs (r''pdaevav Er prrapaXov, and
having taken the Boeotians with them, they marched against Pharsalus.
THUC. I, 111. IHapayyEXXeF T    KKXpXep    X a f vrt rL j KFLV 0oaov v
avTr, o7rpdrev/La. XEN. An. I, 2, 1. -'EpXErat Mavaivr] rTO KGpov 7-r
VlO   Xo  aa, Mandane comes with her son Cyrus. Id. Cyr. I, 3, 1.
(See below, N. 8.)
NOTE 1. (a.) The adverbs TOTr, jSr (Trdre rq), EvravOa, fEra,
i7etra, and OVTCwO are often joined to the verb of the sentence in
which the temporal Participle stands. E. g.'EKXEVEVY avrov ffvvStafSVTa'ir e cr a ovrovT a7ratXXaTrreoOa, he corn.
manded that, after he had joined them in crossing, he should then retire
as he proposed. XEN. An. VII, 1, 2. TIeIFoueovv e rTWv sa`Miwv Kua
o"(xOVTrV rjV ZdyKXr)v, Ev; avra ol ZayKXalotL;3oj6Oov avrTa. HDT.
V, 23.'Aro(fvywv UE Ka" rovrovs, arparr1yo7  o r co'ArvaCov
a7reeX7XOq, and having escaped these also, he was then chosen general
of the Athenians. Id. VI, 104.
(b.) E ra, Z7-rera, and ovTros sometimes refer in the same way to a
Participle expressing opposition or limitation; in which case they
may be translated by nevertheless, after all. E. g.
IldTov o  8' aTro7rTrarTOV eTrrL Tr)Kavrvr7  d veX \  a  pLaprvplav
O VT r  oLEo'Oa ELv eLK' 7rtLareveoOa&l rap' VilV, that, although they
have destroyed so important a piece of evidence, they after all think,
&c. DEM. Aph. II, 837, 10.     AeFtva!LevrT tv 7rdaOol, el'AO'vaC
d(K q t K 6  V  oS rO ]'EXXadof 7rXlar T\?) eTarV Eovoila TOV Xf7etV,
ITre r a T rV evrivraa TOVTroV pvo S arvXff'atL, if, although you are come
to Athens, you should after all be the only one to fail in obtaining this.
PLAT. Gorg. 461 E.
(c.) OvrTo, I8a rovro, and  iLa Tavra sometimes refer in the same
way to a Participle denoting a cause. E. g.
No/ltl ov calelvovas KaL Kpelrrovv 7roXXEov f3ap3adpav tlas ECaI
8ia rTOVTO 7Tpoo-cXaXov. XEN. An. I, 7, 3.




109.]                THE PARTICIPLE.                       219
NOT\C 2. The Adverbs i4la, (/vra~V, el(vs, avriKa, and e1alkvqbt
are often connected (in position and in sense) with the temporal
Participle, although grammatically they qualify the verb of the sen 
tence. E.g.
"A la 7rpOLCOv reWo'K07TETo e'L  T  vvavarv E'qL rovs 7ro\ETiovE draOeveoY're
povs Trotlev, as he advanced, he looked at the same time to see whether it
was possible, &c XuN. Cyr. V, 2, 22. "A (a Kara\Xa{36vTEs rpooEcKeard
cr(qt, as soon as they had overtaken them, they pressed hard upon them,
IDTr. IX, 57. NEKo,u e r a I v opv(acrowv ETravcaaro, uavrT[ )v  7TrolotIV
/yevoeivov, Nechlo stopped while digging (the canal), &c. Id. II, 158.
IonX(alXoU Sq j  ('LE t7r'e Xeyovra FLETrav, it often checked me while
sp/eakiny. PLAT. Apol. 40 B.'Etror dvo adoKraLt e V 0B  v;eoL vres TO
adv3pelov fPerePXovTat, by toilsome discipline, even while they are still
young, &c. TlHuc. II, 39. To 8eLC5 Ke;pa eVO'e dTroafeqrKOTL ol KoptIvLOL E7re'Ketvr, the Corinthians pressed upon the riqht wing/, as soon
as it was disembarked. Id. IV, 43.'Aptd(aevos evBvS KaOio-TraeLvov,
beginning as soon as it (the war) broke out. Id. I, 1.  dovvo-ov XE'yov
rt soE av T Ka yevO.evov es TOv  jphpOv Eveppdt/aTo Zev', they say of
Dionysus that, as soon as he was born, Zeus sewed him into his thigh.
HDT. II, 146. Tvv ikvxiv OewpwYv EaalopvY ) a7ro0avo6rov E KatroV,
viewing the soul of each one the moment that he is dead. PLAT. Gorg.
523 E.
NOTE 3. (a.)'ArE, of    ov, or ola, as, inasmuch as, are used
to emphasize a Participle denoting the cause or ground of an
action.  Here the cause assigned is stated merely on the authority of the speaker or writer. (See N. 4.) E. g.'O 8e Kvpos, a, e raLs CO  Kal cflOdKaXoS Kai 0LX1TrtLpo, fETro rj7
rroXT, but Cyrus, inasmuch as he was a child, &c. XEN. Cyr. I, 3, 3.
So fT/E kp0VTrovw, THiuc. VII, 85. MdXa Ed aXe 7raE    7ropevdUOFvoL,
o a 8 7 vY VVKTL re KCal do3) da  o v r es, elE AL'yodareva aCflKvouvTaLt
inasmuch as they were departing by night, &c. XEN. Hell. VI, 4, 26.
In Herodotus do-rTE is used in the same sense; as in I, 8, Ware
ravra yo/.oIrW, inasmuch as he believed this. See THUC. VII, 24.
(b.) "Q'o-rep with the Participle occasionally seems to have the
same force as are or oatov; as in EUR. Hippol. 1307, O  6' &orep ov0
8LKatoe oVK eeO-rTrero o6yots, inasmuch as he was just, &c.
For the common use of o-rrep with the Participle, see Note 9.
NOTE 4.     (a)'a s may be prefixed to many of the Participles of ~ 109, especially those denoting a cause or a purpose.  It shows that the Participle expresses the idea of the
subject of the leading verb, or that of some other person prominently mentioned in the sentence; without implying that it is
also the idea of the speaker or writer.   E. g.




220                    THE PARTICIPLE.                   [~ 109.
To T IIpLKX\ a v atrla ELXov OS reltoavTa o'as a' o0XF IEV Kal 82
EKEYLov Taits  vptopais 7 e p L re 7 rr  K r S, they found fault with
Pericles, on the ground that he had persuaded them to engage in the
war, and that through him they had met with the calamities. THuc.
II. 59.  (Here Thucydides himself is not responsible for the statements made by the Participles; as he would be if co wev- omitted.)
See ~ 111.'AyavaKrovouv os fJLeydwXov rTLVv aC7TereprlErEvoC they are
indignant, because (as they allege) they have been deprived, &c. PLAT.
Rep. I, 329 A. BaalXei XdpLv'lacrlv, cos t' EKElVOV rvtxov Ca rTjq
avrovoflas ravrrTs, i. e. they thank him because (as they believe) they
have obtained this independence through him. Isoc. Pan. p. 77 C.
~ 175. O tLEv L&OKOVreS TOVS KaO' avrov s s' rn dvras VLKVTre, V9 8'
aiprdaovres  s        jB'r 7TrdvTres V K G V r es, one side pursuing those opposed
to them, thinking that they were victorious over all; and the other side
proceeding to plunder, thinking that they were all victorious. XEN. An.
I, 10, 4. TI7v 7rpoba'trv e7rToeLTO  Il toilas  o v ov X fi ev  Ki3a\X'iv,
he made his pretence, (apparently) wishing to drive out the Pisidians.
lb. 1, 2, 1. tEXEye Oappeiv sE KaTa'TcroTJerooIv     rovrOTv els rO
~eov, he said he took courage, on the ground that these matters were
about to be settled, &c. Ib. I, 3, 8.  (See ~ 110, 1, N. 1.)'QS  ap
e d or v 7epLi r v e7o Jrr/L0Po'av daKovETE, for you hear them as men who
(as you believe) know about what they were sent for. DEM. F. L. 342,
25. 01'AOrqvaiot 7rapeo'Keva'ovro O S r oXe/ f 7 cor O   s, the Athenians
prepared with the (avowed) intention of going to war. THUC. II, 7.
YvXXa[LSadveL Kvpov l s a d o K r e v C v, he seizes Cyrus with the (avowed)
object of putting him to death. XEN. An. I, 1, 3.
It is a common mistake to suppose that co implies that the Participle does not express the idea of the speaker or writer. It implies
nothing whatever on this point, which is determined (if at all) by the
context.
(b.)'Qs may also be used before Participles with verbs of knowing, &c., included in ~ 113.  (See ~ 113, N. 10.)
NOTE 5. (a.) The Participle expressing opposition or limitation
is often strengthened by Ka'r e p or Kal (after a negative, by ov63 or
qr3e, with or without Trep), Kal ravra, and that too. "O/iSr, nevertheless, may be connected with the Participle (like aita, &c. N. 2), belonging, however, grammatically to the leading verb.  E. g.'EKropa Kal Ifctxa&raa   Xqr]S oX'oa'eoOaLi 0tco. I1. IX, 655.'EtroLKTelpO) be VtV;uo'rrTov L7'Tras, Kalxrep g vr a  vao'pYevrj, although he is
my enemy. SOPH. Aj. 122. OVK AV 7rpoo080i, ovbe 7,rp 7rpdao(rco
KaKC)S. EUR. Phoen. 1624. rrvaltd re i8ov,,s8    d radXr0r KXoVov.
id. Hipp. Fr. 443.   IIEiOov yvvatli, KatIep ov o-'repyoY ojlcs.
AESCH. Sept. 712. (Here opOws qualifies reiLov; although, as usual,
it is joined with the Participle for emphasis.)'ABLKEiE' Irt aVpa
tjfvL rov artrovbataorarov bta0BeLpEtp l yeX&v dva7reiOtV, K a t T avr a OUVr
rroX;/pov r vra rT yE'Xort. XEN. Cyr. II, 2, 16.
(b.) In Homer, the two parts of Kal..rep are generally sepa.




~ 109.]                THE PARTICIPLE.                     221
rated by the Parti.iple, or by some emphatic word connected with
it. Kai is here very often omitted, so that lr'p stands alone in the
sense of altLough.
Both of these uses are found also in the Af ic poets. E. g.
Toy fie e'reTE' ELaa-e, K a aXvViev~oVs  r ep e1 ulpov, KeLorOaL. II. VIII,
125.        Kpa Kparepos Trep ewV, EVerao TpTrrfn vi oip,. 11. XV, 195.
TErXaOL, iT'rep K/ l ), Kal avao'Xeo Kq7SofevrI rrep, Jl,} oe (f)\Xtv Irep
eovuav Ev odpOaXMoi(Lv IopaL OEtvoLJLeV.V * roTre a ov' o tL 8 vvqroulaL
dXvvf evo' 7r ep xpatoLIev. 11. I, 586.
Kdaycor' ) iKvovJLai, Ka  yvv r e p ova' LJCO9. EUR. Orest. 680.
Tdaov yap aVrq) KaL KaraorKairas eyco, yvvri 7 e p ovcra, T6L8E yIXavf'afopaL. AESCH. Sept. 1037.
REMARK. Katrot was very seldom used like Katrep with the Participle, its only regular use being with finite verbs. E. g.
Ovme fo0 eIlsfeXeo) ro7 IILrraTa:Lo  ylrTFrat, K.a irot L-ofou 7rapa
CorTOs eplprlfEvov. SIMON. Fr. 5 (apud PLAT. Prot. 339 C).
NOTE 6. The Participle Wv is sometiwms omitted after the particles mentioned in the last three notes, leaving an adjective or a
noun standing by itself. E. g.
ArTOvb els TIv 7roXTelatv ov 7rapaSe.*F/a, ae rTVpavvl^oO v.uvwr)7Td
(sC. bvpraS). PLAT. Rep. VIII, 568 B. Ai^ro' e7rtrr8TevOVo-LIv wS dvayKaLov daXX' ovx Cw dayaObv (sc. Ov'), they / ructise it on the ground that it
is necessary, and not on the ground tha" it is a good thing. Ib. II, 358
C.'H   qv'l ef Zevs, Kalnnep avbd&rl s (evcv', orat rTaOreLvos. AESCH.
Prom. 907.
NOTE 7. (a.) The Participle with any of the meanings included
in ~ 109 may stand in relative or interrogative clauses.  Such expressions can seldom be translated literally into English. E. g.
Tr' 8E KaL 8L e 8 L o - e  o-P6hpa o )Er &TreEL'yE(O; what do you fear,
that you are in such great haste? XEN. Hell. I, 7, 26. Ti av elir T
aE TI'S OpOeS vrpooeTlTOt; what could one call yov, so as to give you the
right name? DIEM. Cor. 232, 20. T   vov v tOeov L'reLpol yiyvovra Kal
T&V dyaOv, o l   X p f e V o v 6u\k'iv TOS dvOpn'otLs, which one must
use in his intercourse with men. PLAT. Gorg. 484. D.
(b.) Here belong rli paOBv; and Trl raOo'v; both of which have
the general force of wherefore? T I  a 0 Co v o;ro   ro;ro; however,
usually signifies what put it into his head to do this? or with what idea
does he do this? and IL Sr a  v TaoroTO 7rotei; what h qs happened to him
that he does this? E. g.
Ti ToUro ia 0 Ca v TrpotrEypa+ev; with what idea d;d he add this to
the law? DEM. Lept. 495, 20. TI 7ratoor-at, EL7'ep NefFXat y'
carlv ad?0Asi, OvTraiS el'a(TL yvvai$lLv; what has happened to them that
they resemble mortal women? ARIST. Nub. 340.
These phrases may be used even in dependent sentence', rl becominig o rT, and the whole phrase meaning because. E. g.




222                   THE PARTICn'LE.                  [~ 109.
TiL a    ELLos rav cZ  Tor'aL,, 0 rat FL a 0  v Ev rT P3ic ovX o('vrulaV
ryov; what do I deserve to suffer, &c. for not keeping quiet? i. e. for
the idea which came into my head, in consequence of which I did not
keep quiet. PLAT. Apol. 36 B. So PLAT. Euthyd. 283 E, and 299
A. (See Matthiae, ~ 567.)
NOTE 8. Certain Participles, when they agree with the subject
of a verb, have almost the force of adverbs. Such are d p X o ~E  v o S,
at first; rX v r  v, finally; 8 a X t 7r v, after an interval; P 4ep o v
hastily; advvoas, quickly; XaOo6v, secretly; Kararelvas, earnestly; X o v, continually; 0 d8 a- as, quickly. (See Passow or Liddell and Scott, under ipXoo, &c.)'EX ov, ~ayWv, q p v, and Xa/3 v may often be translated
with. (See example under ~ 109, 8.)
NOTE 9.'Qa7rrep with the Participle generally belong
to an implied apodosis, to which the Participle forms the protasis (~ 109, 6).  Here coirep means simply as, and the Participle is translated with an if prefixed. (See ~ 53, N. 3.)
E. g.
"     7r E p  7 aac) e 8 r L  S, OVK EOEXT aKoer Vv, you are unwilling
to hear, as if you already knew well (i. e. as you would be if you
knew). Isoc. Pac. p. 160 C. ~ 9. (Here CzSore=C d  fiLT, ~ 52,
1.)'A7Trvrcov 6Xlyot 7rpho 7roXXho itvpdtaas, &oanep ev dXXorpiaLs.vXas FL' XX ovr e KLvSvvevelv, as if they had been about to risk the
lives of others (i. e. So-re p daitvvroT  avi, eL' e)Xov). Id. Pan. p. 58 B.
~ 86. So Ib. p. 78 C. ~ 179, cocr e p 7rpos Tov Ai'a T1^v Xcopav v u dLeVOs, a dXX oV rrpobS 70OV aVSOp&rov7 raV T rS  7V r ro 0 a O   e v o, as
(he would have done) if he had been dividing the country with Zeus,
and not making a treaty with men.
That wecirep means simply as (not as if) is seen when a verb with
Et follows; as -in cW'rrp le Xeyots, as if you should say. See also I.
II, 780, Io'av, CO et TE IrvpL XO(cbV raoa veYioro, i. e. their march
was as (it would be) if the whole land should be covered with fire.
~ 1 10.   1. If a Participle, denoting any of the relations included in ~ 109, belongs to a substantive which
is not connected with the main construction of the sentence, both the substantive and the Participle are put
in the genitive, called absolute.   E. g.
Tavr'`7rpdXrOq Kd v o v   acrpar r yvyro v  these things were
done when Conon was general. Isoc. Evag. p. 200 C. ~ 56.'AIKcCTO
evpo T, 7rXoLov, yvovTr v r'v Kefar\XX)OvV, advrtrpadToVTos rov
Tov,... KaravTTeiv, the Cephallenians having determined to sail in,
althouth this man opposed it. DEM. Zenoth. 886, 1. (For the tenses




~ 110, 1.)          GENITIVE ABSOLUTE.                    223
of the Participles, see ~ 24.)'AOrlvalowv 8e r avro TOTro 7ra o r o,
B7LrXaoravlav a 7v r v va/LLv FLKabEC-Oat (ot/at), i. e. if the Athenians
should ever suffer, &c. THuc. I, 10. (See ~ 52, 1.) "OX77s yhp TT)
Iro'Xes o  7rtTp7r O L  v rS rT crparqtyy, /eyaXa Tar Te dyaOa K aop6 o  r o  avTroV Kat Tra KaKa  a t apravovr oS ELKos yIyverOaL.
XEN. Mem.\III, 1, 3.
NOTE 1. The Participle in the genitive absolute may be accompanied by all the particles mentioned in ~ 109, Notes 1- 9, with the
same force as in other constructions. It may also stand in the relative and interrogative sentences of ~ 109, N. 7. E. g.
Kal avrouv Lz   V raa Xv rav  y o v r o s 6 KXEvlas EVXEv d a7roKpLvdpEvos, while he was saying this, &c. PLAT. Euthyd. 275 E.'EK o8
TOVTWV ev0Bs K7pVTTrrov L;Eva& 7rdvTras eQ3alovs, 0) s r V TVpvvoC0
r Efve r v, because (as they said) the tyrants were dead. XEN.
Hell. V, 4, 9. (See ~ 109, N. 4.)'ArreXoyoararo orT ovX Zos Troi'EXX71o- rroXFe  oVvr o v rp5)v c7rot, that he said what he did, not
because they intended to be at war with the Greeks. Id. An. V, 6, 3.
So )s fT7rltv\XvoVTos TL(ro(a(qpvovs rals 7roXerot, on the ground that T.
was plotting; An. I, 1, 6.'2S oUb rpoa-ola'ovTor (sc. /LOVi) ras
XEipa     a,.. lacrKe, since (as you may feel sure) I will not lay hands
on you, teach me. Id. Mem. II, 6, 32. Kvpos e drnopt,7o-t evEExTro,
a r xpo6ov y 7 Y Lo LV  O e o V vXvovo inasmuch as a long time intervened.
HDT. I, 190. (See ~ 109, N. 3.)'Hv yhp dovvaros, W O-Tr  O7rroPE VOV rTO p,.upov. Id. VI, 136.  O "'EXXr7ve ovTWr?7yavaKT7roav,
e o     rep orXs Trs'EoXXdSo T7rEropO pcvqv, as if the whole of Greece had
been devastated (i. e. as they would have been, if it had been devastated). Isoc. Helen. p. 217 D. ~ 49.
For the genitive absolute after 6D, in connection with verbs of
knowing, &c., see ~ 113, Note 10.
NOTE 2. A Participle sometimes stands alone in the genitive absolute, when a noun or pronoun can easily be supplied from the
context, or when some general word (like dvw9p7rrwv, 7rpayfpdTcov) is
understood. E. g.
O1 fr ToXeLOLr po0, p Lor vr,  roo pev jCoY vxaov, but the enemy, as
ttey (men before mentioned) came on, for a lime kept quiet. XEN.
An. V, 4, 16. So ~7rayopevojv aUrovs, THUC. I, 3. OurI) 8' E'XovTro0, IKOS, Kc.r.X., and things being so (sc. 7rpaypdrwv), &c. XEN.
An. III, 2, 10. OVK Featrovpevos, OVK'Atz)LKTrvoVLKas &3Ka E27rayovrcoV, 0K eraYYEXXO/I    OV, ( V, o viaC.Os EyO  p TrPOBCOKa rjV els
tvua e vvoiav. DEM. Cor. 331, 30. (Here dvOpcwrrov is understood
with E7rayoYroov and E7rayyeXXol;v\ov.)
So when the Participle denotes a state of the weather; as o v r o 
nroXX6, when it was raining heavily. XEN. Hell. I, 1, 16. (In such
cases the Participle is masculine, ALos being understood. See ARIST.
Nub. 370, ovTra; and I1. XII, 25, /e 8' a'pa ZEVs.)
NOTE 3. A passive Participle may stand in the genitive absolute




224                  THE PARTICIPLE                [~ 110 I.
with a clause introduced by On. If the subject of such a clause is
plural, the Participle is itself sometimes plural, by a kind of attraction. E.g.
2a/<5s 871COOf VTros ort Vi raL vav(oTi rav'EXXivcov ra 7rpayara
E7yVEro, it having been clearly shown, that, &c. THUC. I, 74. In I,
116 we find'crayy e XOvr ov orl'oivto'rat vnjes *7r avr'obv frXouovI, it having been announced, that, &c.
NOTE 4. The Participle cv is rarely omitted, leaving a noun and
an adjective alone in the genitive absolute. E. g.'Qs pLov ovr/qs Tre'Xas (sc. ovr'osq). SOPv..  C. 83.
NOTE 5. The genitive absolute is regularly used only when a
new subject is introduced into the sentence (~ 110, 1), and not
when the Participle can be joined with any substantive already belonging to the construction. Yet this rule is sometimes violated, in
order to give greater prominence to a participial clause. E. g.
A t a e.  3K roT7  s o118 IIEptLKXEovS, iyyE\XOr avra' OTL- Meyapa 4onrrjK~. TrHUC. I, 114.
2.,The Participles of impersonal verbs stand in the
accusative absolute, in the neuter singular, when other
participles would stand in the genitive absolute. Such
are oeov, e ov, 7rapov, 7rpoar~cov, 7rapexov, /eXorv, uJera1ueLov, 8OKOVV), 8oav, and the like; also passive Participles used   impersonally   (as 7rpoo'-aXOev, ebpr4pevov);
and such expressions as dcvvarov ov, it being impossible,
composed of an adjective and oy. E, g.
Oi 61' oV f3orOroavTrS 8'o, LoVr, Vls dcijXov; and did those who
brought no aid when it was necessary escape safe and sound? PLAT.
Alcib. I, 115 B.'ArXfas. 8 Xv7ras e o v (sc. EdpeCLv), OVK 01o'L
bt7rXtas EUR. Iph. Taur. 688. H ap X ov Ue rTq'Aaro-Ls rats apXetv
ei7rreToEs, h1 o TI alp)o'ecTOe; HDT. V, 49. E 8e'rapao'X6v, and
when an opportunity offers. THUC. I, 120.  Ob nrpoarKov, improperly. Id. IV, 95.  vvOy(yav rT 7TraTpl KaL rT /qT7rpL, yapel r7v
KvatCpov Ovyarepa. XEN. Cyr. VIPI, 5, 28. E lp /  ep vov KLlIov
Etva o rt Av Trb 7irXoso Vv VLaXov +qlat'rrtl. t7 THUC. V, 30. So
8e80oyPevov,,,125; yeypalcpvov, V, 56; and 7rpocTrerayFevo, PLAT.
Leg. X, 902 D. Kal evOe've IradXv, 7rpoaoraXOev pot v7roiov Bipou
MEvcova ayELtv efs'EXXko'vrovro, ZXo/6iV. DEM. Polycl. 1210, 5.
IlapEXeEXEVorod re, a vvaro v  a o V             J VVKTL.AXX  TO r7fivam. THUC.
VII, 44. tEycoy', &'r/ 6 Kvpos, olpta,, aSpa )Ev rvvayopevovTcov wv V,
ap/a 1e Kal alocrpoV ov TTO aVTLkeyeLV, K.7.X. XEN. Cyr. II, 2, 20.
(The genitive belongs under ~ 110, 1. See ~ 111.)'Avrt7rapeKEevadEro eppWoLEVWOS, WS p/dX   orT bErl  o- o v, on the ground that thera




~ 111.]           ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE.                  225
would still he need of a battle. Ib. VI, 1, 26. (See Remark, below.)
O1 8e rptacKovra, C } o v q8V1 avroLs TvpavvelvY Jaes, 7rpoeTrov, K. T..,
i. e. thinking that it was now in their power, &c. Id. Hell. II, 4, 1. H
yap voe S O7rrTetv o' cr, adr o  p  p  tr ov rdO   (sc. iv), when it is forbidden
to the city. SOPH. Ant. 44.
REMARK. The accusative absolute may take the same particles
as the genitive absolute (~ 110, 1, Note 1). It may also omit the
Participle ov. (See the last two examples, above.)
NOTE 1. Even the Participles of personal verbs sometimes stand
with their nouns in the accusative absolute, in all genders and numbers, if they are preceded by Zs (used as in ~ 109, Note 4), or by
OrTrep, as if. E. g.
ALO Kal rovs vieLS ol crarepes arr TV rTv roVrpOv aEvjOpowrov elpyov'iv,
W s    rqV tev rcov XprlTrcov 6L IX av a'crKqOrLv o Vcr av T7r apert7s, T V
Be rTv 7rov OVp) Kara'XV(-LV (sc. ovaoav). XEN. Mem. I, 2, 20. 4lXovs
KTi)yTraL ()s jo76Owv &co/Lvot, T63v 8' daeXfrv aMeXovarcL, W'(rTcp 6K
7oXLrcTv JIEV y Lty voO   4 v oS V  )io$vs  dEt aExJlsv be ov yLyVO / E V o S
as if friends were made from fellow-citizens, and were not made from
brothers. lb. 1I, 3, 3. MegyTrov ouroW baKeloOat ras yvc^asy viilv, gs
EKaarrov EKovra 7rpo06vfco) o T& av aef 7ro iorro a. DEM. Sym. 182,
3. (See ~ 113, N. 10, c.)
NOTE 2. The accusative absolute used personally without's or
&arrp is very rare. It occurs chiefly with the neuter of Participles
which are regularly impersonal. E. g.
IIpo rKo' o v avr 70ov K\Xpov  f pO  OSOYvrp e'toi. ISAE. V, ~ 12.
Ta Ta ae y i v ode V a, Tre;va ueyaaXa Tovs Aiyv7rrlovs KaTaXaxfSavet.
HDT. II, 66. "H8q al(jorepoW /e'v o:KOv dvaxwpeL, KV pco00ev 8a
O V e v, WKTOS re fTYtyO8vfEV Si {JL~ MaKESIoves,... efpOVV 67r OlKOVTHUC. IV, 125. Ao(avra 8e ravra Ka 7rrepavesyra, 7Ta crTparevpiara aT7rjXke. XEN. Hell. II1, 2, 19. A d a v rituv'ravra occurs
in PLAT. Prot. 314 C, where we may supply 7roLlv.
~ 1 1 1. As the Participle in the genitive (or accusative)
absolute denotes the same relations (time, cause, &c.) as the
Participle in its ordinary construction (~ 109), both may be
used in the same sentence, and be connected by conjunctions.
When several Participles denoting these relations occur in
any sentence, those which belong to substantives already connected with the main construction agree with those substantives in case, while those which refer to some new subject
stand with that subject in the genitive absolute; any which
are impersonal standing in the accusative absolute. E. g.
01 fV "EX7rFve (rrpa0EvrErs 7rapeacKevd'ovTo os Travr  r p  o t v r o
10*                                0




226                   THE PARTICIPLE.                  [~ 111.
(sc. rov Bao-XE'oas) Kal 8e o evo t, they prepared themselves with a
view to his (the King's) coming up and to receiving him. XE.N. An. I,
10, 6. Tjs yap eiwroplas oVK ovicor, orS' ertFLLyVVV'res aeos
dXXilXot,... Ye ojLo e vY   re Ta ECavr(v,.  a..   ot7 v  07V OrOTr TLr
e7r e ov KaL areLX'arTcov aiLa O v7V ao v  d('Xov aatpCo'eraC, Ts Te KaO'
rj;Epav dvayKcalov Trpob]s 7ravraxo  av i7 y 0 V1eVOI e7rtKparelv, ov
XaXe~7rs airavlravaaro. THUG. I, 2. Kal rTivra ta a r p a  fi LE vo  Evu
Tn fKKX\7Tila (KXEIv), KaOL' rf?( cr a, Ev v'Aqovvaoiv avrT rov r\XoVV,
Tc7W  re ev IIHvXw (-rpaTr7yWov eva 7rpo oEX \o  evos, Trv dvaycyqV aBa
rdaXovs 7roEiTo. Id. IV, 29.'A\XKi3ds'ois  IIEXOTOVvrTolS wo7TTOS 0 v, Kai air avr7v a d          TK OLevr? s e17K(YT(r/OXS  Ofr awroKre7vaL~ VnTOX(opeL 7rapa TLo'aorapEpvrv. Id. VIII, 45.
See the examples collected by IKriger, Vol. I, ~ 56, 14, 2; and
his note to THUG. IV, 5, 1.
~ 112.     The Participle may be joined with certain
verbs to restrict their meaning to particular actions,
in a sense which often resembles that of the Infinitive
(~ 92, 1). Such a Participle may agree in case with
either the subject or the object of the verb.
1. The Participle is thus used especially with verbs signifying to begin, to continue, to endure, to persevere, to cease (or
cause to cease), to repent, to be weary of, to be pleased, displeased, or ashamed, to represent (as in a poem), to find.
Further, after verbs signifying to overlook or to allow (IrEpLopao, kqopaco, with 7replEdaov and eireioov, sometimes elaov) the
Participle is used in the sense of the object Infinitive, the Present and Aorist Participles differing merely as the same tenses
of the Infinitive would differ in similar constructions (~ 15, 1;
~ 23, 1). See ~ 24, Note 2. E. g.
(a.) "Apopmat X'y ow v, I will begin to speak. PLAT. Symp. 186 B.
Tlauoaa  X -y o v or a, cease speaking. EUR. Hippol. 706. (So daTEiTeiv
X6yo v.)   OVK dveIot4a& F cr a, I shall not endure to live. Ib. 355.
Tiv f rXoo'oo lav nravoov rava  o v r a v, cause philosophy to stop
saying this. PLAT. Gorg. 482 A.    Kal eyo roL  EpporoTor Xatpip
adroKpLvoJEvo s, I like to answer, &c. Id. Prot. 318 D. T4 pe;v
pa xalpov v o a r  avrt, they rejoiced in his return. Od. XIX, 463.
Tis AMoXtiosv xaXerc6s lqepev a7dr e Orpr  v os, he took it hardly
that he was deprived of Aeolis. XEN. Hell. II, 2, 13. AlarXvvopYa
y ov, I am ashamed to say. (For airxvlvoiat X e y e v, see below,
N. 6.)'A7roKalcvO rpifXwv, I am weary of running. ToVs iK Trjs vqrov
eFoAraTcs ereXovro LTr o L  e 8 6   K 6 r e rs, they repented of having given
them up. Tiuc. V, 35. IIeWrotqKe Tovs ev A8ov To'v ad'  Xpovov
r L P opov f i vovs, he has represented those in Hades as suffering




~ 112, 2.]        PARTICIPLE WITH VEIBS.                  227
punis7nnent. PLAT. Gorg. 525 E. EVpev 8' cpvorra Kpovltqv ar2ep
ipLevov aXXwv, she found him sitting apart. I1. I, 498. So I, 27.
(b.) Mr) T7repisoEsEv v3ptioc F o-av riv AaKeSal[ova KaZ Ka ap o v rO 0 e 7' a v, let us not allow Lacedaemon to be insulted and despised.
Isoc. Archid. 138 A. ~ 108. M,,u' IEdiv Oavov' mr' dao-rv, not to
see me killed. EuR. Orest. 746. TXYvat (re apWaoav, that thou shouldst
take courage to do. SoPi. El. 943. See examples in ~ 24, N. 2.
REMAIRK. In Herodotus 7retpdioMa is often used with the Participle in the same way; as oVK erretparo E rt v 6 Kupos, Cyrus did
not attempt to appr)ach, I, 77. So I, 84; VI, 50.'ATroSibEKVPvU and 7rapac-Keva'w, in the meaning to render, may take
the Participle, as well as the Infinitive; as in XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 18, aia
KCa Tairtrrljea,aXto-ra'Xovra s aTro8eieivt KCa Ta' orapara a'plo-ra
EXovras 7rapaa'KEvdaoev. So ARIST. Plut. 210, 3X4e7rovr' ato-.e1ia -c, I will make you see. See these two verbs in Liddell and
Scott's Lexicon.
2. The Participle used with the following verbs contains
the leading idea of the expression: 8 arXe co, to continue,
XavOdvw, to escape the notice of, rvyXavo, to happen, f0adva,
to anticipate, to get the start of, oX oi a, to be gone, and 0 A Licc o, to be wont or to be frequent.
So in poetry with Kvpco, to happen; and in Herodotus
with o-avlrLrroo, to happen, and with 7roXXos d/s, troXX; o  7yKeSaL, or
TravTosto yiyvo/taL, to be urgent; and in Homer with fj for j3qr.
E. g.
A Lar T  eX e  r t  /r Xpt pEU aLel eO VTrS eXev0epot, they still remain
free. HDT. VI, 111. "Oor'v evvowav Xc i     8y  L a r eXi, as much
good will as I continually bear. DEM. Cor. ~ 1. "EXa e v (avreqv)
a  6 0 v r a 7ravra KaL K a a Ta  e X e  v r a, everything took fire and was
consumed before she knew it. THuc. IV, 133. (See ~ 24, Note 1.)
4ovea -rov vraLosbr X' v a v e (3 o - K a v, he was unconsciously supporting
the murderer of his son. HDT. I, 44. (See Rem. below.) "ErvXov
ev T7f ayopa onrXTrat K a e  o vre s, soldiers happened to be sleeping
in the market-place. THUc. IV, 113. Kara fOeov yap riva  T v X ov
K a 0  e v o s vraa3Oa, I happened to be sitting there. PLAT. Euthyd.
272 E. Oi 6' OVK iqb ao-av 7rvOd fevoi rov t ro oX /AOP, Kal.. IKOV,
they no sooner heard of the war than they came, &c. Isoc. Paneg. 58
B. ~ 86.'"E 0c a v 7roXX5i ol IKv0at TOVS IIEpoas ei nrlrqvyevpav
a 7 t K 6 e v o, the Scythians came to the bridge much bejbre the Persians. HDT. IV, 136. AVTo; 8/0a(r-ovTa T-or po pCdaavres, they
will be the first to do this jbr themselves. PLAT. Rep. II, 375 C. (See
~ 24, N. 1.)  O6A'vovo  e7r' avra KaTaJaqevyovTrs, they are the
first to run to them. AESCHIN. Cor. ~ 248. O'xerat  e u y oov, he has
taken flight. r p e f fe  o v Xvcro, he was gone on an embassy. XEN.




228                   THE PARTICIPLE.                [~ 112, M.
Cyr. V, 1, 3. Ov nr KO I0IL J e V o  ye fditeLv, he had not been used
to being thus cared for. Od. VIII, 451. 0o  Oalti eic KaT r a 3a v
ELc rov IIELpaua, you do not come down very often. PLAT. Rep. I,
328 C.
ToVrov o'CO0' EL ( v K V p e; dost thou know whether he is perchance
living? SorT. Phil. 444. IIoXX )     77v X aof vo eos 6 e vos, the
stranger entreated urgently. HDT. IX, 91. rAXcovy e roXX    f E'VKELro X e lyv rotiae, and Gelon spoke urgently as follows. Id. VII,
158. Tore IraT  r o o  yvoro 2K0vKal eo ev oL rTWV'IWvOv Xvo-aL rT
7ropov, they begged them in every way (lit. they took every form in
begging them). Id. VII, 10. 2VVereTErrTKe e pLs eovr-a, there had
happened to be a quarrel. Id. I, 82. Bj q5 e vy o v, he took flight. 1.
II, 665. (See ~ 97, N. 1.)
REMARK. AavOdvoo being an active verb, meaning to escape the
notice of, must have an object expressed or understood. When no
object is expressed, sometimes 7rdvraS is understood, and sometimes
a reflexive referring to the subject.  Thus'Xate roUro rolojaas may
mean either he did this without any one's knowing it (sc. rdyvrar), or
he did this unconsciously (sc. eavrov).
NOTE 1.'ApgKco, to be suffcient, and ILavos', ro'wV, Kpdeorroo, or
3fXrtcozv el  are sometimes use3 in a personal construction with the
Participle (like 8OX\Os eiAt, &c., ~ 113, N. 1), where we should expect an impersonal construction with the Infinitive. E. g.'A pKEo vojcffKrova' EyO, it will be enough for me to die. Sorn.
Ant. 547. (We should expect dpKEaoet Eiuoi -Ov1-KCet.)  Kpe iff Cr o
yap TrOa ipLK6E' v  Jwv TV4)XoS'. Id. O. T. 1368.'H8 ovS v'aeaOe
aKovaravres. DEM. Aristoc. 641, 9.
NOTE 2. As d v       X o a, to endure, may govern either the accusative or the genitive, it may take a Participle in either case
agreeing with the object. Thus we may say either aveXEral rwva
XEyovra, or ivexerai r'vo     y X yo  o s, he endures any one's saying.
NOTE 3. The phrase ovK av     0 da vo s (or OVK av  OdavoTre), you
could not be too soon, is used with the Participle as an exhortation,
meaning the sooner the better. The third person, o VK a V  d0 d vo a,
is sometimes used, meaning, it might as well happen now as ever (for
it must happen). See Passow.
NOTE 4. The Participle WZ is sometimes omitted in the constructions of ~ 112. E. g.
Ei fe T TvyXCveX L cabes (sc. Ov.)  PLAT. Gorg. 502 B.
NOTE 5. AavOcdvo is sometimes followed by orl and a finite verb,
as in XEN. Mem. III, 5, 24. When it is used impersonally, it regu
larly takes OTL.
NOTE 6. Some verbs of this class are followed by the Infinitive
as well as by the Participle; generally, however, with some differ



~ 113.]          PARTICIPLE WITH VERBS.                229
ence in meaning. Thus altX'voFtaL X ywv means I am ashamed to
say (but do say); alaYxvvoiaL Xeye t v means I am ashamed to say
(and therefore do not say). So cn7oKKdtvMT roU o r o  v, I am weary
of doing this; but CaroKaicpo TOV ro r o Lt i v, I cease to do this through
weariness. (See Passow, or Liddell and Scott, under these words;
and Passow under A'pXoM/a.)  See 7TepuLLtv rf)v y^V T't0QIvat,
THuc. II, 20; and 7repuLLei arjv rL TI 0Oe Orav, II, 18; where it is
difficult to detect any difference in meaning. See, however, Kriiger's note on I, 35.
NOTE 7. The Aorist (seldom the Perfect) Participle may be
joined with the subject of EXco, forming a periphrastic Perfect. This
is especially common in Sophocles and Euripides. E. g.
Toy v  7vTpori P a, rbv'd L a  a ra a  eXtEL. SoPH. Ant. 22. So
EUR. Med. 33 and 90. HloXX'a xpara gofieav avrp7raKores.
XEN. An. I, 3, 14.
For a similar periphrasis to express the Future Perfect, see ~ 29,
Note 4; and ~ 108, Note 6.
NOTE 8. The Participles 8ovXo'pvos, e, Xv, 8fidJvos,,rpoar8EXoevos, and JXsrofevos sometimes agree in case
with a dative, which depends on i/fi or on a verb signifying to
come or to happen; the whole forming a periphrasis for the
verb of the Participle. E. g.
EoTrlv avrcj 3o vXd ev c, it is to him wishing it, i. e. he wishes it.
Kal 7rpo  eo.c pr 8           o LO Ta T7' py7' s VyLwv eS for yeyeytYTat, i. e.
I have been expecting the manifestations of your anger towards me.
Tauc. II, 60.
~ 113. The Participle is used also with many verbs
signifying to see, to perceive, to know, to hear or learn, to
remember, to forget, to show, to appear, to prove, to acknowledge, and with ayyeXXXo, to announce.     The Participle here resembles the Infinitive in indirect discourse
(~ 92, 2), each tense representing the corresponding
tense of the Indicative or Optative.
The Participle may belong to either the subject or the
object of these verbs, and agree with it in case. E. g.
ME'vp.at.v.rov rorTo U rot or  a v ra, I remember that he did this;
fzvlpr)f7al rovo Tr or a as, I remember that I did this. (In the first
case EorTL770t is represented; in the second, r-obiraoa.)  08e rTOVTOV
ev Trpadovras, he knows that they will prosper; ol5E avros ev sr pd av,
he knows that he himself will prosper. AEiow TOVr E'XOpO' Ovra, 1




230                  THE PARTICIPLE.                 [~ 113.
shall prove that he is an enemy; 8eLXO(o-erat o'Trosr XeOpos  v, he wiU
be proved to be an enemy.
For other examples see ~ 73, 2; where examples of the Participle
with av after these verbs may be found. See also ~ 41.
NOTE 1. The Participle is used in the same way with
8jX'os eiL and favepos Eltl.      E. g.
AiXod r' v l oe v o s, K..X., it was eviden; that he thought, &c.
XEN. An. II, 5, 27. (This is equivalent to 8iXov qjv o rt olotro.
See ~ 112, N. 1.)  See below, Note 7.'ArtLKo MEVot AIEv Qavepol
LEr' es'"Oaotv 7rXtLv, it is evident that they came to the city Oasis.
HDT. III, 26. So with favepxov roteco: as favepov TCrao-tv rolrcr-av
OVK l8a r okXe ovre v, they made it evident to all that they were not
fighting or themselves. LYCURG. Leocr. p. 154, ~ 50.
NOTE 2. When any of these verbs has for its object an accusative of the reflexive pronoun referring to its subject, the Participle
agrees with the reflexive. Thus we may have  etl4co Af)av7rv rovro
TrertOLKora, I shall show that I have done this, for 8elw TrovrTO 7e -
7IroLtqKos.
NOTE 3. If the Participle of an impersonal verb is used in
this construction, it must stand in the neuter singular (of
course without a noun). The following example includes this
and also the ordinary construction: —
IIThpao-ro/at aes8a Kal fJerov T7r vroXeoAs flLv Kal  o v T ov  r a
Et4avrov OVbxL 7rpooqKovra, I shall try to show not only that we have
rights in the city, but also that I have suffered, &c. DEM. Eubul. 1299
4. (The direct discourse is JLeor'T 7jar 6XEas o sLiZ, K:al irgrovOa
avroS.)  See ~ 111.
NOTE 4. Some verbs which regularly take the Infinitive in indirect discourse (~ 92, 2) occasionally take the Participle. E. g.
NoLEtie avpa dyaObv a r o K T e L v v, think that you are putting to
death a good man. XEN. An. VI, 6, 24.
NOTE 5. The Participle Cv may be omitted here, as well as after
the verbs of ~ 112.
NOTE 6. When cravot8a and rvyyyYcv        -Kco are followed
by a dative of the reflexive pronoun referring to the subject of
the verb, the Participle can stand either in the dative agreeing
with the reflexive, or in the nominative agreeing with the subject; as acrvotla ~E'avrT?StJLKp;v9 (or 8LK 7//eEvoS)) lam  conscious (to myself) that I have bren wronged.
NOTE 7. The verbs included in ~ 113 may also be followed by
a clause with ort, instead of the more regular Participle. When




~ 113.]'Q  WITH THE PARTICIPLE.                 231
4?Xcv EOrLv and qavepov oTvLr are used impersonally, they regularly
take a clause with o'Tr. (See ~ 112, N. 5.)
NOTE 8. Most of these verbs are also found with the Infinitive.
(See Passow, or Liddell and Scott.) But o13a takes the Infinitive
only when it means to know how. Thus ola rOVT    o i e v means
I know how to do this, but oZla rTOTrO or ao  ) v means I know that I am
doing this.
NOTE 9. Verbs signifying to remember or to know may be followed by ore (when) and the Indicative, if a particular occasion is
referred to with emphasis. E. g.
ELl yap IeLvqo rat oTr eyco rOL treKpLtva/Lqv, for if you remember (the
time) when I answered you, &c. PLAT. Men. 79 D. OlaO' ore
Xpvra-ols eiav, a'by otXoLS. EUR. Hec. 112.
NOTE 10. (a.)'rs is sometimes prefixed to the Participle in
connection with the verbs of ~ 113. It implies that the Participle
expresses the idea of the subject of the leading verb, or that of some
other person prominently mentioned in the sentence. (See ~ 109,
N. 4.) When this is also implied by the context (as it usually is in
such sentences), the &s merely adds emphasis to the expression. Thus'To-O raira orWoS e'xovra means know that this is so; but i'aO, cs T Iavra
OVrTOa vxovra means know that you may assume this to be so. E. g.'12s Pfev E I 3 o r''ia-Ot o' p  dvYLtropeGs, understand (that you must
look uoon) me as knowing nothing of what you seek. SOPH. Phil.
253.'1Qs /lKeTr' VTra KeLVOv EY Qfdet Poet, think of him as no longer
living. Ib. 415.'s rar' e7'rro o  p o p  ev, ov ve \XXOVT' er, understand that you may assume these things to be going on, &c.'Ib. 567.
Qs f ])'l 7r oX r c co v'oa-0 riv efiLv (qpeva, be assured that you will not
buy me off from my determination. SOPH. Ant. 1063. AXoisL 8' s'
rt Cr 7l, a v  voy, Yo, you show that you have something new in your mind
to disclose. Ib. 242. AhXoSr v Kvpos o s ( rrervov,, it was evident (by
the conduct of Cyrus) that Cyrus was in haste. XEN. An. I, 5, 9.
Hare'pa rov aorv dyyeXcv  S OVK'f' O vor a, (he comes) to announce that
yourfather is no more. SOPH.. T. 956. (In vs. 959, the messenger
himself says e ioff'  I  vElov OavCratoCv  3 e 3 ic K o r a.)
The force of os here can seldom be expressed in English.
(b.) The Participle thus joined with cs may stand with its substantive in the genitive or accusative absolute. This sometimes
happens even when the substantive would naturally be the object
of the verb of knowing, &c., so that if the Ws were omitted, the accusative would be used (as in a). E. g.'Os 8   x' vTr o v rcOvy' erloaraoaOal era Xp, you must understand
that this is so. SOPH. Aj. 281. Here the genitive absolute has at
first the appearance of a dependent clause; but Cs does not mean
that, and the literal translation would be, this being so (as you may
assume), you must understand it to be so. (See Schneidewin's note




232                    THE PARTICIPLE.                  [~ 113.
on the passage.)'Q s rovvv ov r ov Tovae o-ol taOev 7rcpa, since this
is so, you may learn it, i. e. you may learn that this is so. AErscIr.
Prom. 760.'2s 7roXe'ov u  vros Trap' IvuZjv dtrayyeX\; shall I announce from you that there is war? lit. assuming that there is war,
shall I announce it from  you? XEN. An. II, 1, 21.'Qs 7rdav,uo
8OK O V, Y. OUIo(S'iO09, know that I think so very decidedly, lit. since
(as you must understand) this seems good to me, be sure of it. Id.
Mem. IV, 2, 30.
(c.) We sometimes find the Participle with os even after verbs
and expressions which do not regularly take the Participle by ~ 113.
E.g.'OvTO) T77V YVCuM7V EXETE, be's E/LOU ouVr VOVroS ~r) &v Kal v0IcIs, OTTo) 0'v byYva eVre, be
of this opinion, that I shall go, &c. XEN. An. I, 3, 6. So THUC. VII,
15. "OTav sos   or'pev o  E v T {w7rVo) i8avouvral, when in their sleep
they fancy themselves flying. PLAT. Theaet. 158 B.'2~ To-ovvv!A
a K o v o o t E v ac v, ovTUrS i8avoelOe, make up your minds then that we
shall not hear, lit. since then (as you must know) we shall not hear, so
make up your minds. PLAT. Rep. I, 327 C.'Ds ro apar'jyjo'ovrra
piie qSe7 XEcyerTo, let no one speak of me as likely to be the general.
XFN. An. I, 3, 15. Ovrco 0KOir07rt)Ly E i Ta, El TTa XO, Ka TV   TOVTOV
KaKELVcV  v -L f3 ad vr T, let us look at the case, assuming that both this
and that might perhaps happen if chance should have it so. DEM.
Aristoc. 638, 25. (Literally, since (as we may assume) both this and
that might perhaps happen if it should chance to be so, let us look at it
in this light.) For av, see ~ 41, 3.
REMARK. The examples included in Note 10 (b) and (c) belong
properly under ~ 109, N. 4.  (See also ~ 110, 1, N. 1; and the last
example under ~ 110, 2, N. 1.)




~ 114, 2.]     VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -Tros.            233
CHAPTER VII.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -Teo0.
~ 114.    The verbal in -Teo? is used both in a per
sonal and an impersonal construction.
1. In the personal construction the verbal is always
passive in sense; expressing necessity (like the Latin
Participle in -dus) and agreeing with its subject in case.
E.g.'S Qf E X\T r a croL 7 7roX oa(rt, the city must be benefited by you.
XEN. Mem. III, 6, 3.'AXXas (vavs),fK rwv OV vXav  eTaTrea -
-rreas dEvat (e.q), he said that others must be sent for. THuc. VI, 25.
OU yap 7rpo Tjs' dXr)0eias r t al Tr'  e o s dvip, aXX' Xieyo p r jro v. PLAT.
Rep. X, 595 C. So VIII, 561 C.  pai'ovresg ( o' 0rc  r L  p EpLO T.er 
arri''EXXas' daroXXvuELV. HDT. VII, 168.
NOTE. The substantive denoting the agent is here in the dative,
as in the impersonal construction.
2. In the impersonal construction (which is the most
common) the verbal stands in the neuter of the nominative singular (sometimes plural) with ea"T expressed
or understood, and is regularly active in sense. The
expression is equivalent to  e   t, it is necessary, with the
Infinitive active or middle of the verb from which the
verbal is derived.
Active verbals of this class may take an object in the
same case which would follow their verbs.      The agent
is generally expressed by the dative, sometimes by the
accusative. E. g.
Tavra 7itvy (or Iras) 7r o &77 r E v e2arv, we must do this, equivalent
to vavra jfias fIe TroL0o'aL. (See Rem. 2.) OivrEov ra8c, it is
necessary to bear these things. EUR. Orest. 769.'A raX Xa K T o
aITroE (roO oc aaros), Kal avTrfy to aVX  0 ear o v aura Ta 7Tpay/LaTa.
PLAT. Phaed. 66 E. (Aci a7 aXXaTT ErrOat avronV KaU TfjI 4Xv




234                   VERBALS IN -TroO.             [~ 114, 2.
fOeaoOat T' 7rpalyLara.)  4f Ir   8tX lX T3or0 7r'eov evaL TOLS Trpd
yiaartv vilv, that you must give assistance in two ways. DEM. 01. 1,14,6.
TL av  v      7r o t ir7eov e1q; what would he be obliged to do? XEN.
Alemn. I, 7, 2.'E*10< avaro 7roXeprTrea etvat (==8ev 7ToXEf/ciE),
they voted that they must go to war. THUC. I, 88. Tqv Xdwpav, e' s7
avTroLs 6OpO.UEOvoL. 7rO Xe p re a jv. Id. VI, 50. Ov're pL t 0 oopr77 r e  ao X o v s  Trov' cpaTevofievovs, o're  e 0  e KTer  o rcv  payiarov rX e l o o L v 7T 7rEVraKo'tXiots. Id. VIII, 65. (Here both the
accusative and the dative of the agent are found.) See Rem. 2.'Hpv 86 euvitaxot dyaOol, ovs oa 7ap aorea Tros'AO0rvalots variv,
OV86 KaataLS Ka Xoayots 8 a Kpr t a )L Xo6ya Ka' (tIias) av'roV S,3a7TT0 E vov, a     TLPt'e\ a  pra ev ra KCL a2 rarvTr a0eVE (-==  o o
8el p.ias 7rapabovvat, K.r.X.). Id. I, 86.'I r ey v  Eiv Et) Oea(roevous,
it uould be best for us to go and see her. XEN. Mem. III, 11, 1.
('H[Fas is understood.) OWbevi rpo- p ro( aJev K 6 v ras adKrTreov elvat.
PLAT. Crit. 49 A.'Arap ov yvvatKav ovaeOror' b'o'  7'rr7TT a Ea iv
(-  oV yvva&LKJV 8EL rjrTacOaL), but we must never be beaten by women.
AIUST. Lys. 450. So SOPH. Ant. 678.
NOTE. A sentence sometimes begins with an impersonal verbal
in -TOVr and is continued with an infinitive, the latter depending on
8Ei implied in the verbal. E. g.;lavTaxov 7r o 7 r 7 eo v        7a av\ KEXEVi 7ro'd  Kal 7? 7raTrpl, 7  e l 0 e v
avTrrV. PLAT. Crit. 51 B.
REMARK 1. The same impersonal construction is found in
Latin, but very seldom with verbs which take an object accusative; as Eundum est tibi (Teov eirtl aco), --  oriendum est omnibus,
-Bello utendum est nobis (rC- wroXi/po Xpq7rTEOV d(To-rv IL)v), we must
employ war.  See Madvig's Latin Grammar, ~ 421, a and b).
REMARK 2. The dative and the accusative of the agent are both
allowed with the verbal in -rfov (or -rea); although in the equivalent construction of 8ei with the Infinitive the accusative is the only
form regularly used. Thus we can say roaro 7  pv 7rolrTre0y o' rTOTO
V)f&a  rotnregov but only TOVrTO rp. as 8eL Tro&V.




APPENDIX.
I. ON THE RELATIONS OF THE GREEK OPTATIVE TO THE
SUBJUNCTIVE AND THE INDICATIVE.*
FROM the time of the Alexandrian grammarians a special mood
called the Optative (EyKXcXl- ~VKrTKx ) has been recognized in Greek
as distinct from the Subjunctive (eytKXicnL v7roraKTrKi). The ancient classification has been called in question in later times, and
-many grammarians of high authority have adopted or favored a
union of the Subjunctive and Optative in one mood, to be called
the Subjunctive or Conjunctive, in which the Subjunctive (commonly so called) is to supply the primary tenses, and the forms
commonly assigned to the Optative the secondary tense. Thus the
Present Optative would be called an Imperfect Subjunctive; troL&
and 7rotoTil, for example, being supposed to bear the same relation
to each other asfaciam andfacerem in Latin.
This was first reduced to a systematic form by Kiihner, who, indeed discards the common names Subjunctive and Optative (except
as explanatory terms), and adopts the cumbrous expressions " Conjunctive of the primary tenses" and " Conjunctive of the secondary
tenses." Rost, in his Griechische Grammatik, ~ 118, says: " The socalled Optative is nothing but a peculiar form of the Subjunctive,
and stands to the Greek Subjunctive in the same relation as in
other languages the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive to the
Present and Perfect." Donaldson in his New Cratylus (p. 617, 2d
ed.) says: "It has long been felt by scholars on syntactical grounds,
that, considered in their relations to each other and to the other
moods, they [the Subjunctive and Optative] must be regarded as
differing in tense only."  Again (p. 618): " These moods have no
right to a separate classification." Crosby, in his Grammar, ~ 591,
says of this classification, that "it deserves the attention of the
student, although it is questionable whether it is best to discard the
old phraseology."
As the classification of Kiihner has been introduced into many
elementary grammars, so that many boys are now taught to call the
tenses commonly known as the Present and Perfect Optative by
the strange names of Imperfect and Plupefect Subjunctive, the
* Reprinted, with a few changes, from the Proceedings of the American
Academy of Arts and Sciences for Jan. 8, 1861: Vol. V. pp. 96 - 102.




236                    APPENDIX.
question becomes not merely of theoretical, but eminently of practical importance. In fact it meets every student, and more especially every teacher of Greek grammar, the moment he reaches the
paradigm of the regular verb. If it were merely a question of convenience, therefore, it would be highly important to have it settled,
for the sake of uniformity.
The question What shall constitute a distinct mood in any language? must be settled to some extent arbitrarily. No precise rule
will meet all cases; yet we may safely maintain that, when any
series of verbal forms in which the chief tenses are represented ex.
hibits a closer connection in form and use among its members than
it bears as a whole to any corresponding series, it is entitled to the
rank of an independent mood. That this is true of the Latin Subjunctive is clear; and it is equally clear that the Imperfect and
Pluperfect of that mood have sufficiently strong bonds of connection
with the Present and Perfect to prevent them from being marked
off as a distinct mood. A merely superficial view of the relation of
the Greek Subjunctive and Optative might lead us to the idea that
the two combined would form a mood similar to the Latin Subjunctive, thus simplifying the Greek conjugation and introducing a new
analogy with the Latin. But it is this fatal error of carrying the
analogy between the Greek and Latin further than the connection
of the two languages warrants, which has thrown this whole subject
into confusion. When the Latin was looked upon as an offspring
of the Greek, as the result of a union of the Aeolic dialect of Greece
with barbarian languages in Italy, the presumption was decidedly in
favor of such an analogy, and it would even have required strong
proof to convince us of any radical difference in the modal systems
of the two languages. But the more correct views now entertained
of the origin of the Latin would rather lead us to believe that each
language developed its syntax, and especially its modal system, independently. The modal system of the parent language of the
Indo-European group is of course hopelessly unknown; and yet the
comparison of the Latin and Greek verb with the Sanskrit (as the
oldest representative of the family) sometimes enables us to determine special points in regard to the primitive forms with an approach to certainty. Thus, to take the simplest case, when we find
asti in Sanskrit meaning is, we may be sure that some similar form
existed with that meaning in the parent language of the Sanskrit,
the Greek, the Latin, the German, &c., from which eorrt, est, ist, &c.
were derived. So when we find a Potential mood in Sanskrit,
which presents striking analogies both to the Greek Optative and
to the Latin Subjunctive, and furthermore find the analogy extending even to the Gothic, we must conclude that the primitive language contained the elements which the Greek developed into its
Optative, and the Latin into its Subjunctive. (See Bopp's Vergleichende Grammatik, II. pp. 257- 59.) Again, the absence in
later Sanskrit of any form corresponding to the Greek Subjunctive
might lead us to think that the Greek developed that mood by




APPENDIX                       237
itself; but in the Vedic dialect a few relics are found of a true Subjunctive, with a long connecting-vowel as its characteristic; for
example, patati, bearing the same relation to the Present Indicative
patdti as Sov\tlraL to 3ov0\'rat. This seems to show that a similar
mood existed in the parent language. If this testimony can be
relied on, we must conclude, not' only that the Latin and Greek
derived the rudiments of their modal forms from a common ancestor, but that they inherited them from a period anterior to the
separation of the Indian branch from the Indo-European family.
We should therefore expect to find that the elements are generally
the same in the two languages, but that the development is essentially different; and that the refinements in signification, for which
the Greek modal forms are especially conispicuous, have been for
the most part developed by each language within itself.
Let us now examine the forms themselves, to see how far a parallel can be drawn betweeen the Greek and Latin moods. In clauses
expressing a purpose or object after Iva, oTres, &c., we certainly find
the Subjunctive and Optative used like primary and secondary
tenses of the same mood: thus where in Latin we have manet ut hoc
faciat, and manebat ut hoc faceret, we have MEvEL lva'roVro 7r o t, and
ELEveYr va TOVTO 7r o00 o q. But even in this case of strongest resemblance there is no place for the Future Optative, which corresponds
to the Future Indicative. Again, in clauses expressing general suppositions after cdv or cl, or after relatives or temporal particles, depending on verbs which denote general truths or repeated actions,
a correlation of the Subjunctive and Optative is found, analogous
to that of the two divisions of the Latin Subjunctive; for example,
in iav -oVro Tr o tj OavfLda'ovo-Lv, and el rovoro  o ol r eOavtpa.ov, which
are sometimes represented in Latin by such forms as si hoc faciat
mirantur, and si hoc faceret mirabantur, although generally the Indicative is preferred. Here, however, the analogy ceases, if we
except certain cases of indirect question hereafter to be noticed,
and a Homeric construction in relative sentences expressing a
purpose, which almost disappears from the more cultivated language.
Let us turn now to the Optative in wishes; for here, if anywhere,
we may look for the primary meaning of this mood. From this use
it derives its name; and especially this is its only regular use in
independent sentences, except in apodosis with al. Here some
have been so far misled by the supposed analogy of the Latin, as to
translate the Present Optative by the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive
but a slight examination will show that the Present and Aorist Optative are here so far from being'secondary tenses of the Subjunctive, that they are equivalent to the Present Subjunctive in Latin,
and refer to the future, while the Greek Subjunctive cannot even
regularly stand in such expressions. Thus E'i0e'LV is utinam sim, 0
that I may be; E'le y/vOLTO, utinamfiat, 0 that it may happen; whereas
utinam esset and utinam factiom esset correspond to E6Le'v and EcW6
Eyevero.




238                    APPENDIX.
In ordinary protasis and apodosis the same relation is seen. Th1
four Greek forms, ea rol v  r o V  a, e  n o I Tor17, and el Tr o L 
ore, find in the Latin Subjunctive only one equivalent, si facial.
(For the first two the Latin generally preferred the Future or
Future Perfect Indicative.) Here therefore the absurdity of classifying the last two as secondary forms of the first two, in conformity
to a Latin analogy, is especially clear. What the Latin analogy
would lead us to expect as secondary forms, the equivalents ofsi
faceret and sifecisset, can be expressed in Greek only by the Indicative. In apodosis the Optative with v'd is equivalent to the primary, not to the secondary, tenses of the Latin Subjunctive; thus,
rroLirataft i'y is equivalent to faciam (not to fecissem, which would be
roicro-a av). Here likewise the Subjunctive cannot be used in
Attic Greek. This analogy between the Optative and the primary
tenses of the Latin Subjunctive might lead us even to the view that
the latter ought rather to be called an Optative, for which view
there are certainly much stronger reasons than for the opposite one
which we are considering.
An Homeric exception to the principles of the last two paragraphs (explained in ~ 49, 2, Note 6, and ~ 82, Remark 2 of the
present work) has little or no weight in this discussion; for, although we find examples in which the Optative in conditional
sentences and wishes is used like the secondary tenses of the Latin
Subjunctive, the ordinary use of the Optative referring to the
future in those constructions is perfectly well established in the
Homeric language. It would be a mere gratuitous assumption to
maintain that the exceptions (like I. V, 311 and 388) represent the
original idiom of the language.
In indirect quotations and questions the Optative is used after
past tenses, each tense of the Indicative or Subjunctive in the
direct discourse being then changed to the corresponding tense of
the Optative. Thus, eirrev ogrT a' vaLro rIotOco, he said that he would
do what he could, implies that the direct discourse was a av 8 v top a t rotoj-co, I shall do what I may be able. Here the first Optative
is the correlative of the Subjunctive; but it is quite as often the
correlative of the Indicative, as when we say erv r  8 o  a atr o
7rtOot7, he said that he was doing what he could, where the direct discourse is a 6dv va p a I roLt, I am doing what I am able. One tense
of the Optative, the Future, can never represent a Subjunctive, as
that mood has no corresponding tense; but it always represents a
Future Indicative. Nothing more need be said to show the absurdity of calling this tense a secondary tense of the Subjunctive. The
three remaining tenses of the Optative can with no more propriety
be called secondary tenses of the Subjunctive than of the Indicative,
for they represent both on precisely the same principles. This is
especially obvious in regard to the Aorist, which has two distinct
meanings in indirect questions, - one when it represents an Aorist
Indicative, and another when it represents an Aorist Subjunctive,
the direct form. Thus, ypvo'e Tl o  L a- e E V may mean either he




APPENDIX.                       239
knev not what he had done, or he knew not what he should do; as the
direct question may have been either rti rol1?Ja; what did I do? or
TI 7rolao; (Aor. Subj.), what shall I do? Strangely enough, this
very class of sentences is supposed to furnish the most striking
analogy between the Latin Subjunctive and the Greek Subjunctive
and Optative combined. Non habet quo se vertat and non habebat quo
se verteret are indeed equivalent to ovK'Xet ot7 r7 pa&rivrat and obK
EfXov o7rl TpanroLTO, but a single example like jpcorcow avrbv EL a aV7rX eV f ete  I asked him whether he had set sail (DEM. in Polycl. p.
1223, 21), in which arva7rXevaeLEv represents an Aorist Indicative
(avdTrXevTas;) shows that the argument proves too much. Indirect
quotations and questions therefore afford us no more proof that the
Optative is a secondary form of the Subjunctive, than that it is a
secondary form of the Indicative.
Two tenses of the Indicative, the Imperfect and Pluperfect, have
no corresponding tenses in the Optative, so that these are regularly
retained in the Indicative in indirect discourse; thus esreev oTt e/axovro means he said that they had been fighting, i. e. he said eIaiXovro.
A rare exception to the last principle shows conclusively the propriety of the names commonly given to the tenses of the Optative.
The want of a tense in the Optative to represent the Imperfect
Indicative in examples like the last was naturally felt as a defect;
and in the Infinitive and the Participle this want was supplied by
using the Present in a new sense to represent the Imperfect, the
peculiar use being always denoted by something in the context.
In a few instances we find the Present Optative used in the same
way to supply the want of an Imperfect, the context making it clear
that the tense is not used in its ordinary sense. Such an instance
is found in DEM. Onet. I, 869, 12; acreKplvavro orl ovue8~ ftaprvg
r a p e, K O Lo  7 O, L r   ap,3o ad K'atv aO' TOrovoo v  oro TO ACoj3os
trap avrov, they replied that no witness had been present, but that
Aphobus had received the money from them, taking it in such sums as
he happened to want. Here a-apeil7 represents 7rapirv, and KopMLtoiro
represents EKcoAL'Cro, which would ordinarily be retained in such
a sentence. See ~ 70, 2, Note 1 (b) of the present work. If now the
name of Imperfect be given to the Present Optative in its ordinary
use, (when it represents a Present of the direct discourse, and is
merely translated by an Imperfect to suit the English idiom,) what
shall we call this true Imperfect Optative, which really represents an Imperfect Indicative, and stands where an Imperfect Indicative is the regular form?
We see than that the Optative was used in the whole class of constructions known as oratio obliqua, or indirect discourse, as the correlative not merely of the Subjunctive, but also of the Indicative, and
that it possessed the power of expressing in an oblique form every
tense of both those moods in a manner of which the Latin presents
hardly a trace. In fact, this use of the Greek Optative presents
one of the most striking examples of the versatility and flexibility
of the language, and of its wonderful adaptation to the expression




240                      APPENDIX.
of the nicest shades of thought of which the human mind is capable.
This single use of the mood seems sufficient in itself to prevent us
from assigning to it the subordinate rank of a secondary form
attached to the Subjunctive.
II.  ON THE TIME DENOTED BY THE TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE WHEN THEY ARE PRECEDED BY THE ARTICLE
AND HAVE A SUBJECT EXPRESSED.
THE able and instructive treatise of Madvig on the two uses of
the Aorist Infinitive in Greek (in his Bemerkungen uiber einiqe
Puncte der griechischen Wortfiigungslehre, published as a supplement
to his Syntax der griechischen Sprache) contains the earliest complete statement of the ordinary uses of that tense. The same principle, as far as it refers to indirect discourse, is clearly stated in
Sophocles's Greek Grammar (published in the same year, 1847).
But with these exceptions, no distinct statement had been made,
either in elementary grammars or in more elaborate treatises, of the
simple principle which distinguishes the use of the Aorist Infinitive
in 3ovX~EraL XOFLv, he wishes to go, from that in (q)rciv ed0iv, he says
that he went. According to Madvig, however, the use of the Aorist
Infinitive as a past tense is not confined to indirect discourse, but
extends also to cases in which the Infinitive "has a subject expressed and at the same time is preceded by the article." This
principle was too hastily adopted, on Madvig's high authority, in
the first edition of the present work; and, as there seemed no good
ground for distinguishing the Aorist from the Present Infinitive in
similar construction, the general principle was stated, that any tense
of the Infinitive could retain its designation of time (as in indirect
discourse) when it had at the same time the article and a subject.
The same class of sentences which seemed to confirm Madvig's view
of the Aorist furnished also examples of the Present, and the use of
this tense as an Imperfect made an exception here almost impossible.
A more careful review of all the examples quoted by Madvig, and
of all that I have met with in reading since adopting his principle,
has convinced me that the Aorist Infinitive here presents no peculiarity, and that it differs from the Present only in the ordinary
way, by referring to a single or momentary act rather than to a
repeated or continued act. The single example quoted by Madvig
in his Syntax (~ 172) to support his principle is DEM. F. L. p. 360,
10, ~ 61: Tr fLr?8e&lav Tr'v 7roXecov aX 6 X va t 7ro0opKl/a /Le'-yTOJv EOT'
OaJlielov ro  da oTroVS 7oreoOe'eras Ia aVroV' Tavr a  0a e i, the fact
that no one of the cities was taken by siege is the greatest proof that they




APPENDIX,                        241
suffered these things, &c. In the later treatise he adds THuc. I.
41, To' tL siLas HEXo7rTvrovcrovs avrols tfL  o Q 0 X1 a a t,- XEN. Mem.
I, 2, 1, Cyr. II, 2, 3, IV, 5, 12,- DEM. Chers. p. 105, 28; ~ 65,and ARIST. Nub. 268. It will be seen that all these examples can
be explained by the ordinary principle of the Aorist Infinitive stated
above; that is, the Infinitive is a mere verbal noun, designating no
time of itself, and is referred to special time only by the context,
which in these examples happens to refer it to the past. But when
the Infinitive with rov expresses a purpose (where Madvig himself
admits an exception), it is referred by the context or by the general
meaning of the passage to the future: so in the following example
from DEM. Cor. p. 236, 20, ~ 33, where on Madvig's principle the
Infinitive must refer to the past: Iv yv o lo'3ya p, el 7rpo ro  robs.roKeas aciroXe'cr6a01 *fqlratar/a0e 3o0EtlV, eKWvoyot ra 7rpay/ar' avrov,
he was in fear lest, if before the Phocians should be destroyed you
should vote to assist them, he might lose control of the business.
Other cases in which the Aorist Infinitive might seem to retain
its force as a past tense are satisfactorily explained by Madvig.
On the whole, it would be difficult to establish an exception to the
general principle, that the Aorist Infinitive is a past tense only in
indirect discourse, when it represents an Aorist Indicative after
verbs of saying, thinking, &c.




INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES
ADDED IN THE THIRD AND FOURTH EDITIONS.
Page             Page              Page
AESCHINES.         HOMER.      Repub. IV, 434 A  115
In Ctes. ~ 10.. 168 I1. XI, 21  171    V, 450 A  168
~ 114.  207 Odyss. II, 270. 36
III, 92.  115
IV, 167. 138   SOPHOCLES.
ARISTOPHANES.       V, 216.  171 Elect. 47..171
Vesp. 109..  54   VI, 113. 77    943..  227
XI, 489.  129  1478.    171
XIII, 309.  171  Oed. Col. 1770.  115
Philoct. 232..  171
DEMOSTHENES.                    Trachin. 934.  171
De Falsa Legatione.    PLATO.
p. 391, 11. ~ 159  99 Apol30D.. 35
Gorg. 498 A.  214   XENOPHON.
Protag. 310 A. 25
EURIPIDES.   P     3130.C     Mem. IV, 3,1. 7
Alcest. 386..25    317 A. 208
317 D.  25
ADDITIONAL EXAMPLES (1873).
Page
AESCHINES, in Ctes. ~ 60...143
DEIOSTHENES, De Corona, p. 255, 2, ~ 88..  8
HERODOTUS, III, 31....144
HOMER, II. I, 22........   190
PLATO, Men. 72 C.....        55
"   Crit. 51 B.......   234
SOPHOCLES, Aj. 1183.... 143
TIIUCYDIDES, IV, 16.......             143




INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.
Page          Page         Page
AESCHINES.  Prom. 165..  145  APPIAN.
In Timarch.-     203..  77 Bell. Civ. II, 91.  24
~ 99... 25  248.  199  ARISTOPHANES.
~ 125.. 149 292..  106
~ 127..  135  33.  181  Acharn. 312.. 37
De Falsa Legat.-  470.  155   816   209
~ 2       145   481.   145Aves, 6. 202
~ 145 (153).  149  697..  143 4  179
~ 151 (160)..149  712.  209  120   115
In Ctesiph.-     747..180      106
~2.   99    760.   232   280     20
~ 7...  51 786..  202  448..  209
~ 69.. 137  824.   1 69  46 1   37 185
~ 83..  7   835.  114  59 6).  7,93
~90...162  865..  191 94     211
4110.. 118  905..  157  118. 
123.. 99    907.  157, 221  130. 20
~ 147.  120   918..  202 75   110
~ 177... 185  930..  43 144 
248.. 27  979  11, 51, 105 108  69
1004.   181  1679.. 34
AESC.HYLUS.  1049.  175  Eccles. 26. 194
Agam. 15. 202                297    79
37.  1 1051..  175          68
379.  105  Sept. 38.  184.  68
1602..  135  195  111  Equit. 112.  82
253..  198  250  87, 187  696.  25
340.. 62  253    209q.   698..  05
584.. 188  429    I' 3Lysistr. 450. 234
620.  106. 462.  2     511.  47
857..     13.  220  Nubes,5..  63
944.  92, 93 70. 7.  86  63.. 7
1041.. 35 754      35   116.  51 118
1067.  211         86   125..  6
1079..  195  7          229.. 112
1170..202  1038   2211  268.  209
1435..  128  107.  4  296   86,187
Choeph. 246.  178 Suppl. 499  45  340  221
594   106  Supi. I99..  367     185
Eum. 298.. 52  ANDoCIDES.370..223
573.  69  Myst. I, 6, 38. ~ 43  68  439.  126
691.  201   ANTIPHON493          83
800.. 181             505.  186
Pers. 912..184  De Caed.  erod.  520.  174
Prorn  10. 69  p..131,36.  ~ 19.  126  535.  156
152.. 72  133, 40. ~ 87.  7  613..  181




244                   INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.
Nubes, 722..208     I. p. 15, 28. ~ 23.  198 III. p. 114, 15. ~ 15  17
792..    110       16, 3. ~ 23.188        114, 20. ~ 15     17
819.. 210        16, 25. ~ 26  51, 118     122, 21. ~ 45    217
904.          110  II. p. 20,12. ~ 8. 159       123, 1. ~ 46     183
1130..   42        20,18. ~ 8  113,157      123, 16. ~ 48     60
1141..     38        20, 27. ~ 9  45, 131     124, 25. ~ 54     84
1151.     134        21, 1. ~ 10.   45      124, 24. ~ 54    155
1250..    129        21, 10. ~ 11   137       125, 10. ~ 56     80
1255.. 174         21,20. ~ 12 10, 108      126, 19. ~ 61    194
1277..     22        23, 14. ~ 18    47       128,22.~69   27,130
1301..   38        23, 27. ~ 20. 189       128, 25. ~ 69     80
1352..     37        23, 29. ~ 20    194      129, 14. ~ 71    112
1383..      111        24, 12. ~ 22. 196       130, 11. ~ 75    184
1426.           23        24, 23. ~ 23    120      130, 14. ~ 75     82
1433.. 112         25, 2. ~ 24. 120         De Corona.
1436.. 21, 43        25, 19. ~ 26   141
1466.        68        25, 24. ~ 26.188 p. 225, 13.    221
Pac. 430.         194 III. p. 28, 5.  1.    197     234. ~ 2.     161
1179. 130          29, 18. ~3. 197       34t 5.  26        161
Plut. 210.         227         30, 10.  6      71     234, 6. ~ 26      197
603.     184        31, 1. ~ 9.   42     234 26    28      214
1027.     44        81, 11. ~ 10   181     236 12.   32        7
Ran. 1...182           32,16.   14. 111      236) 19.. 31  28
68.         191         34, 8. ~ 20   216     236 2.    33      11240
96&98. 139         38, 17. ~21      15      2428. 4 34. 
298.         186         35, 1. ~ 23    216    240' 15.  43       13
462.             186         85, 18. ~25           241 1.. 4.  131.... 609                                       242, 10.  49.     Il1
08, 509.85, 185           Philipp.            243, 6. ~ 53. 195
524... 186   I.p. 40,1. ~ 1. 144     246, 1.  63.     98
679..     93       40, 9. ~ 1.     95    251 28. ~79.   95
686..   51,103        40, 18. ~ 2.   83    257 25.95.         215
695..    199       41 3. ~ 3.    134    260' 2.  101.101
830..113        41, 18. ~5          5    268 23. ~123.       36
866..     99       42,1. ~6.10,130     268 28. ~124. 183
871... 178       43, 12. ~ 11. 119     274' 28.~ 141.     119
955..    177       44, 12. ~ 15.   111     276 1. ~ 145. 115
1120..     68       44,25. ~ 17.   49    276, 23. ~ 148.    163
1125..    179       44, 30. ~ 18.   107     284 21.   169      151
1378..    178       45, 27. ~21. 128     291, 27. ~ 190.     15
1446..    136       47, 24. ~ 2.    135     291, 28.  190      119
1449...117  1, 19. ~39. 128     295 13. ~ 201.      31
1459.         142       62, 17. ~ 43.  120     296' 24.  206      117
Tesm.372.. 179        53, 4. ~ 44. 184     301, 28.  220.     213
870          181       64, 18. ~ 50.   161     302 24.   223      117
Vesp. 283.    154       54, 20. ~ 50. 103     304 1.   228.     111
397.          185       4, 22. ~ 50.     44     313 4.   258        68
DEMOSTHENES.              54, 27. ~ 51.131       313, 6. ~ 258.     87
Olynth.;    55,6 & 7. ~51   126,     327 1. ~ 303.     5
Olynthr. 174                                   331, 30. ~ 322.   223
I. p. 9, 3, 1..172    II, p. 66,15. ~ 3  70,140
9, 17. ~ 2  *    80        67, 20. ~ 8     139    De Falsa Legatione.
10, 1. ~ 2.137          68, 12. ~ 11   206  p. 341, 12. ~ 1.   71
12, 3. ~ 10  23, 203        69, 6. ~ 13     13     341, 14. ~ 2.     20
12, 22. ~ 12.   12        70, 25. ~ 20   114     342, 2. ~ 3..   42
13, 16. ~ 15.    140        70, 25. ~ 20           342, 10. ~ 3.     20
13, 25.~15. 191          to 71, 12             342, 25.~. 220
13, 27. ~ 16.     12        71, 4. ~ 20     63     342, 28. ~ 6.     22
14, 6. ~ 17. 234         72, 25. ~ 29    62     345, 14. ~ 14  51, 134
15, 6. ~ 20.    122        74, 24. ~ 37   140     345, 27. ~ 16    20,42
15, 22. ~ 22. 154 III. p. 110, 1 I 1     208     347, 26. ~ 21  22, 158




INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.                              245
p. 350, 3. ~ 29. 134          De Rhodiis.         I, p. 828,25,26. ~ 49  29,
351, 4. ~ 32.       6 p. 197,9. ~ 23         88                        152
351, 18. ~ 33. 168        De Mealopol.            829, 28.  52. 104
352, 26. ~ 37.    158   p. 0224.4.   52~     830 8. 5 53       120
853,14 & 18. ~39    158    203,12.5             52     831 5. ~ 56.165
353, 24. ~ 40              207. 49  1.            831 10-12. ~56     59,
354, 8. ~ 41. 161',5                                      62,158
855, 17. ~ 45.     79        In Leptinem.            833, 12-19. ~ 63   95
355 29. ~ 47. 197   p. 495, 20. ~ 127.221       834, 18. ~ 66.  155
356, 10. ~ 48.    158     496, 8. ~ 129      113      834, 24, 25. ~ 67  104,
356, 13. ~ 48. 157     505, 9. ~ 157        74                       123
357, 3. ~ 51.      64    605, 19. ~ 158     193   II, p. 837, 10. ~ 5. 218
360, 10. ~ 61. 240         In Midiam.                837, 11. ~ 5     72
364, 11 &12. ~ 74   88, p.522, 18.   24. 196         839, 29. ~ 14. 218
112    525, 3.  33.     98        842, 9. ~ 20    176
364, 18. ~ 74   45, 158    525, 11. ~ 34       27        842,14, 15. ~ 21 49,
364, 25. ~ 75.    215     630, 10. ~ 49.    214                        104
369, 12. ~ 88. 183     535, 15. ~ 64      126        842, 16. ~ 21.  128
370, 22. ~94.       79    536, 1.  66.    161   III p. 846, 15. ~ 5  123
372, 1. ~ 99.    84    536, 25. ~ 69      123         849, 24. ~ 17    72
378, 4. ~ 120.     15      548, 17. ~ 104.    151         852, 12. ~ 25  204
378, 23. ~ 122     151     548, 20. ~ 104.161         In Onetorem I.
379, 2.  123    *    98    548, 24. ~ 105.   168   p 865, 24.   7. 163
3879, 15  17. 124 153,     582, 2. ~ 209 *    210     869, 9 &  10. ~ 19  153,
3881 5   1         158     582, 15'. 211      181                        164
381, 4.  2 15. 17
381, 10. ~ 130   5, 158      In Androtionem.          869, 12. ~ 20  153,239
387, 6. ~ 148.    5  p. 593, 14. ~ 2. 151      869, 18. ~ 20.   50
387 17. ~ 149.    199     596, 17. ~ 11       72     870, 11. ~ 23      151
388 4. ~150    1    14     598, 20. ~ 17.113       870, 27. ~ 25.161
388, 9.  151.     27     600, 5. ~ 22       137     873, 8. ~33.     24
388, 17. ~151. 15       611, 10.  ~9 151           8    10.  33.211
390, 5. ~ 156.     64     613, 3. ~ 64       183       In Zenothemin.
892, 13.  163. 202        In Aristocratem.. 886, 1.  14. 34, 222
396, 30. ~ 177  24, 160 p. 623, 11. ~.49, 73
402, 8. ~ 195. 193      624, 20. 4 12. 162         In Apaturium.
409, 25. ~ 221.    188     627,21.   22.    209.900 22. ~ 25       199
410, 18. ~ 223     199     629,     26.. ~ 26.193  903, 22.  34      142
410, 28. ~ 223.     23     635, 15. ~ 48.   127       In Phaenippum.
412, 21. ~ 229  31, 197    638, 25. ~ 58. 232   p. 1040, 20. ~ 5.   40
416, 7. ~ 240  182, 183    640, 10. ~ 62.     74 
416, 11.  240. 166     641 9. ~ 64. 228       In O7ympiodorum.
419, 28. ~250.      74    659 15. ~ 117.      37   p 1172,      16      16
434, 6. ~ 289        86    676, 12.  167. 202         In Timotheum.
439, 3. ~ 305        15    683, 22. ~ 188     197. 1194, 13.  35. 165
439, 29. ~ 309. 141      688 27.   205      201     1194, 20. ~ 35  58, 158
441, 21. ~ 312.              In 59ocrate.             1201, 19. ~ 58.  101
450 27. ~1 342      60       In Timocratem.,.
)45  t 27   32.  6  p. 702, 26. ~ 9. 199         In Polyclem.
De Pace.             711, 8. ~ 35       118   p. 1210, 5. ~ 12. 224
p. 62, 10. ~ 20  199,201     721, 6. ~ 64        22     1223, 20,21. ~ 55   29,
De Chersoneso.          733, 20. ~ 106.     75                    151, 239
p    90,1. ~  1.      98       In Aristog. I.          122, 2. ~ 67. 165
92, 21. ~ i       198  p, 1. 773. ~ 11.  87  De Coron. Trierarch.
98, 25. ~ 85. 205         In Aphobum       p. 1228, 28.       3       98
99, 14. ~ 38.     79  I,p. 813, 4. ~ 1. 205         In Eubulidem.
De Symmoriis.              813, 20.S ~      205 p. 1299, 4. ~ 1. 230
p 178        2         44       814, 1. ~ 2.  4       1300,. ~.8.3.   58
182, 3.  14.       22        828, 23.  48      49     1303, 2. ~ 1. 150




246         INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.
p. 1303, 22. ~ 1  163  Iph. Aul. 462.  33  1, 36..  69
1303, 25. ~ 16  27, 128  1478.  204  37...  107
1312, 17. ~ 44  20, 106  Iph. Taur. 688.224  39..  98, 99
1319, 8. ~ 65  34   995.  86  42..   43
1320, 25. ~ 70.  105  1014.  31  44...  169
1108.  5  44...  172
DINAROHUS.
1203.  179  44..  227
In Demosth. p. 91,24  72  Med. I..  177  61.  207
EUCLID.      33... 229  63..  6
79..  211  67..    142
90..  229  68..   7
EURIPIDES.   941        62  68..   172
Aleest. 11.  199  1151 (1120)  186, 187  69  7
1173..  145  75.    69
755.  11, 108  Orest. 379.  141  82..  228
758.  142   418..  135  88.  150
784     10. 142 680  *  221  84..  227
801  1.208     746.  227  85...  5
1072.   176    769     233 89..    195
Audrom. 61.. 86  770     80  94        193
333     179
1132..  119  99...   69
757.  185   1529.  31  116..  29, 151
7929   1068  Phoeniss. 92.  84  129...  193
Bacch. 343.  186  504..  217  136...  145
O19     183     895.  184  153..  208
Cycl. 131.  179  1590..  185  165.,.  81
Elect. 126   175   1624    220  165       212
335.  214  Suppl. 1066..  185  171...  131
484  *   56    1084  *  119  187...  94
962..  179  Troad. 874..  203  190...  223
967..  37                199        184
1039.  184  Aeg. Frag 5.. 104  209...  202
1061     176  Alcmen. Frag. 103  194  II, 2.  211
1124     S8  Beller.  "  294  92  13  47, 131
I"ecub. 112  231      4 
Hecub.h "112  *  231Ino,  "  417  126  15...  207
730   " "  424  45  25...  207
730.. 205
836  *  175  Hippol.  "  442  72  64...  193
1839.. 52 "  443  220  66... 225
863      2  PFrag. Incert.  1057  46  115  *.. 171
1042.. 183             121        164
1056    182    HERODOTUS.  125        207
1099..  182 I,         135..  141
1138     81  2.      113  143.  142
Heracl. 248.  85  8..  146    219
451.  179  918..  131
731..136  9        74 158 
791     86  9...  85 162         33
Here. Fur. 538  7  11.180               193
605.  212  22...  14 1III, 26..  230
746. 33  24...210  36..,  74
1059.  180  25...  151  55..  193
1417. 183  30..  14  62...  185
Hippol. 346. 190  31...29, 151  75..  20
393.. 30  31.  141  83...140
667.  180  32...  104  105..  193
606.  186  32...  145  108...  193
1307.  219  32...  209  115..  170
1410    174  33...  141  119...  48
Ion. 1560.5  34...  215  138..  194




INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.  247
III139...  7 I, 60...  107  II,36..  38
IV, 46.  133  61...  96  43, 45..  7
78..  48  66...  115  80...  102
118..  35  81...  109  106, 107..  8
118..  97  82..  121, 144  107, 108.  203
118..  184  107..  196  119...  196
136...  227  118...  68  127.  203
156..  169  120...  170  139  10, 128, 179
184... 206  128...  102  182..  204
V, 25... 204  132...  172  214. *.  204
49..  224  135...  114  236..  179
101..  201  136...  77  250..  112
VI, 9  ~..  200  17.  67, 104, 151  252...  77
12. 195  189...  5  259..  174
23...  218  150...  183  290..  190
27   *  130  151.  204  322...  143
45..  146  159...  217  3831..  178
49..  169  161..  158  864..  102
50...  227  163...  133  381..   67
104.  218  166...  108  435..  180
108...  212  174.  66,78  665...  228
186.  223  178...  92  780...  222
VII, 5...  174  191..  155  794..  168
10..  146  198..  122  III, 28.. 33
10...  228  218...  131  64..  182
18..  138  231.  172  110...  76
63..  184  282..  110  180.  48
64..  146  242..  128  192...  178
111  o.. 227  244... 172  194.  197
153..  140  255...  105  281...  102
154..  204  258...  196  288..  104
158.  228  262..  181  291...  143
168...  233  302...  112  317.  155
213..  155  322...  178  366... 33
220...  31  324.  7, 104, 182  428..  177
235.  81  338...  203  459..  139
VIII, 22..   121  344...   71IV   1.. 175
35    19  353.  985
100...  199  363...  180  191  138
143..  211  408.  115  234  180
IX, 12...  199  482..  25  238..  128
91..  228  437,439..  157
67..  219  465...   8  175
61.   19  493..  122  321.  9
HESIOD.  498...  271.33   168
Op        5.  *  *  404...  180
P7..1.  2  5618..  123 4..  17
HOMER.  522.. 68 482. 133
482
liad  524 *  68, 112  V, 66   19
1,8..  204 6  55 85.  63, 101
11..  172  60  8  127..  70
13..217  564.  92  220..  212
18...  174  80  *  114  228..  22
20...   682 82.209  273...  107
586..  221
26..  181  86  221 298..  81
27...  227  89  196  30...  106
28..  40 601   215  311.  101
29..  146 II11,3.  76  350..  104
82..  69  8..  178  888.  101
66.,  171  10..   ~  209  407.   *  133




248         INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.
V,411.   77  XIII,172.  210  1,232...  99
433..  170   317.  135  295...  76
456..  61  321.  51  390...  110
679..  95   329.  142  392...  188
G1, 49...  107  343.  129  II, 31..  182
128..  117  368.. 43  43.  182
146...  137  667..  32  654...  134
164..  175  825..  175  59..  204
177...  169  XIV, 247..  129  111..  67
229..  204   261.  81  158. ~   196
258...  143  267.  55  374..  146
329..  129   6521.  197  I, 19..  78
350..  177  XV, 70..  143  129...  76
361.   77   196.  221  205..  174
448.  123, 182  213..  104  223..  105
459.,  182  223  o.  5  284..  68
460...  196  588..  210  327...  78
521..  129  701.    43  359..   69
VUI, 28...  105  XVI, 84.  69  IV, 97...  177
303,305. 7   242.  68  163       68
133..  175  322.. 34,210  171..  99
157.    175   389..  46  181       99
179...  209  XVII, 70.  101  195. ~.  130
VIII, 32..  17  177..  45  363.   95
36.. 67.272..  202  477..  146
126.  221  XVIII, 86...177  6545  76
130..   96    333..  6  668. 210
366..  96  XIX, 569.  177  733    63
452..  210  313.  210  735.  75
IX,  42..  207  423..  210  V,  2   67
121...  181  XX, 26.  104  57     142
165..  139  100.   210  221.     104
167.    55   198.   211  300..  85
312    130, 131  257.  211  328..  132
320...  45  301.   68  385...  168
397..  128  XXI, 327.. 7  465..  184
500...  130  405.   204  473..  80
619        5    459.   76  VI, 188..  133
588..  146  522.   133  255..  68
655..  220   580.  146  VII, 171..  48
684..  60  XXII, 317.  6  280.  142
702.   128    389..  121  VIII, 20..  69
704..   26                 133..  179
X,  -9..  132XX I, 71.  180 180 47. 
100.81        274.  102  3447.    78
222..  1185  653 -666  7  352,.  107
1013454,..228
322..  118                451.  228
488. *.  142  XXIV, 253.. 177  579.   70
XI, 20..  204   489  *  204  IX  376..  168
67-71..  133 751  * 47   420.    76
404..  184    Odyssey.     475.     38
XII, 26..  69,223  1,40.  128  554.  76
167 - 172  1.      175  X, 175  145A 146
243..  188  56..   68  XI,441..  209
245      121  76.      76  548       177
332.. 139  94  5.  115XII, 17.  34
407       32  138..  204  156.    70
437..  146  205...  76  295..  170
XUI,127.  63  217.    127  383.  162




INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.            249
III, 209..  8   p. 311 C. ~ 7. 160  p. 60 C. ~ 95.  31
214..133    315 A. ~ 24  198  60 D. ~ 96.  35
215..180       Archid.       64 B. ~ 113. 140
365.      76     A70 B. ~ 142.             111
376.     77  P.116 A...  217  73D. ~157.  115
XIV, 68..177    12 A. ~26.  211  77 C. 175.  220
156.  131  126.  51.  206  78. 4~179.  222
181..   68  128 a.60.   86   79 D. ~185  140
312  *. 68  134 A. ~87. 94
333       138  138 A. ~ 107  104     Philipp.
872.     104  138 A. ~108  227 p. 87 A. ~ 23.. 151
440       174      Areopag.. 56      95
XV, 263       180   47 B.      203 104 D. ~ 110  195
457.204   147D.~39.194  109 B.  133.  160
458.. 139                        Plataio.
609..182        Buslr.  p  8.  ~ 3. 8 81
XVI, 2..     p.230 C. 47   105      Trapezit.
XV119 21.  207
168       212      Demon.      p. 360 0. ~ 11. 214
437. 182 p.2B.42.    1361 D. 3  315.  169
XVII, 21..207   5 C. 17.108    361 E. ~16. 167
250.. 71   6A.~19..  197  363 B. ~ 22.  40
322..130     9. 33.    10     LYCURGUS.
362.     78  11 0. 4 43..  191
475        92       Ev.            In Leocrat.
539..56 p.193 D  24     11. p154, ~ 50.  230
549.     102  200 C ~5. 6  17,222  155, 60  83
593..  6                    155, ~461..  30
XVIII, 132.133       Helen. 
272.. 1.217 D. ~ 49. 223  Y
402.210        Nicocl.         In Agorat.
XIX, 463.   226 P. 5 B  3     18p. 131, ~15.  168
XX, 121..   33 p.1B.3.      18 p131, 15.   168
XXI, 194       33 18. 1.8   105  133, ~45.  162
20194     175  18 A. ~16.  74  135, 4 62.   88
X201,9.     2 2122B.37   74   * 187,76    88
1362..180   23 D  45.. 118   137, ~ 78.  108
262.  34 23D.~4.. 1  139, ~ 94.  118
414..    130       Pac.          In Alcib.II.
XXIII, 43.. 146  p. 160 C. ~ 9..222  P. 145, ~ 8..117
134..69   162 D. ~ 18  103    De Aris. Bn.
309.     212  163 A. ~ 20  26, 103p. 156, ~ i.  32
XXIV, 334.69    186 D. ~ 139.  214  157, ~ 61.  123
Hymn. in Apoll. 1 182  Panathen.      In Erath.
p. 241 D.4~ 44  * 216 P*121, 14.. 161
ISAEUS.      254 A. ~ 103.  141  123, ~ 32  100
124, 4 48..  100
Cleon. ~ 26.  5     Panegyr.      127, ~ 74.  163
Dicaeog. 12.225 p. 43 D. ~ 14.  21  127, 76.. 167
heneloc. 3 10  138  44 A. 16   146  De Morte Eratosth.
Philoct. 4 35I *RS  40  44 0. 419  15    4 145
48 B. 38    23 p.9534         18
ISOCuATES.     49 B. 43    205     Or. Funebr.
Aeginet.      49.  44. 139  p. 192, ~ 22..  16
p. 888 D. ~ 22.86  49 E. 45. 205  194, ~ 42.  194
Ad.      565 C. ~ 73  181       Or. X.
Antid.       55 D. ~ 74   23   
p. 70,  115.  196  57 C. ~83. 113. 117,  25.  157
73, 122     199   58 B. ~ 86  222     Or. XXVII.
119, ~ 270..208  58 B. ~ 86.  227  p. 178, ~~ 8,9 
11 *




250          INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.
In Philocr.  Apol. 42 A.. 191  Gorg. 479 A.  69
p. 182, 12.  20 Charm.156 A.  160  479 A     86
182,  13    37     163 A    84     479 C.  12, 206
164 B.  137  481 A.   76
MENANDER.        171 E. 127   482 A.. 226
Col. Fr. 6..  46  Cratyl. 385 B.  178  483 C  189
Frag. Incert 41.  19  896 C.  144  484 D.. 221
Monos. 45..  36  396 E.  208  486 B     52
887..  197    401 D    21    487 D   35, 74
397..  37    430 E    83    489 C      5
436 B    83    499 C.. 208
MIMNERMUS.       436 B.  87    600 C. 215
1,2.  51, 174  Crit. 43 B..  70  02 B..  228
44 C..  98      03 A.   74
Nor. TESTAM.    44 D.. 177     606 B.. 144
Matth. XI, 3..  6  45 B..  52  506 C.  43
XXVI, 24.  97  46 A..  22   515 B..  74
Luc. IX, 40..  78  46 B.  194   16 E.   94
Jo. XIII, 34.  78  47 D.   8    516 E..  112
48 C.    114    617 B    208
PHILEMON.      49 A.  234    622 E..86
Frag. Incert. 29.  46  49 B.  36  523 E.  218
PINDAC.       50 A.. 159    525 E.. 227
O     D. XI(X), 34.67  50 B.  171 Hipp. Maj.
01.XI(X),34.  67  51 B.. 217   301 A.    20
XIl, 92.  145  61 E.. 14  Ion. 535 B.  139
XIV, 30..  68  2 C..  14  Lach. 194 A.. 120
Pyth. VIII, 20.       45 2 D..  14 196.  83
IX, 196  211    62 D.    14 Leg. IV, 712 E. 55
Nern. VII, 25.  45
VII, 68   56  Critias, 108 C  46  V, 736 B.  22
Isthm. IV, 16.  105 Euthydm.       VI 759 E. 209
272 E.  227    X, 902 D.  224
PLATO.         275 E.  161  XI 917 E   45
Alcib., 115 B.  224  275 E..223  XI  959 B.  73
Apol. 17 C.  181  276 E.  161  Ly 210D.  200
17..  127    278 D.   21    214       129
18 C.  116    283      75    215 B.  126
20 B.    168     283 E. 222   215 B     129
21 A.. 151   290 A    113   218D      84
21B..    8     295.. 146  Men.74 B  119
79 G  4. 231
21 B.. 151   296 D     174   79 B.   1
21.  151   296 E..  170  89 B    73
21 D. 124, 125  299A     22     9 E      123
22 B..  47     802 A..  129 92.     129
25 B.  88    302 B     142 Mnex. 239 B. 196
25 B     117    302 D.. 184     245 A    142
28 E.. 119  8305 D.  199  Phaed. 568 A.  5
28 E.  203 Euthyphr.          658 E     141
29 A..  189  4 E.. 82    59 D.  29, 131
29 C.   56     12 D.  101     59 D.  144
29 C. 207    13 D.. 61   60 A..  171
80 C0..  60    14 A.   61     60 C.  35
32 D.. 95    14 C.   95    62 C..  145
86 B..  222    15 D. 40,50   63 A.  217
36 0.   40  Gorg. 447 D.  101  66 E.  233
37 B..  42     450 D.  207    68 B.  105
87 0.  137     457E..  86    70 A..  81
39 A.   83     461 E.  218     71 0.  198
89 A. 206    462 E.. 83    72 C..  51
40 B..  219    476 D   189     72 D.  191




INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.       251
Phaed. 78 A.  94 II, 360. 140  X, 609B..  79
84 E.  84   360 C.  64   614 A..  20
90 D.. 196  365 D. 206  614 B. 193
91.  82   368 B..  80  615 D..  56
91 C.  112  372 E.. 183  620 D.  111
95 D.  154  374 D.  113  Soph. 242 A  199
98 D.. 192  875 0.. 227  Symp. 173B.  196
100 B     6  376 A. 26,28   174 D   193
101 D.  169  376..  36  175 0.  15
102 D.  217  379 B.   134   186 B.  226
108 E.   199  III, 393 E..  40  188 A  45
117 E.  198  397 D.    37     193 E   49
Phaedr. 227 D. 141  898 A..  64  194 D  139
228A.  92  398B.   139    199 A    69
228 E  183   408 0..  92  199 D.  101
228 E.  203  412 A.  38   202 D.  62
229 A. 204  412 B.. 36  208 D. 217
230 A.  8  412D..  129   212 E.37, 183
232 B.  47  415 B.. 78   213 D    77
232 E.  146  415 C,  32   215 A.  208
251 B. 199  415 E..  194  Theaet. 142 A.  120
257 C.  81   416 C.  138     143 E.  49
263 E. 183 IV, 427 E..  43  144 B.  19
266 A.  145  427 E.  200   145 A.  208
276 A. 194  430 A.  40    145 B   85
279 C.  174  433 B.  206   149 C.  205
Phileb. 13 A.  82  433 E. 76     155 A. 129
15 D.  183  439 B..  64    158 B.  232
39 0. 216   439 E. 153    183 E    8
63 A.  10 V, 451 A..  82    209 E  31,188
Politic. 264 A. 191  455 B. 156  Theag. 123 B.  101
302 B.  196  457 C.  180  Tim. 18 C.  39
Protag. 313 A. 101  473 D.  103  18 E  40
314C    225  VI, 485 0.  208  31 B.  18
316     33   489 B     94    90 E. 195
318 D   226  490 C.   193
320 A   211  492 E.        SIMONIDS.
828B    45   495 E.   197  Frag. 5.. 221
329 B   107  501 0. 143
832 D.  26   502 A.   21    SOPHOCLES.
335C. 173  508 C, D.  137  Aj. 20..  5
335 D.  173  VII,515 D..  53  75     186
338 C. 207  615 E.  64   122.. 220
339.  221  515 E.   145  281.    231
De  6ep a.  522 A     8  389.      61
De Repubica  VIII, 549 B.  129  403..  183
1, 327 C...  115  549 E..  78  496..  105
327..  232   553 A.  21   636..  25
828..  228   557 B..  129  550..  174
829 A.   220   661.  233  655.    144
330 A. 157   561 E..  21  560..   184
837 A.   163   564C     74   567.    78
337 A.  78   556 B..  194  572...  37
337 E..  78   567 A    69   674.  45
839 A.  78   568B..  221  715..  172
841B.  184  IX, 573 C  14  986.    68
352 E..  64  580 B.  183  1082...  46
854 B  *   201  X, 595 B.  208  1221  *  6 2
II, 358B.  115  595 0C   233  1334.,  181
358 0.  221  607 C.   21  1336.  205




252        INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.
Aj. 1418..  211  Oed.Col. 667.  199  Phil. 961.  145
Antig. 22.  202,229  731.  181  969.  177
41.  78, 150  761.   6 58  978.  8
44.   225     816.  44  1253.,  191
61..  149   848..  185  1342..  103
69.  62      956.  37  Trach. 2.. 81
76   o.  92  1040..  27  196.  213
91..  128  1180.  77  197..  211
97..  205   1442.  105   226.   201
98..  92    1528    63   401..  150
178..  132   1713..  176  54..  191
185.  111  Oed Tyr. 9  195  604..  78
223.. 170    129  o.  199  631..  83
240.   111    283    202   687..  169
242.  231     364.  67    801.   181
272.  155     395.  159   944..  109
278..  84    505.  145  973..  184
372..  136  543.  179  978..  185
375..  126   548..  170  1129..  81
390..  60    580.  215  1183..  186
443..  202  637..  186  1233..  32
444     113     651.  183  Hippon. Fr. 280.  172
484      93     736.   146
534..  178   796.  138  THEOCRITUS.
544..  202  834. 27, 143  Id I 4   102
647.  228     840.  20
580..  130  918.. 172  THEoGNIS.
605.  106    956, 959  231  Vs. 126.  145
666..  135  1146.  44,215  153    5
678.  234   1157.  177
685.. 170  f281.   133  THUCYDIDES.
710.  109   1232.  202 I.  219
1063  *. 231   1245   169  2.      17
1168.  179    1293.  205..  226
1173   32, 191  1368..  228 2.   194
1253.   84    1387. 72,202  3...  15
1255.  110  1391.  72  3.     223
Phil. 75.  19 4.  198
Elect. 81..  183  103... 184  5..  150
333.   62   253.   231  9.. 94
637..  113  281..  139  9..  113
697.. 134  8300..  180  10..   34
1029     184  325...  52  10..  111,223
1052.  185  849..  201  11..  137
1172..141  381..  79  12...  17
1205..  68  41.  231  12...  34
Oed. Col. 12..  204  444..  228  16..  190, 199
16.  208  493..  83  21..  130
36.  211  519..  77  21.  o  208
49.  202  526..92,179  22..  128
52.  122  b39..  179  23...  31
83.  224  567.  231  24..  31
84..  172  594..  43  25...80,155
170.  183  611.  185  27..  42
174.  181  617...  154  28...  112
176    185  674.  113  31..   70
271.  141  674, 6756.  215  35...  126
810.  182  761..  183  86..  *  215
442..191  825..  69  39..  211
665.  199  917  *. 28,145  41.  * ~   241




INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.  253
1,45..  167  II, 2.  151  III, 33.. 170
60...  206  3..  33  34..  42
67..  75  3..  70  40.. 117
58.  162  4...  155  40...  161
58.  170  4..  190  49. 194
62.  199  4...  203  49.  199
63...155  5.   162  53..  81
65..  70  5 (2 examp.).167  53...  84
65...  75  7..  220  70.  75
68.  211  8...  22  74..  99
69..  159  11..  50  75..  200
69...  211  12.  203  80.. 81
70.  27, 45, 109  12...  211  83. 1
70.  34  13  o  11, 151  88...213
72.  8  13..  204  89..  59
73..58,199  13.. 211  89..   126
74..  224  15..  7  98..  137
76.  59  18.  85, 229  102..  206
76.. 62  20.  85,59,158,229  114.. 206
76...  199  21..  167, 172  IV,  4..  190
79...  8  24..  168  13.. 155
81.  234  32  13  17..  133
83...  123 34 (2 examp.) 27,130  24.   33
86,8,  234  87..  109  28..  14, 158
90  88, 54, 150  39.  219  28.. 158
90.  143  40.  160  29..  226
90.  151  41..  62  36.  208
91..  6,167  42... 42  42..  168
91...  151  44...  203  43.. 219
91...  170  45... 46  67...  190
91...193  49,..  61  71..  43
95.  167  49.  200  95..  224
99..  131  53.  195  113. 227
101...  36  56..  191,197  115... 42
103.  140  59..  220  121.. 42
108..  36  60..  80  125...  225
111... 218  60...  117  128..  75
113...  140  60...  172  133..  84,227
114...  224  60.   229  V,  9..  61
115...  86  61...  126  9...209
116...  217  61..  194  10..  211
116..  224  62..   130  18.. 209
117...  86  63..  61  30.  224
118..  31  64..  44  35..   42
120...  224  64...  132  35..  226
121.,.  88  65..  137  49..  164
125..  224  67.   167  56.. 224
126...  81  72...  154  63..  193
126...  68  80.  60  64.. 214
128...  214  89..  46  82..  60
129...  19  92.  25  102..  215
131...  112  93..  83  105..  82, 85
132...  145  102... 13,193  VI,  2..  5
134...  154  III, 1...  201 2... 82
137.. 5  4...  74  4  211
137.  143,162  11  58  6.  42
1388.  208,216  22..  71  9. 10
140...  56  26..  42  16..  6
142..  117  28...42,160  16..  47
142..  215  32.  165  17...  22




254      INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.
VI, 18.63  VITI,  70..  23  I, 10,6.  226
18.  190, 199  70...  191  10, 9.  81
20...  6  71.. 47,109  10,16.  158
20.  174  72..  23  10,16..160
21.,.  105  77..  87  10, 17..  155
25.  233  80..  164  II, 1, 3..  152
29..  169  84.  81,197  1, 4.  95
80.  61  85..  219  1,66..204
81..  7  VIII, 9..  169  1, 8  156
81.  74  25...  60  1,10.  146,157
87     59  45.  226  1, 21..  232
88..  60  5... 42  1, 23.  151
50..  203  65..  234  2, 12..  184
50.  234  66...  108  2, 21..  11,151
54   78, 192  68..  8,214  3 6..  163
67..  42  70...195  3, 10..  206
68...  211  71.  60  8,11.  201
59.  216  74..  42  8,13...  194
61     34   TYRTAEUS., 18.58,158
61.  42   TYTA3,19.       159
61.. 146  XII,35..  109,20  33
61.  165  XENOPHON.  3, 24.. 143
66..  60  Anabasis.  38,25..  141
74.  7  1         3, 29.  27, 128
75 ~
77.  82  2     25  4..  44
77.,.  25  4, 6   214
78.  8  1, 3   220  4, 17. 26,67
82     206  5     132  4, 19...   117
988.. 36  I1,6  223  4, 22..  29
96..  3671  10i  4,22...  214
100..  1  2 1   218  5 13   56
10..  1158  21.. 220  514..  64
102..   18 *2. 2.  3  5,16..  69
V   1..  111  2,21..  152  5,27...  162
2.. 34  3,6.  62  5,27  230
5.  87  36. 63,232  6,12.  28, 131
6  ~.  23,61,8.  220  6,21.  10,67
10..  109  3,14.  229  III, 1,2..  154
11... 42  3, 15..  232 1, 13..  199
13..  111  8,17...  85  1, 14..  43
15...  232  3, 17..   62,86  1, 16..  146
17..  87  4,7.   115,168  1,20..  199
21..   42  4, 12 & 13  162  1,38..  29
23..  213  4, 18..  70 1, 38.  62
24...  219  4,18. 150 1, 40   29
27.  167 6, 9..  231  2,9.  161
28...  111  5,13.  23  2,10..  223
34.  206  6,2..199  2,25..  26
39..  80  6, 8.  171  2,27..  9, 67
42..  59  7,3...  79  21,29  25
44...  224  7,3.  218  2,36.  52
46..  43  7, 7..155  3, 12.  152
47...159 8,12.  19  4,8.  142
48..  134  8,13.   75  4,29   81
50...  211  9, 10.  166 4,49.  122, 142
66.  42  9, 13.   132  5,3.  81
9...  168  9, 21.  67, 7..  206
60..  168  9, 27..  132  5,11..  199
6      61  10, 4  220  5, 13..  152
67..  75  10,5..  11, 15  6, 18  167




INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.      255
IV,  1, 5.  194  1,4,23..  146  V, 2,12.  82,85
1, 6..  81  4, 25..  68  2,22..  219
2,4.  142  5, 12..   197  83,13...  51
2, 10.  110  5, 13.  128  3, 27..  103
4,6..  207  5, 14..  74  8, 55.   29, 130
5, 13..  108  6, 3..  129  3,5..  108
5, 30.. 29,145  6, 7... 76  4,17..   40
6, 10..  75  6, 7..  138  4, 30..  103
8, 7     157  6,10.. 80  4, 356..  108
8, 14..  201  6, 18..  63  6, 13.  9, 103
V, 1, 1.  161  6, 18...  227  65, 21...  121
1, 9..  117  6, 19..  135  5, 34..  94
2, 17..  162  6, 22..  2  VI, 1, 21..  43
3, 1..126  6, 28..  160  1,26..  226
4, 16..  223  6, 32..  201  1, 40.  205
~, 3.  223 II, 1,8.. 28,105  2, 30..  85
6, 22..  79  1, 9..  119  2, 39..  14
7,6...  145  1,21.  68  3, 19..  207
7, 26.  20, 81  1,30..  137  4, 17..  205
VI, 1, 17.  76  1,31..  129  VII, 1, 10. 47,131
1,19..  7  2,3..  88   2, 19..  150
1,26.  163  2,8..  167  3,3..  171
1,26.   1656  2,9..  167  3,7..  167
1, 28.  83  2, 16..  220  3, 13.  14
1, 29..  157  2, 20.  224  3, 17..  77
4,9...  126  3,6..  27  6,6..  142
6, 6.  132  4, 7.  29, 150  5,73.  214
6, 24.  230  4, 10..  135  5, 81.  69
6, 25..  161  4,12..  68  6, 82.. 31
VII, 1,2..218  4, 17    52   5, 82.  80
1,..  203  4, 23..  199  VIII, 1, 6.  179
1, 16.  162  4, 31.  138  1, 10   40
1, 33.  39 III, 1,1.. 86  1, 10..  161
3, 11.  9, 103  1, 1.  113  1, 43.  40, 74
3,13..  154  1,3..   39, 161  1, 44.  75, 144
3, 43     35   1, 8. 68,171  2, 21.  110
4,2..  69   1,9...  199  2, 25..  195
6, 21.  97  2, 1.  163   3, 6.  196
7, 11..11,105  2,8..  184  3, 42..  189
7, 31..  81  2,12..  211  4, 16  155, 156
7,5..  164  2, 13.  77, 103  5, 12..  137
Cyropaedia.  2, 16     218   6, 28   224
1o2,.    130   2 5..  216  7, 15   86
2,.1     32, 158  2, 26.  41  7, 23   114
2, 1      205   3, 31.  199  7, 25..  62
2 2      i. 45, 109  3, 60  211  7, 27.  206
2, 8.  145  IV, 1, 1   163  Hellenica.
2, 8.    206   1,18..  77  I,1,16.  223
2, 16.   94   2,7       22  6,..    162
3, 1.  197 218  3, 10..  211  6, 32..  185
3,3..  219  3,11..206  7,6..  153
3, 5 &6   210   8,15..  33  7,26..  221
3, 9..  210  4, 4  11, 152  7, 28..  203
8, 11.  143  6, 15.  206  II, 1, 4..  151
3, 18...   83  5, 37   144  1,     217
4, 2..  81  5, 46..  197  32.  39, 137, 138
4, 7..  168  V, 1,..  227, 228  3, 11. 39,138,207
4, 13.   155  1, 25.  202  3, 51...  130
4,14. 145, 168  2, 9.81  4, 1      225
4, 21..  168  2, 9.  212  41 8..  206




256        INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.
III  1,20..  165  I,  2,7..  67  IV, 1,..  213
2,6..  164  2,7..  168  2,3..  80
2,13..  226  2, 18..  17  2, 4..  78
2,19..  225  2, 20..  225  2,6.  214
2, 20.  143,168  2,22..  217  2,10..  30
3, 6..  202  2, 86..  183  2, 12..  83
3, 9..  75  2,46..  176  2, 20..  129
5, 9.  208  2, 55..  197  2, 30.  232
5,10..  86  2,63..  215  2, 32..  134
IV, 1,36..  199  3, 3..  165  2, 35..  46
1, 38.  10  3, 6..  207  2, 39..  80
1,38.  29,174  4, 19.   172  2, 40.  11, 108
4, 15.  203  5,2..  203  3, 3..  18
7,3..  160  5,3.  87,107  4,4.. 69
8, 2..  162  5,4..  129  4, 4..  216
8, 16..  70  6 9..  196  4, 12..  156
8, 23..  205  7,2..  234  4, 16.  68
V  1,14.   203  7, 3.  129  4, 17..  190
1,18.  178  II,  1,15.  197  6,7..  11
1, 19.  214  1,16.   199  6, 7  ~   51
2,2.    162  1,7. 37,93  6, 13,.47,109
2, 29..  15  1,18.  129  8,2..  197
2, 32.  161  1, 25..  185  8, 7   172
2, 36..  191  2 3.  31, 141
4, 7.   23  2,3..  134  Ages.  11,31.  163
4,7       33  3, 3..  225  IV, 1.  207
4, 8.  161  3, 4..  172  IV, 6.  168
4, 9.  223  3,9.  192   IX, 2.  137
VI, 1            3, 12.  3 129   XI, 3 ~.  109
1, 14     86  6,2.  126  Apol.14..  178
4, 6     161  6, 29..  161  Cyneg. III,.  196
4, 26.  219  6, 32.  223  Hier. VIII, 3  179
4,27      40  7 10..  98   XI, 15  184
VII1,234  * 150  7, 13.. 141  Hipp. IX, 2  77
I, 1, 23. 152  9,.    82  Oecon.  I,2..  188
1, 4     16   9,2..  129   IV, 4.  183
1,5..   164  10, 2.  68  VII 5.  74
1, 38i..150
1, 38.  153, 1 3.  223  VII, 2.  139, 9.   203  2, 1..  74  VII, 39.  52, 7      135  2, 3.  9, 67  VIII, 8  172
4,34.  161  3, 3      178   XII, 19.  207
4, 37    142  3,11.  192, 197  XIII, 4.  191
4, 39    165  6.     183   XV, 2.  163, 3.   40  5, 6.  130  XX, 8    77
5, 24..  228  Rep. Ath. I, 16.  127
Memorabilia.  6, 3.. 233 Rep. Lac. XIV, 5  36
m,  1, 5.  94  6, 16.  82  Symp.  II, 11.  81
1, 13..168  8, 8..  196  II, 3.  202
1, 16.. 9  8, 10..  207  IV, 6.  172
2, 1.  205  11, 1..  234  IV, 26.  214
2,3.  198  12,6.  205    VII, 2.  76
2, 6.  169  13,8.  196,206  VIII, 25  74




ENGLISH INDEX.
N. B. The figures refer to Pages.
Absolute, Genitive, 222, 225, 232; Accusa-  sense, 46, 47. With Sv in apodosis, 59,
tive, 224, 225.                         113, 114,157; see'Av.
Antecedent, definite or indefinite, 121, 122, -, Participle, 34 - 36. With XavOevs,
123-125.                                 e0aovw, &c, coinciding with the verb in
Aorist, Indicative, 24. Distinguished from  time, 34; with 7repLop&o, &c., 35. With
Imperf., 7, 8, 24. Of verbs denoting a  ouoAoXyeo, 36. With eXw, as periphrasstate or condition, 24. Used for Perf.  tic Per., 229. With 5eooac, as periphr.
or Pluperf., 25.  Expressing a momen-   Fut. Perf., 44. Primary or secondary
tary action just taking place, 25. In   tense, 54. As protasis, equiv. to Aor.
epistles, 25. In Final clauses, 72. In  Ind., Subj., or Opt., 110, 217.. With ja,
Protasis and Apodosis (implying non-, in apodosis (never in protasis), 59, 113,
fulfilment of condition), 93-102; how   114, 159; see'Av.
distinguished from Imperf., 94, 96 (b); Apodosis, defined, 87, 125; see Protasis.
how from Pluperf., 96 (b). With av in Assimilation in conditional Relative clauses,
Apod., 66, 93-96; rarely referring to   135, 136.
present time, 101. Gnomic, 45; with 7roAAaciKL or 7~18, 46; in IIom. similes, 46; a  Causal sentences, 171-173; see Contents,
primary tense, 49; see Aor. Inf. Itera.  Chap. IV, Sect. V. Introduced by Relative, w. av, 47; iterative forms in -csov,  tives, 141; negative particle in, 142.
-oeKo,/xv (w. av, in Hdt.), 47, 48.     Expressed by Participles, 216 i by Part.
-, in dependent moods, 25- 36. How   w. t(s, 219, 220.
distinguished from Present, 8 (R.). See Caution, verbs of; see Fear.
Contents, Chap. II.; and Subj., Opt., Conditional sentences, 110-121; see ConImperat., and Infin.                    tents, Chap. IV, Sect. II. Cond. Rela---, Subjunctive, 26 - 28. As Fut. Perf.,  tive sentences, 125 -137.
after eret3av, &c., 26. How distinguished
from Perf. Subj., 28. With t4 in pro- Danger, expressions of; see Fear.
hibitions, 180. With ov si,4 184.     Dative after Verbals in -reoS 233, 234.
-—, Optative, 28 - 30. After erets, &c., Dependence of moods and tenses, 4829. In indirect quotations and questions,  54.
29, 30; ambiguity of, in indirect ques- Direct Quotations, distinguished from inditions, 30.                              rect, 147  introduced by o7Tt 171.
---, Imperative, 30. Rarely used in
prohibitions (for Aor. Subj.), 181.   Exhortations, Imperative in, 178. Subj. in,
-—, Infinitive, with indef. time, 30-32.  179. Opt. in (poet.), 175. Fut. Int. in,
After Xpad, Oeanr-or, &c., 31; see Pres-  w. sras (sc. ar-corel), 78, 79.
ent. After aMLtos eClt, 32. In indirect
quotation, referring to the past,- 2, 33. Fear, caution, and danger, expressions
Used for the Future: after verbs of     of, 80-87. Followed by yj w. Subj. or
hoping, promising, &c., 32; after verbs  Opt., 80, see Object clauses; by ug *.
of thinking, saying, &c., 33. After Xiy  Fut. Ind. (seldom), 82; by juj w. Pres.
and ebrov, to command, 34. Primary      and Past tenses of Indic., 83 - 85; by 5)s
or secondary tease, 53. In a gnomic     or iirws w. Indic. (as in indir discourse),




2058                         ENGLISH      INDEX.
85; by Fu.t. Inf., 85; by el, whether,   Often nearly = Fut., 44  In the depend.
o7rios, how, &c., 85; by a causal sentence  ent moods, 44.
with 6TC, 86; by Infin., 86, 87, 190.
final clauses (pure), after iva, cs, sOrwq, General and particular suppositions, how
6opa, and /rs, 67 - 73; distinguished from  distinguished, 88, 89.
object clauses, &c., 66, 67. Subj. and  Genitive Absolute, 222, 225, 232.
Opt. in, 67. Fut. Ind. in, 68. Subj. in, Gnomic Aorist and Perf.  See Aor. and
after secondary tenses, 70. Secondary    Perf.
tenses of Indic. in, 72.'Av or K4 in:
with Subj.. 69; w. Opt., 69, 70.      Hindrance, verbsimplying, w. Infin., 198 -
Final and Object clauses w. iores and orwo  202. See Infinitive.
/l), after verbs of striving, effecting, &c., Hoping, promising, &c., verbs of, w. Fut
78-80. Fut. Ind. in, 73, 74. Subj. or    Infin., 43  w. Pres. Infin., 1 i w. Am
Opt. in, 73, 74; Fut. Opt. 74, 39.'OTrco  Inf., 32, 33.
av w. Subj. in, 76. Homeric construction
in, 76, 77. Mi (without 7ercao) in, 77.'2i  Imperative, 2. Tenses of, see Present, Perfor i7rnS in, 77. After verbs of exhort-  feet, &c. Not used w. av, 57. In coming,forbidding, &c, 77,78 rarely intro-  mands, exhortations, &c., 178; w. aye,
duced by'va, 78; see iva.'"Orows or    0epe, ie, 178; second person w. 7ras, 179.
Trtos xsI w. Fut. Ind., by ellipsis of the  After oia-' 5, &c., 179. In prohibitions
leading verb, 78 (N. 7, a)  jzr alone in  w. j/) (Present, rarely Aor.), 180, 181.
prohibitions, 79 (N. 7, b). Second Aor. Imperfect, 6-8. Distinguished from Aor.,
Subj. Act. and Mid. preferred in, 79;     7, 8, 24. Denoting attempted action, 7.
Dawes's Canon, 79, 80. See Object clauses  In sense of Pluperf. (when Pres. = Perf.),
after /,i..   7.   Sometimes not distinguished from
Finite moods, 1.                           Aor., 7, 8. Expressing past likelihood,
Future, Indicative, 36-38.   In gnomic     intention, or danger, 7. Expressing a
sense, 36. Expressing a general truth    fact just recognized, 8. In Final clauses,
hereafter to be recognized, 36. Like mild  72. In Protasis or Apodosis (implying
imperative, 37. In prohibitions w. je,    non-fulfilment of condition), 93-102;
37, 79. In Final clauses, w. lrons, ofpa,  how distinguished from Aor., 94, 96 (b) 
Esi, 68. With 8iros or O7reo yo), after verbs  how from Pluperf., 96 (b); in Hom. usuof striving, effecting, &c. 73. With orwc  ally past, 96. With dv, in Apodosis, 56,
or i7rwos t,, in exhortations and prohibi-  93-96. Iterative, w. ay, 47; iterative
tions (sc. oco&7re), 78. With F/o, after verbs  forms in -a-Kor and -cd6co[nv (w. dv, in
of fearing, 82. In Protasis w. el: ex-   Hdt.), 47, 48. How expressed in Infin.
pressing a future condition, 103; expr. a  and Part. (Imperf. Inf. and Part.), 15,
present intention, &c., 93. In Rel. clauses  17. How expressed in Optative (Imperf.
expr. a purpose, 137. With od,rz, 184-  Opt.), 153.
187. With dv: in Homer, 55; in Attic, Indicative, 1. Tenses of, see Present, &c.
56. Periphrastic form of, w. eiAAwo, 38.  Primary and secondary tenses of, 3, 49,
-, Optative, in indirect quotation, 38.  60. With dv, see *Av. Fut., in Final
After lorws or orewo ji, 39 - 41, 73, 74.  and Object clauses after i7ron, &c.; see
--. Infinitive, 41-43. After verbs of  Future. Secondary tenses of, in Final
saying, thinking, &c., in indirect quota-  clauses, 72. Present and past tenses of,
tion, 41. For Pres. or Aor. Tnf., after  after 1sj), lest, 83-85. Present and past
verbs of wishing, &c., after dore, and   tenses of, in Protasis, 92.  Secondary
even in other constructions, 42. Regu-   tenses of, in both Protasis and Apodosis
larly used after verbs of hoping, &c., 43.  (dv in Apod.), 93-102; see "Av. Fut.:
With av (rarely), 60. Primary or second-  in Protasis, 103; in Apodosis, 102. Fox
ary tense, 53.                           Subj. in general suppositions, 109. Aftes
---, Participle, 43. Expressing a pur-   Relative w. definite antecedent, 122. In
pose, 217, 214. With dv (rarely), 60.    causal Rel sentences, 141. In condi
Primary or secondary tense, 53.          tional Rel. sentences: present and past
Future Perfect, Indicative, 43-46. Cor-    tenses, 125; secondary tenses (implying
pound forms of: Perf. Part. w. Eopaoa,   non-fulfilment of a condition). 126. For
44; rarely Aor. Part. w. iso-oar, 44, 215.  Subj. and Opt. in general suppositions




ENGLISH INDEX.                               259
after Iel., 131. In Rel. sentences after a  &c., in pure Fin. clauses, 67. With T7rwos
general negative, 132. Secondary tenses  and o7rcos  i, after verbs of striving, &c.,
of, in cond. Rel. sentences, by assimila-  (seldom), 73, 74. With /ei, after verbs
tion, 136. Future after Re]., expressing  offearing, &c., 80. In Protasis iv. ei,
a purpose, 137. Fut. after Ze' uS and   91: in particular suppositions, 105; in
e+' r-e, 140. After io-re, 140. After   general suppos., 107, 108. In Apodosis
ec, &c., until, 142 second. tenses, re-  w. av, 67, 105, see'Av: w. Protasis supferring to a result not attained, 143.  pressed, 112; as mild command or exAfter srpvr, 145; distinguished from In-  hortation, or resembling Fut. Ind., 113.
fin., 144, 145, 210. In indirect quotation  In conditional Rel. sentences: in parafter oIr and E(s, and in indir. questions,  ticular suppositions, 128; in general
149, 150; may be retained even after    suppos., 129; by assimilation, 135. In
second. tenses, 151, 152; in depend-    Rel. clauses expressing a purpose (Epic,
ent clauses of indir. quot., 160-165. In  rarely Attic), 138. After ewe, &c., until,
causal sentences, 171. Secondary tenses  142,143  implying a purpose, 143,166of, in wishes, 173, 176. Future after oi  168 (d). After prptv, 145. In idlirect
mj4, 185, 184; see Future.              quotations and questions, 148; see ConIndirect Questions, 147; see Contents,Chap.  tents, Chap. IV, Sect. IV.  In causal
IV, Sect. IV.                           sentences, 172. In wishes, 173,174   exIndirect Quotation, 147-171; see Contents,  pressing concession or exhortation, 175.
Chap. IV, Sect. IV. Moods used in, see  Future, 38 -41; rarely w. o0 jGY, after &ic
Indicative, &c. Tenses used in, see Pres-  in indirect quotation, 185.
ent, &c.; and Contents, Chap. II.
Infinitive, 2, 188-212. Tenses of, 212; Participle, 3, 213-232.  Tenses of, see
see Present, &c., and Contents, Chap. II.  Present, &c. With dv, see'Av. * CondiWith av, see "Av. After verbs offearing,  tional (as Protasis) representing Indic.,
86, 87, 190. In Apodosis, 113. In indi  Subj., or Opt., 217, 110. As Apodosis
rect quotations, 147,148,157- 159. After  (with or without dv), 113. In indirect
coeXov in wishes, 176, 177. Fut. w. o  quotation, 159, 229. See Contents, Chap.;/z, in indir. quot., 185. See Contents,  VI.
Chap. V.                              Particular and general suppositions, how
Interrogative Subj., 182-184. In indirect  distinguished, 88, 89.
questions, 154.                       Perfect Indicative, 18,19. Why primary,
Iterative Imperfect and Aorist. See Im.   18. Compound form of, 18. Of certain
perfect and Aorist.                     verbs, in sense of Present, 19. In epis
ties, 19. Referring to the future for emMIoods, general view of, Chap. I. Use of,  phasis (occAXa), 19. Not used w. av, 55.
Chap. IV. Constructions enumerated, 65;  Gnomic, 45; see Perf. Infin.
see Indicative, &c. —                          in dependent moods, relations of to
Pres. of those moods, 19. Subj. and Opt.,
Narration, Infin. in, 210.                20. Imperat., 21: in mathematical language, 21; second person of (rare), 22,
Object clauses with /z after Verbs of fear-  in sense of Present, 22. Infin., 22: w.
ing, &c., 66, 80. Subj. and Opt. in, 80.  toceXov in wishes, 176, 177; primary or
Mrj and /Ai or in, 80, 67. How related to  secondary tense, 53; w. av, 59; in a
Final clauses, 66, 81. Fut. Ind. in, 82.  gnomic sense, 47; as Pluperf. Infin., 23'O7eros FL (= -J) in, 82. M  aiv w. Opt.  (Rem.), 59. Partic., 23  primary or seeo
(in Apod.) in, 82, 83. Ma4 alone w. Subj.,  ondary, 53.
by ellipsis of the leading verb, 83. M4 Pluperfect, 18, 19. Compound form of, 18.
w. present and past tenses of Indic. in,  Of certain verbs, in sense of Imperf., 19.
83- 85, foot-note t to 84. Other construc-  Sometimes nearly =  Aor. (Hlom. and
tions allowed in, see Fear, caution, and  Hdt.), 19. Expressing past certainty,
danger.                                 &c., 19. In Final clauses, 72. In ProOptative, 2, 174. Its relations to the Indic.  tasis and Apodosis, how distinguished
and Subjunctive., Appendix I.  Tenses   from Imperf. and Aor., 96 (b). With av,
of, see Present, &c.; when primary and  in Apod., 56, 93, 94. How expressed ig
when scon ary, 50-53. With'ivao, 1ro,   Infin. and Partic., 23 (Rem.).




260                         ENGLISH      INDEX.
Present, Indicative, 4. Expressing a gen-  Subjunctive. Indirect, 14! i see Indirect
eral truth, 4, 46; an attempted action, 5.  quotation.
With adverbs of past time (as TraaL), 5. Quotation, see Direct and Indirect.
Of certain verbs, in sense of Perf., 5. OfRelative and Temporal sentences, 121 -146;
verbs signifying to hear, to learn, &c.,  see Contents, Chap. IV., Sect. III.  ela
6. Of etxL, as Fut., sometimes as Pres.,  tive with Infinitive, 193.
6. Expressing likelihood, intention, or
danger, 6. Not used w. av, 55. Historic, Secondary, see Tenses.
6;   a  secondary tense, 49.         Similes (Homeric): Gnomic Aor. in, 46,
-,         in dependent moods, 8-17. 4o  133; Subj. (without av) and Pres. Indic.
distinguished from  the Aor.,.         i, 8.  Se 133.
Contents, Chap. II. and Subj., Opt., Subjunctive, 1. Its relations to the Opt.,
Imperat., and Infin.                    Appendix I. Tenses of; see Pres., Perf.,
---, Subjunctive, 9,10. Infirst person,  and Aor.; always primary, 50. With
in prohibitions w. 9zs, 180; see Aor.      or, see. Subj.With va, 7rn  &c.,
With oi itn, 184.                      in pure Final clauses, 67: after secondary
-, Optative, 10 -12. In indirect quo-  tenses,70. With 07ins and ertols yo after
tations and questions, 11  ambiguity in verbs of strivin, &c. (seldom), 73.
indirect questions, 12.                 With yse after verbs of fearing, &c., 80.
---, Imperative, 12. In prohibitions w. In Protasis w. eav (av, iv), 90, 91; in
U7i, 180. See Aor. Subj.particular suppositions, 102; in general
-—, Infinitive, three uses of, 12. With  suppos. 107,108; w. ei (wihout a), see
indef. time, 12. After xpca, Oeersi0S,'Ay. In Apodosis w. Kc or av (Hom.), 57,
&c., 13. In indirect quotation, 13. For  182 see Ac. In conditional Relat. senFut., after verbs of hoping, &c., 14. Af- tence: in particular uppositions, 127 i
ter?Aeyo and errov, to command, 14.    in general suppos., 129; by assimilation,
As Imperfect Infin., 15,16. With iv in  135. In lomeric similes after cs, sg c OTie
Apodosis, 58, 113, 157  see "Av. With   132. In lel. causes expressing a purpose
av, representing iterative Imperf., 60.  (Epic), 138  After, &.,   tl, 142,
Primary or secondary tense, 53.143           implying a purpose, 143, 167, 168
-—, Participle, 16, 17. As Imperf. Part.,  (d). After 7rpv, 145. In indirect ques17. Primary or secondary, 53. As Pro-   tions, representing Interro. Subj., 154,
tasis (= Pres. Ind., Subj., or Opt.), 110, 155. In  dir. quotations, repres. de
217. With av, in Apod. (never in Prot.),  pendent Subj., 148,160; may be changed
58, 113, 159 * see'Av.                  to Opt. or retained, after second. tenses,
Prevention, verbs implying, w. Inf., 198-  148,160,166. First person of, in exhor
202. See Infinitive.                    tations, 179; see aye, Oipe. Aor. in proPrimary and Secondary tenses, 3, 48 - 54  hibitions w. eUrj, 180 Pres. only in first
see Tenses.                             person (rarely sing.), 180, 181. Inde
Prohibitions, Subj. and Imperat. in, 180;  pendent (like Fut. Ind.) in Hem., 181;
Aor. Imperat. rare in, 181. Fut. Ind. in,  w. av or Ke, 182. Interrog. (in questions
w. 7rtOS Mu or yj (sc. (rc7ret), 78. See  of doubt), 182. With oa tku, as strong
o v...future, 184.
Promising, verbs of; see Hoping.        Temporal sentences, see Relative. With
Protasis and Apodosis, defined, 87. Moods  gos, &c., until, 142-144. With rpiv,
and tenses in, see indic., &c.; Present,  144-147, 210.
&c.; and Contents, Chap. IV., Sect. II.  Tenses, enumeration of, 3. Primary and
Purpose, expressed by Final clause w. lva,  secondary, 3, 48- 54. Relative or abso&c., 67; by Relat. w. Fut. Ind., 137;  lute time denoted by, 3, 4. Gnomic and
by Rel. w. Subj. and Opt. in Homr. (rare-  iterative, 45-48. Use of, see Contents
ly in Attic), 138; by eas w. Subj. and  Chap. II. See also Present, &c.
Opt., 143, 167, 168 (d); by dcr~'e w. In-.Opt., 143, 167, 168 (d);, by sicrs W. In- Verbal in -rTos, 3; see Contents, Chap. VII
fin., 205; by Inf. alone, 203 i; by Fat.
Part., 214, 217.                      Wish, expression of, 173-177; see Contents, Chap. IV., Sect. VI. Ind and Opt.
Questions, of doubt, w. first pers. of Subj.  in, see Ind. and Opt. Latin and Greek
(sometimes w. oQveiLe or OEAets), 182;  expressions of, compared, 177. Infin in
rarely w. third person of Subj., 183: see  (poet.), 209.




GREEK INDEX.
N. B. The figures refer to Pages.
LAyvaKTic eo  120.                       of each tense with, see Present, &c. With'Aya.rawo el, 120.                       Inf. for iterative Imperf. and Aor. w.
Aye or aye& e w. Imperat., 178, 179, 180.  av, 60. Position of, 61, 62. Repetition'A8LKie as Perf., 5.                     of, 62-64. Without a verb, 63. TaX'
Aier'vvofLas with Part. and Inf., 228. Al-  iv, perhaps, 64.
ovXvoLaL ei, 120.'Av (a), contracted for, dcv. See'Edv.
AiL6os ei~fl, w. Inf. (sometimes w. TOU or'Avacpeo, to give an oracular response,
Td), 190, 191; w. Aor. Inf., 32.        see Xpdw.'Acov'etv, aKovcra, in sound, 196.'AveXoF.ac w. Part., 228.'AhAKco/AjaL as Perf., 5.'A7rocaivow w. Part. and Inf., 228.'AAAd or abTdp (like Ue) in Apodosis, 121,'ApKeo) w. Part., 228.
137 (Rem.).'ATe, 1ae 8r, w. Part., 219.
A/Ja w. Partia., 219.                  AUTca w. Part., 219.'Av (a), Adv., two uses of, in Apodosis and'AXPL, see'Eos.'Axpj oD, 142.
in Protasis, 54. Not used w. Pres. and
Perf. Indic., 55. With Fut. Ind.: in BeXr(wv w. Part., 228.
early poets, 55, 104; in Attic, 56. With BoiAet or /ov\earOe w. Interrog. Subj., 182.
secondary tenses of Ind. in Apodosis, 56, BovAoLdv, Ie o&'o  TOUTO eTv, 229.
87, 90, 94, 127; omitted for emphasis, 96;
regularly omitted in Apod. formed by reyovevae, to be, 19.
Infin. and eXpiv, ieL, &c., 97 -100. With
Imperf. and Aor. Ind. in iterative sense, Ae, in Apodosis, 121. In antecedent clauses
47. With Subjunctive: in Protasis (ev,  137.
&iv, or jv), 56, 87,102,108; in conditional AelicKwu w. Part., 229.
Rel. and Temporal clauses, 56, 125, 128, Aevwv era-v ei, 120.
130,143, 144,145; often omitted in Hom. AiAoX e/zc w. Part., 230.
(rarely in Attic), 104, 105, 109, 133. In AIareX&o w. Part., 227; see Aavoadvo.
Final clauses after tv iSmros, io5pa: w. AIxSil, to offer, 5. Imperf. of, 7.
Subj., 68, 69; rarely w. Opt. 69, 70. AI/caloo w. Inf., 195.
Omitted from  edv, oTrav, OS av, &c., Altrep, 171.
when the Subj. is changed to Opt. At6Ot, 171     w. Inf. (Hdt.), 193.
after past tenses, 149; rarely retained,
163, 169.  Seldom  w. cs and Subj.'Eav (ec av), contracted av (a) or iv, 56,87.
in Hom. similes, 132. Epic use of, w.  104; w. Subj., 102, 108.
Subj. in Apodosis, 57, 104, 182. With'Efovko,6quv with Infinitive in Apodosis,
Optative, always forming Apodosis, 57,  without av, 98.
105, 128, see Optative; never w. Fut.'Ecet, eXpqjv (XpiV), elv, evCv. rwpoaoocev
Opt., 57; rarely omitted, 100. With an  eLKcb qv qpI-OTerev, qv or biripXev, with
Opt. in Protasis which is also an Apod.,  Infin. in Apodosis, without av, 97-100.
107, 133. EZ ce w. Opt. in Heom., 107. Et, if, 87, 92, 93, 105, 108; see'Ay. Sup.
Nei er used w. Imperat., 57. With Infin.  posing that, 115, 168. After Oavgd.ia,
and Part.: in Apodosis, 57 -61,113,157,  &c., 120. With Inf. (Hdt.), 193. Ei
159, 192, 232; never in Protasis, 62; use  yap, or ei, in wishes, 173 - 177.




262                            GREEK INDEX.
Ei, whether, 120, 147, 151; after verbs'ISiv, bpav, in appearance, 196
of fearing. 85.'I0t w. Imperat., 178.
Ei yap in wishes, see El.'ILcavd  w. Part., 228.
E& 8' aye, 111.'IKW or iKcao as Perf. (Hom.), 5.
El Uie /F in alternatives, 112.'Iva, in Final clauses: w. Subj. and  pt.,
E'0e in wishes, 173-177.                   67, 70  w. second. tenses of India  72.
EiKOb 4y in Apodosis, see'ESee.            Not used with av, 70; iva Ke, 70. In
E1 " ts be going: as Future, 6; as Pres.,  Object clauses after Xicrar-oal (Hom.), 78;
6; w. Inf., 204.                         similar constr. in N. Test., 78.
Esvat, expressing a purpose, 204.        ---, where, with av, 70 (R.).
ETTroV, I commanded, w. Inf., 14, 34.
Eit (for iees) w. Indic. (Hdt.), 142.    Ka, Doric for Kci; see'Av.
Eltrie w. Subj. and Opt., 143; see'Ews.  Kai, Kaitrep (ica....rep), w. Part., 220,'EKrV elvas, 208.                          221.'EveO-Tr, Partic. of, used personally w. Inf., Kaisot w. Part. (rare), 221.
194, 195.                              Ke or Kev, see'Av.'Evsv in Apodosis, see'Eeie.             KeKcX-rOat, to be called, 19.'Etaivr7s w. Part., 219.                 KIv8vvevtw w. Inf. in Apodosis, 99.'E$jv in Apodosis, see'Ele.             KpaTe'o, see NcKao.'Encv or erjv, see'OTar.                 Kpeiaaov w. Part., 228.'E7redv, Ionic for 7rrv.                 Kvpeoo W. Part. (poet.), 227.'Emre or ierseet (temporal); w. Aor. Indic.
(not Pluperf.), 25; w. Aor. Opt., 29; w. AavYOivw, wOsvow,  rvyXasvw, Saeree)tX, W
Infin., 193. Causal, 171.                Part., 227; w. Aor. Part., 34.'Eretaiv, w. Aor. Subj. as Fut. Perf., 26. Aiyw, to command, w. Inf., 14, 34.
See'OTav.'E7r'LoeoS W. Inf. 195.                  MeXXo,w. Inf. as periphrastic Fut., 38; tense'ErLKaipeos w. Inf., 195.                  of Inf. with, 38. Imperf. of, w. Inf.: ex-'E-7rxLee'otea  (e7ru.eAXo/al), w. 0s7ro  and  pressing past intention, &c., 38, 99; form.
Fut. Ind., 73; w. Inf., or Inf. w. rTO,  ing Apodosis (without av), 99.
192.                                   MetvY)elat, I remember, 19 a w. Part., 229;'ErrT4secos W. Inf., 195.                  w. oTe, 231.'E7riTprer W. Part., 226.                MeTaeJ w. Part., 219.'Erare, until, see'Eos.                   MexpL, see'Eco. M4Xpe oL, 142.
Evivs w. Part., 219.                     Mj, lest, in Final clauses: w. Subj. and
Ebpiscw  w. Part., 226.                    Opt., 67, 70; rarely w. Fut Ind., 68.'"Er/v, in Homer, 99.                      After verbs of striving, &c. (for iorons {/j),'E'. or e<4' Tie, w. Fut. Ind., 140; w Inf.,  77. With Fut. Ind. in prohibitions, 37,
207.                                     79, 187. After verbs of fearing, &c.:'EXpLv in Apodosis. See'Eset.              w. Subj. and Opt., 80; w. Fut. Ind., 82,
"EXo w. Aor. or Perf. Part. as periphrastic  With Subj. (by ellipsis of a verb of fear.
Perf., 229.                              ing), 83. With av, 83. With present'Eco, io-Te, aXpt, iedXpt, eiaoKce, isjpa, un-  and past tenses of Indic., 83-85; never
til, 142-144; expressing a purpose, 143,  interrog., 84. With Fut. Opt. 39, 40.
167, 168.                             --, not, w. iva, 7rirow, &c., in Final and'Ewo, ifpa, so long as, see Relative.      Object clause, 67. In Protasis, 88. In
Rel. clauses w. indef. anteced., 122,124.'HK-o as Perf., 5. Imperf. of, 7.          In wishes (with and without ei), 174,176.'HpFLOTTev in Apodosis, see'EIe.          In prohibitions, 180. With interrog. Subj.,'HTTaroxeat, as Perf., 5.                  181. With Inf., after verbs implying negation, 198, 200, 201.
~Oaaua it&cOat, 196.                     Mr ou (double neg.): w. Inf., 198, 200, 201i
eavfuaS   ei, OavJaa-arTosv rrtV el, 120.  W. Part., 200; before Nouns, 200.
O~A.etS or OAe7Te w. Interrog. Subjunctive
(poet.), 182.                          NiKac and KpaTes, as Perf., 5.
Oeoerrio, see Xpao.                      Noeiuco, oZoleaL, and  q.':, w. Aorist. Inf
referring to the future (?), 33.




GREEK INDEX.                                263'O for IrL (in Hom.), 170.'O4eXov, see' fneov.
OlSa (novi), I know, 19; see Olcra.'00pa (Epic and Lyric), as.hnal particle:
Oieogxa w. Aor. Inf. for Fut. (1), 33.    w. Subj. and Opt., 67; w. av, 69. With
Otos w. Infin., 194. Oiov, oea, ola 5, w.  Put. Ind., 68.
Part., 219.                            -, as temporal particle, until, 142Oro-' 6 sp-crov; 179.                     144; see swe. So long as, see Relative.
OiLXOLaL as Perf., 5. Imperf. of, 7.'OXtyov (Mecv), almost, 208.            IIdXa w. Present, 5.'OAMviat as Perf. (Trag.), 5.          HIavroio yiyyvojyat (Ion.) w. Participle, 227.'OXwoa, I shall perish, 19.              Ildpos (like vrpiv) w. Inf. (Hom.), 212.'Otkozog w. Infin. (Hom.), 197.          I& w. Imperat. (2d pers.), 179.'Or6OTav, see OQav.                      IIauS w. Part., 226.'07rOTe wheA, see Relative. Since (causal), IIei0, to try to persuade, 5. Imperfect
171.                                     of, 7.'O7rwo, originally Rel. Adv., 75; as indirect IIep&oluat w. Part. (Hdt.), 227.
inter.og., 75, 77, 85, 154. In order that, IIepLopd&o, w. Part., 226; w. Aor. Part., 35.
that, in Final clauses; w. Subj. and Opt., tIIo-reuo w. Inf. and rc-, 197.
67, 70; w. av and Subj., 68, 69; w. Put. IIoAAoX eiuL, 7roAAb  eyijcelast W. Part.
Ind., 68 i w. second. tenses of Indic., 72.  (Ion.), 227.
After verbs of striving, &c.: w. Fut. UpIrel, Partic. of, used personally w. In.
Ind. (sometimes Subj. and Opt.), 73 w.  fin., 194, 195.
av and Subj. (rare), 76. That (like j  H),  lpiv, w. Ind., Subj., and Opt., 145, 146.
after verbs of fearing, &c., 85. That   With Infin., 210-212. As Adverb, soon.
(like &s or OTL), in indirect quotations,  er, 146 (N. 5).
170.                                  IIpiv y' ore (Hom.), 148.'Ornos u/ (for /rl), lest, that, after verbs of IHpiv, 146, 211, 212.
fearing, &c., 82.                     IHporSeXoJLev v oo. TOUTO ro-TiV, 229.'Opav, iselv, in appearance, 196.       IIpoOrKev in Apodosis, see'Etes.'Ooov or te w, Absol. Infin. 207.        IpoaKael, Partic. of, used personally w.'Oaos w. Infin. 294.                      Infin., 194,195.'O-T0a   av y,'OaLOsS rOT' eTi'v, 134.  IIpo60ev j, 146, 211.'OTav, O7rdoavs, e7ra or enir^ (eredv), and  IIp&repov j, 146, 211.
eiresaiv, 6, 5125, 127, 129; see'Av.  IIso yap dv; IIjs oic av; &c., 63.'Ore, when, see Relative. After jmetv-jax,
231. With Infin., 193.                2wvo&ta, crvyyyvjco-rSKc, w. Part., 230
-, since (causal), 171.
O0Tt, that, in indirect quotations, 147: w. T&X' av, 64.
Ind. and Opt., 148, 149, 150 i w. Ind. or TeOvrceiva, to be dead, 19.
Opt. r. dv, 156. Before direct quot., 171. -r'o (-reov, -ra), Verbal in, 3, 233, 234 
--, because (causal), 171-173, see     see Contents, Chapter VII.
Contents, Chap. IV., Sect. V.; after verbs Ti UAeeE; 38.
of fearing, 86.                        Ti eaeOY; Ti nraeOv; wherefore? 221,'O Tt rOT' esari,'Ocr-Tt  or' eo-riv, &c., 134.  222.
Ov, after /i, lest, 67, 80. In Apodosis, 88; Ti 7ra0w; 183, 184.
rarely in Protasis, 88 (N.).  In Rel. Tira (in tragedy) as Perf., 5.
clauses w. def. anteced., 122. In causal Tb vvv eivak, 208.
Rel. clauses, 142 (R.). In indirect dis-  Tvyxiav w. Part., 227; see Aaveovo.
course, 149.
OncM av Qeivote (0dvoTer), 228.'Yarepov lf w. Infin., 211.
Oujc olSa av el, 62.
Ov f44, 184-187; see Contents, Chapter iavepos eixt w. Part., 230. iavepbv wouw
IV., Section VIII. Dawes's Canon on,    w. Part., 230.
79, 80.'  epe w. Imperat., 178, 179,180.
Oiveca, because, 171.                    evlyw as Perf., 5.
OVThr, implying a Protasis, 110. With Opt.  bqjueLi w. Aor. Inf. for Put. (?), 33.
in protestations, 175.  Referring to a i O6avo w. Part., 227; see AavOi4vo. BOwiv
Participle, 218                      |     w. Infin. (Hdt.), 212.




264                          GREEK INDEX.
Xpao, tvactpc4o, Oewfrlo, w. Pres. or Aor.'fQs, because, 171-173.
Inf., 13, 31; sometimes w. Fut. Inf., 13. --, in wishes: w. Opt., 175; w. io4e.ov,
177. With Inf., 206, 207, 208. With'a2, originally Rel. Adv., 75 (R.). In order  Partic., 219, 220, 225, 231, 232; w. Part.
that, that, in Final clauses: w. Subj.  and av 232.
and Opt., 67, 70; w. av and Subj., 68, 69;'QUTrep w. Partic., 219, 222, 225.
w. Fut. Ind., 68; w. second. tenses of'2lTrrep v el (o-r-repavei), 63, 116.
Indic., 72. Sometimes (for 7rons) after'fo-re, so that, w. Indio., 140. With Inf.,
verbs of striving, &c., 77 (N. 4); Ho-  205; after verbs and adject. which commeric construction of, with Subj. or Opt.,  monly take Inf. alone, 206 (N. 2.), 205.
76 (N. 2.). Sometimes (for V/A) after  With Opt., Indic., or Inf. w. av, 141, 207.
verbs of fearing, 85.                   With Imperat., 141.
---, when, see Relative  With Infln., --, in Homer, = (o5rorep, as if, 207. In
193.                                    Hdt., w. Partic.,= a-re, 219, 223.
-,  that, in indirect quotation (like 8n),'fleXov or 40esAov in wishes, 98, 118,
147,148,149, 150. Once w. Subj. for Fut.  177..Id. (Hom.), 78,171.
THE END.
Cambridge: Stereotyped and Printed by Welch, Bigelow, & Co.




GREEK.
GOODWIN'S GREEK GRAMMAR. By WILLIAM W.
GOODWIN, Ph. D., Eliot Professor of Greek Literature in Harvard University.
12mo. Half morocco. 262 pages.                                         1.18
The object of this Grammar is to state general principles clearly and distinctly,
with special regard to those who are preparing for college. In the sections on the
Moods are stated, for the first time in an elementary form, the principles which are
elaborated in detail in the author's " Syntax of the Greek Moods and Tenses."
GREEK MTOODS AND                     TENSES. The Sixth Edition.
By WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, Eliot Professor of Greek Literature in Harvard University. 1 vol. 12mo. Cloth. 264 pages..                            1.31
This work was first published in 1860, and it appeared in a new form - much enlarged and in great part rewritten -in 1865. In the present edition the whole has
been again revised; some sections and notes have been rewritten, and a few notes
have been added. The object of the work is to give a plain statement of the principles which govern the construction of the Greek Moods and Tenses, - the most important and the most difficult part of Greek Syntax.
GOODWIN'S GREEK READER. Consisting of Extracts
from Xenophon, Plato, IHerodotus, and Thucydides; being the full amount of
Greek Prose required for admission at IIarvard. With Maps, Notes, References
to GOODWIN'S GREEK GRAMMAI, and parallel References to CROSBY'S and
HADLEY'S GRAMMARS. Second edition, edited by PROFEssoR W. W. GOODWIN, of Harvard College. 12mo. Half morocco. 384 pages.... 1.50
The revised edition contains the first and second books of the Anabasis (in place
of the third and fourth books of the former editions) with copious notes, the greater
part of the second book and an extract from the seventh of the Iellenica, with the
first chapter of the Memorabilia, of Xenophon; the last part of the Apology, and the
beginning and end of the Phaedo, of Plato; selections from the sixth, seventh, and
eighth books of Herodotus, and from the fourth book of Thucydides.
GOODWIN'S SELECTIONS FROM XENOPHON
AND HERODOTUS. With Notes adapted to Goodwin's Greek Grammar,
Parallel References to Crosby's and Hadley's Grammars, and copper-plate
Maps. Edited by PROFESSOR W. W. GOODWIN and JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE, of
Harvard College. 12mo. Half morocco. 408 pages...50
This book contains the first four books of the Anabasis, and the greater part of
the second book of the Hellenica, of Xenophon; and extracts from the sixth, seventh,
and eighth books of Herodotus. It has been prepared for the use of those who from
want of time or for other reasons are unable to read the greater variety of selections
in Greek Prose which are contained in Goodwin's Greek Reader.
THE FIRST FOUR BOOKS OF THE ANABASIS
OF XENOPHON. Edited, with copious Notes and References to Goodwin's
Greek Grammar, Parallel References to Crosby's and Hadley's Grammars, and
a copper-plate Map, by PROFESSOR W. W. GOODWIN and JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE,
of Harvard College. 12mo. Half morocco, 240 pages...                94
LEIGHTON'S GREEK LESSONS. Prepared to accompany
Goodwin's Greek Grammar. By R. F. LEIGHTON, Master of Melrose High School.
12mo. Half morocco. 264 pages..                                     1.18
This work contains about one hundred lessons, with a progressive series of exercises (both Greek and English), mainly selected from the first book of Xenophon's
Anabasis. The exercises on the Moods are sufficient, it is believed, to develop the
general principles as stated in the Grammar. The text of four chapters of the
Anabasis is given entire, with notes and references. Full vocabularies accompany
the book.
7




LIDDELL & SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON. Abridged from the new Oxford Edition. New Edition. W'ith Appendix
of Proper and Geographical Names, by J. M. WHIToN. Square 12mo. 835 pages.
Morocco back.......$ 2 25
Sheep binding......                                2.60
LIDDELL & SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON. The sixth Oxford Edition unabridged. 4to. 1,881 pages.
Morocco back...... 10.00
Sheep binding.....                                         11.00
The English editions of Liddell & Scott are not stereotyped; but each has been
thoroughly revised, enlarged, and printed anew. The sixth edition, published in 1869,
is larger by one eighth than the fifth, and contains 1,865 pages. It is an entirely different work from the first edition, the whole department of etymology having been
rewritten in the light of modern investigations, and the forms of the irregular verbs
being given in greater detail by the aid of Veitch's Catalogue. No student of Greek
can afford to dispense with this invaluable Lexicon, the price of which is now for the
first time brought within the means of the great body of American scholars.
PLATO'S APOLOGY OF SOCRATES AND CRITO.
Edited by JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE, Ph. D., Assistant Professor of Greek in
Harvard University.
The basis of this work will be the German edition of Dr. Christian Cron. (Platons
Vertheidigungsrede des Sokrates und Kriton. Sechste Auflage. Leipzig, Teubner,
1875.) To the matter contained in Dr. Cron's edition there will be added notes by
the Editor and from other sources, analyses, and extended references to Goodwin
and Hadley. The book will be for the class-room, and all matter not of direct value
to the student will be rigidly excluded.
THE (EDIPUS TYRANNUS OF SOPHOCLES. Edited, with an Introduction, Notes, and full explanation of the metres, by JOHN
WILLIAMS WHITE, Ph. D., Assistant Professor of Greek in Harvard University.
12mo. Cloth. 219 pages.......... 112
THE MEDEA OF EURIPIDES. Edited, with Notes and
an Introduction, by FREDERIC D. ALLEN, Ph. D., Professor in the University of
Cincinnati. 12mo. Cloth. 141 pages..                                  94
SIDGWICK'S               INTRODUCTION                  TO       GREEK
PROSE COMPOSITION. 12mo. Cloth. 280 pages... 1.75
WHITE'S FIRST LESSONS IN GREEK. Prepared
to accompany Goodwin's Greek Grammar, and designed as an Introduction to
his Greek Reader. By JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE, Ph. D., Assistant Professor of
Greek in Harvard University. 12mo. Half morocco. 305 pages...1.18
A series of seventy-five lessons with progressive Greek-English and English-Greek
exercises. Followed by a series of additional exercises on Forms, and complete
vocabularies.
WHITON'S SELECT ORATIONS OF LYSIAS. Comprising the Defence of Mantitheus, the Oration against Eratosthenes, the
Reply to "' The Overthrow of the Democracy," and the Areopagitic Oration
concerning the Sacred Olive-Trunk. Edited by JAMES MORRIS WHITON, Ph. D.
12mo. 151 pages......                            94
The grammatical notes deal almost wholly with the syntax, -as befits a work of
this grade, -and have been prepared with a special aim to elucidate the usage of
the verb. References are made, for the most part, to Goodwin's Greek Moods and
Tenses, and Goodwin's and Hadley's Grammars.
YONGE'S ENGLISH-GREEK LEXICON. Square
12mo. Cloth. 483 pages.....                        3.00
8